Introduction to Psychology
Adapted by Martha Lally and Suzanne Valentine-FrenchIntroduction to Psychology
Adapted by: College of Lake County Faculty: Martha Lally and Suzanne
Valentine-French(Revised July 2018, 2017, 2016, 2015, 2014)
This project was funded by a grant from the College of Lake County Foundation.
Adapted College of Lake County text can be found at:
http://dept.clcillinois.edu/psy/IntroductionToPsychologyText.pdf
Original text materials for Introduction to Psychology by Stangor 2011 (non-HCC version) at:
http://www.saylor.org/site/textbooks/Introduction%20to%20Psychology.pdf

Adapted by: Houston Community College Faculty: Carol Laman, Sandra Greenstone, Huong Ho,
Jennifer Suarez, Sheila Weick, Kenneth Woodruff, Robert Morecook, Eileen Mello, Saundra Boyd, Ilija
Gallego, Karen Saenz (Revised May, 2013).
Houston Community College 2013 revision for Introduction to Psychology by Stangor, 2011 at:
http://learning.hccs.edu/faculty/robert.morecook/free-psychology-2301-textbook-dsm-5-version-2013

Original Publication Under the following license:

This work is licensed under theCreative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 unported license to view a copy of thislicense, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 171
Second Street, Suite 300, San Francisco, California, 94105, USA.

2

Table of Contents•

Chapter 1 -- Introducing Psychology•

Chapter 2 -- Psychological Science•

Chapter 3 – Brain and Behavior•

Chapter 4 – Learning•

Chapter 5 – Memory and Cognition•

Chapter 6 – Intelligence and Language•

Chapter 7 – Lifespan Development•

Chapter 8 – Personality•

Chapter 9 – Social Psychology•

Chapter 10 – Defining Psychological Disorders•

Chapter 11 – Treating Psychological Disorders

3

Contents...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Introduction to Psychology ........................................................................................................................... 2
Table of Contents ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Chapter 1 Introducing Psychology................................................................................................................. 7
Psychology as a Science............................................................................................................................. 8
The Evolution of Psychology: Central Questions, History, and Contemporary Perspectives ......... 12
The Many Disciplines of Psychology ..................................................................................................... 27
Chapter 2 Psychological Science.................................................................................................................. 36
Psychologists Use the Scientific Method to Guide Their Research ..................................................... 37
Psychologists Use Descriptive, Correlational, and Experimental Research Designs to Understand
Behavior ................................................................................................................................................. 45
Factors that Contribute to Credible Research ..................................................................................... 56
Chapter 3 Brain and Behavior ..................................................................................................................... 64
The Neuron Is the Building Block of the Nervous System................................................................... 64
The Brain ................................................................................................................................................ 71
Psychologists Study the Brain Using Many Different Methods ........................................................... 81
The Nervous System and the Endocrine System ................................................................................. 86
Sleeping and Dreaming ......................................................................................................................... 92
Chapter 4 Learning .................................................................................................................................... 108
Classical Conditioning ......................................................................................................................... 109
Operant Conditioning ......................................................................................................................... 116
Cognition and Conditioning ................................................................................................................ 124
Other Forms of Learning based on Cognition ................................................................................... 125
Chapter 5 Memory and Cognition ............................................................................................................. 137
Encoding and Storage: How Our Perceptions Become Memories .................................................... 138
Retrieval ............................................................................................................................................... 150
The Biology of Memory ....................................................................................................................... 152
Cues to Improving Memory................................................................................................................. 155
Cognition and Cognitive Biases .......................................................................................................... 158
Problem-Solving Strategies ................................................................................................................. 168
Chapter 6 Intelligence and Language ........................................................................................................ 176
Defining and Measuring Intelligence .................................................................................................. 176
Group Differences in Intelligence ....................................................................................................... 187
The Development and Use of Language ............................................................................................. 194
4

Chapter 7 Lifespan Development .............................................................................................................. 213
Conception and Prenatal Development .............................................................................................. 214
Physical Development across the Lifespan ....................................................................................... 218
Cognitive Development across the Lifespan ..................................................................................... 223
Social Development across the Lifespan ............................................................................................ 235
Chapter 8 Personality ................................................................................................................................ 255
Personality as Traits ........................................................................................................................... 255
Studying the Nature of Personality .................................................................................................... 259
Studying the Nurture of Personality .................................................................................................. 266
Personality Assessment......................................................................................................................... 271
Chapter 9 Social Psychology ...................................................................................................................... 287
Social Cognition ................................................................................................................................... 287
Social Influences .................................................................................................................................. 295
Social Relationships ............................................................................................................................ 311
Chapter 10 Defining Psychological Disorders ............................................................................................ 331
Defining a Disorder .............................................................................................................................. 332
Anxiety, OCD, and PTSD ....................................................................................................................... 337
Depressive and Bipolar Disorders ...................................................................................................... 344
Schizophrenia ...................................................................................................................................... 351
Personality Disorders .......................................................................................................................... 356
Disorders Originating in Childhood ................................................................................................... 361
Chapter 11 Treating Psychological Disorders............................................................................................. 374
Psychotherapy ..................................................................................................................................... 375
Biomedical Therapy ............................................................................................................................ 385
Social and Community Therapy ......................................................................................................... 392
Eclectic Approach to Therapy and Seeking Treatment .................................................................... 397

5

6

Chapter 1 Introducing Psychology
Learning Objective
1. Define psychology.
Psychology is the scientific study of mind (mental processes) and behavior. The word
“psychology” comes from the Greek words “psyche,” meaning life, and “logos,” meaning
explanation.
Because we are frequently exposed to the work of
psychologists in our everyday lives, we all havean idea about what psychology is and what
psychologists do. In many ways your conceptions
are correct. Psychologists do work in forensic
fields, and they do provide counseling andtherapy for people in distress. But there are
hundreds of thousands of psychologists in theworld, and many of them do other types of work
Many psychologists work in research laboratories,
hospitals, and other field settings where they
study the behavior of humans and animals.
Psychologists also work in schools andbusinesses, and they use a variety of methods,
including observation, questionnaires, interviews,
and laboratory studies, to help them understandbehavior.
This chapter provides an introduction to the broad
field of psychology and the many approaches thatpsychologists take to understanding humanbehavior. We will consider how psychologists
Figure 1.1
conduct scientific research. We will look at some
Psychology is in part the study of behavior. Why
do you think these people are behaving the wayof the most important approaches used and topics
they are?
studied by psychologists. We will consider thevariety of fields in which psychologists work andSources: “The Robot: It's not a dance, it's a lifestyle!” photo courtesy of Alla,
http://www.flickr.com/photos/alla2/2481846545/. Other photos © Thinkstock.
the careers that are available to people withpsychology degrees. You may find that at least
some of your preconceptions about psychology will be challenged and changed, and you willlearn that psychology is a field that will provide you with new ways of thinking about your own
thoughts, feelings, and actions.

7

Psychology as a Science
Learning Objective
1. Describe the differences among opinions, values and facts, and explain how thescientific method is used to provide evidence for facts.
Despite the differences in their interests, areas of study, and approaches, all psychologists have
one thing in common: They rely on the scientific method. Research psychologists use scientificmethods to create new knowledge about the causes of behavior. Practitioners, such as clinical,
counseling, industrial-organizational, and school psychologists, primarily use existing research
to help solve problems.
In a sense all humans are scientists. We all have an interest in asking and answering questions
about our world. We want to know why things happen, when and if they are likely to happen
again, and how to reproduce or change them. Such knowledge enables us to predict our own
behavior and that of others. We may even collect data, or any information collected throughformal observation or measurement, to aid us in this undertaking. It has been argued that people
are “everyday scientists” who conduct research projects to answer questions about behavior(Nisbett & Ross, 1980). When we perform poorly on an important test, we try to understandwhat caused our failure to remember or understand the material and what might help us do betterthe next time. When our good friends Monisha and Charlie break up, we try to determine what
happened. When we think about the rise of terrorism around the world, we try to investigate thecauses of this problem by looking at the terrorists themselves, the situation, and others’
responses.

The Problem of Intuition
The results of these “everyday” research projects can teach us many principles of humanbehavior. We learn through experience that if we give someone bad news, he or she may blame
us even though the news was not our fault. We learn that people may become depressed after
they fail at an important task. We see that aggressive behavior occurs frequently in our society,and we develop theories to explain why this is so. These insights are part of everyday social life.
In fact, much research in psychology involves the scientific study of everyday behavior (Heider,
1958; Kelley, 1967).
Unfortunately, the way people collect and interpret data in their everyday lives is not always
scientific. Often, when one explanation for an event seems “right,” we adopt that explanation as
the truth. However, this reasoning is more intuitive than scientific. Intuition is thinking that ismore experiential, emotional, automatic, and unconscious, and does not lead to careful analysisof all the variables in a situation (Kahneman, 2011). Other explanations might be possible andand even more accurate. For example, eyewitnesses to violent crimes are often extremely
confident in their identifications of criminals. But research finds that eyewitnesses are just as8

confident when they are wrong as when they are right (Cutler & Wells, 2009; Wells & Hasel,2008). People may also believe in extrasensory perception (ESP), or the predictions of astrology,
when there is no evidence for either (Gilovich, 1993). Furthermore, psychologists have also
found that there are a variety of biases that can influence our perceptions. These biases lead us
to draw faulty conclusions (Fiske & Taylor, 2007; Hsee & Hastie, 2006). In addition, mostindividuals listen to people they know and trust to give them accurate information rather thandoing research to determine what scientific studies show. In summary, accepting explanations
for events without testing them thoroughly may lead us to think that we know the causes ofthings when we really do not.

Hindsight Bias
Once we learn about the outcome of a given event, such as when we read about the results of a
research project, we frequently believe that we would have been able to predict the outcome
ahead of time. For instance, if half of a class of students is told that research concerning
attraction between people has demonstrated that “opposites attract” and the other half is told that
research has demonstrated that “birds of a feather flock together,” most of the students willreport believing that the outcome that they just read about is true, and that they would havepredicted the outcome before they had read about it. Of course, both of these contradictory
outcomes cannot be true. In fact, psychological research finds that “birds of a feather flock
together” is generally the case. The problem is that just reading a description of research findings
leads us to think of the many cases we know that support the findings, and thus makes themseem believable. The tendency to think that we could have predicted something that has alreadyoccurred that we probably would not have been able to predict is called the hindsight bias.

Why Psychologists Rely on Empirical Methods
All scientists, whether they are physicists, chemists, biologists, or psychologists, use empiricalresearch to study the topics that interest them. We can label the scientific method as the set ofassumptions, rules, and procedures that scientists use to conduct empirical research. Empiricalresearch methods include collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data, reaching conclusions, andsharing information.

Figure 1.2
Psychologists use a variety of techniques to measure and understand human behavior.
Sources: Poster photo courtesy of Wesleyan University, http://newsletter.blogs.wesleyan.edu/files/2009/04/psychposter11.jpg. Language lab
http://psychology.evansville.edu/langlab.jpg. Other photo © Thinkstock.

9

photo courtesy of Evansville University,

Although scientific research is an important method of studying human behavior, not allquestions can be answered using scientific approaches. Statements that cannot be objectively
measured or objectively determined to be true or false are not within the domain of scientificinquiry. Scientists generally do not attempt to prove values, beliefs, or opinions to be true or
false. Values are personal statements such as “Abortion should not be permitted in thiscountry.” Religious beliefs include statements such as “I will go to heaven when I die.”Opinions are individual ideas such as “It is important to study psychology.” Facts are objective
statements determined to be accurate through empirical study. The following are two examplesof facts. “There were more than 21,000 homicides in the United States in 2009.” “Researchdemonstrates that individuals who are exposed to highly stressful situations over long periods oftime develop more health problems than those who are not.”Because values cannot be either true or false, science cannot prove or disprove them.
Nevertheless, as shown in Table 1.1, research can sometimes provide facts that can help people
develop their values. For instance, scientists may be able to objectively measure the effect of
capital punishment on the crime rate in the United States. This factual information can andshould be made available to help people formulate their values about capital punishment. People
also use values to decide which research is appropriate or important to conduct. For instance, theU.S. government has recently provided funding for research on HIV, AIDS, and terrorism, while
denying funding for some research using human stem cells.
Table 1.1 Examples of Values and Facts in Scientific Research
Personal value

Scientific fact

The United States government should provide The U.S. government paid $32 billion in benefits in 2016.
financial assistance to its citizens.

Handguns should be outlawed.

There were 33,599 deaths caused by handguns in the United States in2014.

Blue is my favorite color.

More than 35% of college students indicate that blue is their favorite
color.

It is important to quit smoking.

Smoking increases the incidence of cancer and heart disease.

Scientific procedures do not necessarily guarantee that the answers to questions will be unbiased.
However, since information from scientific research is shared, knowledge is continuallychallenged. New research follows, and scientific facts can be modified when new evidence isfound. Particularly in fields involving human behavior, scientists may find it necessary to update
their research on a regular basis. Norms for behavior 50 years ago may no longer be “facts”
today. Cell phones and the internet are now part of everyday communications. Psychologists
must update their research on relationships to include online dating, multitasking, and cyberbullying.

10

The Challenges of Studying Psychology
Psychological experiences are extremely complex. The questions psychologists pose are asdifficult as those posed by other scientists, if not more so (Wilson, 1998). A major goal of
psychology is to predict behavior by understanding its causes. Making predictions is difficult
because people vary and respond differently in different situations. Individual differences are
the variations among people on physical or psychological dimensions. For example, mostpeople experience negative events at some time in their lives. Some individuals handle thechallenges, while other people develop symptoms of a major depression. Other important
individual differences, that we will discuss in the chapters to come, include differences in
intelligence, self-esteem, anxiety, and aggression.
Because of individual differences, we cannot always predict who will become aggressive or who
will perform best on the job. The predictions made by psychologists (and most other scientists)are only probabilities. We can say, for instance, that people who score higher on an intelligencetest will, on average, do better at school. However, we cannot make very accurate predictions
about exactly how any one person will perform.
There is an additional reason that predictions are difficult. Human behavior is influenced bymore than one variable at a time, and these factors occur at different levels of explanation. For
instance, depression is caused by genetic factors, personal factors, and cultural factors. You
should always be skeptical about people who attempt to explain important human behaviors,such as violence or depression, in terms of a single cause.
Furthermore, these multiple causes are not independent of one another and when one cause ispresent, other causes tend to be present as well. This overlap makes it difficult to pinpoint whichcause or causes are operating. For instance, some people may be depressed because of biologicalimbalances in neurotransmitters in their brain. The resulting depression may lead them to act
more negatively toward other people around them. This then leads those other people to respond
more negatively to them, which then increases their depression. As a result, the biologicaldeterminants of depression become intertwined with the social responses of other people,
making it difficult to disentangle the effects of each cause.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•

Psychology is the scientific study of mind and behavior.
Though it is easy to think that everyday situations have commonsense answers, scientificstudies have found that people are not always as good at predicting outcomes as they
think they are.
The hindsight bias leads us to think that we could have predicted events that we could nothave predicted.
People are frequently unaware of the causes of their own behaviors.
Psychologists use the scientific method to collect, analyze, and interpret evidence.

11

•
•

Employing the scientific method allows the scientist to collect empirical data objectively,
which adds to the accumulation of scientific knowledge.
Psychological phenomena are complex, and making predictions about them is difficult
because of individual differences and because they are determined by multiple factors.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Can you think of a time when you used your intuition to analyze an outcome, only to be
surprised to find that your explanation was completely incorrect? Did this surprise help
you understand how intuition may sometimes lead us astray?
2. Describe the scientific method in a way that someone who knows nothing about science
could understand it.

VideosIf you would like to watch videos about the topics in this book, you can watch 26 free online, 30
minute programs at http://www.learner.org/resources/series138.html Most, but not all topics
from the text will be illustrated and discussed. In addition, supplemental introductory level
information on psychology is presented by Philip Zimbardo, past president of the American
Psychological Association, researcher, lecturer, and text author.

The Evolution of Psychology: Central Questions, History, and Contemporary
Perspectives
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Identify the central questions in psychology.
Describe the historical roots of psychology.
Explain the major theoretical perspectives in the field.
Identify important women in the history of psychology.
Describe the subfields of psychology and related professions.

In this section, we will review the history of psychology with a focus on the important questions
that psychologists ask and the major perspectives, or approaches, of psychological inquiry. The
Psychological perspectives that we will review are summarized in Table 1.2.
The perspectives that psychologists have used to assess the issues that interest them have changed
dramatically over the history of psychology. Perhaps most importantly, the field has moved
steadily toward a more scientific approach as the technology available to study human behavior
has improved (Benjamin & Baker, 2004).

12

Table 1.2 The Most Important Perspectives of Psychology
Psychological
Perspectives

Description

Important contributors

Structuralism

Uses the method of introspection to identify the basic
elements or “structures” of psychological experience

Wilhelm Wundt,
Edward B. Titchener

Functionalism

Attempts to understand why animals and humans havedeveloped the particular psychological aspects that they
currently possess

William James

Psychodynamic

Focuses on the role of our unconscious thoughts,
feelings, and memories, and our early childhood
experiences in determining behavior

Sigmund Freud, Carl
Jung, Alfred Adler, Erik
Erickson, Karen Horney

Behaviorism

Based on the premise that it is not possible to objectively
study the mind, and therefore that psychologists should
limit their attention to the study of behavior itself

John B. Watson, B. F.
Skinner

Biological

Humanistic

Focuses on the role of biology (genetics,
neurotransmitters, hormones, and the brain) on humanbehavior and mental processes
Emphasis is placed on the individual’s potential for
personal growth

Michael Gazzaniga
Carl Rogers, Abraham
Maslow

The study of mental processes, including perception,
thinking, memory, and judgments

Hermann Ebbinghaus,
Sir Frederic Bartlett,Jean Piaget

Social-cultural

The study of how the social situations and the cultures inwhich people find themselves influence thinking andbehavior

Fritz Heider, Leon
Festinger, Stanley
Schachter

Evolutionary

Focuses on adaptation and survival as the basis ofbehavior and mental processes

Charles Darwin, David
Buss, Richard Dawkins,
Steven Pinker

Cognitive

13

Psychology’s Central Questions
Psychology has changed dramatically over its history, but the most important questions thatpsychologists address have remained constant. Some of these questions follow, and we will
discuss them both in this chapter and in the chapters to come:•Nature versus nurture: Are genes or environment most influential in determining the
behavior of individuals and in accounting for differences among people? Most scientists
now agree that both genes and environment play crucial roles in most human behaviors.
Yet we still have much to learn about how nature, our biological makeup, and nurture,
the environment and experiences that we have during our lives, work together (Harris,
1998; Pinker, 2002). The proportion of differences that is due to genetics is known as theheritability of the characteristic. We will see, for example, that the heritability ofintelligence is very high (about .85 out of 1.0), but we will also see that nature and nurtureinteract in complex ways. Given this complex interaction, psychologists now consider
the question of how they interact to produce behavior as more relevant than whether
nature or nurture is more important.

•

Free will versus determinism: This question concerns the extent to which people havecontrol over their own actions. Are we the products of our environment, guided by forcesout of our control, or are we able to choose the behaviors we engage in? Most of us liketo believe that we are able to do what we want. Our legal system is based on the conceptof free will. We punish criminals because we believe that they have choice over their
behaviors and freely choose to disobey the law. But as we will discuss later in the
research focus in this section, recent research has suggested that we may have less control
over our own behavior than we think we do (Wegner, 2002).

•

Conscious versus unconscious processing: To what extent are we conscious of our own
actions and the causes of them? Many of the major theories of psychology, ranging fromthe Freudian psychodynamic theories to cognitive psychology, argue that much of our
behavior is determined by variables of which we are not aware.

•

Differences versus similarities: To what extent are we all similar, and to what extent are
we different? For instance, are there basic psychological and personality differences
between men and women, or are men and women by-and-large similar? What about
people from different ethnicities and cultures? Are people around the world generally thesame, or are they influenced by their backgrounds and environments in different ways?
Personality, social, and cross-cultural psychologists attempt to answer these classic
questions.

•

Accuracy versus inaccuracy: To what extent are humans good information processors?
It appears that people are “good enough” to make sense of the world around them and to
make decent decisions (Fiske, 2003). But human judgment is sometimes compromised byinaccuracies in our thinking styles and by our motivations and emotions. For instance, ourjudgment may be affected by emotional responses to events in our environment.
14

Figure 1.3
President Barack Obama and Vice President Joe Biden (left photo) meet with BP executives todiscuss the disastrous oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico (right photo). Psychologists study the causesof poor judgments such as those made by these executives.
Sources: Source

Early Philosophy as the Foundation for Psychology
The earliest psychologists that we know about are the Greek philosophers Plato (428–347 BC)
and Aristotle (384–322 BC) (see Figure 1.4). These philosophers asked many of the samequestions that today’s psychologists ask. They questioned the distinction between nature andnurture and the existence of free will. Plato argued on the nature side, believing that certain
kinds of knowledge are innate or inborn,whereas Aristotle was more on the nurture side,
believing that each child is born as an “empty
slate” in Latin a tabula rasa, and that knowledge
is primarily acquired through learning andexperience.
European philosophers continued to ask thesefundamental questions during the Renaissance
Figure 1.4
Period. For instance, the French philosopher
Plato (left) believed that much knowledge wasinnate, whereas Aristotle (right) thought that each
René Descartes (1596–1650) also argued inchild was born as an “empty slate” and thatfavor of free will. He believed that the mind
knowledge was primarily acquired through learning
controls the body through the pineal gland in theand experience.
brain, an idea that made some sense at the time
Sources: Source
but was later proved incorrect. Descartes also
believed in the existence of inborn natural abilities. A scientist as well as a philosopher,
Descartes dissected animals and was among the first to understand that the nerves controlled themuscles. He also addressed the relationship between mind, the mental aspects of life, and body,the physical aspects of life. Descartes believed in the principle of dualism; that is, the mind isfundamentally different from the mechanical body. Other European philosophers, including
Thomas Hobbes (1588–1679), John Locke (1632–1704), and Jean-Jacques Rousseau (1712–
1778), also weighed in on these issues.
The fundamental problem that these philosophers faced was that they had few methods forsettling their claims. Most philosophers did not conduct any research on these questions, in part15

because they did not yet know how to do it, and in part because they were not sure it was evenpossible to objectively study human experience. But dramatic changes came during the 1800s
with the help of the first two research psychologists: The German psychologist Wilhelm Wundt(1832–1920), who developed a psychology laboratory in Leipzig, Germany in 1879, and theAmerican psychologist, William James (1842–1910), who founded a psychology laboratory at
Harvard University.

Early Psychology: Stucturalism and Functionalism
Structuralism: Wilhelm Wundt is considered tohave created the first psychology lab in Leipzig,
Germany in1879. Wundt’s research focused on
the nature of consciousness itself. Wundt and his
students believed that it was possible to analyze
the basic elements of the mind and to classify
our conscious experiences scientifically. Wundt
began the field known as structuralism, aschool of psychology whose goal was to identify
the basic elements or “structures” ofpsychological experience. Its goal was to create aperiodic table of the elements of sensations,similar to the periodic table of elements that had
recently been created in chemistry.

Figure 1.5
Wilhelm Wundt (seated at left) and Edward
Titchener (right) helped create the structuralist
school of psychology. Their goal was toclassify the elements of sensation throughintrospection.

Structuralists used the method of introspection to
Sources: Source
attempt to create a map of the elements ofconsciousness. Introspection involves asking research participants to describe exactly what
they experience as they work on mental tasks, such as viewing colors, reading a page in a book,or performing a math problem. A participant who is reading a book might report, for instance,that he saw some black and colored straight and curved marks on a white background. In otherstudies, the structuralists used newly invented reaction time instruments to systematically assess
not only what the participants were thinking but how long it took them to do so. Wundt
discovered that it took people longer to report what sound they had just heard than to simply
respond that they had heard the sound. These studies marked the first time researchers realizedthat there is a difference between the sensation of a stimulus and the perception of that stimulus,
and the idea of using reaction times to study mental events has now become a mainstay ofcognitive psychology.
Perhaps the best known of the structuralists was Edward Bradford Titchener (1867–1927).
Titchener was a student of Wundt who came to the United States in the late 1800s and founded alaboratory at Cornell University. In his research using introspection, Titchener and his students
claimed to have identified more than 40,000 sensations, including those relating to vision,
hearing, and taste.
The structuralist approach marked the beginning of psychology as a science, because it
demonstrated that mental events could be quantified, but the structuralists also discovered the16limitations of introspection. Even highly trained research participants were often unable to reporton their subjective experiences. When the participants were asked to do simple math problems,
they could easily do them, but they could not easily answer how they did them. Thus, thestructuralists were the first to realize the importance of unconscious processes, that many
important aspects of human psychology occur outside our conscious awareness, and thatpsychologists cannot expect research participants to be able to accurately report on all theirexperiences. Consequently, the structuralist approach is no longer used.
Functionalism: William James was a memberof the school of functionalism. The goal offunctionalism was to understand why animals
and humans have developed the mental processes
that they currently possess (Hunt, 1993). For
James, one’s thinking was relevant only to one’s
behavior. As he put it in his psychology
textbook, “My thinking is first and last andalways for the sake of my doing” (James, 1890).
Figure 1.6
James and the other members of the functionalist
The functionalist school of psychology,
school were influenced by Charles Darwin’s
founded by the American psychologist(1809–1882) theory of natural selection, which
William James (left), was influenced byproposed that the physical characteristics of
the work of Charles Darwin (right).
animals and humans evolved because they were
Source: Source
useful, or functional. The functionalists believedthat Darwin’s theory applied to psychological characteristics too. Just as some animals havedeveloped strong muscles to allow them to run fast, the functionalists thought the human brain
must have adapted to serve a particular function in human survival. Although functionalism nolonger exists as a school of psychology, its basic principles have been absorbed into psychology
and continue to influence it in many ways.

Contemporary Perspectives
Psychodynamic Perspective: Perhaps the psychological perspective that is most familiar to the
public is the psychodynamic approach, which was initiated by Sigmund Freud (1856–1939) andmodernized by his followers. The Psychodynamic Perspective is an approach to understanding
human behavior that focuses on early childhood experiences and the role of unconscious
thoughts, feelings, and memories. Freud believed that many of the problems that his patients
experienced, including anxiety, depression, and sexual dysfunction, were the result of the effectsof painful childhood experiences that the person could no longer remember. The terms
psychoanalytic and psychodynamic have both been used to describe Freud’s theory, however,psychoanalytic refers specifically to Freud’s original theory. Psychodynamic refers to all thetheories derived from Freud’s work, and this approach continues to evolve today (Hansell,
Ehrlich, Katz, Lerner, & Minter, 2008). Today’s psychodynamic theory differs significantly
from Freud’s original idea, and consequently, we will use the term psychodynamic throughout
the book. Theorists who contributed to the psychodynamic approach include: Carl Jung (1875–
1961), Alfred Adler (1870–1937), Karen Horney (1855–1952), and Erik Erikson (1902–1994).
17

Because the founders of thepsychodynamic perspective wereprimarily practitioners who worked
Sigmund Freud and theother psychodynamic
with individuals to help them with their
psychologists believed thatpsychological symptoms, they did not
many of our thoughts andconduct much research on their ideas.
emotions are unconscious.
Later, more sophisticated tests of their
Psychotherapy wastheories have not supported many ofdesigned to help patients
their ideas. For example, cognitive
recover and confront their
psychology explains how many of the“lost” memories.
processes involved in memory are
Source: Photo courtesy of Max Halberstadt,
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Sigmund“behind the scenes in the cognitive_Freud_LIFE.jpg.
unconscious” (Reisberg, 2016, p. 564).
Even when our thinking is conscious, we are influenced by unconscious processing and guides
that affect our thoughts. Personality is better explained by one’s executive control, whichcorresponds to the individual’s ability to balance urges and motivations and choose theappropriate course of action, and not a balance among one’s id, ego, and superego as Freudindicated. Additionally, the psychosexual stages of development, the idea of sex and death
driving behavior, and the significance of dreams have not been supported (Vazire, 2014).
Figure 1.7

The current psychodynamic perspective focuses on the importance of human development frombirth on, and early child development is seen as critical for later adult functioning (Hansell et al.,2008). Parents and other “loved figures” are considered crucial role models for children, andchildren will develop mental models of how relationships work based on their personal
experiences with family members. The psychodynamic theories of object relations andattachment focus on the child-caregiver relationship and assume that basic human motivation isfor interpersonal connection. This idea that early childhood experiences are critical and theconcept of therapy as a way of improving human lives, are both derived from current
psychodynamic perspective and remain important to psychology (Moore & Fine, 1995).
Behavioral Perspective: Although they differed in approach,both structuralism and functionalism were essentially studies ofthe mind. The psychologists associated with behaviorism, on theother hand, were reacting in part to the difficulties psychologists
encountered when they tried to use introspection to understandbehavior. Behaviorism is based on the premise that it is notpossible to objectively study the mind, and therefore
psychologists should limit their attention to the study of
behavior itself. Behaviorists believe that the human mind is a
black box into which stimuli are sent and from which responses
are received. They argue that there is no point in trying todetermine what happens in the box because we can successfully
predict behavior without knowing what happens inside themind. Furthermore, behaviorists believe that it is possible todevelop laws of learning that can explain all behaviors.

18

Figure 1.8

John Broadus Watson
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/John_B._Watson#mediavi
ewer/File:John_Broadus_Watson.JPGjpg

The first behaviorist was the American psychologist John B. Watson (1878–1958). Watson was
influenced in large part by the work of the Russian physiologist Ivan Pavlov (1849–1936), who
had discovered that dogs would salivate at the sound of a tone that had previously been
associated with the presentation of food. Watson and the other behaviorists began to use theseideas to explain how events that people and other organisms experienced in their environment,
called stimuli, could produce specific behaviors called responses. For instance, in Pavlov’s
research the stimulus, either the food or tone, would produce the response of salivation in thedogs.
In his research, Watson found that systematically exposing a child to fearful stimuli in thepresence of objects that did not themselves elicit fear could lead the child to respond with afearful behavior to the presence of the stimulus (Watson & Rayner, 1920; Beck, Levinson, &Irons, 2009). In the best known of his studies, an 8-month-old boy named Little Albert was usedas the subject. Here is a summary of the findings:
The boy was placed in the middle of a room; a white laboratory rat was placed near him
and he was allowed to play with it. The child showed no fear of the rat. In later trials, theresearchers made a loud sound behind Albert’s back by striking a steel bar with ahammer whenever the baby touched the rat. The child cried when he heard the noise.
After several such pairings of the two stimuli, the child was again shown the rat. Now,
however, he cried and tried to move away from the rat.
In line with the behaviorist perspective, the boy had learned to associate the white rat with theloud noise, resulting in crying.
The most famous behaviorist was Burrhus Frederick (B. F.)
Skinner (1904–1990), who expanded the principles of
behaviorism and also brought them to the attention of the publicat large. Skinner used the ideas of stimulus and response, alongwith the application of rewards or reinforcements, to train
pigeons and other animals. Additionally, he used the generalprinciples of behaviorism to develop theories about how best toteach children and how to create societies that were peaceful andproductive (Skinner, 1957, 1968, 1972).
The behaviorists made substantial contributions to psychology byidentifying the principles of learning. Although the behaviorists
were incorrect in their beliefs that it was not possible to measure
thoughts and feelings, their ideas provided new ideas that helped
further our understanding regarding the nature-nurture debate, as
well as the question of free will. The ideas of behaviorism arefundamental to psychology and have been developed to help us
better understand the role of prior experiences in a variety ofareas of psychology.

19

Figure 1.9
B. F. Skinner was amember of the behaviorist
school of psychology. He
argued that free will is an
illusion and that all
behavior is determined byenvironmental factors.
Source:Humanistic Perspective: Another perspective which focuses on thinking and emotions ishumanism. Humanism embraces the concepts of self, self-esteem, self-actualization, and free
will. The humanistic perspective, popularized in the 1950s, was referred to as the “Third Force”
in psychology (Moore, 1989). This perspective was seen as an alternative to the deterministic andpessimistic approach of the psychoanalytic perspective. The humanistic perspective believes that
individuals possess personal choice and can rise above the unconscious desires suggested by
Freud and his followers. Additionally, the humanistic perspective counters the blank slate belief
and constraints imposed by the environment, as suggested by the behaviorist perspective.
Figure 1.10
Abraham Maslow

Carl Rogers

Sources:
Maslowhttps://www.flickr.com/photos/46950057@N00/2281515623/in/photolist
Rogers https://www.flickr.com/photos/18413451@N07/4374695574/in/photolist

Unlike the psychoanalytic and behavioral
perspectives, humanistic psychologists are more
likely to talk about the self-concept. Humanists,such as Carl Rogers (1902-1987) and Abraham
Maslow (1908-1970), believed that eachindividual strives to reach their full potential.
Rogers and Maslow stressed self-actualization,
which is “the inherent tendency of an organism
to develop all of its capacities in ways which
serve to maintain or enhance the organism,”(Rogers, 1959, p. 196). They also viewed
individuals as basically trustworthy, possessing
dignity and worth, and desiring to be in harmony
with others.

Rogers developed person-centered, also known as client-centered, therapy which believes thatclients should guide the direction of therapy as they are capable of choosing a healthy direction
for their lives. The therapist should provide an empathic and nonjudgmental alliance and provide
unconditional positive regard towards the client. Person-centered therapy will be discussed
further in the chapter on treating psychological disorders. Maslow conceptualized personality interms of a “Hierarchy of Needs”. Shaped as a pyramid, the base consists of the lower levelmotivations, including those for hunger and thirst, while the higher level needs of self-esteem andeventually self-actualization occur at the top. Maslow’s hierarchy of needs is further described in
the chapter on personality.
The tenants of humanism are alive and well today in positive psychology, which emphasizes
promoting mental health rather than just treating mental illness. Psychologists from this approach
strive to understand the variables that promote resilience, self-acceptance, and personal growth.
They also examine how social institutions and systems can foster such growth.
Biological Perspective: The biological perspective focuses on the interaction between biology
and emotions, thoughts, and behaviors. According to Carlson (2013), scientists who study theimportance of the biological perspective combine the understanding of physiology with theexperimental methods of psychology. Such scientists, often called neuroscientists, believe that
all thoughts, emotions, and behaviors have a physical basis. Neuroscientists study a variety ofhuman processes including perceptions, eating, reproduction, sleeping, learning, memory, and20

language. Additionally, neuroscientists focus on societal issues of addiction, neurological, andpsychological disorders.
Some researchers from the biological perspective might examine the role of genes in influencing
our personality, intelligence, or tendency to develop psychological disorders. For example,
genes may be the source of anatomical, chemical or physiological defects, but may also cause asusceptibility to develop a variety of behavioral problems (Kolb & Whishaw, 2011). Someneuroscientists may focus on the functions of the nervous system, including the effects ofneurotransmitters, brain trauma and disease on individual behavior. Others may compare
different species to better understand human behavior. For example, sleep has very old
evolutionary roots. Even simple animals such as fruit flies (Huber et al., 2005) and cockroaches(Tobler & Neuner-Jehle, 1992) display sleep-like behavior. Huber and colleagues also found thatfruit flies display learning and memory deficits when deprived of sleep. Examining how otheranimals react to stimuli may provide insight into the human experience. However, using animals
for research is a controversial topic and will be discussed further in the next chapter.
Cognitive Perspective and Cognitive Neuroscience: Science is always influenced by thetechnology that surrounds it, and psychology is no exception. Thus, it is no surprise thatbeginning in the 1960s, growing numbers of psychologists began to think about the brain andabout human behavior in terms of the computer, which was being developed and becoming
publicly available at that time. The analogy between the brain and the computer, although by nomeans perfect, provided part of the impetus for a new school of psychology called cognitive
psychology. The Cognitive perspective studies mental processes, including perception, thinking,memory, and judgment. These actions correspond well to the processes that computers perform.
Although cognitive psychology began in earnest in
the 1960s, earlier psychologists had also taken a
cognitive orientation. Some of the important
contributors to cognitive psychology include theGerman psychologist Hermann Ebbinghaus (1850–
1909), who studied the ability of people toremember lists of words under different conditions,and the English psychologist Sir Frederic Bartlett(1886–1969), who studied the cognitive and social
processes of remembering. Bartlett created shortstories that were in some ways logical but also
contained some very unusual and unexpected
events. Bartlett discovered that people found it very
Figure 1.11
difficult to recall the stories exactly, even after
Cognitive psychologists, such as Jean
being allowed to study them repeatedly, and hePiaget, worked to understand how
hypothesized that the stories were difficult topeople learn, remember, and makeremember because they did not fit the participants’
judgments about the world around them.
expectations about how stories should go. The idea
Sourcethat our memory is influenced by what we alreadyknow was also a major idea behind the cognitive-developmental stage model of Swiss
psychologist Jean Piaget (1896–1980).
21

With its argument that our thinking has a powerful influence on behavior, the cognitive approachprovides a distinct alternative to behaviorism. These psychologists contend that people interpret,
as well as, respond to the stimuli they experience. It is essential to take the mind into account tofully understand the actions of humans in response to environmental stimuli. For instance, whena boy turns to a girl on a date and says, “You are so beautiful,” a behaviorist would probably seethat as a reinforcing (positive) stimulus. Yet, the girl might not be so easily fooled. She might try
to understand why the boy is making this statement at this particular time, and wonder if hemight be attempting to influence her through the comment. Cognitive psychologists maintain thatwhen we take into consideration how stimuli are evaluated and interpreted, we understandbehavior more deeply.
As previously noted, one model of information processing used by early cognitive theorists was
the computer. Information-processing theory describes the human mind as receiving input,
processing theinformation based on programs, or schemas, and using the results of thisprocessing to produce output. For example, someone asks you a question in Spanish. If you
have a program for that language, you process the question and respond. If you only have aprogram for English, the input is not useful. Psychologists now recognize that the human brain
is much more complex than a computer.
Cognitive psychology remains enormously influential today, and it has guided research in suchvaried fields as language, problem solving, memory, intelligence, education, humandevelopment, social psychology, and psychotherapy. The cognitive revolution has been given
even more life over the past decade as the result of recent advances in our ability to see the brainin action using neuroimaging techniques. Neuroimaging is the use of various techniques toprovide pictures of the structure and function of the living brain (Ilardi & Feldman, 2001). These
images are used to diagnose brain disease and injury, but they also allow researchers to view
information processing as it occurs in the brain, because the processing causes the involved areaof the brain to increase metabolism and show up on the scan. We will discuss the use of
neuroimaging techniques in many areas of psychology in the chapters to follow.
Evolutinary Perspective: The work of the early functionalists developed into the field of
evolutionary psychology, a branch of psychology that applies the Darwinian theory of natural
selection to human and animal behavior (Dennett, 1995; Tooby & Cosmides, 1992).
Evolutionary psychology accepts the functionalists’ basic assumption, namely that many human
psychological systems, including memory, emotion, and personality, serve key adaptivefunctions. As we will see in the chapters to come, evolutionary psychologists use evolutionary
theory to understand many different behaviors including romantic attraction, stereotypes andprejudice, and even the causes of some psychological disorders.
A key component of the ideas of evolutionary psychology is fitness, which refers to the extent
that having a given characteristic helps the individual organism survive and reproduce at ahigher rate than do other members of the species who do not have the characteristic. Fitterorganisms pass on their genes more successfully to later generations, making the characteristics
that produce fitness more likely to become part of the organism’s nature than characteristics that
do not produce fitness. For example, it has been argued that the emotion of jealousy has survived
over time in men because men who experience jealousy are more likely to pass on the genes for22that jealousy than men who do not get jealous. According to this idea, the experience of jealously
leads men to be more likely to protect their mates and guard against rivals, which increases theirreproductive success (Buss, 2000).
Despite its importance in psychological theorizing, evolutionary psychology also has some
limitations. One problem is that many of its predictions are extremely difficult to test. Unlike thefossils that are used to learn about the physical evolution of species, we cannot know which
psychological characteristics our ancestors possessed or did not possess; we can only makeguesses about this. Because it is difficult to directly test evolutionary theories, it is always
possible that the explanations we apply are made up after the fact to account for observed data
(Gould & Lewontin, 1979). Nevertheless, the evolutionary approach is important topsychology because it provides logical explanations for why we have many psychologicalcharacteristics.
Most psychologists use the theory of evolution to explain the existence of our species. They relyon the theory to explain the foundation for motivation, emotion, instincts, reflexes, language, andother psychological traits. For example, learning theorists use reflexes to explain thedevelopment of phobias. Psychoanalytic theorists use sexual motivation to explain art and music.
Evolutionary theory also provides the rationale for doing psychological research on species
which share a similar genetic background.
Social-Cultural Perspective: A final perspective, which has had substantial impact on
psychology, can be broadly referred to as the social-cultural or sociocultural perspective,
which is the study of how the social situations and the cultures in which people find themselves
influence thinking and behavior. Social-cultural psychologists are particularly concerned withhow people perceive themselves and others, and how people influence each other’s behavior. For
instance, social psychologists have found that we are attracted to others who are similar to us interms of attitudes and interests (Byrne, 1969), that we develop our own beliefs and attitudes bycomparing our opinions to those of others (Festinger, 1954), and that we frequently change ourbeliefs and behaviors to be similar to those of the people we care about, a process known as
conformity.
An important aspect of socialcultural psychology are social
norms defined as the ways ofthinking, feeling, or behaving thatare shared by group members andperceived by them as appropriate(Asch, 1952; Cialdini, 1993). Norms
include customs, traditions,standards, and rules, as well as the
Figure 1.12
general values of the group. Many of In Western cultures norms promote a focus on the self, or
the most important social norms areindividualism, whereas in Eastern cultures the focus is moredetermined by the culture in whichon families and social groups, or collectivism.©Thinkstock
we live, and these cultures arestudied by cross-cultural psychologists. A culture represents the common set of social norms,
23

including religious and family values and other moral beliefs, shared by the people who live in ageographical region (Fiske, Kitayama, Markus, & Nisbett, 1998; Markus, Kitayama, & Heiman,
1996; Matsumoto, 2001). This definition can be extended to include people whose origins arefrom that region as well.
Cultures influence every aspect of our lives, and it is not inappropriate to say that our culture
defines our lives just as much as does our evolutionary experience (Mesoudi, 2009).
Psychologists have found that there is a fundamental difference in social norms between Westerncultures, including those in the United States, Canada, Western Europe, Australia, and New
Zealand, and East Asian cultures, including those in China, Japan, Taiwan, Korea, India, andSoutheast Asia. Norms in Western cultures are primarily oriented toward individualism, which
is about valuing the self and one’s independence from others. Children in Western cultures aretaught to develop and to value a sense of their personal self, and to see themselves in large partas separate from the other people around them. Children in Western cultures feel special about
themselves; they enjoy getting gold stars on their projects and the best grade in the class. Adults
in Western cultures are oriented toward promoting their own individual success, frequently incomparison to, or even at the expense of, others.
Figure 1.13

Norms in the East Asian culture, on the other hand, areoriented toward interdependence or collectivism. In thesecultures, children are taught to focus on developing
harmonious social relationships with others. The
predominant norms relate to group togetherness andconnectedness, and duty and responsibility to one’s family
and other groups. When asked to describe themselves, themembers of East Asian cultures are more likely than thosefrom Western cultures to indicate that they areparticularly concerned about the interests of others,
including their close friends and their colleagues.

Another important cultural difference is the extent towhich people in different cultures are bound by social
norms and customs, rather than being free to express theirown individuality without considering social norms(Chan, Gelfand, Triandis, & Tzeng, 1996). Cultures also
differ in terms of personal space, such as how closely individuals stand to each other whentalking, as well as the communication styles they employ.
It is important to be aware of cultures and cultural differences because people with different
cultural backgrounds increasingly interact with each other due to increased travel andimmigration, the development of the Internet, and other forms of communication. In the UnitedStates, for instance, there are many different ethnic groups, and the proportion of the populationthat comes from minority groups is increasing from year to year. The social-cultural perspective
to understanding behavior reminds us again of the difficulty of making broad generalizations
about human nature. People experience things differently, and their experience vary dependingon their culture.
24

The Women of Psychology
Although most of the earliest psychologists were men,
women also studied psychology, but often faced
discrimantion based on their sex. For example, they were notable to receive degress they earned because the institutions
were unwilling to grant them. They often taught at all
women’s colleges and did not have access to graduate students
or laboratories (Crawford, 2012). Despite this discrimination,
many female psychologists still made important theoreticaland research contributions to the field. For example, the firstfemale president of the American Psychological
Association (APA) in 1905 was Mary Whiton Calkins(1863–1930). Calkins made significant contributions tothe study of memory and the self-concept, despite
having her degree withheld from Harvard University.

Figure 1.14 Mary Whiton Calkins

Calkins photo courtesy of Vlad Sfichi,
http://www.flickr.com/photos/2411080 0@N08/2779490726.

Margaret Floy Washburn (1871-1939) was the first women to earn a doctorate in psychology
from Cornell University and she was the second female president of APA in 1921. Her research
focused on animal behavior, and she wrote The Animal Mind in 1908, which for the next 25
years, was the standard text for comparative psychology (Stewart, 2008). Leta Stetter
Hollingworth (1886-1939) focused her research on women and child development.
Hollingworth’s research disproved the prevailing belief at the time that female abilities wereinferior to those of males, and that female abilities declined during menstruation. Anna Freud(1895-1982), the daughter of Sigmund Freud, developed the basic concepts in the theoretical andpractical approach to child psychoanalysis.
There are many important recent female psychologists that we will be discussing in this book.
Karen Horney (1885-1952) founded a neoFreudian school of psychoanalysis and focused on thesocial and cultural factors that affect personality (Stewart, 2008). Mamie Phipps Clark (19171983) was a prominent African American psychologist who was instrumental in the Brown
versus Board of Education case of Topeka, Kansas. Working with her husband, she demonstrated
that black children often preferred white dolls over black dolls because they viewed white as
good and pretty. The Clarks demonstrated that feeling inferior resulted in academic
underachievement for black children. In the field of memory, Elizabeth Loftus (1944-present)
made ground breaking research regarding eye witness testimony (Hock, 2009). She exposed thebias that individuals demonstrate when they attempt to recall events, and she showed how easy it
was for people to create false memories. Using the strange situation technique developed with acolleague, Mary Ainsworth (1913-1999) demonstrated the types of attachment toddlers had with
their caregivers, and Diana Baumrind (1927-present) researched parenting styles.
Since the early years in psychology, females have studied psychology and currently they earnmore bachelor’s (76.7% overall) and doctorate (73.5% overall) degress in psychology than males(National Science Foundation, 2017).

25

Figure 1.15 presents a timeline of some of the most important psychologists, beginning with theearly Greek philosophers and extending to the present day. Although it cannot capture every
important psychologist, this timeline shows some of the most important contributors to thehistory of psychology.
Figure 1.15 Timeline Showing Some of the Most Important Psychologists

26

The Many Disciplines of Psychology
Psychology is not one discipline, but rather a collection of many sub disciplines that all share atleast some common approaches and that work together and exchange knowledge to form a
coherent discipline (Yang & Chiu, 2009). Because the field of psychology is so broad, students
may wonder which areas are most suitable for their interests and which types of careers might beavailable to them. Table 1.3 will help you consider the answers to these questions. A
psychologist has generally been trained to understand research and earned a doctoral degree in
psychology (Ph.D. or Psy.D) Psychologists who do testing and therapy are usually licensed by
the state.
Psychology, psychiatry, counseling, and social work are related disciplines. These disciplines
may share research and sometimes work as members of a team. Psychiatrists go to medical
school to earn an MD and then receive special training in how to treat mental illness. Like otherphysicians, they frequently prescribe medication or use other physiological tests and treatments.
Social workers and counselors generally have at least a master's degree. They generally work forinstitutions or agencies. Some practice independently and specialize in treating a specific type ofproblem (e.g. substance abuse or family problems).
Table 1.3 Some Career Paths in Psychology
Psychology field

Description

Career opportunities

Biopsychology andneuroscience

This field examines the physiological bases of
behavior in animals and humans by studying
the functioning of different brain areas andthe effects of hormones andneurotransmitters on behavior.

Most biopsychologists work in researchsettings, for instance, at universities, forthe federal government, and in private
research labs.

Clinical and counselingpsychology

These are the largest fields of psychology. The
focus is on the assessment, diagnosis, causes,
and treatment of mental disorders.

Clinical and counseling psychologists
provide therapy to patients with thegoal of improving their life experiences.
They work in hospitals, schools, social
agencies, and in private practice.
Because the demand for this career ishigh, entry to academic programs ishighly competitive.

Cognitive psychology

This field uses sophisticated researchmethods, including reaction time and brain
imaging to study memory, language, andthinking.

Cognitive psychologists work primarily
in research settings, although some,including those who specialize inhuman-computer interactions, consult
for businesses.

Developmental
psychology

These psychologists conduct research on the
cognitive, emotional, and social changes that
occur across the lifespan.

Many work in research settings,
although others work in schools andcommunity agencies to help improveand evaluate the effectiveness ofintervention programs such as Head
Start.

27

Psychological field

Description

Career Opportunities

Forensic psychology

Forensic psychologists apply psychologicalprinciples to understand the behavior ofjudges, attorneys, courtroom juries, andothers in the criminal justice system.

Health psychology

Health psychologists are concerned with
understanding how biology, behavior, and thesocial situation influence health and illness.

Community psychology

These psychologist study how individuals
relate to their community, and the reciprocal
effect of communities on individuals.

Industrialorganizational (I/O) andenvironmental
psychology

Industrial-organizational psychology applies
psychology to the workplace with the goal of
improving the performance and well-being of
employees.

Forensic psychologists work in thecriminal justice system. They may
testify in court and provide information
about the reliability of eyewitness
testimony and jury selection.
Health psychologists work with medical
professionals in clinical settings topromote better health, conduct
research, and teach at universities.
Community psychologist focus on how
community members might share aparticular mental disorder or social
problem that affects the community as
a whole.
There are a wide variety of career
opportunities working in businesses.
These psychologists help selectemployees, evaluate employee
performance, and examine the effects
of different working conditions on
behavior. They may also work to design
equipment and environments that
improve employee performance andreduce accidents.

Personality psychology

These psychologists study people and thedifferences among them. The goal is todevelop theories that explain thepsychological processes of individuals, and to
focus on individual differences.

Most work in academic settings, but
the skills of personality psychologists
are also in demand in advertising andmarketing. PhD programs in personality
psychology are often connected with
programs in social psychology.

School and educational
psychology

This field studies how people learn in school,
the effectiveness of school programs, and thepsychology of teaching.

School psychologists work inelementary and secondary schools or
school district offices with students,
teachers, parents, and administrators.
They may assess children’s
psychological and learning problems
and develop programs to minimize theimpact of these problems.

Social and crosscultural psychology

This field examines people’s interactions withother people. Topics of study include
conformity, group behavior, leadership,
attitudes, and person perception.

Many social psychologists work inmarketing, advertising, organizational,
systems design, and other applied
psychology fields.

Sports psychology

This field studies the psychological aspects ofsports behavior. The goal is to understand thefactors that influence performance in sports,
including exercise and team interactions.

Sports psychologists work in gyms,
schools, professional sports teams, andother areas where sports are practiced.

28

Psychology in Everyday Life: How to Effectively Learn and Remember
One way that the findings of psychological research may be particularly helpful to you is interms of improving your learning and study skills. Psychological research has provided a
substantial amount of knowledge about the principles of learning and memory. This information
can help you do better in this and other courses, and can also help you to improve your learningof new concepts and techniques in other areas of your life.
The most important thing you can learn in college is how to become more efficient at studying,learning, and remembering. These skills will help you throughout your life, as you learn newjobs and take on other responsibilities. There are substantial individual differences in learningand memory, such that some people learn faster than others. However, even if it takes you
longer to learn, the extra time you put into studying is well worth the effort. Learning toeffectively study and to remember information is just like learning any other skill, such as
playing a sport or a video game.
To learn well, you need to be ready to learn. You cannot learn well when you are tired, when you
are under stress, or if you are abusing alcohol or drugs. Try to keep a consistent routine ofsleeping and eating. Eat moderately and nutritiously, and avoid drugs that can impair memory,
particularly alcohol. There is no evidence that stimulants such as caffeine, amphetamines, or anyof the many memory enhancing drugs on the market will help you learn (Gold, Cahill, & Wenk,
2002; McDaniel, Maier, & Einstein, 2002).
Psychologists have studied the ways that best allow people to acquire new information, to retain
it over time, and to retrieve information that has been stored in our memories. One important
finding is that learning is an active process. To acquire information most effectively, we must
actively manipulate it. One active approach is rehearsal, which is repeating the information thatis to be learned over-and-over again.
Although simple repetition does help us learn, psychological research has found that we acquire
information most effectively with elaboration, which is when we actively think about its meaning
and relate the material to something we already know. If you want to remember the different
persepectives of psychology, for instance, try to think about how each of the perspectives isdifferent from the others. As you make the comparisons, determine what is most important about
each one and then relate it to the features of the other perspectives. In an important study showing
the effectiveness of elaborative encoding, Rogers, Kuiper, and Kirker (1977) found that students
learned information best when they related it to aspects of themselves, a phenomenon known as
the self-reference effect. This research suggests that imagining how the material relates to yourown interests and goals will help you learn it.
An approach known as the method of loci involves linking each of the pieces of information thatyou need to remember to places with which you are familiar. You might think about the housethat you grew up in and the rooms in it. Then you could put the behaviorists in the bedroom, thehumanists in the living room, and the social-culturists in the kitchen. Then when you need to29remember the information, you retrieve the mental image of your house and should be able to see
the theorists in each of the areas.
One of the most fundamental principles of memory is known as the spacing effect or distributed
practice, which is studying material in several shorter study periods, rather than just once for along period-of-time. Both humans and animals more easily remember and learn material when
they study the material over several shorter periods. Cramming for an exam is a particularly
ineffective way to learn.
Psychologists have also found that performance is improved when people set difficult, yetrealistic goals for themselves (Locke & Latham, 2006). You can use these goals to help you
learn. For example, set realistic goals for the time you are going to spend studying and what you
are going to learn, and try to stick to those goals. Do a small amount every day, and by the endof the week you should have accomplished your goals.
When studying for a test, do not just go over your notes again and again. Instead, make a list ofquestions you think will be on the test and then see if you can answer them. Study the
information, and then test yourself again after a few minutes. If you made any mistakes, study
again and keep testing yourself until you are successful. Testing yourself by attempting to
retrieve information in an active manner is better than simply studying the material, because it
will help you determine if you know it.
In summary, everyone can learn more efficiently. Learning is an important skill, and following
the previously mentioned ideas, will likely help you improve your memory.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Some basic questions asked by psychologists include those about nature versus nurture, free
will versus determinism, conscious versus unconscious processing, differences versus
similarities, and accuracy versus inaccuracy.
The first psychologists were philosophers, but the field became more empirical and objective
as more sophisticated scientific approaches were developed and employed.
The structuralists attempted to analyze the nature of consciousness using introspection.
The functionalists based their ideas on the work of Darwin, and their approaches led to thefield of evolutionary psychology.
Psychodynamic perspective focuses on unconscious drives and the potential to improve lives
through psychoanalysis and psychotherapy.
The behaviorists explained behavior in terms of stimulus, response, and reinforcement, while
denying the presence of free will.
Humanism examines the self-concept and free will.
The biological perspective focuses on the role of physiological processes on behavior andthought.
The cognitive perspective studies how people perceive, process, and remember information.
30

•
•
•
•

The evolutionary perspective examines human behavior and mental processes in terms of theiradaptive value for our survival.
The social-cultural perspective focuses on the social situation, including how cultures andsocial norms influence our behavior.
Women have played an active role in the history of psychology, but often did not receive therecognition they deserved.
Psychiatry, counseling, and social work are professions related to psychology.

Exercises and Critical Thinking•••

What type of questions can psychologists answer that philosophers might not be able to answer
as completely or as accurately? Explain why you think psychologists can answer thesequestions better than philosophers can.
Choose one of the major questions of psychology and provide some evidence from your own
experience that supports one side or the other.
Choose two of the perspectives of psychology discussed in this section, and explain how theydiffer in their approaches to understanding behavior and mental processes.

Activities
You can learn more about the different fields of psychology and the careers associated with themat http://www.apa.org/careers/psyccareers/

Chapter Summary
Although it is easy to think that everyday situations have commonsense answers, scientificstudies have found that people are not always as good at predicting outcomes as they often thinkthey are. The hindsight bias leads us to think that we could have predicted events that we could
not actually have predicted.
Employing the scientific method allows psychologists to objectively and systematically study
human behavior.
Psychological phenomena are complex, and making predictions about them is difficult because
there are many factors that influence humans. Research has found that people are frequently
unaware of the causes of their own behaviors.
Some of the basic questions asked by psychologists, both historically and currently, include
those about the relative roles of nature versus nurture in behavior, free will versus determinism,
accuracy versus inaccuracy in perception, differences versus similarities, and conscious versus
unconscious processing.
31

The first psychologists were philosophers, but the field became more objective as moresophisticated scientific approaches were developed and employed. Some of the most important
historical schools of psychology include: Structuralism and functionalism. Contemporary
perspectives include: Psychodynamic, behavioral, humanistic, biological, cognitive,
evolutionary, and social-cultural.
Women have played an active role in the history of psychology, but often did not receive therecognition they deserved.
Psychiatry, counseling, and social work are disciplines related to psychology. Psychologists
generally have a Ph.D. or Psy.D. Psychiatrists are physicians with an MD. Counselors and social
workers usually have a master’s degree and may treat clients with specific problems.
There are a variety of available career choices within psychology that provide employment inmany different areas of interest.

References
American Psychological Association. (2018). Fetatured psychologists: Mamie Phipps Clark, Phd, and Kenneth
Clark, PhD. Retrieved from http://www.apa.org/pi/oema/resources/ethnicity-health/psychologists/clark.aspx
Asch, S. E. (1952). Social psychology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Beck, H. P., Levinson, S., & Irons, G. (2009). Finding Little Albert: A journey to John B. Watson’s infantlaboratory. American Psychologist, 64(7), 605–614.
Benjamin, L. T., Jr., & Baker, D. B. (2004). From séance to science: A history of the profession of psychology inAmerica. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth/Thomson.
Buss, D. M. (2000). The dangerous passion: Why jealousy is as necessary as love and sex. New York, NY: Free
Press.
Byrne, D. (1969). Attitudes and attraction. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology (Vol.
4, pp. 35–89). New York, NY: Academic Press.
Carlson, N.R. (2013). Physiology of behavior (11th ed.). Saddle Rock, NJ: Pearson Education.
Chan, D. K. S., Gelfand, M. J., Triandis, H. C., & Tzeng, O. (1996). Tightness-looseness revisited: Some preliminary
analyses in Japan and the United States. International Journal of Psychology, 31, 1–12.
Cialdini, R. B. (1993). Influence: Science and practice (3rd ed.). New York, NY: Harper Collins College.
Craword, M. (2012). Transformations: Women, gender & psychology (2nd.ed.). New York, NY: McGraw Hill.

Cutler, B. L., & Wells, G. L. (2009). Expert testimony regarding eyewitness identification. In J. L. Skeem, S. O.

32

Lilienfeld, & K. S. Douglas (Eds.), Psychological science in the courtroom: Consensus and controversy (pp. 100–
123). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Dennett, D. (1995). Darwin’s dangerous idea: Evolution and the meanings of life. NY: Simon and Schuster.
Festinger, L. (1954). A theory of social comparison processes. Human Relations, 7, 117–140.
Fiske, S. T. (2003). Social beings. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Fiske, A., Kitayama, S., Markus, H., & Nisbett, R. (1998). The cultural matrix of social psychology. In D. Gilbert, S.
Fiske, & G. Lindzey (Eds.), The handbook of social psychology (4th ed., pp. 915–981). NY: McGraw-Hill.
Fiske, S. T., & Taylor, S. E. (2007). Social cognition: From brains to culture. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Gilovich, T. (1993). How we know what isn’t so: The fallibility of human reason in everyday life. New York, NY:Free Press.
Gold, P. E., Cahill, L., & Wenk, G. L. (2002). Ginkgo biloba: A cognitive enhancer? Psychological Science in the
Public Interest, 3(1), 2–11.
Gould, S. J., & Lewontin, R. C. (1979). The spandrels of San Marco and the Panglossian paradigm: A critique of theadaptationist programme. In Proceedings of the Royal Society of London (Series B, Vol. 205, pp. 581–598).
Hansell, J., Ehrlich, J., Katz, W., Lerner, H., & Minter, K. (2008). Psychoanalysis & psychodynamic psychology.
American Psychological Association. Retrieved fromhttp://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/topss/lesson/secure/psychoanalysis.pdf
Harris, J. (1998). The nurture assumption: Why children turn out the way they do. NY: Touchstone Books.
Heider, F. (1958). The psychology of interpersonal relations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum; Kelley, H. H. (1967).
Attribution theory in social psychology. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska symposium on motivation (Vol. 15, pp. 192–
240). Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press.
Hock, R. (2009). Forty studies that changed psychology. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Hsee, C. K., & Hastie, R. (2006). Decision and experience: Why don’t we choose what makes us happy? Trends in
Cognitive Sciences, 10(1), 31–37.
Huber R, Hill SL, Holladay C, Biesiadecki M, Tononi & G, Cirelli C (2005). Sleep Homeostasis in Drosophila
Melanogaster. Sleep, 27(4), 628–639
Hunt, M. (1993). The story of psychology. New York, NY: Anchor Books.
Ilardi, S. S., & Feldman, D. (2001). The cognitive neuroscience paradigm: A unifying metatheoretical framework forthe science and practice of clinical psychology. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 57(9), 1067–1088.
Kahneman, D. (2011). Thinking, fast and slow. New York, NY: Farrar, Straus and Giroux.
Kolb, B., & Whishaw, I.Q. (2011). An introduction to brain and behavior (3rd. ed.). New York: Worth Publishers.
James, W. (1890). The principles of psychology. New York, NY: Dover.
Locke, E. A., & Latham, G. P. (2006). New directions in goal-setting theory. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 15(5), 265–268
Markus, H. R., Kitayama, S., & Heiman, R. J. (1996). Culture and “basic” psychological principles. In E. T. Higgins

33

& A. W. Kruglanski (Eds.), Social psychology: Handbook of basic principles (pp. 857–913). New York, NY:
Guilford Press.
Matsumoto, D. (Ed.). (2001). The handbook of culture and psychology. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
McDaniel, M. A., Maier, S. F., & Einstein, G. O. (2002). “Brain-specific” nutrients: A memory cure? Psychological
Science in the Public Interest, 3(1), 12–38.
Mesoudi, A. (2009). How cultural evolutionary theory can inform social psychology and vice versa. Psychological
Review, 116(4), 929–952.
Moore, B. E., & Fine, B. D. (1995). Psychoanalysis: The major concepts. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
Moore, H. B. (1989). Person-centered approaches. D. T. Brown & H. Thompson (Eds.), Counseling andpsychotherapy with children and adolescents (2nd ed.). Brandon, VT: Clinical Psychology Publishing Co.
National Science Foundation. (2017). Women, minorities, and persons with disabilities in science and engineering.
Retrieved from https://nsf.gov/statistics/2017/nsf17310/
Nisbett, R. E., & Ross, L. (1980). Human inference: Strategies and shortcomings of social judgment. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Pinker, S. (2002). The blank slate: The modern denial of human nature. New York, NY: Penguin Putnam.
Rogers, C. R. (1959). A theory of therapy, personality, and interpersonal relationships as developed in the clientcentered framework. In S. Koch (Ed.), Psychology: A study of science (Vol. III): Formulations of the person and thesocial context. New York: McGraw Hill.
Rogers, T. B., Kuiper, N. A., & Kirker, W. S. (1977). Self-reference and the encoding of personal information.
Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 35(9), 677–688.
Skinner, B. (1957). Verbal behavior. Acton, MA: Copley.
Skinner, B. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York, NY: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
Skinner, B. (1972). Beyond freedom and dignity. New York, NY: Vintage Books.
Stewart, W. (2008). A biographical dictionary of psychologists, psychiatrists, and psychotherapists. Jefferson, NC:
McFarland & Company.
Tobler I, & Neuner-Jehle M (1992). "24-h variation of vigilance in the cockroach Blaberus giganteus". Journal of
Sleep Research, 1 (4), 231–239.
Tooby, J., & Cosmides, L. (1992). The psychological foundations of culture. In J. H. Barkow & L. Cosmides (Eds.),
The adapted mind: Evolutionary psychology and the generation of culture (p. 666). New York, NY: Oxford
University Press.
Vazire, S. (2014). Personality. American Psychological Association. Retrieved fromhttp://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/topss/lessons/secure/personality.pdf
Yang, Y.-J., & Chiu, C.-Y. (2009). Mapping the structure and dynamics of psychological knowledge: Forty years of
APA journal citations (1970–2009). Review of General Psychology, 13(4), 349–356.
Watson, J. B., Rayner, R. (1920). Conditioned emotional reactions. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 3(1), 1–14.
Wegner, D. M. (2002). The illusion of conscious will. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

34

Wells, G. L., & Hasel, L. E. (2008). Eyewitness identification: Issues in common knowledge and generalization. In E.
Borgida & S. T. Fiske (Eds.), Beyond common sense: Psychological science in the courtroom (pp. 159–176).
Malden, NJ: Blackwell.
Wilson, E. O. (1998). Consilience: The unity of knowledge. New York, NY: Vintage Books.

35

Chapter 2 Psychological Science
Learning Objective
1. Differentiate between basic and applied research.

Psychologists study the behavior of both humans and animals. The main purpose of this researchis to help us understand people and to improve the quality of human lives. The results ofpsychological research are relevant to problems such as learning and memory, homelessness,
psychological disorders, family instability, and aggressive behavior and violence. Psychologicalresearch is used in a range of important areas, from public policy to driver safety. It guides court
rulings with respect to racism and sexism (Brown v. Board of Education, 1954; Fiske, Bersoff,
Borgida, Deaux, & Heilman, 1991). It shapes court procedures by allowing for the analysis oflie detector results during criminal trials (Saxe, Dougherty, & Cross, 1985). Research helps us
understand how driver behavior affects safety (Fajen & Warren, 2003. It demonstrates which
methods of teaching children are most effective (Alexander & Winne, 2006; Woolfolk-Hoy,2005). Other research shows how to best detect deception (DePaulo et al., 2003) and some of
the causes of terrorism (Borum, 2004).

Basic vs. Applied ResearchSome psychological research is basic research. Basic
Figure 2.1
research is research that answers fundamental
questions about behavior. For instance,
biopsychologists study how nerves conduct impulses
from the receptors in the skin to the brain. Cognitive
psychologists investigate how different types ofstudying influence memory for pictures and words.
There is no reason to examine such things except toacquire a better knowledge of how these processes
occur. Applied research is research that investigatesissues that have implications for everyday life andSource: https://www.flickr.com/help/photos/#2265887
provides solutions to everyday problems. Appliedresearch has been conducted to study, among many other things, the most effective methods for
reducing depression, the types of advertising campaigns that serve to reduce drug and alcoholabuse, the key predictors of managerial success in business, and the indicators of effective
government programs.
Basic research and applied research complement each other, and advances in science occur more
rapidly when each type of research is conducted (Lewin, 1999). For instance, researchconcerning the role of practice on memory for lists of words is basic in orientation, but the36results could potentially be applied to help children learn to read. Correspondingly, psychologistpractitioners who wish to reduce the spread of AIDS frequently base their programs on thefindings of basic research. This basic AIDS research is applied to help change people’s attitudes
and behaviors.
The results of psychological research are reported primarily in research articles published inscientific journals. The research reported in scientific journals has been evaluated, critiqued, andimproved by scientists in the field through the process of peer review. In this book, there aremany citations to original research articles, and you are e ncouraged to read those reports when
you find a topic interesting. Most of these papers are readily available online through our college
library. It is only by reading the original reports that you will see how the research process
works.
In this chapter, you will learn how psychologists develop and test their research ideas, how theymeasure the thoughts, feelings, and behavior of individuals, and how they analyze and interpretthe data they collect. To understand psychology, you must understand how and why the
research you are reading about was conducted and what the collected data mean. Learning
about the principles and practices of psychological research will allow you to critically read,interpret, and evaluate research.
In addition to helping you learn the material in this course, the ability to interpret and conduct
research is also useful in many of the careers that you might choose. For instance, advertisingand marketing researchers study how to make advertising more effective. Health and medical
researchers study how behaviors, such as drug use and smoking, influence illness. Computerscientists study how people interact with computers. Furthermore, even if you are not planninga career as a researcher, jobs in almost any area of social, medical, or mental health science
require that a worker be informed about psychological research.

Psychologists Use the Scientific Method to Guide Their Research
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the principles of the scientific method and explain its importance in

conducting and interpreting research.
2. Explain what is meant by a research hypothesis.
3. Discuss the procedures that researchers use to ensure that their research with humans andwith animals is ethical.
Psychologists are not the only people who seek to understand human behavior and solve social
problems. Philosophers, religious leaders, politicians and others also strive to provide
explanations for human behavior. But psychologists believe that research is the best tool forunderstanding human beings and their relationships with others. Rather than accepting the claimof a philosopher that people have free will, a psychologist would collect data to empirically test
whether people are able to actively control their own behavior. Rather than accepting apolitician’s contention that creating a new center for mental health will improve the lives of37

individuals, a psychologist would empirically assess the effects of receiving mental healthtreatment on the quality of life of the recipients. The statements made by psychologists are
empirical, which means they are based on systematic collection and analysis of data.

The Scientific Method
All scientists, whether they are physicists, chemists, biologists, sociologists, or psychologists,
are engaged in the basic processes of collecting data and drawing conclusions about those data.
The methods used by scientists have developed over many years and provide a common
framework for developing, organizing, and sharing information. The scientific method is the setof assumptions, rules, and procedures scientists use to conduct research.
In addition to requiring that science be empirical, the scientific method demands that theprocedures used are objective, or free from the personal bias or emotions of the scientist. The
scientific method describes how scientists collect, analyze, draw conclusions from, and sharedata. These rules increase objectivity by placing data under the scrutiny of other scientists andeven the public at large. Because data are reported with all relevant details about the procedure,
the setting and the participants, other scientists know exactly how the scientist collected andanalyzed the data. This means that they do not have to rely only on the scientist’s own
interpretation of the data; they may draw their own conclusions.
Most research is designed to repeat, add to, or modify previous research findings. The scientificmethod, therefore, results in the accumulation and continuous refinement or revision of scientificknowledge.

Laws and Theories as Organizing Principles
One goal of research is to organize information into meaningful statements that can be applied inmany situations. Principles that are so general as to apply to all situations in a given domain of
inquiry are known as laws.
The next step down from laws in the hierarchy of organizing principles is theory. A theory is an
integrated set of principles that explains and predicts many, but not all, observed relationships
within a given domain of inquiry. One example of an important theory in psychology is the stage
theory of cognitive development proposed by the Swiss psychologist Jean Piaget. The theory
states that children pass through a series of cognitive stages as they grow, each of which must be
mastered in progression before movement to the next cognitive stage can occur. This is anextremely useful theory in human development because it can be applied to many different
content areas and can be tested in numerous ways.
Good theories have four important characteristics. First, good theories are general, meaning theysummarize many different outcomes. Second, they are parsimonious, meaning they provide thesimplest possible account of those outcomes. The stage theory of cognitive development meets38both of these requirements. It can account for developmental changes in behavior across a wide
variety of domains, and it does so parsimoniously by hypothesizing a simple set of cognitive
stages. Third, good theories are generative, that is they provide ideas for future research. The
stage theory of cognitive development has been applied not only to learning about cognitive
skills, but also to the study of children’s moral (Kohlberg, 1966) and gender development (Ruble& Martin, 1998).
Finally, good theories are falsifiable, which means the variables of interest can be adequately
measured and the predicted relationships between the variables can be shown through research
to be incorrect (Popper, 1959). The stage theory of cognitive development is falsifiable because
the stages of cognitive reasoning can be measured. Additionally, if research discovers thatchildren learn new tasks before the theory says they should, then the theory will be shown to beincorrect. Research can lead to new theories, but most psychologists use existing theories anddevelop hypotheses that match the theory they are using.
No single theory accounts for all behavior in all cases. Rather, theories are each limited in thatthey make accurate predictions in some situations or for some people, but not in other situations
or for other people. As a result, there is a constant exchange between theory and data: Existing
theories are modified on the basis of collected data. The new modified theories then make newpredictions that are tested by new data, and so forth. When a better theory is found, it will
replace the old one. This is part of the accumulation of scientific knowledge.

The Research Hypothesis
Theories are usually framed too broadly to be tested in a single experiment. Therefore, scientists
use a research hypothesis as the basis for their research. A research hypothesis is a specific andfalsifiable prediction about the relationship between or among two or more variables. A
variable is any attribute that can assume different values among different people or acrossdifferent times or places. The research hypothesis states the existence of a relationship between
the variables of interest and the specific direction of that relationship. For instance, the research
hypothesis “Using marijuana will reduce learning” predicts that there is a relationship between
the variable “using marijuana” and another variable called “learning.”
The term operational definition refers to a precise statement of how a variable is measured
or manipulated by the researcher. For example, depression might be operationally defined by
the score on a checklist, or intelligence might be operationally defined as the results of an IQ
test. When an operational definition is used, then everyone knows precisely what a researcher
means by an otherwise vague term like depression or intelligence.
Table 2.1 lists some potential operational definitions of variables that have been used in
psychological research. As you read through this list, note that the variables are very specific.
This specificity is important for two reasons. First, more specific definitions mean that there isless danger that the collected data will be misunderstood by others. Second, specificdefinitions will enable future researchers to replicate the research.

39

Table 2.1 Examples of the Operational Definitions of Conceptual Variables That Have
Been Used in Psychological Research
Variable

Operational Definitions••

Number of presses of a button that administers shock to another student
Number of seconds taken to honk the horn at the car ahead after a stoplightturns green••

Number of inches that an individual places his or her chair away fromanother person
Number of millimeters of pupil dilation when one person looks at another

Employeesatisfaction•

Number of days per month an employee shows up to work on time•

Rating of job satisfaction from 1 (not at all satisfied) to 9 (extremely
satisfied)

Decision-making
skills••Number of groups able to correctly solve a group performance task
Number of seconds in which a person solves a problem

Depression••

Number of negative words used in a creative story
Number of appointments made with a psychotherapist

Aggression

Interpersonal
attraction

Conducting Ethical Research
One of the issues that all scientists must address concerns the ethics of their research. Physicists
are concerned about the potentially harmful outcomes of their experiments with nuclear
materials. Biologists worry about the potential outcomes of creating genetically engineered
human babies. Medical researchers agonize over the ethics of withholding potentially beneficial
drugs from control groups in clinical trials. Likewise, psychologists are continually considering
the ethics of their research.
Research in psychology may cause some stress, harm, or inconvenience for the people who
participate in that research. For instance, researchers may ask introductory psychology students
to participate in research projects and then deceive these students, at least temporarily, about thenature of the research. Psychologists may induce stress, anxiety, or negative moods in their
participants, expose them to weak electrical shocks, or convince them to behave in ways that
violate their moral standards. Additionally, researchers may sometimes use animals, potentiallyharming them in the process.
Decisions about whether research is ethical are made using established ethical codes developedby scientific organizations, such as the American Psychological Association, and federal
governments. In the United States, the Department of Health and Human Services provides theguidelines for ethical standards in research. Some research, such as the research conducted by the
Nazis on prisoners during World War II, is perceived as immoral by almost everyone. Other
procedures, such as the use of animals in research testing the effectiveness of drugs, are more
controversial.
40Characteristics of an Ethical Research Project Using Human ParticipantsThis list presents some of the most important factors that psychologists take into consideration
when designing their research:
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

Trust and positive rapport are created between the researcher and the participant.
The rights of both the experimenter and participant are considered, and the relationshipbetween them is mutually beneficial.
The experimenter treats the participant with concern and respect and attempts to makethe research experience a pleasant and informative one.
Before the research begins, the participant is given all information relevant to his or her
decision to participate, including any possibilities of physical danger or psychologicalstress.
The participant is given a chance to have questions about the procedure answered, thus
guaranteeing his or her free choice about participating.
After the experiment is over, any deception that has been used is made public, and thenecessity for it is explained.
The experimenter carefully debriefs the participant, explaining the underlying research
hypothesis and the purpose of the experimental procedure in detail and answering anyquestions.
The experimenter provides information about how he or she can be contacted and offers
to provide information about the results of the research if the participant is interested inreceiving it. (Stangor, 2011)

American Psychological Association Code of Ethics
No Harm is he most direct ethical concern of the researcher and prevents harm to the research
participants. One example that potentially violated this principle is the well-known research of
Stanley Milgram (1974), who investigated obedience to authority. In his studies, participants
were instructed by an experimenter to administer electric shocks to another person so that
Milgram could study the extent to which they would obey the demands of an authority figure.
Although no shocks were actually administered, the participants thought they had, and as aresult, evidenced high levels of stress. They also experienced psychological conflict between
following the experiemnter’s instructions to deliver the shocks and what they wanted to do,which was not to administer the shocks. Studies, such as those by Milgram, are no longer
conducted because the scientific community is more sensitized to the potential of such procedures
creating emotional discomfort or harm.
Informed consent is conducted before a participant begins a research session, and is designed
to explain the research procedures and inform the participant of his or her rights during theinvestigation. The informed consent explains as much as possible about the true nature of thestudy, particularly everything that might be expected to influence willingness to participate, but it
may in some cases withhold some information that allows the study to work.
A goal of ethical research is to guarantee that participants have free choice regarding whether
they wish to participate in research. Students in psychology classes may be allowed, or evenrequired, to participate in research, but they are also always given an option to choose a different
41

study to be in, or to perform other activities instead. Once an experiment begins, the research
participant is always free to leave the experiment if he or she wishes to. Concerns with freechoice also occur in institutional settings, such as in schools, hospitals, corporations, and prisons,when individuals are required by the institutions to take certain tests, or when employees are told
or asked to participate in research.
Confidentiality refers to researchers protecting the privacy of research participants. In somecases, data can be kept anonymous by not having the respondents put any identifying
information on their questionnaires. In other cases, the data cannot be anonymous because theresearcher needs to keep track of which respondent contributed the data. In this case one
technique is to have each participant use a unique code number to identify his or her data, suchas the last four digits of the student ID number. In this way, the researcher can keep track ofwhich person completed which questionnaire, but no one will be able to connect the data with
the individual who contributed them.
Deception occurs whenever research participants are not completely and fully informed about
the nature of the research project before participating in it. This is perhaps the most widespread
ethical concern to the participants in behavioral research. Deception may occur in an active way,such as when the researcher tells the participants that a study is about learning when in fact theexperiment really measures obedience to authority. In other cases, the deception is more passive,
such as when participants are not told about the hypothesis being studied or the potential use of
the data being collected.
Some researchers have argued that no deception should ever be used in any research (Baumrind,1985). They argue that participants should always be told the complete truth about the nature of
the research they are in, and that when participants are deceived there will be negative
consequences, such as the possibility that participants may arrive at other studies alreadyexpecting to be deceived. Other psychologists defend the use of deception on the grounds that itis needed to get participants to act naturally and to enable the study of psychological phenomenathat might not otherwise get investigated. They argue that it would be impossible to study topics
such as altruism, aggression, obedience, and stereotyping without using deception because if
participants were informed ahead of time what the study involved, this knowledge would
certainly change their behavior. The codes of ethics of the American Psychological Associationand other organizations allow researchers to use deception, but these codes also require them toexplicitly consider how their research might be conducted without the use of deception.
Debriefing is a procedure designed to fully explain the purposes and procedures of the researchand remove any harmful aftereffects of participation. Because participating in research has thepotential for producing long-term changes in the research participants, all participants should befully debriefed immediately after their participation.

Ensuring That Research Is Ethical
Making decisions about the ethics of research involves weighing the costs and benefits ofconducting versus not conducting a given research project (Rosenthal, 1994). The costs involve
potential harm to the research participants and to the field, whereas the benefits include the42potential for advancing knowledge about human behavior and offering various advantages, someeducational, to the individual participants. Most generally, the ethics of a given research projectare determined through a cost-benefit analysis, in which the costs are compared to the benefits.
If the potential costs of the research appear to outweigh any potential benefits that might comefrom it, then the research should not proceed.
One example of this risk-benefit analysis can be found in clinical drug trials. Researchers must
weigh the potential good of a new drug against the possible harm. Few drugs are without side
effects, and the drugs used to treat mental illness are no exception. However, for a severely
depressed patient who has not responded to approved forms of treatment, the side effects of a
new drug must be weighed against the likelihood of prolonged suffering and the risk of suicide.
Arriving at a cost-benefit ratio is not simple. For one thing, there is no way to know ahead oftime what the effects of a given procedure will be on every person or animal who participates orwhat benefit to society the research is likely to produce. In addition, what is ethical is defined by
the current state of thinking within society, and thus perceived costs and benefits change overtime. The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services regulations require that all universities
receiving funds from the department set up a review process to determine whether proposed
research meets department regulations. The Institutional Review Board (IRB) is a committee
of at least five members whose goal it is to determine the cost-benefit ratio of research
conducted within an institution. The IRB approves the procedures of all the research conductedat the institution before the research can begin. The board may suggest modifications to theprocedures, or in rare cases, it may inform the scientist that the research violates Department of
Health and Human Services guidelines and thus cannot be conducted at all.

Research with Animals
Because animals make up an important part of the natural world, and because some researchcannot be conducted using humans, animals are also participants in psychological research. Most
psychological research using animals is now conducted with rats, mice, and birds, and the use ofother animals in research is declining (Thomas & Blackman, 1992). As with ethical decisions
involving human participants, a set of basic principles has been developed that helps researchers
make informed decisions about such research; a summary is shown below.

APA Guidelines on Humane Care and Use of Animals in Research
The following are some of the most important ethical principles from the American Psychological
Association’s guidelines on research with animals.
••

Psychologists acquire, care for, use, and dispose of animals in compliance with current federal,state, and local laws and regulations, and with professional standards.
Psychologists trained in research methods and experienced in the care of laboratory animals
supervise all procedures involving animals and are responsible for ensuring appropriate
consideration of their comfort, health, and humane treatment.
Psychologists ensure that all individuals under their supervision who are using animals havereceived instruction in research methods and in the care, maintenance, and handling of the species
being used, to the extent appropriate to their role.
43

•
•
•
•

Psychologists make reasonable efforts to minimize the discomfort, infection, illness, and pain ofanimal subjects.
Psychologists use a procedure subjecting animals to pain, stress, or privation only when an
alternative procedure is unavailable and the goal is justified by its prospective scientific,
educational, or applied value.
Psychologists perform surgical procedures under appropriate anesthesia and follow techniques toavoid infection and minimize pain during and after surgery.
When it is appropriate that an animal’s life be terminated, psychologists proceed rapidly, with aneffort to minimize pain and in accordance with accepted procedures. (American Psychological
Association, 2012)

Figure 2.2

Because the use of animals in research involves apersonal value, people naturally disagree about thispractice. Although many people accept the value ofsuch research (Plous, 1996), a minority of people,
including animal-rights activists, believes that it is
ethically wrong to conduct research on animals. This
argument is based on the assumption that because
animals are living creatures just as humans are, noharm should ever be done to them.

Psychologists may use animals in theirresearch, but they make reasonable
efforts to minimize the discomfort the
animals experience.© Thinkstock

Most scientists, however, reject this view. They argue
that such beliefs ignore the potential benefits that havecome from research with animals. For instance, drugs
that can reduce the incidence of cancer or AIDS may first be tested on animals, and surgery thatcan save human lives may first be practiced on animals. Research on animals has also led to abetter understanding of the physiological causes of depression, phobias, and stress, among otherillnesses. In contrast to animal-rights activists, then, scientists believe that because there aremany benefits that accrue from animal research. They maintain that such research can and should
continue as long as the humane treatment of the animals used in the research is guaranteed.

Key Takeaways
•
•

•
•

Psychologists use the scientific method to generate, accumulate, and reportscientific knowledge.
Basic research, which answers questions about behavior, and applied research,which finds solutions to everyday problems, inform each other and work together
to advance science.
Research reports describing scientific studies are published in scientific journals sothat other scientists and laypersons may review the empirical findings.
Organizing principles, including laws, theories and research hypotheses, give
structure and uniformity to scientific methods.
Concerns for conducting ethical research are paramount. Researchers assure thatparticipants are given free choice to participate and that their privacy is protected.
Informed consent and debriefing help provide humane treatment of participants.
44•

A cost-benefit analysis is used to determine what research should and should not beallowed to proceed.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Give an example from personal experience of how you or someone you know havebenefited from the results of scientific research.
2. Find and discuss a research project that in your opinion has ethical concerns. Explain
why you find these concerns to be troubling.
3. Indicate your personal feelings about the use of animals in research. When should
and should not animals be used?

Psychologists Use Descriptive, Correlational, and Experimental Research
Designs to Understand Behavior
Learning Objectives
1. Differentiate between the goals of descriptive, correlational, and experimental research

designs and explain the advantages and disadvantages of each.
2. Explain how descriptive research is conducted.
3. Summarize the uses of correlational research and describe the difference between

correlation and causation.
4. Review the procedures of experimental research and explain how it can be used to
draw causal inferences.
5. Define representative sample, independent variable, dependent variable.
Psychologists agree that if their ideas and theories about human behavior are to be taken
seriously, they must be supported by data. However, the research of different psychologists isdesigned with different goals in mind, and the different goals require different approaches. Thesevarying approaches, summarized in Table 2.2, are known as research designs, which are thespecific methods a researcher uses to collect, analyze, and interpret data. Psychologists use
three major types of research designs in their research, and each provides an essential avenue forscientific investigation. Descriptive research is research that observes specific behaviors andrecords the observation. Correlational research is research designed to discover relationships
among variables and to allow the prediction of future events from present knowledge.
Experimental research is research in which initial equivalence among research participants inmore than one group is created, followed by a manipulation of a given experience for thesegroups and a measurement of the influence of the manipulation. Each of the three research
designs varies according to its strengths and limitations.

45

Table 2.2 Characteristics of the Three Research Designs
Research
designGoal

Advantages

Disadvantages

Descriptive

To observe and record
specific behaviors

Provides a relatively complete
picture of what is occurring at agiven time. Allows thedevelopment of questions forfurther study.

Does not assess relationships
among variables. May be
unethical if participants do notknow they are being observed.

Correlational

To assess therelationships between
and among two or morevariables

Allows testing of expected
relationships between and among
variables and the making ofpredictions. Can assess these
relationships in everyday life
events.

Cannot be used to draw
inferences about the causal
relationships between andamong the variables.

Experimental

To assess the causal
impact of one or moreexperimental
manipulations on adependent variable

Allows drawing of conclusions
about the causal relationships
among variables.

Cannot experimentallymanipulate many importantvariables. May be expensive
and time consuming.

Source: Stangor, C. (2011). Research methods for the behavioral sciences (4th ed.). Mountain View, CA: Cengage.

Descriptive Research
Descriptive research is designed to create a snapshot of the current thoughts, feelings, or
behavior of individuals. This section reviews three types of descriptive research: Case studies,surveys, and observations.
Case Study: Sometimes the data in a descriptive research project are based on only a small setof individuals, often only one person or a single small group. These research designs are known
as case studies or descriptive records of one or more individual’s experiences and behavior.
Sometimes case studies involve ordinary individuals. Developmental psychologist Jean Piaget
observed his own children. More frequently, case studies are conducted on individuals who
have unusual or abnormal experiences. The assumption is that by carefully studying these
individuals, we can learn something about human nature.
A well-known case study is Phineas Gage, a man whose thoughts and emotions were extensively
studied after a tamping iron was blasted through his skull in an accident. Although there is aquestion about the interpretation of this case study (Kotowicz, 2007), it did provide early
evidence that the brain’s frontal lobe is involved in emotion and morality (Damasio et al., 2005).
46

Survey: In other studies, the data from descriptive
research projects come in the form of a survey,
questions administered through either an interview
or a written questionnaire to get a picture of thebeliefs or behaviors of a sample of people ofinterest. The following categories are used forindividuals involved in a survey:•

Population is all the people that the
researcher wishes to know about.

Figure 2.3
Political polls reported innewspapers and on the Internet aredescriptive research designs thatprovide snapshots of the likely
voting behavior of a population. ©

•Sample is the people chosen from the
population to participate in the research.

•

Representative sample reflects the
population on key variables such as gender, ethnicity, and socio-economic status, and it isnecessary to draw valid conclusions about the population.

Thinkstock

In election polls, for instance, a sample is taken from the population of all “likely voters” in theupcoming elections. A representative sample of likely voters would include the same percentagesof males, females, age groups, ethnic groups, and socio-economic groups as the larger
population.
Observations: A final type of descriptive research is known as observation. When using
naturalistic observation, psychologists observe and record behavior that occurs in everyday
settings. For instance, a developmental psychologist might watch children on a playground anddescribe what they say to each other. Laboratory observation is conducted in a setting createdby the researcher. This permits the researcher to control more aspects of the situation. One
example of laboratory observation involves a systematic procedure known as the strange
situation. This research is used to get a picture of how adults and young children interact.

Descriptive Statistics
The results of descriptive research projects are analyzed using descriptive statistics; that is,numbers that summarize the distribution of scores on a measured variable. Most variables have
distributions where most of the scores are located near the center of the distribution and the
distribution is symmetrical and bell-shaped. A data distribution that is shaped liked a bell in
known as a normal distribution.
A distribution can be described in terms of its central tendency; that is, the point in the
distribution around which the data are centered. There are three measures of central tendency.
They include: The mean or arithmetic average is the most commonly used measure of central
tendency. It is computed by calculating the sum of all the scores of the variable and dividing thissum by the number of participants in the distribution. In some cases, however, the data
distribution is not symmetrical. This occurs when there are one or more extreme scores, known
as outliers, at one end of the distribution. Consider, for instance, the variable of family income47

(see Figure 2.4), which includes an outlier of $3,800,000. In this case the mean is not a goodmeasure of central tendency. Although it appears from Figure 2.4 that the central tendency of thefamily income variable should be around $70,000, the mean family income is actually $223,960.
The single very extreme income has a disproportionate impact on the mean, resulting in a valuethat does not well represent the central tendency of the data.
The median is the score in the center of the distribution, meaning that 50% of the scores are
greater than the median and 50% of the scores are less than the median. The median is used as
an alternative measure of central tendency when distributions are not symmetrical. In our case,the median household income ($73,000) is a much better indication of central tendency than is
the mean household income ($223,960).
A final measure of central tendency, known as the mode, represents the value that occurs mostfrequently in the distribution. You can see from Figure 2.4, the mode for the family income
variable is $93,000 as it occurs four times. In addition to summarizing the central tendency of a
distribution, descriptive statistics convey information about how the scores of the variable are
spread around the central tendency. The distribution of family incomes is likely to be
nonsymmetrical because some incomes can be very large in comparison to most incomes. In thiscase the median or the mode is a better indicator of central tendency than is the mean.

Figure 2.4 Family Income Distribution

Dispersion refers to the extent to which the scores are all tightly clustered around the central
tendency. Figures 2.5 and 2.6 demonstrate the dispersion of scores. In Figure 2.5 the scores are
clustered together indicating little dispersion or variation in the scores, while in Figure 2.6 thescores are spread out indicating greater dispersion or variation.

48

Figure 2.5

Figure 2.6

One simple measure of dispersion is to find the range, which is the maximum observed scoreminus the minimum observed score. However, the standard deviation, which is the measure of
the approximate average amount scores in a distribution deviate from the mean, is the mostcommonly used measure of dispersion. Distributions with a larger standard deviation have more
spread.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Descriptive Research
An advantage of descriptive research is that it attempts to capture the complexity of everyday
behavior. Case studies provide detailed information about a single person or a small group ofpeople, surveys capture the thoughts or reported behaviors of a large population of people, andobservation objectively records the behavior of people or animals as it occurs. Thus, descriptive
research is used to provide a relatively complete understanding of what is currently happening.
Despite these advantages, descriptive research has a distinct disadvantage in that, although it
allows us to get an idea of what is currently happening, it is usually limited to static pictures.
Although descriptions of particular experiences may be interesting, they are not always
transferable to other individuals in other situations, nor do they tell us exactly why specificbehaviors or events occurred. For instance, descriptions of individuals who have suffered a
stressful event, such as a war or an earthquake, can be used to understand the individuals’
reactions to the event but cannot tell us anything about the long-term effects of the stress.
Because there is no comparison group that did not experience the stressful situation, we cannot
know what these individuals would be like if they had not had the stressful experience.

Correlational Research
In contrast to descriptive research, which is designed primarily to provide static pictures,
correlational research involves the measurement of two or more relevant variables and anassessment of the relationship among those variables. For instance, the variables of height andweight are correlated because taller people generally weigh more than shorter people. In thesame way, study time and memory errors are also correlated, because the more time a person is
given to study a list of words, the fewer errors he or she will make.

49

When variables change in the same direction, the relationship is said to be a positive
correlation. Examples of positive correlations include those between height and weight,
education and income, and age and mathematical abilities in children. In each case, people whoscore higher on one of the variables also score higher on the other variable. In contrast, anegative correlation occurs when values for one variable change in the opposite direction forthe other variable. Examples of negative correlations include those between the age of a childand the number of diapers the child uses, and between amount of time studying and the numberof errors made on a test. In these cases, people who score higher on one of the variables scorelower on the other variable.
One way of organizing the data from a correlational study with two variables is to graph thevalues of each of the measured variables using a scatter plot, a visual image of the relationshipbetween two variables. As you can see in Figure 2.7, a point represents the intersection of a
subject’s scores for two variables. When the association between the variables on the scatter plot
can be easily approximated with a straight line, as in parts (a) and (b) of Figure 2.7, thevariables are said to have a linear relationship.

Figure 2.7 Examples of
Scatter Plots
Some examples of relationships
between two variables as shown inscatter plots. Note that the Pearson
correlation coefficient (r) between
variables that have curvilinear
relationships will likely be close to
zero.
Source: Adapted from Stangor, C. (2011). Research methods forthe behavioral sciences (4th ed.). Mountain View, CA: Cengage.

The Pearson Correlation Coefficient, symbolized by the letter r, is the most common statisticalmeasure of the strength of linear relationships among variables. The value of the correlation
coefficient ranges from r= –1.00 to r = +1.00. The direction of the linear relationship is indicatedby the sign of the correlation coefficient. Positive values of r (such as r = .54 or r = .67) indicatethat the relationship is positive linear (i.e., the pattern of the dots on the scatter plot runs from thelower left to the upper right), whereas negative values of r (such as r = –.30 or r = –.72) indicate
negative linear relationships (i.e., the dots run from the upper left to the lower right). The
strength of the linear relationship is indexed by the distance of the correlation coefficient fromzero. For instance, r = –.54 is a stronger relationship than r= .30, and r = .72 is a stronger
relationship than r = –.57.
50

Relationships between variables that cannot be described with a straight line are known
as nonlinear relationships. Examples of nonlinear relationships include independent andcurvilinear. Part (c) of Figure 2.7 shows a common pattern in which the distribution of the points
is essentially random. In this example, there is no relationship at all between the two variables,
and they are said to be independent. Parts (d) and (e) show patterns of association in which,although there is an association, the points are not well described by a single straight line. For
instance, part (d) shows the type of relationship that frequently occurs between anxiety andperformance. Increases in anxiety from low to moderate levels are associated with performanceincreases, whereas increases in anxiety from moderate to high levels are associated withdecreases in performance. Relationships that change in direction and thus are not described by asingle straight line are called curvilinear relationships.
An important limitation of correlational research designs is that they cannot be used to draw
conclusions about the causal relationships among the measured variables. Consider, for instance,a researcher who has hypothesized that viewing violent behavior will cause increased aggressive
play in children. He has collected, from a sample of fourth-grade children, a measure of how
much violent television each child views during the week, as well as a measure of how
aggressively each child plays on the school playground. From his collected data, the researcher
discovers a positive correlation between the two measured variables. Although this positive
correlation appears to support the researcher’s hypothesis, it cannot be taken to indicate thatviewing violent television causes aggressive behavior.

Figure 2.8

Although the researcher is tempted to assume that viewing violent television causes aggressive
play (see Figure 2.8) there are other possibilities. One alternate possibility is that the causal
direction is exactly opposite from what has been hypothesized (see Figure 2.9). Perhaps children
who have behaved aggressively at school develop residual excitement that leads them to want towatch violent television shows at home:
Figure 2.951

Although this possibility may seem less likely, there is no way to rule out the possibility of such
reverse causation on the basis of this observed correlation. It is also possible that both causal
directions are operating and that the two variables cause each other (see Figure 2.10):
Figure 2.10

Third Variables: Still another possible explanation for the observed correlation is that it has
been produced by the presence of a third variable. A third variable is a variable that is not partof the research hypothesis but produces the observed correlation between them. In our example apotential third variable is the discipline style of the children’s parents (see Figure 2.11). Parents
who use a harsh and punitive discipline style may produce children who both like to watch
violent television and who behave aggressively in comparison to children whose parents use lessharsh discipline:
Figure 2.11

In this case, television viewing and aggressive play would be positively correlated, as indicatedby the curved arrow between them, even though neither one caused the other but they were bothcaused by the discipline style of the parents, the straight arrows. When the variables are bothcaused by a third variable, the observed relationship is said to be spurious. If effects of the third
variable were taken away, or controlled for, the relationship between the variables would
disappear. In the example the relationship between aggression and television viewing might bespurious because by controlling for the effect of the parents’ disciplining style, the relationshipbetween television viewing and aggressive behavior might go away.
Third variables in correlational research designs can be thought of as mystery variables because,as they have not been measured, and their presence and identity are usually unknown to theresearcher. Since it is not possible to measure every variable that could cause both the variables,
the existence of an unknown third variable is always a possibility. For this reason, we are left52

with the basic limitation of correlational research: Correlation does not demonstratecausation. It is important that when you read about correlational research projects, you keep inmind the possibility of spurious relationships, and be sure to interpret the findings appropriately.
Although correlational research is sometimes reported as demonstrating causality without any
mention being made of the possibility of reverse causation or third variables, informed
consumers of research, like you, are aware of these interpretational problems.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Correlational Research
In sum, correlational research designs have both advantages and disadvantages. One strength isthat they can be used when experimental research is not possible because the variables cannot be
manipulated. Correlational designs also have the advantage of allowing the researcher to study
behavior as it occurs in everyday life. Additionally, we can also use correlational designs tomake predictions, for instance, to predict from the scores on their battery of tests the success ofjob trainees during a training session. However, we cannot use such correlational information todetermine whether the training caused better job performance. For that, researchers rely on
experiments.

Experimental Research
The goal of the experimental research is to provide more definitive conclusions about thecausal relationships among the variables in the research hypothesis than is available fromcorrelational research. In the experimental research design, the variables of interest are called
the independent variable and the dependent variable. The independent variable in anexperiment is the causing variable that is created or manipulated by the experimenter. The
dependent variable in an experiment is a measured variable that is expected to be influenced by
the experimental manipulation. In other words, this variable is dependent on the experimental
manipulation. The research hypothesis suggests that the manipulated independent variable willcause changes in the measured dependent variable.
A good experiment has at least two groups that are compared. The experimental group
receives the experimenters’ manipulation. For example, the experimental group might receive a
new medication for depression. The comparison group, often called the control group, receives
either no manipulation or nothing out of the ordinary. For example, the control group might
receive their current medication for depression or a placebo, which is often just a sugar pill.
The research hypothesis suggests that the manipulated independent variable or variables willcause changes in the measured dependent variables. Specifically, the new drug for depression
will cause a decrease in depressive symptions in the experimental group when compared to thecontrol group. To ensure that the participants in the experimental group and control group areequal in terms of demographic characterisitcs (e.g., gender, age, race, socioeconomic status,
symptoms), they must be randomly assigned to the groups. When using random assignment,each participant is assigned to a group through a random process, such as drawing numbers orusing a random number table.

53

Research Focus: Video Games and Aggression
Consider an experiment conducted by Anderson and Dill (2000). The study was designed to test
the hypothesis that viewing violent video games would increase aggressive behavior. In thisresearch, male and female undergraduates from Iowa State University were given a chance toplay with either a violent video game (Wolfenstein 3D) or a nonviolent video game (Myst).
During the experimental session, the participants played their assigned video games for 15
minutes. Then, after the play, each participant played a competitive game with an opponent inwhich the participant could deliver blasts of white noise through the earphones of the opponent.
The operational definition of the dependent variable (aggressive behavior) was the level andduration of noise delivered to the opponent. The design of the experiment is shown in Figure
2.12
Figure 2.12 An Experimental Research DesignAnderson and Dill first randomly assigned about 100 participants to each of their two groups(Group A and Group B). Because they used random assignment to conditions, they could be
confident that, before the experimental manipulation occurred, the students in Group A were, on
average, equivalent to the students in Group B on every possible variable, including variables
that are likely to be related to aggression, such as parental discipline style, peer relationships,
hormone levels, diet, and in fact everything else.
Then, after they had created initial equivalence, Anderson and Dill created the experimental
manipulation. They had the participants in Group A play the violent game and the participants inGroup B play the nonviolent game. Then they compared the dependent variable, which was thewhite noise blasts, between the two groups, finding that the students who had viewed the violent
video game gave significantly longer noise blasts than did the students who had played thenonviolent game.
Anderson and Dill had from the outset created initial equivalence between the groups. Thisinitial equivalence allowed them to observe differences in the white noise levels between the twogroups after the experimental manipulation, leading to the conclusion that it was the independent
variable, and not some other variable, that caused these differences. The idea is that the only
thing that was different between the students in the two groups was the video game they had
played.

54

Advantages and Disadvantages of Experimental ResearchExperimental designs have two very nice features. For one, they guarantee that the independent
variable occurs prior to the measurement of the dependent variable. This eliminates thepossibility of reverse causation. Second, the influence of third variables is controlled, and thus
eliminated, by creating initial equivalence through randomly assigning the participants in each of
the study groups before the manipulation occurs.
Despite the advantage of determining causation, experiments do have limitations. One is thatthey are often conducted in laboratory situations rather than in the everyday lives of people.
Therefore, we do not know whether results that we find in a laboratory setting will necessarily
hold up in everyday life. Second, and more important, is that some of the most interesting andkey social variables cannot be experimentally manipulated because of both practical and ethicalconcerns. If we want to study the influence of the size of a mob on the destructiveness of its
behavior, or to compare the personality characteristics of people who join suicide cults withthose of people who do not join such cults, these relationships must be assessed using
correlational designs, because it is simply not possible to experimentally manipulate thesevariables.

Key Takeaways
•
•

•

•
•

Descriptive, correlational, and experimental research designs are used to collectand analyze data.
Descriptive designs include case studies, surveys, and observations. The goal of these
designs is to get a picture of the current thoughts, feelings, or behaviors in a given
group of people. Descriptive research is summarized using descriptive statistics.
Correlational research designs measure two or more relevant variables and assess a
relationship between or among them. The Pearson Correlation Coefficient (r) is ameasure of the strength of linear relationship between two variables.
The possibility of third variables makes it impossible to draw causal conclusions
from correlational research designs.
Experimental research involves the manipulation of an independent variable andthe measurement of a dependent variable. Random assignment to conditions (e.g.
experimental group or control group) is normally used to create initial equivalence
between the groups, allowing researchers to draw causal conclusions.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. There is a negative correlation between the row that a student sits in in a large class(when the rows are numbered from front to back) and his or her final grade in theclass. Do you think this represents a causal relationship or a third variable, and why?

55

2. Think of two variables, other than those mentioned in this book, that are likely to becorrelated, but in which the correlation is probably spurious. What is the likely third
variable that is producing the relationship?
3. Imagine a researcher wants to test the hypothesis that participating in psychotherapy
will cause a decrease in reported anxiety. Describe the type of research design theinvestigator might use to draw this conclusion. What would be the independent anddependent variables in the research?

Factors that Contribute to Credible Research
Learning Objectives
1. Explain how a double-blind experiment is used to overcome experimenter bias andparticipant expectancy effects.
2. Define placebo and explain how placebos are used to prevent expectations fromleading to faulty conclusions.

Validity: Good research is valid research meaning the conclusions drawn by the researcher are
legitimate. For instance, if a researcher concludes that participating in psychotherapy reducesanxiety, the research is valid only if the therapy works. Unfortunately, there are many threats tothe validity of research, and these threats may sometimes lead to unwarranted conclusions.
Often, and despite researchers’ best intentions, some of the research reported on websites as wellas in newspapers, magazines, and even scientific journals is invalid. Validity is not an all-ornothing proposition, which means that some research is more valid than other research.
Normally, we can assume that the researchers have done their best to assure the validity of theirmeasures. But it is appropriate for you, as an informed consumer of research, to question this. It
is always important to remember that the ability to learn about the relationship between thevariables in a research hypothesis is dependent on the operational definitions of the measured
variables. The measures may not really measure the conceptual variables that they are designed
to assess. If, for example, a specific IQ test does not really measure intelligence, then it cannot be
used to draw accurate conclusions (Nunnally, 1978).
Reliability: One threat to valid research is that the measured variables are not reliable orconsistent. For example, a bathroom scale is usually reliable because if we step on and off, thescale will consistently measure the same weight every time. Other measures, including some
psychological tests that will be discussed later in later chapters, may be less reliable and thus lessvalid.
Statistical Significance: The statistical methods that scientists use to test their research
hypotheses are based on probability estimates. You will see statements in research reports
indicating that the results were statistically significant or not statistically significant. Statisticalsignificance refers to the confidence with which a scientist can conclude that data are not due tochance or random error. When a researcher concludes that a result is statistically significant, he56

or she has determined that the observed data was very unlikely to have been caused by chancefactors alone. Hence, there is likely a real relationship between or among the variables in the
research design. Otherwise, the researcher concludes that the results were not statisticallysignificant. Normally, we can assume that the researchers have done their best to ensure thestatistical conclusion validity of a research design, but we must always keep in mind thatinferences about data are probabilistic and never certain, this is why research never proves atheory.
A possible threat to validity is experimenter bias, a situation in which the experimenter subtly
treats the research participants in the various experimental conditions differently, resulting in an
invalid confirmation of the research hypothesis. In one study demonstrating experimenter bias,
Rosenthal and Fode (1963) sent twelve students to test a research hypothesis concerning mazelearning in rats. Although it was not initially revealed to the students, they were actually theparticipants in an experiment. Six of the students were randomly told that the rats they would betesting had been bred to be highly intelligent. The other six students were led to believe that therats had been bred to be unintelligent. In reality, there were no differences among the rats given
to the two groups of students. When the students returned with their data, a startling result
emerged. The rats run by students who expected them to be intelligent showed significantly
better maze learning than the rats run by students who expected them to be unintelligent.
Somehow the students’ expectations influenced their data. They evidently did something
different when they tested the rats, perhaps subtly changing how they timed the maze running or
how they treated the rats. This experimenter bias probably occurred entirely out of theirawareness.
Double-Blind Experiments: To avoid experimenter bias, researchers frequently run experiments
in which the researchers are blind to condition. This means that although the experimentersknow the research hypotheses, they do not know which conditions the participants are assigned
to. Experimenter bias cannot occur if the researcher is blind to condition. In a double-blind
experiment, both the researcher and the research participants are unaware of which subjects
are receiving the active treatment. For instance, in a double-blind trial of a drug, the researcher
does not know whether the drug being given is the real drug or the ineffective placebo, and thepatients also do not know which they are getting. Double-blind experiments eliminate thepotential for experimenter effects and at the same time eliminate the effects of a placebo.
Replication: Any single test of a research hypothesis will always be limited in terms of what it
can show, and consequently, important advances in science are never the result of a single
research project. Advances occur through the accumulation of knowledge that comes from manydifferent tests of the same theory or research hypothesis. These tests are conducted by different
researchers using different research designs, participants, and operational definitions of the
independent and dependent variables. The process of repeating previous research, which forms
the basis of all scientific inquiry, is known as replication.
Generalization refers to the extent to which relationships among conceptual variables can bedemonstrated in a wide variety of people and a wide variety of manipulated or measured
variables. Psychologists who use college students as participants in their research may beconcerned about generalization, wondering if their research will generalize to people who are not57

college students. Likewise, researchers who study the behaviors of employees in one company
may wonder whether the same findings would translate to other companies. Whenever there isreason to suspect that a result found for one sample of participants would not hold up for anothersample, then research may be conducted with these other populations to test for generalization.
Recently, many psychologists have been interested in testing hypotheses about the extent towhich a result will duplicate the original results for people from different cultures (Heine, 2010).
For instance, a researcher might test whether the effects on aggression of viewing violent video
games are the same for Japanese children as they are for American children by showing violent
and nonviolent films to a sample of both Japanese and American schoolchildren. If the results are
the same in both cultures, then we say that the results have generalized, but if they are different,
then we have learned a limiting condition of the effect (see Figure 2.13).
Figure 2.13: A Cross-Cultural Replication

In a cross-cultural replication, external
validity is observed if the same effects
that have been found in one culture are
replicated in another culture. If they are
not replicated in the new culture, then alimiting condition of the original results
is found.

Unless the researcher has a specificreason to believe that generalization will
not hold, it is appropriate to assume thata result found in one population, even ifthat population is college students, will
generalize to other populations. Because
the investigator can never demonstratethat the research results generalize to all
populations, it is not expected that the
researcher will attempt to do so. Rather,the burden of proof rests on those who claim that a result will not generalize. Remember:research results apply to populations. Individual differences within populations also exist, andrates of individual variation may also be generalized.

Critically Evaluating the Validity of Websites
The validity of research reports published in scientific journals is likely to be high because thehypotheses, methods, results, and conclusions of the research have been rigorously evaluated byother scientists before the research was published. Most peer reviewed articles have also beenchecked for factual accuracy. For this reason, you will want to use peer-reviewed journal
articles as your major source of information about psychological research.
Although peer reviewed research articles are the gold standard for validity, you may also need to
get information from other sources. The Internet is a vast source of information from which you
can learn about almost anything, including psychology. Wikipedia may be a good starting point58

to find general information about a subject, but most professors will not accept this source as areference for college-level work. Search engines, such as Google or Yahoo!, bring hundreds or
thousands of hits on a topic. GoogleScholar is a more academic source than Google, and is abetter place to start your search. You can also try our library’s databases for access to sources thathave been organized by discipline.
Although you will naturally use the web to help you find information about fields such as
psychology, you must also realize that it is important to carefully evaluate the validity of theinformation you get from the web. You must try to distinguish information that is based on
empirical research from information that is based on opinion, and between valid and invalid data.
The following material may be helpful to you in learning to make these distinctions.
The techniques for evaluating the validity of websites are similar to those that are applied toevaluating any other source of information. Ask first about the source of the information. Is thedomain a .”com” (business), .”gov” (government), .”edu” (educational institution) or .”org”(nonprofit) entity? This information can help you determine the author’s (or organization’s)
purpose in publishing the website. Try to determine where the information is coming from. Is thedata being summarized from objective sources, such as journal articles or academic orgovernment agencies? Does it seem that the author is interpreting the information as objectively
as possible, or is the data being interpreted to support a particular point of view? Consider whatgroups, individuals, and political or commercial interests stand to gain from the site. Is thewebsite potentially part of an advocacy group whose web pages reflect the positions of thegroup? Material from any group’s site may be useful, but try to be aware of the group’s purposes
and potential biases.
Also, ask whether the authors themselves appear to be a trustworthy source of information. Do
they hold positions in an academic institution? Do they have peer-reviewed publications inscientific journals? Many useful web pages appear as part of organizational sites and reflect thework of that organization. You can be more certain of the validity of the information if it issponsored by a professional organization, such as the American Psychological Association(APA) or the American Psychological Society.
Try to check on the accuracy of the material and discern whether the sources of information
seem current. Is the information cited such that you can read it in its original form? Reputablewebsites will probably link to other reputable sources, such as journal articles and scholarly
books.
It is fair to say that all authors, researchers, and organizations have at least some bias and that the
information from any site can be invalid. But good material attempts to be fair by acknowledging
other possible positions, interpretations, or conclusions. A critical examination of the websites
you browse for information will help you determine if the information is valid. It will also give
you more confidence in the information you take from it.

59

Key Takeaways
•

•
•
•
•
•

Research is said to be valid when the conclusions drawn by the researcher are
legitimate. Because all research has the potential to be invalid, no research ever“proves” a theory or research hypothesis.
Reliability, or consistency, is important for research to be valid.
Statistical significance refers to the confidence with which a scientist can conclude
that the research data are not due to chance or random error.
Replication, or repeating previous research, is important to ensure research results areaccurate.
Research using a double-blind method helps control for experimenter bias andparticipant expectations.
Internet research is more likely to produce valid results if consumers use websitesthat are established by organizations such as the American Psychological
Association or if they limit their searches to websites that are .edu (educational
instructions) or .gov (government).

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. The Pepsi Cola Corporation, now PepsiCo Inc., conducted the “Pepsi Challenge” byrandomly assigning individuals to taste either a Pepsi or a Coke. The researcherslabeled the glasses with only an “M” (for Pepsi) or a “Q” (for Coke) and asked theparticipants to rate how much they liked the beverage. The research showed that
subjects overwhelmingly preferred glass “M” over glass “Q,” and the researchersconcluded that Pepsi was preferred to Coke. Can you tell what confounding variable ispresent in this research design? How would you redesign the research to eliminate theconfounding variable?
2. Go to the website for the American Psychological Association http://www.apa.org/
and explore the resources provided for consumers, students, and professionals.

Videos and Activities
1. Placebo effect in Scientific American Frontiers episode on the Wonder
drug in season 13. http://www.chedd-angier.com/frontiers/season13.html
2. If you are interested in learning to work with correlations, you can try thefollowing activity:
http://psych.hanover.edu/JavaTest/NeuroAnim/stats/Correl1_instr.html
3. Google Scholar can be accessed at: http://scholar.google.com/

60

Chapter Summary
Psychologists study the behavior of both humans and animals. The main purpose of this researchis to help us understand people and to improve the quality of human lives.
Psychological research may be either basic or applied. Basic research and applied researchcomplement each other, and advances in science occur more rapidly when each type of researchis conducted.
The results of psychological research are reported primarily in research reports in scientificjournals. These research reports have been evaluated, critiqued, and improved by other scientists
through the process of peer review.
The methods used by scientists have developed over many years and provide a common
framework through which information can be collected, organized, and shared.
The scientific method is the set of assumptions, rules, and procedures that scientists use to
conduct research. In addition to requiring that science be empirical, the scientific methoddemands that the procedures used are objective, or free from personal bias.
Scientific findings are organized by theories, which are used to summarize and make newpredictions. Theories are usually framed too broadly to be tested in a single experiment.
Therefore, scientists normally use the research hypothesis as a basis for their research.
Scientists use operational definitions to turn the ideas of interest, or conceptual variables, intomeasured variables.
Decisions about whether psychological research using human and animals is ethical are madeusing established ethical codes developed by scientific organizations and on the basis of
judgments made by the local Institutional Review Board. These decisions are made through a
cost-benefit analysis. If the potential costs of the research appear to outweigh any potential
benefits that might come from it, then the research should not proceed.
Descriptive research is designed to observe and record behaviors. A representative sample ofindividuals from the population is studied. Descriptive research allows the development ofquestions for further study, but does not assess relationships among variables. The results ofdescriptive research projects are analyzed using descriptive statistics. Types of descriptive
research include observations, case studies, and surveys.
Correlational research assesses the relationships between and among two or more variables. It
allows making predictions, but cannot be used to draw inferences about the causal relationships
between and among the variables. Linear relationships between variables are normally analyzed
using the Pearson correlation coefficient.
The goal of experimental research is to assess the causal impact of one or more experimental
manipulations on a dependent variable. Important terms to learn include independent variable,61dependent variable, random assignment, experimental group, control group, and placebo.
Experimental designs are not always possible because many important variables cannot be
experimentally manipulated.
Because all research has the potential for invalidity, research never proves a theory or
hypothesis. Research can provide evidence to support or not support a theory.
Informed consumers are aware of the strengths and limitations of research. Research using adouble-blind method helps control for experimenter bias and participant expectations. Placebos
may also be used to control for participant expectations.

References
Alexander, P. A., & Winne, P. H. (Eds.). (2006). Handbook of educational psychology (2nd ed.). Mahwah, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates;
American Psychological Association. (2012). Guidelines for ethical conduct in the care and use of nonhumananimals in research. Retrieved from http://www.apa.org/science/leadership/care/guidelines.aspx?item=2
Anderson, C. A., & Dill, K. E. (2000). Video games and aggressive thoughts, feelings, and behavior in thelaboratory and in life. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 78(4), 772–790.
Baumrind, D. (1985). Research using intentional deception: Ethical issues revisited. American Psychologist, 40,
165–174.
Borum, R. (2004). Psychology of terrorism. Tampa: University of South Florida.
Brown v. Board of Education, 347 U.S. 483 (1954).
Damasio, H., Grabowski, T., Frank, R., Galaburda, A. M., Damasio, A. R., Cacioppo, J. T., & Berntson, G. G.
(2005). The return of Phineas Gage: Clues about the brain from the skull of a famous patient. In Social
neuroscience: Key readings. (pp. 21–28). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
DePaulo, B. M., Lindsay, J. J., Malone, B. E., Muhlenbruck, L., Charlton, K., & Cooper, H. (2003). Cues to
deception. Psychological Bulletin, 129(1), 74–118.
Fajen, B. R., & Warren, W. H. (2003). Behavioral dynamics of steering, obstacle avoidance, and route selection.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance, 29(2), 343–362.
Fiske, S. T., Bersoff, D. N., Borgida, E., Deaux, K., & Heilman, M. E. (1991). Social science research on trial: Useof sex stereotyping research in Price Waterhouse v. Hopkins. American Psychologist, 46(10), 1049–1060.
Freud, S. (1964). Analysis of phobia in a five-year-old boy. In E. A. Southwell & M. Merbaum (Eds.),
Personality: Readings in theory and research (pp. 3–32). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. (Original work published
1909)
Heine, S. J. (2010). Cultural psychology. In S. T. Fiske, D. T. Gilbert, & G. Lindzey (Eds.), Handbook of social
psychology (5th ed., Vol. 2, pp. 1423–1464). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.

62

Kohlberg, L. (1966). A cognitive-developmental analysis of children’s sex-role concepts and attitudes. In E. E.
Maccoby (Ed.), The development of sex differences. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Kotowicz, Z. (2007). The strange case of Phineas Gage. History of the Human Sciences, 20(1), 115–131.
Lewin, K. (1999). The complete social scientist: A Kurt Lewin reader (M. Gold, Ed.). Washington, DC:
American Psychological Association.
Milgram, S. (1974). Obedience to authority: An experimental view. New York, NY: Harper and Row.
Nunnally, J. C. (1978). Pyschometric theory. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Plous, S. (1996). Attitudes toward the use of animals in psychological research and education. Psychological
Science, 7, 352–358.
Popper, K. R. (1959). The logic of scientific discovery. New York, NY: Basic Books
Reisberg, D. (2016). Cognition (6th ed.). NY: Norton.
Rokeach, M. (1964). The three Christs of Ypsilanti: A psychological study. New York, NY: Knopf.
Rosenthal, R. (1994). Science and ethics in conducting, analyzing, and reporting psychological research.
Psychological Science, 5, 127–134.
Rosenthal, R., & Fode, K. L. (1963). The effect of experimenter bias on the performance of the albino rat. Behavioral
Science, 8, 183–189.
Ruble, D., & Martin, C. (1998). Gender development. In W. Damon (Ed.), Handbook of child psychology (5th ed.,pp. 933–1016). New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Saxe, L., Dougherty, D., & Cross, T. (1985). The validity of polygraph testing: Scientific analysis and public
controversy. American Psychologist, 40, 355–366.
Stangor, C. (2011). Research methods for the behavioral sciences (4th ed.). Mountain View, CA: Cengage.
Thomas, G., & Blackman, D. (1992). The future of animal studies in psychology. American Psychologist, 47,
1678.
Woolfolk-Hoy, A. E. (2005). Educational psychology (9th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.

63

Chapter 3 Brain and Behavior
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the nervous system and the endocrine system.

Every behavior begins with biology. Our behaviors, as well as our thoughts and feelings, areproduced by the actions of our brains, nerves, muscles, and glands. In this chapter we will begin
our journey into the world of psychology by considering the biological makeup of the humanbeing, including the most remarkable of human organs, the brain. We’ll consider the structure of
the brain and also the methods that psychologists use to study the brain and to understand how it
works.
We will see that the body is controlled by an information highway known as the nervous system,a collection of hundreds of billions of specialized and interconnected cells through which
messages are sent between the brain and the rest of the body. The nervous system consists of thecentral nervous system (CNS), made up of the brain and the spinal cord, and the peripheral
nervous system (PNS), the neurons that link the CNS to our skin, muscles, and glands. We will
see that our behavior is also influenced in large part by the endocrine system, the chemical
regulator of the body that consists of glands that secrete hormones.
An understanding of the biology underlying psychological processes is an important cornerstoneof understanding psychology. We will consider throughout the chapter how our biology
influences important human behaviors, including our mental and physical health, our reactions to
drugs, as well as our aggressive responses and our perceptions of other people. This chapter isparticularly important for contemporary psychology because the ability to measure biologicalaspects of behavior, including the structure and function of the human brain, is progressing
rapidly, and understanding the biological foundations of behavior is an increasingly importantline of psychological study.

The Neuron Is the Building Block of the Nervous System
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the structure and functions of the neuron.
2. Define the terms action potential and resting potential, and explain the process ofactivation in a neuron.
3. Define the terms synapse and neurotransmitter.
4. Describe the effect of neurotransmitters on behavior.
5. List the major neurotransmitters and explain their functions.

64

The nervous system is composed of approximately 86 billion cells known as neurons Jarrett,2015). A neuron is a cell in the nervous system whose function it is to receive and transmit
information. As you can see in Figure 3.1, neurons are made up of three major parts: a cell body,or soma, which contains the nucleus of the cell and keeps the cell alive; a branching treelike
fiber known as the dendrite, which collects information from other cells and sends theinformation to the soma; and a long, segmented fiber known as the axon, which transmits
information away from the cell body toward other neurons or to the muscles and glands.
Figure 3.1 Components of the Neuron

Some neurons have hundreds or even thousands ofdendrites, and these dendrites may themselves bebranched to allow the cell to receive informationfrom thousands of other cells. The axons are also
specialized, and some, such as those that send
messages from the spinal cord to the muscles in thehands or feet, may be very long, even up to several
feet in length. To improve the speed of theircommunication, and to keep their electrical charges
from shorting out with other neurons, axons are often
surrounded by a myelin sheath. The myelin sheathis a layer of fatty tissue surrounding the axon of aneuron that both acts as an insulator and allows
faster transmission of the electrical signal. Axons
branch out toward their ends, and at the tip of eachbranch is a terminal button, which forms junctions
with other neurons.
65

Figure 3.2
The nervous system, including the brain, ismade up of billions of interlinked neurons.
This vast interconnected web is responsible
for all human thinking, feeling, and behavior.
Source: Photo courtesy of GE Healthcare,
http://www.flickr.com/photos/gehealthcare/4253587827/.

Supporting all these neurons are billions more glial cells (glia), cells that surround and link to
the neurons, protecting them, providing them with nutrients, and absorbing unused
neurotransmitters. Glial cells come in different forms and have different functions. For instance,
the myelin sheath surrounding the axon of many neurons is a type of glial cell. The myelin
sheath acts as insulation and speeds transmission of the electrical impulse in the neuron. Glia arealso necessary for the development of the synapses, where chemical transmission of impulses
occurs (Ullian, Sapperstein, Christopherson & Barres, 2001). The glia are essential partners ofneurons, without which the neurons could not survive or function (Miller, 2005).

Neurons Communicate Using Electricity and Chemicals
The nervous system operates using an electrochemical process, which occurs when an electricalcharge moves through the neuron itself and chemicals are used to transmit information between
neurons. Within the neuron, when a signal is received by the dendrites, it is transmitted to thesoma in the form of an electrical signal, and, if the signal is strong enough, it may then be passed
on to the axon and then to the terminal buttons. If the signal reaches the terminal buttons, they
are signaled to emit chemicals known as neurotransmitters, which communicate with otherneurons by crossing the synapse, or space between the cells.
The electrical signal moves through the neuron as a result of changes in the electrical charge ofthe axon. Normally, the axon remains in the resting potential, a state in which the interior of theneuron contains a greater number of negatively charged ions than does the area outside the cell.
When the segment of the axon that is closest to the cell body is stimulated by an electrical signal
from the dendrites, and if this electrical signal is strong enough that it passes a certain level orthreshold, the cell membrane in this first segment opens its gates, allowing positively charged
sodium ions that were previously kept
Figure 3.3
out to enter. This change in electrical
The Myelin Sheath and the Nodes of Ranvier
charge that occurs in a neuron when anerve impulse is transmitted is known
as the action potential. Once the action
potential occurs, the number of positive
ions exceeds the number of negativeions in this segment, and the segment
temporarily becomes positively charged.
As you can see in Figure 3.3, the axon
The myelin sheath wraps around the axon but also leaves
is segmented by a series of breaks
small gaps called the nodes of Ranvier. The action potential
between the sausage-like segments ofjumps from node to node as it travels down the axon.
the myelin sheath. Each of these gaps
is a node of Ranvier. The electrical charge moves down the axon from segment to segment, in aset of small jumps, moving from node to node. When the action potential occurs in the first
segment of the axon, it quickly creates a similar change in the next segment, which thenstimulates the next segment and so forth as the positive electrical impulse continues all the way
down to the end of the axon. As each new segment becomes positive, the membrane in the priorsegment closes up again, and the segment returns to its negative resting potential. In this way, theaction potential is transmitted along the axon, toward the terminal buttons. The entire response
along the length of the axon is very fast as it can happen up to 1,000 times each second.
66

An important aspect of the action potential is that it operates in an all or nothing manner, andthis means that the neuron either fires completely, such that the action potential moves all theway down the axon, or it does not fire at all. Thus, neurons can provide more energy to theneurons down the line by firing faster but not by firing more strongly. Furthermore, the neuron isprevented from repeated firing by the presence of a refractory period, which is a brief time after
the firing of the axon in which the axon cannot fire again because the neuron has not yet
returned to its resting potential.

Neurotransmitters: The Body’s Chemical Messengers
Not only do the neural signals travel via electrical charges within the neuron, but they also travel
via chemical transmission between the neurons. Neurons are separated by junction areas known
as synapses, areas where the terminal buttons at the end of the axon of one neuron nearly, but
do not quite, touch the dendrites of another. The synapses provide a remarkable function because
they allow each axon to communicate with many dendrites in neighboring cells. Because aneuron may have synaptic connections with thousands of other neurons, the communication links
among the neurons in the nervous system allow for a highly sophisticated communication
system (see Figure 3.4).

Figure 3.4 The Synapse
When the nerve impulse reaches the terminal button, it triggers the release of neurotransmitters into thesynapse. The neurotransmitters fit into receptors on the receiving dendrites in the manner of a lock andkey.

When the electrical impulse from the action potential reaches the end of the axon, it signals theterminal buttons to release neurotransmitters into the synapse. A neurotransmitter is a chemicalthat relays signals across the synapses between neurons. Neurotransmitters travel across thesynaptic space between the terminal button of one neuron and the dendrites of other neurons,67where they bind to the dendrites in the neighboring neurons. Furthermore, different terminal
buttons release different neurotransmitters, and different dendrites are particularly sensitive todifferent neurotransmitters. The dendrites will admit the neurotransmitters only if they are theright shape to fit in the receptor sites on the receiving neuron. For this reason, the receptor sites
and neurotransmitters are often compared to a lock and key.
When neurotransmitters are accepted by the receptors on the receiving neurons their effect may
be either excitatory in that they make the cell more likely to fire, or inhibitory, making the cellless likely to fire. Furthermore, if the receiving neuron is able to accept more than one
neurotransmitter, then it will be influenced by the excitatory and inhibitory processes of each. If
the excitatory effects of the neurotransmitters are greater than the inhibitory influences of theneurotransmitters, the neuron moves closer to its firing threshold, and if it reaches the threshold,the action potential and the process of transferring information through the neuron begins.
Neurotransmitters that are not accepted by the receptor sites must be removed from the synapse
in order for the next potential stimulation of the neuron to happen. This process occurs in partthrough the breaking down of the neurotransmitters by enzymes, called inactivation, and in partthrough reuptake, a process in which neurotransmitters that are in the synapse are reabsorbed
into the transmitting terminal buttons, ready to again be released after the neuron fires.
More than 100 chemical substances produced in the body have been identified asneurotransmitters, and these substances have a wide and profound effect on emotion, cognition,and behavior. Neurotransmitters regulate our appetite, our memory, our emotions, as well as ourmuscle action and movement. As can be seen in Table 3.1, some neurotransmitters are also
associated with psychological and physical diseases.
Some of these neurotransmitters will be discussed again later in the text when psychologicalproblems are explained. Dopamine, is involved in motivation and emotion, and is linked toschizophrenia. Serotonin, is involved in mood, sleep, and aggression, and is linked to depression.
Acetylcholine, is involved in memory, and is linked to Alzheimer's disease. On a more positivenote, endorphins, neurotransmitters released by vigorous exercise, are the body's natural pain
relievers.
Some chemicals in the body can occur either as neurotransmitters or hormones, which arechemicals in the bloodstream that affect behavior. Norepinephrine, also known asnoradrenaline, is one of these chemicals with a dual role. As a neurotransmitter, norepinephrine
increases arousal and plays a role in learning and memory. Norepinephrine produced by the
sympathetic nervous system also stimulates the biological responses associated with fear andanxiety. As both a neurotransmitter and a hormone, norepinephrine is part of the fight-flight
response that elevates heart rate, causes the release of blood glucose, and increases blood flow to
the muscles in preparation for emergency action.

68

Table 3.1 The Major Neurotransmitters and Their Functions
Neurotransmitter

Description and function

Notes

Acetylcholine (ACh)A common neurotransmitter used in the Alzheimer’s disease is associated with an
spinal cord and motor neurons toundersupply of acetylcholine. Nicotine is an
stimulate muscle contractions.
agonist that acts like acetylcholine.
It’s also used in the brain to regulate
memory, sleeping, and dreaming.

Dopamine

Involved in movement, motivation,and emotion, Dopamine produces
feelings of pleasure when released by
the brain’s reward system, and it isalso involved in learning.

Schizophrenia is linked to increases in
dopamine activity, whereas Parkinson’s diseaseis linked to reductions in dopamine.

Endorphins

Released in response to behaviors
such as vigorous exercise, orgasm,
and eating spicy foods.

Endorphins are natural pain relievers. They are
related to the compounds found in drugs such asopium, morphine, and heroin. The release ofendorphins creates the runner’s high that is
experienced after intense physical exertion.

GABA (gammaaminobutyric acid)

The major inhibitory
neurotransmitter in the brain.

A lack of GABA can lead to involuntary motor
actions, including tremors and seizures. Alcohol
stimulates the release of GABA, which inhibits thenervous system and makes us feel drunk.
Low levels of GABA can produce anxiety, and
GABA agonists are used to reduce anxiety.

Glutamate

The most common neurotransmitter, it
is released in more than 90% of thebrain’s synapses. Glutamate is foundin the food additive MSG(monosodium glutamate).

Excess glutamate can cause overstimulation,
migraines and seizures.

Serotonin

Involved in many functions, including
mood, appetite, sleep, and aggression.

Low levels of serotonin are associated withdepression, and some drugs designed to treat
depression are known as selective serotonin
reuptake inhibitors, or SSRIs. They serve toprevent their reuptake.

Drugs that we might ingest, either for medical reasons or recreationally, can act likeneurotransmitters to influence our thoughts, feelings, and behavior. An agonist is a drug that has
chemical properties similar to a particular neurotransmitter and thus mimics the effects of theneurotransmitter or increases the activity of a neurotransmitter. When an agonist is ingested, itbinds to the receptor sites in the dendrites to excite the neuron, acting as if more of theneurotransmitter had been present. Still other agonists work by blocking the reuptake of the69

neurotransmitter itself. When reuptake is reduced by the drug, more neurotransmitter remains inthe synapse, increasing its action. As an example, cocaine is an agonist for the neurotransmitter
dopamine. Cocaine blocks the reuptake of dopamine thus increasing its effect. An antagonist isa drug that reduces or stops the normal effects of a neurotransmitter. When an antagonist isingested, it binds to the receptor sites in the dendrite, thereby blocking the neurotransmitter. As
an example, the poison curare is an antagonist for the neurotransmitter acetylcholine. When the
poison enters the body, it binds to the dendrites, stops communication among the neurons, andusually causes death.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The central nervous system (CNS) is the collection of neurons that make up the brain
and the spinal cord.
The peripheral nervous system (PNS) is the collection of neurons that link the CNS to
our skin, muscles, and glands.
Neurons are specialized cells, found in the nervous system, which transmit information.
Neurons contain dendrites, a soma, and an axon.
Some axons are covered with a fatty substance known as the myelin sheath, whichsurrounds the axon, acting as an insulator and allowing faster transmission of theelectrical signal.
The dendrite is a treelike extension that receives information from other neurons andtransmits electrical stimulation to the soma.
The axon is an elongated fiber that transfers information from the soma to the terminal
buttons.
Neurotransmitters relay information chemically from the terminal buttons andacross the synapses to the receiving dendrites using a type of lock and key
system.
The many different neurotransmitters work together to influence cognition,
memory, and behavior.
Agonists are drugs that mimic the actions of neurotransmitters, whereas antagonists
are drugs that block the action of neurotransmitters.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Draw a picture of a neuron and label its main parts.
2. Imagine an action that you engage in every day and explain how neurons andneurotransmitters might work together to help you engage in that action.

70

Videos
1. The electrochemical action of the neuron :https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OZG8M_ldA1M
2. Journey through the neuron and synapse :http://epsych.msstate.edu/biological/neuron/index.html (click "Next" for feedback)

The Brain
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the structures and functions of the oldest parts of the brain, including the brain
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

stem and cerebellum, and their influence on behavior.
Describe the location and functions of the thalamus, limbic system, and cerebrum.
Explain the hemispheric structure of the brain and the function of the corpus callosum.
Identify the location and functions of the four lobes and association areas.
Define Broca's and Wernickes’s areas.
Define the concepts of brain plasticity and neurogenesis.
Describe the research with split-brain patients and brain lateralization

If you were someone who understood brain anatomy and were to look at the brain of an animal
that you had never seen before, you would nevertheless be able to deduce the likely capacities of
the animal. This is because the brains of all animals are very similar in overall form. In eachanimal, the brain is layered, and the basic structures of the brain are similar (see Figure 3.5). The
innermost structures of the brain; that is, the parts nearest the spinal cord, are the oldest part ofthe brain, and these areas carry out the same the functions they did for our distant ancestors.
These regions regulate basic survival functions, such as breathing, moving, resting, and feeding,and creates our experiences of emotion. Mammals, including humans, have developed further
brain layers that provide more advanced functions. For instance, better memory, moresophisticated social interactions, and the ability to experience emotions are demonstrated.
Humans have a very large and highly developed cerebral cortex, or outer layer which makes us
particularly adept at these processes (see Figure 3.6).

Major Brain Structures
The Brain Stem: The brain stem is the oldest and innermost region of the brain and is wired
for survial. It is designed to control the most basic functions of life, including breathing,attention, and motor responses (see Figure 3.7). The brain stem begins where the spinal cord
enters the skull and forms the medulla, the area of the brain stem that controls heart rate andbreathing. In many cases the medulla alone is sufficient to maintain life as animals that have theremainder of their brains above the medulla severed are still able to eat, breathe and move.
71

Figure 3.5
The Major Structures in the Human Brain

Figure 3.6 Cerebral Cortex

Humans have a very large and highly developed
outer brain layer known as the cerebral cortex. The
cortex provides humans with excellent memory,
outstanding cognitive skills, and the ability toexperience complex emotions.

The major brain parts are colored and labeled.
Source: Adapted from Camazine, S. (n.d.). Images of the brain. Medical, science, and naturethings Photography and digital imagery by Scott Camazine. Retrieved fromhttp://www.scottcamazine.com/photos/brain/pages/09MRIBrai n_jpg.htm.

Source: Adapted from Wikia Education. (n.d.). Cerebral cortex. Retrieved fromhttp://psychology.wikia.com/wiki/Cerebral_cortex.

Figure 3.7 The Brain Stem and the Thalamus

The brain stem is an extension of the spinal cord, including the medulla, thepons, and the reticular formation.

72

The spherical shape above the medulla is the pons, a structure in the brain stem that is importantto sleep and arousal.
Running through the medulla and the pons is a long, narrow network of neurons known as thereticular formation. The job of the reticular formation is to filter out some of the stimuli that arecoming into the brain from the spinal cord and to relay the remainder of the signals to other areasof the brain. The reticular formation also plays important roles in reflexes, muscle tone, arousal,
and sleeping. When electrical stimulation is applied to the reticular formation of an animal, it
immediately becomes fully awake, and when the reticular formation is severed from the higher
brain regions, the animal falls into a deep coma.
Cerebellum: The cerebellum, literally, “little brain”, consists of two wrinkled ovals behind thebrain stem and its main function is to coordinate voluntry movement. People who have damage tothe cerebellum have difficulty walking, keeping their balance, and holding their hands steady.
Consuming alcohol influences the cerebellum, which is why people who are drunk have moredifficulty walking in a straight line. Also, the cerebellum contributes to emotional responses, helps
us discriminate between different sounds and textures, and is important in learning (Bower &Parsons, 2003). Finally, the cerebellum is also used to coordinate thinking through connections to
the frontal and parietal cortex (O'Reilly, Beckmann, Tomassini, Ramnani, & Johansen-Berg,2009).
Thalamus: Above the brain stem are other older parts of the brain that also are involved in theprocessing of behavior and emotions. The thalamus is the egg-shaped structure above the brain
stem that applies still more filtering to the sensory information that is coming up from the spinal
cord and through the reticular formation, and it relays some of these remaining signals to theappropriate areas of the cortex or higher brain levels (Sherman & Guillery, 2002). The thalamus
also receives some of the higher brain’s replies, forwarding them to the medulla and the
cerebellum. The thalamus is also important in sleep because it shuts off incoming signals from thesenses, allowing us to rest.
Limbic System: Whereas the primary function of thebrain stem is to regulate the most basic aspects of life,
including motor functions, the limbic system is a brain
region largely responsible for memory and emotions,
including our responses to reward and punishment.
The limbic system is located between the brain stemand the two cerebral hemispheres. It includes theamygdala, the hypothalamus, and the hippocampus (seeFigure 3.8).
The amygdala consists of two almond-shaped clusters
that is primarily responsible for regulating ourperceptions of, and reactions to, aggression and fear.
The amygdala has connections to other bodily systems
related to fear, including the sympathetic nervous
system, which is important in fear responses, facial
responses, the processing of smells, and the release of73

Figure 3.8 The Limbic System

This diagram shows the major parts of thelimbic system, as well as the pituitary gland,
which is controlled by it.

neurotransmitters related to stress and aggression (Best, 2009). In one early study, Klüver and Bucy
(1939) damaged the amygdala of an aggressive rhesus monkey. They found that the once angry
animal immediately became passive and no longer responded to fearful situations with aggressive
behavior. Electrical stimulation of the amygdala in other animals also influences aggression. In
addition to helping us experience fear, the amygdala also helps us learn from situations that create
fear. When we experience events that are dangerous, the amygdala stimulates the brain toremember the details of the situation so that we learn to avoid it in the future (Sigurdsson, Doyère,Cain, & LeDoux, 2007).
Located just under the thalamus and just above the brain stem, the hypothalamus links thenervous system to the endocrine system via the pituitary gland, and thus regulates bodytemperature, hunger, thirst, and sex. It also responds to the satisfaction of these needs by creating
feelings of pleasure. Olds and Milner (1954) discovered these reward centers accidentally after they
had momentarily stimulated the hypothalamus of a rat. The researchers noticed that after being
stimulated, the rat continued to move to the exact spot in its cage where the stimulation had
occurred, as if it were trying to recreate the circumstances surrounding its original experience.
Upon further research into these reward centers, Olds (1958) discovered that animals would do
almost anything to re-create enjoyable stimulation, including crossing a painful electrified grid toreceive it. In one experiment a rat was given the opportunity to electrically stimulate its own
hypothalamus by pressing a pedal. The rat enjoyed the experience so much that it pressed thepedal more than 7,000 times per hour until it collapsed from sheer exhaustion.
The hippocampus is important in forming and storing information in long-term memory andconsists of two horns that curve back from the amygdala. If the hippocampus is damaged, a person
cannot build new memories, living instead in a strange world where everything he or she
experiences just fades away, even while older memories from the time before the damage areuntouched.
Cerebrum: From an evolutionary perspective, the newest part of our brain is the cerebrum,which consists of the cerebral cortex and the corpus callosum. The key to the advanced
intelligence of humans is not found in the size of our brains. What sets humans apart from otheranimals is our larger cerebral cortex, which is the outer bark-like layer of our cerebrum thatallows us to so successfully use language, acquire complex skills, create tools, and live in socialgroups (Gibson, 2002). In humans, the cerebral cortex is wrinkled and folded, rather than smoothas it is in most other animals. This creates a much greater surface area and size, and allows
increased capacities for learning, remembering, and thinking. Although the cerebral cortex isonly about one tenth of an inch thick, it makes up more than 80% of the brain’s weight. The
cerebral cortex contains about 20 billion nerve cells and 300 trillion synaptic connections (deCourten-Myers, 1999). The corpus callosum connects the two halves of the brain and supports
communication between the hemispheres.

74

Figure 3.9 The Two Hemispheres
The brain is divided into two hemispheres (left and right), each of which has four lobes (temporal, frontal,
occipital, and parietal). Furthermore, there are specific cortical areas that control different processes.

The cerebral cortex is divided into two hemispheres, and each hemisphere is divided into four
lobes, each separated by folds known as fissures. If we look at the cortex starting at the front of thebrain and moving over the top (see Figure 3.9), we see the following:• Frontal lobes: Located behind the forehead and responsible primarily for thinking,planning, memory, and judgment.
• Parietal lobes: Located from the middle to the back of the skull, and responsible
primarily for processing information about touch and taste. These lobes also receive input
from vision, which helps us identify objects by touch and locate objects in space (Garrett,2011).
• Occipital lobes: Located at the very back of the skull, and processes visual information.
• Temporal lobe: Located at the sides of the brain and responsible for hearing, language,and integrating vision and audition.

Functions of the Cerbral Cortex
When the German physicists Gustav Fritsch and Eduard Hitzig (1870/2009) applied mild electric
stimulation to different parts of a dog’s cortex, they discovered that they could make different
parts of the dog’s body move. Furthermore, they discovered an important and unexpected principleof brain activity. They found that stimulating the right side of the brain produced movement in theleft side of the dog’s body, and vice versa. This finding follows from a general principle about how
the brain is structured, called contralateral control, which means the brain is wired such that inmost cases the left hemisphere receives sensations from and controls the right side of the body, andvice versa.
Fritsch and Hitzig also found that the movement that followed the brain stimulation only occurred
when they stimulated a specific arch-shaped region that runs across the top of the brain from ear to75

ear, just at the front of the parietal lobe (see Figure 3.10). Fritsch and Hitzig had discovered the
motor cortex, the part of the cortex that controls and executes movements of the body by sending
signals to the cerebellum and the spinal cord. The motor cortex is located in the frontal lobes.
Recent research has mapped the motor cortex even more fully, by providing mild electronic
stimulation to different areas of the motor cortex in fully conscious patients while observing theirbodily responses. Because the brain has no sensory receptors, these patients felt no pain. As you
can see in Figure 3.10, this research has revealed that the motor cortex is specialized for providing
control over the body, in the sense that the parts of the body that require more precise and finer
movements, such as the face and the hands, also are allotted the greatest amount of cortical space.

Figure 3.10 The Motor Cortex and the Sensory Cortex

Just as the motor cortex sends out messages to the specific parts of the body, the somatosensory
cortex, located in the parietal lobe behind the primary motor cortex, receives information from theskin’s sensory receptors (pain, warmth, cold, touch) and the senses that pertain to body postion
and movement. Again, the more sensitive the body region, the more area is dedicated to it in thesensory cortex. Our sensitive lips, for example, occupy a large area in the sensory cortex, as do ourfingers and genitals.
Other areas of the cerebral cortex process other types of sensory information. The visual cortex isthe area located in the occipital lobe that processes visual information. If you were stimulated in
the visual cortex, you would see flashes of light or color, and perhaps you remember having had
the experience of “seeing stars” when you were hit in, or fell on, the back of your head. The
temporal lobe contains the auditory cortex, which is responsible for hearing and language. The
temporal lobe also processes some visual information, providing us with the ability to name theobjects around us (Martin, 2007).
As you can see in Figure 3.10, the motor and sensory areas of the cortex account for a relatively
small part of the total cortex. The remainder of the cortex is made up of association areas in which
sensory and motor information is combined and associated with our stored knowledge. These76

association areas are the places in the brain that are responsible for most of the things that makehuman beings seem human. The association areas are involved in higher mental functions, such aslearning, thinking, planning, judging, moral reflecting, figuring, and spatial reasoning.
Broca's area in the left frontal lobe controls facial movements and the production of language.
Wernicke's area is located in the left temporal lobe and is responsible for understanding speech.
In a small percentage of people, who are usually left-handed, these structures are located on theright side of the brain. Strokes or trauma to Broca's area or Wernicke' area can result in aphasia,
an impairment in the use of language. A patient with Broca's aphasia may be able to understandwords, but the individual lacks the ability to speak. Damage in Wernicke’s area produces
Wernicke’s aphasiam, which is difficulty with understanding speech.

Neuroplasticity and Neurogenesis
The control of some specific bodily functions, such as movement, vision, and hearing, isperformed in specified areas of the cortex, and if these areas are damaged, the individual will
likely lose the ability to perform the corresponding function. For instance, if an infant suffers
damage to facial recognition areas in the temporal lobe, it is likely that he or she will never be able
to recognize faces (Farah, Rabinowitz, Quinn, & Liu, 2000). On the other hand, the brain
is not divided up in an entirely rigid way. The brain’s neurons have a remarkable capacity toreorganize and extend themselves to carry out particular functions in response to the needs of theorganism, and to repair damage. As a result, the brain constantly creates new neuralcommunication routes and rewires existing ones. Neuroplasticity refers to the brain’s ability tochange its structure and function in response to experience or damage. Neuroplasticity enables us
to learn and remember new things and adjust to new experiences.
Our brains are the most “plastic” when we are young children, as it is during this time that welearn the most about our environment. On the other hand, neuroplasticity continues to be observed
even in adults (Kolb & Fantie, 1989). The principles of neuroplasticity help us understand how ourbrains develop to reflect our experiences. For instance, accomplished musicians have a larger
auditory cortex compared with the general population (Bengtsson et al., 2005) and also requireless neural activity to move their fingers over the keys than do novices (Münte, Altenmüller, &Jäncke, 2002). These observations reflect the changes in the brain that follow our experiences.
Plasticity is also observed when there is damage to the brain or to parts of the body that are
represented in the motor and sensory cortexes. When a tumor in the left hemisphere of the brain
impairs language, the right hemisphere will begin to compensate to help the person recover theability to speak (Thiel et al., 2006). If a person loses a finger, the area of the sensory cortex that
previously received information from the missing finger will begin to receive input from adjacentfingers, causing the remaining digits to become more sensitive to touch (Fox, 1984).
Although neurons cannot repair or regenerate themselves as skin or blood vessels can, newevidence suggests that the brain can engage in neurogenesis, the forming of new neurons (Van
Praag, Zhao, Gage, & Gazzaniga, 2004). These new neurons originate deep in the brain and may
then migrate to other brain areas where they form new connections with other neurons (Gould,2007). This leaves open the possibility that someday scientists might be able to rebuild damaged
brains by creating drugs that help grow neurons.
77Research Focus Using Split-Brain Patients
We have seen that the left hemisphere of the brain primarily senses and controls the motor
movements on the right side of the body, and vice versa. This fact provides an interesting way to
study brain lateralization which means the left and the right hemispheres of the brain are
specialized to perform different functions. Gazzaniga, Bogen, and Sperry (1965) studied apatient, known as W. J., who had undergone an operation to relieve severe seizures, and his
corpus callosum was severed. Because the left and right hemispheres were separated, eachhemisphere developed its own sensations, concepts, and motivations (Gazzaniga, 2005).
Gazzaniga and his colleagues tested the ability of W. J. to recognize and respond to objects andwritten passages that were presented to only the left or only the right hemispheres (see Figure3.11). The researchers had W. J. look straight ahead and then flashe a picture of a geometricalshape to the left of where he was looking. By doing so, they assured that the image of the shapewas experienced only in the right hemisphere. Remember that sensory input from the left side of
the body is sent to the right side of the brain. Gazzaniga and his colleagues found that W. J.
identified what he had been shown when he was asked to pick the object from a series of shapes,
using his left hand, but he could not do this when the object was shown in the right visual field.
On the other hand, W. J. could easily read written material presented in the right visual field, andthus experienced in the left hemisphere, but not when it was presented in the left visual field.
The information that is presented on the left side of our field of vision is transmitted to the righthemisphere, and vice versa. In split-brain patients, the severed corpus callosum does not permit
information to be transferred between hemispheres. This allows researchers to learn about thefunctions of each hemisphere. In the sample on the left, the split-brain patient could not choose
which image had been presented because the left hemisphere cannot process visual
information. In the sample on the right the patient could not read the passage because the rightbrain hemisphere cannot process language.
Figure 3.11 Visual and Verbal Processing in the Split-Brain Patient78

This research, and many other studies following it, has demonstrated that the two hemispheres
specialize in different abilities. In most people the ability to speak, write, and understandlanguage is located in the left hemisphere. This is why W. J. could read passages that were
presented on the right side and thus transmitted to the left hemisphere, but could not readpassages that were only experienced in the right hemisphere. The left hemisphere is also better atmath and at judging time and rhythm. It is also superior in coordinating the order of complex
movements, such as the lip movements needed for speech. The right hemisphere has only very
limited verbal abilities, and yet it excels in perceptual skills. The right hemisphere is able torecognize objects, including faces, patterns, and melodies, and it can put a puzzle together ordraw a picture. This is why W. J. could pick out the image when he saw it on the left, but not theright, visual field.
Although Gazzaniga’s research demonstrated that the brain is in fact lateralized, this does notmean that when people behave in a certain way or perform a certain activity they are only using
one hemisphere of their brains at a time. That would be drastically oversimplifying the conceptof brain differences. We normally use both hemispheres at the same time, and the difference
between the abilities of the two hemispheres is not absolute (Soroker et al., 2005).

Psychology in Everyday Life: Why Are Some People Left-Handed?
Across cultures and ethnic groups, about 90% of people are mainly right-handed, whereas only
10% are primarily left-handed (Peters, Reimers, & Manning, 2006). This fact is puzzling, in part
because the number of left-handers is so low, and in part because other animals, including ourclosest primate relatives, do not show any type of handedness. The existence of right-handers
and left-handers provides an interesting example of the relationship among evolution, biology,
and social factors and how the same phenomenon can be understood at different levels ofanalysis (Harris, 1990; McManus, 2002).
At least some handedness is determined by genetics. Ultrasound scans show that 9 out of 10
fetuses suck the thumb of their right hand, suggesting that usually the preference is determined
before birth (Hepper, Wells, & Lynch, 2005), and the mechanism of transmission has been
linked to a gene on the X chromosome (Jones & Martin, 2000).
Culture also plays a role. In the past, left-handed children were forced to write with their righthands in many countries, and this practice continues, particularly in collectivistic cultures, such
as India and Japan, where left-handedness is viewed negatively as compared withindividualistic societies, such as the United States. For example, India has about half as manyleft-handers as the United States (Ida & Mandal, 2003).
There are both advantages and disadvantages to being left-handed in a world where most people
are right-handed. One problem for lefties is that the world is designed for right-handers.
Automatic teller machines (ATMs), classroom desks, scissors, microscopes, drill presses, andtable saws are just some examples of everyday machinery that is designed with the mostimportant controls on the right side. This may explain in part why left-handers suffer somewhat
more accidents than do right-handers (Dutta & Mandal, 2006).
79Despite the potential difficulty living and working in a world designed for right-handers, there
seem to be some advantages to being left-handed. Throughout history, a number of prominent
artists have been left-handed, including Leonardo da Vinci, Michelangelo, Pablo Picasso, andMax Escher. Because the right hemisphere is superior in imaging and visual abilities, there may
be some advantage to using the left hand for drawing or painting (Springer & Deutsch, 1998).
Left-handed people are also better at envisioning three-dimensional objects, which may explain
why there is such a high number of left-handed architects, artists, and chess players in proportion
to their numbers (Coren, 1992). However, there are also more left-handers among those withreading disabilities, allergies, and migraine headaches (Geschwind & Behan, 2007), perhaps dueto the fact that a small minority of left-handers owe their handedness to a birth trauma, such as
being born prematurely (Betancur, Vélez, Cabanieu, & le Moal, 1990).
In sports in which handedness may matter, such as tennis, boxing, fencing, or judo, left-handers
may have an advantage. They play many games against right-handers and learn how to best
handle their styles. Right-handers, however, play very few games against left-handers, which may
make them more vulnerable. This explains why a disproportionately high number of left- handers
are found in sports where direct one-on-one action predominates. In other sports, such as golf,
there are fewer left-handed players because the handedness of one player has no effect on thecompetition.
The fact that left-handers excel in some sports suggests the possibility that they may have also
had an evolutionary advantage because their ancestors may have been more successful inimportant skills such as hand-to-hand combat (Bodmer & McKie, 1994). At this point, however,this idea remains only a hypothesis, and determinants of human handedness are yet to be fully
understood.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

The oldest parts of the brain, including the brain stem and cerebellum, regulate basic
survival functions.
The limbic system regulates feeding, emotions, sex, and memory.
The cerebral cortex is divided into the right and left cerebral hemispheres and into
four lobes.
The frontal lobe is primarily responsible for thinking, planning, memory, andjudgment. The parietal lobe is primarily responsible for bodily sensations and touch.
The temporal lobe is primarily responsible for hearing and language. The occipital
lobe is primarily responsible for vision. Other areas of the cortex act as association
areas, responsible for integrating information.
The motor cortex controls voluntary movements. Body parts requiring the mostcontrol and dexterity take up the most space in the motor cortex.
The sensory cortex receives and processes bodily sensations. Body parts that are
the most sensitive occupy the greatest amount of space in the sensory cortex.
The brain changes as a function of experience and potential damage in a process
known as neuroplasticity. The brain can generate new neurons throughneurogenesis.
80

•
•
•

The severing of the corpus callosum, which connects the two hemispheres, creates asplit-brain patient.
Studies with split-brain patients as research participants have been used to
study brain lateralization.
The left cerebral hemisphere is primarily responsible for language and speech in mostpeople, whereas the right hemisphere specializes in spatial and perceptual skills,
visualization, and the recognition of patterns, faces, and melodies.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Imagine yourself going through a typical day. Which part of the brain will you rely on
for each activity? For the next 24 hours, ask yourself what part of the brain you areusing as you change behaviors.
2. Consider your own experiences and speculate on which parts of your brain might beparticularly well developed as a result of these experiences.
3. Which brain hemisphere are you likely to be using when you search for a fork in thesilverware drawer? Which brain hemisphere are you most likely to be using when you
struggle to remember the name of an old friend?
4. Do you think that encouraging left-handed children to use their right hands is a goodidea? Why or why not?

Videos
1. You can see a humorous reenactment of the split brain research at:
http://www.nobelprize.org/educational/medicine/split-brain/splitbrainexp.html
2. Take a journey through the cerebral cortex at:
http://epsych.msstate.edu/biological/neuroanatomy/Part3/index.html
3. You can visualize the parts of the brain and manipulate a 3_D model at:
http://www.pbs.org/wnet/brain/3d/
Or at http://www.g2conline.org/ and select 3-D Brain
4. Neuroscientist Michael Merzenich discusses plasticity in the brain.
http://www.ted.com/talks/michael_merzenich_on_the_elastic_brain.html

Psychologists Study the Brain Using Many Different Methods
Learning Objective
1. Compare and contrast the techniques that scientists use to view and understandbrain structures and functions.
One problem in understanding the brain is that it is difficult to get a good picture of what is goingon inside it. But there are a variety of empirical methods that allow scientists to look at brains inaction, and the number of possibilities has increased dramatically in recent years with the81introduction of new neuroimaging techniques. In this section, we will consider the various
techniques that psychologists use to learn about the brain. Each of the different techniques has
some advantages, and when we put them together, we begin to get a relatively good picture of how
the brain functions and which brain structures control which activities.

Brain Lesions
The brains of living human beings may be damaged as a result of strokes, falls, automobile
accidents, gunshots, or tumors, and these brain damages are called lesions. In rare occasions, brain
lesions may be created intentionally through surgery, such as that designed to remove brain tumors
or to reduce the effects of epilepsy, as in split-brain patients. Psychologists also sometimes
intentionally create lesions in animals to study the effects on their behavior. In so doing, they hope
to be able to draw inferences about the likely functions of human brains from the effects of thelesions in animals.
Lesions allow the scientist to observe any loss of brain function that may occur. For instance,
when an individual suffers a stroke, a blood clot deprives part of the brain of oxygen, killing theneurons in the area and rendering that area unable to process information. In some cases, the resultof the stroke is a specific lack of ability. For instance, if the stroke influences the occipital lobe,
then vision may suffer, and if the stroke influences the areas associated with language or speech,
these functions will suffer. In fact, our earliest understanding of the specific areas involved inspeech and language were gained by studying patients who had experienced strokes.
It is now known that a good part ofour moral reasoning abilities is
Figure 3.12
Areas in the frontal lobe of Phineas
located in the frontal lobe, and atGage were damaged when a metal rod
least some of this understanding
blasted through it. Although Gage lived
comes from lesion studies. For
through the accident, his personality,
instance, consider the well-known
emotions, and moral reasoning werecase of Phineas Gage, a 25-year-old
influenced. The accident helped
scientists understand the role of therailroad worker who, as a result offrontal lobe in these processes. Source: Photoan explosion, had an iron rod
courtesy of John M. Harlow,
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Phineas_gage_driven into his cheek and out_1868_skull_diagram.jpg.
through the top of his skull (seeFigure 3.12), causing major
damage to his frontal lobe (Macmillan, 2000). Although remarkably Gage was able to return towork after the wounds healed, he no longer seemed to be the same person to those who knew him.
The amiable, soft-spoken Gage had become irritable, rude, irresponsible, and dishonest. Although
there are questions about the interpretation of this case study (Kotowicz, 2007), it did provide
early evidence that the frontal lobe is involved in emotion and morality (Damasio et al., 2005).
Koenigs et al. (2007) also found that the frontal lobe is important in moral judgment.

Recording Electrical Activity in the Brain
In addition to lesion approaches, it is also possible to learn about the brain by studying theelectrical activity created by the firing of its neurons. One approach, primarily used with animals,
is to place detectors in the brain to study the responses of specific neurons. Research using these82techniques has found, for instance, that there are specific neurons, known as feature detectors, inthe visual cortex that detect movement, lines and edges, and even faces (Kanwisher, 2000).
A less invasive approach, and one that can be used on living humans, is electroencephalography(EEG), which is a technique that records the electrical activity produced by the brain’s neurons
through the use of electrodes that are placed around the research participant’s head. An EEG canshow if a person is asleep, awake, or anesthetized because the brain wave patterns are known todiffer during each state. EEGs can also track the waves that are produced when a person isreading, writing, and speaking, and are useful for understanding brain abnormalities, such as
epilepsy. A particular advantage of EEG is that the participant can move around while therecordings are being taken, which is useful when measuring brain activity in children who often
have difficulty keeping still. Furthermore, by following electrical impulses across the surface ofthe brain, researchers can observe changes over very fast time periods.

Peeking Inside the Brain: Neuroimaging
Figure 3.13

Source: Photo courtesy of the University of OregonChild and Family Center,
http://www.uoregon.edu/~cfc/projects-bbl.htm.

A participant in an EEG
study has a number ofelectrodes placed aroundthe head, which allows theresearcher to study theactivity of the person’s
brain. The patterns ofelectrical activity varydepending on theparticipant’s current state(e.g., whether he or she issleeping or awake) and on
the tasks the person is
engaging in.

Although the EEG can provide
information about the general patternsof electrical activity within the brain,
and although the EEG allows theresearcher to see these changes quickly
as they occur in real time, theelectrodes must be placed on thesurface of the skull and each electrodemeasures brain waves from large areasof the brain. As a result, EEGs do notprovide a very clear picture of thestructure of the brain.

Looking inside the brain can also be accomplished with several techniques. Computerized Axial
Tomography (CT scan) uses an X-ray tube to encircle the head, and a cross sectional series of Xrays are combined to produce a three-dimensional image of brain structures. In traditional
Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), magnetic fields are used to differentiate between types oftissue in the brain. These scans avoid exposing patients to harmful X-rays. Both CT scans and
MRIs produce only static images.
Positron Emission Tomography (PET) monitors the decay of a radioactive isotope which has
been injected into the patient. Rates of decay in different parts of the brain can show which areas
are more active. This allows the radiologist to see how the brain is functioning. PET scans areoften combined with MRIs or CT scans.
More precise techniques also exist which can provide specific information on structure andfunction. Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI) is a type of brain scan that uses amagnetic field to create images of brain activity in each brain area. The patient lies on a bed
within a large cylindrical structure containing a very strong magnet. Neurons that are firing use
83

more oxygen, and the need for oxygen increases blood flow to the area. The fMRI detects theamount of blood flow in each brain region, and thus is an indicator of neural activity.
Figure 3.14 fMRI Image

The fMRI creates brain images of brain
structure and activity. In this image the red andyellow areas represent increased blood flow andthus increased activity. From your knowledgeof brain structure, can you guess what thisperson is doing?
Source: Photo courtesy of the National Institutes of Health,
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Face_recognition.jpg

Very clear and detailed pictures of brain structures(see Figure 3.14) can be produced via fMRI. Often,
the images take the form of cross-sectional slicesthat are obtained as the magnetic field is passed
across the brain. The images of these slices are taken
repeatedly and are superimposed on images of thebrain structure itself to show how activity changes indifferent brain structures over time. When the
research participant is asked to engage in tasks
while in the scanner, for example, by playing a gamewith another person, the images can show whichparts of the brain are associated with which types oftasks. Another advantage of the fMRI is that is it
noninvasive. The research participant simply entersthe machine and the scans begin.

Although the scanners themselves are expensive, theadvantages of fMRIs are substantial, and they are
now available in many university and hospitalsettings. fMRI is now the most commonly usedmethodSource:of Photolearning
courtesy of about
the Nationalbrain
Institutes ofstructure.
Health, http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Face_recognition.jpg.

There is still one more approach that is being more frequently implemented to understand brain
function, and although it is new, it may turn out to be the most useful of all. Transcranial
Magnetic Stimulation (TMS) is a procedure in which magnetic pulses are applied to the brain ofliving persons with the goal of temporarily and safely deactivating a small brain region. In TMS
studies the research participant is first scanned in an fMRI machine to determine the exact locationof the brain area to be tested. Then the electrical stimulation is provided to the brain before or
while the participant is working on a cognitive task, and the effects of the stimulation on
performance are assessed. If the participant’s ability to perform the task is influenced by thepresence of the stimulation, then the researchers can conclude that this particular area of the brain
is important to carrying out the task.
The primary advantage of TMS is that it allows the researcher to draw causal conclusions about
the influence of brain structures on thoughts, feelings, and behaviors. When the TMS pulses areapplied, the brain region becomes less active, and this deactivation is expected to influence theresearch participant’s responses. Current research has used TMS to study the brain areas
responsible for emotion and cognition and their roles in how people perceive intention andapproach moral reasoning (Kalbe et al., 2010; Van den Eynde et al., 2010; Young, Camprodon,
Hauser, Pascual-Leone, & Saxe, 2010). TMS is also used as a treatment for a variety ofpsychological conditions, including migraine, Parkinson’s disease, and major depressive disorder.

84

Research Focus: Cyberostracism
Neuroimaging techniques have important implications for understanding our behavior,including our responses to those around us. Naomi Eisenberger and her colleagues (2003)
tested the hypothesis that people who were excluded by others would report emotional distressand that images of their brains would show that they experienced pain in the same part of thebrain where physical pain is normally experienced. In the experiment, 13 participants were eachplaced into an fMRI brain-imaging machine. The participants were told that they would beplaying a computer “Cyberball” game with two other players who were also in fMRI machines
The two opponents did not actually exist, and their responses were controlled by the computer.
Each of the participants was measured under three different conditions. In the first part of theexperiment, the participants were told that as a result of technical difficulties, the link to the othertwo scanners could not yet be made, and thus at first they could not engage in, but only watch,
the game play. This allowed the researchers to take a baseline fMRI reading. Then, during asecond inclusion scan, the participants played the game, supposedly with the two other players.
During this time, the other players threw the ball to the participants. In the third, exclusion, scan,
however, the participants initially received seven throws from the other two players but werethen excluded from the game because the two players stopped throwing the ball to theparticipants for the remainder of the scan (45 throws).
The results of the analyses showed that activity in two areas of the frontal lobe wassignificantly greater during the exclusion scan than during the inclusion scan. Because thesebrain regions are known from prior research to be active for individuals who are experiencing
physical pain, the authors concluded that these results show that the physiological brain
responses associated with being socially excluded by others are similar to brain responses
experienced upon physical injury.
Further research (Chen, Williams, Fitness, & Newton, 2008; Wesselmann, Bagg, & Williams,
2009) has documented that people react to being excluded in a variety of situations with diverse
emotions and behaviors. People who feel that they are excluded, or even those who observe
other people being excluded, not only experience pain, but feel worse about themselves andtheir relationships with people more generally, and they may work harder to try to restore
their connections with others.

Key Takeaways••••

Lesion studies are informative about the effects of lesions on different brain regions.
Electrophysiological recording may be used in animals to directly measure brain activity.
Measures of electrical activity in the brain, such as electroencephalography (EEG),
are used to assess brain-wave patterns and activity.
CT, MRI, PET, fMRI and TMS are all ways to iamge the brain.

85

Exercise and Critical Thinking
1. Consider the different ways that psychologists study the brain, and think of a
psychological characteristic or behavior that could be studied using each of the different
techniques.

Videos
1. Neuroscientist Christopher Decharms discusses the use of the fMRI.
http://www.ted.com/talks/christopher_decharms_scans_the_brain_in_real_time.html

The Nervous System and the Endocrine System
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the difference between the central, peripheral, sympathetic,

parasympathetic, and autonomic nervous systems.
2. Describe the function of hormones.
3. Explain how the nervous system and the endocrine system work together to influence

behavior.
4. Explain how the pituitary gland and adrenal glands influence behavior.

Now that we have considered how individual neurons operate and the roles of the different brain
areas, it is time to ask how the body manages to “put it all together.” How do the complex
activities in the various parts of the brain, the simple all-or-nothing firings of billions ofinterconnected neurons, and the various chemical systems within the body, work together to allow
the body to respond to the social environment and engage in everyday behaviors? In this section,
we will see that the complexities of human behavior are accomplished through the joint actions ofelectrical and chemical processes in the nervous system and the endocrine system.

The Nervous System
The nervous system, the electrical information highway of the body, is made up of nerves, which
are bundles of interconnected neurons that fire in synchrony to carry messages. The nervous
system has two major divisions. The central nervous system (CNS), made up of the brain andspinal cord, is the major controller of the body’s functions, charged with interpreting sensory
information, and responding to it with its own directives. The CNS interprets information comingin from the senses, formulates an appropriate reaction, and sends responses to the appropriate
system to respond accordingly. Everything that we see, hear, smell, touch, and taste is conveyed tous from our sensory organs as neural impulses, and each of the commands that the brain sends tothe body, both consciously and unconsciously, travels through this system as well. The peripheral
nervous system (PNS) links the CNS to the body’s sense receptors, muscles, and glands.
86

Figure 3.15 The Functional Divisions of the Nervous System

Nerves are differentiated according to their function. A sensory or afferent neuron carries
information from the sensory receptors, whereas a motor or efferent neuron transmits
information to the muscles and glands. Both of these neurons are located in the peripheral nervous
system. An interneuron, responsible for communicating among the neurons, is by far the mostcommon type of neuron, and is located primarily within the central nervous system. Interneurons
allow the brain to combine the multiple sources of available information to create a coherent
picture of the sensory information being conveyed.
The spinal cord is the long, thin, tubular bundleof nerves and supporting cells that extends
down from the brain. It is the central
throughway of information for the body. Within
the spinal cord, ascending tracts of sensory
neurons relay sensory information from thesense organs to the brain while descending
tracts of motor neurons relay motor commands
back to the body. When a quicker-than-usual
response is required, the spinal cord can do its
own processing, bypassing the brain altogether.
A reflex is an involuntary and nearly
instantaneous movement in response to a
stimulus. Reflexes are triggered when sensory
87

Figure 3.16 The Reflex

information is powerful enough to reach a given threshold and the interneurons in the spinal cord
act to send a message back through the motor neurons without relaying the information to thebrain (see Figure 3.16). When you touch a hot stove and immediately pull your hand back, orwhen you fumble your cell phone and instinctively reach to catch it before it falls, reflexes in yourspinal cord order the appropriate responses before your brain even knows what is happening.
The peripheral nervous sytem is divided into two subsystems. The somatic nervous system (SNS)is the division of the PNS that controls the external aspects of the body, including the skeletal
muscles, skin, and sense organs. The somatic nervous system consists primarily of motor nerves
responsible for sending brain signals for muscle contraction. We become aware of the world
through the sensory division of the somatic nervous system, and we act on the world through the
motor division of the somatic nervous system.
The autonomic nervous system (ANS) is the division of the PNS that governs the internal
activities of the human body, including heart rate, breathing, digestion, salivation, perspiration,
urination, and sexual arousal. Many of the actions of the ANS, such as heart rate and digestion,
are automatic and out of our conscious control, but others, such as breathing and sexual activity,
can be controlled and influenced by conscious processes.
The autonomic nervous system itself can be further subdivided into the sympathetic andparasympathetic systems (see Figure 3.17). The sympathetic division of the ANS is involved in
preparing the body for behavior, particularly in response to stress, by activating the organs andthe glands in the endocrine system. The parasympathetic division of the ANS tends to calm thebody by slowing the heart and breathing and by allowing the body to recover from the activities
that the sympathetic system causes.
Figure 3.17 The Autonomic Nervous System
The sympathetic and theparasympathetic divisions normallyfunction in opposition to each other,such that the sympathetic division acts a
bit like the accelerator pedal on a car andthe parasympathetic division acts likethe brake.
Our everyday activities are controlled by
the interaction between the sympathetic
and parasympathetic nervous systems.
For example, when we get out of bed in
the morning, we would experience a
sharp drop in blood pressure if it were
not for the action of the sympathetic
system, which automatically increases
blood flow through the body. Similarly,
after we eat a big meal, theparasympathetic system automaticallysends more blood to the stomach and88intestines, allowing us to efficiently digest the food. Perhaps you have had the experience of not
being at all hungry before a stressful event, such as a sports game or an exam when thesympathetic division was primarily in action, but suddenly finding yourself starved afterward, as
the parasympathetic takes over. The two systems work together to maintain vital bodily functions,
resulting in homeostasis, the natural balance in the body’s systems.

The Endocrine System
The nervous system is designed to protect us from danger through its interpretation of andreactions to stimuli. However, a primary function of the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous
systems is to interact with the endocrine system the chemical regulation of the body that consists ofglands that secrete hormones which influence behavior.
A gland in the endocrine system is made up of groups of cells that function to secrete hormones.
A hormone is a chemical that moves throughout the body to help regulate emotions andbehaviors. When the hormones released by one gland arrive at receptor tissues or other glands,
these receiving receptors may trigger the release of other hormones, resulting in a series ofcomplex chemical chain reactions. The endocrine system works together with the nervous system
to influence many aspects of human behavior, including growth, reproduction, and metabolism,
and the endocrine system plays a vital role in emotions. The major glands in the endocrine system
are shown in Figure 3.18.
The pituitary gland, a small pea-sized
gland located near the center of thebrain, is responsible for controllingthe body’s growth, but it also has
many other influences that make it ofprimary importance to regulating
behavior. The pituitary secretes
hormones that influence our responses
to pain, as well as, hormones thatsignal the ovaries and testes to makesex hormones. The pituitary glandalso controls ovulation and themenstrual cycle in women. Because
the pituitary has such an important
influence on other glands, it issometimes known as the master gland.
Other glands in the endocrine system
include the pancreas, which secretes
hormones designed to keep the body
supplied with fuel to produce andmaintain stores of energy; the pineal
gland, located in the middle of thebrain, which secretes melatonin, ahormone that helps regulate the

Figure 3.18 The Major Glands of the Endocrine
System

The male is shown on the left and the female on the right.

89

wake-sleep cycle; and the thyroid and parathyroid glands, which are responsible for determining
how quickly the body uses energy and hormones, and controlling the amount of calcium in the
blood and bones.
The body has two triangular adrenal glands, one atop each kidney, which produce hormones that
regulate salt and water balance in the body, and they are involved in metabolism, the immune
system, and sexual development and function. The most important function of the adrenal glands is
to secrete the hormones epinephrine and norepinephrine when we are excited, threatened, orstressed.
Epinephrine and norepinephrine stimulate the sympathetic division of the ANS, causing increased
heart and lung activity, dilation of the pupils, and increases in blood sugar, which give the body asurge of energy to respond to a threat. The activity and role of the adrenal glands in response tostress provides an excellent example of the close relationship and interdependency of the nervousand endocrine systems. A quick-acting nervous system is essential for immediate activation of theadrenal glands, while the endocrine system mobilizes the body for action.
The male sex glands, known as the testes, secrete a number of hormones, the most important of
which is testosterone, the male sex hormone. Testosterone regulates body changes associated withsexual development, including enlargement of the penis, deepening of the voice, growth of facialand pubic hair, and the increase in muscle growth and strength. The ovaries, the female sex
glands, are located in the pelvis. They produce eggs and secrete the female hormones estrogen andprogesterone. Estrogen is involved in the development of female sexual features. Both estrogenand progesterone are also involved in pregnancy and the regulation of the menstrual cycle.
Recent research has pinpointed some of the important roles of the sex hormones in social behavior.
Dabbs, Hargrove, and Heusel (1996) measured the testosterone levels of 240 men who weremembers of 12 fraternities at two universities. They also obtained descriptions of the fraternities
from university officials, fraternity officers, yearbook and chapter house photographs, andresearcher field notes. The researchers correlated the testosterone levels and the descriptions ofeach fraternity. They found that the fraternities with the highest average testosterone levels werealso more wild and unruly, and one of these fraternities was known across campus for the
crudeness of its behavior. On the other hand, the fraternities with the lowest average testosterone
levels were better behaved, friendly and pleasant, academically successful, and socially
responsible. Banks and Dabbs (1996) found that juvenile delinquents and prisoners who had highlevels of testosterone also acted more violently, and Tremblay et al. (1998) found that testosterone
was related to toughness and leadership behaviors in adolescent boys. Although testosterone levels
are higher in men than in women, the relationship between testosterone and aggression is not
limited to males. Studies have also shown a positive relationship between testosterone andaggression and related behaviors (such as competitiveness) in women (Cashdan, 2003).
It must be kept in mind that the observed relationships between testosterone levels and aggressive
behavior that have been found in these studies do not prove that testosterone causes aggression,
only that the relationships are correlational. In fact, there is evidence that the relationship between
violence and testosterone also goes in the other direction: Playing an aggressive game, such as
tennis or even chess, increases the testosterone levels of the winners. Testosterone levels in thelosers actually go down (Gladue, Boechler, & McCaul, 1989; Mazur, Booth, & Dabbs, 1992).
90

Recent research has also begun to document the role that female sex hormones may play inreactions to others. A study about hormonal influences on social-cognitive functioning (Macrae,
Alnwick, Milne, & Schloerscheidt, 2002) found that women were more easily able to perceive andcategorize male faces during the more fertile phases of their menstrual cycles. Although researchers
did not directly measure the presence of hormones, it is likely that phase-specific hormonaldifferences influenced the women’s perceptions.
At this point you can begin to see the important role that hormones play in behavior, but thehormones we have reviewed in this section represent only a subset of the many influences that
hormones have on our behaviors. In the chapters to come, we will consider the important roles that
hormones play in many other behaviors, including sleeping, sexual activity, and helping andharming others.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

The body uses both electrical and chemical systems to communicate.
The CNS is made up of bundles of nerves that carry messages to and from the PNS.
Specific nerves, including sensory neurons, motor neurons, and interneurons, eachhave specific functions.
The spinal cord may bypass the brain by responding rapidly using reflexes.
The peripheral nervous system is composed of the autonomic nervous system (ANS)
and the somatic nervous system (SNS). The ANS is further divided into thesympathetic (activating) and parasympathetic (calming) nervous systems. These
divisions are activated by glands and organs in the endocrine system.
The endocrine system is composed of glands that secrete hormones. These chemicals
influence thoughts, feelings, and behaviors.
The pituitary gland is a master gland, affecting many other glands.
Hormones produced by the pituitary and adrenal glands regulate growth, stress,
sexual functions, and chemical balance in the body.
The adrenal glands produce epinephrine and norepinephrine, the hormones responsible
for our reactions to stress.
The sex hormones, testosterone, estrogen, and progesterone, play an important rolein sex differences.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Recall a time when you were threatened or stressed. What physiological reactions
did you experience in the situation and what aspects of the endocrine system do you
think created those reactions?
2. Consider the emotions that you have experienced over the past several weeks. What
hormones do you think might have been involved in creating those emotions?

91Videos
1. Take a journey through the central nervous system at
http://epsych.msstate.edu/biological/neuroanatomy/Part2/index.html (click “next” forfeedback).
2. Take a journey through the Peripheral Nervous System:
http://epsych.msstate.edu/biological/neuroanatomy/Part1/index.html (progress through all
small squares, then click next.

Sleeping and Dreaming
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Explain circadian rhythms.
Distinguish among the diferent stages of sleep.
Review the disorders that affect sleep and the costs of sleep deprivation.
Explain the similarities and differences among the theories of sleep and dreaming.

The lives of all organisms, including humans, are influenced by regularly occurring cycles of
behaviors known as biological rhythms. One important biological rhythm is the annual cycle thatguides the migration of birds and the hibernation of bears. Women also experience a 28-day cyclethat guides their fertility and menstruation. But perhaps the strongest and most importantbiorhythm is the daily circadian rhythm that guides the daily waking and sleeping cycle in many
animals.
Many biological rhythms are coordinated by changes in the level and duration of ambient light,
for instance, as winter turns into summer and as night turns into day. In some animals, such as
birds, the pineal gland in the brain is directly sensitive to light and its activation influences
behavior, such as mating and annual migrations. Light also has a profound effect on humans. We
are more likely to experience depression during the dark winter months than during the lighter
summer months, and exposure to bright lights can help reduce this depression (McGinnis, 2007).
Sleep is also influenced by ambient light. The ganglion cells in the retina send signals to a brain
area above the thalamus called the suprachiasmatic nucleus, which is the body’s primarycircadian pacemaker. The suprachiasmatic nucleus analyzes the strength and duration of the lightstimulus and sends signals to the pineal gland when the ambient light level is low or its duration isshort. In response, the pineal gland secretes melatonin, a powerful hormone that facilitates theonset of sleep.

Sleep Stages
Although we lose consciousness as we sleep, the brain nevertheless remains active. The patterns of
sleep have been tracked in thousands of research participants who have spent nights sleeping inresearch labs while their brain waves were recorded by monitors, such as an EEG. Sleep
researchers have found that sleeping people undergo a fairly consistent pattern of sleep stages,
each lasting about 90 minutes.
92

As you can see in Figure 3.19, these stages are of two major types: Rapid eye movement(REM) sleep is a sleep stage characterized by the presence of quick fast eye movements anddreaming. REM sleep accounts for about 25% of our total sleep time. During REM sleep, ourawareness of external events is dramatically reduced, and consciousness is dominated primarily
by internally generated images and a lack of overt thinking (Hobson, 2004). During this sleep
stage our muscles shut down, and this is probably a good thing as it protects us from hurting
ourselves or trying to act out the scenes that are playing in our dreams. The second major sleep
type, non-rapid eye movement (non-REM) sleep is a deep sleep, characterized by very slow
brain waves, that is further subdivided into four stages: 1, 2, 3, and 4. Each of the sleep stages
has its own distinct pattern of brain activity (Horne, 1988).
Figure 3.19 Stages of Sleep

During a typical night, our sleep cycles move between REM and non-REM sleep, with each cycle repeating
at about 90-minute intervals. The deeper non-REM sleep stages usually occur earlier in the night, and more
REM sleep (in red) at the end of the sleep cycle.
Wikimedia http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sleep#mediaviewer/File:Sleep_Hypnogram.svg

As you can see in Figure 3.20, the brain waves that are recorded by an EEG as we sleep show thatthe brain’s activity changes during each stage of sleeping. When we are awake, our brain activity
is characterized by the presence of very fast beta waves. When we first begin to fall asleep, thewaves get longer, called alpha waves, and as we move into stage 1 sleep, which is characterized by
the experience of drowsiness, the brain begins to produce even slower theta waves. During stage 1
sleep, some muscle tone is lost, as well as most awareness of the environment. Some people may
experience sudden jerks or twitches and even vivid hallucinations during this initial stage of sleep.
Stage 1 sleep occupies about 5 percent of the night.
Normally, if we are allowed to keep sleeping, we will move from stage 1 to stage 2 sleep. During
stage 2 sleep, muscular activity is further decreased and conscious awareness of the environment
is lost. This stage typically represents about half of the total sleep time in normal adults. Stage 2
sleep is characterized by theta waves interspersed with bursts of rapid brain activity known as
sleep spindles.

93

Stage 3 is a transition phase between stages 2
and 4. Stage 4, also known as slow wave
sleep, is the deepest level of sleep,
characterized by an increased proportion ofvery slow delta waves. This is the stage inwhich most sleep abnormalities, such as
sleepwalking, sleeptalking, sleep terrors, andbed-wetting occur.

Figure 3.20 EEG Recordings of Brain
Patterns During Sleep

Some skeletal muscle tone remains, making it
possible for affected individuals to rise fromtheir beds and engage in sometimes very
complex behaviors, but consciousness is
distant. Even in the deepest sleep, however, weare still aware of the external world. If smoke
enters the room or if we hear the cry of a baby
we are likely to react, even though we aresound asleep. These occurrences again
demonstrate the extent to which we process
information outside consciousness.
After falling initially into a very deep sleep,
the brain begins to become more active again,
and we normally move into the first period of
REM sleep about 90 minutes after falling
asleep. REM sleep is accompanied by anincrease in heart rate, facial twitches, and theEach stage of sleep has its own distinct pattern of brain
repeated rapid eye movements that give thisactivity. Non-Rem Stage 3 and 4 demonstrate delta
stage its name. People who are awakened
waves.
during REM sleep almost always report thatthey were dreaming, while those awakened in other stages of sleep report dreams much less often.
REM sleep is also emotional sleep. Activity in the limbic system, including the amygdala, isincreased during REM sleep, and the genitals become aroused, even if the content of the dreams
we are having is not sexual. A typical 25-year-old man may have an erection nearly half of thenight, and the common “morning erection” is left over from the last REM period before waking.
Normally we will go through several cycles of REM and non-REM sleep each night (see Figure3.19). The length of the REM portion of the cycle tends to increase through the night, from about 5
to 10 minutes early in the night to 15 to 20 minutes shortly before awakening in the morning.
Dreams also tend to become more elaborate and vivid as the night goes on. Eventually, as the sleep
cycle finishes, the brain resumes its faster alpha and beta waves and we awake, normallyrefreshed.

94

Sleep-Wake Disorders
According to a recent poll (National Sleep Foundation, 2009), about one-fourth of American
adults say they get a good night’s sleep only a few nights a month or less. These people aresuffering from an insomnia disorder, defined as persistentdifficulty falling or staying asleep. Most cases of insomnia
Figure 3.21
are temporary, lasting from a few days to several weeks, but
in some cases insomnia can last for years.
Insomnia can result from physical disorders, such as pain due
to injury or illness, or from psychological problems such as
stress, financial worries, or relationship difficulties. Changes
in sleep patterns, such as jet lag, changes in work shift, oreven the movement to or from daylight savings time canproduce insomnia. Sometimes the sleep that the insomniac
does get is disturbed and nonrestorative, and the lack ofquality sleep produces impairment of functioning during theday. Ironically, the problem may be compounded by people’sanxiety over insomnia itself. Their fear of being unable tosleep may wind up keeping them awake. Some people may
also develop a conditioned anxiety to the bedroom or the bed.

Taking pills to sleep is notrecommended unless all othermethods of improving sleep havebeen tried. © Thinkstock

People who have difficulty sleeping may turn to drugs to help them sleep. Barbiturates,
benzodiazepines, and other sedatives are frequently marketed and prescribed as sleep aids, butthey may interrupt the natural stages of the sleep cycle, and in the end, are likely to do more harmthan good. In some cases, they may also promote dependence. Most practitioners of sleep
medicine today recommend making environmental and scheduling changes first, followed bytherapy for underlying problems, with pharmacological remedies used only as a last resort.
According to the National Sleep Foundation, some steps that can be used to combat insomnia
include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the bed and bedroom for sleep and sex only. Do not spend time in bed during the day.
Establish a regular bedtime routine and a regular sleep-wake schedule.
Think positively about your sleeping and try not to get anxious just because you are losing alittle sleep.
Do not eat or drink too much close to bedtime.
Create a sleep-promoting environment that is dark, cool, and comfortable.
Avoid disturbing noises and consider a bedside fan or white-noise machine to block out
disturbing sounds.
Consume less or no caffeine, particularly late in the day.
Avoid alcohol and nicotine, especially close to bedtime.
Exercise, but not within 3 hours before bedtime.
Avoid naps, particularly in the late afternoon or evening.
Keep a sleep diary to identify your sleep habits and patterns that you can share with yourdoctor.
95

Another common sleep problem is sleep apnea, a sleep disorder characterized by pauses inbreathing that last at least 10 seconds during sleep (Morgenthaler, Kagramanov, Hanak, &Decker, 2006). In addition to preventing restorative sleep, sleep apnea can also cause high bloodpressure and may raise the risk of stroke and heart attack (Yaggi et al., 2005).
Most sleep apnea is caused by an obstruction of the walls of the throat that occurs when we fallasleep. It is most common in obese or older individuals who have lost muscle tone and isparticularly common in men. Sleep apnea caused by obstructions is usually treated with an air
machine that uses a mask to create a continuous pressure that prevents the airway from collapsing,or with mouthpieces that keep the airway open. If all other treatments have failed, sleep apnea may
be treated with surgery to open the airway.
Narcolepsy is a disorder characterized by extreme daytime sleepiness with frequent episodes of
nodding off. The syndrome may also be accompanied by attacks of cataplexy, in which theindividual loses muscle tone, resulting in a partial or complete collapse. It is estimated that at least
200,000 Americans suffer from narcolepsy, although only about a quarter of these people
have been diagnosed (National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, 2008).
Narcolepsy is in part the result of genetics; that is, people who suffer from the disease lackneurotransmitters that are important in keeping us alert (Taheri, Zeitzer, & Mignot, 2002), and isalso the result of a lack of deep sleep. While most people descend through the sequence of sleep
stages, then move back up to REM sleep soon after falling asleep, narcolepsy sufferers movedirectly into REM and undergo numerous awakenings during the night, often preventing themfrom getting good sleep.
Narcolepsy can be treated with stimulants, such as amphetamines, to counteract the daytime
sleepiness, or with antidepressants to treat a presumed underlying depression. However, sincethese drugs further disrupt already-abnormal sleep cycles, these approaches may, in the long run,make the problem worse. Many sufferers find relief by taking a number of planned short naps
during the day, and some individuals may find it easier to work in jobs that allow them to sleep
during the day and work at night.
Other sleep disorders occur when cognitive or motor processes that should be turned off orreduced in magnitude during sleep operate at higher than normal levels (Mahowald & Schenck,2000). One example is somnambulism or sleepwalking in which the person leaves the bed andmoves around while still asleep. Sleepwalking is more common in childhood, with the mostfrequent occurrences around the age of 12 years. About 4% of adults experience somnambulism(Mahowald & Schenck, 2000).
Sleep terrors is a disruptive sleep disorder, most frequently experienced in childhood that may
involve loud screams and intense panic. The sufferer cannot wake from sleep even though he or
she is trying to. In extreme cases, sleep terrors may result in bodily harm or property damage as
the sufferer moves about abruptly. Up to 3% of adults suffer from sleep terrors, which typicallyoccur in non-REM sleep stage four (Mahowald & Schenck, 2000).
Other sleep disorders include bruxism, in which the sufferer grinds his teeth during sleep; restlesslegs syndrome, in which the sufferer reports an itching, burning, or otherwise uncomfortable96feeling in his legs, usually exacerbated when resting or asleep; and periodic limb movement
disorder, which involves sudden involuntary movement of limbs. The latter can cause sleep
disruption and injury for both the sufferer and bed partner.
Although many sleep disorders occur during non-REM sleep, REM sleep behavior disorder(Mahowald & Schenck, 2005) is a condition, thought to be neurological in nature, in which people,
especially middle-aged or older men, engage in vigorous and bizarre physical activities during
REM sleep in response to intense, violent dreams. As their actions may injure themselves or their
sleeping partners, this disorder is normally treated with medications.

Why do we sleep?
Currently there is no consensus on the function of sleep for humans or other animals (Harrison,2012). However, there are several theories.
Evolutionary Theory: From an evolutionary perspective, sleep has evolved as a function of
homeostasis and the circadian rhythms discussed earlier. Our sleep patterns have adjusted to theenvironmental demands placed on us including climate, seasonal patterns and predators. Ourpreferred sleep times and our sleep requirements vary throughout our life cycle. Newborns tend to
sleep between 16 and 18 hours per day, preschoolers tend to sleep between 10 and 12 hours perday, school-aged children and teenagers usually prefer at least 9 hours of sleep per night, and most
adults say that they require 7 to 8 hours per night (Mercer, Merritt, & Cowell, 1998; National
Sleep Foundation, 2008). There are also individual differences in need for sleep. Some people doquite well with fewer than 6 hours of sleep per night, whereas others need 9 hours or more. The
most recent study by the National Sleep Foundation suggests that adults should get between 7 and9 hours of sleep per night (see Figure 3.22), and yet Americans now average fewer than 7 hours.
Figure 3.22 Average Hours of Required Sleep per Night

Restoration Theory: Sleep has a vital restorative function and a prolonged lack of sleep results inincreased anxiety, diminished performance, and, if severe and extended, may even result in death.
In 1964, 17-year-old high school student Randy Gardner remained awake for 264 hours (11 days) in97

order to set a new Guinness World Record.
At the request of his worried parents, he wasmonitored by a U.S. Navy psychiatrist, Lt.
Cmdr. John J. Ross. The chart in Figure 3.23
maps the progression of his behavioral
changes over the 11 days.
Research shows that after sleep loss there is arebound of non-REM sleep to compensate forthe loss (Harrison, 2012). Many roadaccidents involve sleep deprivation, andpeople who are sleep deprived show
decrements in driving performance similar to
those who have ingested alcohol (Hack, Choi,
Vijayapalan, Davies, & Stradling, 2001;
Williamson & Feyer, 2000). Poor treatment
by doctors (Smith- Coggins, Rosekind,
Hurd, & Buccino, 1994) and a variety ofindustrial accidents have also been traced inpart to the effects of sleep deprivation

Figure 3.23 The Effects of Sleep Deprivation

Source: Adapted from Ross, J. J. (1965). Neurological findings after
prolonged sleep deprivation. Archives of Neurology, 12, 399–403.

Health and Growth: Good sleep is also important to our health and longevity. It is no surprise that
we sleep more when we are sick, because sleep works to fight infection. Sleep deprivation
suppresses immune responses that fight off infection, and can lead to obesity, memory impairment,
and hypertension (Ferrie et al., 2007; Kushida, 2005). Sleeping well can even save our lives. Dew
et al. (2003) found that older adults who had better sleep patterns also lived longer. Additionally,
during slow wave sleep the pituitary gland releases a surge of growth hormone. No nighttime surge
is noted when the individual is awake, only when asleep (Dijk & Lazar, 2012).
Memory Consolidation: Lastly, sleep is linked to the formation of memories and learning. Sleep
has been implicated in the encoding process as well as the consolidation of memory (Walker, 2012).
Under conditions of sleep deprivation using fMRI, deficits are noted in regions of the hippocampus,
which are critical for learning new information. Sleep deprivation on memory formation isespecially pronounced for emotional material.
Figure 3.24

© Thinkstock

For college students, getting needed rest is difficult in part because
school and work schedules still follow the early-to-rise timetable thatwas set years ago. We tend to stay up late to enjoy activities in theevening, but then are forced to get up early to go to work or school.
The situation is particularly bad for college students, who are likely to
combine a heavy academic schedule, an active social life, and work.
Getting enough sleep is a luxury that many of us seem to be unable orunwilling to afford, and yet sleeping is one of the most important things
we can do for ourselves. Continued over time, a nightly deficit of even
only 1 or 2 hours can have a substantial impact on mood andperformance.
98

Theories of Dreaming
Dreams are the succession of images, thoughts, sounds, and emotions that passes through our
minds while sleeping. When people are awakened from REM sleep, they normally report that they
have been dreaming, suggesting that people normally dream several times a night but that most
dreams are forgotten on awakening (Dement, 1997). The content of our dreams generally relates toour everyday experiences and concerns, and frequently our fears and failures (Cartwright,
Agargun, Kirkby, & Friedman, 2006; Domhoff, Meyer-Gomes, & Schredl, 2005). Just like withsleep, there is no consensus on the funtions of dreams, and consequently, we will focus on thethree most prominent theories.
Road to the Unconscious: Many cultures regard dreams as having great significance for the
dreamer, either by revealing something important about the dreamer’s present circumstances or
predicting his future. The Austrian psychologist Sigmund Freud (1913/1988) analyzed the dreamsof his patients to help him understand their unconscious needs and desires, and psychotherapists
still make use of this technique today. Freud believed that the primary function of dreams waswish fulfillment, or the idea that dreaming allows us to act out the desires that we must repress
during the day. He differentiated between the manifest content of the dream or its literal actions,and its latent content or the hidden psychological meaning of the dream. Freud believed that thereal meaning of dreams is often suppressed by the unconscious mind in order to protect theindividual from thoughts and feelings that are hard to cope with. By uncovering the real meaningof dreams through psychoanalysis, Freud believed that people could better understand theirproblems and resolve the issues that create difficulties in their lives.
Information Processing: Although Freud and others have focused on the meaning of dreams,
other theories about the causes of dreams are less concerned with their content. One possibility isthat we dream primarily to help with consolidation, or the moving of information into long-term
memory (Alvarenga et al., 2008; Zhang (2004). Rauchs, Desgranges, Foret, and Eustache (2005)
found that rats that had been deprived of REM sleep after learning a new task were less able toperform the task again later than were rats that had been allowed to dream, and these differenceswere greater on tasks that involved learning unusual information or developing new behaviors.
Payne and Nadel (2004) argued that the content of dreams is the result of consolidation when we
dream about the things that are being moved into long-term memory. Thus, dreaming may be an
important part of the learning that we do while sleeping (Hobson, Pace-Schott, and Stickgold,
2000).
Activation-Synthesis Theory: The activation-synthesis theory of dreaming (Hobson & McCarley,
1977; Hobson, 2004) proposes still another explanation for dreaming; that is, dreams are ourbrain’s interpretation of the random firing of neurons in the brain stem. According to this theory,the signals from the brain stem are sent to the cortex, just as they are when we are awake, but
because the pathways from the cortex to skeletal muscles are disconnected during REM sleep, thecortex does not know how to interpret the signals. As a result, the cortex strings the messages
together into the coherent stories we experience as dreams.
Although researchers are still trying to determine the exact causes of dreaming, one thing remains
clear, and that is we need to dream. If we are deprived of REM sleep, we quickly become less able
to engage in the important tasks of everyday life, until we are finally able to dream again.
99

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•

Human and animal behavior is influenced by biological rhythms, including annual,monthly, and circadian rhythms.
Sleep consists of two major stages: REM and non-REM sleep. Non-REM sleep
has four substages, known as stages 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Each sleep stage is marked by a specific pattern of biological responses and brain wave
patterns.
Sleep is essential for adequate functioning during the day. Sleep disorders, including
insomnia, sleep apnea, and narcolepsy, may make it hard for us to sleep well.
Dreams occur primarily during REM sleep. Some theories of dreaming, such Freud’s,
are based on the content of the dreams. Other theories of dreaming propose thatdreaming is related to memory consolidation. The activation-synthesis theory of
dreaming is based only on neural activity.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. If you happen to be home alone one night, try this exercise: At nightfall, leave thelights and any other powered equipment off. Does this influence what time you go tosleep as opposed to your normal sleep time?
2. Review your own sleep patterns. Are you getting enough sleep? What makes you thinkso?
3. Review some of the dreams that you have had recently. Consider how each of thetheories of dreaming discussed would explain your dreams.

Chapter Summary
All human behavior, thoughts, and feelings are produced by the actions of our brains, nerves,muscles, and glands.
The body is controlled by the nervous system, consisting of the central nervous system (CNS)
and the peripheral nervous system (PNS) and the endocrine system, which is made up of glands
that create and control hormones.
Neurons are the cells in the nervous system. Neurons are composed of a soma that contains thenucleus of the cell; a dendrite that collects information from other cells and sends theinformation to the soma; and a long-segmented fiber, known as the axon, which transmits
information away from the cell body toward other neurons and to the muscles and glands.
The nervous system operates using an electrochemical process. An electrical charge moves
through the neuron itself, and chemicals are used to transmit information between neurons.
Within the neuron, the electrical charge occurs in the form of an action potential. The action
potential operates in an all-or-nothing manner.

100

Neurons are separated by junction areas known as synapses. Neurotransmitters travel across thesynaptic space between the terminal button of one neuron and the dendrites of other neurons,
where they bind to the dendrites in the neighboring neurons. More than 100 chemical substances
produced in the body have been identified as neurotransmitters, and these substances have a wideand profound effect on emotion, cognition, and behavior.
Drugs that we may ingest can be agonists that mimic neurotramsmitters, or they may beantagonists that block the operations of neurotransmitters.
The brain stem is the oldest and innermost region of the brain. It controls the most basic
functions of life, including breathing, attention, and reflexes. The brain stem includes the
medulla, the pons, and the reticular formation.
The cerebellum, behind the brain stem, is primarily responsible for the coordination of voluntary
movement.
Above the brain stem are other older parts of the brain involved in the processing of behavior andemotions, including the thalamus and the limbic system. The limbic system includes theamygdala, the hypothalamus, and the hippocampus.
The cerebral cortex contains about 20 billion nerve cells and 300 trillion synaptic connections,and it is supported by billions more glial cells that surround and link to the neurons. The cerebral
cortex is divided into two cerebral hemispheres, and each hemisphere is divided into four lobes,
each separated by folds known as fissures.
The frontal lobe is primarily responsible for thinking, planning, memory, and judgment. The
parietal lobe is responsible for processing information about touch and locating objects in space.
The occipital lobe processes visual information, and the temporal lobe is responsible for hearing
and language.
The cerebral cortex also includes the motor cortex, the somatosensory cortex, the visual cortex,
the auditory cortex, and the association areas. Damage to Broca's area can lead to difficulty
speaking, and damage in Wernicke’s area produces difficulty with understanding speech.
The brain can develop new neurons, a process known as neurogenesis, as well as new routes forneural communications known as neuroplasticity.
Psychologists study the brain using lesion approaches, as well as through neuroimaging
techniques that include electroencephalography (EEG), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),
functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI), positron emission tomography (PET),
computerized axial tomography (CT), and transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS).
Sensory or afferent neurons carry information from the sensory receptors, whereas motor orefferent neurons transmit information to the muscles and glands. Both are locatesd in the
peripheral nervous system. Interneurons, by far the most common neurons, are locatedprimarily within the CNS and responsible for communicating among the neurons.
101

The Central Nervous System consists of the brain and spinal cord. The peripheral nervous system
is divided into two subsystems, one controlling internal responses called the autonomic nervous
system (ANS) and one controlling external responses, called the somatic nervous system. The
sympathetic division of the ANS is involved in preparing the body for behavior by activating theorgans and the glands in the endocrine system. The parasympathetic division of the ANS tends tocalm the body by slowing the heart and breathing and by allowing the body to recover from theactivities that the sympathetic system causes.
Glands in the endocrine system include the pituitary gland, the pancreas, the adrenal glands, andthe male and female sex glands. The male sex hormone testosterone and the female sex
hormones estrogen and progesterone play important roles in behavior and contribute to sex
differences. Other hormones also influence thoughts, feelings, and behaviors.
The behavior of organisms is influenced by biological rhythms, including the daily circadianrhythms that guide the waking and sleeping cycle in many animals.
Each of the sleep stages has its own distinct pattern of brain activity. Rapid eye movement(REM) accounts for about 25% of our total sleep time, during which we dream. Non-rapid eye
movement (non-REM) sleep is a deep sleep characterized by very slow brain waves, and isfurther subdivided into four stages: Stages 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Sleep has a vital restorative function, and a prolonged lack of sleep results in increased anxiety,diminished performance, and if severe and extended, even death. Sleep deprivation suppresses
immune responses that fight off infection, and can lead to obesity, hypertension, and memory
impairment.
Some people suffer from sleep disorders, including insomnia, sleep apnea, narcolepsy,
sleepwalking, and REM sleep behavior disorder.
Freud believed that the primary function of dreams was wish fulfillment, and he differentiatedbetween the manifest and latent content of dreams. Other theories of dreaming propose that we
dream primarily to help with memory consolidation or the moving of information into long-term
memory. The activation-synthesis theory of dreaming proposes that dreams are simply our brain’s
interpretation of the random firing of neurons in the brain stem.

References
Alvarenga, T. A., Patti, C. L., Andersen, M. L., Silva, R. H., Calzavara, M. B., Lopez, G.B.,…Tufik, S. (2008).
Paradoxical sleep deprivation impairs acquisition, consolidation and retrieval of a discriminative avoidance task in
rats. Neurobiology of Learning and Memory, 90, 624–632.
Banks, T., & Dabbs, J. M., Jr. (1996). Salivary testosterone and cortisol in delinquent and violent urban subculture.
Journal of Social Psychology, 136(1), 49–56.

102

Bengtsson, S. L., Nagy, Z., Skare, S., Forsman, L., Forssberg, H., & Ullén, F. (2005). Extensive piano practicing
has regionally specific effects on white matter development. Nature Neuroscience, 8(9), 1148–1150.
Best, B. (2009). The amygdala and the emotions. In Anatomy of the mind (chap. 9). Retrieved from Welcome to theWorld of Ben Best website: http://www.benbest.com/science/anatmind/anatmd9.html
Betancur, C., Vélez, A., Cabanieu, G., & le Moal, M. (1990). Association between left-handedness and allergy: A
reappraisal. Neuropsychologia, 28(2), 223–227.
Bodmer, W., & McKie, R. (1994). The book of man: The quest to discover our genetic heritage. London, England:
Little, Brown and Company.
Bower, J. M., & Parsons, J. M. (2003). Rethinking the lesser brain. Scientific American, 289, 50–57.
Cartwright, R., Agargun, M., Kirkby, J., & Friedman, J. (2006). Relation of dreams to waking concerns. Psychiatry
Research, 141(3), 261–270.
Cashdan, E. (2003). Hormones and competitive aggression in women. Aggressive Behavior, 29(2), 107–115.
Chen, Z., Williams, K. D., Fitness, J., & Newton, N. C. (2008). When hurt will not heal: Exploring the capacity torelive social and physical pain. Psychological Science, 19(8), 789–795.
Coren, S. (1992). The left-hander syndrome: The causes and consequences of left-handedness. New York, NY: Free
Press.
Dabbs, J. M., Jr., Hargrove, M. F., & Heusel, C. (1996). Testosterone differences among college fraternities:
Well-behaved vs. rambunctious. Personality and Individual Differences, 20(2), 157–161.
Damasio, H., Grabowski, T., Frank, R., Galaburda, A. M., Damasio, A. R., Cacioppo, J. T., & Berntson, G. G.
(2005). The return of Phineas Gage: Clues about the brain from the skull of a famous patient. In Social
neuroscience: Key readings (pp. 21–28). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
de Courten-Myers, G. M. (1999). The human cerebral cortex: Gender differences in structure and function. Journal of
Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology, 58, 217–226.
Dement, W. (1997) What all undergraduates should know about how their sleeping lives affect their waking lives.
Sleepless at Stanford. Retrieved from http://www.Stanford.edu/~dement/sleepless.html
Dew, M. A., Hoch, C. C., Buysse, D. J., Monk, T. H., Begley, A. E., Houck, P. R.,…Reynolds, C. F., III. (2003).
Healthy older adults’ sleep predicts all-cause mortality at 4 to 19 years of follow-up. Psychosomatic Medicine,65(1), 63–73.
Diamond, M. C. (1999). Why Einstein’s brain? New Horizons for Learning. Retrieved fromhttp://www.newhorizons.org/neuro/diamond_einstein.htm
Dijk, D.J. & Lazar, A.S. (2012). The regulation of human sleep and wakefulness: Sleep homeostasis and circadianrhythmicity. In C.M. Morin & C.A. Espie (Eds.), The Oxford Handbook of sleep and sleep disorders (pp. 38-60).
NY, NY: Oxford University Press.
Domhoff, G. W., Meyer-Gomes, K., & Schredl, M. (2005). Dreams as the expression of conceptions and concerns: A
comparison of German and American college students. Imagination, Cognition and Personality, 25(3), 269–282.
Dutta, T., & Mandal, M. K. (2006). Hand preference and accidents in India. Laterality: Asymmetries of Body, Brain,
and Cognition, 11, 368–372.

103

Eisenberger, N. I., Lieberman, M. D., & Williams, K. D. (2003). Does rejection hurt? An fMRI study of social
exclusion. Science, 302(5643), 290–292.
Farah, M. J., Rabinowitz, C., Quinn, G. E., & Liu, G. T. (2000). Early commitment of neural substrates for facerecognition. Cognitive Neuropsychology, 17(1–3), 117–123.
Ferrie, J. E., Shipley, M. J., Cappuccio, F. P., Brunner, E., Miller, M. A., Kumari, M., & Marmot, M. G. (2007). A
prospective study of change in sleep duration: Associations with mortality in the Whitehall II cohort. Sleep, 30(12),1659.
Fox, J. L. (1984). The brain’s dynamic way of keeping in touch. Science, 225(4664), 820–821.
Freud, S., & Classics of Medicine Library. (1988). The interpretation of dreams (Special ed.). Birmingham, AL:
The Classics of Medicine Library. (Original work published 1913)
Fritsch, G., & Hitzig, E. (2009). Electric excitability of the cerebrum (Über die Elektrische erregbarkeit desGrosshirns). Epilepsy & Behavior, 15(2), 123–130. (Original work published 1870).
Garrett, B. (2011). Brain & behavior (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
Gazzaniga, M. S. (2005). Forty-five years of split-brain research and still going strong. Nature Reviews
Neuroscience, 6(8), 653–659.
Gazzaniga, M. S., Bogen, J. E., & Sperry, R. W. (1965). Observations on visual perception after disconnection of thecerebral hemispheres in man. Brain, 88(2), 221–236.
Geschwind, N., & Behan, P. (2007). Left-handedness: Association with immune disease, migraine, anddevelopmental learning disorder. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Gibson, K. R. (2002). Evolution of human intelligence: The roles of brain size and mental construction. Brain
Behavior and Evolution 59, 10–20.
Gladue, B. A., Boechler, M., & McCaul, K. D. (1989). Hormonal response to competition in human males.
Aggressive Behavior, 15(6), 409–422.
Gould, E. (2007). How widespread is adult neurogenesis in mammals? Nature Reviews Neuroscience 8, 481– 488.
doi:10.1038/nrn2147
Hack, M. A., Choi, S. J., Vijayapalan, P., Davies, R. J. O., & Stradling, J. R. S. (2001). Comparison of the effects ofsleep deprivation, alcohol and obstructive sleep apnoea (OSA) on simulated steering performance. Respiratory
medicine, 95(7), 594–601.
Harris, L. J. (1990). Cultural influences on handedness: Historical and contemporary theory and evidence. In S.
Coren (Ed.), Left-handedness: Behavioral implications and anomalies. New York, NY: Elsevier.
Harrison, Y. (2012). The functions of sleep. In C.M. Morin & C.A. Espie (Eds.), The Oxford handbook of sleep andsleep disorders (pp. 61-74). NY, NY: Oxford University Press.
Hepper, P. G., Wells, D. L., & Lynch, C. (2005). Prenatal thumb sucking is related to postnatal handedness.
Neuropsychologia, 43, 313–315.
Hobson, A. (2004). A model for madness? Dream consciousness: Our understanding of the neurobiology of sleep
offers insight into abnormalities in the waking brain. Nature, 430, 69–95.
Hobson, J. A. (2004). Dreams Freud never had: A new mind science. New York, NY: Pi Press.

104

Hobson, J. A., & McCarley, R. (1977). The brain as a dream state generator: An activation-synthesis hypothesis of
the dream process. American Journal of Psychiatry, 134, 1335–1348.
Hobson, J. A., Pace-Schott, E. F., & Stickgold, R. (2000). Dreaming and the brain: Toward a cognitive neuroscienceof conscious states. Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 23(6), 793–842, 904–1018, 1083–1121.
Horne, J. (1988). Why we sleep: the functions of sleep in humans and other mammals. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press.
Ida, Y., & Mandal, M. K. (2003). Cultural differences in side bias: Evidence from Japan and India. Laterality:
Asymmetries of Body, Brain, and Cognition, 8(2), 121–133.
Jarrett, C. (2015). Great myths of the brain. West Sussex, UK: John Wiley & Sons.
Jones, G. V., & Martin, M. (2000). A note on Corballis (1997) and the genetics and evolution of handedness:
Developing a unified distributional model from the sex-chromosomes gene hypothesis. Psychological Review,107(1), 213–218.
Kalbe, E., Schlegel, M., Sack, A. T., Nowak, D. A., Dafotakis, M., Bangard,C ., Kessler, J. (2010). Dissociating
cognitive from affective theory of mind: A TMS study. Cortex: A Journal Devoted to the Study of the Nervous
System and Behavior, 46(6), 769–780.
Kanwisher, N. (2000). Domain specificity in face perception. Nature Neuroscience, 3(8), 759–763.
Klüver, H., & Bucy, P. C. (1939). Preliminary analysis of functions of the temporal lobes in monkeys. Archives of
Neurology & Psychiatry (Chicago), 42, 979–1000.
Koenigs, M., Young, L., Adolphs, R., Tranel, D., Cushman, F., Hauser, M., & Damasio, A. (2007). Damage to theprefontal cortex increases utilitarian moral judgments. Nature, 446(7138), 908–911.
Kolb, B., & Fantie, B. (1989). Development of the child’s brain and behavior. In C. R. Reynolds & E. FletcherJanzen (Eds.), Handbook of clinical child neuropsychology (pp. 17–39). New York, NY: Plenum Press.
Kotowicz, Z. (2007). The strange case of Phineas Gage. History of the Human Sciences, 20(1), 115–131.
Kushida, C. (2005). Sleep deprivation: basic science, physiology, and behavior. London, England: Informa
Healthcare.
Macmillan, M. (2000). An odd kind of fame: Stories of Phineas Gage. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Macrae, C. N., Alnwick, K. A., Milne, A. B., & Schloerscheidt, A. M. (2002). Person perception across themenstrual cycle: Hormonal influences on social-cognitive functioning. Psychological Science, 13(6), 532–536.
Mahowald, M., & Schenck, C. (2000). REM sleep parasomnias. Principles and Practice of Sleep Medicine, 724–
741.
Mahowald, M., & Schenck, C. (2005). REM sleep behavior disorder. Handbook of Clinical Neurophysiology, 6,245–253.
Martin, A. (2007). The representation of object concepts in the brain. Annual Review of Psychology, 58, 25–45.
Mazur, A., Booth, A., & Dabbs, J. M. (1992). Testosterone and chess competition. Social Psychology Quarterly, 55(1),70–77.

105

McGinniss, P. (2007). Seasonal affective disorder (SAD)—Treatment and drugs. Mayo Clinic. Retrieved fromhttp://www.mayoclinic.com/health/seasonal-affectivedisorder/DS00195/DSECTION=treatments%2Dand%2Ddrugs
McManus, I. C. (2002). Right hand, left hand: The origins of asymmetry in brains, bodies, atoms, and cultures.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Mercer, P., Merritt, S., & Cowell, J. (1998). Differences in reported sleep need among adolescents. Journal of
Adolescent Health, 23(5), 259–263.
Miller, G. (2005). Neuroscience: The dark side of glia. Science, 308(5723), 778–781.
Morgenthaler, T. I., Kagramanov, V., Hanak, V., & Decker, P. A. (2006). Complex sleep apnea syndrome: Is it aunique clinical syndrome? Sleep, 29(9), 1203–1209. Retrieved fromhttp://www.journalsleep.org/ViewAbstract.aspx?pid=26630
Münte, T. F., Altenmüller, E., & Jäncke, L. (2002). The musician’s brain as a model of neuroplasticity. Nature
Reviews Neuroscience, 3(6), 473–478.
National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. (2008). Who is at risk for narcolepsy? Retrieved fromhttp://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/dci/Diseases/nar/nar_who.html
Olds, J. (1958). Self-stimulation of the brain: Its use to study local effects of hunger, sex, and drugs. Science, 127,
315–324.
Olds, J., & Milner, P. (1954). Positive reinforcement produced by electrical stimulation of septal area and otherregions of rat brain. Journal of Comparative and Physiological Psychology, 47, 419–427.
O’Reilly, J., Beckmann, C., Tomassini,V., Ramnani, N., & Johansen-Berg, H. (2009). Distinct and Overlapping
Functional Zones in the Cerebellum Defined by Resting State Functional Connectivity. Cerebral Cortex, 21(4), 953976.
Payne, J., & Nadel, L. (2004). Sleep, dreams, and memory consolidation: The role of the stress hormone cortisol.
Learning & Memory, 11(6), 671.
Peters, M., Reimers, S., & Manning, J. T. (2006). Hand preference for writing and associations with selected
demographic and behavioral variables in 255,100 subjects: The BBC Internet study. Brain and Cognition, 62(2),177–189.
Rauchs, G., Desgranges, B., Foret, J., & Eustache, F. (2005). The relationships between memory systems and sleep
stages. Journal of Sleep Research, 14, 123–140.
Sherman, S. M., & Guillery, R. W. (2006). Exploring the thalamus and its role in cortical function (2nd ed.).
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Sigurdsson, T., Doyère, V., Cain, C. K., & LeDoux, J. E. (2007). Long-term potentiation in the amygdala: A cellularmechanism of fear learning and memory. Neuropharmacology, 52(1), 215–227.
Silber, M.H., Ancoli-Israelis, S., Bonnet, M.H.; Chokroverty, S., Grigg-Damberger, M., Hirshkowitz, M.,…Ibec, C.
(2007). The visual scoring of sleep in adults. Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 3(2), 121-131.
Smith-Coggins, R., Rosekind, M. R., Hurd, S., & Buccino, K. R. (1994). Relationship of day versus night sleep tophysician performance and mood. Annals of Emergency Medicine, 24(5), 928–934.

106Soroker, N., Kasher, A., Giora, R., Batori, G., Corn, C., Gil, M., & Zaidel, E. (2005). Processing of basic speech acts
following localized brain damage: A new light on the neuroanatomy of language. Brain and Cognition, 57(2), 214–
217.
Springer, S. P., & Deutsch, G. (1998). Left brain, right brain: Perspectives from cognitive neuroscience (5th ed.).
A series of books in psychology. New York, NY: W. H. Freeman/Times Books/Henry Holt & Co.
Taheri, S., Zeitzer, J. M., & Mignot, E. (2002). The role of hypocretins (Orexins) in sleep regulation andnarcolepsy. Annual Review of Neuroscience, 25, 283–313.
Thiel, A., Habedank, B., Herholz, K., Kessler, J., Winhuisen, L., Haupt, W. F., & Heiss, W. D. (2006). From the left
to the right: How the brain compensates progressive loss of language function. Brain and Language, 98(1), 57–65.
Tremblay, R. E., Schaal, B., Boulerice, B., Arseneault, L., Soussignan, R. G., Paquette, D., & Laurent, D. (1998).
Testosterone, physical aggression, dominance, and physical development in early adolescence. International Journalof Behavioral Development, 22(4), 753–777.
Ullian,E., Sapperstein, S., Christopherson, K., & Barres, B. (2001). Control of synapse number by glia. Science,
291(5504), 657-661.
Van den Eynde, F., Claudino, A. M., Mogg, A., Horrell, L., Stahl, D.,…Schmidt, U. (2010). Repetitive transcranial
magnetic stimulation reduces cue-induced food craving in bulimic disorders. Biological Psychiatry, 67(8), 793–795;
Van Praag, H., Zhao, X., Gage, F. H., & Gazzaniga, M. S. (2004). Neurogenesis in the adult mammalian brain. In
The cognitive neurosciences (3rd ed., pp. 127–137). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Walker, M.P. (2012). The role of sleep in neurocognitive functioning. In C.M. Morin & C.A. Espie (Eds.), The
Oxford handbook of sleep and sleep disorders (pp. 110-130). NY, NY: Oxford University Press.
Wesselmann, E. D., Bagg, D., & Williams, K. D. (2009). “I feel your pain”: The effects of observing ostracism on
the ostracism detection system. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 45(6), 1308–1311.
Williamson, A., & Feyer, A. (2000). Moderate sleep deprivation produces impairments in cognitive and motor
performance equivalent to legally prescribed levels of alcohol intoxication. Occupational and Environmental
Medicine, 57(10), 649.
Yaggi, H. K., Concato, J., Kernan, W. N., Lichtman, J. H., Brass, L. M., & Mohsenin, V. (2005). Obstructive sleep
apnea as a risk factor for stroke and death. The New England Journal of Medicine, 353(19), 2034–2041.
doi:10.1056/NEJMoa043104
Young, L., Camprodon, J. A., Hauser, M., Pascual-Leone, A., & Saxe, R. (2010). Disruption of the righttemporoparietal junction with transcranial magnetic stimulation reduces the role of beliefs in moral judgments. PNAS
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 107(15), 6753–6758.
Zhang, J. (2004). Memory process and the function of sleep. Journal of Theoretics, 6(6), 1–7.

107

Chapter 4 Learning
Learning Objective
1. Define learning and conditioning.
The topic of this chapter is learning defined as the relatively permanent change in knowledge or
behavior that is the result of experience. You might think of learning in terms of what you need to
do before an upcoming exam or new skills that you acquire through practice, but these changes
represent only one component of learning. In fact, learning is a broad topic that is also used to
explain a wide variety of other psychological changes. Learning even describes how a person
acquires a psychological disorder such as Post Traumatic Stress Disorder.
Learning is perhaps the most important
human capacity. Learning allows us to create
effective lives by being able to respond tochanges. We learn to avoid touching hot
stoves, to find our way home from school,
and to remember which people have helped
us in the past. Without the ability to learn
from our experiences, our lives would beremarkably dangerous and inefficient. The
principles of learning can also be used to
explain a wide variety of social interactions,
including social dilemmas in which people
make important decisions about how tobehave.

Figure 4.1 Watson and SkinnerJohn B. Watson (right) and B. F. Skinner (left) werechampions of the behaviorist school of learning.

The study of learning is closely associatedwith the behavioral perspective of
psychology. Two early leaders in the
behaviorist school are John B. Watson and B. F. Skinner. These psychologists focused theirresearch entirely on behavior, excluding mental processes. For behaviorists, learning is a processof conditioning which means that the response to a specific stimulus can be learned.
Source: Watson photo
Source: Skinner photo

Conditioning is just one type of learning. In this chapter, we will also consider learning throughinsight, cognition, and observation. In each case, we will see not only what psychologists havelearned about the topics, but also the important influence that learning has on many aspects of oureveryday lives. Additionally, we will see that in some cases learning can be maladaptive.

108Classical Conditioning
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the process of classical conditioning as described by Pavlov.
2. Differentiate among the concepts of classical conditioning, including neutral stimulus(NS), unconditioned stimulus (US), conditioned stimulus (CS), unconditioned
response (UR), and conditioned response (CR).
3. Explain the processes of extinction, spontaneous recovery, stimulus generalization, stimulus
discrimination, and second-order conditioning, in learning.
4. Explain how classical conditioning occurs in everyday life through both nature and nurture
factors.

Pavlov Demonstrates Conditioning in Dogs
In the early part of the 20th century, Russian physiologist Ivan
Pavlov (1849–1936) was studying the digestive system of dogs
when he noticed an interesting behavioral phenomenon: The dogs
began to salivate as soon as the lab technicians who normally fed
them entered the room. Pavlov realized that the dogs weresalivating because they knew that they were about to be fed; thedogs had begun to associate the arrival of the technicians with thefood that soon followed their appearance in the room.
With his team of researchers, Pavlov began studying this process inmore detail. He conducted a series of experiments in which, over anumber of trials, dogs were exposed to a sound immediately before
receiving food. He systematically controlled the onset of the soundand the timing of the delivery of the food, and recorded the amountof the dogs’ salivation. Initially the dogs salivated only when theysaw or smelled the food, but after several pairings of the sound andthe food, the dogs began to salivate as soon as they heard the sound.
The animals had learned to associate the sound with the food that
followed.

Figure 4.2 Ivan Pavlov

Ivan Pavlov’s research madesubstantial contributions to
our understanding of learning.
SourcePavlov had identified a fundamental associative learning process called classical conditioning.
Classical conditioning refers to learning that occurs when a neutral stimulus becomes associatedwith a stimulus that naturally produces a behavior. After the association is learned, the previously
neutral stimulus is sufficient to produce the behavior.

109

Psychologists use specific terms to identify the stimuli and the responses in classical conditioning.
•

Unconditioned stimulus (US) is something that triggers a naturally occurring response.

•

Unconditioned response (UR) is the naturally occurring response that follows theunconditioned stimulus. Some examples of the US-UR pairs include:o Sneezing (UR) to pepper (US)o Shivering (UR) to cold (US)o Blinking (UR) to a bright light (US)*Notice how all of these responses are reflexive and unlearned, which is why we refer to them as
being unconditioned.
•

Neutral stimulus (NS) is something that does not naturally produce a response.

•

Conditioned stimulus (CS) is a once neutral stimulus that has been repeatedly presented
prior to the unconditioned stimulus and evokes a similar response as the unconditioned
stimulus.
Conditioned Response (CR) is the acquired response to the conditioned stimulus, which
was the formerly neutral stimulus.

•

In Pavlov’s experiment, the sound of the tone served as the initial neutral stimulus. It became aconditioned stimulus after learning because it produced a conditioned response. Note that theunconditioned response and the conditioned response are the same behavior. In Pavlov’s
experiment, it was salivation. The unconditioned and conditioned responses are given different
names because they are produced by different stimuli. The unconditioned stimulus produces theunconditioned response and the conditioned stimulus produces the conditioned response (seeFigure 4.3).
Figure 4.3 Four-Panel Illustration of Classical Conditioning

110The Persistence and Extinction of Conditioning
After he had demonstrated that learning could occur through association, Pavlov moved on to
study the variables that influenced the strength and the persistence of conditioning. In somestudies, after the conditioning had taken place, Pavlov presented the sound repeatedly but without
presenting the food afterward. Figure 4.4 shows what happened. As you can see, after the initialacquisition or learning phase in which the conditioning occurred, when the CS was then presented
alone, the behavior rapidly decreased. The dogs salivated less and less to the sound, and eventually
the sound did not elicit salivation at all. Extinction refers to the reduction in responding that
occurs when the conditioned stimulus is presented repeatedly without the unconditioned stimulus.

Figure 4.4 Acquisition, Extinction, and Spontaneous Recovery

Acquisition: The CS and the US are repeatedly paired together and behavior increases.
Extinction: The CS is repeatedly presented alone, and the behavior slowly decreases.
Spontaneous Recovery: After a pause, when the CS is again presented alone, the behavior may again occur
and then again show extinction.
SourceAlthough at the end of the first extinction period the CS was no longer producing salivation, theeffects of conditioning had not entirely disappeared. Pavlov found that, after a pause, sounding thetone again elicited salivation, although to a lesser extent than before extinction took place. The
increase in responding to the CS following a pause after extinction is known as spontaneousrecovery. When Pavlov again presented the CS alone, the behavior again showed extinction.
111

Although the behavior has disappeared, extinction is never complete. If conditioning is again
attempted, the animal will learn the new associations much faster than it did the first time.

Stimulus Generalization vs. Stimulus Discrimination
Pavlov also experimented with presenting new stimuli that were similar, but not identical to, theoriginal conditioned stimulus. For instance, if the dog had been conditioned to being scratched
before the food arrived, the stimulus would be changed to being rubbed rather than scratched. He
found that the dogs also salivated upon experiencing the similar stimulus.
This process is known as stimulus generalization, which refers to the tendency to respond to
stimuli that resemble the original conditioned stimulus. The ability to generalize has important
evolutionary significance. If we eat some red berries and they make us sick, it would be a goodidea to think twice before we eat some purple berries. Although the berries are not exactly thesame, they nevertheless are similar and may have the same negative properties.
Lewicki (1985) conducted research that demonstrated the influence of stimulus generalization andhow quickly and easily it occurs. In his experiment, high school students first had a brief interaction
with a female experimenter who had short hair and glasses. The study was set up so that thestudents had to ask the experimenter a question, and according to random assignment, theexperimenter responded either in a way that made students feel bad or in a neutral way. Then thestudents were told to go into a second room in which two experimenters were present, and to
approach either one of them. However, the researchers arranged it so that one of the two
experimenters looked a lot like the original experimenter, while the other one did not as she had
longer hair and no glasses. The students were significantly more likely to avoid the experimenter
who looked like the earlier experimenter when that experimenter had been negative to them thanwhen she had treated them more neutrally. The participants showed stimulus generalization, suchthat the new, similar-looking experimenter created the same negative response in the participants
as had the experimenter in the prior session.
The flip side of generalization is stimulus discrimination or the tendency to respond differently tostimuli that are similar but not identical. Pavlov’s dogs quickly learned, for example, to salivate
when they heard the specific tone that had preceded food, but not upon hearing similar tones that
had never been associated with food. Discrimination is also useful; if we do try the purple berries,
and if they do not make us sick, we will be able to make the distinction in the future.
Second-order Conditioning: In some cases, an existing conditioned stimulus can serve as an
unconditioned stimulus for a pairing with a new conditioned stimulus, and this process is known assecond-order conditioning. In one of Pavlov’s studies, for instance, he first conditioned the dogs
to salivate to a sound, and then repeatedly paired a new CS, a black square, with the sound.
Eventually he found that the dogs would salivate at the sight of the black square alone, eventhough it had never been directly associated with the food.
Secondary conditioners in everyday life include our attractions to or fears of things that stand foror remind us of something else. For example, we might feel good (CR) when hearing a particularsong (CS) that is associated with a romantic moment (US). If we associate that song with aparticular artist, then we may have those same good feelings whenever we hear another song by112

that same artist. We now have a favorite performing artist, thanks to second order conditioning,
and according to the early behaviorists, we acquired this preference without consciously making
the decision.

Classical Conditioning and the Role of Nature
In the beginning, behaviorists argued that all learning is driven by experience, and that nature plays
no role. Classical conditioning, which is based on learning through experience, represents an
example of the importance of the environment, but classical conditioning cannot be understood
entirely in terms of experience. Natural instinct also plays a part. Unconditioned stimulusresponse patterns generally represent reflexes that are species-specific. In addition, ourevolutionary history has made us more prepared to learn some associations than others. We are
more likely to learn a fear of dogs, for example, than a fear of small children, even though both
may bite, move suddenly, and make loud noises.
Conditioning is evolutionarily beneficial because it allows organisms to develop expectations that
help them prepare for both good and bad events. Imagine, for instance, that an animal first smells a
new food, eats it, and then gets sick. If the animal can learn to associate the smell (CS) with thefood (US), then it will quickly learn that the food creates the negative outcome, and not eat it thenext time. This is referred to as taste aversion, one time learning to avoid a food that made anorganism sick. Generally, the US-UR pairs are reflexive and unlearned. The fact that these pairs
are present in all members of a species adds to the evidence that these are the result of evolution.
Even more significant, nature based conditioning is superior to other environmental stimuli present
during the conditioning. In his important research on food conditioning, John Garcia and hiscolleagues (Garcia, Kimeldorf, & Koelling, 1955; Garcia, Ervin, & Koelling, 1966) attempted tocondition rats by presenting either a taste, a sight, or a sound as a neutral stimulus before the rats
were given drugs (the US) that made them nauseous. Garcia discovered that taste conditioning wasextremely powerful and that the rat learned to avoid the taste associated with illness, even if theillness occurred several hours later. Conditioning the behavioral response of nausea to a sight or asound was much more difficult. These results contradicted the idea that conditioning occurs
entirely as a result of environmental events, such that it would occur equally for any kind of
unconditioned stimulus that followed any kind of conditioned stimulus. Rather, Garcia’s researchshowed that genetics matters. Organisms are evolutionarily prepared to learn some associations
more easily than others, which is referred to as biological preparedness. You can see that theability to associate smells with illness is an important survival mechanism, allowing the organism
to quickly learn to avoid foods that are poisonous.
Clinical psychologists make use of classical conditioning to explain the learning of a phobia, astrong and irrational fear of a specific object, activity, or situation. People are more likely todevelop phobias toward objects such as snakes, spiders, heights, and open spaces. In modern
society, it is rare for humans to be bitten by spiders or snakes, to fall from trees, or to be attacked
by a predator in an open area. Being injured while riding in a car or being cut by a knife are much
more likely, but in our evolutionary past, being bitten by snakes or spiders, falling out of a tree, or
being trapped in an open space represented survival issues. Therefore, humans are still biologicallymore prepared to learn associations with these objects or situations (Öhman & Mineka, 2001;
LoBue & DeLoache, 2010).
113

John Watson, described in chapter 1 as the first behaviorist, may have benefitted from thisbiological preparedness in his work with Little Albert (Seligman, 1970). As you recall from thatchapter, Little Albert was the baby who learned to be afraid of a rat. The rat (a neutral stimulus)
was paired with a loud noise (the unconditioned stimulus). Little Albert's response to the loudnoise was fear (unconditioned response). After conditioning, the rat became a conditioned stimulus
which produced a conditioned response of fear. From an evolutionary perspective, people are
more prepared to develop a fear of creatures that may spread disease or, especially in the case ofbabies, harm them.
Classical conditioning has also been used to help explain the experience of posttraumatic stressdisorder (PTSD). PTSD is a severe anxiety disorder that can develop after exposure to a fearful
event, such as the threat of death (American Psychiatric Association, 2013). PTSD occurs when
the individual develops a strong association between the situational factors that surrounded thetraumatic event. For example in war, military uniforms or the sounds and smells (neutral stimuli)
become associated with the fearful trauma of war (unconditioned stimulus). As a result of theconditioning, being exposed to similar stimuli, or even thinking about the situation in which thetrauma occurred (conditioned stimulus) becomes sufficient to produce the conditioned response of
severe anxiety (Keane, Zimering, & Caddell, 1985).
Figure 4.5 The Role of Classical Conditioning and PTSD

Photo © Thinkstock

PTSD develops because the emotions experienced during the event have produced neural activity
in the amygdala and created strong conditioned learning. In addition to the strong conditioning thatpeople with PTSD experience, they also show slower extinction to classical conditioning (Milad etal., 2009). In short, people with PTSD have developed very strong association with the events
surrounding the trauma and are also slow to show extinction to the conditioned stimulus.

114

Key Takeaways
•

•

•
•
•
•

In classical conditioning, a neutral stimulus is paired with an unconditioned stimulus.
The result of the pairing is that the neutral stimulus becomes conditioned or learned
and elicits the same response as the unconditioned stimulus
Extinction occurs when the CS is repeatedly presented without the US, and the CR
eventually disappears, although it may reappear later in a process known as
spontaneous recovery.
Stimulus generalization occurs when a stimulus that is similar to an already-conditioned
stimulus begins to produce the same response as the original stimulus does.
Stimulus discrimination occurs when the organism learns to differentiate between
the CS and other similar stimuli.
In second-order conditioning, a neutral stimulus becomes a CS after being
paired with a previously established CS.
Some stimuli, such as response pairs, such as those between smell and food, aremore easily conditioned than others because they have been particularly importantin our evolutionary past.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. A particular song is playing when you first fell in love with a special person. Now,

every time you hear the song, you get a warm feeling. Can you explain this response
in terms of classical conditioning? Can you label the NS, US, UR, CS, and CR?
2. Recall a time in your life, perhaps when you were a child, when your behaviors were
influenced by classical conditioning. Describe in detail the nature of theunconditioned and conditioned stimuli and the response, using the appropriate
psychological terms.
3. If posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is a type of classical conditioning,
how might psychologists use the principles of classical conditioning totreat the disorder?

115

Operant Conditioning
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the work of Edward Thorndike and B.F. Skinner.
2. Explain the process of operant conditioning.
3. Define reinforcement, reinforcer, punishment, punisher, shaping, successive
approximations, extinction, generalization, discriminative stimulus, primary reinforcer,
secondary reinforcer.
4. Explain the difference between positive and negative reinforcement.
5. Explain the difference between positive and negative punishment.
6. Describe the effective use of punishment.
7. Describe the use of behavior modification and a token economy.
8. Differentiate amongh the four partial reinforcement schedules.
In classical conditioning the organism learns to associate new stimuli with natural, biologicalresponses such as salivation or fear. The organism does not learn something new, but rather begins
to perform in an existing behavior in the presence of a new signal. Operant conditioning, on theother hand, is learning that occurs based on the consequences of behavior and can involve thelearning of new actions. Operant conditioning occurs when a dog rolls over on command because
it has been praised for doing so in the past, when a schoolroom bully threatens his classmates
because doing so allows him to get his way, and when a child gets good grades because herparents threaten to punish her if she does not. In operant conditioning, the organism learns from theconsequences of its own actions.

The Research of Thorndike and Skinner
Psychologist Edward L. Thorndike (1874–1949) was the first scientist to systematically study
operant conditioning. In his research, Thorndike (1898) observed cats who had been placed in a
puzzle box from which they tried to escape. At first the cats scratched, bit, and swatted
haphazardly, without any idea of how to get out, but eventually, and accidentally, they pressed thelever that opened the door and exited to their prize, a scrap of fish. The next time the cat wasconstrained within the box it attempted fewer of the ineffective responses before carrying out thesuccessful escape, and after several trials the cat learned to almost immediately make the correct
response.
Observing these changes in the cats’ behavior led Thorndike to develop his law of effect, theprinciple that responses that create a typically pleasant outcome in a particular situation are more
likely to occur again in a similar situation, whereas responses that produce a typically unpleasantoutcome are less likely to occur again in the same situation (Thorndike, 1911). The essence of thelaw of effect is that successful responses are pleasurable. These responses are strengthened orenriched by experience, and thus occur more frequently. Unsuccessful responses, which produce
unpleasant experiences, are weakened and subsequently occur less frequently. When Thorndike
placed his cats in a puzzle box, he found that they learned to engage in the important escapebehavior faster after each trial.
116

Figure 4.6 Rat in a Skinner Box

The influential behavioral psychologist B. F.
Skinner (1904–1990) expanded on Thorndike’s
ideas to develop a more complete set ofprinciples to explain operant conditioning.
Skinner created a specially designed
environment known as a Skinner box, which isa structure that is big enough to fit a rodent or
bird and that contains a bar or key that theorganism can press or peck to release food orwater. It also contains a device to record theanimal’s responses (see Figure 4.6).

The most basic of Skinner’s experiments wasquite similar to Thorndike’s research with cats.
A hungry rat placed in the chamber reacted as
B. F. Skinner used a Skinner box to study operant
learning. The box contains a bar or key that theone might expect, scurrying about the box andorganism can press to receive food and water, and asniffing and clawing at the floor and walls.
device that records the organism’s responses.
Eventually the rat chanced upon a lever, which
Sourceit pressed to release pellets of food. The nexttime around, the rat took a little less time to press the lever, and on successive trials, the time it
took to press the lever became shorter and shorter. Soon the rat was pressing the lever as fast as it
could eat the food that appeared. As predicted by the law of effect, the rat had learned to repeat theaction that brought about the food and cease the actions that did not.

Reinforcement and Punishment
Skinner studied in detail how animals changed their behavior through reinforcement, which
increases the likelihood of a behavior reoccurring, and punishment, which decreases the likelihoodof a behavior reoccurring. Skinner used the term reinforcer to refer to any event that strengthens
or increases the likelihood of a behavior and the term punisher to refer to any event that weakens
or decreases the likelihood of a behavior. He used the terms positive and negative to refer towhether a reinforcement was presented or removed, respectively.
Reinforcement: There are two ways of reinforcing a behavior: Positive reinforcement
strengthens a response by presenting something pleasant after the response and negative
reinforcement strengthens a response by reducing or removing something unpleasant. For
example, giving a child praise for completing his homework is positive reinforcement. Taking
aspirin to reduce the pain of a headache is negative reinforcement. In both cases, thereinforcement makes it more likely that behavior will occur again in the future.
Unfortunately, getting a child to do homework is not as simple as giving praise. The rats in
Skinner's box were always hungry, so food was always reinforcing. A child is not always inneed of praise, especially if some alternate activity (e.g. TV) is providing superior reinforcement.
Reinforcement is not a specific item or event. Reinforcement is what increases behavior.
People differ in what makes them feel good, and what makes a hungry person feel good is not
the same as what will reinforce a full person. Something does not count as reinforcement unless
it increases the targeted behavior.
117

Because people differ in what please them, using reinforcement to control behavior in a groupsetting is not easy. Sometimes tokens, such as coins or points, are used as reinforcers in settings
such as schools, homes, or prison, and this is called a token economy. These tokens can beexchanged for what the individual finds reinforcing at that time. A child, for example, might beable to use his points for a desired snack or time on the computer. Reinforcement size must still,
however, be greater than the reinforcement value of any alternate behavior. A tired teenager, forexample, might obtain more reinforcement from sleeping, even if they are offered a lot of money
to take a job that starts at 5 a.m.
Punishment: There are two ways to punish a behavior: Positive punishment weakens a responseby presenting something unpleasant after the response, whereas negative punishment weakens a
response by reducing or removing something pleasant. A child who is given chores after fightingwith a sibling, a type of positive punishment, or who loses out on the opportunity to go to recess
after getting a poor grade, a type of negative punishment, is less likely to repeat these behaviors.
Consistent use of punishment for a behavior is more effective than occasional punishment. A
child who is only occasionally reprimanded for sneaking candy into his room will be more likely
to continue. Also, if the punishment is strong, it will be more effective. For example, a $1000 finefor a first-time jaywalking offense will be more likely to deter the behavior in the future than a $10
fine. These terms are summarized in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 How Positive and Negative Reinforcement and Punishment Influence Behavior
Operant
conditioning term

ExampleDescription

Outcome

Positive
reinforcement

Add or increase apleasant stimulus

Behavior isstrengthened

Giving a student a prize after he gets an A on
a testNegative
reinforcement

Reduce or remove an
unpleasant stimulus

Behavior isstrengthened

Taking painkillers that eliminate painincreases the likelihood that you will takepainkillers again

Positivepunishment

Present or add an
unpleasant stimulus

Behavior isweakened

Giving a student extra homework after she
misbehaves in class

Negativepunishment

Reduce or remove apleasant stimulus

Behavior isweakened

Taking away a teen’s computer after hemisses curfew

Discriminative stimuli can provide clues to let the organism know when reinforcement, or
punishment, will occur in response to a behavior. For example, the presence of other speeding
vehicles might let the hurried motorist know that he will be reinforced by arriving sooner at his
destination without a ticket. The presence of a police car might alert a driver that punishment will
likely occur if they speed. Some motorists slow down when they see a car in their rear-view mirrorthat resembles a police car. Similar to classical conditioning, this is referred to as stimulus
generalization. Drivers are treating the similar stimulus in the same way as they treated thediscriminative stimulus.

118

Reinforcement Schedules
One way to expand the use of operant learning is to modify the schedule on which thereinforcement is applied. To this point we have only discussed a continuous reinforcement
schedule, in which the desired response is reinforced every time it occurs; whenever the dog
rolls over, for instance, it gets a biscuit. Continuous reinforcement results in relatively fastlearning, but also rapid extinction of the desired behavior once the reinforcer disappears. The
problem is that because the organism is used to receiving the reinforcement after every
behavior, the responder may give up quickly when it does not appear.
Most real-world reinforcers are not continuous; they occur on a partial (or intermittent)
reinforcement schedule, which is a schedule in which the responses are sometimes reinforced,
and sometimes not. In comparison to continuous reinforcement, partial reinforcement schedules
lead to slower initial learning, but they also lead to greater resistance to extinction. Because thereinforcement does not appear after every behavior, it takes longer for the learner to determine thatthe reward is no longer coming, and thus extinction is slower.
Partial reinforcement schedules are determined by whether the reinforcement is:• Ratio: Based on the number of responses that the organism engages in• Interval: Based on the time that elapses between reinforcement• Fixed: Based on a regular schedule• Variable: Based on an unpredictable schedule
In a fixed-ratio schedule, a behavior is reinforced
after a specific number of responses. For instance,
a rat’s behavior may be reinforced after it haspressed a key 20 times, or a salesperson may
receive a bonus after she has sold 10 products. As
you can see in Figure 4.8, once the organism haslearned to act in accordance with the fixedreinforcement schedule, it will pause only briefly
when reinforcement occurs before returning to ahigh level of responsiveness.

Figure 4.7 Slot Machine

Slot machines are examples of a variable-ratio
A variable-ratio schedule provides reinforcers
reinforcement schedule. © Thinkstock
after a specific but average number of responses.
Winning money from slot machines or on a lottery
ticket are examples of reinforcement that occur on a variable-ratio schedule. For instance, a slot
machine may be programmed to provide a win every 20 times the user pulls the handle, on
average. As you can see in Figure 4.7 involving slot machines, a variable ratio schedule tends to
produce high rates of responding because reinforcement increases as the number of responses
increase.

In a fixed-interval schedule, reinforcement occurs for the first response made after a specificamount of time has passed. For instance, on a one-minute fixed-interval schedule the animal
receives a reinforcer every minute, assuming it engages in the behavior at least once during theminute. As you can see in Figure 4.8, animals under fixed-interval schedules tend to slow down
119their responding immediately after the reinforcement, but then increase the behavior again as thetime of the next reinforcement gets closer. Most students study for exams the same way.
In a variable-interval schedule, the reinforcers appear on an interval schedule, but the timing isvaried around the average interval, making the appearance of the reinforcer unpredictable. An
example might be checking your e-mail: You are reinforced by receiving messages that come, on
average, say every 30 minutes, but the reinforcement occurs only at random times. Interval
reinforcement schedules tend to produce slow and steady rates of responding. The four types ofpartial reinforcement schedules are summarized in Table 4.2.
Figure 4.8 Examples of Response Patterns by Animals Trained Under Different Partial
Reinforcement Schedules

Schedules based on the number of responses (ratio types) induce greater response rate than do schedules based onelapsed time (interval types). Also, unpredictable schedules (variable types) produce stronger responses than do
predictable schedules (fixed types).
Source: Adapted from Kassin, S. (2003). Essentials of psychology. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. Retrieved from Essentials of Psychology Prentice Hall Companion Website:

Table 4.2 Reinforcement Schedules
Reinforcement
schedule

Explanation

Real-world example

Fixed-ratio

Behavior is reinforced after a specific number of Factory workers who are paid
responses
according to the number of
products they produce

Variable-ratio

Behavior is reinforced after an average, but
unpredictable, number of responses

Fixed-interval

Behavior is reinforced for the first response after People who earn a monthly salarya specific amount of time has passed

Variableinterval

Behavior is reinforced for the first response after Person who checks voice mail foran average, but unpredictable, amount of timemessageshas passed

120

Payoffs from slot machines andother games of chanceCreating Complex Behaviors through Operant Conditioning
Perhaps you remember watching a movie or going to an aquarium in which an animal, maybe adolphin, did some pretty amazing things. The trainer gave a command and the dolphin swam tothe bottom of the pool, picked up a ring on its nose, jumped out of the water through a hoop in
the air, dived again to the bottom of the pool, picked up another ring, and then took both of therings to the trainer at the edge of the pool. The animal was trained to do the trick, and theprinciples of operant conditioning were used to train it. How can reinforcement be used to create
complex behaviors such as these?
Complex behaviors are also created through shaping. Shaping is the process of guiding anorganism’s behavior to the desired outcome through the reinforcement of successive
approximations to a final desired behavior. Successive approximations are small changes inbehavior which move the organism in the right direction. In other words, successive
approximations are improvements. Skinner made extensive use of this procedure in his boxes. For
instance, he could train a rat to press a bar two times to receive food, by first providing food when
the animal moved near the bar. Then when that behavior had been learned he would begin toprovide food only when the rat touched the bar. Further shaping limited the reinforcement to only
when the rat pressed the bar, to when it pressed the bar and touched it a second time, and finally, toonly when it pressed the bar twice. Although it can take a long time, in this way operant
conditioning can create chains of behaviors that are reinforced only when they are completed.
Reinforcing animals if they correctly discriminate between similar stimuli allows scientists to test
the animals’ ability to learn, and the discriminations that they can make are sometimes quite
remarkable. Pigeons have been trained to distinguish between images of Charlie Brown and theother Peanuts characters (Cerella, 1980), and between different styles of music and art (Porter& Neuringer, 1984; Watanabe, Sakamoto & Wakita, 1995).

Primary and Secondary Reinforcers
Behaviors can also be trained through the use of secondary reinforcers. Whereas a
primary reinforcer includes stimuli that are naturally preferred or enjoyed by the organism, suchas food, water, and relief from pain, a secondary reinforcer, also called a conditioned reinforce,is a neutral event that has become associated with a natural primary reinforcer through classicalconditioning. An example of a learned secondary reinforcer would be the whistle given by ananimal trainer, which has been associated over time with the primary reinforcer, food. An example
of an everyday secondary reinforcer is money. We enjoy having money for the primary reinforcers
with which it is associated. For example, money can be used to buy food.

Changing Behavior with Reinforcement and Punishment
It is also important to note that reinforcement and punishment are not simply opposites. The useof positive reinforcement in changing behavior is almost always more effective than using
punishment. This is because positive reinforcement makes the person or animal feel better,
helping create a positive relationship with the person providing the reinforcement.

121

Types of positive reinforcement that are effective in everyday life include verbal praise orapproval, the awarding of status or prestige, and direct financial payment. Punishment combinedwith reinforcement for an alternative behavior is more effective than punishment alone.
Punishment is more likely to create only temporary changes in behavior because it is based on
coercion and typically creates a negative and adversarial relationship with the person providing
the punishment. When the person, who provides the punishment, leaves the situation, theunwanted behavior is likely to return. Additionally, those punished for bad behavior typicallychange their behavior only to avoid the punishment rather than internalizing the norms of being
good for its own sake.
Punishment may also have unintended consequences. Punishment models aggression as amethod to control other people (Kohn, 1993). Punishment can cause anxiety which interfereswith learning. Emotional punishment, such as criticism or withdrawal of affection, can lead todepression. If punishment is used, it is important to combine the punishment with reinforcement
for an alternative behavior. Then the person can leave the situation having learned how to earn
positive consequences.
There are alternatives to using punishment in operant conditioning. Extinction, for example,
will occur if you remove reinforcement from a previously occurring behavior. For example, if achild is getting attention for throwing a tantrum, some psychologists recommend that you ignore
him. If attention has been the reward for this behavior in the past, removing the attention willcause extinction of the tantrum. In some cases, "time-outs" are a form of extinction for amisbehaving child. The parent takes away the reinforcing situation to eliminate a behavior.
Behavior modification refers to the deliberate and systematic use of conditioning to modify
behavior. Parents, for example, might want to use behavior modification with their children. A
system of rewards and punishments could be used to train children to do chores. Psychologists
might design programs using behavior modification for a variety of group settings. Prisons,schools, and mental institutions are examples of places where administrators need to control
behavior. Token economies might be established so that individuals received tokens for good
behaviors. Tokens could then be exchanged for a variety of rewards. Penalties would be used forless desirable acts, and these penalties could include fines that are paid with tokens.
Although the distinction between reinforcement and punishment is usually clear, in some cases
it is difficult to determine whether a reinforcer is positive or negative. On a hot day, a coolbreeze could be seen as a positive reinforcer (because it brings in cool air) or a negative
reinforcer (because it removes hot air). In other cases, reinforcement can be both positive andnegative. One may smoke a cigarette both because it brings pleasure, positive reinforcement,
and because it eliminates the craving for nicotine, negative reinforcement. Remember thatreinforcement always increases behavior, regardless of whether it is negative or positive.
Punishment is the correct term used for a consequence that suppresses behavior.

122

Key Takeaways
•

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•

Edward Thorndike developed the law of effect: The principle that responses thatcreate a typically pleasant outcome in a particular situation are more likely tooccur again in a similar situation, whereas responses that produce a typicallyunpleasant outcome are less likely to occur again in the same situation.
B. F. Skinner expanded on Thorndike’s ideas to develop a set of principles to
explain operant conditioning.
Positive reinforcement strengthens a response by presenting something that is
typically pleasant after the response, whereas negative reinforcement
strengthens a response by reducing or removing something that is typicallyunpleasant.
Positive punishment weakens a response by presenting something typically unpleasant
after the response, whereas negative punishment weakens a response by reducing or
removing something that is typically pleasant.
Discriminative stimuli helps us to predict the consequence of a behavior before we doit.
Reinforcement may be either partial or continuous. Partial reinforcement schedules are
determined by whether the reinforcement is presented on the basis of the time thatelapses between reinforcements (interval) or on the basis of the number of responses
that the organism engages in (ratio), and by whether the reinforcement occurs on aregular (fixed) or unpredictable (variable) schedule.
Complex behaviors may be created through shaping, the process of guiding anorganism’s behavior to the desired outcome through the reinforcement of successive
approximations to a final desired behavior.
Primary and secondary reinforcers can also train behaviors.
Behavior modification is the deliberate and systematic use of conditioning to modify
behavior.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Give an example from daily life of each of the following: Positive

reinforcement, negative reinforcement, positive punishment, and negative
punishment.
2. Consider the reinforcement techniques that you might use to train a dog to catch andreturn a Frisbee that you throw.
3. Watch the following two videos from current television shows. Can you determine
which learning procedures are being demonstrated? How is the concept of negative
reinforcement used incorrectly in the second clip? How can you remember thedifference between punishment and negative reinforcement?
a. The Office: http://www.break.com/video/ugc/the-office-altoid-experiment-1499823
b. The Big Bang Theory: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JA96Fba-WHk

123

Cognition and Conditioning
Learning Objective
1. Understand the role of cognition in conditioning and learning.
Contemporary learning theorists recognize that internal mental processes, referred to as cognition,
also play a role in most instances of classical and operant conditioning (Kirsch & Lynn, 2004).
The level of cognition varies according to the situation and according to the individual. At aminimum, almost all agree that for adult humans, expectations are involved in the learning process.
For classical conditioning, this means that specific unconditioned and even conditioned stimuli are
anticipated. Like Pavlov’s dogs, people salivate when they eat. Food is an unconditioned
stimulus, and salivation is the unconditioned response. If the lunch break at work happens at noon
every day, people learn to associate 12 o’clock (conditioned stimulus) with food (unconditioned
stimulus). They may begin to salivate (conditioned response) when they see that time on wall
clock. However, people anticipate lunch time even when they cannot see a clock. They may start
thinking about lunch at 9 a.m. when someone mentions where they want to go. They may begin to
watch the clock and even put away their work well in advance, and they may salivate and get
hungry just thinking about food.
Fear responses can also be acquired through expectations, especially since some people are veryskilled at imagining painful consequences. For example, the sound of a dentist’s drill (conditioned
stimulus) is associated with painful stimulation (unconditioned stimulus). The painful stimulation
causes anxiety/fear (unconditioned response). For some people, the sound of that drill is enoughto make them nervous (conditioned response). They may even experience second orderconditioning and fear entering the dentist’s office. Expectations of pain can even cause somepeople to avoid making or keeping appointments with their dentist.
For operant conditioning, reinforcements and punishments are expected and sometimes evenrequested. The child reminds a parent who has forgotten to provide reinforcement for a chore, andemployees request extra pay for working more hours. Placebos, described in chapter 2, provide
negative reinforcement for a headache because of the expectation that taking the placebo willremove the headache.
People can also learn to expect that their actions will have no effect on a situation. For example,
learned helplessness results from repeated exposure to inescapable, painful events (Seligman &Maier, 1967). Learned helplessness was originally demonstrated in dogs. One group of dogs was
permitted to escape an electrified floor. They quickly learned the behavior required to do thisthrough negative reinforcement. Another group could not avoid the shocks. This group became
passive. They had learned to be helpless. Psychologists have demonstrated learned helplessness ina variety of species, including humans. Learned helplessness has been used to explain thepassiveness that might accompany repeated academic failure or even abuse. People can sometimes
think through a problem and change a pattern of helplessness, though. Cognition and expectations
can influence conditioned responses.
Cognition and expectations can also affect the major decisions that people make in life. People
start college, change jobs, get married, and have children with the expectation that rewards will124

follow. Even when these expectations are unrealistic, the anticipation of pleasure encourages risktaking and change. This optimism about the future provides its own reward in the form ofpleasant daydreams. In fact, this optimism may be adaptive since it encourages people to explore,
initiate relationships, and innovate (Sharot, Riccardi, Raio, & Phelps, 2010).

Exercises
1. Imagine being outside on a hot summer day. Someone arrives with a tray of limes, aknife, a pitcher of ice water, a glass and a bowl of sugar. You begin to slice a large,
juicy lime, and then slowly squeeze it into the glass. Are these thoughts affecting yoursalivation? How would seeing a large fly in the bottom of the glass affect yourconditioned response?
2. Most children are controlled, at least in part, by punishment and reinforcement.
Remember a time as a child when you were conditioned to respond in a particularway. How is your behavior different now? Did your cognitions or expectations
produce this change?
3. List the situations in which you anticipate reinforcement. These might include
trying a new hobby, getting into a relationship, becoming a parent. Are there
situations in which you anticipate punishment? How do these expectations affectyour behavior?

Other Forms of Learning based on Cognition
Learning Objectives
1. Understand the principles of learning by insight and latent learning.
2. Explain observational learning, including the research on mirror neurons.
3. Explain how learning principles can be used in advertisement and education.

John B. Watson and B. F. Skinner were behaviorists who believed that all learning could be
explained by the processes of conditioning; that is, that associations, and associations alone,
influence learning. However, some kinds of learning are very difficult to explain using only
conditioning. Thus, although classical conditioning and operant conditioning play a key role inlearning, they constitute only a part of the total picture.
Insight: One type of learning that is not determined only by conditioning occurs when we
suddenly find the solution to a problem, as if the idea just popped into our head. This type oflearning is known as insight, the sudden understanding of a solution to a problem. The German
psychologist Wolfgang Köhler (1925) carefully observed what happened when he presented
chimpanzees with a problem that was not easy for them to solve, such as placing food in an areathat was too high in the cage to be reached. He found that the chimps first engaged in trial-anderror attempts at solving the problem. When these attempts failed, they seemed to stop and think
for a while. After this period of contemplation, they would suddenly seem to know how to solve
the problem. For instance, they might use a stick to knock the food down or stand on a chair to125reach it. Köhler argued that it was this flash of insight that allowed the animals to solve theproblem.
Latent Learning: Further demonstrating the role of the mind in problem solving, Edward Tolman
compared the behavior of three groups of rats that were learning to navigate their way throughmazes (Tolman & Honzik, 1930). The first group always received a reward of food at the end of
the maze. The second group never received any reward, and the third group received a reward, but
only beginning on the 11th day of the experimental period. As you might expect when considering
the principles of conditioning, the rats in the first group quickly learned to negotiate the maze,
while the rats of the second group seemed to wander aimlessly through it. The rats in the thirdgroup, however, although they wandered aimlessly for the first 10 days, quickly learned tonavigate to the end of the maze as soon as they received food on day 11. By the next day, the rats
in the third group had caught up in their learning to the rats that had been rewarded from the
beginning.
It was clear to Tolman that the rats that had been allowed to experience the maze, even without any
reinforcement, had nevertheless learned something. Tolman called this latent learning, whichrefers to learning that is not reinforced and not demonstrated until there is motivation to do so.
Tolman argued that the rats had formed a cognitive map of the maze but did not demonstrate thisknowledge until they received reinforcement.
Observational Learning: The idea of latent learning suggests thatanimals, and people, may learn simply by experiencing or watching.
Observational learning, also called modeling, is learning byobserving the behavior of others. To demonstrate the importance ofobservational learning in children, Bandura, Ross, and Ross (1963)
showed children a live image of either a man or a woman interactingwith a Bobo doll, (see Figure 4.9), a filmed version of the same events,
or a cartoon version of the events. The Bobo doll is an inflatableballoon with a weight in the bottom that makes it come back up when
you knock it down. In all three conditions, the model violently punched
the clown, kicked the doll, sat on it, and hit it with a hammer.

Figure 4.9

The researchers first let the children view one of the three types ofmodeling, and then let them play in a room in which there were somereally fun toys. To create some frustration in the children, Bandura let
the children play with the fun toys for only a couple of minutes before taking them away. Then
Bandura gave the children a chance to play with the Bobo doll.
If you guessed that most of the children imitated the model, you would be correct. Regardless ofwhich type of modeling the children had seen, and regardless of the sex of the model or the child,the children who had seen the model behaved aggressively, just as the model had done. They also
punched, kicked, sat on the doll, and hit it with the toy hammer. Bandura and his colleagues had
demonstrated that these children had learned new behaviors, simply by observing and imitatingothers.

126

Observational learning is useful for animals and for people because it allows us to learn without
having to actually engage in what might be a risky behavior. Monkeys that see other monkeys
respond with fear to the sight of a snake learn to fear the snake themselves, even if they have beenraised in a laboratory and have never actually seen a snake (Cook & Mineka, 1990). As Bandura
put it:
The prospects for [human] survival would be slim indeed if one could learn only by suffering theconsequences of trial and error. For this reason, one does not teach children to swim, adolescentsto drive automobiles, and novice medical students to perform surgery by having them discover theappropriate behavior through the consequences of their successes and failures. The more costly andhazardous the possible mistakes, the heavier is the reliance on observational learning fromcompetent learners (Bandura, 1977, p. 212).

Although modeling is normally adaptive, it can be problematic for children who grow up in violent
families. These children are not only the victims of aggression, but they also see it happening totheir parents and siblings. Because children learn how to be parents, in large part by modeling theactions of their own parents, it is no surprise that there is a strong correlation between family
violence in childhood and violence as an adult. Children who witness their parents being violent or
who are themselves abused are more likely as adults to inflict abuse on intimate partners or theirchildren, and to be victims of intimate violence (Heyman & Slep, 2002). In turn, their children are
more likely to interact violently with each other and to aggress against their parents (Patterson,
Dishion, & Bank, 1984).
However, although modeling can increase violence, it can also have positive effects. Research
has found that, just as children learn to be aggressive through observational learning, they canalso learn to be altruistic in the same way (Seymour, Yoshida, & Dolan, 2009). Simple exposure
to a model is not enough to explain observational learning. Many children watch violent media
and do not become violent. Others watch acts of kindness and do not learn to behave in a similar
fashion. A variety of factors have been shown to explain the likelihood that exposure will lead tolearning and modeling. Similarity, proximity, frequency of exposure, reinforcement, andlikeability of the model are all related to learning. In addition, people can choose what to watch
and whom to imitate. Observational learning is dependent on many factors, so people are welladvised to select models carefully, both for themselves and their children.
Some scientists now believe that mirror neurons, or nerons that fire when an organism isobserving an action, in the parieto-frontal cortex provide the biological basis for observational
learning (Rizzolatti & Sinigaglia, 2010). These neurons were originally identified in monkeys
during a research study on the motor cortex. Scientists found that the same neurons fired
regardless of whether the monkeys performed an action or merely watched it being performed.
Similar research on humans also supports the role of mirror neurons in learning through mental
imitation (Carlson, 2014). Neural firing may be less dramatic during observation than during
actual performance of a behavior, however. This lower level of neural firing may explain why
people inhibit their actions rather than immediately imitate what they see (Villiger,
Chandrasekharan, & Welsh, 2011).

127

Using the Principles of Learning in Advertisement and Education
The principles of learning are some of the most general and most powerful in all of psychology.
The principles of learning are applied in numerous ways in everyday settings. For example,
operant conditioning has been used to motivate employees, to improve athletic performance, toincrease the functioning of those suffering from developmental disabilities, and to help parents
successfully toilet train their children (Simek & O’Brien, 1981; Pedalino & Gamboa, 1974; Azrin& Foxx, 1974; McGlynn, 1990). In this section, we will consider how learning theories are used inadvertising and education.
Classical conditioning has long been, and continues to be, an effective tool in marketing andadvertising (Hawkins, Best, & Coney, 1998). The general idea is to create an advertisement thathas positive features, such that the ad creates enjoyment in the person exposed to it. The enjoyable
ad serves as the unconditioned stimulus (US), and the enjoyment is the unconditioned response(UR). Because the product being advertised is mentioned in the ad, it becomes associated with theUS, and then becomes the conditioned stimulus (CS). In the end, if everything has gone well,seeing the product online or in the store will then create a conditioned response (CR) leading him
or her to be more likely to purchase the product.
A similar strategy is used by corporations that sponsor teams or events. For instance, if people
enjoy watching a college basketball team playing basketball, and if that team is sponsored by a
product, such as Pepsi, then people may end up experiencing positive feelings when they view acan of Pepsi. Of course, the sponsor wants to sponsor only good teams and good athletes because
these create more pleasurable responses.
Advertisers use a variety of techniques to create positive advertisements, including enjoyable
music, cute babies, attractive models, and funny spokespeople. In one study, Gorn (1982) showedresearch participants pictures of different writing pens of different colors, but paired one of thepens with pleasant music and the other with unpleasant music. When given a choice as a free gift,
more people chose the pen color associated with the pleasant music. And Schemer, Matthes,
Wirth, and Textor (2008) found that people were more interested in products that had been
embedded in music videos of artists that they liked and less likely to be interested when the
products were in videos featuring artists that they did not like.
Another type of ad that is based on principles of classical conditioning is one that associates fearwith the use of a product or behavior, such as those that show images of lung cancer surgery to
discourage smoking. These ads have also been found to be effective (Das, de Wit, & Stroebe,
2003; Perloff, 2003; Witte & Allen, 2000), due in large part to conditioning. When we see acigarette and the fear of dying has been associated with it, we are hopefully less likely to light up.
Taken together then, there is ample evidence of the utility of classical conditioning, using both
positive as well as negative stimuli, in advertising. This does not, however, mean that we arealways influenced by these ads. The likelihood of conditioning being successful is greater for
products that we do not know much about, where the differences between products are relatively
minor, and when we do not think too carefully about the choices (Schemer et al., 2008).

128

Psychology in Everyday Life: Operant Conditioning in the Classroom
John B. Watson and B. F. Skinner believed that all learning was the result of reinforcement, andthus that reinforcement could be used to educate children. For instance, Watson wrote in his
book on behaviorism,
Give me a dozen healthy infants, well-formed, and my own specified world to bring themup in and I’ll guarantee to take any one at random and train him to become any type of
specialist I might select—doctor, lawyer, artist, merchant-chief and, yes, even beggarman and thief, regardless of his talents, penchants, tendencies, abilities, vocations, andrace of his ancestors. I am going beyond my facts and I admit it, but so have theadvocates of the contrary and they have been doing it for many thousands of years(Watson, 1930, p. 82)
Skinner promoted the use of programmed instruction, an educational tool that consists of selfteaching with the aid of a specialized textbook or teaching machine that presents material in a
logical sequence (Skinner, 1965). Programmed instruction allows students to progress through aunit of study at their own rate, checking their own answers and advancing only after answeringcorrectly. Programmed instruction is used today in many classes, for instance to teach computer
programming (Emurian, 2009).
Although reinforcement can be effective in education, and teachers make use of it by awarding
gold stars, good grades, and praise, there are also substantial limitations to using reward to
improve learning. To be most effective, rewards must be contingent on appropriate behavior. In
some cases, teachers may distribute rewards indiscriminately, for instance by giving praise orgood grades to children whose work does not warrant it, in the hope that they will feel goodabout themselves, and that this self-esteem will lead to better performance. Studies indicate,however, that high self-esteem alone does not improve academic performance (Baumeister,Campbell, Krueger, & Vohs, 2003). When rewards are not earned, they become meaninglessand no longer provide motivation for improvement.
Another potential limitation of rewards is that they may teach children that the activity should be
performed for the reward, rather than for one’s own interest in the task. If rewards are offered too
often, the task itself becomes less appealing. Mark Lepper and his colleagues (Lepper, Greene, &Nisbett, 1973) studied this possibility by leading some children to think that they engaged in an
activity for a reward, rather than because they simply enjoyed it. First, they placed some fun felttipped markers in the classroom of the children they were studying. The children loved themarkers and played with them right away. Then, the markers were taken out of the classroom,and the children were given a chance to play with the markers individually at an experimental
session with the researcher. At the research session, the children were randomly assigned to oneof three experimental groups. One group of children in the expected reward condition was toldthat if they played with the markers they would receive a good drawing award. A second groupin the unexpected reward condition also played with the markers, and also got the award, butthey were not told ahead of time that they would be receiving the award; it came as a surprise
after the session. The third group, or the no reward group, played with the markers too, but got noaward.
129

Then, the researchers placed the markers back in the classroom and observed how much thechildren in each of the three groups played with them. As you can see in Figure 4.10, the children
who had been led to expect a reward for playing with the markers during the experimental
session played with the markers less at the second session than they had at the first session. The
idea is that, when the children had to choose whether or not to play with the markers when themarkers reappeared in the classroom, they based their decision on their own prior behavior. The
children in the no reward groups and the children in the unexpected reward groups realized thatthey played with the markers because they liked them. Children in the expected award condition,
however, remembered that they were promised a reward for the activity the last time they playedwith the markers. These children, then, were more likely to draw the inference that they playwith the markers only for the external reward, and because they did not expect to get an award
for playing with the markers in the classroom, they determined that they did not like them.
Expecting to receive the award at the session had undermined their initial interest in the markers.
This research suggests that, although giving rewards may in many cases lead us to perform anactivity more frequently or with more effort, reward may not always increase our liking for theactivity. In some cases, rewards may actually make us like an activity less than we did before wewere rewarded for it. This outcome is particularly likely when the reward is perceived as an
obvious attempt on the part of others to get us to do something.
Figure 4.10 Undermining Intrinsic Interest

Source: Adapted from Lepper, M. R., Greene, D., & Nisbett, R. E. (1973). Undermining children’s intrinsic interest with extrinsic reward: A test of
the “overjustification” hypothesis. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 28(1), 129–137

When children are given money by their parents to get good grades in school, they may improvetheir school performance to gain the reward. But at the same time their liking for school may
decrease. On the other hand, rewards that are seen as more internal to the activity, such as
rewards that praise us, remind us of our achievements in the domain, and make us feel goodabout ourselves as a result of our accomplishments are more likely to be effective in increasing
not only the performance of, but also the liking of, the activity (Hulleman, Durik, Schweigert, &Harackiewicz, 2008; Ryan & Deci, 2002).

130

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Not all learning can be explained through the principles of classical and operant
conditioning.
Insight is the sudden understanding of the components of a problem that makes thesolution apparent.
Latent learning refers to learning that is not reinforced and not demonstrated until
there is motivation to do so.
Observational learning occurs by viewing the behaviors of others, and researchers
believe that mirror neurons play a role.
Both aggression and altruism can be learned through observation.
Many factors influence whether or not observational learning will occur.
Learning theories have been used to change behaviors in many areas of everyday life.
Some advertising uses classical conditioning to associate a pleasant response with aproduct.
Rewards are frequently and effectively used in education, but must be carefully
designed to be contingent on performance and to avoid undermining interest in theactivity.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Describe a time when you learned something by insight. What do you think led to your
2.

3.
4.
5.

learning?
Imagine that you had a 12-year-old nephew who spent many hours a day playing
violent video games. Basing your answer on the material covered in this chapter, do
you think that his parents should limit his exposure to the games? Why or why not?
How might we incorporate principles of observational learning to encourage acts ofkindness and selflessness in our society?
Find and share with your class some examples of advertisements that make use ofclassical conditioning to create positive attitudes toward products.
Should parents use both punishment as well as reinforcement to discipline theirchildren? On what principles of learning do you base your opinion?

131

Videos and Activities
1. Train Pavlov’s Dog:
http://www.nobelprize.org/educational/medicine/pavlov/index.html
2. Original footage and an explanation of Pavlov's research:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hhqumfpxuzI&playnext=1&list=PL50FD6087AF
EADFEE
3. Thorndike’s Puzzle Box: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BDujDOLre-8
4. Train Fuzz using operant conditioning: Needs Java
http://epsych.msstate.edu/adaptive/Fuzz/index.html?2.html
5. Test your own cognitive mapping abilities by learning your way
through the cave maze:
http://epsych.msstate.edu/adaptive/learningCurves/mazeJS.html

6. Bandura Discussing Clips From His Modeling Studies
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8ZXOp5PopIA
7. Mirror Neurons http://video.pbs.org/video/1615173073
8. Consider how this ad is using conditioning to get you to like the product.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_zCsFvVg0UY

Chapter Summary
Learning is the relatively permanent change in knowledge or behavior due to experience.
Classical conditioning was first studied by Russian physiologist Ivan Pavlov. In classicalconditioning a person or animal learns to associate a neutral stimulus with a stimulus (theunconditioned stimulus, or US) that naturally produces a behavior (the unconditioned response, or
UR). As a result of this association, the previously neutral stimulus becomes a conditioned
stimulus (CS) and elicits the same or similar response (the conditioned response, or CR).
Classically conditioned responses show extinction if the CS is repeatedly presented without the
US. The CR may reappear later in a process known as spontaneous recovery.
Organisms may show stimulus generalization, in which stimuli similar to the CS may produce
similar behaviors, or stimulus discrimination, in which the organism learns to differentiate between
the CS and other similar stimuli.
Second-order conditioning occurs when a second CS is conditioned to a previously established CS.
Organisms are evolutionarily prepared to learn some associations more easily than others, which isreferred to as biological preparedness. Taste aversion, phobias, and PTSD reactions are all
examples.
Psychologist Edward Thorndike developed the law of effect: The idea that responses that are
reinforced are strengthened by experience and thus occur more frequently, whereas responses thatare punishing are weakended and subsequently occur less frequently.
132

B. F. Skinner (1904–1990) expanded on Thorndike’s ideas to develop a set of principles to explain
operant conditioning.
A reinforcer is anything which increases behavior. Positive reinforcement strengthens a responseby presenting something pleasant after the response, and negative reinforcement strengthens a
response by reducing or removing something unpleasant. Punishment suppresses behavior.
Positive punishment weakens a response by presenting something unpleasant after the response,
whereas negative punishment weakens a response by reducing or removing something pleasant.
Reinforcement may be either partial or continuous. Partial-reinforcement schedules are determinedby whether the reward is presented on the basis of an interval, or the time that elapses between
rewards, or on the basis of a ratio, the number of responses that the organism engages in, and bywhether the reinforcement occurs on a fixed or regular schedule or one that is variable orunpredictable.
Shaping is the process of guiding an organism’s behavior by reinforcing successive
approximations to the desired behavior.
Primary reinforcers are innately satisfying consequences such as sleep or food. Secondary
reinforcers have been associated with primary reinforcers and acquire their reinforcement value
through learning. For example, money can be used to buy food, so money becomes a reinforcer.
Side effects of punishment include aggression, anxiety, and poor relationships. Punishment should
be combined with reinforcement of a preferred behavior.
Behavior modification is the systematic use of behavioral learning principles to modify behavior.
Tokens are generic reinforcers that can be exchanged for items that are reinforcing to a particular
individual. Token economies can be used for behavior modification in group settings.
Contemporary psychologists recognize that people do not merely react to stimuli or change their
behavior based on how a consequence makes them feel. People anticipate associations and expect
specific consequences. These expectations can also change behavior.
Not all learning can be explained through the principles of classical and operant conditioning.
Insight is the sudden understanding of the components of a problem that makes the solution
apparent, and latent learning refers to learning that is not reinforced and not demonstrated until
there is motivation to do so.
Learning by observing the behavior of others and the consequences of those behaviors is known as
observational learning. Aggression, altruism, and many other behaviors are learned throughobservation.
Learning theories can and have been applied to change behaviors in many areas of everyday life.
Some advertising uses classical conditioning to associate a pleasant response with a product.
Rewards are frequently and effectively used in education but must be carefully designed to becontingent on performance and to avoid undermining interest in the activity.
133References
American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (5th ed.).
Washington, DC: Author.
Azrin, N., & Foxx, R. M. (1974). Toilet training in less than a day. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster;Bandura, A. (1977). Self-efficacy: Toward a unifying theory of behavior change. Psychological Review, 84, 191–215.
Bandura, A., Ross, D., & Ross, S. A. (1963). Imitation of film-mediated aggressive models. The Journal of Abnormal
and Social Psychology, 66(1), 3–11.
Baumeister, R. F., Campbell, J. D., Krueger, J. I., & Vohs, K. D. (2003). Does high self-esteem cause better
performance, interpersonal success, happiness, or healthier lifestyles? Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 4,
1–44.
Bushman, B. J., & Anderson, C. A. (2002). Violent video games and hostile expectations: A test of the generalaggression model. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28(12), 1679–1686.
Carlson, N. R. (2014). Foundations of behavioral neuroscience (9th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Cerella, J. (1980). The pigeon’s analysis of pictures. Pattern Recognition, 12, 1–6.
Cook, M., & Mineka, S. (1990). Selective associations in the observational conditioning of fear in rhesus monkeys.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: Animal Behavior Processes, 16(4), 372–389.

Das, E. H. H. J., de Wit, J. B. F., & Stroebe, W. (2003). Fear appeals motivate acceptance of action recommendations:
Evidence for a positive bias in the processing of persuasive messages. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 29(5),650–664.
Emurian, H. H. (2009). Teaching Java: Managing instructional tactics to optimize student learning.
International Journal of Information & Communication Technology Education, 3(4), 34–49.
Garcia, J., Kimeldorf, D. J., & Koelling, R. A. (1955). Conditioned aversion to saccharin resulting from exposure to
gamma radiation. Science, 122, 157–158.
Garcia, J., Ervin, F. R., & Koelling, R. A. (1966). Learning with prolonged delay of reinforcement. Psychonomic
Science, 5(3), 121–122.
Gershoff, E. T. (2002). Corporal punishment by parents and associated child behaviors and experiences: A metaanalytic and theoretical review. Psychological Bulletin, 128(4), 539–579.
Gorn, G. J. (1982). The effects of music in advertising on choice behavior: A classical conditioning approach.
Journal of Marketing, 46(1), 94–101.
Hawkins, D., Best, R., & Coney, K. (1998.) Consumer Behavior: Building Marketing Strategy (7th ed.). Boston, MA:
McGraw-Hill.

134

Heyman, R. E., & Slep, A. M. S. (2002). Do child abuse and interparental violence lead to adulthood family violence?
Journal of Marriage and Family, 64(4), 864–870.
Hulleman, C. S., Durik, A. M., Schweigert, S. B., & Harackiewicz, J. M. (2008). Task values, achievementgoals, andinterest: An integrative analysis. Journal of Educational Psychology, 100(2), 398–416.
Keane, T. M., Zimering, R. T., & Caddell, J. M. (1985). A behavioral formulation of posttraumatic stress disorder in
Vietnam veterans. The Behavior Therapist, 8(1), 9–12.
Kirsch, I., Lynn, J.S., Vigorito, & Miller, R. (2004) The Role of Cognition in Classical and Operant Conditioning.
Journal of Clinical Psychology. 60(4), 369-392.
Köhler, W. (1925). The mentality of apes (E. Winter, Trans.). New York, NY: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Kohn, A. (1993). Punished by rewards: The trouble with gold stars, incentive plans, A’s, praise, and other bribes.
Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin and Company.
Lepper, M. R., Greene, D., & Nisbett, R. E. (1973). Undermining children’s intrinsic interest with extrinsic reward: A
test of the “overjustification” hypothesis. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 28(1), 129–137.
Lewicki, P. (1985). Nonconscious biasing effects of single instances on subsequent judgments. Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology, 48, 563–574.
LoBue, V., & DeLoache, J. S. (2010). Superior detection of threat-relevant stimuli in infancy. Developmental Science,
13(1), 221–228.
McGlynn, S. M. (1990). Behavioral approaches to neuropsychological rehabilitation. Psychological Bulletin, 108, 420–
441.
Milad, M. R., Pitman, R. K., Ellis, C. B., Gold, A. L., Shin, L. M., Lasko, N. B.,…Rauch, S. L. (2009). Neurobiologicalbasis of failure to recall extinction memory in posttraumatic stress disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 66(12), 1075–82.
Öhman, A., & Mineka, S. (2001). Fears, phobias, and preparedness: Toward an evolved module of fear and fear
learning. Psychological Review, 108(3), 483–522.
Patterson, G. R., Dishion, T. J., & Bank, L. (1984). Family interaction: A process model of deviancy training.
Aggressive Behavior, 10(3), 253–267.
Pedalino, E., & Gamboa, V. U. (1974). Behavior modification and absenteeism: Intervention in one industrial setting.
Journal of Applied Psychology, 59, 694–697;
Perloff, R. M. (2003). The dynamics of persuasion: Communication and attitudes in the 21st century (2nd ed.).
Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Porter, D., & Neuringer, A. (1984). Music discriminations by pigeons. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Animal
Behavior Processes, 10(2), 138–148.
Positive Reinforcement - The Big Bang Theory. Retrieved from http://www.youtube.com/v/JA96Fba-WHk.
http://www.cbs.com/primetime/big_bang_theory/
Rizzolatti, G. & Sinigaglia, C. The functional role of parieto-frontal mirror circuit:interpretations andmisinterpretations. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 11(4), 264-274.
Rotter, J. B. (1945). Social learning and clinical psychology. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall;

135

Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2002). Overview of self-determination theory: An organismic-dialectical perspective. In E.
L. Deci & R.M. Ryan (Eds.), Handbook of self-determination research (pp. 3–33). Rochester, NY: University ofRochester Press.
Schemer, C., Matthes, J. R., Wirth, W., & Textor, S. (2008). Does “Passing the Courvoisier” always pay off? Positive
and negative evaluative conditioning effects of brand placements in music videos. Psychology & Marketing, 25(10),923–943.
Seligman, M. (1970) On the Generality of the Laws of Learning. Psychological Review. 77(5),406-418.
Seligman, M. & Maier, S. (1967) Failure to escape traumatic shock. Journal of Experimental
21

Psychology, 37B, 1-

Seymour, B., Yoshida W., & Dolan, R. (2009) Altruistic learning. Frontiers in Behavioral Neuroscience, 3, 23.
doi:10.3389/neuro.07.023.2009
Sharot, T., Riccardi, A., Raio, C. & Phelps, E. (2011). Neural mechanisms mediating optimism bias. Nature,450(7166), 102-105.
Simek, T. C., & O’Brien, R. M. (1981). Total golf: A behavioral approach to lowering your score and getting more outof your game. New York, NY: Doubleday & Company;
Skinner, B. F. (1965). The technology of teaching. Proceedings of the Royal Society B Biological Sciences, 162(989):
427–43. doi:10.1098/rspb.1965.0048
Thorndike, E. L. (1898). Animal intelligence: An experimental study of the associative processes in animals.
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Thorndike, E. L. (1911). Animal intelligence: Experimental studies. New York, NY: Macmillan. Retrieved fromhttp://www.archive.org/details/animalintelligen00thor
Tolman, E. C., & Honzik, C. H. (1930). Introduction and removal of reward, and maze performance in rats. Universityof California Publications in Psychology, 4, 257–275.
Villiger, M., Chandrasekharan, S. & Welsh, T. (2011). Activity of human motor system during action observation ismodulated by object presence. Experimental Brain Research. 209(1), 85-93.
Watanabe, S., Sakamoto, J., & Wakita, M. (1995). Pigeons’ discrimination of painting by Monet and Picasso. Journalof the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 63(2), 165–174.
Watson, J. B. (1930). Behaviorism (Rev. ed.). New York, NY: Norton.
Witte, K., & Allen, M. (2000). A meta-analysis of fear appeals: Implications for effective public health campaigns.
Health Education & Behavior, 27(5), 591–615.

136

Chapter 5 Memory and Cognition
Learning Objectives
1. Define cognitive psychology, memory, cognition, and problem-soving.
2. Describe information processing theory.
Cognitive psychology is the field of psychology dedicated to examining how people think. It
attempts to explain how and why we think the way we do by studying how our memory system
functions, how creativity affects our problem-solving, the impact of language on ourdevelopment, the different types of intelligence, and the fundamental errors we make in decisionmaking. Cognitive psychologists also focus on how we organize thoughts and information
gathered from our environments into meaningful categories.
The three subjects of this chapter are memory, defined as the ability to store and retrieve
information over time, cognition, defined as the processes of acquiring and using knowledge, andproblem-solving, defined as the strategies used to find a solution. It is useful to consider memoryand cognition in the same chapter because they work together to help us interpret and understandour environments. The next chapter will examine intelligence and language.
Memory and cognition represent the two major interests of cognitive psychologists. The cognitive
approach became the most important perspective of psychology during the 1960s, and the field of
psychology has remained, in large part, cognitive since that time. The cognitive perspective was
influenced by the development of the computer, and although the differences between computers
and the human mind are vast, cognitive psychologists have used the computer as a model forunderstanding the workings of the mind. Information processing theory is a theory of cognitive
development that describes the mind as functionally similar to a computer. Information comes inas data or inputted. It is processed through working memory, stored in long term memory, and canbe converted to output by using the correct commands. Changes in thinking occur over time as
new information enters the system.
Our memories allow us to do relatively simple things, such as remembering where we put our keys
or the name of the current governor of Illinois. Memories also allow us to form complex
memories, such as how to ride a bicycle or to write a computer program. Moreover, our memories
define us as individuals as they are our experiences, our relationships, our successes, and our
failures. Without our memories, we would not have a life, but our memories are far from perfect(Schacter, 1996).
At least for some things, our memory is very good (Bahrick, 2000). Once we learn a face, we canrecognize that face many years later. We know the lyrics of many songs by heart, and we can givedefinitions for tens of thousands of words, but memory is not like a video. When people are asked
to remember an event, they use current knowledge to put together a story that makes sense. This
story is assembled using their original perceptions and memory traces, emotions, beliefs, and otherexperiences from life. In effect, they rebuild the memory each time they are asked to recall it.
Reconstructive memory is a memory for an event that has been pieced together from past andpresent knowledge, emotions, and beliefs. Reconstructive memory can also be inaccurate (Bartlett,1932). The errors that we make are because our memories are not simply recording devices
137that input, store, and retrieve the world around us. Rather, we actively process and interpret
information as we remember it, and we do not reproduce exact replicas of those events. Laterin the chapter, the reasons these inaccuracies occur will be explained.
Figure 5.1 Kim Peek

For some people, memory is truly amazing. Consider, forinstance, the case of Kim Peek, who was the inspiration for
the Academy Award winning film Rain Man (see Figure 5.1)
Although Peek’s IQ was only 87, significantly below theaverage of about 100, it is estimated that he memorized morethan 10,000 books in his lifetime (Wisconsin Medical
Society, n.d.; Kim Peek, 2004). The Russian psychologist
Luria (2004) has described the abilities of a man known as“S,” who seems to have unlimited memory. He rememberedstrings of hundreds of random letters for years at a time, andseemed to never forget anything.

Source.

Encoding and Storage: How Our Perceptions Become Memories
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the processes of encoding, storage, and retrieval.
2. Describe the role of elaborative encoding in studying and learning.
3. Explain the progression from sensory memory to short-term memory to long-term
memory4. Describe the role of chunking and rehearsal in aiding memory.
5. Differentiate between declarative/explicit and nondeclarative/implicit memory.
6. Describe the following methods of measuring memory: Recall, free recall, cuedrecall, recognition, and relearning.
7. Define semantic and episodic memory.
8. Describe the ways in which long-term memory organizes information, and theimpact those organization strategies have on memory.
Psychologists conceptualize memory in terms of three processes. These include:••

Encoding is the process by which we place the things that we experience into memory.
Unless information is encoded, it cannot be remembered. You have been to a party where
you were introduced to someone and then, maybe only seconds later, you realized that you
did not remember the person’s name. You could not remember the name, probably because
you were distracted and never encoded the name to begin with.
Storage is the process of holding information in memory to be processed or used. Somememories we will hold for years, other memories we hold only long enough to use theinformation, such as looking up a phone number and retaining it long enough to place the
call.

138

•

Retrieval refers to the process of reactivating information that has been stored in memory.
Memory would be useless without the ability to retrieve the memories that we have created.
Retrieval is not a simple process and many factors can influence the ease with which we canlocate a memory.

Encoding
Not everything we experience can or should be encoded. We tend to encode things that we need toremember and not bother to encode things that are irrelevant. Look at Figure 5.2, which showsdifferent images of U.S. pennies. Can you tell which one is the real one? Nickerson and Adams(1979) found that very few of the U.S. participants they tested could identify the right one. We see
pennies a lot, but we do not bother to encode all of the details.
Figure 5.2 Pennies in Different Styles

Can you identify the “real” penny? We tend to have poor memory for things that do not matter,even if we see them frequently.

One way to improve our memory is to use better encoding strategies. Some ways of studying are
more effective than others. Research has found that we are better able to remember information if
we encode it in a meaningful way. When we engage in elaborative rehearsal or elaborative
encoding, we process new information in ways that make it more relevant or meaningful (Craik &Lockhart, 1972; Harris & Qualls, 2000).
Ineffective encoding, or an encoding failure, is an important cause of memory failure andforgetting in humans. If you do not make the correct association between memories, for example,
you will not be able to retrieve a memory when cued. If you have encoded someone's name in the
category of "people in my class," you might not be able to identify that person when you see themin the grocery store. Whether you are trying to learn names or definitions for psychology, it isimportant to make useful associations when you encode or memorize the information.
139

Imagine that you are trying to remember the characteristics of the different perspectives ofpsychology we discussed in Chapter 1. Rather than simply trying to remember the perspectives
and their characteristics, you might try to relate the information to things you already know. For
instance, you might try to remember the fundamentals of cognitive psychology by linking thecharacteristics to the computer model. The cognitive perspective focuses on how information is
inputed, processed, and retrieved, and you might think about how computers do pretty much thesame thing. You might also try to organize the information into meaningful units. For instance, you
might link the cognitive perspective to structuralism because both were concerned with mental
processes. You also might try to use visual cues to help you remember the information. You mightlook at the image of Freud and imagine what he looked like as a child. That image might help you
remember that childhood experiences were an important part of Freudian theory. Each person has
his or her unique way of elaborating on information; the important thing is to try to develop uniqueand meaningful associations among the materials.

Research Focus: Elaboration and Memory
In an important study showing the effectiveness of elaborative encoding, Rogers, Kuiper, andKirker (1977) studied how people recalled information that they had learned under different
processing conditions. All the participants were presented with the same list of 40 adjectives
to learn, but through the use of random assignment, the participants were given one of four
different sets of instructions about how to process the adjectives. Participants assigned to thestructural task condition were asked to judge whether the word was printed in uppercase or
lowercase letters. Participants in the phonemic task condition were asked whether or not theword rhymed with another given word. In the semantic task condition, the participants wereasked if the word was a synonym of another word, and in the self-reference task condition,
participants were asked to indicate whether or not the given adjective was or was not true ofthemselves. After completing the specified task, each participant was asked to recall as many
adjectives as he or she could remember.
Rogers and his colleagues hypothesized that different types of processing would have different
effects on memory. As you can see in Figure 5.3, the students in the self-reference task
condition recalled significantly more adjectives than did students in any other condition. Thisfinding, known as the self-reference effect, is powerful evidence that the self-concept helps usorganize and remember information. The next time you are studying for an exam, you might
try relating the material to your own experiences. The self-reference effect suggests that doing
so will help you better remember the information (Symons & Johnson, 1997).
Figure 5.3 Self-Reference Effect Results

Participants recalled the same words
significantly better when they were
processed in relation to the self thanwhen they were processed in otherways.
Source: Adapted from Rogers, T. B., Kuiper, N. A., & Kirker, W.
S. (1977). Self-reference and the encoding of personal
information.Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 35(9),677–688.

140

Storage
Another way of understanding memory is to think about it in terms of stages that describe thelength of time that information remains available to us; how long it can be stored. According to thisapproach (see Figure 5.4), information begins in sensory memory, moves to short-term memory,and eventually moves to long-term memory (Atkinson & Shriffin, 1968). Not all information makes
it through all three stages; most of it is forgotten. Whether the information moves from shorterduration memory into longer-duration memory or whether it is lost from memory entirely depends
on how the information is attended to and processed.
Figure 5.4 Memory Duration

Memory can be characterized in terms of stages—the length of time that information remains available to us.
Source: Adapted from Atkinson, R. C., & Shiffrin, R. M. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and its control processes. In K. Spence (Ed.) The psychology of learning andmotivation (Vol. 2). Oxford, England: Academic Press.

Sensory Memory
Sensory memory refers to the brief storage of sensory information. Unless it is attended to andpassed on for more processing, the memory is quickly forgotten. The purpose of sensory memory
is to give the brain some time to process the incoming sensations, and to allow us to see the world
as an unbroken stream of events rather than as individual pieces.
Iconic memory is sensory memory for visual information. Iconic memory was first studied by thepsychologist George Sperling (1960). In his research, Sperling showed participants a display ofletters in rows, similar to that shown in Figure 5.5. He showed the image of 12 letters for only
about 50 milliseconds (1/20 of a second). Then, Sperling gave his participants a recall test in which
they were asked to name all the letters that they could remember. On average, the participants
could remember only about one-third of the letters that they had seen. Sperling knew that theparticipants had seen all the letters, but he could tell that they did not have enough time tomemorize all twelve.

141

To Sperling's surprise, some participants reported a lingering visual image of all the letters,
although the image of the twelve letters faded quickly. Sperling decided to look for evidence that
this image existed in the mind of each participant who reported it. To do so, in his next experiment
he again showed twelve letters in three rows of four to each participant. Then after the display had
been removed, he quickly signaled to the participants to report the letters from only the first,
second, or third row. He did this by presenting a high, medium, or low tone for each row in thedisplay. In this condition, the participants reported almost all the letters in that specific row.
This finding confirmed Sperling’s hunch: Participants had access to all of the letters in their iconic
memories. If the time delay between the removal of the display and the presentation of the tone
was short enough, they were able to report on the part of the display he asked them to before theiconic memory faded from view. Sperling discovered that if the delay between the removal of thedisplay and the presentation of the tone was greater than about ¼ second, the entire image would
fade from view. The participant could remember few if any letters. Thus, we say the duration of
iconic sensory memory is about ¼ second.
Figure 5.5 Measuring Iconic Memory

Sperling (1960) showed his participants displays suchas this one for only 1/20th of a second. He found thatwhen he cued the participants to report one of the threerows of letters, they could do it, even if the cue wasgiven shortly after the display had been removed. The
research demonstrated the existence of iconic memory.
Source: Adapted from Sperling, G. (1960). The information available in brief visualpresentation. Psychological Monographs, 74(11), 1–29.

Echoic memory is the sensory memory for sound. In contrast to iconic memory, which decays
very rapidly, echoic memories can last as long as 4 seconds (Cowan, Lichty, & Grove, 1990). Thisis convenient as it allows you to remember the words that you said at the beginning of a longsentence when you get to the end of it, and to take notes on your psychology professor’s mostrecent statement even after he or she has finished saying it.
In some people, iconic or echoic memory seems to last longer than usual. For visual images, thisphenomenon is known as eidetic imagery, having a photographic memory. People with aphotographic memory can report details of an image over long periods of time. These people statethat they can see an image long after it has been presented, and can often report accurately on thatimage. There is also some evidence for eidetic memories in hearing; some people report that theirechoic memories persist for unusually long periods of time. The composer Wolfgang Amadeus
Mozart may have possessed eidetic memory for music, because even when he was very young andhad not yet had a great deal of musical training, he could listen to long compositions and then playthem back almost perfectly (Solomon, 1995).

142

Short-Term Memory
Most of the information that gets into sensory memory is forgotten, but information that we turn
our attention to, with the goal of remembering it, may pass into short-term memory. In Short-term
memory (STM) small amounts of information can be temporarily kept for more than a few
seconds, but usually for less than one minute (Baddeley, Vallar, & Shallice, 1990). Information in
short-term memory is not stored permanently but rather becomes available for us to process, andthe processes that we use to make sense of, modify, interpret, and store information in STM are
known as working memory.
Working memory is not a store of memory like STM, but rather a set of memory procedures oroperations. Imagine that you are asked to participate in a working memory task, such as this one
researched by Unsworth & Engle (2007). Each of the following questions appears individually on acomputer screen and then disappears after you answer the question (see Figure 5.6):
Figure 5.6
Is 10 × 2 − 5 = 15? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “S”
Is 12 ÷ 6 − 2 = 1? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “R”
Is 10 × 2 = 5? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “P”
Is 8 ÷ 2 − 1 = 1? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “T”

To successfully accomplish the task,
you have to answer each of the mathproblems correctly and at the sametime remember the letter that follows
the task. Then, after the six questions,
you must list the letters thatappeared in each of the trials in thecorrect order (in this case S, R, P, T,
U, Q).

Is 6 × 2 − 1 = 8? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “U”

To accomplish this difficult task youneed to use a variety of skills. You
Is 2 × 3 − 3 = 0? (Answer YES OR NO) Then remember “Q”
clearly need to use STM, as you
must keep the letters in storage until
you are asked to list them, but you also need a way to make the best use of your available attention
and processing. For instance, you might decide to use a strategy of “repeat the letters twice, thenquickly solve the next problem, and then repeat the letters twice again including the new one.”
Keeping this strategy, or others like it, going is the role of working memory’s central executive,
which is the part of working memory that directs attention and processing. The central executive
will make use of whatever strategies seem to be best for the given task. For instance, the central
executive will direct the process known as rehearsal. At the same time, it will direct the visualcortex to form an image of the list of letters in memory. You can see that although STM is
involved, the processes that we use to operate on the material in memory are also critical.
Short-term memory is limited in both the length and the amount of information it can hold.
Peterson and Peterson (1959) found that when people were asked to remember a list of three-letter
strings and then were immediately asked to perform a distracting task, such as counting backward
by threes, the material was quickly forgotten. By 18 seconds it was virtually gone (see Figure 5.7).

143

Figure 5.7 STM Decay
Peterson and Peterson (1959) found that
information that was not rehearsed decayed
quickly from memory.
Source: Adapted from Peterson, L.,& Peterson, M. J. (1959). Short-term retention of individual verbal items. Journalof Experimental Psychology, 58(3), 193–198.

However, Keppel and Underwood (1962) reexamined Peterson and Peterson’s research and argued
that the problem was not one of memory decay, but memory interference. They reasoned that in
the Peterson and Peterson study there was a confound between length of delay and the order of thememory strings. In the first trial of the study, participants were asked to recall the letter string
immediately. In subsequent trials of the study, participants were given new letter strings and asked
to hold that information for longer and longer periods before recalling the information. Keppel andUnderwood suggested that any forgetting of later letter strings may not have been due to the delay
in recall, but interference from earlier letter strings. When information is very similar it is easierfor us to confuse one memory for another. In Keppel and Underwood’s research they found that it
did not matter whether people were asked to recall the information immediately or for up to 18
seconds later; they were able to accurately recall the three letters on the first trial. It was only onlater trials that they showed memory decline, suggesting it was interference not decay that
influenced Peterson and Peterson’s results.
One way to prevent the decay of information from short-term memory is to use working memory
to rehearse it. Maintenance rehearsal is the process of repeating information mentally or out loudwith the goal of keeping it in memory. We engage in maintenance rehearsal to keep something that
we want to remember (e.g., a person’s name, e-mail address, or phone number) in mind longenough to write it down, use it, or potentially transfer it to long-term memory. If we continue torehearse information, it will stay in STM until we stop rehearsing it, but there is also a capacity
limit to STM.
The digit span of most adults is between five and nine digits, with an average of about seven. The
cognitive psychologist George Miller (1956) referred to “seven plus or minus two” pieces of
information as the “magic number” in short-term memory. However, if we can only hold amaximum of about nine digits in short-term memory, then how can we remember larger amounts
of information than this? For instance, how can we ever remember a 10-digit phone number longenough to dial it?
One way we are able to expand our ability to remember things in STM is by using a memory
technique called chunking. Chunking is the process of organizing information into smallergroupings, or chunks, thereby increasing the number of items that can be held in STM.
144

For instance, try to remember this string of 12 letters:

X O F C B A N N C V T M
You probably will not do that well because the number of letters is more than the magic number ofseven. Now try again with this one:

M T V C N N A B C F O X
Would it help you if we pointed out that the material in this string could be chunked into four setsof three letters each? It would, because then rather than remembering 12 letters, you would only
have to remember the names of four television stations. In this case, chunking changes the numberof items you have to remember from 12 to only four. People routinely rely on chunking to help
them process complex information efficiently. Remembering area codes for phone numbers is one
example. Usually these are put into memory as a three-digit chunk rather than individual numbers,
especially since each region has only a limited number of area codes. Knowing the first number inthe chunk enables you to recall the other two numbers automatically.

Long-term Memory
If information makes it past short term-memory it may enter long-term memory (LTM), thememory storage that can hold information for days, months, and years. The capacity of long- term
memory is large, and there is no known limit to what we can remember (Wang, Liu, & Wang,
2003). Although we may forget at least some information after we learn it, other things will staywith us forever. In the next section we will discuss the two types of long-term memory; that is
explicit and implicit.

Explicit/Declarative Memory
When we assess memory by asking a person to consciously remember things, we are measuring
explicit memory. Explicit/declarative memory refers to knowledge or experiences that can beconsciously remembered. As you can see in Figure 5.8, there are two types of explicit memory:
episodic and semantic. Episodic memory refers to the firsthand experiences that we have had.
For example, recollections of our high school graduation day or sixteenth birthday. Semantic
memory refers to our knowledge of facts and concepts about the world. For example, the absolutevalue of −90 is greater than the absolute value of 9 and one definition of the word “affect” is theexperience of feeling or emotion.
Explicit memory is assessed using measures in which the individual being tested must consciously
attempt to remember the information. A recall memory test is a measure of explicit memory thatinvolves bringing from memory information that has previously been remembered. We rely on ourrecall when we take an essay test, because the test requires us to generate previously rememberedinformation. Free recall is a measure of memory with no prompts or clues. Cued recall includes a
retrieval cue in the request for memory. Fill-in the blank questions use cued recall. A multiplechoice test is an example of a recognition memory test, a measure of explicit memory thatinvolves determining whether information has been seen or learned before.
145

Figure 5.8 Types of Memory

Your own experiences taking tests will probably lead you to agree with the scientific researchfinding that recall is more difficult than recognition. Recall, which is required on essay tests,
involves two steps: first generating an answer and then determining whether it seems to be thecorrect one. Recognition, which is required on multiple-choice tests, only involves determining
which item from a list seems most correct (Haist, Shimamura, & Squire, 1992). Although they
involve different processes, recall and recognition memory measures tend to be correlated.
Students who do better on a multiple-choice exam will also, by and large, do better on an essay
exam (Bridgeman & Morgan, 1996).
A third way of measuring memory is known as relearning (Nelson, 1985). Measures of relearningassess how much more quickly information is processed or learned when it is studied again after it
has already been learned, but then forgotten. If you have taken some French courses in the past,
for instance, you might have forgotten most of the vocabulary you learned. However, if you were
to work on your French again, you would learn the vocabulary much faster the second time around.
Relearning can be a more sensitive measure of memory than either recall or recognition because it
allows assessing memory in terms of how much or how fast rather than simply correct versus
incorrect responses. Relearning also allows us to measure memory for procedures like driving a caror playing a piano piece, as well as memory for facts and figures.

Implicit/Nondeclarative Memory
While explicit memory consists of the things that we can consciously report that we know,
implicit/nondeclarative memory refers to knowledge that we cannot consciously access.
However, implicit memory is nevertheless exceedingly important to us because it has a direct
effect on our behavior. As you can see in Figure 5.8, there are three general types of implicit
memory: Procedural memory, classical conditioning effects, and priming.
Procedural memory refers to our knowledge of how to do things. When we walk from one place
to another, speak to another person in English, dial a cell phone, or play a video game, we areusing procedural memory. Procedural memory allows us to perform complex tasks, even though
we may not be able to explain to others how we do them. There is no way to tell someone how to146ride a bicycle; a person has to learn by doing it. The idea of implicit memory helps explain how
infants are able to learn. The ability to crawl, walk, and talk are procedures, and these skills areeasily and efficiently developed while we are children despite the fact that as adults we have noconscious memory of having learned them.
A second type of implicit memory involves the effects of classical conditioning, in which we learn,
without effort or awareness, to associate a neutral stimulus with another stimulus that creates anaturally occurring response. The memory for the association is demonstrated when the conditioned
stimulus begins to create the same response as the unconditioned stimulus did before the learning.
For example, you may learn to associate the sounds in a restaturant (CS) with food (US), thatnaturally results in enjoyment (UR). When you enter a restaurant and hear the sounds (CS), thesame response of enjoyment (CR) is experienced.
The final type of implicit memory is known as priming, or changes in behavior as a result ofexperiences that have happened frequently or recently. Priming refers both to the activation ofknowledge and to the influence of that activation on behavior. For example, we can prime theconcept of “kindness” by presenting people with words related to kindness. We can then assess if
people who are primed, actually act more kindly.
Our everyday behaviors are influenced by priming in a wide variety of situations. Seeing the flag ofour home country may arouse our patriotism, and seeing a rival school may arouse our competitive
spirit. Moreover, these influences on our behaviors may occur without our being aware of them.

The Structure of Long-Term Memory: Categories, Prototypes, and Schemas
Memories that are stored in LTM are not isolated but rather are linked together into categories or
networks of associated memories that have features in common with each other. Forming
categories, and using categories to guide behavior, is a fundamental part of human nature.
Organization within the categories improves memory. Associated concepts within a category areconnected through spreading activation, which occurs when activating one element of a category
activates other associated elements. When people have lerned lists of words that come fromdifferent categories, they do not recall the words haphazardly. If they have just remembered theword “wrench,” from a list, they are more likely to remember the word “screwdriver” than toremember the word “rose,” because the words are organized in memory by category (Srull &Wyer, 1989).
Some categories have defining features that must be true of all members of the category. For
instance, all members of the category triangles have three sides, and all members of the category
birds lay eggs. However, most categories are not so well-defined; the members of the category
share some common features, but it is impossible to define which are or are not members of thecategory. For instance, there is no clear definition of the category tool. Some examples of thecategory, such as a hammer and a wrench, are clearly and easily identified as category members,
whereas other members are not so obvious. Is an ironing board a tool? What about a car?

147

Figure 5.9 Prototype

Members of categories, even those with defining features,
can be compared to the category prototype, which is themember of the category that is most average or typical of
the category. Some category members are more
prototypical of, or similar to, the category than others. For
instance, some category members, such as Siamese, arehighly prototypical of the category cat, whereas othercategory members, such as lions, are less prototypical.
We retrieve information that is prototypical of a category
faster than we retrieve information that is lessprototypical (Rosch, 1975).

Category members vary in terms of their
prototypicality. Some cats are “better”
members of the category than are others.

Mental categories are sometimes referred to as schemas,
or frameworks of knowledge in long-term memory that
help us organize information. We have schemas about© Thinkstock
objects, people, events, and social groups. Schemas areimportant because they help us remember new information by providing an organizational structure
for it.
Figure 5.10 Different Schemas

Our schema about people, couples, and events help us organize and remember information. © Thinkstock

Read the following paragraph (Bransford & Johnson, 1972) and then try to write down everything
you can remember.
The procedure is actually quite simple. First you arrange things into different groups. Of
course, one pile may be sufficient depending on how much there is to do. If you have to go
somewhere else due to lack of facilities, that is the next step; otherwise you are pretty wellset. It is important not to overdo things. That is, it is better to do too few things at once
than too many. In the short run this may not seem important, but complications can easilyarise. A mistake can be expensive as well. At first the whole procedure will seemcomplicated. Soon, however, it will become just another facet of life. It is difficult toforesee any end to the necessity for this task in the immediate future, but then one never
can tell. After the procedure is completed, one arranges the materials into different groups
again. Then they can be put into their appropriate places. Eventually they will be used once
more and the whole cycle will then have to be repeated. However, that is part of life.
148

It turns out that people’s memory for this information is quite poor. However, if they have been
told ahead of time that the information describes doing the laundry, their memory for the material
is much better. This demonstration of the role of schemas in memory shows how our existingknowledge can help us organize new information, and how this organization can improve
encoding, storage, and retrieval. Unfortunately, categories, prototypes, and schemas can also leadto memory distortions. For example, each of us has a prototype for colors. When judging the“blueness” of a color we compare it to the color that comes to mind when we think of the color blue.
Sometimes what we later recall is not the exact shade of blue, such as a blue car speeding awayfrom the scene of an accident, but our prototype color blue. Thus, what we recall is often a productof whatever categories, prototypes, or schemas were activated during the creation of the memory,rather than exactly what happened.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Memory refers to the ability to store and retrieve information over time.
For some things our memory is very good, but our active cognitive processing of
information assures that memory is never an exact replica of what we haveexperienced.
We use three processes to control the movement of information in memory:
Encoding, storage, and retrieval.
Information processing begins in sensory memory, moves to short-term memory, andeventually moves to long-term memory.
Maintenance rehearsal and chunking are used to keep information in short-term memory.
The capacity of long-term memory is large, and there is no known limit to what
we can remember.
Long-term memory organizes information using categories, prototypes, andschemas. This can both improve memory and lead to distortions.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. List some situations in which sensory memory is useful for you. What do you think yourexperience of the stimuli would be like if you had no sensory memory?
2. Describe a situation in which you need to use working memory to perform a task or solve a
problem. How do your working memory skills help you?
3. Try the following interactive activities to test digit span memory, chunking, and your memory forfaces:
a. http://www.youramazingbrain.org.uk/yourmemory/digitspan.htm
b. http://www.youramazingbrain.org.uk/yourmemory/chunk01.htm
c. http://www.bbc.co.uk/science/humanbody/sleep/tmt/

149

Retrieval
Learning Objectives
1. Define memory retrieval.
2. Describe how the context, bodily states or mood can influence memory retrieval.
3. Describe the serial position curve and the role of rehearsal and decay theory.
4. Distinguish between proactive and retroactive interference.
5. Define the tip-of-the-tongue phenomenon.
Even when information has been adequately encoded and stored, it does not do us any good without
retrieval, which is getting information out of long term memory. We have all experienced retrieval
failure for information we know we have encoded. How does this happen?
The main reason for retrieval failure is that the information was not adequately encoded to begin
with, which is known as an encoding failure. Remember the penny example earlier in thechapter? If you had difficulty identifying the correct image, it was because you had notadequately encoded the details to your long-term memory.
Decay theory is an older memory theory proposed to explain the loss of information, that has notbeen used over time, from long-term memory. However, most current research does not support theconcept of decay as a reason for the loss of information in long term memory. Instead, theprevailing belief is that, with the proper cues, memories can still be retrieved.
We are more likely to retrieve items from memory when conditions at retrieval are similar to theconditions under which we encoded them. Context-dependent learning refers to an increase in
retrieval when the external situation in which information is learned matches the situation inwhich it is remembered. Godden and Baddeley (1975) conducted a study to test this idea using
scuba divers. They asked the divers to learn a list of words either when they were on land or when
they were underwater. Then they tested the divers on their memory, either in the same or the
opposite situation. As you can see in Figure 5.11, the divers’ memory was better when they were
tested in the same context in which they had learned the words than when they were tested in theother context.
Context-dependent learning might also be important in improving your memory. For instance,
you might want to try to study for an exam in a situation that is similar to the one in which you
are going to take the exam. Whereas context-dependent learning refers to a match in the externalsituation between learning and remembering, state-dependent learning refers to superior
retrieval of memories when the individual is in the same physiological or psychological state as
during encoding.

150

Research has found, for instance, thatanimals that learn a maze while under the
influence of one drug tend to remember
their learning better when they are tested
under the influence of the same drug thanwhen they are tested without the drug
(Jackson, Koek, & Colpaert, 1992).
Research with humans finds thatbilinguals remember better when tested in
the same language in which they learned
the material (Marian & Kaushanskaya,2007). Mood states may also produce
Godden and Baddeley (1975) tested the memory of scubastate-dependent learning. People whodivers to learn and retrieve information in different
learn information when they are in a bad,contexts and found strong evidence for contextrather than a good, mood find it easier todependent learning.
Source: Adapted from Godden, D. R., & Baddeley, A. D. (1975). Context-dependent memory inrecall these memories when they are tested
two natural environments: On land and underwater. British Journal of Psychology, 66(3), 325–
331.
in the same mood. It is easier to recall
unpleasant memories than pleasant ones
when we are sad, and easier to recall pleasant memories than unpleasant ones when we are happy(Bower, 1981; Eich, 2008).
Figure 5.11 Context Dependent Memory

Variations in the ability to retrieve
Figure 5.12 The Serial Position Curve
information are also seen in theserial position curve. When we give
people a list of words one at a time,
and then ask them to recall them,
the results look something like thosein Figure 5.12. These results form
the Serial Position Curve as people
are able to retrieve more words
presented to them at the beginningand end of the list than words
presented in the middle of the list.
This pattern is caused by two
retrieval phenomena: The primacy
effect refers to a tendency to better
remember stimuli that are presented early in a list. The recency effect refers to the tendency tobetter remember stimuli that are presented later in a list.
While there are a number of explanations for primacy and recency effects, one of them is the effects
of rehearsal on short-term and long-term memory (Baddeley, Eysenck, & Anderson, 2009).
Because we can keep the last words that we learned in the presented list in short-term memory byrehearsing them before the memory test begins, they are relatively easily remembered. So, therecency effect can be explained in terms of maintenance rehearsal in short-term memory. The
primacy effect may also be due to rehearsal because we hear the first word in the list we start torehearse it, making it more likely that it will be moved from short- term to long-term memory.
151

The same is true for the other words that come early in the list. However, for the words in the
middle of the list, this rehearsal becomes much harder, making them less likely to be moved to
LTM.
According to interference theory, our existing memories can influence our new learning. Thismay occur either in a backward way or a forward way. Retroactive interference occurs whenlearning something new impairs our ability to retrieve information that was learned earlier. For
example, when you start a new semester and learn the names of your new teacher and classmates,
you may have difficulty remembering the names of previous teachers and classmates. In this casethe new memories work backward, or retroactively, to influence retrieval from memory that isalready in place.
In proactive interference occurs when earlier learning impairs our ability to encode informationthat we try to learn later. For example, have you ever written the previous year down when writing
the date? For many people this type of proactive interference occurs in the first few days of a newyear. An old memory, such as the prior year, is moving forward in time and putting itself in theplace of a new memory. Proactive interference is common in everyday verbal mistakes. For
example, many parents find themselves calling a younger child by an older child's name, or
someone may call their new boyfriend or girlfriend by a previous partner's name.
A partial retrieval failure can be explained by the frustrating tip-of-the- tongue phenomenon, in
which we are certain that we know something that we are trying to recall, but cannot quite comeup with it. The tip-of-the-tongue phenomen occurs more frequently as one ages, typically due tointerference among many similar memories.

Key Takeaways•

There are several factors that can influence the retrieval of information from memory:
Encoding failure, absence of retrival cues, the context, our physiological state or mood,the order of presentation and our ability to rehearse the information, and competing
information in memory.

The Biology of Memory
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Describe long-term potentiation (LTP) and the role of neurotransmitters.
Describe the brain regions involved in memory.
Define amnesia and distinguish between anterograde and retrograde amnesia.
Describe the effect of drugs on memory.

Just as information is stored on digital media, such as DVDs and flash drives, the information inlong term memory must be stored in the brain. The ability to maintain information in long term
memory involves a gradual strengthening of the connections among the neurons in the brain. Whenpathways in these neural networks are frequently and repeatedly fired, the synapses become more152

efficient in communicating with each other, and these changes create memory. This process,known as long-term potentiation (LTP), refers to the strengthening of the synaptic connections
between neurons as result of frequent stimulation (Lynch, 2002). Drugs that block LTP reduce
learning, whereas drugs that enhance LTP increase learning (Lynch et al., 1991). Because the newpatterns of activation in the synapses take time to develop, LTP happens gradually. The period oftime in which LTP occurs and in which memories are stored is known as consolidation.

The Role of Neurotransmitters in LTPLong-term potentiation occurs as a result of changes in the synapses, which suggests thatchemicals, particularly neurotransmitters and hormones, must be involved in memory. There isquite a bit of evidence that this is true. Glutamate, a neurotransmitter and a form of the amino acidglutamic acid, is perhaps the most important neurotransmitter in memory (McEntee & Crook,1993). When animals, including people, are under stress, more glutamate is secreted, and thisglutamate can help them remember (McGaugh, 2003). The neurotransmitter serotonin is also
secreted when animals learn, and epinephrine may also increase memory, particularly for stressful
events (Maki & Resnick, 2000; Sherwin, 1998).

Location of Memory
Memory is not confined to the cortex; it
occurs through sophisticated interactions
between new and old brain structures (seeFigure 5.13). One of the most important brain
regions in explicit memory is the
hippocampus, which serves as a preprocessor
and elaborator of information (Squire, 1992).
The hippocampus helps us encode
information about spatial relationships, thecontext in which events were experienced,
and the associations among memories(Eichenbaum, 1999). The hippocampus also
serves as a switching point that holds thememory for a short time. It then directs theinformation to other parts of the brain, such as
the cortex, to actually do the rehearsing,elaboration, and long-term storage (Jonides,
Lacey, & Nee, 2005).

Figure 5.13 Schematic Image of Brain with
Hippocampus, Amygdala, and Cerebellum
Highlighted

Without the hippocampus, our explicit
memories would be inefficient anddisorganized. While the hippocampus ishandling explicit memory, the cerebellum
and the amygdala are concentrating on implicit and emotional memories, respectively. Researchshows that the cerebellum is more active when we are learning associations and in priming task.
Animals and humans with damage to the cerebellum have more difficulty in classical conditioning
studies (Krupa, Thompson, & Thompson, 1993; Woodruff-Pak, Goldenberg, Downey-Lamb,
153

Boyko, & Lemieux, 2000). The storage of many of our most important emotional memories, andparticularly those related to fear, is initiated and controlled by the amygdala (Sigurdsson, Doyère,Cain, & LeDoux, 2007).
Evidence for the role of different brain structures in different types of memories comes in partfrom case studies of patients who suffer from amnesia, a memory disorder that involves theinability to remember information. As with memory interference effects, amnesia can work ineither a forward or a backward direction, affecting retrieval or encoding. For people who suffer
damage to the brain, for instance, as a result of a stroke or other trauma, the amnesia may work
backward. The outcome is retrograde amnesia, a memory disorder that produces an inability toretrieve events that occurred before a given time. Because LTP takes time through the process of
consolidation, retrograde amnesia is usually more severe for memories that occurred just prior to
the trauma than for older memories. In fact, events that occurred just before the trauam that caused
the memory loss, may never be recovered because they were not fully encoded.
Organisms with damage to the hippocampus develop a type of amnesia that works in a forward
direction to affect encoding, known as anterograde amnesia. Anterograde amnesia is the inability
to transfer information from short-term into long-term memory, making it impossible to form newmemories. One well-known case study was a man named Henry Gustav Molaison who had parts of
his hippocampus removed to reduce severe seizures (Corkin, Amaral, González, Johnson, &Hyman, 1997). Following the operation, Molaison developed virtually complete anterograde
amnesia. Although he could remember most of what had happened before the operation, andparticularly what had occurred early in his life, he could no longer create new memories. Molaison
was said to have read the same magazines over and over again without any awareness of having
seen them before.
Cases of anterograde amnesia also provide information about the brain structures involved indifferent types of memory (Bayley & Squire, 2005; Helmuth, 1999; Paller, 2004). Although
Molaison’s explicit memory was compromised because his hippocampus was damaged, his
implicit memory was not because his cerebellum was intact. He could learn to trace shapes in a
mirror, a task that requires procedural memory, but he never had any explicit recollection of having
performed this task or of the people who administered the test to him.
Although some brain structures are particularly important in memory, this does not mean that all
memories are stored in one place. The American psychologist Karl Lashley (1929) attempted todetermine where memories were stored in the brain by teaching rats how to run mazes, and thenlesioning different brain structures to see if they were still able to complete the maze. This idea
seemed straightforward, and Lashley expected to find that memory was stored in certain parts ofthe brain. Instead, he discovered that no matter where he removed brain tissue, the rats retained atleast some memory of the maze, leading him to conclude that memory is not located in a single
place in the brain, but rather is distributed around it.

Drugs and Memory
Most people are familiar with the negative effects some drugs, including alcohol, can have on ourmemories. However, our knowledge of the role of biology in memory suggests that it might also
be possible to use drugs to improve our memories. Americans spend several hundred million
dollars per year on memory supplements with the hope of doing just that. Yet controlled studies
154comparing memory enhancers, including Ritalin, ginkgo biloba, and amphetamines, with placebo
drugs find very little evidence for their effectiveness (Gold, Cahill, & Wenk, 2002; McDaniel,
Maier, & Einstein, 2002). This is not to say that we cannot someday create drugs that will
significantly improve our memory. It is likely that this will occur in the future, but the implicationsof these advances are as yet unknown (Farah et al., 2004; Turner & Sahakian, 2006).
Although the most obvious potential use of drugs is to attempt to improve memory, drugs mightalso be used to help us forget. This might be desirable in some cases, such as for those sufferingfrom posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) who are unable to forget disturbing memories.
Although there are no existing therapies that involve using drugs to help people forget, it ispossible that they will be available in the future (Wickelgren, 2012). These possibilities will raisesome important ethical issues: Is it ethical to erase memories, and if it is, is it desirable to do so?
Perhaps the experience of emotional pain is a part of being a human being, and the experience ofemotional pain may help us cope with the trauma.

Key Takeaways••••

Memories are stored in connected synapses through the process of long-term
potentiation (LTP). In addition to the cortex, other parts of the brain, including the
hippocampus, cerebellum, and the amygdala, are also important in memory.
Memory is influenced by chemicals including glutamate, serotonin, and epinephrine.
Damage to the brain may result in retrograde amnesia or anterograde amnesia. Casestudies of patients with amnesia can provide information about the brain structures
involved in different types of memory.
Studies comparing memory enhancers with placebo drugs find very little evidence for
their effectiveness.

Cues to Improving Memory
Learning Objectives
1. Differentiate between the success of massed practice and distributed practice.
2. Explain what is meant by a mnemonic.

Psychological research has produced a great deal of knowledge about long-term memory, and thisresearch can be useful as you try to learn and remember new material. Hermann Ebbinghaus(1850–1909) was a pioneer of the study of memory. In his research, in which he was the only
research participant, Ebbinghaus practiced memorizing lists of nonsense syllables, such as thefollowing: DIF, LAJ, LEQ, MUV, WYC, DAL, SEN, KEP, NUD
You can imagine that because the material that he was trying to learn was not at all meaningful, it
was not easy to do. Ebbinghaus plotted how many of the syllables he could remember against thetime that had elapsed since he had studied them. He discovered an important principle of memory:
Memory decays rapidly at first, but the amount of decay levels off with time (see Figure 5.14).

155

Figure 5.14 Ebbinghaus Forgetting Curve

Hermann Ebbinghaus found that memory for information
drops off rapidly at first but then levels off after time.

Although Ebbinghaus looked atforgetting after days had elapsed, thesame effect occurs on longer and shortertime scales. Bahrick (1984) found thatstudents who took a Spanish language
course forgot about one half of the
vocabulary that they had learned within
three years, but that after that time theirmemory remained pretty much constant.
Forgetting also drops off quickly on ashorter time frame. This suggests thatyou should try to review the material you
have already studied right before you
take an exam; you will be more likely toremember the material during the exam.

Ebbinghaus also discovered another important principle of learning, known as the spacing effect.
The spacing effect, also known as distributed practice, refers to improved learning when thesame amount of studying is spread out over periods of time, then when it occurs closer together,
known as massed practice. This means that you will learn more if you study a little bit every day
throughout the semester than if you wait to cram at the last minute (see Figure 5.15).

Figure 5.15 Effects of Massed Versus Distributed
Practice on Learning

Ebbinghaus also considered the role ofoverlearning; that is, continuing topractice and study even when we thinkthat we have mastered the material.
Ebbinghaus and other researchers havefound that overlearning helps encoding(Driskell, Willis, & Copper, 1992).
Students frequently think that they havealready mastered the material, but thendiscover when they get to the exam thatthey have not. Try to keep studying andreviewing, even if you think you alreadyknow all the material.

If you are having difficulty rememberinga particular piece of information, it neverhurts to try using a mnemonic or
memory aid. Many people use rhyming,for example, to remember the number ofdays in each month: "thirty days hath
September, April, June, and November." The "first-letter" technique uses the first letter of eachword in a list to form a new word. For example, HOMES can represent the five great lakes:
Huron, Ontario, Michigan, Erie, and Superior. These techniques are primarily used for simple
memorization such as lists and names. Table 5.1 lists some helpful techniques to improve memory.
The spacing effect refers to the fact that memory is better
when it is distributed rather than massed. Leslie, Lee Ann, andNora all studied for four hours total, but the students who
spread out their learning into smaller study sessions did betteron the exam.

156

Table 5.1 Helpful Memory Techniques Based on Psychological ResearchTechniqueDescription

Useful example

Use elaborative
encoding.

Material is better remembered if itis processed more fully.

Think about how new information relates to priorknowledge.

Make use of selfreference.

Material is better recalled if it islinked to thoughts about the self.

Connect new information about memory strategies
to your study habits.

Be aware of theforgetting curve.

Information that we have learned
drops off rapidly with time.

Review the material that you have already studied
right before the exam to increase the likelihood itwill remain in memory.

Make use of thespacing effectInformation is learned better when
it is studied in shorter periods
spaced over time.

Study a little bit every day; do not cram at thelast minute.

Rely onoverlearning.

We can continue to learn evenafter we think we know the
information perfectly.

Keep studying, even if you think you already haveit down.

Use contextdependent
retrieval.

We have better retrieval when it
occurs in the same situation inwhich we learned the material.

If possible, study under conditions similar tothe conditions in which you will take theexam.

Use statedependent
retrieval.

We have better retrieval when weare in the same psychological state
as we were when we learned thematerial.

Do not study under the influence of drugs or
alcohol because they will affect your retrieval.

Key Takeaways••

Hermann Ebbinghaus made important contributions to the study of memory, including
modeling the forgetting curve, the superiority of distributive practice over massed
practice, and the benefits of overlearning.
There are several methods that can be used to improve memory performance.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Plan a course of action to help you study for your next exam, incorporating as
many of the techniques mentioned in this section as possible. Try to implement
the plan.
2. In the film “Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind,” the characters undergo a medical
procedure designed to erase their memories of a painful romantic relationship. Would
you engage in such a procedure if it was safely offered to you?

157

Activities
1. Go to this website to try some memory games illustrating key concepts in this chapter.
The site was designed for kids, but it is fun for anyone.
http://faculty.washington.edu/chudler/chmemory.html
2. Review the genetic basis for cognition and disorders at this interactive website:
http://www.g2conline.org/

Cognition and Cognitive Biases
Learning Objectives
1. Define cognition.
2. Describe the role of cognitive biases in memory.
Imagine all of your thoughts as if they were physical entities, swirling rapidly inside your mind.
How is it possible that the brain is able to move from one thought to the next in an organized,orderly fashion? The brain is endlessly perceiving, processing, planning, organizing, andremembering; it is always active. Yet, you do not notice most of your brain’s activity as you
move throughout your daily routine. This is only one facet of the complex processes involved incognition. Simply put, cognition is thinking, and it encompasses the processes associated withperception, knowledge, problem solving, judgment, language, and memory. Scientists who study
cognition are searching for ways to understand how we integrate, organize, and utilize ourconscious cognitive experiences without being aware of all of the unconscious work that ourbrains are doing (Kahneman, 2011). Exceptionally complex, cognition is an essential feature ofhuman consciousness, yet not all aspects of cognition are consciously experienced.

Accuracy and Inaccuracy in Memory and Cognition
She Was Certain, but She Was Wrong: In 1984 Jennifer Thompson was a 22-year-old college
student in North Carolina. One night a man broke into her apartment, put a knife to her throat, andraped her. According to her own account, Ms. Thompson studied her rapist throughout theincident with great determination to memorize his face. She said:
I studied every single detail on the rapist’s face. I looked at his hairline; I looked for scars,
for tattoos, for anything that would help me identify him. When and if I survived.
Ms. Thompson went to the police that same day to create a sketch of her attacker, relying on what
she believed was her detailed memory. Several days later, the police constructed a photographic
lineup. Thompson identified Ronald Cotton as the rapist, and she later testified against him at trial.
She was positive it was him, with no doubt in her mind.
I was sure. I knew it. I had picked the right guy, and he was going to go to jail. If there
was the possibility of a death sentence, I wanted him to die. I wanted to flip the switch.
158

As positive as she was, it turned out that Jennifer Thompson was wrong. But it was not until after
Mr. Cotton had served 11 years in prison for a crime he did not commit that conclusive DNA
evidence indicated that Bobby Poole was the actual rapist, and Cotton was released from jail.
Jennifer Thompson’s memory had failed her, resulting in a substantial injustice. It took definitive
DNA testing to shake her confidence, but she now knows that despite her confidence in her
identification, it was wrong. Consumed by guilt, Thompson sought out Cotton when he wasreleased from prison, and they have since become friends (Innocence Project, n.d.; Thompson,
2000).
Jennifer Thompson is not the only person to have been fooled by her memory of events. Over the
past 10 years, almost 400 people have been released from prison when DNA evidence confirmedthat they could not have committed the crime for which they had been convicted, and in more than
three-quarters of these cases, the cause of the innocent people being falsely convicted waserroneous eyewitness testimony (Wells, Memon, & Penrod, 2006).
As we have seen, our memories are not perfect. They fail in part due to our inadequate encoding
and storage, and in part due to our inability to accurately retrieve stored information. Memory is
also influenced by the setting in which it occurs, by the events that occur to us after we haveexperienced an event, and by the cognitive processes that we use to help us remember. Although
our cognition allows us to attend to, rehearse, and organize information, cognition may also lead to
distortions and errors in our judgments and our behaviors.
In this section we consider some of the cognitive biases that are known to influence humans.
Cognitive biases are errors in memory or judgment that are caused by the inappropriate use ofcognitive processes (see Table 5.2). The study of cognitive biases is important both because it
relates to the important psychological theme of accuracy versus inaccuracy in perception, andbecause being aware of the types of errors that we may make can help us avoid them and therefore
improve our decision-making skills.

Overconfidence
One of the most remarkable aspects of Jennifer Thompson’s mistaken identity of Ronald Cotton
was her certainty. But research reveals a pervasive cognitive bias toward overconfidence, which is
the tendency for people to be too certain about their ability to accurately remember events and to
make judgments. Eichenbaum (1999) and Dunning, Griffin, Milojkovic, and Ross (1990) asked
college students to predict how another student would react in various situations. Someparticipants made predictions about a fellow student whom they had just met and interviewed, andothers made predictions about their roommates whom they knew very well. In both cases,
participants reported their confidence in each prediction, and accuracy was determined by the
responses of the people themselves. The results were clear: Regardless of whether they judged astranger or a roommate, the participants consistently overestimated the accuracy of their own
predictions.

159

Table 5.2 Cognitive Processes That Pose Threats to Accuracy
Cognitive process

Description

Potential threat to accuracy

Overconfidence

When we are more certain that ourmemories and judgments are accurate
than we should be

Eyewitnesses may be very confident thatthey have accurately identified a suspect,even though their memories are incorrect.

Source monitoring

The ability to accurately identify thesource of a memory

Uncertainty about the source of amemory may lead to mistaken
judgments.

Misinformation
effectErrors in memory that occur when new,
but incorrect information influences
existing accurate memories

Eyewitnesses, based on the questions asked
by the police, may change their memoriesof what they observed at the crime scene.

Confirmation bias

The tendency to verify and confirm ourexisting memories rather than tochallenge and disconfirm themOnce beliefs become established, they
become self-perpetuating and difficult tochange.

Functional fixedness

When schemas prevent us from seeing
and using information in new andnontraditional ways

Creativity may be impaired by the overuseof traditional, expectancy-based thinking.

Salience

When some stimuli, (e.g., those that arecolorful, moving, or unexpected) grab ourattention and make them more likely to beremembered

We may base our judgments on a single
salient event while we ignore hundreds ofother equally informative events that we
do not see.

Representativenessheuristic

Tendency to make judgments according to
how well the event matches our
expectations

After a coin has come up head many times
in a row, we may erroneously think that thenext flip is more likely to be tails. This is
known as the gambler’s fallacy.

Availability heuristic

Idea that things that come to mind easily
are seen as more common

We may overestimate the crime statistics
in our own area, because these crimes are
so easy to recall.

Eyewitnesses to crimes are also frequently overconfident in their memories, and there is only asmall correlation between how accurate and how confident an eyewitness is. The witness who
claims to be absolutely certain about his or her identification (e.g., Jennifer Thompson) is notmuch more likely to be accurate than one who appears much less sure, making it almost impossible
to determine whether a particular witness is accurate or not (Wells & Olson, 2003).
When we experience a situation with a great deal of emotion, we may form a flashbulb memory,which is a vivid and emotional memory of an unusual event that people believe they remember very
well (Brown & Kulik, 1977). People are very certain of their memories of these important events,
and are typically overconfident. Talarico and Rubin (2003) tested the accuracy of flashbulb
memories by asking students to write down their memory of how they had heard the news about160

either the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks or about an everyday event that had occurred tothem during the same time frame. These recordings were made on September 12, 2001. Then theparticipants were asked again, either 1, 6, or 32 weeks later, to recall their memories. The
participants became less accurate in their recollections of both the emotional event and theeveryday events over time, but the participants’ confidence in the accuracy of their memory oflearning about the attacks did not decline over time. After 32 weeks the participants were
overconfident; they were much more certain about the accuracy of their flashbulb memories thanthey should have been. Schmolck, Buffalo, and Squire (2000) found similar distortions in memoriesof news about the verdict in the O. J. Simpson trial.

Source Monitoring: Did It Really Happen?
One potential error in memory involves mistakes in differentiating the sources of information.
Source monitoring refers to the ability to accurately identify the source of a memory. Perhaps you
have had the experience of wondering whether you really experienced an event or only dreamed or
imagined it. If so, you would not be alone. Rassin, Merkelbach, and Spaan (2001) reported that up
to 25% of college students reported being confused about real versus dreamed events. Studies
suggest that people who are fantasy-prone are more likely to experience source monitoring errors(Winograd, Peluso, & Glover, 1998), and such errors also occur more often for both children andthe elderly, than for adolescents and younger adults (Jacoby & Rhodes, 2006).
In other cases we may be sure that we remembered the information from real life, but be uncertain
about exactly where we heard it. Imagine that you read a news story in a tabloid magazine such as
the National Enquirer. Probably you would have discounted the information because you knowthat its source is unreliable. What if later you were to remember the story, but forget the source of
the information? If this happens, you might become convinced that the news story is true because
you forgot to discount the source. The sleeper effect refers to attitude change that occurs overtime when we forget the source of information (Pratkanis, Greenwald, Leippe, & Baumgardner,1988).

Misinformation Effects
A particular problem for eyewitnesses, such as Jennifer Thompson, is that our memories are often
influenced by the things that occur to us after we have learned the information (Erdmann, Volbert,& Böhm, 2004; Loftus, 1979; Zaragoza, Belli, & Payment, 2007). This new information can distort
our original memories such that we are no longer sure what is the real information and what wasprovided later. The misinformation effect refers to errors in memory that occur when new
information influences existing memories.
In an experiment by Loftus and Palmer (1974), participants viewed a film of a traffic accident andthen, according to random assignment to experimental conditions, answered one of threequestions:161

Figure 5.16 Misinformation EffectParticipants viewed a film of a traffic accident and then answered a question about the accident. According torandom assignment, the verb in the question was filled by either “hit,” “smashed,” or “contacted” each other.
The wording of the question influenced the participants’ memory of the accident.
Source: Adapted from Loftus, E. F., & Palmer, J. C. (1974). Reconstruction of automobile destruction: An example of the interaction between language and memory. Journal of Verbal
Learning & Verbal Behavior, 13(5), 585–589.

As you can see in Figure 5.16, although all the participants saw the same accident, their estimatesof the cars’ speed varied by condition. Participants who had been asked about the cars
“smashing” each other estimated the highest average speed, and those who had been asked the“contacted” question estimated the lowest average speed.
In addition to distorting our memories for events that have actually occurred, misinformation may
lead us to falsely remember information that never occurred. Loftus and her colleagues asked
parents to provide them with descriptions of events that did, such as moving to a new house, anddid not, suc as being lost in a shopping mall, happen to their children. Then without telling thechildren which events were real or made-up, the researchers asked the children to imagine bothtypes of events. The children were instructed to think real hard about whether the events had
occurred (Ceci, Huffman, Smith, & Loftus, 1994). More than half of the children generated stories
regarding at least one of the made-up events, and they remained insistent that the events did in factoccur, even when told by the researcher that they could not possibly have occurred (Loftus &Pickrell, 1995). Even college students are susceptible to manipulations that make events that did
not actually occur seem as if they did (Mazzoni, Loftus, & Kirsch, 2001).
The ease with which memories can be created or implanted is particularly problematic when theevents to be recalled have important consequences. Some therapists argue that patients may
repress memories of traumatic events they experienced as children, such as childhood sexual
abuse, and then recover the events years later as the therapist leads them to recall the informationby using techniques, such as dream interpretation and hypnosis (Brown, Scheflin, & Hammond,
1998).
Other researchers argue that painful memories, such as sexual abuse, are usually very wellremembered, that few memories are actually repressed, and that even if they are it is virtually
impossible for patients to accurately retrieve them years later (McNally, Bryant, & Ehlers, 2003;
Pope, Poliakoff, Parker, Boynes, & Hudson, 2007). These researchers have argued that theprocedures used by the therapists to “retrieve” the memories are more likely to actually implant
false memories, leading the patients to erroneously recall events that did not actually occur.
Because hundreds of people have been accused, and even imprisoned, on the basis of claims about
recovered memory of child sexual abuse, the accuracy of these memories has important societal
162

implications. Many psychologists now believe that most of these claims of recovered memories are
due to implanted, rather than real, memories (Loftus & Ketcham, 1994).

Distortions Based on Expectations
We have seen that schemas help us remember information by organizing material into coherent
representations. However, although schemas can improve our memories, they may also lead tocognitive biases. Using schemas may lead us to falsely remember things that never happened to us
and to distort or misremember things that did. For one, schemas lead to the confirmation bias,
which is the tendency to verify and confirm our existing memories rather than to challenge anddisconfirm them. The confirmation bias occurs because once we have schemas, they influence how
we seek out and interpret new information. The confirmation bias leads us to remember
information that fits our schemas better than we remember information that disconfirms them
(Stangor & McMillan, 1992), a process that makes our stereotypes very difficult to change. We
also ask questions in ways that confirm our schemas (Trope & Thompson, 1997). If we think that aperson is an extrovert, we might ask her about ways that she likes to have fun, thereby making it
more likely that we will confirm our beliefs. In short, once we begin to believe in something, suchas a stereotype about a group of people, it becomes very difficult to later convince us that these
beliefs are not true; the beliefs become self-confirming.
Darley and Gross (1983) demonstrated how schemas about social class could influence memory.
In their research they gave participants a picture and some information about a fourth-grade girlnamed Hannah. To activate a schema about her social class, Hannah was pictured sitting in frontof a nice suburban house for one-half of the participants and pictured in front of an impoverishedhouse in an urban area for the other half. Then the participants watched a video that showed
Hannah taking an intelligence test. As the test went on, Hannah got some of the questions right andsome of them wrong, but the number of correct and incorrect answers was the same in bothconditions. Then the participants were asked to remember how many questions Hannah got rightand wrong. Demonstrating that stereotypes had influenced memory, the participants who thoughtthat Hannah had come from an upper-class background remembered that she had gotten morecorrect answers than those who thought she was from a lower-class background.
Schemas can not only distort our memory, but our reliance on schemas can also make it moredifficult for us to “think outside the box.” Wason (1960) asked college students to determine therule that was used to generate the numbers 2-4-6 by asking them to generate possible sequences
and then telling them if those numbers followed the rule. The first guess that students made wasusually “consecutive ascending even numbers,” and they then asked questions designed to confirm
their hypothesis: (“Does 102-104-106 fit?” “What about 404-406-408?”). Upon receiving
information that those guesses did fit the rule, the students stated that the rule was “consecutive
ascending even numbers.” But the students’ use of the confirmation bias led them to ask only
about instances that confirmed their hypothesis, and not about those that would disconfirm it. Theynever bothered to ask whether 1-2-3 or 3-11-200 would fit, and if they had they would havelearned that the rule was not “consecutive ascending even numbers,” but simply “any three
ascending numbers.” Again, you can see that once we have a schema, we continually retrieve that
schema from memory rather than other relevant ones, leading us to act in ways that tend to confirm
our beliefs.
163

Functional fixedness occurs when people’s schemas
prevent them from using an object in new andnontraditional ways. Duncker (1945) gave participants acandle, a box of thumbtacks, and a book of matches,
and asked them to attach the candle to the wall so that it
did not drip onto the table below (see Figure 5.17). Fewof the participants realized that the box could be tacked
to the wall and used as a platform to hold the candle.
The problem again is that our existing memories are
powerful, and they bias the way we think about new
information. Because the participants were fixated on
the box’s normal function of holding thumbtacks, they
could not see another use.

Figure 5.17 Functional Fixedness

In the candle-tack-box problem, functional
fixedness may lead us to see the box only as
a box and not as a potential candleholder

Salience and Cognitive Accessibility

Still another potential for bias in memory occurs
because we are more likely to attend to, and thus make use of and remember, some information
more than other information. For one, we tend to attend to and remember things that are highly
salient, meaning that they attract our attention. Things that are unique, colorful, bright, moving,
and unexpected are more salient (McArthur & Post, 1977; Taylor & Fiske, 1978). In one relevant
study, Loftus, Loftus, and Messo (1987) showed people images of a customer walking up to abank teller and pulling out either a pistol or a checkbook. By tracking eye movements, theresearchers determined that people were more likely to look at the gun than at the checkbook, andthat this reduced their ability to accurately identify the criminal in a lineup that was given later.
The salience of the gun drew people’s attention away from the face of the criminal.
The salience of the stimuli in our social worlds has a big influence on our judgment, and in somecases, may lead us to behave in ways that we might better not have. Imagine that you wanted tobuy a new car for yourself. You checked Consumer Reports online and found that, after reviewing
price, gas mileage, safety, and options, you decided to purchase a particular vehicle. That night you
go to a party, and a friend shows you her brand new car. You check it out, and it seems really cool.
You tell her that you were thinking of buying a different model, and she tells you that you are
crazy. She says she knows someone who had that car and it had a lot of problems, and she would
never buy one. Would you still buy that car, or would you switch your plans?
If you think about this question logically, the information that you just got from your friend is notreally all that important. You now know the opinion of one more person cannot change the overallrating of cars very much. On the other hand, the information your friend gives you is highly salient,whereas the statistical information from Consumer Reports is not as salient. Typically in cases suchas this, people frequently ignore the less salient, but more important information, such as thatcoming from Consumer Reports, in favor of the more salient, but less important, report from afriend.

Heuristic Processing: Availability and Representativeness
Another way that our information processing may be biased occurs when we use heuristics,
which are information-processing strategies that are useful in many cases but may lead to errors
164when misapplied. Let us consider two of the most frequently applied heuristics: The
representativeness heuristic and the availability heuristic.
In many cases we base our judgments on information that seems to represent, or match, what we
expect will happen, while ignoring other potentially more relevant statistical information, andwhen we do so, we are using the representativeness heuristic. Consider, for instance, the puzzle
presented in Table 5.3. Say that you went to a hospital, and you checked the records of the babiesthat were born today. Which pattern of births do you think you are most likely to find?
Table 5.3 The Representativeness Heuristic
List B

List A
6:31 a.m.

Girl

6:31 a.m.

Boy

8:15 a.m.

Girl

8:15 a.m.

Girl

9:42 a.m.

Girl

9:42 a.m.

Boy

1:13 p.m.

Girl

1:13 p.m.

Girl

3:39 p.m.

Boy

3:39 p.m.

Girl

5:12 p.m.

Boy

5:12 p.m.

Boy

7:42 p.m.

Boy

7:42 p.m.

Girl

11:44 p.m.

Boy

11:44 p.m.

Boy

Using therepresentativeness heuristic
may lead us to incorrectlybelieve that some patternsof observed events are
more likely to haveoccurred than others. In thiscase, list B seems more
random, and thus is judged
as more likely to haveoccurred, but statisticallyboth lists are equally likely.

Most people think that list B is more likely, probably because list B looks more random, and thus
matches or is representative of our ideas about randomness. However, statisticians know that any
pattern of four girls and four boys is mathematically equally likely. The problem is that we have aschema of what randomness should be like, which does not always match what is mathematicallythe case. Similarly, people who see a flipped coin come up heads five times in a row will
frequently predict, and perhaps even wager money, that tails will be next. This behavior is known
as the gambler’s fallacy. Mathematically, the gambler’s fallacy is an error: The likelihood of any
single coin flip being tails is always 50%, regardless of how many times it has come up heads inthe past.
Our judgments can also be influenced by how easy it is to retrieve a memory. The tendency tomake judgments of the frequency or likelihood that an event occurs on the basis of the ease withwhich it can be retrieved from memory is known as the availability heuristic (MacLeod &Campbell, 1992; Tversky & Kahneman, 1973). Imagine you were asked to indicate whether there
are more words in the English language that begin with the letter “R” or have the letter “R” as thethird letter. You would probably answer this question by trying to think of words that have each of
the characteristics, thinking of all the words you know that begin with “R” and all that have “R” in
the third position. Because it is much easier to retrieve words by their first letter than by their third,
we may incorrectly guess that there are more words that begin with “R,” even though there are infact more words that have “R” as the third letter. The availability heuristic may also operate on
episodic memory. We may think that our friends are nice people, because we see and remember
them primarily when they are around us being nice. The traffic might seem worse in our own
165neighborhood than we think it is in other places, in part because nearby traffic jams are more easily
retrieved than are traffic jams that occur somewhere else.

Psychology in Everyday Life: Cognitive Biases in the Real World
Perhaps you are thinking that the kinds of errors that we have been talking about do not seemthat important. After all, who really cares if we think there are more words that begin with theletter “R” than there actually are. These are not big problems in the overall scheme of things,
but it turns out that what seem to be relatively small cognitive biases on the surface can haveprofound consequences for people.
Why would so many people continue to purchase lottery tickets, buy risky investments in thestock market, or gamble their money in casinos when the likelihood of them ever winning is solow? One possibility is that they are victims of salience; they focus their attention on the salient
likelihood of a big win, forgetting that the base rate of the event occurring is very low. The
belief in astrology, which all scientific evidence suggests is not accurate, is probably driven inpart by the salience of the occasions when the predictions are correct. When a horoscopecomes true, which will sometimes happen by chance, the correct prediction is highly salient andmay allow people to maintain the overall false belief.
People may also take more care to prepare for unlikely events than for more likely ones,
because the unlikely ones are more salient. For instance, people may think that they are more
likely to die from a terrorist attack or a homicide than they are from diabetes, stroke, or
tuberculosis, but the odds are much greater of dying from the latter than the former. People are
frequently more afraid of flying than driving, although the likelihood of dying in a car crash ishundreds of times greater than dying in a plane crash. Because people do not accurately
calibrate their behaviors to match the true potential risks, sucha as they drink and drive or do notwear their seatbelts, the individual and societal level costs are often quite large (Slovic, 2000).
Salience and accessibility also color how we perceive our social worlds, which may have a big
influence on our behavior. For instance, people who watch a lot of violent television shows
also view the world as more dangerous (Doob & Macdonald, 1979), probably because
violence becomes more cognitively accessible for them. We also unfairly overestimate ourcontribution to joint projects (Ross & Sicoly, 1979), perhaps in part because our own
contributions are highly accessible, whereas the contributions of others are much less so.
Even people who should know better are subject to cognitive biases. Economists, stock traders,managers, lawyers, and even doctors make the same kinds of mistakes in their professional
activities that people make in their everyday lives (Gilovich, Griffin, & Kahneman, 2002). Just
like us, these people are victims of overconfidence, heuristics, and other biases. Furthermore,
every year thousands of individuals, such as Ronald Cotton, are charged with and often
convicted of crimes based largely on eyewitness evidence. When eyewitnesses testify incourtrooms regarding their memories of a crime, they often are completely sure that they are
identifying the right person, but the most common cause of innocent people being falsely
convicted is erroneous eyewitness testimony (Wells, Wright, & Bradfield, 1999). The many166

people who were convicted by mistaken eyewitnesses prior to the advent of forensic DNA andwho have now been exonerated by DNA tests have certainly paid for all-too-common memory
errors (Wells, Memon, & Penrod, 2006).
Although cognitive biases are common, they are not impossible to control, and psychologists
and other scientists are working to help people make better decisions. One possibility is toprovide people with better feedback about their judgments. Weather forecasters, for instance,
learn to be quite accurate in their judgments because they have clear feedback about theaccuracy of their predictions. Other research has found that accessibility biases can be reducedby leading people to consider multiple alternatives rather than focus only on the most obvious
ones, and particularly by leading people to think about opposite possible outcomes than theones they are expecting (Lilienfeld, Ammirtai, & Landfield, 2009). Forensic psychologists arealso working to reduce the incidence of false identification by helping police develop better
procedures for interviewing both suspects and eyewitnesses (Steblay, Dysart, Fulero, &Lindsay, 2001).

Key Takeaways••

A variety of cognitive biases may lead us to falsely remember things that never
happened to us and to distort or misremember things that did.
Cognitive biases can also influence the accuracy of our judgments.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Consider a time when you were uncertain if you really experienced an event or only
imagined it. What impact did this have on you, and how did you resolve it?
2. Consider again some of the cognitive schemas that you hold in your memory. How
do these knowledge structures bias your information processing and behavior, andhow might you prevent them from doing so?
3. Imagine that you were involved in a legal case in which an eyewitness claimed that hehad seen a person commit a crime. Based on your knowledge about memory andcognition, what techniques would you use to reduce the possibility that the eyewitness
was making a mistaken identification?

Videos
1. These video segments from Scientific American discuss some special topics related tomemory http://chedd-angier.com/frontiers/season14.html (Episode 2)167Problem-Solving Strategies
Learning Objective
1. Describe the different types of problem-solving.
When you are presented with a problem, whether it is a complex mathematical problem or abroken printer, how do you solve it? Before finding a solution to the problem, the problem mustfirst be clearly identified. After that, one of many problem solving strategies can be applied,
hopefully resulting in a solution.
A problem-solving strategy is a plan of action used to find a solution (OpenStax College, 2014).
Different strategies have different action plans associated with them. For example, a well-known
strategy is trial and error, which is continually trying different solutions until the problem issolved. The old adage, “If at first you don’t succeed, try, try again” describes trial and error. In
terms of your broken printer, you could try checking the ink levels, and if that does not work, you
could check to make sure the paper tray is not jammed, or maybe the printer is not actuallyconnected to your laptop. Although trial and error is not typically one of the most time-efficient
strategies, it is a commonly used one.
Another type of strategy is an algorithm. An algorithm is a problem-solving formula, such as amathematical equation, that provides you with step-by-step instructions used to achieve adesired outcome (Kahneman, 2011). You can think of an algorithm as a recipe with highly
detailed instructions that produce the same result every time they are performed. Algorithms areused frequently in our everyday lives, especially in computer science. When you run a search on
the Internet, search engines like Google use algorithms to decide which entries will appear firstin your list of results. Facebook also uses algorithms to decide which posts to display on yournewsfeed. Can you identify other situations in which algorithms are used?
As previously indicated, a heuristic is an information processing strategy. While an algorithm
must be followed exactly to produce a correct result, a heuristic is a general problem-solving
framework (Tversky & Kahneman, 1974). You can think of these as mental shortcuts that areused to solve problems. A “rule of thumb” is an example of a heuristic. Such a rule saves the
person time and energy when making a decision, but despite its time-saving characteristics, it is
not always the best method for making a rational decision.
Working backwards is a useful heuristic in which you begin solving the problem by focusing on
the end result. Consider this example: You live in Washington, D.C. and have been invited to a
wedding at 4 PM on Saturday in Philadelphia. Knowing that Interstate 95 tends to back up any dayof the week, you need to plan your route and time your departure accordingly. If you want to be at
the wedding service by 3:30 PM, and it takes 2.5 hours to get to Philadelphia without traffic, whattime should you leave your house? You use the working backwards heuristic to plan the events ofyour day, probably without even thinking about it.
168

Another useful heuristic is Sub-goaling, which is the practice of accomplishing a large goalor task by breaking it into a series of smaller steps. Students often use this common method tocomplete a large research project or long essay for school. For example, students typicallybrainstorm, develop a thesis or main topic, research the chosen topic, organize their information
into an outline, write a rough draft, revise and edit the rough draft, develop a final draft,organize the references list, and proofread their work before turning in the project. The large
task becomes less overwhelming when it is broken down into a series of small steps.

Chapter Summary
Memory and cognition are the two major interests of cognitive psychologists. The cognitive
perspective was influenced in large part by the development of the computer. The computer is themodel for information processing theory. Psychologists conceptualize memory in terms ofprocesses, stages, and types.
Memory is not like a video recording, but rather is a reconstructive process that is prone to error.
The three processes of memory include encoding, storage, and retrieval.
Sensory memory, including iconic and echoic memory, is a memory buffer that lasts only very
briefly and then, unless it is attended to and passed on for more processing, is forgotten.
Information that we turn our attention to may move into short-term memory (STM). STM islimited in both the length and the amount of information it can hold. Working memory is a set ofmemory procedures or operations that operates on the information in STM. Working memory’s
central executive directs the strategies used to keep information in STM, such as maintenancerehearsal, visualization, and chunking.
Long-term memory (LTM) is memory storage that can hold information for days, months, andyears. The information that we want to remember in LTM must be encoded and stored, and thenretrieved.
Explicit/declarative memory is assessed using measures in which the individual being tested must
consciously attempt to remember the information. Explicit memory includes semantic and episodic
memory. Explicit memory tests include free recall memory tests, cued recall memory tests,
recognition memory tests, and measures of relearning.
Implicit /nondeclarative memory refers to the influence of experience on behavior, even if theindividual is not aware of those influences. Implicit memory is made up of procedural memory,classical conditioning effects, and priming. An important characteristic of implicit memories is thatthey are frequently formed and used automatically, without much effort or awareness on our part.
Memories that are stored in LTM are not isolated, but rather are linked together into categories andschemas. Schemas are important because they help us encode and retrieve information by
providing an organizational structure for it. However, they can lead to biases.

169

The ability to maintain information in LTM involves a gradual strengthening of the connections
among the neurons in the brain, known as long-term potentiation (LTP). The hippocampus isimportant in explicit memory, the cerebellum is important in implicit memory, and the amygdala isimportant in emotional memory. A number of neurotransmitters are important in consolidation andmemory. Evidence for the role of different brain structures in different types of memories comes inpart from case studies of patients who suffer from amnesia.
Some strategies for improving LTM include making use of the forgetting curve, the spacing effectwhich finds that distributed practice is superior to massed practice, overlearning, and being aware ofcontext-dependent and state-dependent retrieval effects. Lists, names, and simple facts might belearned more easily by using mnemonics.
Cognitive biases are errors in memory or judgment that are caused by the inappropriate use ofcognitive processes. These biases are caused by the overuse of schemas, the reliance on salience,and the use of rule-of-thumb strategies known as heuristics. These biases include errors in source
monitoring, the confirmation bias, functional fixedness, the misinformation effect, andoverconfidence. These biases are one cause of inaccuracy in the reconstruction of memory.
Understanding the potential cognitive errors we frequently make can help us make better decisions
and engage in more appropriate behaviors.
Problem-solving involves several strategies, including algorithms, heuristics, trial-and-error andsubgoaling. Different problems will require different plans of action to reach a solution.

References
Atkinson, R. C., & Shiffrin, R. M. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and its control processes. In K. Spence(Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation (Vol. 2). Oxford, England: Academic Press.
Baddeley, A., Eysenck, M. W., & Anderson, M. C. (2009). Memory. New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Baddeley, A. D., Vallar, G., & Shallice, T. (1990). The development of the concept of working memory: Implications
and contributions of neuropsychology. In G. Vallar & T. Shallice (Eds.), Neuropsychological impairments of shortterm memory (pp. 54–73). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Bahrick, H. P. (1984). Semantic memory content in permastore: Fifty years of memory for Spanish learned in school.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 113(1), 1–29.
Bahrick, H. P. (2000). Long-term maintenance of knowledge. In E. Tulving & F. I. M. Craik (Eds.), The Oxford
handbook of memory (pp. 347–362). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
Bayley, P. J., & Squire, L. R. (2005). Failure to acquire new semantic knowledge in patients with large medial temporal
lobe lesions. Hippocampus, 15(2), 273–280
Bower, G. H. (1981). Mood and memory. American Psychologist, 36, 129–148

170

Bransford, J. D., & Johnson, M. K. (1972). Contextual prerequisites for understanding: Some investigations ofcomprehension and recall. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 11(6), 717–726.
Brown, R., & Kulik, J. (1977). Flashbulb memories. Cognition, 5, 73–98.
Brown, D., Scheflin, A. W., & Hammond, D. C. (1998). Memory, trauma treatment, and the law. New York, NY:
Norton.
Ceci, S. J., Huffman, M. L. C., Smith, E., & Loftus, E. F. (1994). Repeatedly thinking about a non-event: Source
misattributions among preschoolers. Consciousness and Cognition: An International Journal, 3(3–4), 388– 407.
Corkin, S., Amaral, D. G., González, R. G., Johnson, K. A., & Hyman, B. T. (1997). H. M.’s medial temporal lobe
lesion: Findings from magnetic resonance imaging. The Journal of Neuroscience, 17(10), 3964–3979.
Cowan, N., Lichty, W., & Grove, T. R. (1990). Properties of memory for unattended spoken syllables. Journal of
Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 16(2), 258–268.
Craik, F. I., & Lockhart, R. S. (1972). Levels of processing: A framework for memory research. Journal of Verbal
Learning & Verbal Behavior, 11(6), 671–684
Darley, J. M., & Gross, P. H. (1983). A hypothesis-confirming bias in labeling effects. Journal of Personality andSocial Psychology, 44, 20–33.
Doob, A. N., & Macdonald, G. E. (1979). Television viewing and fear of victimization: Is the relationship causal?
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 37(2), 170–179.
Driskell, J. E., Willis, R. P., & Copper, C. (1992). Effect of overlearning on retention. Journal of Applied Psychology,
77(5), 615–622.
Duncker, K. (1945). On problem-solving. Psychological Monographs, 58, 5.
Dunning, D., Griffin, D. W., Milojkovic, J. D., & Ross, L. (1990). The overconfidence effect in social prediction.
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 58(4), 568–581.
Eich, E. (2008). Mood and memory at 26: Revisiting the idea of mood mediation in drug-dependent and placedependent memory. In M. A. Gluck, J. R. Anderson, & S. M. Kosslyn (Eds.), Memory and mind: A festschrift for
Gordon H. Bower (pp. 247–260). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Eichenbaum, H. (1999). Conscious awareness, memory, and the hippocampus. Nature Neuroscience, 2(9), 775– 776.
Erdmann, K., Volbert, R., & Böhm, C. (2004). Children report suggested events even when interviewed in a nonsuggestive manner: What are its implications for credibility assessment? Applied Cognitive Psychology, 18(5), 589–611
Farah, M. J., Illes, J., Cook-Deegan, R., Gardner, H., Kandel, E., King, P.,…Wolpe, P. R. (2004). Neurocognitiveenhancement: What can we do and what should we do? Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 5(5), 421– 425
Gilovich, T., Griffin, D., & Kahneman, D. (2002). Heuristics and biases: The psychology of intuitive judgment. New
York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Godden, D. R., & Baddeley, A. D. (1975). Context-dependent memory in two natural environments: On land andunderwater. British Journal of Psychology, 66(3), 325–331.
Gold, P. E., Cahill, L., & Wenk, G. L. (2002). Ginkgo biloba: A cognitive enhancer? Psychological Science in the
Public Interest, 3(1), 2–11
Haist, F., Shimamura, A. P., & Squire, L. R. (1992). On the relationship between recall and recognition memory.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 18(4), 691–702.

171

Harris, J. L., & Qualls, C. D. (2000). The association of elaborative or maintenance rehearsal with age, reading
comprehension and verbal working memory performance. Aphasiology, 14(5–6), 515–526.
Helmuth, L. (1999). New role found for the hippocampus. Science, 285, 1339–1341
Innocence Project. (n.d.). Ronald Cotton. Retrieved from http://www.innocenceproject.org/Content/72.php;
Jackson, A., Koek, W., & Colpaert, F. (1992). NMDA antagonists make learning and recall state-dependent.
Behavioural Pharmacology, 3(4), 415.
Jacoby, L. L., & Rhodes, M. G. (2006). False remembering in the aged. Current Directions in Psychological Science,15(2), 49–53.
Jonides, J., Lacey, S. C., & Nee, D. E. (2005). Processes of working memory in mind and brain. Current Directions in
Psychological Science, 14(1), 2–5.
Kahneman, D. (2011). Thinking fast and slow. New York, NY: Farrar, Straus, & Giroux.
Keppel, G., & Underwood, B. J. (1962). Proactive inhibition in short-term retention of ingle items. Journal of Verbal
Learning and Verbal Behavior, 1, 153-161.
Kim Peek: Savant who was the inspiration for the film Rain Man. (2009, December 23). The Times. Retrieved fromhttp://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/comment/obituaries/article6965115.ece
Krupa, D. J., Thompson, J. K., & Thompson, R. F. (1993). Localization of a memory trace in the mammalian brain.
Science, 260(5110), 989–991
Lashley, K. S. (1929). The effects of cerebral lesions subsequent to the formation of the maze habit: Localization of thehabit. In Brain mechanisms and intelligence: A quantitative study of injuries to the brain (pp. 86–108). Chicago, IL:
University of Chicago Press.
Lilienfeld, S. O., Ammirati, R., & Landfield, K. (2009). Giving debiasing away: Can psychological research on
correcting cognitive errors promote human welfare? Perspectives on Psychological Science, 4(4), 390–398.
Loftus, E. F. (1979). The malleability of human memory. American Scientist, 67(3), 312–320
Loftus, E. F., & Ketcham, K. (1994). The myth of repressed memory: False memories and allegations of sexual abuse(1st ed.). New York, NY: St. Martin’s Press.
Loftus, E. F., Loftus, G. R., & Messo, J. (1987). Some facts about “weapon focus.” Law and Human Behavior, 11(1),55–62.
Loftus, E. F., & Palmer, J. C. (1974). Reconstruction of automobile destruction: An example of the interaction between
language and memory. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 13(5), 585–589.
Loftus, E. F., & Pickrell, J. E. (1995). The formation of false memories. Psychiatric Annals, 25(12), 720–725.
Luria, A. (2004). The mind of a mnemonist: A little book about a vast memory. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.
Lynch, G. (2002). Memory enhancement: The search for mechanism-based drugs. Nature Neuroscience, 5(Suppl.),1035–1038.
Lynch, G., Larson, J., Staubli, U., Ambros-Ingerson, J., Granger, R., Lister, R. G., Weingartner, H. J. (1991). Longterm potentiation and memory operations in cortical networks. In C. A. Wickliffe, M. Corballis, & G. White (Eds.),
Perspectives on cognitive neuroscience (pp. 110–131). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.

172

MacLeod, C., & Campbell, L. (1992). Memory accessibility and probability judgments: An experimental evaluation of
the availability heuristic. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 63(6), 890–902
Maki, P. M., & Resnick, S. M. (2000). Longitudinal effects of estrogen replacement therapy on PET cerebral bloodflow and cognition. Neurobiology of Aging, 21, 373–383
Marian, V. & Kaushanskaya, M. (2007). Language context guides memory content. Psychonomic Bulletin and Review,
14(5), 925–933.
Mazzoni, G. A. L., Loftus, E. F., & Kirsch, I. (2001). Changing beliefs about implausible autobiographical events: A
little plausibility goes a long way. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Applied, 7(1), 51–59.
McArthur, L. Z., & Post, D. L. (1977). Figural emphasis and person perception. Journal of Experimental Social
Psychology, 13(6), 520–535.
McDaniel, M. A., Maier, S. F., & Einstein, G. O. (2002). “Brain-specific” nutrients: A memory cure? Psychological
Science in the Public Interest, 3(1), 12–38.
McEntee, W., & Crook, T. (1993). Glutamate: Its role in learning, memory, and the aging brain.
Psychopharmacology, 111(4), 391–401.
McGaugh, J. L. (2003). Memory and emotion: The making of lasting memories. New York, NY: Columbia University
Press.
McNally, R. J., Bryant, R. A., & Ehlers, A. (2003). Does early psychological intervention promote recovery fromposttraumatic stress? Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 4(2), 45–79
Miller, G. A. (1956). The magical number seven, plus or minus two: Some limits on our capacity for processing
information. Psychological Review, 63(2), 81–97.
Nelson, T. O. (1985). Ebbinghaus’s contribution to the measurement of retention: Savings during relearning. Journal of
Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 11(3), 472–478.
Nickerson, R. S., & Adams, M. J. (1979). Long-term memory for a common object. Cognitive Psychology, 11(3), 287–
307.
OpenStax College, (2014). Psychology. OpenStax College. <http://cnx.org/content/col11629/latest/>.
Paller, K. A. (2004). Electrical signals of memory and of the awareness of remembering. Current Directions in
Psychological Science, 13(2), 49–55.
Peterson, L., & Peterson, M. J. (1959). Short-term retention of individual verbal items. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 58(3), 193–198.
Pope, H. G., Jr., Poliakoff, M. B., Parker, M. P., Boynes, M., & Hudson, J. I. (2007). Is dissociative amnesia a culturebound syndrome? Findings from a survey of historical literature. Psychological Medicine: A Journal of Research in
Psychiatry and the Allied Sciences, 37(2), 225–233.
Pratkanis, A. R., Greenwald, A. G., Leippe, M. R., & Baumgardner, M. H. (1988). In search of reliable persuasion
effects: III. The sleeper effect is dead: Long live the sleeper effect. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
54(2), 203–218.
Rassin, E., Merckelbach, H., & Spaan, V. (2001). When dreams become a royal road to confusion: Realistic dreams,
dissociation, and fantasy proneness. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 189(7), 478–481.

173

Rogers, T. B., Kuiper, N. A., & Kirker, W. S. (1977). Self-reference and the encoding of personal information. Journalof Personality & Social Psychology, 35(9), 677–688.
Rosch, E. (1975). Cognitive representations of semantic categories. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General,104(3), 192–233.
Ross, M., & Sicoly, F. (1979). Egocentric biases in availability and attribution. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 37(3), 322–336.
Schacter, D. L. (1996). Searching for memory: The brain, the mind, and the past (1st ed.). New York, NY: Basic
Books.
Schmolck, H., Buffalo, E. A., & Squire, L. R. (2000). Memory distortions develop over time: Recollections of the O. J.
Simpson trial verdict after 15 and 32 months. Psychological Science, 11(1), 39–45.
Sherwin, B. B. (1998). Estrogen and cognitive functioning in women. Proceedings of the Society for Experimental
Biological Medicine, 217, 17–22.
Sigurdsson, T., Doyère, V., Cain, C. K., & LeDoux, J. E. (2007). Long-term potentiation in the amygdala: A cellularmechanism of fear learning and memory. Neuropharmacology, 52(1), 215–227.
Slovic, P. (Ed.). (2000). The perception of risk. London, England: Earthscan Publications.
Solomon, M. (1995). Mozart: A life. New York, NY: Harper Perennial.
Sperling, G. (1960). The information available in brief visual presentation. Psychological Monographs, 74(11), 1–29.
Squire, L. R. (1992). Memory and the hippocampus: A synthesis from findings with rats, monkeys, and humans.
Psychological Review, 99(2), 195–231.
Srull, T., & Wyer, R. (1989). Person memory and judgment. Psychological Review, 96(1), 58–83.
Stangor, C., & McMillan, D. (1992). Memory for expectancy-congruent and expectancy-incongruent information: A
review of the social and social developmental literatures. Psychological Bulletin, 111(1), 42–61.
Steblay, N., Dysart, J., Fulero, S., & Lindsay, R. C. L. (2001). Eyewitness accuracy rates in sequential andsimultaneous lineup presentations: A meta-analytic comparison. Law and Human Behavior, 25(5), 459–473.
Symons, C. S., & Johnson, B. T. (1997). The self-reference effect in memory: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin,
121(3), 371–394.
Talarico, J. M., & Rubin, D. C. (2003). Confidence, not consistency, characterizes flashbulb memories. Psychological
Science, 14(5), 455–461.
Taylor, S. E., & Fiske, S. T. (1978). Salience, attention and attribution: Top of the head phenomena. Advances inExperimental Social Psychology, 11, 249–288.
Thompson, J. (2000, June 18). I was certain, but I was wrong. New York Times. Retrieved fromhttp://faculty.washington.edu/gloftus/Other_Information/Legal_Stuff/Articles/News_Articles/Thompson_NYT_6_1
8_2000.html
Trope, Y., & Thompson, E. (1997). Looking for truth in all the wrong places? Asymmetric search of individuating
information about stereotyped group members. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 73, 229–241.

174

Turner, D. C., & Sahakian, B. J. (2006). Analysis of the cognitive enhancing effects of modafinil in schizophrenia. In J.
L. Cummings (Ed.), Progress in neurotherapeutics and neuropsychopharmacology (pp. 133– 147). New York, NY:
Cambridge University Press.
Tversky, A., & Kahneman, D. (1973). Availability: A heuristic for judging frequency and probability. Cognitive
Psychology, 5, 207–232.
Unsworth, N., & Engle, R. W. (2007). On the division of short-term and working memory: An examination of simple
and complex span and their relation to higher order abilities. Psychological Bulletin, 133(6), 1038–1066.
Wang, Y., Liu, D., & Wang, Y. (2003). Discovering the capacity of human memory. Brain & Mind, 4(2), 189– 198.
Wason, P. (1960). On the failure to eliminate hypotheses in a conceptual task. The Quarterly Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 12(3), 129–140.
Wells, G. L., Memon, A., & Penrod, S. D. (2006). Eyewitness evidence: Improving its probative value. Psychological
Science in the Public Interest, 7(2), 45–75.
Wells, G. L., & Olson, E. A. (2003). Eyewitness testimony. Annual Review of Psychology, 277–295.
Wells, G. L., Wright, E. F., & Bradfield, A. L. (1999). Witnesses to crime: Social and cognitive factors governing thevalidity of people’s reports. In R. Roesch, S. D. Hart, & J. R. P. Ogloff (Eds.), Psychology and law: The state of thediscipline (pp. 53–87). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Wickelgren, I. (2012). Trying to forget. Scientific American Mind, 23, 33-45.
Winograd, E., Peluso, J. P., & Glover, T. A. (1998). Individual differences in susceptibility to memory illusions. Applied
Cognitive Psychology, 12(Spec. Issue), S5–S27.
Wisconsin Medical Society. (n.d.). Retrieved fromhttp://www.wisconsinmedicalsociety.org/_SAVANT/_PROFILES/kim_peek/_media/video/expedition/video.html;
Woodruff-Pak, D. S., Goldenberg, G., Downey-Lamb, M. M., Boyko, O. B., & Lemieux, S. K. (2000). Cerebellar
volume in humans related to magnitude of classical conditioning. Neuroreport: For Rapid Communication of
Neuroscience Research, 11(3), 609–615.
Zaragoza, M. S., Belli, R. F., & Payment, K. E. (2007). Misinformation effects and the suggestibility of eyewitness
memory. In M. Garry & H. Hayne (Eds.), Do justice and let the sky fall: Elizabeth Loftus and her contributions toscience, law, and academic freedom (pp. 35–63). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

175

Chapter 6 Intelligence and Language
Learning Objective
1. Define intelligence and language.

In this chapter, we consider how psychologists conceptualize and measure human intelligence,
the ability to think, learn from experience, solve problems, and adapt to new situations. We willconsider whether intelligence involves a single ability or many different abilities, how wemeasure intelligence, and what intelligence predicts. We will also consider how intelligence isrepresented in the brain, in terms of nature versus nurture, and the meaning of group differences
in intelligence.
Our vast intelligence also allows us to have language, a system of communication that uses
symbols in a regular way to create meaning. Language gives us the ability to communicate ourintelligence to others by talking, reading, and writing. As the psychologist Steven Pinker put it,
language is the the jewel in the crown of cognition (Pinker, 1994). Although other species
have at least some ability to communicate, none of them have language. In the last section of thischapter, we will consider the structure and development of language, as well as its vital
importance to human beings.

Defining and Measuring Intelligence
Learning Objectives
1. List the different types of intelligences psychologists study.
2. Summarize the characteristics of a scientifically valid intelligence test.
3. Outline the biological and environmental determinants of intelligence.

General (g) Versus Specific (s) Intelligences

Figure 6.1 Alfred Binet

In the early 1900s, the French psychologist Alfred Binet (1857–1911) and his colleague Theodore Simon (1872–1961) began
working on behalf of the French government to develop ameasure that would differentiate students who were expected tobe better learners from students who were expected to be slower
learners. The goal was to help teachers better educate these twogroups of students. Binet and Simon developed what mostpsychologists today regard as the first intelligence test, which
consisted of a wide variety of questions that included the ability
to name objects, define words, draw pictures, complete
sentences, compare items, and construct sentences.
Source176

Binet and Simon (Binet, Simon, & Town, 1915; Siegler, 1992) believed that the questions they
asked their students, even though they were on the surface dissimilar, all assessed the basic
abilities to understand, reason, and make judgments. It turned out that the correlations among
these different types of measures were in fact all positive; students who got one item correct
were more likely to also get other items correct, even though the questions themselves werevery different.
On the basis of these results, Charles Spearman (1863–1945) hypothesized that there must be asingle underlying construct that all items measure. He called the construct that the different abilities
and skills measured on intelligence tests have in common the general intelligence factor (g).
Many psychologists believe that there is a generalized intelligence factor, “g”, that relates toabstract thinking and includes the abilities to acquire knowledge, reason abstractly, adapt to novel
situations, and benefit from instruction and experience (Gottfredson, 1997; Sternberg, 2003).
According to “g”, people with higher general intelligence learn faster.
Soon after Binet and Simon introduced their test, the American psychologist Lewis Terman at
Stanford University (1877–1956) developed an American version of Binet’s test that became
known as the Stanford-Binet Intelligence Test. The Stanford-Binet Intelligence Test is a measureof general intelligence made up of a wide variety of tasks including vocabulary, memory for
pictures, naming of familiar objects, repeating sentences, and following commands.
In addition to “g”, there is also evidence for specific intelligence (s), or measures of specificskills in narrow domains. One empirical result in support of the idea of “s” comes from
intelligence tests themselves. Although the different types of questions do correlate with eachother, some items correlate more highly with each other than do other items such that they form
clusters or clumps of intelligences.

Crystalized versus Fluid Intelligence
One distinction in specific intelligences is between fluid intelligence, which refers to thecapacity to learn new ways of solving problems and performing activities quickly and abstractly,
and crystallized intelligence, which refers to the accumulated knowledge of the world we haveacquired throughout our lives (Salthouse, 2004). These intelligences must be different because
crystallized intelligence increases with age, while fluid intelligence tends to decrease with age(Horn, Donaldson, & Engstrom, 1981; Salthouse, 2004).
Research demonstrates that older adults have more crystallized intelligence, as reflected insemantic knowledge, vocabulary, and language. As a result, older adults generally outperform
younger people on measures of history, geography, and even on crossword puzzles, where thisinformation is useful (Salthouse, 2004). This superior knowledge, combined with a slower andmore complete processing style and sophisticated understanding of the workings of the world,
gives those older an advantage, despite greater fluid intelligence in those younger (Baltes,
Staudinger, & Lindenberger, 1999; Scheibe, Kunzmann, & Baltes, 2009). The differential changes
in crystallized versus fluid intelligence also explains why those older do not necessarily show
poorer performance on tasks that require experience, although they show poorer memory overall. A
young chess player may think more quickly, but a more experienced chess player has more
knowledge to draw on.
177

Triarchic Theory
Another advocate of specific intelligences, or multiple
intelligences, is the psychologist Robert Sternberg. Sternberg has
proposed a triarchic (three-part) theory of intelligence that
proposes that people may display more or less analyticalintelligence, creative intelligence, and practical intelligence.
Sternberg (1985, 2003) defined the three intelligences as:• Analytical intelligence or the ability to perform academic
problem solving• Creative intelligence or the ability to adapt to newsituations and create new ideas• Practical intelligence or the ability to demonstrate street
smarts and common sense

Figure 6.2
Test your divergent
thinking. How many uses
for a paper clip can you
think of? © Thinkstock

Analytical intelligence is measured on traditional intelligence tests and assessses finding thesingle correct answer to a problem. Research has found that creativity is not highly correlatedwith analytical intelligence (Furnham & Bachtiar, 2008) and exceptionally creative scientists,
artists, mathematicians, and engineers do not score higher on intelligence tests than do their lesscreative peers (Simonton, 2000). Furthermore, the brain areas that are associated with convergent
thinking, thinking that is directed toward finding the correct answer to a given problem, aredifferent from those associated with divergent thinking, the ability to generate many different
ideas for or solutions to a single problem (Tarasova, Volf, & Razoumnikova, 2010). On theother hand, being creative reflects basic abilities measured by “g”, including the abilities to learn
from experience, to remember information, and to think abstractly (Bink & Marsh, 2000).
Ericsson (1998), Weisberg (2006), Hennessey and Amabile (2010) and Simonton (1992) studied
creative people and identified at least five components that are likely to be important for
creativity as listed in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1 Important Components for Creativity
Component
Expertise
Imaginative Thinking
Risk Taking
Intrinsic Interest
Working in Creative
Environments

Description
Creative people have studied and know a lot about a topic
Creative people view problems in new and different ways
Creative people take on new, but potentially risky approaches
Creative people take on projects for interest not money
The most creative people are supported, aided, and challenged byother people working on similar projects

The last aspect of the triarchic model, practical intelligence, refers primarily to intelligence thatcannot be gained from books or formal learning. Practical intelligence represents a type of street
smarts or common sense that is learned from life experiences. Although a number of tests havebeen devised to measure practical intelligence (Sternberg, Wagner, & Okagaki, 1993; Wagner &Sternberg, 1985), research has not found much evidence that practical intelligence is distinct
from “g” or that it is predictive of success at any particular tasks (Gottfredson, 2003). Practicalintelligence may include, at least in part, certain abilities that help people perform well at specificjobs, and these abilities may not always be highly correlated with general intelligence (Sternberg
et al., 1993).
178

Theory of Multiple Intelligences
Figure 6.3© Thinkstock

Another champion of the idea of specific types of intelligences is thepsychologist Howard Gardner (1983, 1999) who developed a theoryof multiple intelligences. Gardner argued that it would be
evolutionarily functional for different people to have different talents
and skills, and proposed that there are eight intelligences that can bedifferentiated from each other. A potential ninth intelligence; thatis, existential still needs empirical support. See Table 6.2 for a listof Gardner’s eight specific intelligences. Gardner noted that someevidence for multiple intelligences comes from the abilities ofautistic savants, people who score low on intelligence tests overall,
but who nevertheless may have exceptional skills in a given
domain, such as math, music, art, or in being able to recite statistics
in a given sport (Treffert & Wallace, 2004).

Table 6.2 Howard Gardner’s Specific Intelligences
Intelligence

Description

Linguistic

The ability to speak and write well

Logicalmathematical

The ability to use logic and mathematical skills to solve problems

SpatialThe ability to think and reason about objects in three dimensions

MusicalThe ability to perform and enjoy music

Kinesthetic (body) The ability to move the body in sports, dance, or other physical activities
Interpersonal

The ability to understand and interact effectively with others

Intrapersonal

The ability to have insight into the self

Naturalistic

The ability to recognize, identify, and understand animals, plants, andother living things

Existential(Possible)

The ability to identify and ponder the fundamental questions of humanexistence

Source: Adapted from Gardner, H. (1999). Intelligence reframed: Multiple intelligences for the 21st century. New York, NY: Basic Books.

179

The idea of multiple intelligences has been
influential in the field of education,and teachers have used these ideas to try toteach differently to different students. For
instance, to teach math problems to students
who have particularly good kinesthetic
intelligence, a teacher might encourage thestudents to move their bodies or hands
according to the numbers. On the other
hand, some have argued that these
intelligences sometimes seem more likeabilities or talents rather than real
intelligence. There is no clear conclusion
about how many intelligences there are. Are
sense of humor, artistic skills, dramatic
Figure 6.4
skills, and so forth also separate
Although intelligence is often conceptualized in a general
intelligences? Further, demonstrating theway (as the “g” factor), there is a variety of specific skills
that can be useful for particular tasks. © Thinkstock
underlying power of a single intelligence,
the many different intelligences show somecorrelations with each other, and thus represent, in part, “g” (Brody, 2003).

Measuring Intelligence: Standardization and the Intelligence Quotient
The goal of most intelligence tests is to measure “g”, the general intelligence factor. Good
intelligence tests are reliable, meaning that they are consistent over time, and also demonstratevalidity, meaning that they actually measure intelligence rather than something else. Because
intelligence is such an important individual difference dimension, psychologists have invested
substantial effort in creating and improving measures of intelligence, and these tests are now
considered the most accurate of all psychological tests. In fact, the ability to accurately assess
intelligence is one of the most important contributions of psychology to everyday public life.
Intelligence changes with age. A 3-year-old who could accurately multiply 183 by 39 would
certainly be intelligent, but a 25-year-old who could not do so would be seen as unintelligent.
Thus, understanding intelligence requires that we know the norms or standards in a given
population of people at a given age. The standardization of a test involves giving it to a large
number of people at different ages and computing the average score on the test at each age level.
It is important that intelligence tests be standardized on a regular basis, because the overall levelof intelligence in a population may change over time. The Flynn effect refers to the observationthat scores on intelligence tests worldwide have increased substantially over the past decades(Flynn, 1999). Although the increase varies somewhat from country to country, the averageincrease is about 3 IQ points every 10 years. There are many explanations for the Flynn effect,
including better nutrition, increased access to information, and more familiarity with multiplechoice tests (Neisser, 1998), but whether people are actually getting smarter is debatable(Neisser, 1997).

180

Once the standardization has been accomplished, we have a picture of the average abilities ofpeople at different ages and can calculate a person’s mental age, which is the age at which aperson is performing intellectually. If we compare the mental age of a person to the person’s
chronological age, the result is the Intelligence Quotient (IQ), a measure of intelligence that is
adjusted for age. A simple way to calculate IQ is by using the following formula:
IQ = mental age ÷ chronological age × 100.
Thus a 10-year-old child who does as well as the average 10-year-old child has an IQ of 100 (10÷ 10 × 100), whereas an 8-year-old child who does as well as the average 10-year-old childwould have an IQ of 125 (10 ÷ 8 × 100). Most modern intelligence tests are based on the relative
position of a person’s score among people of the same age, rather than on the basis of thisformula, but the idea of an intelligence quotient provides a good description of the score’s
meaning.

Intelligence Scores and Life OutcomesIntelligence has been associated with educational, occupational, economic, and social outcomes.
Scores on intelligence tests predict academic and military performance, as well as success in awide variety of jobs (Ones, Viswesvaran, & Dilchert, 2005; Schmidt & Hunter, 1998).
Intelligence is positively correlated with health-related outcomes, including longevity(Gottfredson, 2004; Gottfredson & Deary, 2004). At least some of this latter relationship may
be due to more intelligent are better able to predict and avoid accidents and to understand andfollow instructions from doctors or on drug labels. Simonton (2006) also found that among U.S.
presidents, the ability to effectively lead was well predicted by ratings of the president’s
intelligence. Intelligence is also negatively correlated with criminal behaviors as the average IQ
of delinquent adolescents is about 7 points lower than that of other adolescents (Wilson &Herrnstein, 1985)
The advantages of having a higher IQ increase as life settings become more complex. The
correlation between IQ and job performance is higher in more mentally demanding occupations,such as physician or lawyer, than in less mentally demanding occupations, like clerk or
newspaper delivery person (Salgado et al., 2003). Although some specific personality traits,talents, and physical abilities are important for success in some jobs, intelligence predicts
performance across all types of jobs.

Wechsler Scales
A number of scales are based on the IQ. The Wechsler Adult lntelligence Scale (WAIS) is themost widely used intelligence test for adults (Watkins, Campbell, Nieberding, & Hallmark, 1995).
The current version of the WAIS, the WAIS-IV, was standardized on 2,200 people ranging from
16 to 90 years of age. It consists of 15 different tasks, each designed to assess intelligence,
including working memory, arithmetic ability, spatial ability, and general knowledge about theworld. The WAIS-IV yields scores on four domains: verbal, perceptual, working memory, andprocessing speed. The reliability of the test is high (more than 0.95), and it shows substantial
construct validity. The WAIS-IV is correlated highly with other IQ tests such as the StanfordBinet, as well as with criteria of academic and life success, including college grades, measures of181

work performance, and occupational level. It also shows significant correlations with measures ofeveryday functioning among people with intellectual disabilities.
The Wechsler scale has also been adapted for preschool children in the form of the Wechsler
Primary and Preschool Scale of Intelligence-Fourth Edition (WPPSI-IV) and for older children
and adolescents in the form of the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children-Fifth Edition (WISCV). Figure 6.5 illustrates items from the WAIS.

Figure 6.5 Sample Items from the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale (WAIS)
https://www.flickr.com/search/?q=wechsler+scale

Aptitude Tests
The intelligence tests that you may be most familiar with are aptitude tests, which are designed tomeasure one’s ability to perform a given task, for instance, to do well in college or in postgraduate
training. Most U.S. colleges and universities require students to take the Scholastic Assessment
Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACT), and postgraduate schools require the Graduate
Record Examination (GRE), Medical College Admissions Test (MCAT), or the Law School
Admission Test (LSAT). These tests are useful for selecting students because they predict successin the programs that they are designed for, particularly in the first year of the program (Kuncel,
Hezlett, & Ones, 2010). These aptitude tests also measure, in part, intelligence. Frey and
Detterman (2004) found that the SAT correlated highly (between about r = .7 and r = .8) withstandard measures of intelligence.

Brain Functioning and Intelligence
The brain processes underlying intelligence are not completely understood, but current research
has focused on four potential factors: brain size, sensory ability, speed and efficiency of neuraltransmission, and working memory capacity.
There is at least some truth to the idea that smarter people have bigger brains. Studies that havemeasured brain volume using neuroimaging techniques find that larger brain size is correlated withintelligence (McDaniel, 2005), and intelligence has also been found to be correlated with thenumber of neurons in the brain and with the thickness of the cortex (Haier, 2004; Shaw et al.,2006). It is important to remember that these correlational findings do not mean that having morebrain volume causes higher intelligence. It is possible that growing up in a stimulating182

environment that rewards thinking and learning may lead to greater brain growth (Garlick, 2003),
and it is also possible that a third variable, such as better nutrition, causes both brain volume andintelligence.
Another possibility is that the brains of more intelligent people operate more efficiently and fasterthan the brains of the less intelligent. Some evidence supporting this idea comes from data
showing that people who are more intelligent frequently show less brain activity (suggesting thatthey need to use less capacity) than those with lower intelligence when they work on a task
(Haier, Siegel, Tang, & Abel, 1992). Additionally, the brains of more intelligent people also seemto run faster than the brains of the less intelligent. Research has found that the speed with whichpeople can perform simple tasks, such as determining which of two lines is longer or pressing, as
quickly as possible, one of eight buttons that is lighter, is predictive of intelligence (Deary, Der, &Ford, 2001). Intelligence scores also correlate at about r = .5 with measures of working memory(Ackerman, Beier, & Boyle, 2005), and working memory is now used as a measure of intelligenceon many tests.
Although intelligence is not located in a
specific part of the brain, it is moreprevalent in some brain areas thanothers. Duncan et al. (2000)
administered a variety of intelligencetasks and observed the places in thecortex that were most active. Althoughdifferent tests created different patternsof activation, as you can see in Figure
6.6, these activated areas were primarily
in the outer parts of the cortex, the areaof the brain most involved in planning,
executive control, and short-term
memory.

Figure 6.6 Where Is Intelligence?

Emotional Intelligence
Although most psychologists have considered intelligence a cognitive ability, people also use
their emotions to help them solve problems and relate effectively to others.
Emotional intelligence refers to the ability to accurately identify, assess, and understandemotions, as well as to effectively control one’s own emotions (Feldman-Barrett & Salovey,
2002; Mayer, Salovey, & Caruso, 2000).
The idea of emotional intelligence is seen in Howard Gardner’s interpersonal intelligence, thecapacity to understand the emotions, intentions, motivations, and desires of other people, andintrapersonal intelligence, the capacity to understand oneself, including one’s emotions. Public
interest in, and research on, emotional intelligence became widely prevalent following the
publication of Daniel Goleman’s best-selling book, Emotional Intelligence: Why It Can Matter
More Than IQ (Goleman, 1998).
183

There are a variety of measures of emotional intelligence (Mayer, Salovey, & Caruso, 2008;
Petrides & Furnham, 2000). One problem with emotional intelligence tests is that they often do notshow a great deal of reliability or validity (Føllesdal & Hagtvet, 2009). Although it has been foundthat people with higher emotional intelligence are also healthier (Martins, Ramalho, & Morin,2010), findings are mixed about whether emotional intelligence predicts life success, for instance,
job performance (Harms & Credé, 2010). Furthermore, other researchers have questioned theconstruct validity of the measures, arguing that emotional intelligence really measures knowledge
about what emotions are, but not necessarily how to use those emotions (Brody, 2004). Othersargue that emotional intelligence is actually a personality trait, a part of “g”, or a skill that can beapplied in some specific academic and work situations (Landy, 2005).
Although measures of the ability to understand, experience, and manage emotions may not predict
effective behaviors, another important aspect of emotional intelligence is emotion regulation.
Emotion regulation refers to the ability to control and productively use one’s emotions. Research
has found that people who are better able to override their impulses to seek immediate
gratification and who are less impulsive also have higher cognitive and social intelligence. They
have better SAT scores, are rated by their friends as more socially adept, and cope with frustrationand stress better than those with less skill at emotion regulation (Ayduk et al., 2000; Eigsti et al.,2006; Mischel & Ayduk, 2004). Because emotional intelligence seems so important, many school
systems have designed programs to teach it to their students. However, the effectiveness of these
programs has not been rigorously tested, and we do not yet know whether emotional intelligencecan be taught, or if learning it would improve the quality of people’s lives (Mayer & Cobb, 2000).

Is Intelligence Nature or Nurture?
Intelligence has both genetic and environmental causes, and these have been systematicallystudied through a large number of twin and adoption studies (Neisser et al., 1996; Plomin, DeFries,
Craig, & McGuffin, 2003). These studies have found that between 40% and 80% of the variability
in IQ is due to genetics, meaning that overall genetics plays a bigger role than does environment increating IQ differences among individuals (Plomin & Spinath, 2004). The IQs of identical twinscorrelate very highly (r = .86), much higher than do the scores of fraternal twins who are lessgenetically similar (r = .60). And the correlations between the IQs of parents and their biologicalchildren (r = .42) is significantly greater than the correlation between parents and adopted children(r = .19). The role of genetics gets stronger as children get older. The intelligence of very young
children (less than 3 years old) does not predict adult intelligence, but by age 7 it does, and IQ
scores remain very stable in adulthood (Deary, Whiteman, Starr, Whalley, & Fox, 2004).
However, there is also evidence for the role of nurture, indicating that individuals are not born with
fixed, unchangeable levels of intelligence. Twins raised together in the same home have moresimilar IQs than do twins who are raised in different homes, and fraternal twins have more similar
IQs than do nontwin siblings, which is likely due to the fact that they are treated more similarly
than are nontwin siblings.
The fact that intelligence becomes more stable as we get older provides evidence that earlyenvironmental experiences matter more than later ones. Environmental factors also explain agreater proportion of the variance in intelligence for children from lower-income households thanthey do for children from upper-income households (Turkheimer, Haley, Waldron, D’Onofrio, &184

Gottesman, 2003). This is because most upper-income households tend to provide a safe,
nutritious, and supporting environment for children, whereas these factors are more variable inlower-income households.
Social and economic deprivation can adversely affect IQ. Children from households in poverty
have lower IQs than do children from households with more resources, even when other factors,
such as education, race, and parenting, are controlled (Brooks-Gunn & Duncan, 1997). Poverty
may lead to diets that are under-nourishing or lacking in appropriate vitamins, and poor children
may also be more likely to be exposed to toxins, such as lead in drinking water, dust, or paint chips(Bellinger & Needleman, 2003). These factors can slow brain development and reduce
intelligence.
If impoverished environments can harm intelligence, we might wonder whether enrichedenvironments can improve it. Government-funded after-school programs, such as Head Start, aredesigned to help children learn. Research has found that attending such programs may increase
intelligence for a short time, but these increases rarely last after the programs end (McLoyd,1998; Perkins & Grotzer, 1997). However, other studies suggest that Head Start and similar
programs may improve emotional intelligence and reduce the likelihood that children will drop outof school or be held back a grade (Reynolds, Temple, Robertson, & Mann 2001).
Intelligence is improved by education; the number of years a person has spent in school correlates
at about r = .6 with IQ (Ceci, 1991). In part, this correlation may be due to the fact that people
with higher IQ scores enjoy taking classes more than people with low IQ scores, and they are more
likely to stay in school, but education also has a causal effect on IQ.
Comparisons between children who are almost exactly the same age, but who just make or do notmake a deadline for entering school in a given school year, show that those who enter school ayear earlier have a higher IQ score than those who have to wait until the next year to begin school(Baltes & Reinert, 1969; Ceci & Williams, 1997). Children’s IQs tend to drop significantly during
summer vacations (Huttenlocher, Levine, & Vevea, 1998), a finding that suggests that a longer
school year, as is used in Europe and East Asia, is beneficial.
It is important to remember that the relative roles of nature and nurture can never be completely
separated. For instance, a child with a higher than average intelligence will be treated differently
than a child with a lower than average intelligence, and these differences in treatment will likely
amplify initial differences in intelligence. This means that modest genetic differences can be
multiplied into big differences over time.

185

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•
•

•

Intelligence is the ability to think, learn from experience, solve problems, and adapt
to new situations.
Psychologists believe that there is a construct that accounts for the overall
differences in intelligence among people, known as general intelligence “g”.
There is also evidence for specific intelligences “s”. These are measures of specificskills in narrow domains, including fluid and crystalized intelligence.
Other specific intelligences include the Triarchic Theory, that focuses on analytical,
creative and practical intelligence, and the Theory of Multiple Intelligences, which
identifies eight, possibly nine, intelligences.
Intelligence tests need to be reliable, valid, and regularly standardiazed due to the
Flynn effect.
The intelligence quotient (IQ) is a measure of intelligence that is adjusted for age. The
Wechsler scales and the Stanford-Binet are the most widely used intelligence tests.
Emotional intelligence refers to the ability to identify, assess, manage, and control
one’s emotions. People who are better able to regulate their behaviors and emotions
are also more successful in their personal and social encounters.
Brain volume, speed of neural transmission, and working memory capacity are related to
IQ.
Between 40% and 80% of the variability in IQ is due to genetics, meaning that
overall genetics plays a bigger role than does environment in creating IQ
differences among individuals.
Intelligence is improved by education and may be hindered by environmental
factors, such as poverty.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Consider your own IQ. Are you smarter than the average person? What specificintelligences do you think you excel in?
2. Did your parents try to improve your intelligence? Do you think their efforts weresuccessful?
3. Consider the meaning of the Flynn effect. Do you think people are really getting

smarter?
4. Give some examples of how emotional intelligence, or the lack of it, influences

your everyday life and the lives of other people you know.

186

Group Differences in Intelligence
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Explain IQ and how the bell curve distributes IQ scores in the general population.
Explain how individuals with very high and very low IQ scores are characterized.
Describe the biological and environmental explanations for sex and race differences in IQ.
Define stereotype threat and explain how it might influence scores on intelligence tests.

Extremes of Intelligence: Intellectual Disability and Giftedness
The results of studies assessing the measurement of intelligence show that IQ is distributed in the
population in the form of a bell curve, also known as a normal distribution, which is the patternof scores usually observed in a variable that clusters around its average. In a normal distribution,
the bulk of the scores fall toward the middle, with many fewer scores falling at the extremes. The
normal distribution of intelligence shows that on IQ tests, as well as on most other measures, themajority of people cluster around the average. As can be seen in Figure 6.7, the average IQ scoreis 100, and fewer scores are very high or very low. About 2% of people score above an IQ of 130,
which is often considered the threshold for giftedness. Because the standard deviation of an IQ
test is 15 points, this IQ score would be two standard deviations above the mean and infrequently
found in the population. About the same percentage score below an IQ of 70, which is twostandard deviations below the mean.
Although Figure 6.7 presents a single distribution, the actual IQ distribution varies by sex such thatthe distribution for men is more spread out than is the distribution for women. These sex
differences mean that about 20% more men than women fall in the extremes; that is very high orvery low ends of the distribution (Johnson, Carothers, & Deary, 2009).

Figure 6.7 Distribution of IQ Scores in the General Population

187

Extremely Low Intelligence
One end of the distribution of intelligence scores is defined by people with very low IQ. An
Intellectual Disability or Intellectual Developmental Disorder are terms used to identify thosepossessing low IQ and adaptive functioning. The severity of the disability is based on adaptivefunctioning, or how well the person handles everyday life tasks. About 1% of the United States
population, most of them males, fulfill the criteria for intellectual developmental disorder, butsome children who are given this diagnosis lose the classification as they get older and better learn
to function in society. A particular vulnerability of people with low IQ is that they may be taken
advantage of by others, and this is an important aspect of the definition of intellectual
developmental disorder (Greenspan, Loughlin, & Black, 2001).

Figure 6.8 Individuals with Down Syndrome© Thinkstock.

One cause of intellectual developmental
disorder is Down syndrome, achromosomal disorder caused by thepresence of all or part of an extra 21st
chromosome. The incidence of Down
syndrome is estimated at 1 per 800 to 1,000
births, although its prevalence rises sharply
in those born to older mothers. People
with Down syndrome typically exhibit a
distinctive pattern of physical features,
including a flat nose, upwardly slanted© Thinkstockeyes,
a protruding tongue, and a short neck(see Figure 6.8).

Societal attitudes toward individuals with intellectual disabilities have changed over the past
decades. We no longer use terms such as “retarded,” “moron,” “idiot,” or “imbecile” to describe
these people, although these were the official psychological terms used to describe degrees of what
was referred to as mental retardation in the past. Laws such as the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) have made it illegal to discriminate on the basis of mental and physical disability, and there
has been a trend to bring people with mental disabilities out of institutions and into our workplaces
and schools. Using the DSM-IV term, in 2002 the U.S. Supreme Court ruled that: the execution ofpeople with “mental retardation” is “cruel and unusual punishment,” thereby ending this practice(Atkins v. Virginia, 2002).

Extremely High Intelligence
Having extremely high IQ is clearly less of a problem than having extremely low IQ, but there may
also be challenges to being particularly smart. It is often assumed that schoolchildren who arelabeled as gifted may have adjustment problems that make it more difficult for them to create social
relationships. To study gifted children, in 1921 Terman and Oden (1959) selected about 1,500 highschool students who scored in the top 1% on IQ tests, meaning they had IQs of about 135 or higher.
Terman tracked them for more than seven decades, and found that these students were notunhealthy or poorly adjusted, but rather were above average in physical health and were taller andheavier than individuals in the general population. The students also had above average social
relationships. For example, they were less likely to divorce than the average person (Seagoe, 1975).
188

Figure 6.9

The popular stereotype of highly intelligent
people as physically uncoordinated and unpopular
is not true. © Thinkstock

Terman’s study also found that many of thesestudents went on to achieve high levels of
education and entered prestigious professions,
including medicine, law, and science. Of thesample, 7% earned doctoral degrees, 4% earned
medical degrees, and 6% earned law degrees.
These numbers are all considerably higher thanwhat would have been expected from a moregeneral population at the time. Another study ofyoung adolescents who had even higher IQs foundthat these students ended up attending graduate
school at a rate more than 50 times higher than thatin the general population (Lubinski & Benbow,
2006).

As you might expect based on our discussion of intelligence, children who are gifted have higherscores on general intelligence “g”, but there are also different types of giftedness. Some children
are particularly good at math or science, some at automobile repair or carpentry, some at music orart, some at sports or leadership, and so on. There is a lively debate among scholars about whether
it is appropriate or beneficial to label some children as gifted and talented in school and to provide
them with accelerated special classes and other programs that are not available to everyone.
Although doing so may help the gifted kids (Colangelo & Assouline, 2009), it also may isolatethem from their peers and make such provisions unavailable to those who are not classified as
gifted.

Sex Differences in Intelligence
Research demonstrates that men and women have almost identical intelligence as measured bystandard IQ and aptitude tests (Hyde, 2005). However, there is variability in intelligence, in that
more men than women have very high, as well as very low, intelligence. There are also observed
sex differences on some types of tasks. Women tend to do better than men on some verbal tasks,
including spelling, writing, and pronouncing words (Halpern et al., 2007; Nisbett et al., 2012), andthey have better emotional intelligence in the sense that they are better at detecting andrecognizing the emotions of others (McClure, 2000).
On average, men do better than women on tasks requiring spatial ability, such as the mental
rotation tasks shown in Figure 6.10 (Nisbett et al., 2012; Voyer, Voyer, & Bryden, 1995). Males
tend to do better than females on both geography and geometry tasks (Vogel, 1996). Historically,
males have earned higher scores on the math part of the Scholastic Assessment Test (SAT). Three
decades ago, boys with scores of 700 or above outnumbered girls by more than 10 to 1 (Benbow &Stanley, 1983). However, more females are now being exposed to higher level math courses, andrecent research indicates that the ratio of males to females earning scores above 700 are now 3 to 1
or 4 to 1 (Nisbett et al, 2012).

189

Although these differences are real, theaverage difference between men and women issmall compared to the average difference
within each sex. There are many women whoare better than the average man on spatial
tasks, and many men who score higher than
the average women in terms of emotional
intelligence. Sex differences in intelligence
allow us to make statements only about
average differences and do not say muchabout any individual person.

Figure 6.10 Mental Rotation Task

Differences between men and women may be
Sourcein part genetically determined, perhaps bydifferences in brain lateralization or byhormones (Kimura & Hampson, 1994; Voyer, Voyer, & Bryden, 1995), but nurture is also
important (Newcombe & Huttenlocker, 2006). As infants, boys and girls show no or few
differences in spatial or counting abilities, suggesting that the differences occur at least in part due
to socialization (Spelke, 2005). Consequently, a biopsychological explanation has been proposed
for explaining sex differences in intelligence. Exactly how hormones, brain structures, and theenvironment affect intelligence is not well understood (Nisbett et al, 2012).

Racial Differences in Intelligence
Although their bell curves overlap considerably, there are also differences in which members ofdifferent racial and ethnic groups cluster along the IQ line. The bell curves for some groups,
including those who are Jewish and East Asian, are centered somewhat higher than for Whites ingeneral (Lynn, 1996; Neisser et al., 1996). Other groups, including Blacks and Hispanics, haveaverages somewhat lower than those of Whites (Hunt & Carlson, 2007).
One explanation for race differences in IQ is that intelligence tests are biased against some groups
and in favor of others. Bias means that a test predicts outcomes, such as grades or occupational
success, better for one group than it does for another. If IQ is a better predictor of school grade
point average for Whites than it is for Asian Americans, then the test would be biased against
Asian Americans, even though the average IQ scores for Asians might be higher. However, Brody(1992) found that IQ tests do not seem to be racially biased because the observed correlations
between IQ tests and both academic and occupational achievement are about equal across races.
Another way that tests might be biased is if questions are framed such that they are easier for
people from one culture to understand than for people from other cultures. For example, even avery smart person will not do well on a test if he or she is not fluent in the language in which thetest is administered, or does not understand the meaning of the questions being asked. To counteract
bias, modern intelligence tests are designed to be culturally neutral, and group differences arefound even on tests that only ask about spatial intelligence. Although some researchers still areconcerned about the possibility that intelligence tests are culturally biased, it is probably not thecase that the tests are creating all of the observed group differences (Suzuki & Valencia, 1997).
Although there is no definitive answer to why IQ scores differ across racial and ethnic groups,
190most experts believe that environmental factors, and not genetic factors, are the reason (Nisbett etal., 2012). It is important to realize that, although IQ is partly heritable, this does not mean thatgroup differences are caused by genetics. Although some people are naturally taller than others, asheight is heritable, people who get plenty of nutritious food are taller than people who do not, andthis difference is clearly due to environment. This is a reminder that group differences may becreated by environmental variables but also able to be reduced through appropriate environmental
actions, such as educational and training programs.

Stereotype Threat
Although intelligence tests may not be culturally biased, the situation in which one takes a test
may be. An important environmental factor that may affect how individuals perform and achieve
is their expectations about their ability at a task. In some cases, these beliefs may be positive,
and they have the effect of making us feel more confident and thus better able to perform tasks.
For instance, research has found that because Asian students are aware of the cultural stereotype
that “Asians are good at math,” reminding them of this fact before they take a difficult math test
can improve their performance on the test (Walton & Cohen, 2003). On the other hand,sometimes these beliefs are negative, and they create negative self-fulfilling prophecies such that
we perform more poorly just because of our knowledge about the stereotypes.
In 1995 Steele and Aronson tested the hypothesis that the differences in performance on IQ tests
between Blacks and Whites might be due to the activation of negative stereotypes (Steele &Aronson, 1995). These negative stereotypes about their intelligence, might create a negative
expectation for black students that could interfere with their performance on intellectual tests
through fear of confirming that stereotype.
In support of this hypothesis, the experiments revealed that Black college students performed
worse, in comparison to their prior test scores, on standardized test questions when this task was
described to them as being diagnostic of their verbal ability, and thus when the stereotype wasrelevant. In contrast, their performance was not influenced when the same questions were
described as an exercise in problem solving. In another study, the researchers found that when
Black students were asked to indicate their race before they took a math test, again activating thestereotype, they performed more poorly than they had on prior exams, whereas White students
were not affected by first indicating their race.
Steele and Aronson argued that thinking about negative stereotypes that are relevant to a task that
one is performing creates stereotype threat, or performance decrements that are caused by theknowledge of cultural stereotypes. That is, they argued that the negative impact of race on
standardized tests may be caused, at least in part, by the performance situation itself. Because thethreat is considered, Black students may be negatively influenced by it.

191

Over 200 research studies havefound that stereotype threat
effects can help explain a wide
variety of performancedecrements among those who
are targeted by negative
stereotypes Nisbett et al.,2012). For instance, when amath task is described as
diagnostic of intelligence,
Latinos and Latinas perform
more poorly than do Whites(Gonzales, Blanton, &Williams, 2002). Similarly,
when stereotypes are activated,children with low
Sourcesocioeconomic status perform
more poorly in math than dothose with high socioeconomic status, and psychology students perform more poorly than donatural science students (Brown, Croizet, Bohner, Fournet, & Payne, 2003; Croizet & Claire,1998). Even groups who typically enjoy advantaged social status can be made to experiencestereotype threat. White men perform more poorly on a math test when they are told that theirperformance will be compared with that of Asian men (Aronson, Lustina, Good, Keough, & Steele,1999), and Whites perform more poorly than Blacks on a sport-related task when it is described tothem as measuring their natural athletic ability (Stone, 2002; Stone, Lynch, Sjomeling, & Darley,1999).
Figure 6.11 Do Stereotypes affect Test Performance?

Both cognitive and emotional factors have been found to affect stereotype threat (Schmader, Johns,& Forbes, 2008). On the cognitive side, individuals who are experiencing stereotype threat show
an increased vigilance toward the environment, as well as, increased attempts to suppress
stereotypic thoughts. Engaging in these behaviors takes cognitive capacity away from the task. On
the affective side, stereotype threat occurs when there is a discrepancy between our positive
concept of our own skills and abilities and the negative stereotypes that suggest poor performance.
These discrepancies create stress and anxiety, and these emotions make it harder to perform wellon the task.
Stereotype threat is not, however, absolute; we can get past it if we try. What is important is to
reduce the self-doubts that are activated when we consider the negative stereotypes.
Manipulations that affirm positive characteristics about the self or one’s social group are
successful at reducing stereotype threat (Marx & Roman, 2002; McIntyre, Paulson, & Lord,
2003). In fact, just knowing that stereotype threat exists and may influence our performancecan help alleviate its negative impact (Johns, Schmader, & Martens, 2005).

192

Psychology’s Shameful Past: Eugenics
The observed average differences in intelligence between groups has at times led to malicious
and misguided attempts to try to correct for them through discriminatory treatment of people
from different races, ethnicities, and nationalities (Lewontin, Rose, & Kamin, 1984). One of
the most egregious was the spread of eugenics, the proposal that one could improve the humanspecies by encouraging or permitting reproduction of only those people with genetic
characteristics judged desirable.
Eugenics became immensely popular in the United States in the early 20th century and was
supported by many prominent psychologists, including Sir Francis Galton. Dozens ofuniversities, including those in the Ivy League, offered courses in eugenics, and the topic waspresented in most high school and college biology texts (Selden, 1999). Belief in the policies
of eugenics led the U.S. Congress to pass laws designed to restrict immigration from othercountries supposedly marked by low intelligence, particularly those in eastern and southern
Europe. Further, because more than one-half of the U.S. states passed laws requiring thesterilization of low-IQ individuals, more than 60,000 Americans, mostly African Americans andother poor minorities, underwent forced sterilizations. Fortunately, the practice of sterilization
was abandoned between the 1940s and the 1960s, although sterilization laws remained on thebooks in some states until the 1970s.

Key Takeaways
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

IQ is distributed in the population in the form of a normal distribution frequently
known as a bell curve.
Intellectual developmental disorder or intellectual disability is a generalized disorderascribed to people who have an IQ below 70, who have experienced deficits sincechildhood, and who have trouble with basic life skills, such as dressing and feeding
oneself and communicating with others. One cause of intellectual disability is Down
syndrome.
Extremely intelligent individuals are not unhealthy or poorly adjusted, but rather
are above average in many dimensions than individuals in the general population.
Men and women have almost identical intelligence, but men have more variability
in their IQ scores than do women.
On average, men do better than women on tasks requiring spatial ability, whereas
women do better on verbal tasks and score higher on emotional intelligence.
Although their bell curves overlap considerably, there are also average groupdifferences for members of different racial and ethnic groups.
These group differences have been attributed to environmental factors.
The situation in which one takes a test may create stereotype threat, or performancedecrements caused by the knowledge of cultural stereotypes.
The observed average differences in intelligence between racial and ethnic groups has
at times led to malicious attempts to correct for them, such as the eugenics
movement in the early part of the 20th century.
193

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Do you think that we should give intelligence tests? Why or why not?
2. Give your ideas about the practice of providing accelerated classes to children listed as

gifted in high school. What are the potential positive and negative outcomes of doing
so? What research evidence has helped you form your opinion?
3. Consider the observed sex and racial differences in intelligence. What implications do
you think the differences have had for education and career choices?

The Development and Use of Language
Learning Objectives
1. Review the components and structure of language.
2. Explain the biological underpinnings of language.
3. Outline the theories of language development.

Language involves both the ability to comprehend spoken and written words and to create
communication in real time when we speak or write. Most languages are oral, generated throughspeaking. Speaking involves a variety of complex cognitive, social, and biological processes
including operation of the vocal cords, and the coordination of breath with movements of thethroat and mouth, and tongue. Other languages are sign languages, in which the communication isexpressed by movements of the hands. The most common sign language is American Sign
Language (ASL), currently used by more than 500,000 people in the United States alone.
Although language is often used for the transmission of information, this is only its most mundane
function. Language also allows us to access existing knowledge, to draw conclusions, to set andaccomplish goals, and to understand and communicate complex social relationships. Language isfundamental to our ability to think, and without it we would be less intelligent.

The Components of Language
Language can be conceptualized in terms of sounds, meaning, and the environmental factors that
help us understand it. These include phonemes, morphemes, semantics, syntax, pragmatics andcontextual information.
Phoneme: A phoneme is the smallest unit of sound that makes a meaningful difference in alanguage. The word “bit” has three phonemes. In spoken languages, phonemes are produced by
the positions and movements of the vocal tract, including our lips, teeth, tongue, vocal cords, andthroat, whereas in sign languages phonemes are defined by the shapes and movement of the hands.
There are hundreds of unique phonemes that can be made by human speakers, but most languages
only use a small subset of the possibilities. English contains about 45 phonemes, and some havemore than 60. In contrast, the Hawaiian language contains only a dozen phonemes, including 5
vowels (a, e, i, o, and u) and 7 consonants (h, k, l, m, n, p, and w).
194

Infants are born able to understand all phonemes, but they lose their ability to do so as they getolder. By 10 months of age, a child’s ability to recognize phonemes becomes very similar to that of
the adult speakers of the native language. Phonemes that were initially differentiated come to betreated as equivalent (Werker & Tees, 2002).
Morpheme and Semantics: Whereas phonemes are the smallest units of sound in language, amorpheme is a string of one or more phonemes that makes up the smallest units of meaning in alanguage. Most morphemes are made up of combinations of phonemes. Some morphemes are
prefixes and suffixes used to modify other words. For example, the syllable “re-” as in “rewrite” or“repay” means “to do again,” and the suffix “-est” as in “happiest” or “coolest” means “to the
maximum.” Semantics refers to the set of rules we use to obtain meaning from morphemes. For
example, adding “ed” to the end of a verb makes it past tense.
Syntax: Each language has a different syntax, which is the set of rules of a language by which weconstruct sentences. The syntax of the English language requires that each sentence have a noun
and a verb, each of which may be modified by adjectives and adverbs. Some syntaxes make use of
the order in which words appear. For example, in English “The man bites the dog” is different
from “The dog bites the man.”
Pragmatics: The social side of language is expressed through pragmatics, or how wecommunicate effectively and appropriately with others. Examples of pragmatics include turntaking, staying on topic, volume and tone of voice, and appropriate eye contact.
Context: Lastly, words do not possess fixed meanings but change their interpretation as a functionof the context in which they are spoken. We use contextual information; that is, the information
surrounding language to help us interpret it. Examples of contextual information include thecircumstances and setting in which the communication takes place, and nonverbal expressions, suchas facial expressions, postures, and gestures. Misunderstandings can easily arise if people are notattentive to contextual information or if some of it is missing, such as newspaper headlines or in
text messages.

The Biology and Development of Language
Anyone who has tried to master a second language as an adultknows the difficulty of language learning. Yet children learn
languages easily and naturally. Psychologists believe for language
there is a critical period, known as a time in which learning caneasily occur, lasting between infancy and puberty in which
language learning becomes more difficult or impossible(Lenneberg, 1967; Penfield & Roberts, 1959). Children who are
not exposed to language early in their lives will likely never learn
one. Case studies, including Victor the “Wild Child,” who wasabandoned as a baby in France and not discovered until he was12, and Genie, a child whose parents kept her locked in a closet
from 18 months until 13 years of age, are two of the only known
examples of these deprived children. Both of these children madesome progress in socialization after they were rescued, but neither
195

Figure 6.12 Victor of
AveyonSourceof them ever developed language (Rymer, 1993). This is also why it is important to determine
quickly if a child is deaf and to begin immediately to communicate in sign language. Deaf children
who are not exposed to sign language during their early years will likely never learn it (Mayberry,
Lock, & Kazmi, 2002).

Brain Areas for Language
For the 90% of people who are righthanded, language is stored and controlled
by the left cerebral cortex, although forsome left-handers this pattern is reversed.
These differences can easily be seen in
the results of neuroimaging studies thatshow that listening to and producing
language creates greater activity in theleft hemisphere than in the right. Broca’sarea, is responsible for language
production and is located in the left
hemisphere near the motor cortex. This
area was first localized in the 1860s by
the French physician Paul Broca, who
studied patients with lesions to various
parts of the brain. Wernicke’s area is
responsible for language comprehension
and is in the left hemisphere next to theauditory cortex (see Figure 6.13).

Figure 6.13 Drawing of Brain Showing Broca’s
and Wernicke’s Areas

For most people the left hemisphere is specialized for language.
Broca’s area, near the motor cortex, is involved in language
production, whereas Wernicke’s area, near the auditory cortex, is
specialized for language comprehension.

Evidence for the importance of Broca’s and Wernicke’s areas in language is seen in patients who
experience aphasia, a condition in which language functions are severely impaired. People with
Broca’s aphasia have difficulty producing speech, whereas people with damage to Wernicke’s area
can produce speech, but what they say makes no sense and they have trouble understanding spoken
language.

Research Focus: When Can We Best Learn Another Language?
An important study by Jacqueline Johnson and Elissa Newport (1989) using Chinese and Korean
speakers who had learned English as a second language provided the first insight. The
participants were all adults who had immigrated to the United States between 3 and 39 years ofage and who were tested on their English skills by being asked to detect grammatical errors insentences. Johnson and Newport found that the participants who had begun learning English
before they were 7 years old learned it as well as native English speakers, but that the ability tolearn English dropped off gradually for the participants who had started later. Newport andJohnson also found a correlation between the age of acquisition and the variance in the ultimate
learning of the language. While early learners were almost all successful in acquiring their196

language to a high degree of proficiency, later learners showed much greater individual
variation.
Johnson and Newport’s finding that children who immigrated before they were 7 years oldlearned English fluently seemed consistent with the idea of a critical period in language
learning, but their finding of a gradual decrease in proficiency for those who immigrated
between 8 and 39 years of age was not. Rather, it suggested that there might not be a single
critical period of language learning that ended at puberty, as early theorists had expected, but that
language learning at later ages is simply better when it occurs earlier. This idea was reinforced inresearch by Hakuta, Bialystok, and Wiley (2003), who examined U.S. census records oflanguage learning in millions of Chinese and Spanish speakers living in the United States. The
census form asks respondents to describe their own English ability using one of five categories:“not at all,” “not well,” “well,” “very well,” and “speak only English.” The results of thisresearch showed that regardless of what year was used as a cutoff point for the end of thecritical period, there was no evidence for any discontinuity in language-learning potential.
Rather, the results showed that the degree of success in second-language acquisition declined
steadily throughout the respondent’s life span. The difficulty of learning language as one getsolder is probably due to the fact that, with age, there is a reduction in brain plasticity or its ability
to develop new neural connections.

Language Stages
Language learning begins even before birth, because the fetus can hear muffled versions of
speaking from outside the womb. Moon, Cooper, and Fifer (1993) found that infants only two days
old sucked harder on a pacifier when they heard their mothers’ native language being spoken thanwhen they heard a foreign language, even when strangers were speaking the languages. Babies arealso aware of the patterns of their native language. They show surprisewhen they hear speech that has a different pattern of phonemes than those they are used to hearing(Saffran, Aslin, & Newport, 2004).
During the first year or so after birth, and long before they speak
their first words, infants are already learning language. One aspectof this learning is practice in producing speech. By the time they
are 6 to 8 weeks old, babies start making coos or vowel sounds,
such as “ooohh,” “aaahh,” “goo”, as well as a variety of cries andsqueals to help them practice.
At about six months, infants begin babbling, engaging in
intentional consonant-vowel repetitions that lack specificmeaning. For example, infants will repeat “bababa and dadada”.
Children babble as practice in creating specific sounds, and by thetime they are ten months, the babbling reflects the sounds of thelanguage they are learning (de Boysson-Bardies, Sagart, &Durand, 1984). These vocalizations have a conversational tonethat sounds meaningful, even though it is not. Babbling also helps
children understand the social, communicative function of
197

Figure 6.14

© Thinkstocklanguage. Children who are exposed to sign language babble in sign by making hand movementsthat represent real signs (Petitto & Marentette, 1991).
At the same time that infants are practicing their speaking skills by babbling, they are also learning
to better understand sounds and eventually the words of language. One of the first words thatchildren understand is their own name, usually by about 6 months, followed by commonly used
words like “bottle,” “mama,” and “doggie” by ten to twelve months (Mandel, Jusczyk, & Pisoni,1995). The infant usually produces his or her first words at about one year of age. It is at this pointthat the child first understands that words are more than sounds, and that they refer to particular
objects and ideas. By the time children are two years old, they have a vocabulary of several
hundred words, and by age six their vocabularies have increased to approximately 10,000 words(Byrnes & Wasik, 2009).

Language Errors
The early utterances of children contain many errors, for instance, confusing /b/ and /d/, or /c/ and/z/. The words that children create are often simplified, in part because they are not yet able to
make the more complex sounds of the real language (Dobrich & Scarborough, 1992). Children may
say “keekee” for kitty, “nana” for banana, and “vesketti” for spaghetti in part because it is easier.
Often these early words are accompanied by gestures that may also be easierto produce than the words themselves. Children’s pronunciations become increasingly accurate
between one and three years, but some problems may persist until school age.
Most of a child’s first words are nouns, and early sentences may include only the noun. “Ma” maymean “more milk please” and “da” may mean “look, there’s Fido.” Eventually the length of theutterances increases to two words, such as “mo ma” or “da bark”, and these primitive sentences
begin to follow the appropriate syntax of the native language.
Because language involves the active categorization of sounds and words into higher level units,children make some mistakes in interpreting what words mean and how to use them. In particular,
they often make overextensions of concepts by using a given word in a broader context thanappropriate. A child might at first call all adult men “daddy” or all animals “doggie.”
Additionally, they make underextensions of concepts by using a given word too narrowly. The
word “dog” is used only for the family dog and not any other dogs.
Children also use contextual information, particularly the cues that parents provide, to help themlearn language. Children learn that people are usually referring to things that they are looking at
when they are speaking (Baldwin, 1993), and that that the speaker’s emotional expressions are
related to the content of their speech. Infants are frequently more attuned to the tone of voice ofthe person speaking than to the content of the words themselves, and are aware of the target ofspeech. Werker, Pegg, and McLeod (1994) found that infants listened longer to a woman who was
speaking to a baby than to a woman who was speaking to another adult. This higher pitchedspeech with simple words is referred to as child directed speech and is preferred by infants (Clark,2009).

198

Theories of Language Acquisition
Psychological theories of language learning differ in terms of the importance they place on natureand nurture. Yet, it is clear that both matter. Children are not born knowing language; they learn tospeak by hearing what happens around them. On the other hand, human brains, unlike those of any
other animal, are prewired in a way that leads them, almost effortlessly, to learn language. Broca’s
and Wernicke’s areas, critical periods, and a reduction in brain plasticity as one ages support theimportance of nature for explaining language.

Behavioral Perspective
Perhaps the most straightforward explanation of language development is that it occurs throughprinciples of learning, including association, reinforcement, and the observation and imitation ofothers (Skinner, 1965). There must be at least some truth to the idea that language is learned,
because children learn the language that they hear spoken around them rather than some otherlanguage. Also supporting this idea is the gradual improvement of language skills with time. It
seems that children modify their language through imitation, reinforcement, and shaping, as would
be predicted by learning theories.
However, language cannot be entirely learned. For one, children learn words too fast for them to belearned through reinforcement. Between the ages of 18 months and 5 years, children learn up to 10
new words every day (Anglin, 1993). More importantly, language is more generative than it isimitative. Generativity refers to the fact that speakers of a language can compose sentences torepresent new ideas that they have never before been exposed to. Language is not a predefined setof ideas and sentences that we choose when we need them, but rather a system of rules andprocedures that allows us to create an infinite number of statements, thoughts, and ideas, including
those that have never previously occurred. When a child says that she “swimmed” in the pool, forinstance, she is showing generativity. No adult speaker of English would ever say “swimmed,” yetit is easily generated from the normal system of producing language.
Deaf children, whose parents do not speak ASL very well, nevertheless are able to learn it
perfectly on their own, and may even make up their own language if they need to (Goldin-Meadow& Mylander, 1998). A group of deaf children in a school in Nicaragua, whose teachers could notsign, invented a way to communicate through made-up signs (Senghas, Senghas, & Pyers, 2005).
The development of this new Nicaraguan Sign Language has continued and changed as new
generations of students have come to the school and started using the language. Although theoriginal system was not a real language, it is becoming closer and closer every year, showing thedevelopment of a new language in modern times.

Evolutionary Perspective
The linguist Noam Chomsky is a believer in the nature approach to language, arguing that humanbrains contain a language acquisition device that includes a universal grammar that underlies all
human language (Chomsky, 1965, 1972). According to this approach, each of the 7099 languages
spoken today (Simons & Feenig, 2017) is an individual example of the same underlying set ofprocedures that are hardwired into human brains. Chomsky’s account proposes that children areborn with a knowledge of general rules of syntax that determine how sentences are constructed.
199

Chomsky differentiates between the deep structure of an idea, or how the idea is represented in
the fundamental universal grammar that is common to all languages, and the surface structure of
the idea, or how it is expressed in any one language. Once we hear or express a thought in surface
structure, we generally forget exactly how it happened. At the end of a lecture, you will remember
a lot of the deep structure, or the ideas expressed by the instructo), but you cannot reproduce thesurface structure, or the exact words that the instructor used to communicate the ideas.
Although there is general agreement among psychologists that babies are genetically programmed
to learn language, there is still debate about Chomsky’s idea that there is a universal grammar that
can account for all language learning. Evans and Levinson (2009) surveyed the world’s languages
and found that none of the presumed underlying features of the language acquisition device wereentirely universal. In their search they found languages that did not havenoun or verb phrases, that did not have tenses (e.g., past, present, future), and even some that did
not have nouns or verbs at all, even though a basic assumption of a universal grammar is that all
languages should share these features.

Bilingualism and Cognitive Development
Although it is less common in the United States than in other countries, bilingualism, the ability to
speak two languages, is becoming more and more frequent in the modern world. Nearly 50% of theworld’s population is bilingual (Ansaldo, Marcotte, Scherer, & Raboyeau, 2008). In recent years
many U.S. states have passed laws outlawing bilingual education in schools. These laws are in partbased on the idea that students will have a stronger identity with the school, the culture, and thegovernment if they speak only English, and in part based on the idea that speaking two languages
may interfere with cognitive development.
Some early psychological research showed that, when compared with monolingual children,
bilingual children performed more slowly when processing language, and their verbal scores werelower. These tests were frequently given in English, however, even when this was not the child’s
first language, and the children tested were often of lower socioeconomic status than themonolingual children (Andrews, 1982).
More current research that has controlled for these factors has found that, although bilingual
children may in some cases learn language somewhat slower than do monolingual children (Oller& Pearson, 2002), bilingual and monolingual children do not significantly differ in the final depthof language learning, nor do they generally confuse the two languages (Nicoladis & Genesee,
1997). In fact, participants who speak two languages have been found to have better cognitive
functioning, cognitive flexibility, and analytic skills in comparison to monolinguals (Bialystok,2009). Research has also found that learning a second language produces changes in the area of thebrain in the left hemisphere that is involved in language, such that this area is denser and contains
more neurons (Mechelli et al., 2004). Furthermore, the increased density is stronger in thoseindividuals who are most proficient in their second language and who learned the second language
earlier. Thus, rather than slowing language development, learning a second language seems toincrease cognitive abilities.

200

Can Animals Learn Language?
Nonhuman animals have a wide variety of systems of communication. Some species communicate
using scents; others use visual displays, such as baring the teeth, puffing up the fur, or flapping thewings; and still others use vocal sounds. Male songbirds, such as canaries and finches, sing songs
to attract mates and to protect territory, and chimpanzees use a combination of facial expressions,sounds, and actions, such as slapping the ground, to convey aggression (de Waal, 1989).
Honeybees use a waggle dance to direct other bees to the location of food sources (von Frisch,1956). The language of vervet monkeys is relatively advanced in the sense that they use specificsounds to communicate specific meanings. Vervets make different calls to signify that they haveseen a leopard, or a snake, or a hawk (Seyfarth & Cheney, 1997).
Despite their wide abilities to communicate, efforts to teach animals to use language have had only
limited success. One of the early efforts was made by Catherine and Keith Hayes, who raised achimpanzee named Viki in their home along with their own children, but Viki learned little andcould never speak (Hayes & Hayes, 1952). Researchers speculated that Viki’s
difficulties might have been in part because the she could not create the words in her vocal cords,
and so subsequent attempts were made to teach primates to speak using sign language or by using
boards on which they can point to symbols.
Allen and Beatrix Gardner worked for many years to teach a chimpanzee named Washoe to signusing ASL. Washoe, who lived to be 42 years old, could label up to 250 different objects and makesimple requests and comments, such as “please tickle” and “me sorry” (Fouts, 1997). Washoe’s
adopted daughter Loulis, who was never exposed to human signers, learned more than 70 signs
simply by watching her mother sign.
The most proficient nonhuman language speaker is Kanzi, abonobo who lives at the Language Learning Center at
Georgia State University (Savage-Rumbaugh, & Lewin,1994). Kanzi has a propensity for language that is in many
ways similar to humans. He learned faster when he wasyounger than when he got older, he learns by observation,and he can use symbols to comment on social interactions,rather than simply for food treats. Kanzi can also create
elementary syntax and understand relatively complex
commands. Kanzi can make tools and can even play PacMan. The bonobo Kanzi is the most proficient known
nonhuman language speaker.

Figure 6.15 Do animals
have language?

Yet, even Kanzi does not have a true language in the same
way that humans do. Human babies learn words faster andfaster as they get older, but Kanzi does not. Each new word©Thinkstock
he learns is almost as difficult as the one before. Kanzi
usually requires many trials to learn a new sign, whereas
human babies can speak words after only one exposure. Kanzi’s language is focused primarily onfood and pleasure and only rarely on social relationships. Although he can combine words, he201generates few new phrases and cannot master syntactic rules beyond the level of about a 2-yearold human child (Greenfield & Savage-Rumbaugh, 1991).
In sum, although many animals communicate, none of them have a true language. With some
exceptions, the information that can be communicated in nonhuman species is limited primarily todisplays of liking or disliking, and related to basic motivations of aggression and mating.
Humans also use this more primitive type of communication, in the form of nonverbal behaviors
such as eye contact, touch, hand signs, and interpersonal distance, to communicate their like or
dislike for others, but they, unlike animals, also supplant this more primitive communication withlanguage. Although other animal brains share similarities to ours, only the human brain is complex
enough to create language. What is perhaps most remarkable is that although language neverappears in nonhumans, language is universal in humans. All humans, unless they have a profoundbrain abnormality or are completely isolated from other humans, learn language.

Key Takeaways
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Language involves both the ability to comprehend spoken and written words and to
speak and write. Some languages are sign languages, in which the communication isexpressed by movements of the hands.
Phonemes are the elementary sounds of our language, morphemes are the smallest
units of meaningful language, semantics is making menaing out of morphemes,
syntax is the grammatical rules that control how words are put together, pragmatics
is the social side of language, and contextual information is the elements ofcommunication that help us understand its meaning.
A critical period is important for learing a first language.
Recent research suggests that there is not a single critical period for second language
learning, but that language learning is simply better when it occurs earlier.
Broca’s area is responsible for language production, while Wernicke’s area is
responsible for language comprehension.
Language learning begins even before birth. An infant usually produces his or her
first words at about 1 year of age.
One explanation of language development is that it occurs through principles oflearning, including association, reinforcement, and imitation.
Noam Chomsky argues that human brains contain a language acquisition device that
includes a universal grammar that underlies all human language. Chomsky
differentiates between the deep structure and the surface structure of an idea.
Bilingual children have better cognitive functioning, cognitive flexibility, and analytic
skills compared to monolingual children.
Although other animals communicate and may be able to express ideas, only thehuman brain is complex enough to create real language.

202

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. What languages do you speak? Did you ever try to learn a new one? What problems

did you have when you did this? Would you consider trying to learn a new
language?
2. Some animals, such as Kanzi, display at least some language. Do you think that thismeans that they are intelligent?

Videos
1. Howard Gardner discusses his theory of multiple intelligences

on a PBS special. http://video.pbs.org/video/1906079430/
2. Daniel Goleman discusses emotional intelligence andcompassion.http://www.ted.com/talks/daniel_goleman_on_compassi
on.html
3. Language Recognition in Bonobos
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2Dhc2zePJFE

Chapter SummaryIntelligence is the ability to think, learn from experience, solve problems, and adapt to newsituations. It is more strongly related than any other individual difference variable to successful
educational, occupational, economic, and social outcomes.
The French psychologist Alfred Binet and his colleague Theodore Simon developed the first
intelligence test in the early 1900s. Charles Spearman called the construct that the different
abilities and skills measured on intelligence tests have in common the general intelligence factor,
or simply “g.”There is also evidence for specific intelligences “s”, measures of specific skills in narrow domains.
Robert Sternberg has proposed a triarchic (three-part) theory of intelligence, and Howard Gardnerhas proposed that there are eight different specific intelligences referred to as multiple intelligences.
Good intelligence tests both are reliable and have construct validity. Intelligence tests are the mostaccurate of all psychological tests, and they are standardized, which allows calculation of mental
age and the intelligence quotient (IQ),
The Wechsler Adult lntelligence Scale (WAIS) is the most widely used intelligence test for adults.
Other intelligence tests include aptitude tests such as the Scholastic Assessment Test (SAT),
American College Test (ACT), and Graduate Record Examination (GRE), and structured tests
used for personnel selection.
203

Smarter people have somewhat larger brains, which operate more efficiently and faster than thebrains of the less intelligent. Although intelligence is not located in a specific part of the brain, theouter cortex, involved in planning, executive control, and short-term memory, is more utilized thanother areas.
Emotional intelligence refers to the ability to identify, assess, manage, and control one’s emotions.
However, tests of emotional intelligence are often unreliable, and emotional intelligence may be apart of g, or a skill that can be applied in some specific work situations.
Intelligence has both genetic and environmental causes, and between 40% and 80% of thevariability in IQ is heritable. Social and economic deprivation, including poverty, can adversely
affect IQ, and intelligence is improved by education.
About 2% of Americans score above an IQ of 130, which is the threshold for giftedness, and about
the same percentage score below an IQ of 70, which is the threshold for intellectual disability.
Males are about 20% more common in these extremes than are women.
Women and men show overall equal intelligence, but there are sex differences on some types oftasks. There are also differences in which members of different racial and ethnic groups cluster
along the IQ line. The causes of these differences are not completely known. These differences
have at times led to malicious, misguided, and discriminatory attempts to try to correct for them,such as eugenics.
Language involves both the ability to comprehend spoken and written words and to create
communication in real time when we speak or write. Language can be conceptualized in terms ofphonemes, morphemes, semantics, syntax, pragmatics and contextual information. Language is bestlearned during a critical period.
Broca’s area, an area of the brain in front of the left hemisphere near the motor cortex, is
responsible for language production, and Wernicke’s area, an area of the brain next to the auditory
cortex, is responsible for language comprehension.
Children learn language quickly and naturally, progressing through stages. Children often makeoverextensions and underextensions of concepts.
Some theories of language learning are based on principles of learning, including association,
reinforcement, and imitation. Noam Chomsky argues that human brains contain a language
acquisition device that includes a universal grammar that underlies all human language and thatallows generativity. Chomsky differentiates between the deep structure and the surface structure of
an idea.
Bilingualism is becoming more frequent in the modern world. Bilingual children show morecognitive functioning, cogntive flexibility, and analytic skills than do monolingual children.
Nonhuman animals have a wide variety of systems of communication, but efforts to teach animals
to use human language have had only limited success. Although many animals communicate, noneof them have a true language.
204

References
Ackerman, P. L., Beier, M. E., & Boyle, M. O. (2005). Working memory and intelligence: The same or different
constructs? Psychological Bulletin, 131(1), 30–60.
Andrews, I. (1982). Bilinguals out of focus: A critical discussion. International Review of Applied Linguistics inLanguage Teaching, 20(4), 297–305.
Anglin, J. M. (1993). Vocabulary development: A morphological analysis. Monographs of the Society for Research inChild Development, 58(10), v–165.
Ansaldo, A. I., Marcotte, K., Scherer, L., & Raboyeau, G. (2008). Language therapy and bilingual aphasia: ClinicalImplications of psycholinguistic and neuroimaging research. Journal of Neurolinguistics, 21, 539-557.
Aronson, J., Lustina, M. J., Good, C., Keough, K., & Steele, C. M. (1999). When white men can’t do math: Necessary
and sufficient factors in stereotype threat. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 35, 29–46.
Atkins v. Virginia, 536 U.S. 304 (2002).
Ayduk, O., Mendoza-Denton, R., Mischel, W., Downey, G., Peake, P. K., & Rodriguez, M. (2000). Regulating theinterpersonal self: Strategic self-regulation for coping with rejection sensitivity. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 79(5), 776–792.
Baldwin, D. A. (1993). Early referential understanding: Infants’ ability to recognize referential acts for what they are.
Developmental Psychology, 29(5), 832–843.
Baltes, P. B., & Reinert, G. (1969). Cohort effects in cognitive development of children as revealed by cross- sectionalsequences. Developmental Psychology, 1(2), 169–177.
Baltes, P. B., Staudinger, U. M., & Lindenberger, U. (1999). Life-span psychology: Theory and application to
intellectual functioning. Annual Review of Psychology, 50, 471–506.
Bellinger, D. C., & Needleman, H. L. (2003). Intellectual impairment and blood lead levels [Letter to the editor]. The
New England Journal of Medicine, 349(5), 500.
Benbow, C. P., & Stanley, J. C. (1983). Sex differences in mathematical reasoning ability: More facts. Science,
222(4627), 1029–1031.
Bialystok, E. (2009). Bilingualism: The good, the bad, and the indifferent. Bilingualism: Language and Cognition,
12(1), 3–11.
Binet, A., Simon, T., & Town, C. H. (1915). A method of measuring the development of the intelligence of young
children (3rd ed.) Chicago, IL: Chicago Medical Book.
Bink, M. L., & Marsh, R. L. (2000). Cognitive regularities in creative activity. Review of General Psychology, 4(1), 59–
78.
Brody, N. (1992). Intelligence (2nd ed.). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
Brody, N. (2003). Construct validation of the Sternberg Triarchic abilities test: Comment and reanalysis. Intelligence,
31(4), 319–329.

205

Brody, N. (2004). What cognitive intelligence is and what emotional intelligence is not. Psychological Inquiry, 15,
234–238.
Brooks-Gunn, J., & Duncan, G. J. (1997). The effects of poverty on children. The Future of Children, 7(2), 55–71.
Brown, R., Croizet, J.-C., Bohner, G., Fournet, M., & Payne, A. (2003). Automatic category activation and social
behaviour: The moderating role of prejudiced beliefs. Social Cognition, 21(3), 167–193.
Byrnes, J. P., & Wasik, B. A. (2009). Language and literacy development: What educators need to know. New York,
NY: Guilford.
Ceci, S. J. (1991). How much does schooling influence general intelligence and its cognitive components? A
reassessment of the evidence. Developmental Psychology, 27(5), 703–722.
Ceci, S. J., & Williams, W. M. (1997). Schooling, intelligence, and income. American Psychologist, 52(10), 1051–
1058.
Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Chomsky, N. (1972). Language and mind (Extended ed.). New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.
Clark, E. V. (2009). What shapes children’s language? Child-directed speech and the process of acquisition. In V.C. M.
Gathercole (Ed.), Routes to Language: Essays in honor of Melissa Bowerman. New York: Psychology Press.
Colangelo, N., & Assouline, S. (2009). Acceleration: Meeting the academic and social needs of students. In T. Balchin,
B. Hymer, & D. J. Matthews (Eds.), The Routledge international companion to gifted education (pp. 194– 202). New
York, NY: Routledge.
Croizet, J.-C., & Claire, T. (1998). Extending the concept of stereotype and threat to social class: The intellectual
underperformance of students from low socioeconomic backgrounds. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin,
24(6), 588–594.
Deary, I. J., Der, G., & Ford, G. (2001). Reaction times and intelligence differences: A population-based cohort study.
Intelligence, 29(5), 389–399.
Deary, I. J., Whiteman, M. C., Starr, J. M., Whalley, L. J., & Fox, H. C. (2004). The impact of childhood intelligence onlater life: Following up the Scottish mental surveys of 1932 and 1947. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
86(1), 130–147.
de Boysson-Bardies, B., Sagart, L., & Durand, C. (1984). Discernible differences in the babbling of infants according
to target language. Journal of Child Language, 11(1), 1–15.
De Waal, F. (1989). Peacemaking among primates. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Dobrich, W., & Scarborough, H. S. (1992). Phonological characteristics of words young children try to say. Journal ofChild Language, 19(3), 597–616.
Duncan, J., Seitz, R. J., Kolodny, J., Bor, D., Herzog, H., Ahmed, A.,…Emslie, H. (2000). A neural basis for general
intelligence. Science, 289(5478), 457–460.
Eigsti, I.-M., Zayas, V., Mischel, W., Shoda, Y., Ayduk, O., Dadlani, M. B.,…Casey, B. J. (2006). Predicting cognitive
control from preschool to late adolescence and young adulthood. Psychological Science, 17(6), 478–484.
Ericsson, K. (1998). The scientific study of expert levels of performance: General implications for optimal learning andcreativity. High Ability Studies, 9(1), 75–100.

206

Evans, N., & Levinson, S. C. (2009). The myth of language universals: Language diversity and its importance forcognitive science. Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 32(5), 429–448.
Feldman-Barrett, L., & Salovey, P. (Eds.). (2002). The wisdom in feeling: Psychological processes in emotional
intelligence. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Flynn, J. R. (1999). Searching for justice: The discovery of IQ gains over time. American Psychologist, 54(1), 5–20.
Føllesdal, H., & Hagtvet, K. A. (2009). Emotional intelligence: The MSCEIT from the perspective of generalizability
theory. Intelligence, 37(1), 94–105.
Fouts, R. (1997). Next of kin: What chimpanzees have taught me about who we are. New York, NY: William Morrow.
Frank, M. C., Everett, D. L., Fedorenko, E., & Gibson, E. (2008). Number as a cognitive technology: Evidence from
Pirahã language and cognition. Cognition, 108(3), 819–824.
Frey, M. C., & Detterman, D. K. (2004). Scholastic assessment or g? The relationship between the scholastic
assessment test and general cognitive ability. Psychological Science, 15(6), 373–378.
Furnham, A., & Bachtiar, V. (2008). Personality and intelligence as predictors of creativity. Personality and Individual
Differences, 45(7), 613–617.
Gardner, H. (1983). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Gardner, H. (1999). Intelligence reframed: Multiple intelligences for the 21st century. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Garlick, D. (2003). Integrating brain science research with intelligence research. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 12(5), 185–189.
Goldin-Meadow, S., & Mylander, C. (1998). Spontaneous sign systems created by deaf children in two cultures.
Nature, 391(6664), 279–281.
Goleman, D. (1998). Working with emotional intelligence. New York, NY: Bantam Books.
Gonzales, P. M., Blanton, H., & Williams, K. J. (2002). The effects of stereotype threat and double-minority status on
the test performance of Latino women. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28(5), 659–670.
Gottfredson, L. S. (1997). Mainstream science on intelligence: An editorial with 52 signatories, history andbibliography. Intelligence, 24(1), 13–23.
Gottfredson, L. S. (2003). Dissecting practical intelligence theory: Its claims and evidence. Intelligence, 31(4), 343–
397.
Gottfredson, L. S. (2004). Life, death, and intelligence. Journal of Cognitive Education and Psychology, 4(1), 23–46.
Gottfredson, L. S., & Deary, I. J. (2004). Intelligence predicts health and longevity, but why? Current Directions in
Psychological Science, 13(1), 1–4.
Greenfield, P. M., & Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S. (1991). Imitation, grammatical development, and the invention of
protogrammar by an ape. In N. A. Krasnegor, D. M. Rumbaugh, R. L. Schiefelbusch, & M. Studdert-Kennedy (Eds.),
Biological and behavioral determinants of language development (pp. 235–258). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum
Associates.
Greenspan, S., Loughlin, G., & Black, R. S. (2001). Credulity and gullibility in people with developmental disorders: A
framework for future research. In L. M. Glidden (Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 24,
pp. 101–135). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

207

Haier, R. J. (2004). Brain imaging studies of personality: The slow revolution. In R. M. Stelmack (Ed.), On thepsychobiology of personality: Essays in honor of Marvin Zuckerman (pp. 329–340). New York, NY: Elsevier Science.
Haier, R. J., Siegel, B. V., Tang, C., & Abel, L. (1992). Intelligence and changes in regional cerebral glucose metabolic
rate following learning. Intelligence, 16(3–4), 415–426.
Hakuta, K., Bialystok, E., & Wiley, E. (2003). Critical evidence: A test of the critical-period hypothesis for secondlanguage acquisition. Psychological Science, 14(1), 31–38.
Halpern, D. F., Benbow, C. P., Geary, D. C., Gur, R. C., Hyde, J. S., & Gernsbache, M. A. (2007). The science of sex
differences in science and mathematics. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 8(1), 1–51.
Harms, P. D., & Credé, M. (2010). Emotional intelligence and transformational and transactional leadership: A metaanalysis. Journal of Leadership & Organizational Studies, 17(1), 5–17.
Hayes, K. J., and Hayes, C. (1952). Imitation in a home-raised chimpanzee. Journal of Comparative and PhysiologicalPsychology, 45, 450–459.
Hennessey, B. A., & Amabile, T. M. (2010). Creativity. Annual Review of Psychology, 61, 569–598.
Horn, J. L., Donaldson, G., & Engstrom, R. (1981). Apprehension, memory, and fluid intelligence decline inadulthood. Research on Aging, 3(1), 33–84
Hunt, E., & Carlson, J. (2007). Considerations relating to the study of group differences in intelligence. Perspectives on
Psychological Science, 2(2), 194–213.
Huttenlocher, J., Levine, S., & Vevea, J. (1998). Environmental input and cognitive growth: A study using time-period
comparisons. Child Development, 69(4), 1012–1029.
Hyde, J. S. (2005). The gender similarities hypothesis. American Psychologist, 60(6), 581–592.
Johns, M., Schmader, T., & Martens, A. (2005). Knowing is half the battle: Teaching stereotype threat as a means ofimproving women’s math performance. Psychological Science, 16(3), 175–179.
Johnson, W., Carothers, A., & Deary, I. J. (2009). A role for the X chromosome in sex differences in variability ingeneral intelligence? Perspectives on Psychological Science, 4(6), 598–611.
Johnson, J. S., & Newport, E. L. (1989). Critical period effects in second language learning: The influence of
maturational state on the acquisition of English as a second language. Cognitive Psychology, 21(1), 60–99.
Kimura, D., & Hampson, E. (1994). Cognitive pattern in men and women is influenced by fluctuations in sex
hormones. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 3(2), 57–61.
Kuncel, N. R., Hezlett, S. A., & Ones, D. S. (2010). A comprehensive meta-analysis of the predictive validity of thegraduate record examinations: Implications for graduate student selection and performance. Psychological Bulletin,
127(1), 162–181.
Landy, F. J. (2005). Some historical and scientific issues related to research on emotional intelligence. Journal of
Organizational Behavior, 26, 411–424.
Lenneberg, E. (1967). Biological foundations of language. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Levinson, S. C. (1998). Studying spatial conceptualization across cultures: Anthropology and cognitive science. Ethos,26(1), 7–24.
Lewontin, R. C., Rose, S. P. R., & Kamin, L. J. (1984). Not in our genes: Biology, ideology, and human nature (1st ed.).
New York, NY: Pantheon Books.

208

Lubinski, D., & Benbow, C. P. (2006). Study of mathematically precocious youth after 35 years: Uncovering
antecedents for the development of math-science expertise. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 1(4), 316–345.
Lynn, R. (1996). Racial and ethnic differences in intelligence in the United States on the differential ability scale.
Personality and Individual Differences, 20(2), 271–273.
Mandel, D. R., Jusczyk, P. W., & Pisoni, D. B. (1995). Infants’ recognition of the sound patterns of their own names.
Psychological Science, 6(5), 314–317.
Martins, A., Ramalho, N., & Morin, E. (2010). A comprehensive meta-analysis of the relationship between emotional
intelligence and health. Personality and Individual Differences, 49(6), 554–564.
Marx, D. M., & Roman, J. S. (2002). Female role models: Protecting women’s math test performance. Personality andSocial Psychology Bulletin, 28(9), 1183–1193.
Mayberry, R. I., Lock, E., & Kazmi, H. (2002). Development: Linguistic ability and early language exposure. Nature,417(6884), 38.
Mayer, J. D., & Cobb, C. D. (2000). Educational policy on emotional intelligence: Does it make sense? Educational
Psychology Review, 12(2), 163–183.
Mayer, J. D., Salovey, P., & Caruso, D. (2000). Models of emotional intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of
intelligence (pp. 396–420). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Mayer, J. D., Salovey, P., & Caruso, D. R. (2008). Emotional intelligence: New ability or eclectic traits. American
Psychologist, 63(6), 503–517.
McClure, E. B. (2000). A meta-analytic review of sex differences in facial expression processing and their development
in infants, children, and adolescents. Psychological Bulletin, 126(3), 424–453.
McDaniel, M. A. (2005). Big-brained people are smarter: A meta-analysis of the relationship between in vivo brain
volume and intelligence. Intelligence, 33(4), 337–346.
McIntyre, R. B., Paulson, R. M., & Lord, C. G. (2003). Alleviating women’s mathematics stereotype threat throughsalience of group achievements. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 39(1), 83–90.
McLoyd, V. C. (1998). Children in poverty: Development, public policy and practice. In W. Damon, I. E. Sigel, & K. A.
Renninger (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Child psychology in practice (5th ed., Vol. 4, pp. 135– 208).
Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Mechelli, A., Crinion, J. T., Noppeney, U., O’Doherty, J., Ashburner, J., Frackowiak, R. S., & Price C. J. (2004).
Structural plasticity in the bilingual brain: Proficiency in a second language and age at acquisition affect grey-matter
density. Nature, 431, 757.
Mischel, W., & Ayduk, O. (Eds.). (2004). Willpower in a cognitive-affective processing system: The dynamics of delayof gratification. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Moon, C., Cooper, R. P., & Fifer, W. P. (1993). Two-day-olds prefer their native language. Infant Behavior &Development, 16(4), 495–500.
Neisser, U. (1997). Rising scores on intelligence tests. American Scientist, 85, 440-447.
Neisser, U. (Ed.). (1998). The rising curve. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Neisser, U., Boodoo, G., Bouchard, T. J., Jr., Boykin, A. W., Brody, N., Ceci, S. J.,…Urbina, S. (1996). Intelligence:
Knowns and unknowns. American Psychologist, 51(2), 77–101.

209

Newcombe, N. S., & Huttenlocher, J. (2006). Development of spatial cognition. In D. Kuhn, R. S. Siegler, W. Damon,& R. M. Lerner (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Cognition, perception, and language (6th ed., Vol. 2, pp. 734–
776). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Nicoladis, E., & Genesee, F. (1997). Language development in preschool bilingual children. Journal of SpeechLanguage Pathology and Audiology, 21(4), 258–270.
Nisbett, R. E., Aronson, J., Blair, C., Dickens, W., Flynn, J., Halpern, D. F., & Turkheimer, E. (2012). Intelligence:
New findings and theoretical developments. American Psychologist, 67(2), 130-159.
Oller, D. K., & Pearson, B. Z. (2002). Assessing the effects of bilingualism: A background. In D. K. Oller & R. E. Eilers(Eds.), Language and literacy in bilingual children (pp. 3–21). Tonawanda, NY: Multilingual Matters.
Ones, D. S., Viswesvaran, C., & Dilchert, S. (2005). Cognitive ability in selection decisions. In O. Wilhelm & R. W.
Engle (Eds.), Handbook of understanding and measuring intelligence (pp. 431–468). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Penfield, W., & Roberts, L. (1959). Speech and brain mechanisms. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Perkins, D. N., & Grotzer, T. A. (1997). Teaching intelligence. American Psychologist, 52(10), 1125–1133.
Petitto, L. A., & Marentette, P. F. (1991). Babbling in the manual mode: Evidence for the ontogeny of language.
Science, 251(5000), 1493–1496.
Petrides, K. V., & Furnham, A. (2000). On the dimensional structure of emotional intelligence. Personality andIndividual Differences, 29, 313–320.
Pinker, S. (1994). The language instinct (1st ed.). New York, NY: William Morrow.
Plomin, R. (2003). General cognitive ability. In R. Plomin, J. C. DeFries, I. W. Craig, & P. McGuffin (Eds.),
Behavioral genetics in the postgenomic era (pp. 183–201). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Plomin, R., & Spinath, F. M. (2004). Intelligence: Genetics, genes, and genomics. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 86(1), 112–129.
Reynolds, A. J., Temple, J. A., Robertson, D. L., & Mann, E. A. (2001). Long-term effects of an early childhoodintervention on educational achievement and juvenile arrest: A 15-year follow-up of low-income children in publicschools. Journal of the American Medical Association, 285(18), 2339–2346.
Roberson, D., Davies, I., & Davidoff, J. (2000). Color categories are not universal: Replications and new evidence froma stone-age culture. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 129(3), 369–398.
Rosch, E. H. (1973). Natural categories. Cognitive Psychology, 4(3), 328–350.
Saffran, J. R., Aslin, R. N., & Newport, E. L. (2004). Statistical learning by 8-month-old infants. New York, NY:
Psychology Press.
Salgado, J. F., Anderson, N., Moscoso, S., Bertua, C., de Fruyt, F., & Rolland, J. P. (2003). A meta-analytic study ofgeneral mental ability validity for different occupations in the European Community. Journal of Applied Psychology,
88(6), 1068–1081.
Salthouse, T. A. (2004). What and when of cognitive aging. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 13(4), 140–
144.
Savage-Rumbaugh, S., & Lewin, R. (1994). Kanzi: The ape at the brink of the human mind. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley& Sons.

210

Schmader, T., Johns, M., & Forbes, C. (2008). An integrated process model of stereotype threat effects on performance.
Psychological Review, 115(2), 336–356.
Scheibe, S., Kunzmann, U., & Baltes, P. B. (2009). New territories of positive life-span development: Wisdom and life
longings. In S. J. E. Lopez & C. R. E. Snyder (Eds.), Oxford handbook of positive psychology (2nd ed., pp. 171–183).
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Schmidt, F. L., & Hunter, J. E. (1998). The validity and utility of selection methods in personnel psychology: Practicaland theoretical implications of 85 years of research findings. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 262–274.
Seagoe, M. V. (1975). Terman and the gifted. Los Altos, CA: William Kaufmann.
Selden, S. (1999). Inheriting shame: The story of eugenics and racism in America. New York, NY: Teachers College
Press.
Senghas, R. J., Senghas, A., & Pyers, J. E. (2005). The emergence of Nicaraguan Sign Language: Questions ofdevelopment, acquisition, and evolution. In S. T. Parker, J. Langer, & C. Milbrath (Eds.), Biology and knowledge
revisited: From neurogenesis to psychogenesis (pp. 287–306). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Seyfarth, R. M., & Cheney, D. L. (1997). Behavioral mechanisms underlying vocal communication in nonhumanprimates. Animal Learning & Behavior, 25(3), 249–267.
Shaw, P., Greenstein, D., Lerch, J., Clasen, L., Lenroot, R., Gogtay, N.,…Giedd, J. (2006). Intellectual ability andcortical development in children and adolescents. Nature, 440(7084), 676–679.
Siegler, R. S. (1992). The other Alfred Binet. Developmental Psychology, 28(2), 179–190.
Simons, G. F., & Fennig, C. D. (2017). Ethnologue: Languages of the world, twentieth edition. Dallas, TX: SIL
International. Online version: http://www.etnologue.com
Simonton, D. K. (1992). The social context of career success and course for 2,026 scientists and inventors. Personality
and Social Psychology Bulletin, 18(4), 452–463.
Simonton, D. K. (2000). Creativity: Cognitive, personal, developmental, and social aspects. American Psychologist,
55(1), 151–158.
Simonton, D. K. (2006). Presidential IQ, openness, intellectual brilliance, and leadership: Estimates and correlations for
42 U.S. chief executives. Political Psychology, 27(4), 511–526.
Skinner, B. F. (1965). Science and human behavior. New York, NY: Free Press.
Spelke, E. S. (2005). Sex differences in intrinsic aptitude for mathematics and science? A critical review. American
Psychologist, 60(9), 950–958.
Steele, C. M., & Aronson, J. (1995). Stereotype threat and the intellectual performance of African Americans. Journalof Personality and Social Psychology, 69, 797–811.
Sternberg, R. J. (1985). Beyond IQ: A triarchic theory of human intelligence. New York, NY: Cambridge University
Press
Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Contemporary theories of intelligence. In W. M. Reynolds & G. E. Miller (Eds.), Handbook of
psychology: Educational psychology (Vol. 7, pp. 23–45). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Our research program validating the triarchic theory of successful intelligence: Reply toGottfredson. Intelligence, 31(4), 399–413.

211

Sternberg, R. J., Wagner, R. K., & Okagaki, L. (1993). Practical intelligence: The nature and role of tacit knowledge inwork and at school. In J. M. Puckett & H. W. Reese (Eds.), Mechanisms of everyday cognition (pp. 205–227).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Stone, J. (2002). Battling doubt by avoiding practice: The effects of stereotype threat on self-handicapping in White
athletes. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28(12), 1667–1678.
Stone, J., Lynch, C. I., Sjomeling, M., & Darley, J. M. (1999). Stereotype threat effects on Black and White athletic
performance. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 77(6), 1213–1227.
Suzuki, L. A., & Valencia, R. R. (1997). Race-ethnicity and measured intelligence: Educational implications. American
Psychologist, 52(10), 1103–1114.
Tarasova, I. V., Volf, N. V., & Razoumnikova, O. M. (2010). Parameters of cortical interactions in subjects with highand low levels of verbal creativity. Human Physiology, 36(1), 80–85.
Terman, L. M., & Oden, M. H. (1959). Genetic studies of genius: The gifted group at mid-life (Vol. 5). Stanford, CA:
Stanford University Press.
Treffert, D. A., & Wallace, G. L. (2004, January 1). Islands of genius. Scientific American, 14–23. Retrieved fromhttp://gordonresearch.com/articles_autism/SciAm-Islands_of_Genius.pdf
Turkheimer, E., Haley, A., Waldron, M., D’Onofrio, B., & Gottesman, I. I. (2003). Socioeconomic status modifies
heritability of IQ in young children. Psychological Science, 14(6), 623–628.
Vogel, G. (1996). School achievement: Asia and Europe top in world, but reasons are hard to find. Science, 274(5291),
1296.
Von Frisch, K. (1956). Bees: Their vision, chemical senses, and language. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
Voyer, D., Voyer, S., & Bryden, M. P. (1995). Magnitude of sex differences in spatial abilities: A meta-analysis andconsideration of critical variables. Psychological Bulletin, 117(2), 250–270.
Wagner, R., & Sternberg, R. (1985). Practical intelligence in real-world pursuits: The role of tacit knowledge. Journalof Personality and Social Psychology, 49(2), 436–458.
Walton, G. M., & Cohen, G. L. (2003). Stereotype lift. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 39(5), 456– 467.
Watkins, C. E., Campbell, V. L., Nieberding, R., & Hallmark, R. (1995). Contemporary practice of psychologicalassessment by clinical psychologists. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 26(1), 54–60.
Weisberg, R. (2006). Creativity: Understanding innovation in problem solving, science, invention, and the arts.
Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Werker, J. F., Pegg, J. E., & McLeod, P. J. (1994). A cross-language investigation of infant preference for infantdirected communication. Infant Behavior & Development, 17(3), 323–333.
Werker, J. F., & Tees, R. C. (2002). Cross-language speech perception: Evidence for perceptual reorganization during
the first year of life. Infant Behavior & Development, 25(1), 121–133.
Wilson, J. Q., & Herrnstein, R. J. (1985). Crime and human nature. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.

212

Chapter 7 Lifespan Development
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Define development and describe the age periods.
Describe the three stages of prenatal development.
Discuss the role of teratogens in prenatal development.
Explain the causes and effects of fetal alcohol spectrum disorders.

The goal of this chapter is to investigate the fundamental, complex, and essential processes ofhuman development. Development refers to the physiological, behavioral, cognitive, and socialemotional changes that occur throughout human life, which are guided by both genetic
predispositions (nature) and environmental influences (nurture). We will begin our study ofdevelopment at the moment of conception, when the sperm unites with the egg, and then consider
prenatal development in the womb. Next, we will focus on the age periods described in Table 7.1.
Each of the age periods of development has its unique physical, cognitive, and emotional changes
that define that period of life. Finally, we will consider the grief process and eventual facing ofdeath.
Table 7.1 Age Periods of Development
Age Period
Prenatal
InfancyChildhood
Adolescence
Emerging Adulthood
Early Adulthood
Middle Adulthood
Late Adulthood

Description
Begins at conception and continues to birth
Begins at birth and continues to one year of age
The period between infancy and the onset of puberty
The period between the onset of puberty and the beginning of adulthood
The period between ages 18 and 25
The period between ages 25 and 45
The period between ages 45 and 65
Ages 65 and older

As we progress through this chapter, we will see that nature plays a substantial role in development.
For example, children around the world reach major language stages in a similar order (ParishMorris, Golinkoff, & Hirsh-Pasek, 2013). However, nurture is also important. We begin to be
influenced by our environments, even while still in the womb, and these influences remain with us
throughout our development. Furthermore, we will see that we play an active role in shaping ourown lives. Our own behavior influences how and what we learn, how people respond to us, andhow we develop as individuals. As you read the chapter, you will see how we learn and adapt tolife’s changes, and this new knowledge may help you better understand and guide your own
personal life journey.

213

Conception and Prenatal Development
Conception occurs when an egg is fertilized by a sperm. As soon as one of the millions of sperm
enters the egg’s coating, the egg immediately responds by both blocking out all other challengers
and at the same time pulling in the single successful sperm.
The Germinal Stage: Within several hours, the23 chromosomes from the egg and the 23
chromosomes from the sperm fuse together,creating a zygote. This is the beginning of thegerminal stage, which lasts from conception to
implantation in the uterine wall, approximately
10-14 days. The zygote continues to travel
down the fallopian tube to the uterus. Fewerthan half of zygotes survive beyond this earliest
stage of development. If the zygote is nolonger viable, it will be flushed out in the
woman’s menstrual cycle, but if it is still viable
when it completes the journey, the zygote will
attach itself to the wall of the uterus.

Figure 7.1 Sperm and Egg

During the germinal stage, the cells in thezygote rapidly divide. Soon the cells begin to differentiate, each taking on a separate function. The
earliest differentiation is between cells on the inside of the zygote and the cells on the outside. The
cells on the inside will begin to form the developing human being. The cells on the outside will
form the protective environment that will provide support for the new life throughout the
pregnancy.
The Embryonic Stage: Once the zygote attaches tothe wall of the uterus, it is known as the embryo.
During the embryonic stage the major internal andexternal organs are formed. This stage will last for
the next 6 weeks, and changes in the embryo’s
appearance will continue rapidly from this point until
birth.

Figure 7.2 Embryo

While the inner layer of embryonic cells is busy
forming the embryo itself, the outer layer is forming
the surrounding protective environment that will help
Photo by Lunar Caustic
the embryo survive the pregnancy. This environment
consists of three major structures: The amniotic sac is
the fluid-filled reservoir in which the embryo (soon to be known as a fetus) will live until birth, andwhich acts as both a cushion against outside pressure and as a temperature regulator. The
placenta is an organ that allows the exchange of nutrients between the embryo and the mother,while at the same time filtering out harmful material. Finally, the umbilical cord links the embryo
directly to the placenta and transfers all material to the fetus. Thus, the placenta and the umbilicalcord protect the fetus from many foreign agents in the mother’s system that might pose a threat.
214

The Fetal Stage: Beginning in the 9th week after conception, the embryo becomes a fetus and thefetal stage begins. Growth is the defining characteristic of the fetal stage. All the major aspects ofthe growing organism have been formed in the embryonic phase, and now the fetus has
approximately seven months to go from weighing less than an ounce to weighing an average of 6 to
8 pounds.
Figure 7.3 Fetus

Source

The fetus begins to take on many of thecharacteristics of a human being, including
sleeping, swallowing, breathing and moving. By thethird month, the fetus is able to curl and open its
fingers, form fists, and wiggle its toes (Berk &Myers, 2016). The fetus begins to develop its
senses, becoming able to distinguish tastes andrespond to sounds. Research has found that the
fetus even develops some initial preferences. A
newborn prefers the mother’s voice to that of a
stranger, the languages heard in the womb overother languages (DeCasper & Fifer, 1980; Moon,
Cooper, & Fifer, 1993), and even the kinds of foods
that the mother ate during the pregnancy(Mennella, Jagnow, & Beauchamp, 2001). If allgoes well, a baby is born sometime around the 3840th week of pregnancy.

How the Environment Can Affect the Vulnerable Fetus
Prenatal development is a complicated process and may not always go as planned. About 45% ofpregnancies result in a miscarriage, often without the mother ever being aware a pregnancy had
occurred (Moore & Persaud, 1993). Although the amniotic sac and the placenta are designed toprotect the embryo, teratogens, substances that can harm the fetus, may cause problems.
Teratogens include general environmental factors, such as air pollution and radiation, but also thecigarettes, alcohol, and drugs that the mother may use.
Cigarette smoking, for example, reduces the blood oxygen for both the mother and fetus and iscorrelated with the infant being born underweight. Another serious threat, Fetal Alcohol Spectrum
Disorders (FASD), is an umbrella term given to a group of conditions that can result frommaternal alcohol drinking and is associated with numerous detrimental developmental effects. The
most serious of these conditions is Fetal Alcohol Syndrome (FAS), which can result in limb, facial,and genital abnormalities, as well as intellectual disabilities. One in about every 500 babies in the
United States is born with FAS, and it is considered one of the leading preventable causes ofintellectual disability in the world today (Maier & West, 2001; Niccols, 1994). There is no known
safe level of alcohol consumption during pregnancy, and consequently the U.S. Centers for Disease
Control and Prevention (CDC) caution against drinking while pregnant (CDC, 2005). Fathers’
alcohol use has also been correlated with teratogenic defects (Champagne, 2010). Additionally,maternal drug abuse is of major concern, and is considered one of the greatest risk factors facing
unborn children (March of Dimes, 2015).
215

Teratogens do not always harm the fetus. They are more likely to do so when they occur in larger
amounts, for longer time periods, and during the more sensitive phases, as when the fetus is
growing most rapidly (Berger, 2005). The most vulnerable period for many of the fetal organs isvery early in the pregnancy during the embryonic stage, often before the mother even knows she ispregnant. Figure 7.2 illustrates the timing of teratogen exposure and the types of structural defects
that can occur during the prenatal period.

Figure 7.4 The Effects of Teratogenic Exposure According to Prenatal Age

Source: http://angel.southseattle.edu

The environment in which the mother is living also has a major impact on infant development(Duncan & Brooks-Gunn, 2000; Haber & Toro, 2004). Children born into homelessness or poverty
are more likely to have mothers who are malnourished, who suffer from domestic violence, stress,
and other psychological problems, and who smoke or abuse drugs. Children born into poverty arealso more likely to be exposed to teratogens. Poverty’s impact may also amplify other issues,
creating substantial problems for healthy child development (Evans & English, 2002; Gunnar &Quevedo, 2007).

216

Figure 7.5

Thinkstock

Mothers normally receive genetic and blood tests during the firstmonths of pregnancy to determine the health of the embryo or fetus.
They may undergo sonogram, ultrasound, amniocentesis, or othertesting. The ultrasound is a test in which sound waves are used to
examine the fetus, and it is one of the main screening tests.
Ultrasounds are used to check the fetus for defects or problems
including neural tube defects, chromosomal abnormalities (such as
Down syndrome), genetic diseases, and other potentially dangerous
conditions. It can also find out the age of the fetus, location of theplacenta, fetal position, movement, breathing and heart rate, amountof amniotic fluid in the uterus, and number of fetuses. Most women
have at least one ultra sound during pregnancy, but if problems arenoted, additional ultrasounds may be recommended. Early diagnosis
of prenatal problems can allow medical treatment to improve thehealth of the fetus.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Development refers to the physical, cognitive, and social-emotional changes that occur
throughout life, which are influenced by both nature and nurture.
Development begins at the moment of conception, when the sperm merges with the egg.
Within a span of 40 weeks, development progresses from a zygote to an embryo andfinally a fetus.
The fetus is connected to the mother through the umbilical cord and the placenta, whichallows the mother to provide nourishment and remove waste. The fetus is protected by theamniotic sac.
The embryo and fetus are vulnerable and may be harmed by the presence of teratogens.
Smoking, alcohol use, and drug use are all likely to be harmful to the developing embryoor fetus, and the mother should refrain from these behaviors during pregnancy or if she
expects to become pregnant.
Other environmental factors, especially homelessness and poverty, have a substantial
negative effect on healthy development.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. What behaviors must a woman avoid engaging in when she decides to try to become
pregnant, or when she finds out she is pregnant? Do you think the ability of a mother toengage in healthy behaviors should influence her choice to have a child?
2. Given the negative effects of poverty on human development, what steps do you think thatsocieties should take to try to reduce poverty?
3. Watch the following video and consider whether a textbook or a video presentation isbetter able to explain prenatal development.
http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/nova/miracle/program.html

217Videos and Activities
1. A free online video program, Seasons of Life, can be accessed at
http://www.learner.org/resources/series54.html. This program includes 5 one-hour
videos covering the lifespan from infancy through old age.
2. Click through the prenatal development milestones at
http://www.visembryo.com/baby/index.html

Physical Development across the LifespanLearning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Describe the skills of the newborn.
Distinguish between fine and gross motor skills.
Define puberty and distinguish between primary and secondary sexual characteristics.
Describe the physical changes in adulthood.

The Newborn
Newborns are biologically prepared to face the world they
are about to experience. Babies are equipped with a varietyof reflexes, such as grasping and sucking, that will help
them survive their first few months of life. As they continue
to learn new routines and manipulate their environments,
these newborn reflexes will dimish.

Figure 7.6

In addition to reflexes, newborns have preferences. They
like sweet tasting foods at first, while becoming more open
Source:to salty items by 4 months of age (Beauchamp, Cowart,
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Category:Newborn_infant#media
viewer/File:Newborn_infant_by_Bonnie_Gruenberg.JPG
Menellia, & Marsh, 1994; Blass & Smith, 1992).
Newborns also prefer the smell of their mothers. An infant
only 6 days old is significantly more likely to turn toward its own mother’s breast pad than to thebreast pad of another baby’s mother (Porter, Makin, Davis, & Christensen, 1992), and within hoursof birth an infant also shows a preference for the face of its own mother (Bushnell, 2001; Bushnell,Sai, & Mullin, 1989).
Although infants are born ready to engage in some activities, they also contribute to their own
development. The child’s knowledge and abilities increase as it babbles, crawls, tastes, grasps, andinteracts with objects in the environment (Gibson, Rosenzweig, & Porter, 1988; Gibson & Pick,
2000; Smith & Thelen, 2003). Parents may help in this process by providing a variety of activities
and experiences for the child. Research has found that animals reared in environments with morenovel objects and that engage in a variety of stimulating activities have more brain synapses andlarger cerebral cortexes. They perform better on learning tasks than animals raised in more
impoverished environments (Juraska, Henderson, & Müller, 1984). Similar effects are likely
218

occurring in children who have opportunities to play, explore, and interact with their environments(Soska, Adolph, & Johnson, 2010).

Infancy and Childhood
During infancy reflexes make way for deliberateactions. Large movements that often involve
several parts of the body are called gross motor
skills. These include actions such as sitting,crawling, and walking. By 3 months mostbabies have enough muscle control that they cansit supported in someone’s lap. By 6 months
they can sit unsupported. Most infants can walkby holding on to someone or something at 9months, and by 12 months many can walk
independently.

Figure 7.7Children jumping rope in Korea at the first full moon
Small movements, such as those involving theof the lunar calendar, one of the biggest traditional
fingers, hands, tongue or lips, care called fineholidays.
motor skills. Hand-eye coordination is limited
Source:in young infants, such that 3-month olds cantouch objects, but often cannot grab objects efficiently unless the object is placed directly in theirhand. Even at 4 months of age, grabbing things can be tricky as babies may overreach an object, or
grab too soon or too late. By 6 months. infants have mastered this skill.

Both gross and fine motor skills continue to improve in childhood as children learn to master the
movement of their body enabling them to draw and write, button coats and tie shoe laces (finemotor skills), roller skate and ride a bicycle (gross motor skills).

Adolescence
Adolescence begins with the onset of puberty, a developmental period in which hormonalchanges cause rapid physical alterations in the body, culminating in sexual maturity. Although thetiming varies to some degree across cultures, the average age range for reaching puberty is
between 9 and 14 years for girls and between 10 and 17 years for boys (Marshall & Tanner, 1986).
Puberty begins when the pituitary gland begins to stimulate the production of the male sex
hormone testosterone in boys and the female sex hormones estrogen and progesterone in girls. The
release of these sex hormones triggers the development of the primary sexual characteristics, thesex organs concerned with reproduction. These changes include the enlargement of the testicles
and the penis in boys, and further development of the ovaries, uterus, and vagina in girls. In
addition, secondary sexual characteristics appear, or those outward changes that indicate
physical maturation, but are not involved in reproduction. These include an enlarged Adam’s
apple, a deeper voice, and pubic and underarm hair in boys, and enlargement of the breasts, hips,
and the appearance of pubic and underarm hair in girls. Both boys and girls experience a rapid
growth spurt during this stage. The growth spurt for girls usually begins at about age 9. For boys,
this occurs 2 years later at age 11 (Abbassi, 1998).
219

A major milestone in puberty for girls is menarche, the first menstrual period, which typicallyoccurs at around 12 or 13 years of age (Anderson, Dannal, & Must, 2003). The age of menarche
varies substantially and is determined by genetics, as well as, by diet and lifestyle, since a certain
amount of body fat is needed to attain menarche. Girls who are very slim, who engage in strenuous
athletic activities, or who are malnourished may begin to menstruate later. Even after menstruation
begins, girls whose level of body fat drops below the critical level may stop having their periods.
The sequence of events for puberty is more predictable than the age at which they occur. Somegirls may begin to grow pubic hair at age 10, but not attain menarche until age 15. In boys, facial
hair may not appear until ten years after the initial onset of puberty. The timing of puberty in bothboys and girls can have significant psychological consequences. Boys who mature earlier attainsome social advantages because they are taller and stronger, and therefore often more popular(Lynne, Graber, Nichols, Brooks-Gunn, & Botvin, 2007). At the same time, however, earlymaturing boys are at greater risk for delinquency and are more likely than their peers to engage inantisocial behaviors, including drug and alcohol use, truancy, and precocious sexual activity. Girls
who mature early may find their maturity stressful, particularly if they experience teasing or sexual
harassment (Mendle, Turkheimer, & Emery, 2007; Pescovitz & Walvoord, 2007). Early-maturing
girls are also more likely to have a lower self-image, and higher rates of depression, anxiety, anddisordered eating than their peers (Ge, Conger, & Elder, 1996).

Emerging, Early, and Middle Adulthood
Emerging adulthood is the period between the late teens and early twenties. Those in their earlytwenties are probably at the peak of their physiological development, including muscle strength,
reaction time, sensory abilities, and cardiac functioning. The reproductive system, motor skills,
strength, and lung capacity are all operating at their best. Most professional athletes are at the topof their game during this stage (Boundless, 2016).
The aging process actually begins during early adulthood. However, compared with childhood andadolescence, the physical changes that occur in adulthood are less dramatic. As individuals passinto their 30s and 40s, their recovery from muscular strain becomes more prolonged, and their
sensory abilities may become somewhat diminished, at least when compared with their prime years,
during the teens and early 20s (Panno, 2004). Visual acuity diminishes somewhat, and many people
in their late 30s and early 40s notice that their eyes are changing and they need eyeglasses,
especially for close work such as reading (presbyopia). Adults in their 30s and 40s may also begin
to suffer some hearing loss (prebycusis) because of damage to the hair cells (cilia) in the inner ear(Lacher-Fougëre & Demany, 2005). It is also during middle adulthood that many people first begin
to suffer from ailments, such as high cholesterol and high blood pressure, as well as, low bonedensity (Shelton, 2006). Corresponding to changes in our physical abilities, our sensory abilities
show some, but not dramatic, decline during this stage.
The stages of both early and middle adulthood bring about a gradual decline in fertility,
particularly for women. Eventually, women experience menopause, the cessation of the menstrual
cycle, which usually occurs at around age 50. Menopause occurs because of the gradual decrease in
the production of the female sex hormones estrogen and progesterone, which slows the production
and release of eggs into the uterus. Women whose menstrual cycles have stopped for 12
consecutive months are considered to have entered menopause (Minkin & Wright, 2004).
220

Researchers have found that women’s responses to menopause are social, as well as physical, andthese responses vary substantially across both individuals and cultures. Some women may react
more negatively to menopause, worrying that they have lost their femininity and that their final
chance to bear children is over. Other women may regard menopause more positively, focusing on
the new freedom from menstrual discomfort and unwanted pregnancy. Most American women go
through menopause with few problems (Carroll, 2016). In India, where older women enjoy moresocial privileges than do younger ones, menopause is typically positively regarded (Avis &Crawford, 2008). Overall, menopause is not seen as universally distressing (Lachman, 2004).
Menopause may have evolutionary benefits. Infants have better chances of survival when theirmothers are younger and have more energy to care for them, and the presence of older women who
do not have children of their own to care for, but who can help out with raising grandchildren, canbe beneficial to the family group. Also, consistent with the idea of an evolutionary benefit ofmenopause, the decline in fertility occurs primarily for women who do most of the child care andwho need the energy of youth to accomplish it. If older women were able to have children, theymight not be as able to effectively care for them.
Most men never completely lose their fertility, but they do experience a gradual decrease intestosterone levels, sperm count, and speed of erection and ejaculation. Reduced strength andenergy may also accompany this decrease in testosterone. Men, as well as women, respond
psychologically to the physical changes of mid-life, however, experiencing a “midlife crisis” is notwell supported by research. Results of a 10-year study conducted by the MacArthur Foundation
Research Network on Successful Midlife Development, based on telephone interviews with over
3,000 midlife adults, suggest that the years between 40 and 60 are ones marked by a sense of wellbeing. Only 23% of their participants reported experiencing a midlife crisis. These crises tended tooccur among the highly educated and were triggered by a major life event rather than out of a fearof aging (Research Network on Successful Midlife Development, 2007).

Late Adulthood
All body systems become slower and decline in function with advanced age. As the heart andvascular system become less efficient, blood pressure rises and increases the risk for heart attackand stroke. In late adulthood, a drop-in lung capacity results in lower levels of oxygen in the blood.
The body also becomes less able to absorb nutrients as the digestive system slows, making a healthy
diet especially important in late adulthood.
A big concern for many older adults is the loss of sensory abilities. The majority of people over age
65 need glasses. Cataracts defined as a thickening of the lens causing cloudy and distorted vision,
glaucoma or an excessive eye pressure causing damage to the optic nerve, and maculardegeneration, a deterioration of the center of the retina, are some visual problems in older adults(Lally & Valentine-French, 2017). Additionally, almost 1 in 4 adults aged 65 to 74 and 1 in 2 aged
75 and older have disabling hearing loss (NIH, 2016). Pride and fear of looking “old” makes manyolder adults reluctant to wear a hearing aid. Yet the inability to follow conversations due to hearing
loss can make the person appear cognitively deficient and can also isolate the elderly from social
interaction. Although there are physical and sensory changes as we age, there is considerable
variation, with some people retaining their abilities well into their senior years.
221

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•

Babies are born with a variety of skills and abilities that contribute to their survival, andthey also actively learn by engaging with their environments.
Reflexes transition into deliberate gross motor and fine motor skills, which continue to berefined during childhood.
Puberty is a developmental period in which hormonal changes cause rapid physicalalterations in the body and sexual maturation.
After peaking in emerging adulthood, muscle strength, reaction time, cardiac output, andsensory abilities begin to decline in early and middle adulthood.
One of the key signs of aging in women is the decline in fertility, culminating inmenopause, which is marked by the cessation of the menstrual period.
All body systems become less efficient in late adulthood.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Watch the first two sections of this video and think about the interactions between teen
brains and their behavior.
http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/shows/teenbrain/view/Videos
1. This free-online program, Growing Old in a New Age, includes 13 one-hour videos on avariety of topics related to aging. http://www.learner.org/resources/series84.html.

222

Cognitive Development across the LifespanLearning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Explain Piaget’s concepts of assimilation and accommodation.
Describe Piaget's stages of cognitive development.
Describe the cognitive changes in adolescence and adulthood.
Define Alzheimer’s disease and describe the risk factors for its development.
Explain Kohlberg's theory of moral reasoning.

Piaget’s Theory of Cognitive Development
Neurological changes during childhood provide children the ability to do some things at certain
ages, and yet make it impossible for them to do other things. This fact was made apparent throughthe groundbreaking work of the Swiss psychologist Jean Piaget. During the 1920s, Piaget wasadministering intelligence tests to children to determine the kinds of logical thinking in whichchildren were capable. In the process of testing the
Figure 7.8 Jean Piaget
children, Piaget became intrigued, not so much by theanswers that the children got right, but more by theanswers they got wrong. Piaget believed that theincorrect answers that the children gave were not mere
shots in the dark, but rather represented specific waysof thinking unique to the children’s developmental
stage. Just as almost all babies learn to roll over before
they learn to sit up by themselves, and learn to crawl
before they learn to walk, Piaget believed that children
gain their cognitive ability in a developmental order.
SourceHis insights that children at different ages think infundamentally different ways led to his stage model of cognitive development.
Piaget argued that children do not just passively learn, but also actively try to make sense of theirworlds. He argued that, as they learn and mature, children develop schemas or patterns ofknowledge in long-term memory that help them remember, organize, and respond to information.
Furthermore, Piaget thought that when children experience new things, they attempt to reconcile
the new knowledge with existing schemas. Piaget believed that the children use two distinct
methods. He called these methods assimilation and accommodation.
When children employ assimilation, they use already developed schemas to understand new
information. If children have learned a schema for horses, then they may call the striped animal
they see at the zoo a horse rather than a zebra. In this case, children fit the existing schema to the
new information and label the new information with the existing knowledge. Accommodation, in
contrast, involves learning new information, and thus changing the schema. When a mother says,“No, honey, that’s a zebra, not a horse,” the child may adapt the schema to fit the new stimulus,
learning that there are different types of four-legged animals, only one of which is a horse (seeFigure 7.9).
223

Figure 7.9 Assimilation and Accommodation

SourcePiaget’s most important contribution to understanding cognitive development, and the fundamental
aspect of his theory, was the idea that development occurs in unique and distinct stages, with eachstage occurring at a specific time, in a sequential manner, and in a way, that allows the child tothink about the world using new capacities. Piaget’s stages of cognitive development aresummarized in Table 7.2.
The first developmental stage for Piaget was the sensorimotor stage, the cognitive stage thatbegins at birth and lasts until around the age of 2. It is defined by the direct physical interactions
that babies have with the objects around them. During this stage, babies form their first schemas
by using their primary senses, that is they stare at, listen to, reach for, hold, shake, and taste thethings in their environments.

224

Table 7.2 Piaget’s Stages of Cognitive Development
Stage

Approximate
Age Range

Characteristics

Sensorimotor

Birth to about 2
years

The child experiences the world through reflexes, the Object permanence
fundamental senses of seeing, hearing, touching, andtasting and motor movements.

Preoperational

2 to 7 years

Children acquire the ability to internally represent the Loss of egocentrism
world through language and mental imagery. They
also view the world from their own perspectives.

Concrete
operational

7 to 11 years

Children become able to think logically, but notConservation
abstractly. They can increasingly perform operations
on objects.

Formaloperational

11 years toadulthood

Adolescents can think systematically, can reason
about abstract concepts, and can understand ethics
and scientific reasoning.

Stage Attainment

Abstract logic

During the sensorimotor stage, babies’ use of their senses to perceive the world is so central totheir understanding that whenever babies do not directly perceive objects, as far as they areconcerned, the objects do not exist. Piaget found, for instance, that if he first interested babies in a
toy and then covered the toy with a blanket, children who were younger than 6 months of age
would act as if the toy had disappeared completely. They never tried to find it under the blanket,
but would nevertheless smile and reach for it when the blanket was removed. Piaget found that itwas not until about 8 months that the children realized that the object was merely covered and notgone. Piaget used the term object permanence to refer to the child’s ability to know that an object
exists even when the object cannot be perceived. Children younger than about 8 months of age do
not understand object permanence.
At about 2 years of age, and until about 7 years of age, children internally represent the world
through language and mental imagey and move into the preoperational stage. During this stage,
new language skills and symbolic thinking fuel an explosion of communication and "pretend" play.
However, the child's understanding of events is intuitive rather than based on logical reasoning. The
thinking is preoperational meaning that the child lacks the ability to operate on or transform
objects mentally. In one study that showed the extent of this inability, DeLoache (1987) showedchildren a room within a small dollhouse. Inside the room, a small toy was visible behind a small
couch. The researchers took the children to another lab room, which was an exact replica of thedollhouse room, but full-sized. When children who were 2.5 years old were asked to find the toy,
they did not know where to look. They were simply unable to make the transition across thechanges in room size. Three-year-old children, on the other hand, immediately looked for the toy
behind the couch, demonstrating that they were improving their operational skills.

225

The inability of young children to view transitions also leads
them to be egocentric or unable to readily see and understandother people’s viewpoints. Piaget’s classic experiment on
egocentrism involved showing children a three-dimensionalmodel of a mountain and asking them to describe what a dollthat is looking at the mountain from a different angle might see(see Figure 7.10). Children tend to choose a picture that
represents their own, rather than the doll’s view. By age 7
children are less self-centered. However, even younger
children when speaking to others tend to use different sentence
structures and vocabulary when addressing a younger child oran older adult. This indicates some awareness of the views ofothers.

Figure 7.10 “What does
Dolly see?”

SourceHowever, more recent developmental psychologists have challenged Piaget’s belief in theegocentrity of young children, and instead support theory of mind or the ability to take anotherperson’s viewpoint, which increases rapidly during early childhood. In one demonstration of thedevelopment of theory of mind, a researcher shows a child a video of another child (let’s call her
Anna) putting a ball in a red box. Then Anna leaves the room, and the video shows that while she isgone, a researcher moves the ball from the red box into a blue box. As the video continues, Anna
comes back into the room. The child is then asked to point to the box where Anna will probably
look to find her ball. Children who are younger than 4 years of age typically are unable tounderstand that Anna does not know that the ball has been moved, and they predict that she will
look for it in the blue box. By 5 years of age the majority of children realize that different people
can have different viewpoints, and although she will be wrong, Anna will nevertheless think thatthe ball is still in the red box.
The concrete operational stage, occurring at around 7 years of age, is characterized by more
frequent and more accurate use of logical transformations and operations. In addition, the childcan think more logically about physical reality. A fourth grader understands that transforming aball of clay from a snake to a ball does not change the amount of clay. School age children
understand operations can be reversed, so they can learn to check their subtraction problems byadding. For example, 2+3 = 5, so 5 - 3 should = 2.
An important milestone during the concrete operational stage is the development of conservationor the understanding that changes in the form of an object do not necessarily mean changes in thequantity of the object. Children younger than 7 years generally think that a glass of milk that is tallholds more milk than a glass of milk that is shorter and wider, and they continue to believe thiseven when they see the same milk poured back and forth between the glasses. This is because
young children exhibit centration whereby they focus only on one dimension (the height of theliquid in the glass) and ignore the other dimension (the width of the glass). However, when children
reach the concrete operational stage, their abilities to understand such transformations make themaware that, although the milk looks different in the different glasses, the amount must be the same.
Children in the stage of concrete operations decenter and use a process called reversibility or theunderstanding that some things that have been changed can be returned to their original state tothink about transitions and achieve conservation.
226

Figure 7.11

Figure 7.12

Two glasses with an equal amount of liquid

The liquid from one of the short glasses has beenpoured into a taller, skinnier glass. A child thatcannot conserve would assume the taller glass has
more liquid than the shorter glass

Source:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piaget%27s_concepts_of_conservation#mediaviewer/Fi
le:Conservation1.jpeg

Source:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piaget%27s_concepts_of_conservation#mediaviewer/Fi
le:Conservation2.jpeg

At about 11 years of age, children enter the formal operational stage, which is marked by theability to think in abstract terms and to use scientific and philosophical lines of thought. Children
in the formal operational stage are better able to systematically test alternative ideas to determine
their influences on outcomes. For instance, rather than haphazardly changing different aspects of asituation that allows no clear conclusions to be drawn, they systematically make changes in one
thing at a time and observe what difference that particular change makes. They learn to use
deductive reasoning, such as “if this, then that,” and they become capable of imagining situations
that “might be,” rather than just those that actually exist. They can test hypotheses mentally rather
than through trial and error.
Piaget’s theories have made a substantial and lasting contribution to developmental psychology.
His contributions include the idea that children are not merely passive receptacles of information,
but rather actively engage in acquiring new knowledge and making sense of the world aroundthem. This general idea has generated many other theories of cognitive development, each
designed to help us better understand the development of the child’s information-processing skills(Klahr & McWinney, 1998; Shrager & Siegler, 1998). Furthermore, the extensive research that
Piaget’s theory has stimulated has generally supported his beliefs about the order in which
cognition develops. Piaget’s work has also been applied in many domains. For instance, manyteachers make use of Piaget’s stages to develop educational approaches aimed at the level for whichchildren are developmentally prepared (Driscoll, 1994; Levin, Siegler, & Druyan, 1990).
Over the years, Piagetian ideas have been refined. For example, it is now believed that object
permanence develops gradually, rather than more immediately, as a true stage model would
predict, and that it can sometimes develop much earlier than Piaget expected. Baillargeon and hercolleagues (Baillargeon, 2004; Wang, Baillargeon, & Brueckner, 2004) had babies watch a rotating
screen, which moved like a drawbridge back and forth. Then a wooden box was placed in the pathof the rotating screen. The researchers had two scenarios. In the “possible event” the screen moved227upward hiding the box and then stopped part way, then rotated back down revealing the box again.
In the “impossible event” the screen rotated upward hiding the box, but instead of stopping it went
all the way back and then rotated forward again revealing the box. Babies who saw the impossible
event looked longer than did babies who witnessed the possible event. These data suggest that thebabies were aware that the object still existed even though it was hidden behind the screen, and thusthat they were displaying object permanence as early as 3 ½ months of age, rather than at 8 months,
as Piaget suggested.
Another factor that might have surprised Piaget is the extent to which a child’s social surroundings
influence learning. In some cases, children progress to new ways of thinking and retreat to oldones depending on the type of task they are performing, the circumstances they find themselves in,and the nature of the language used to instruct them (Courage & Howe, 2002).
Children in different cultures show somewhat different patterns of cognitive development. Dasen(1972) found that children in non-Western cultures moved to the next developmental stage about ayear later than did children from Western cultures, and that level of schooling also influenced
cognitive development. In short, Piaget’s theory probably understated the contribution of social
environmental factors to cognitive development.

Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Although the most rapid cognitive changes occur during childhood, the brain continues to develop
throughout adolescence and adulthood (Weinberger, Elvevåg, & Giedd, 2005). Duringadolescence, the brain continues to form new neural connections, but also casts off unused neurons
and connections (Blakemore, 2008). As teenagers mature, the prefrontal cortex, the area of the brain
responsible for reasoning, planning, and problem solving, also continues to develop (Goldberg,
2001). Myelin, the fatty tissue that forms around axons and neurons and helps speed transmissions
between different regions of the brain, also continues to grow (Rapoport et al., 1999).
Adolescents often seem to act impulsively, rather than thoughtfully, and this may be, in part,
because the development of the prefrontal cortex is slower than the development of the emotionalparts of the brain, including the limbic system (Blakemore, 2008). Furthermore, the hormonal surgethat is associated with puberty, which primarily influences emotional responses, may create strong
emotions and lead to impulsive behavior. It has been hypothesized that adolescents may engage inrisky behavior, such as smoking, drug use, dangerous driving, and unprotected sex, in part, because
they have not yet fully acquired the mental ability to curb impulsive behavior or to make entirely
rational judgments (Steinberg, 2007).
The new cognitive abilities that are attained during adolescence may also give rise to new feelingsof egocentrism. One type of adolescent egocentrism is the personal fable in which adolescents
construct a fantasy of their personal future. They may imagine themselves as a famous actress orfighter pilot. This personal fable makes them more likely to take risks, since they do not imagine
themselves dying or injured. They also may not listen to their parent's advice about avoiding danger(Elkind, 1978).
Teenagers are also likely to be highly self-conscious, often creating an imaginary audience in thatthey feel that everyone is constantly watching them (Goossens, Beyers, Emmen, & van Aken,
2002). Because teens are egocentric, they mistakenly believe that others must be thinking about
228them too (Rycek, Stuhr, McDermott, Benker, & Swartz, 1998). Worrying about what others arethinking can sometimes lead adolescents to negative emotions and behavior.

Cognitive Development in Adulthood
Cognitive development continues during early and middle adulthood. Formal operations, theabstract, hypothetical thinking that emerged in adolescence, are focused on problem solving, while
the postformal thinking of adulthood is more reflective. Postformal thinking includes problem
finding (Arlin, 1975) and dialectical reasoning (Riegel, 1973). A "solution" can be evaluated bylooking for the possible problems that may result from that action. A new solution may emerge
from this evaluation. For example, a teen in formal operations may decide to join the military sothat college tuition can be paid. An adult in postformal operations would also evaluate all of thepossible problems with this solution. This evaluation might lead to a new solution.
Adult thinkers are also better able to integrate intuition, emotion, and experience into their abstract
reasoning. For example, a person might consider whether divorce is a valid response to an
unhappy marriage. A teen in formal operations might reason using an abstract concept. This
concept might be an individual’s right to the “pursuit of happiness” as guaranteed by theconstitution. A more mature thinker might also evaluate the emotions involved and consider how
much of the unhappiness is related to other causes. This adult reasoning would also include an
intuitive understanding of how the divorce might impact each individual. Based on pastexperience, the adult might also consider whether or not the unhappiness is temporary andcorrectable within the marriage. Individuals using formal and postformal thinking may reach thesame conclusions, but the reasoning process of the mature thinker might include more variables.
This ability to engage in multidimensional, reflective thinking may be related to biologicalmaturation. The prefrontal cortex of the brain continues to mature until at least the age of 25.
Research evidence suggests that this biological maturation parallels the cognitive maturation that istaking place in early adulthood (Yurgelun-Todd, 2007).
An important factor in our cognitive abilities as we age appears to be our expectations. In one
important study concerning the role of expectations on memory, Levy and Langer (1994) foundthat, although young American and Chinese students performed equally well on cognitive tasks,
older Americans performed significantly more poorly on those tasks than did their Chinesecounterparts. Furthermore, this difference was explained by beliefs about aging. In both cultures,the older adults who believed that memory declined with age also showed more actual memory
declines than did the older adults who believed that memory did not decline with age. In addition,
more older Americans than older Chinese believed that memory declined with age, and as you cansee in Figure 7.13, older Americans performed more poorly on the memory tasks.

229

Figure 7.13

Is Memory Influenced by Cultural Stereotypes? Levy and Langer (1994) found that although younger samples did
not differ, older Americans performed significantly more poorly on memory tasks than did older Chinese, and thatthese differences were due to different expectations about memory in the two cultures.
Source: Adapted from Levy, B., & Langer, E. (1994). Aging free from negative stereotypes: Successful memory in China among the American deaf. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 66(6), 989–997.

Whereas it was once believed that almost all older adults suffered from a generalized memory loss,
research now indicates that healthy older adults actually experience only some particular types ofmemory deficits, while other types of memory remain relatively intact or may even improve withage. Older adults do seem to process information more slowly as it may take them longer toevaluate information and to understand language. It takes them longer than it does younger people
to recall a word that they know, even though they are perfectly able to recognize the word once
they see it (Burke, Shafto, Craik, & Salthouse, 2008). Older adults also have more difficulty
inhibiting and controlling their attention (Persad, Abeles, Zacks, & Denburg, 2002) making them,for example, more likely to talk about topics that are not relevant to the topic at hand whenconversing (Pushkar et al., 2000).

Neurocognitive Disorder and Alzheimer’s Disease
Some older adults suffer from biologically based cognitive impairments in which the brain is so
adversely affected by aging, that it becomes very difficult for the person to continue to function
effectively. A Neurocognitive disorder is defined as a progressive neurological disease that
includes loss of cognitive abilities significant enough to interfere with everyday behaviors.
Alzheimer’s disease is a form of this disorder that, over a period of years, leads to a loss ofemotions, cognitions, and physical functioning, and is ultimately fatal. Neurocognitive disorders
and Alzheimer’s disease are most likely to be observed in individuals who are 65 and older (Hebert
et al., 1995). Neurocognitive disorders and Alzheimer’s disease both produce a gradual decline infunctioning of the brain cells that produce the neurotransmitter acetylcholine. Without thisneurotransmitter, the neurons are unable to adequately communicate, leaving the brain less and lessfunctional. Neurocognitive disorders can be diagnosed as either major or mild. Mild
neurocognitive disorders are an earlier and possibly more treatable form of the disorder.
230

Figure 7.14 A Healthy Brain (Left) Versus a Brain with Advanced Alzheimer’s Disease(Right)Neurocognitive disorders and Alzheimer’s are, in part, heritable, but there is increasing evidence
that the environment also plays a role. A Western diet, high in saturated fats and simple
carbohydrates, is associated with developing Alzheimer's disease (Kanoski & Davidson, 2011).
Current research is helping us understand many things that older adults may be able to do that will
help them slow down or prevent the negative cognitive outcomes of aging, including
neurocognitive disorders and Alzheimer’s (Pushkar, Bukowski, Schwartzman, Stack, & White,2007). Older adults who continue to keep their minds active by engaging in cognitive activities,
such as reading or doing crossword puzzles, who maintain social interactions with others, and who
keep themselves physically fit have a greater chance of maintaining their mental acuity than those
who do not (Cherkas et al., 2008; Verghese et al., 2003).
Most research on this topic, however, is correlational. Although behavioral factors may predict who
is mentally healthy, there is insufficient evidence that you can control cognitive decline in old age
by staying active (Plassman, Williams, Burke, Holsinger, & Benjamin, 2010). Staying active will
not hurt, though. Since it contributes to overall health and quality of life, participating in social,physical, and mental activity is a good plan for anyone. Exercise, in particular, will increase bloodflow to the brain and improve almost anyone's cognitive performance.

Developing Moral Reasoning: Kohlberg’s Theory
The independence that comes with adolescence and adulthood requires independent thinking, as
well as the development of morality defined as standards of behavior that are generally agreed onwithin a culture to be right or proper. Just as Piaget believed that children’s cognitive development
follows specific patterns, Lawrence Kohlberg (1984) argued that we learn our moral values throughactive thinking and reasoning, and that moral development follows a series of stages. Kohlberg's six
stages are generally organized into three levels of moral reasons. To study moral development,
Kohlberg posed moral dilemmas to children, teenagers, and adults, such as the following:
A man’s wife is dying of cancer and there is only one drug that can save her. The only place to
get the drug is at the store of a pharmacist who is known to overcharge people for drugs. The
man can only pay $1,000, but the pharmacist wants $2,000, and refuses to sell it to him for
less, or to let him pay later. Desperate, the man later breaks into the pharmacy and steals the
medicine. Should he have done that? Was it right or wrong? Why?
231

Kohlberg concluded, on the basis of their responses to the moral questions, that as we develop
intellectually we can pass through different stages of moral reasoning. In the first stage, moral
reasoning is based on concepts of punishment. The child believes that if the consequence for an
action is punishment, then the action was wrong. In the second, slightly more advanced stage,
children base their thinking on self-interest and reward. "You scratch my back, I'll scratch yours."
Adults can also fall into these stages, particularly when they are under pressure. Together, these
two stages constitute a level Kohlberg described as preconventional morality or morality that
focuses on self-interest. Punishment is avoided and rewards are sought.
In the second level, conventional morality, people care about the effect of their actions on others.
Older children, some adolescents, and adults use this reasoning. In the third stage, the person
wants to please others. At a slightly more advanced stage four, the person acknowledges theimportance of social norms or laws and wants to be a good member of the group or society.
In the third level, postconventional morality, abstract reasons are used to determine right andwrong. In the fifth stage, laws are recognized as social contracts established for the good ofeveryone and that can transcend the self and social convention. For example, the man should breakinto the store because, even if it is against the law, the wife needs the drug and her life is more
important than the consequences the man might face for breaking the law. The reasons for the laws,
like justice, equality, and dignity, are used to evaluate decisions and interpret laws. In the sixth
stage, individually determined universal ethical principles are weighed to make moral decisions.
Kohlberg said that few adults ever reach this stage. Kohlberg’s stages are reviewed in Table 7.3.
Although research has supported Kohlberg’s idea that moral reasoning changes from an early
emphasis on punishment and social rules and regulations to an emphasis on more general ethicalprinciples, as with Piaget’s approach, Kohlberg’s stage model is probably too simple. For one,people may use higher levels of reasoning for some types of problems, but revert to lower levels insituations where doing so is more consistent with their goals or beliefs (Rest, 1979). Second, it has
been argued that the stage model is particularly appropriate for Western, rather than non-Western,samples in which allegiance to social norms (such as respect for authority) may be particularly
important (Haidt, 2001). In addition, there is frequently little correlation between how we score on
the moral stages and how we behave in real life.
Perhaps the most important critique of Kohlberg’s theory is that it may describe the moral
development of males better than it describes that of females. Gilligan (1982) has argued that,
because of differences in their socialization, males tend to value principles of justice and rights,
whereas females value caring for and helping others. Although there is little evidence for a genderdifference on Kohlberg’s stages of moral development (Turiel, 1998), it is true that girls andwomen tend to focus more on issues of caring, helping, and connecting with others than do boys
and men (Jaffee & Hyde, 2000).

232

Table 7.3 Lawrence Kohlberg’s Levels of Moral Reasoning
Age

Moral Level

Description

Young children- Preconventional Stage 1: Focus is on self-interest and punishment is avoided. The
man shouldn’t steal the drug, as he may get caught and go to jail.
usually prior to morality
age 9Stage 2: Rewards are sought. A person at this level will argue thatthe man should steal the drug because he does not want to lose hiswife who takes care of him.

Older children, Conventional
adolescents, and morality
most adults

Stage 3: Focus is on how situational outcomes impact others andwanting to please and be accepted. The man should steal the drug
because that is what good husbands do.
Stage 4: People make decisions based on laws or formalized rules.
The man should obey the law because stealing is a crime.

Rare withadolescents andfew adults

Postconventional Stage 5: Individuals employ abstract reasoning to justify
morality
behaviors. The man should steal the drug because laws can be
unjust and you have to consider the whole situation.
Stage 6: Moral behavior is based on self-chosen ethical principles.
The man should steal the drug because life is more important thanproperty.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Piaget’s theory of cognitive development proposes that children use both assimilation andaccommodation to develop functioning schemas of the world.
According to Piaget, children develop in a specific series of sequential stages:
Sensorimotor, preoperational, concrete operational and formal operational.
Piaget’s theories have had a major impact, but they have also been negatively critiquedand expanded.
The cerebral cortex continues to develop during adolescence and early adulthood,
enabling improved reasoning, judgment, impulse control, and long-term planning.
The thinking of adults is more reflective and is able to integrate intuition, emotion, andexperience into their abstract reasoning.
Expectancies about change in aging vary across cultures and may influence how people
respond to getting older.
A portion of the elderly suffer from age-related brain diseases, such as a neurocognitive
disorder that includes significant loss of cognitive abilities, and Alzheimer’s disease, afatal form of a neurocognitive disorder that is related to changes in the cerebral cortex.

233

•
•

Kohlberg’s theory proposes that moral reasoning is divided into the following levels:
Preconventional morality, conventional morality, and postconventional morality.
Kohlberg’s theory of morality has been expanded and challenged, particularly by Gilligan,
who has focused on differences in morality between males and females.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Give an example of a situation in which you or someone else might show cognitive
assimilation and cognitive accommodation. In what cases do you think each process ismost likely to occur?
2. Based on what you learned in this chapter, do you think that people should be allowed todrive at age 16? Why or why not? At what age do you think they should be allowed tovote and to drink alcohol?
3. Based on the information you have read in this chapter, what would you tell your parents
about how they can best maintain healthy physical and cognitive function into lateadulthood?

Videos
1. This free, online video series, The Whole Child, provides information on a variety of

topics related to caring for children ages 0-5 years.
http://www.learner.org/resources/series59.html
2. Video clip of Renee Baillargeon’s research on object permanence
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hwgo2O5Vk_g
3. Video Clip: People Being Interviewed About Kohlberg’s Stages
http://www.youtube.com/v/zY4etXWYS84

234

Social Development across the LifespanLearning Objectives
1. List and describe Erik Erikson's psychosocial developmental crises.
2. Explain the needs for contact comfort and for attachment for infants.
3. Describe the patterns of attachment between infants and their caregivers according to
Ainsworth.
4. Explain the difference between longitudinal and cross-sectional research designs.
5. Describe identity development in adolescence.
6. Describe the use of authoritarian, authoritative, permissive, and rejecting-neglecting parenting
styles.
7. Describe the factors that may lead to a more positive retirement.
8. Describe the five phases of grief according to Kübler-Ross.

Childhood is a time in which changes occur quickly. During this time the child learns to actively
manipulate and control the environment, and is first exposed to the requirements of society.
According to Erik Erikson (1963), children need to learn to control themselves, to explore theworld, to become self-reliant, and to make their own way in the environment.
The psychologist and psychoanalyst Erik Erikson (1963)
proposed a model of life-span development that provides a useful
guideline for thinking about the changes we experiencethroughout life. Erikson broke with Freud’s emphasis on
sexuality as the cornerstone of social-emotional development,
and instead suggested that social relationships fostereddevelopment. Erikson proposed that each period of life has aunique challenge or crisis that the person who reaches it mustface. This is referred to as a psychosocial crisis. According to
Erikson, successful development involves dealing with andresolving the goals and demands of each of these crises in apositive way. These crises are usually called stages, althoughthat is not the term Erikson used. If a person does not resolve acrisis successfully, it may hinder their ability to deal with latercrises. For example, the person who does not develop a sense oftrust (Erikson’s first crisis) may find it challenging as an adult toform a positive intimate relationship (Erikson’s sixth crisis). Or an individual who does notdevelop a clear sense of purpose and identity (Erikson’s fifth crisis) may become self-absorbed andstagnate rather than working toward the betterment of others (Erikson’s seventh crisis). However,most individuals are able to successfully complete the eight crises of his theory (see Table 7.4).
Figure 7.15 Erik Erikson

235

Table 7.4 Crises of Development as Proposed by Erik Erikson
Age Range
Birth to 12 to
18 months

Psychosocial Crisis
Trust versus Mistrust

Positive Resolution of Crisis
The infant develops a feeling of trust in his or her caregivers.

18 months to
3 years

Autonomy versus Shameand Doubt

The child learns what he or she can and cannot control anddevelops a sense of free will.

3 to 6 years

Initiative versus Guilt

6 to 12 years

Industry versus Inferiority

12 to 18 years

Identity versus Role
Confusion
Intimacy versus Isolation

The child learns to become independent by exploring,manipulating, and taking action.
The child learns to do things well or correctly according tostandards set by others, particularly in school.
The adolescent develops a well-defined and positive sense of self
in relationship to others.
The adult develops the ability to give and receive love and to
make long-term commitments.
The adult develops an interest in guiding the development of thenext generation, often by becoming a parent.
The older adult develops acceptance of his or her life as it was
lived.

18 to 40 years
40 to 65 years
65 to death

Generativity versus
Stagnation
Ego Integrity versus Despair

Erikson’s theory of psychosocial development will be used as the framework for understanding
subsequent topics in social-emotional development across the lifespan, including attachment,
identity formation, parenting, retirement, and death and dying.

Social Development in Childhood: Attachment
The development of close and meaningful social relationships is one of the most important featuresof childhood. The emotional bonds that we develop with those with whom we feel closest, andparticularly the bonds that an infant develops with the mother or primary caregiver, are referred to
as attachment (Cassidy & Shaver, 1999).
Figure 7.16

Children develop appropriate attachment styles through their interactions with caregivers.

© Thinkstock

As late as the 1930s, psychologists believed that children who were raised in institutions, such asorphanages, and who received good physical care and proper nourishment, would develop
normally, even if they had little interaction with their caretakers. Studies by the developmental
psychologist John Bowlby (1953) and others, however, showed that these children did not develop236normally. They were usually sickly, emotionally slow, and generally unmotivated. Theseobservations helped make it clear that normal infant development requires successful attachmentwith a caretaker.
Harlow’s Research: In one classic study showing the importance of attachment, Wisconsin
University psychologists Harry and Margaret Harlow investigated the responses of young monkeys.
The infants were separated from their biological mothers, and two surrogate mothers wereintroduced to their cages. One, the wire mother, consisted of a round wooden head, a mesh of cold
metal wires, and a bottle of milk from which the baby monkey could drink. The second mother wasa foam-rubber form wrapped in a heated terry-cloth blanket. The infant monkeys went to the wire
mother for food, but they overwhelmingly preferred and spent significantly more time with thewarm terry-cloth mother. The warm terry-cloth mother provided no food, but did provide comfort(Harlow, 1958). The infant's need for physical closeness and touching is referred to as contact
comfort. Contact comfort is believed to be the foundation for attachment.
The Harlows’ studies confirmed that babies have social, as well as, physical needs. Both monkeys
and human babies need a secure base that allows them to feel safe. From this base, they can gain
the confidence they need to venture out and explore their worlds. Erikson was in agreement on theimportance of a secure base, arguing that the most important goal of infancy was the developmentof a basic sense of trust in one’s caregivers.
The Strange Situation Technique: Developmental psychologist Mary Ainsworth, a student ofJohn Bowlby, was interested in studying the development of attachment in infants. Ainsworth
created a laboratory test that measured an infant’s attachment to his or her parent. The test is called
the strange situation because it is conducted in a context that is unfamiliar to the child andtherefore likely to heighten the child’s need for his or her parent (Ainsworth, Blehar, Waters, &Wall, 1978). During the procedure that lasts about 20 minutes, the parent and the infant are first left
alone, while the infant explores the room full of toys. Then a strange adult enters the room and talks
for a minute to the parent, after which the parent leaves the room. The stranger stays with the infant
for a few minutes, and then the parent again enters and the stranger leaves the room. During theentire session, a video camera records the child’s behaviors, which are later coded by trainedcoders.
On the basis of their behaviors, the children are categorized into one of four groups, where eachgroup reflects a different kind of attachment relationship with the caregiver.
••

A child with a secure attachment style usually explores freely while the mother is present
and engages with the stranger. The child may be upset when the mother departs, but is also
happy to see the mother return.
A child with an ambivalent attachment style (sometimes called insecure-resistant) iswary about the situation in general, particularly the stranger, and stays close or evenclings to the mother rather than exploring the toys. When the mother leaves, the child isextremely distressed and is ambivalent when she returns. The child may rush to the motherbut then fail to cling to her when she picks up the child.

237

•

•

A child with an avoidant attachment style (sometimes called insecure-avoidant) will
avoid or ignore the mother, showing little emotion when the mother departs or returns. The
child may run away from the mother when she approaches. The child will not explore very
much, regardless of who is there, and the stranger will not be treated much differently
from the mother.
A child with a disorganized attachment style seems to have no consistent way of copingwith the stress of the strange situation. The child may cry during the separation, but avoid
the mother when she returns, or the child may approach the mother, but then freeze or fallto the floor.

Although some cultural differences in attachment styles have been found (Rothbaum, Weisz, Pott,
Miyake, & Morelli, 2000), research has also found that overall the proportion of children who fall
into each of the attachment categories is relatively constant across cultures. Figure 7.17
identifies the percentage of children with different attachment styles.
Figure 7.17

SourceFactors Determining Attachment: You might
wonder whether differences in attachment style
are determined more by the child (nature) ormore by the parents (nurture). Most
developmental psychologists believe thatsocialization is primary, arguing that a childbecomes securely attached when the parent isavailable and able to meet the needs of the childin a responsive and appropriate manner, but thatthe insecure styles occur when the parent isinsensitive and responds inconsistently to thechild’s needs. In a direct test of this idea, Dutch
researcher van den Boom (1994) randomly
assigned some babies’ mothers to a training
session in which they learned to better respondto their children’s needs. The research foundthat these mothers’ babies were more likely toshow a secure attachment style in comparison to
the mothers in a control group that did notreceive training.

Severe deprivation of parental attachment can lead to serious problems. According to studies ofchildren who have not been given warm, nurturing care may show developmental delays, failure to
thrive, and attachment disorders (Bowlby, 1982). Failure to thrive is the diagnosis for an infant
who does not grow, develop, or gain weight on schedule. In addition, postpartum depression cancause even a well-intentioned mother to neglect her infant and negatively impact the attachment
relationship.
The attachment behavior of the child is also likely influenced, at least in part, by temperament, theinnate personality characteristics of the infant. Some children are warm, friendly, and responsive,
whereas others tend to be more irritable, less manageable, and difficult to console. These
differences may also play a role in attachment (Gillath, Shaver, Baek, & Chun, 2008; Seifer,
238

Schiller, Sameroff, Resnick, & Riordan, 1996). It seems safe to say that attachment, like most otherdevelopmental processes, is affected by an interplay of genetic and socialization influences.

Research Focus: Using a Longitudinal Research Design to Assess the Stability ofAttachment
You might wonder whether the attachment style displayed by infants has much influence laterin life. In fact, research has found that the attachment styles of children predict their emotions
and their behaviors many years later (Cassidy & Shaver, 1999).
Two approaches to examining the effect of age on development include cross-sectional andlongitudinal. In a cross-sectional research design, age comparisons are made between samples
of different people at different ages at one time. Cross-sectional studies have a major advantage
in that the scientist does not have to wait for years to pass to get results. However, theinterpretations drawn from cross-sectional studies may be confounded by cohort effects. Cohort
effects refer to the possibility that differences in cognition or behavior may be caused bydifferences that are unrelated to the changes in age. The differences might instead be due toenvironmental factors that affect an entire age group.
Psychologists have studied the persistence of attachment styles over time using longitudinal
research designs in which individuals in the sample are followed and contacted over an
extended period of time, often over multiple developmental stages. In one such study, Waters,
Merrick, Treboux, Crowell, and Albersheim (2000) examined the extent of stability and change
in attachment patterns from infancy to early adulthood. In their research, 60 middle-class infants
who had been tested in the strange situation at 1 year of age were contacted 20 years later andinterviewed using a measure of adult attachment. Waters and colleagues found that 72% of theinfants received the same secure versus insecure attachment classification in early adulthood asthey had received as infants. The adults who changed categorization, usually from secure toinsecure, were primarily those who had experienced traumatic events, such as the death or
divorce of parents, severe illnesses contracted by the parents or the children themselves, or
physical or sexual abuse by a family member.
In addition to finding that people generally display the same attachment style over time,
longitudinal studies have also found that the attachment classification received in infancy, asassessed using the strange situation or other measures, predicts many childhood and adultbehaviors. Securely attached infants have closer, more harmonious relationship with peers, areless anxious and aggressive, and are better able to understand others’ emotions than are those
who were categorized as insecure as infants (Lucas-Thompson & Clarke-Stewart, (2007).
Securely attached adolescents also have more positive peer and romantic relationships than theirless securely attached counterparts (Carlson, Sroufe, & Egeland, 2004).
Conducting longitudinal research is a very difficult task, but one that has substantial rewards.
When the sample is large enough and the time frame long enough, the potential findings of sucha study can provide rich and important information about how people change over time and thecauses of those changes. The drawbacks of longitudinal studies include the cost and the difficultyof finding a large sample that can be tracked accurately over the many years it takes to get the239

data. In addition, because the results are delayed over an extended period, the research questions
posed at the beginning of the study may become less relevant as the research continues.

Social Development in Adolescence: Identity
According to Erikson, the main social task of the adolescent is the search for a unique identity andthe ability to answer the question, “Who am I?” In the search for identity, the adolescent may
experience role confusion in which he or she is balancing or choosing among identities. Teens
may also take on negative or undesirable identities, or, if things are not going well, give up looking
for an identity altogether.
One approach to assessing identity development was proposed by James Marcia (1980). In his
approach, adolescents are asked questions regarding their exploration of and commitment to issues
related to occupation, politics, religion, and sexual behavior. The responses to the questions allow
the researchers to classify the adolescent into one of four identity statuses (see Figure 7.18).
Figure 7.18 James Marcia’s Statuses of Identity Development

Exploration
Yes

Commitment
No

Yes
Identity-achievement status

No
Identity-foreclosure status

The individual has attained a coherent
and committed identity based on
personal decisions.

The individual has not engaged in
any identity experimentation, but
has established an identity based on
the choices or values of others.

Identity-moratorium status

Identity-diffusion status

The individual is exploring various
choices, but has not yet made a clear
commitment to any of them.

The individual does not have firm
commitments regarding the issues inquestion, and is not making progress
toward them.

Studies assessing how adolescents pass through Marcia’s statuses show that, although mostadolescents eventually succeed in developing a stable identity, the path to it is not always easy andthere are many routes that can be taken. Some adolescents may not search for an identity (identitydiffusion status), while others may simply adopt the beliefs of their parents or the first role that isoffered to them, perhaps at the expense of searching for other, more promising possibilities(identity-foreclosure status).
Other teens may spend years trying on different possible identities (identity-moratorium status)
before finally choosing one. To help them work through the process of developing an identity,adolescents may try out different identities in different social situations. They may maintain one
240

identity at home and a different type of persona when they are with their peers. Eventually, mostteenagers do integrate the different possibilities into a single self-concept and a comfortable senseof identity (identity-achievement status).

Social Development in Adulthood: Generativity
It is in adulthood when most of us make our most substantial contributions to society, by meeting
two of Erik Erikson’s life crises: We learn to give and receive love in close, long-term
relationships referred to as intimacy. We also develop an interest in guiding the development of
the next generation, often by becoming parents or mentors. This is Erikson’s concept ofgenerativity.
What Makes a Good Parent: One thing that you might think about if you decide to have children
are the skills involved in parenting. Some parents are strict, others are lax; some parents spend a lotof time with their kids, while others do not; some parents are warm and affectionate, while others
are more emotionally distant. Do these behaviors matter?
We have already considered two answers to this question, in the form of what all children require:(1) babies need a conscientious mother who does not smoke, drink, or use drugs during her
pregnancy, and (2) infants need caretakers who are consistently available, loving, and supportive
to help them form a secure base. One case in which these basic goals are less likely to be met iswhen the mother is an adolescent. Adolescent mothers are more likely to use drugs and alcohol
during their pregnancies, to have poor parenting skills in general, and to provide insufficient
support for the child (Ekéus, Christensson, & Hjern, 2004). As a result, the babies of adolescentmothers have higher rates of academic failure, delinquency, and incarceration in comparison tochildren of older mothers (Moore & Brooks-Gunn, 2002).
Normally, it is the mother who provides early attachment, but fathers are not irrelevant. Studies
have found that children whose fathers are more involved tend to be more cognitively and sociallycompetent, more empathic, and psychologically better adjusted, compared with children whose
fathers are less involved (Rohner & Veneziano, 2001). Amato (1994) found that, in some cases, therole of the father can be as or even more important than that of the mother in the child’s overall
psychological health and well-being. Amato concluded, “Regardless of the quality of the motherchild relationship, the closer adult offspring were to their fathers, the happier, more satisfied, andless distressed they reported being” (p. 1039).
According to Baumrind (1996), as the child grows, parents take on one of four types of parenting
styles, which are parental behaviors that determine the nature of parent-child interactions. Thesestyles depend on whether the parent is more or less demanding or having high expectations forbehavior and control and more or less responsive to the child, as determined by the degree of
warmth and attention provided (see Figure 7.19). Authoritarian parents are demanding but not
responsive. They impose rules and expect obedience, tending to give orders (“Eat your food!”) andenforcing their commands with rewards and punishment, without providing any explanation ofwhere the rules came from, except “Because I said so!” Permissive parents, on the other hand,
tend to make few demands, give little punishment, and generally allow their children to make theirown rules, but they are warm and affectionate.
241

Authoritative parents are demanding (“You must be home by curfew”), but they are also
responsive to the needs and opinions of the child (“Let’s discuss what an appropriate curfew mightbe”). They set rules and enforce them, but they also explain and discuss the reasons behind therules. Finally, rejecting-neglecting parents are undemanding and unresponsive overall.
Many studies of children and their parents,
Figure 7.19 Parenting Styles
using different methods, measures, andsamples, have reached the same conclusion,
namely that authoritative parenting, incomparison to the other three styles, isassociated with a wide range ofpsychological and social advantages forchildren. Parents who use the authoritative
style, with its combination of demands onthe children, as well as responsiveness to thechildren’s needs, have kids who have better
psychological adjustment, school
performance, and psychosocial maturity,
compared with parents who use the otherstyles (Baumrind, 1996; Grolnick & Ryan,
1989). On the other hand, there are at least
some cultural differences in theeffectiveness of different parenting styles.
Although the reasons for the differences are
Parenting styles can be divided into four types, based on the
not completely understood, strict
combination of demandingness and responsiveness. The
authoritarian parenting styles seem to work
authoritative style, characterized by both responsiveness andbetter in African American families than inalso demandingness, is the most effective.
European American families (TamisLeMonda, Briggs, McClowry, & Snow, 2008), and better in Chinese families than in American
families (Chang, Lansford, Schwartz, & Farver, 2004).
Despite the fact that different parenting styles are differentially effective overall, every child isdifferent and parents must be adaptable. Some children have particularly difficult temperaments,
and these children require more parenting. Because these difficult children demand moreparenting, the behaviors of the parents matter more for the children’s development than they do forother, less demanding children who require less parenting overall (Pluess & Belsky, 2010). Thesefindings remind us how the behavior of the child can influence the behavior of the people in his or
her environment.
Although the focus is on the child, the parents must never forget about each other. Parenting istime consuming and emotionally taxing, and the parents must work together to create a relationshipin which both mother and father contribute to the household tasks and support each other. It is also
important for the parents to invest time in their own intimacy, as happy parents are more likely tostay together, and divorce can have a negative impact on children, particularly during and
immediately after the divorce (Burt, Barnes, McGue, & Iacono, 2008; Ge, Natsuaki, & Conger,
2006).
242

Empty nest: The empty nest, or post-parental period (Dennerstein, Dudley & Guthrie, 2002),
refers to the time period when children are grown up and have left home. For most parents thisoccurs during midlife. This time is recognized as a “normative event” as parents are aware that
their children will become adults and eventually leave home (Mitchell & Lovegreen, 2009). The
empty nest creates complex emotions, both positive and negative, for many parents. Some theorists
suggest this is a time of role loss for parents, others suggest it is one of role strain relief (Bouchard,2013).
A consistent finding throughout the research literature is that raising children has a negative impact
on the quality of martial relationships (Ahlborg, Misvaer, & Möller, 2009; Bouchard, 2013).
Several studies have reported that martial satisfaction often increases during the launching phase of
the empty nest period, and that this satisfaction endures long after the last child has left home
(Gorchoff, John, & Helson, 2008).

Social Development in Late Adulthood: Retirement
Because of increased life expectancy in the 21st
Figure 7.20
century, those in late adulthood can expect tospend approximately a quarter of their lives inretirement. Leaving one’s career is a major lifechange and can be a time when people experienceanxiety, depression, and other negative changes inthe self-concept and in self-identity. On the other
hand, retirement may also serve as an opportunity
for a positive transition from work and career roles
to stronger family and community member roles,
and the latter may have a variety of positive
outcomes for the individual. Retirement may be a
Source: http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Seniors.jpg
relief for people who have worked in boring or
physically demanding jobs, particularly if they
have other outlets for stimulation and expressing self-identity.
Psychologist Mo Wang (2007) observed the well-being of 2,060 people between the ages of 51
and 61 over an 8-year period, and made the following recommendations to make the retirement
phase a positive one:
1. Continue to work part time past retirement, in order to ease into retirement status slowly.
2. Plan for retirement: This is a good idea financially, but also making plans to incorporate otherkinds of work or hobbies into postemployment life makes sense.
3. Retire with someone: If the retiree is still married, it is a good idea to retire at the same time as a
spouse, so that people can continue to work part time and follow a retirement plan together.
4. If married, have a happy marriage: People with marital problems tend to find retirement morestressful because they do not have a positive home life to return to and can no longer seek
refuge in long working hours. Couples that work on their marriages can make their retirements
a lot easier.
5. Take care of physical and financial health: A sound financial plan and good physical health canensure a healthy, peaceful retirement.
243

6. Retire early from a stressful job: People who stay in stressful jobs for fear that they will lose
their pensions or will not be able to find work somewhere else feel trapped. Toxic environments
can take a severe emotional toll on an employee. Leaving early from an unsatisfying job may
make retirement a relief.
7. Retire “on time”: Retiring too early or too late can cause people to feel “out of sync” or to feelthey have not achieved their goals.
Whereas these seven tips are helpful for a smooth transition to retirement, Wang also notes thatpeople tend to be adaptable, and that no matter how they do it, retirees will eventually adjust to their
new lifestyles.
Many older adults remain active and happy. In some cultural groups, seniors may prefer to movein with adult children, helping out with the family, and being cared for as they age. This is not auniversal or even a preferred practice in many Western cultures. Older adults may prefer to live inretirement communities where they can be among peers in a location that facilitates interaction andactivity. Others want to “age in place”, maintaining ties with family, friends, and service networks
that they have developed over their lifetime. Some want to continue working at jobs they value orneed, while others prefer to travel or retire to a life of gardening. Cultural and individual
variations help determine how this stage of life will can be most rewarding.
Researchers are beginning to better understand the factors that allow some people to age better
than others. For one, research has found that the people who are best able to adjust well tochanging situations early in life are also able to better adjust later in life (Rubin, 2007; Sroufe,
Collins, Egeland, & Carlson, 2009). Perceptions also matter. People who believe that the elderly
are sick, vulnerable, and grumpy often act according to such beliefs when they become elderly(Nemmers, 2005). Levy, Slade, Kunkel, and Kasl (2002) found that the elderly who had morepositive perceptions about aging also lived longer.

Death, Dying, and Bereavement
Living includes dealing with our own and our loved ones’ mortality. In her book, On Death andDying (1997), Elizabeth Kübler-Ross describes five phases of grief through which people pass ingrappling with the knowledge that they or someone close to them is dying:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Denial: “This can’t be happening to me.”Anger: “Why me? It’s not fair!”Bargaining: “I’d do anything for a few more years.”
Depression: “I’m so sad, why bother with anything?”
Acceptance: “I know my time has come.”

Despite Kübler-Ross’s popularity, there are critics of her theory who argue the five-phase sequence
is too constraining. Not everyone passes through the stages in this sequence. Other reactions, suchas, guilt or anxiety, may be prominent in some people but absent in her theory. In addition,
attitudes toward death and dying have been found to vary greatly across cultures and religions, andthese variations make the process of dying different (Bonanno, 2009). As an example, JapaneseAmericans restrain their grief (Corr, Nabe, & Corr, 2009) so not to burden others with their pain.
By contrast, followers of Judaism observe a 7-day, publicly announced mourning period.
244

In some cultures, older adults are more likely to be living and coping alone, or perhaps only with
their spouse. In other cultures, such as the Hispanic culture, older adults are more likely to beliving with their sons and daughters and other relatives. This social support may create a better
quality of life for them (Diaz-Cabello, 2004). Social support is also important because losing a
loved one is a major source of stress for anyone.
Stroebe, Hansson, Schut, and Stroebe (2008) found that although most people adjusted to the lossof a loved one without seeking professional treatment, many had an increased risk of mortality,
particularly within the early weeks and months after the loss. These researchers also found thatpeople going through the grieving process suffered more physical and psychological symptoms
and illnesses and used more medical services.
The health of survivors during the end of life is influenced by factors such as circumstances
surrounding the loved one’s death, individual personalities, and ways of coping. People serving as
caretakers to partners or other family members who are ill frequently experience a great deal ofstress themselves, making the dying process even more stressful. Despite the trauma of the loss ofa loved one, people do recover and are able to continue with effective lives. Grief intervention
programs can go a long way in helping people cope during the bereavement period (Neimeyer,
Holland, Currier, & Mehta, 2008).

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Erikson’s theory of psychosocial development describes eight social-emotional crises that
we face across the lifespan.
Social development requires a secure base from which children feel free to explore.
Attachment styles refer to the type of relationship that children develop with those whoare important to them.
Maternal deprivation can cause developmental problems, including a failure inattachment.
Longitudinal and cross-sectional studies are each used to test hypotheses aboutdevelopment.
A defining aspect of adolescence is the development of a consistent and committed selfidentity. The process of developing an identity can take time, but most adolescents
succeed in developing a stable identity.
An important way in which adults fulfill the psychosocial task of generativity is by raisingchildren. Parents differ in their degree of warmth and control, and these parenting styles
have consequences for children’s development.
Empty nest research indicates that parents’ relationships often improve when children
leave home.
Two significant social stages in late adulthood are retirement and dealing with grief andbereavement. Studies show that a well-planned retirement can result in a more pleasantretirement experience.
A significant number of people going through the grieving process are at increased risk ofmortality and physical and mental illness. Grief counseling and supportive families canhelp these people cope with their loss.
245

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Compare your behavior, values, and attitudes regarding marriage and work to theattitudes of your parents and grandparents. In what way are your values similar? In whatways are they different?
2. Think about your experiences in high school. What sort of cliques or crowds were there?
How did people express their identities in these groups? How did you use your groups todefine yourself and develop your own identity?
3. Watch the final section of this video and consider your view on the decisions that are
made at the end of life. http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/livingold/view/
4. How do the people in your culture view aging? What stereotypes are there about theelderly? Are there other ways that people in your society might learn to think about
aging that would be more beneficial?

Videos
1. This free-online program, Death, A Personal Understanding, includes 10 thirty-minutevideos on a variety of topics related to death and dying.
http://www.learner.org/resources/series108.html

Chapter Summary
Development begins at conception when a sperm fertilizes an egg creating a new life. The resulting
zygote grows into an embryo and then a fetus. Teratogens can cause abnormalities during theperiod of prenatal development. Mothers who drink alcohol during their pregnancy can give birth
to infants with a fetal alcohol spectrum disorder.
Babies are born prepared with reflexes and cognitive skills that contribute to their survival andgrowth. These become deliberate, coordinated actions in the form of gross and fine motor skills.
Adolescence involves rapid physical changes, including puberty, as well as continued cognitivechanges.
Emerging adults are at the peak of physical development, while muscle strength, reaction time,
cardiac output, and sensory abilities begin to slowly decline in early and middle adulthood.
Fertility, particularly for women, also decreases during adulthood, and women eventuallyexperience menopause.
A portion of the elderly suffers from age-related brain diseases, such as a neurocognitive disorderor Alzheimer’s disease.
Piaget’s stage theory of cognitive development proposes that children learn through assimilation
and accommodation, and that cognitive development follows specific sequential stages:
246

Sensorimotor, preoperational, concrete operational and formal operational.
Moral development develops through the lifespan. Kohlberg proposed 3 levels of moral reasoning:
Preconventional, conventional, and postconventional.
Erikson's psychosocial theory describes 8 developmental crises (stages). His developmental
challenges include trust v. mistrust (infant), autonomy v. shame, doubt (toddler), initiative v. guilt(early childhood), industry v. inferiority (middle childhood), identity v. role confusion (adolescent),
intimacy v. isolation (early adulthood), generativity v. stagnation (middle adulthood), and ego
integrity v. despair (late adulthood).
An important part of development is attachment between the infant and caregiver. The Harlows'
research on contact comfort provided the basis for understanding attachment. Mary Ainsworth
researched patterns of attachment. Caregiver deprivation may result in failure to thrive,
developmental delays, and an attachment disorder.
In adolescence the major challenge is to establish a sense of identity. James Marcia expanded
Erikson’s work and identified four identity statuses based on exploration and commitment:
Diffusion, foreclosure, moratorium, and achievement.
Erikson said that middle adulthood is centered on generativity, or an interest in guiding the next
generation. Parenting is one way to express generativity. Parenting styles include authoritarian,authoritative, permissive, and rejecting-neglecting, and these styles influence the development ofchildren and adolescents. Empty nest research indicates that parental relationships often improveonce the children leave the home.
Reactions to retirement vary; it can be a source of anxiety for some, or as an opportunity to take on
new roles for others. Most people eventually adapt to this life change.
Eventually we all have to deal with our own and our loved ones’ mortality. Social support isimportant during the grieving process.

247

References
Abbassi, V. (1998). Growth and normal puberty. Pediatrics, 102(2), 507-512.
Ahlborg, T., Misvaer, N., & Möller, A. (2009). Perception of marital quality by parents with small children: A followup study when the firstborn is 4 years old. Journal of Family Nursing, 15, 237–263.
Ainsworth, M. S., Blehar, M. C., Waters, E., & Wall, S. (1978). Patterns of attachment: A psychological study of thestrange situation. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Amato, P. R. (1994). Father-child relations, mother-child relations, and offspring psychological well-being in
adulthood. Journal of Marriage and the Family, 56, 1031–1042.
Anderson, S. E., Dannal, G. E., & Must, A. (2003). Relative weight and race influence average age at menarche:
Results from two nationally representative surveys of U.S. girls studied 25 years apart. Pediatrics, 111, 844–850.
Arlin, P. (1975). Cognitive development in adulthood: A fifth stage? Developmental Psychology, 75(11), 602-606.
Avis, N. E., & Crawford, S. (2008). Cultural differences in symptoms and attitudes toward menopause. Menopause
Management, 17(3), 8–13.
Baillargeon, R. (2004). Infants’ physical world. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 13(3), 89–94.
Baumrind, D. (1996). The discipline controversy revisited. Family Relations, 45(4), 405–414.
Beauchamp, D. K., Cowart, B. J., Menellia, J. A., & Marsh, R. R. (1994). Infant salt taste: Developmental,
methodological, and contextual factors. Developmental Psychology, 27, 353–365.
Berger, K. S. (2005). The developing person through the life span (6th ed.). New York: Worth.
Berk, L. E. & Myers, A. B. (2016). Infants, children, and adolescents (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson.
Blakemore, S. J. (2008). Development of the social brain during adolescence. Quarterly Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 61, 40–49.
Blass, E. M., & Smith, B. A. (1992). Differential effects of sucrose, fructose, glucose, and lactose on crying in 1- to 3day-old human infants: Qualitative and quantitative considerations. Developmental Psychology, 28, 804–810.
Bonanno, G. (2009). The other side of sadness: What the new science of bereavement tells us about life after a loss.
New York, NY: Basic Books.
Bouchard, G. (2013). How do parents reaction when their children leave home: An integrative review. Journal of Adult
Development, 21, 69-79.
Bowlby, J. (1953). Some pathological processes set in train by early mother-child separation. Journal of Mental
Science, 99, 265–272.
Bowlby, J. (1982) Attachment and loss: Retrospect and prospect. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 52(4), 664678.
Burke, D. M., Shafto, M. A., Craik, F. I. M., & Salthouse, T. A. (2008). Language and aging. In F. Craik & T. A.
Salthouse (Eds.), The handbook of aging and cognition (3rd ed., pp. 373–443). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Bushnell, I. W. R. (2001). Mother’s face recognition in newborn infants: Learning and memory. Infant and Child
Development, 10, 67 – 74.

248

Bushnell, I. W. R., Sai, F., & Mullin, J. T. (1989). Neonatal recognition of the mother’s face. British Journal ofdevelopmental psychology, 7, 3–15.
Burt, S. A., Barnes, A. R., McGue, M., & Iacono, W. G. (2008). Parental divorce and adolescent delinquency: Rulingout the impact of common genes. Developmental Psychology, 44(6), 1668–1677.
Carlson, E. A., Sroufe, L. A., & Egeland, B. (2004). The construction of experience: A longitudinal study ofrepresentation and behavior. Child Development, 75(1), 66–83.
Carroll, J. L. (2016). Sexuality now: Embracing diversity (5th ed.). Boston, MA: Cengage Learning.
Cassidy, J. E., & Shaver, P. R. E. (1999). Handbook of attachment: Theory, research, and clinical applications. New
York, NY: Guilford Press.
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2005). Alcohol use and pregnancy. Retrieved fromhttp://www.cdc.gov/ncbddd/factsheets/FAS_alcoholuse.pdf
Champagne, F. A. (2010). Epigenetic influence of social experiences across the lifespan. Developmental Psychology,
52, 299-311.
Chang, L., Lansford, J. E., Schwartz, D., & Farver, J. M. (2004). Marital quality, maternal depressed affect, harshparenting, and child externalising in Hong Kong Chinese families. International Journal of Behavioral Development,
28(4), 311–318.
Cherkas, L. F., Hunkin, J. L., Kato, B. S., Richards, J. B., Gardner, J. P., Surdulescu, G. L., Aviv, A. (2008). The
association between physical activity in leisure time and leukocyte telomere length. Archives of Internal Medicine, 168,
154–158.
Corr, C. A., Nabe, C. M., & Corr, D. M. (2009). Death and dying: Life and living (6th ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
Courage, M. L., & Howe, M. L. (2002). From infant to child: The dynamics of cognitive change in the second year of
life. Psychological Bulletin, 128(2), 250–276.
Dasen, P. R. (1972). Cross-cultural Piagetian research: A summary. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 3, 23–39.
DeCasper, A. J., & Fifer, W. P. (1980). Of human bonding: Newborns prefer their mothers’ voices. Science, 208,
1174–1176.
DeLoache, J. S. (1987). Rapid change in the symbolic functioning of very young children. Science, 238(4833), 1556–
1556.
Dennerstein, L., Dudley, E., & Guthrie, J. (2002). Empty nest or revolving door? A prospective study of women’squality of life in midlife during the phase of children leaving and re-entering the home. Psychological Medicine, 32,
545–550.
Diaz-Cabello, N. (2004). The Hispanic way of dying: Three families, three perspectives, three cultures. Illness, Crisis,& Loss, 12(3), 239–255.
Driscoll, M. P. (1994). Psychology of learning for instruction. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Duncan, G., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (2000). Family poverty, welfare reform, and child development. Child Development,
71(1), 188–196
Ekéus, C., Christensson, K., & Hjern, A. (2004). Unintentional and violent injuries among pre-school children of
teenage mothers in Sweden: A national cohort study. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 58(8), 680–
685.
Elkind, D. (1978). The child’s reality: Three developmental themes. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

249

Erikson, E. H. (1963). Childhood and society. New York, NY: Norton.
Evans, G. W., & English, K. (2002). The environment of poverty: Multiple stressor exposure, psychophysiologicalstress, and socio-emotional adjustment. Child Development, 73(4), 1238–1248.
Ge, X., Conger, R. D., & Elder, G. H., Jr. (1996). Coming of age too early: Pubertal influences on girls’ vulnerability to
psychological distress. Child Development, 67(6), 3386–3400.
Ge, X., Natsuaki, M. N., & Conger, R. D. (2006). Trajectories of depressive symptoms and stressful life events among
male and female adolescents in divorced and nondivorced families. Development and Psychopathology, 18(1), 253–
273.
Gibson, E. J., & Pick, A. D. (2000). An ecological approach to perceptual learning and development. New York, NY:
Oxford University Press.
Gibson, E. J., Rosenzweig, M. R., & Porter, L. W. (1988). Exploratory behavior in the development of perceiving,
acting, and the acquiring of knowledge. In Annual review of psychology (Vol. 39, pp. 1–41). Palo Alto, CA: Annual
Reviews.
Gillath, O., Shaver, P. R., Baek, J. M., & Chun, D. S. (2008). Genetic correlates of adult attachment style. Personality
and Social Psychology Bulletin, 34(10), 1396–1405.
Gilligan, C. (1982). In a different voice: Psychological theory and women’s development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
Goldberg, E. (2001). The executive brain: Frontal lobes and the civilized mind. New York, NY: Oxford University
Press.
Goossens, L., Beyers, W., Emmen, M., & van Aken, M. (2002). The imaginary audience and personal fable: Factor
analyses and concurrent validity of the “new look” measures. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 12(2), 193–215.
Gorchoff, S. M., John, O. P., & Helson, R. (2008). Contextualizing change in marital satisfaction during middle age.
Psychological Science, 19, 1194–1200.
Grolnick, W. S., & Ryan, R. M. (1989). Parent styles associated with children’s self-regulation and competence inschool. Journal of Educational Psychology, 81(2), 143–154.
Gunnar, M., & Quevedo, K. (2007). The neurobiology of stress and development. Annual Review of Psychology, 58,
145–173.
Haber, M., & Toro, P. (2004). Homelessness among families, children, and adolescents: An ecological–developmental
perspective. Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review, 7(3), 123–164.
Haidt, J. (2001). The emotional dog and its rational tail: A social intuitionist approach to moral judgment. Psychological
Review, 108(4), 814–834.
Harlow, H. (1958). The nature of love. American Psychologist, 13, 573–685.
Hebert, L.W., Scherr, P.A., Beckett, L.A., Albert, M.S., Pilraim, D.M., Shown, M.J., & Evans, D.A. (1995). Agespecific incidence of alzheimer's disease in a community population. Journal of the American Medical Association,273(17), 1354-1359.
Jaffee, S., & Hyde, J. S. (2000). Gender differences in moral orientation: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin,
126(5), 703–726.
Juraska, J. M., Henderson, C., & Müller, J. (1984). Differential rearing experience, gender, and radial maze
performance. Developmental Psychobiology, 17(3), 209–215.

250

Kanoski, S. & Davidson, T. (2011) Western diet consumption and cognitive impairment: Links to hippocampal
dysfunction and obesity. Physiology and Behavior, 103(1), 59-68.
Klahr, D., & McWhinney, B. (1998). Information Processing. In D. Kuhn & R. S. Siegler (Eds.), Handbook of childpsychology: Cognition, perception, & language (5th ed., Vol. 2, pp. 631–678). New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Kohlberg, L. (1984). The psychology of moral development: Essays on moral development (Vol. 2, p. 200). San
Francisco, CA: Harper & Row.
Kübler-Ross, E. (1997). On death and dying. New York, NY: Scribner.
Lacher-Fougëre, S., & Demany, L. (2005). Consequences of cochlear damage for the detection of inter-aural phasedifferences. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, 118, 2519–2526.
Lachman, M. E. (2004). Development in Midlife. Annual Review of Psychology, 55(1), 305-331. doi:10.1146/
annurev.psych.55.090902.141521
Lally, M., & Valentine-French, S. (2017). Lifespan development: A psychological perspective. Grayslake, IL: Collegeof Lake County.
Levin, I., Siegler, S. R., & Druyan, S. (1990). Misconceptions on motion: Development and training effects. Child
Development, 61, 1544–1556.
Levy, B., & Langer, E. (1994). Aging free from negative stereotypes: Successful memory in China among theAmerican deaf. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 66(6), 989–997.
Levy, B. R., Slade, M. D., Kunkel, S. R., & Kasl, S. V. (2002). Longevity increased by positive self-perceptions ofaging. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 83, 261–270.
Lucas-Thompson, R., & Clarke-Stewart, K. A. (2007). Forecasting friendship: How marital quality, maternal mood,and attachment security are linked to children’s peer relationships. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology,
28(5–6), 499–514.
Lynne, S. D., Graber, J. A., Nichols, T. R., Brooks-Gunn, J., & Botvin, G. J. (2007). Links between pubertal timing,
peer influences, and externalizing behaviors among urban students followed through middle school. Journal of
Adolescent Health, 40, 181.e7–181.e13 (p. 198).
Maier, S.E., & West, J.R. (2001). Drinking patterns and alcohol-related birth defects. Alcohol Research & Health,25(3), 168-174.
March of Dimes. (2015). Neonatal abstinence syndrome. Retrieved fromhttp://www.marchofdimes.org/complications/neonatal-abstinence-syndrome-(nas).aspx
Marcia, J. (1980). Identity in adolescence. Handbook of Adolescent Psychology, 5, 145–160.
Marshall, W. A., & Tanner, J. M. (1986). Puberty. In F. Falkner & J. M. Tanner (Eds.), Human growth: A
comprehensive treatise (2nd ed., pp. 171–209). New York, NY: Plenum Press.
Mendle, J., Turkheimer, E., & Emery, R. E. (2007). Detrimental psychological outcomes associated with early pubertal
timing in adolescent girls. Developmental Review, 27, 151–171.
Mennella, J. A., Jagnow, C. P., & Beauchamp, G. K. (2001). Prenatal and postnatal flavor learning by human infants.
Pediatrics, 107(6), e88.
Minkin, M. J., & Wright, C. V. (2004). A woman’s guide to menopause and perimenopause. New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press.

251

Mitchell, B. A., & Lovegreen, L. D. (2009). The empty nest syndrome in midlife families: A multimethod explorationof parental gender differences and cultural dynamics. Journal of Family Issues, 30, 1651–1670.
Moon, C., Cooper, R. P., & Fifer, W. P. (1993). Two-day-olds prefer their native language. Infant Behavior &Development, 16, 495–500.
Moore, M. R., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (2002). Adolescent parenthood. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting:
Being and becoming a parent (2nd ed., Vol. 3, pp. 173–214). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Moore, K., & Persaud, T. (1993). The developing human: Clinically oriented embryology (5th ed.). Philadelphia, PA:
Saunders.
National Institutes of Health. (2016). Quick statistics about hearing. Retrieved fromhttps://www.nidcd.nih.gov/health/statistics/quick-statistics-hearing
Neimeyer, R. A., Holland, J. M., Currier, J. M., & Mehta, T. (2008). Meaning reconstruction in later life: Toward a
cognitive-constructivist approach to grief therapy. In D. Gallagher-Thompson, A. Steffen, & L. Thompson (Eds.),
Handbook of behavioral and cognitive therapies with older adults (pp. 264–277). New York, NY: Springer Verlag.
Nemmers, T. M. (2005). The influence of ageism and ageist stereotypes on the elderly. Physical & Occupational
Therapy in Geriatrics, 22(4), 11–20.
Niccols, G. A. (1994). Fetal alcohol syndrome: Implications for psychologists. Clinical Psychology Review, 14, 91–111.
Panno, J. (2004). Aging: Theories and potential therapies. New York, NY: Facts on File Publishers.
Parrish-Morris, J., Golinkoff, R. M. & Hirsh-Pasek, K. (2013). From coo to code: A brief story of language
development. In P. D. Zelazo (Ed.), Oxford handbook of developmental psychology: Vol. 1. Body and mind (pp. 867908). New York: Oxford University Press.
Persad, C. C., Abeles, N., Zacks, R. T., & Denburg, N. L. (2002). Inhibitory changes after age 60 and the relationship tomeasures of attention and memory. The Journals of Gerontology: Series B: Psychological Sciences and Social Sciences,
57B(3), P223–P232.
Pescovitz, O. H., & Walvoord, E. C. (2007). When puberty is precocious: Scientific and clinical aspects. Totowa, NJ:
Humana Press.
Plassman, B.L., Williams, J.W., Burke, J.R., Holsinger, T., & Benjamin, S. (2010). Systematic review: Factors
associated with risk for and possible prevention of cognitive decline in later life. Annals of Internal Medicine, 153(3),182-198.
Pluess, M., & Belsky, J. (2010). Differential susceptibility to parenting and quality child care. Developmental
Psychology, 46(2), 379–390.
Porter, R. H., Makin, J. W., Davis, L. B., & Christensen, K. M. (1992). Breast-fed infants respond to olfactory cues fromtheir own mother and unfamiliar lactating females. Infant Behavior & Development, 15(1), 85–93.
Pushkar, D., Basevitz, P., Arbuckle, T., Nohara-LeClair, M., Lapidus, S., & Peled, M. (2000). Social behavior and offtarget verbosity in elderly people. Psychology and Aging, 15(2), 361–374.
Pushkar, D., Bukowski, W. M., Schwartzman, A. E., Stack, D. M., & White, D. R. (2007). Responding to thechallenges of late life: Strategies for maintaining and enhancing competence. New York, NY: Springer Publishing.
Rapoport, J. L., Giedd, J. N., Blumenthal, J., Hamburger, S., Jeffries, N., Fernandez, T. Evans, A. (1999). Progressive
cortical change during adolescence in childhood-onset schizophrenia: A longitudinal magnetic resonance imaging study.
Archives of General Psychiatry, 56(7), 649–654.

252

Research Network on Successful Midlife Development. (2007, February 7). Midlife Research - MIDMAC WebSite.
Retrieved from http://midmac.med.harvard.edu/research.html
Rest, J. (1979). Development in judging moral issues. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Riegel, K. (1973). Dialectical operations: The final period of human development. Human Development, 73(16), 346370.
Rohner, R. P., & Veneziano, R. A. (2001). The importance of father love: History and contemporary evidence. Reviewof General Psychology, 5(4), 382–405.
Rothbaum, F., Weisz, J., Pott, M., Miyake, K., & Morelli, G. (2000). Attachment and culture: Security in the UnitedStates and Japan. American Psychologist, 55(10), 1093–1104.
Rubin, L. (2007). 60 on up: The truth about aging in America. Boston, MA: Beacon Press;
Rycek, R. F., Stuhr, S. L., Mcdermott, J., Benker, J., & Swartz, M. D. (1998). Adolescent egocentrism and cognitive
functioning during late adolescence. Adolescence, 33, 746–750.
Seifer, R., Schiller, M., Sameroff, A. J., Resnick, S., & Riordan, K. (1996). Attachment, maternal sensitivity, and infant
temperament during the first year of life. Developmental Psychology, 32(1), 12–25.
Shelton, H. M. (2006). High blood pressure. Whitefish, MT: Kessinger Publishers.
Shrager, J., & Siegler, R. S. (1998). SCADS: A model of children's strategy choices and strategy discoveries.
Psychological Science, 9(5), 405-410. doi: 10.1111/1467-9280.00076
Smith, L. B., & Thelen, E. (2003). Development as a dynamic system. Trends in Cognitive Sciences, 7(8), 343–348.
Soska, K. C., Adolph, K. E., & Johnson, S. P. (2010). Systems in development: Motor skill acquisition facilitates threedimensional object completion. Developmental Psychology, 46(1), 129–138.
Sroufe, L. A., Collins, W. A., Egeland, B., & Carlson, E. A. (2009). The development of the person: The Minnesota
study of risk and adaptation from birth to adulthood. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Steinberg, L. (2007). Risk taking in adolescence: New perspectives from brain and behavioral science. Current
Directions in Psychological Science, 16, 55–59.
Stroebe, M. S., Hansson, R. O., Schut, H., & Stroebe, W. (2008). Bereavement research: Contemporary perspectives. In
M. S. Stroebe, R. O. Hansson, H. Schut, & W. Stroebe (Eds.), Handbook of bereavement research and practice:
Advances in theory and intervention (pp. 3–25). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Tamis-LeMonda, C. S., Briggs, R. D., McClowry, S. G., & Snow, D. L. (2008). Challenges to the study of African
American parenting: Conceptualization, sampling, research approaches, measurement, and design. Parenting: Scienceand Practice, 8(4), 319–358.
Turiel, E. (1998). The development of morality. In W. Damon (Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Socialization (5thed., Vol. 3, pp. 863–932). New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
van den Boom, D. C. (1994). The influence of temperament and mothering on attachment and exploration: An
experimental manipulation of sensitive responsiveness among lower-class mothers with irritable infants. Child
Development, 65(5), 1457–1476.
Verghese, J., Lipton, R., Katz, M. J., Hall, C. B., Derby, C. A.,…Buschke, M.D. (2003). Leisure activities and the riskof dementia in the elderly. New England Journal of Medicine, 348, 2508–2516.

253

Wang, M. (2007). Profiling retirees in the retirement transition and adjustment process: Examining the longitudinalchange patterns of retirees’ psychological well-being. Journal of Applied Psychology, 92(2), 455–474.
Wang, S. H., Baillargeon, R., & Brueckner, L. (2004). Young infants’ reasoning about hidden objects: Evidence fromviolation-of-expectation tasks with test trials only. Cognition, 93, 167–198.
Waters, E., Merrick, S., Treboux, D., Crowell, J., & Albersheim, L. (2000). Attachment security in infancy and early
adulthood: A twenty-year longitudinal study. Child Development, 71(3), 684–689.
Weinberger, D. R., Elvevåg, B., & Giedd, J. N. (2005). The adolescent brain: A work in progress. National Campaign toPrevent Teen Pregnancy. Retrieved from http://www.thenationalcampaign.org/resources/pdf/BRAIN.pdf
Yurgelun-Todd, D. (2007). Emotional and cognitive changes during adolescence. Current Opinion in Neurobiology, 17,251-257.

254

Chapter 8 Personality
Learning Objective
1. Define personality.
One of the most fundamental tendencies of human beings is to size up other people. We say that
Bill is fun, that Marian is adventurous, or that Frank is dishonest. When we make these statements,
we mean that we believe that these people have stable individual characteristics or personalities.
Personality is defined as an individual’s consistent patterns of feeling, thinking, and behaving(John, Robins, & Pervin, 2008). Personality does not include physical or behavioral
characteristics, skills or abilities, or changes in mood.
The tendency to perceive personality is a fundamental part of human nature, and a most adaptive
one. If we can draw accurate generalizations about what other people are normally like, we canpredict how they will behave in the future, and this can help us determine how they are likely torespond in different situations. Understanding personality can also help us better understandpsychological disorders and the negative behavioral outcomes they may produce. In short,personality matters because it guides behavior.
Psychology’s first attempts at explaining personality were based on the theories of Sigmund Freudand his followers. However, Freud’s theories on personality development have not been well
supported by empirical research (Crews, 1998; Fisher & Greenberg, 1996; Kihlstrom, 1997; McCrae,
2011; Newman, Duff, & Baumeister, 1997; Vazire, 2014). As you recall from chapter one,psychology is a science, and consequently, we will consider the contemporary theories of
personality that have research support. We will also review the extent to which personality iscaused by nature and nurture and how psychologists measure personality.

Personality as Traits
Learning Objectives
1. Define the term trait.
2. Describe the Big Five Model of personality traits and distinguish among openness,

conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, and neuroticism.
3. Explore how the Big Five traits change over the lifespan.
4. Describe how the Big Five traits predict behavior.
As we previously indicated, Freudian theories of personality are outdated and have little to do with
contemporary personality psychology. Instead, one of the areas that personality psychologists
currently investigate are traits (McCrae, 2011). Traits are relatively enduring characteristics that
influence our behavior across many situations. Personality traits, such as introversion, friendliness,
conscientiousness, honesty, and helpfulness are important because they help explain consistencies
in behavior. The most popular way of measuring traits is by administering personality tests on
which people self-report about their own characteristics.
255

One of the challenges of the trait approach to personality is that there are so many of them; there
are at least 18,000 English words that can be used to describe people (Allport & Odbert, 1936).
Thus, a major goal of psychologists is to take this vast number of descriptors, many of which arevery similar to each other, and to determine the underlying important or “core” traits among them(John, Angleitner, & Ostendorf, 1988).
The trait approach to personality was pioneeredby early psychologists, including Gordon Allport(1897–1967), Raymond Cattell (1905–1998), andHans Eysenck (1916–1997). Each of these
psychologists believed in the idea of the trait as
the stable unit of personality, and each attempted
to provide a list or taxonomy of the mostimportant trait dimensions. Their approach was toprovide people with a self-report measure andthen to use statistical analyses to look for theunderlying “factors” or “clusters” of traits,
according to the frequency and the co-occurrenceof traits in the respondents. A misconception isthat personality traits represent a type of person,
such as, an extrovert versus an introvert. Rather,people can have many levels of a personality trait
in that they can score very high, average, or very
low on that trait. Overall, it is not whether or not
you have that trait, it is the degree to which that
trait distinguishes you from others (Vazire, 2014).

Figure 8.1

What traits do you think these individuals
possess? Source

The Five Factor Model of Personality
The fundamental work on trait dimensions conducted by Allport, Cattell, Eysenck, and many others
has led to contemporary trait models, the most important and well-validated of which is the FiveFactor Model of Personality. According to this model, there are five fundamental underlying trait
dimensions that are stable across time, cross-culturally shared, and explain a substantial
proportion of behavior (Costa & McCrae, 1992; Goldberg, 1982; McCrae, 2011). As you can see
in Table 8.1, the five dimensions, known as the “Big Five”, are openness to experience,
conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, and neuroticism. You can remember them using thewatery acronyms OCEAN or CANOE.
A large body of research evidence has supported the five-factor model. The Big Five dimensions
seem to be cross-cultural, because the same five factors have been identified in participants in
China, Japan, Italy, Hungary, Turkey, and many other countries (Triandis & Suh, 2002). The Big
Five factors are also increasingly being used in helping researchers understand the dimensions of
psychological disorders, such as anxiety and depression (Oldham, 2010; Saulsman & Page, 2004).

256

The Big Five dimensions also accurately predict behavior. For instance, a pattern of highconscientiousness, low neuroticism, and high agreeableness predicts successful job performance(Tett, Jackson, & Rothstein, 1991). Scores on the Big Five dimensions also predict the performanceof U.S. presidents; ratings of openness to experience are correlated positively with ratings ofpresidential success, whereas ratings of agreeableness are correlated negatively with success(Rubenzer, Faschingbauer, & Ones, 2000). Conscientiousness was found to be as important as
intelligence in the prediction of both secondary and college academic achievement (Dumfart &Neubauer, 2016; Poropat, 2009).
Table 8.1 The Five-Factor Model of Personality
Dimension

Sample items

Description

Examples of behaviors predicted by
the trait

Openness toexperience“I have a vivid
imagination”; “I have arich vocabulary”; “I
have excellent ideas.”

A general appreciation forart, emotion, adventure,unusual ideas, imagination,
curiosity, and variety ofexperience

Individuals who are highly open toexperience tend to have distinctive andunconventional decorations in theirhome. They are also likely to havebooks on a wide variety of topics, adiverse music collection, and works ofart on display.

Conscientiousness “I am always prepared”;“I am exacting in mywork”; “I follow aschedule.”

A tendency to show selfdiscipline, act dutifully, andaim for achievement

Individuals who are conscientious havea preference for planned rather thanspontaneous behavior.

Extraversion“I am the life of theparty”; “I feel
comfortable aroundpeople”; “I talk to a lotof different people atparties.”A tendency to experience
positive emotions and toseek out stimulation and thecompany of others

Extroverts enjoy being with people. Ingroups they like to talk, assert
themselves, and draw attention tothemselves.

Agreeableness“I am interested inpeople”; “I feel others’
emotions”; “I makepeople feel at ease.”

A tendency to becompassionate andcooperative rather thansuspicious and antagonistic
toward others

Agreeable individuals value getting
along with others. They are generally
considerate, friendly, generous, helpful,and willing to compromise theirinterests with those of others.

Neuroticism“I am not usuallyrelaxed”; “I get upset
easily”; “I am easily
disturbed.”

A tendency to experience
negative emotions, such asanger, anxiety, or
depression; sometimes
called “emotional
instability”

Those who score high in neuroticism
are more likely to interpret ordinary
situations as threatening and minor
frustrations as hopelessly difficult. They
may have trouble thinking clearly,
making decisions, and coping
effectively with stress.

257

Additional predictions based on each of the Big Five factors are provided by Mehl, Gosling, andPennebaker (2006), Ozer and Benet-Martinez (2006), and Roberts, Kuncel, Shiner, Caspi, andGoldberg (2007):
•
•
•
•
•

Openness predicts more traveling, studying abroad, liberal political views, and choosing acareer in the arts
Conscientiousness predicts work place and academic success, less drug-use, and a lesslikelihood of divorcing
Extraversion predicts being more talkative, happier, a higher social status, and greater
volunteerism
Agreeableness predicts less swearing, criminal behavior, and divorce, but higher
volunteerism
Neuroticism predicts depression, higher rates of divorce, and more conflict in relationships

Overall, personality is relatively stable, however, life experiences do affect personality. For
example, when people enter their first serious relationship, they become more agreeable and lessneurotic. Also, when we start our first job, we become more conscientious and agreeable(Vazire, 2014). Personality stability remains strong in middle adulthood (Lucas & Donnellan,2011), however, there are slight changes in personality as one ages. According to the research,
conscientiousness and agreeableness show small increases with age, while neuroticism,
extraversion, and openness show slight declines with age (Lachman & Bertrand, 2001; Lucas &Donnellan, 2011; Allemand, Zimprich, & Martin, 2008).
While pop psychology books with titles such as “Menare from Mars and Women are from Venus” (Gray,
1992) would suggest that men and women differ inpersonality, the reality is that gender differences,when present, are small, and tend to get even smallerwith age. This is a phenomenon called genderconvergence. When differences are found, womentend to score slightly higher than men on
conscientiousness, agreeableness, and neuroticism,and some studies show women may be slightly higher
on extraversion, but only on the aspects ofextraversion that involve gregariousness, warmth, andSourcepositive emotions, while men score higher on theassertiveness and excitement seeking aspects ofextraversion (Costa, Terracciano, & McCrae, 2001; Weisberg, DeYoung, & Hirsh, 2011).
Figure 8.2 Are there genderdifferences in personality?

An advantage of the five-factor approach is that it is parsimonious. Rather than studying hundredsof traits, researchers can focus on only five underlying dimensions. The Big Five may also capture
other dimensions that have been of interest to psychologists. For instance, the trait dimension ofneed for achievement relates to the Big Five variable of conscientiousness, and self-esteem relates
to low neuroticism. On the other hand, the Big Five factors do not seem to capture all the importantdimensions of personality. For instance, the Big Five does not capture moral behavior (Ashton &Lee, 2008), although this variable is important in many theories of personality. There is also
evidence that the Big Five factors are not the same across all cultures (Cheung & Leung, 1998).
258

Another critique is that people may behave differently in different situations. Personality will only
predict behavior when the behaviors are aggregated or averaged across different situations. We
might not be able to use the personality trait of friendliness to determine how friendly Malik will be
on Friday night, but we can use it to predict how friendly he will be the next year in a variety ofsituations. When many measurements of behavior are combined, there is much clearer evidence forthe stability of traits and for the effects of traits on behavior (Roberts & DelVecchio, 2000;
Srivastava, John, Gosling, & Potter, 2003).

Studying the Nature of Personality
Learning Objectives
1. Outline the theory and methodology of behavioral genetics.
2. Describe evidence for the effects of genetics, the environment, and interactions of

the two on personality.
3. Define epigenesis.
4. Explain whether our genetics is our destiny.
5.

Box 8.1 Identical Twins Reunited after 35 Years
Paula Bernstein and Elyse Schein were identical twins who were adopted into separate families
immediately after their births in 1968. It was only at the age of 35 that the twins were reunitedand discovered how similar they were to each other.
Paula Bernstein grew up in a happy home in suburban New York. She loved her adopted parents
and older brother and even wrote an article titled “Why I Don’t Want to Find My Birth Mother.”
Elyse’s childhood, also a happy one, was followed by college and then film school abroad.
In 2003, 35 years after she was adopted, Elyse, acting on a whim, inquired about her biologicalfamily at the adoption agency. The response came back: “You were born on October 9, 1968, at
12:51 p.m., the younger of twin girls. You’ve got a twin sister Paula and she’s looking for you.”
Elyse dialed Paula’s phone number: “It’s almost like I’m hearing my own voice in a recorderback at me,” she said. “It’s funny because I feel like in a way I was talking to an old, close friend
I never knew I had…we had an immediate intimacy, and yet, we didn’t know each other at all,”Paula said.
The two women met for the first time at a café for lunch and talked until the late evening. “We
had 35 years to catch up on,” said Paula. “How do you start asking somebody, ‘What have you
been up to since we shared a womb together?’ Where do you start?”
With each new detail revealed, the twins learned about their remarkable similarities. They’d bothgone to graduate school in film. They both loved to write, and they had both edited their highschool yearbooks. They have similar taste in music.
259

“I think, you know, when we met it was undeniable that we were twins. Looking at this person,
you are able to gaze into your own eyes and see yourself from the outside. This identicalindividual has the exact same DNA and is essentially your clone. We don’t have to imagine,”
Paula said. Now they finally feel like sisters. “But it’s perhaps even closer than sisters,” Elyse
said, “Because we’re also twins.”
The twins, who both now live in Brooklyn, combined their writing skills to write a book called
Identical Strangers about their childhoods and their experience of discovering an identical twinin their mid-30s (Spilius, 2007; Kuntzman, 2007).
One question that is exceedingly important for the study of personality concerns the extent towhich it is the result of nature or nurture. If nature is more important, then our personalities will
form early in our lives and will be difficult to change later. If nurture is more important, however,then our experiences are likely to be particularly important, and we may be able to alter our
personalities over time. In this section we will see that the personality traits of humans and animals
are determined in large part by their genetic makeup. Thus, it is no surprise that identical twins
Paula Bernstein and Elyse Schein turned out to be very similar, even though they had been raised
separately, but we will also see that genetics does not determine everything.
The genes of different members of the same species are almost
Figure 8.3 Instincts
identical. The DNA in your genes, for instance, is about 99.9%
the same as the DNA of every other human being. These
common genetic structures lead members of the same species tobe born with a variety of behaviors that come naturally to themand that define the characteristics of the species. These abilities
and characteristics are known as instincts, or complex inborn
patterns of behaviors that help ensure survival andreproduction (Tinbergen, 1951). Different animals havedifferent instincts. Birds naturally build nests, dogs are naturally
loyal to their pack, and humans instinctively learn to walk,
Sourcespeak, and understand language. The strength of different traits
and behaviors also varies within species. These differences are
determined by the small amount (in humans, the 0.1%) of the differences in genes among themembers of the species.
Personality is not determined by any single gene, but rather by the actions of many genes working
together. There is no “IQ gene” that determines intelligence and there is no “good marriage partner
gene” that makes a person a particularly good marriage bet. Furthermore, even working together,genes are not so powerful that they can control or create our personality. Some genes tend toincrease a given characteristic and others work to decrease that same characteristic. The complex
relationship among the various genes, as well as a variety of random factors, produces our
personality. Furthermore, genetic factors always work with environmental factors to create
personality.
Having a given pattern of genes does not necessarily mean that a particular trait will develop,
because some traits might occur only in some environments. For example, a person may have agenetic variant that is known to increase his or her risk for developing alcoholism, but if that person
260never drinks because they live in a country where alcohol is not available, then the person will not
become alcoholic. In addition to the effects of inheritance (nature) and environment (nurture),interactions between these two also influence personality. A high stress environment affects agenetically anxious person differently than a low stress environment.
Perhaps the most direct way to study the role of genetics in personality is to selectively breed
animals for the trait of interest. In this approach the scientist chooses the animals that moststrongly express the personality characteristics of interest and breeds these animals with eachother. If the selective breeding creates offspring with even stronger traits, then we can assume thatthe trait has genetic origins. In this manner, scientists have studied the role of genetics in how
worms respond to stimuli, how fish develop courtship rituals, how rats differ in play, and how pigs
differ in their responses to stress.

Behavioral Genetics
Although selective breeding studies can be informative, they are clearly not useful for studying
humans. For this, psychologists rely on behavioral genetics, which is a variety of researchtechniques that scientists use to learn about the genetic and environmental influences on humanbehavior by comparing the traits of biologically and nonbiologically related family members(Baker, 2004). Behavioral genetics is based on the results of family studies, twin studies, andadoptive studies.
A family study starts with one person who has a trait of interest
and examines the individual’s family tree to determine the extent
to which other members of the family also have the trait. The
presence of the trait in first-degree relatives (parents, siblings, andchildren) is compared to the prevalence of the trait in seconddegree relatives (aunts, uncles, grandchildren, grandparents,
nephews, and nieces) and in more distant family members. The
scientists then analyze the patterns of the trait in the family
members to see the extent to which it is shared by closer andmore distant relatives.

Figure 8.4

SourceAlthough family studies can reveal whether a trait runs in a family, it cannot explain why. In atwin study, the data from many pairs of twins are collected and the rates of similarity for identicaland fraternal pairs are compared. A correlation coefficient is calculated that assesses the extent towhich the trait for one twin is associated with the trait in the other twin. Studies on twins rely on
the fact that identical (or monozygotic) twins have essentially the same set of genes, while fraternal(or dizygotic) twins have, on average, a half-identical set. The idea is that if the twins are raised in
the same household, then the twins will be influenced by their environments to an equal degree,
and this influence will be pretty much equal for identical and fraternal twins. In other words, if
environmental factors are the same, then the only factor that can make identical twins more similar
than fraternal twins is their greater genetic similarity.

261

Box 8.2 Monozygotic and Dizygotic Twins
Many students are interested in twins. Monozygotic or identical twins occur when afertilized egg splits apart in the first two weeks of development. The result is thecreation of two separate, but genetically identical offspring. That is, they possess thesame genotype and often the same phenotype. About one-third of twins aremonozygotic twins. Sometimes, however, two eggs or ova are released and fertilized
by two separate sperm. The result is dizygotic or fraternal twins. These two individuals
share the same amount of genetic material as would any two children from the same
mother and father. In other words, they possess a different genotype and phenotype.
Older mothers are more likely to have dizygotic twins than are younger mothers, andcouples who use fertility drugs are also more likely to give birth to dizygotic
twins. Consequently, there has been an increase in the number of fraternal twins
recently (Bortolus et al., 1999).

Source: Monozygotic Twins

Source Dizygotic Twins

An adoption study compares biologically related people, including twins, who have been reared
either separately or apart. Evidence for genetic influence on a trait is found when children who
have been adopted show traits that are more similar to those of their biological parents than tothose of their adoptive parents. Evidence for environmental influence is found when the adoptee ismore like his or her adoptive parents than the biological parents.
Although twin and adoption studies differ in their methodologies, both studies conclude thatgenetics is important in determining personality, as well as other cognitive (intelligence levels) andbehavioral (psychopathologies) characterisitcs (Kim & Kim, 2011; Plominm, Defries, Knopik, &Neiderhiser, 2013). Results indicate that identical twins are much more similar than fraternal twins,
and therefore these results strongly suggest genetic influences. Similarly, adoption studies
demonstrate stronger family resemblances, even when family members are separated due toadoption. However, adoption studies do not demonstrate the level of heritability that the twin
studies do (Kim & Kim, 2011).

262

When looking specifically at personality and the Five Factor Model, Bouchard and McGue (2002)
found that personality is partly genetic with approximately half of the variation on the fivepersonality traits due to genetic variation between people (see Figure 8.5).

Figure 8.5 Heritability of the Big Five Traits
0.8
0.6

0.57

0.54

0.49

0.52
0.42

0.4
0.2
0
openness

conscientiousness

extraversion

agreeableness

Neuroticism

Source: Bouchard & McGue (2002)

Molecular Genetics
In addition to the use of behavioral genetics, our understanding of the role of biology in personality
recently has been dramatically increased through the use of molecular genetics. Molecular
genetics is the study of which genes are associated with which personality traits (Goldsmith et al.,
2003; Strachan & Read, 1999). These advances have occurred, as a result of, new knowledge about
the structure of human DNA made possible through the Human Genome Project and related workthat has identified the genes in the human body (Human Genome Project, 2010). Molecular
genetics researchers have also developed new techniques that allow them to find the locations ofgenes within chromosomes and to identify the effects those genes have when activated ordeactivated.
Figure 8.6 Mice inKnockout Studies© Thinkstock

One approach that can be used in animals, usually in laboratory
mice, is the knockout study. In this approach the researchers
use specialized techniques to remove or modify the influence ofa gene in a line of mice (Crusio, Goldowitz, Holmes, &Wolfer, 2009). The researchers harvest embryonic stem cells
from mouse embryos and then modify the DNA of the cells.
The DNA is created such that the action of certain genes will beeliminated or “knocked out.” The cells are then injected into theembryos of other mice that are implanted into the uteruses ofliving female mice. When these animals are born, they arestudied to see whether their behavior differs from a control© Thinkstockgroup of normal animals. Research has foundthat removing orchanging genes in mice can affect their anxiety, aggression,

learning, and socialization patterns.

263

Changes in gene expression may also be due to known or unknown epigenetic influences, which is
known as epigenesis (Plomin et al., 2013). Epigenesis refers to environmental factors that turngenes on or off at a molecular level. Substances in the environment, such as drugs or toxins, cancause epigenesis. Less obvious epigenetic influences, such as diet, may also be part of theinteraction between genes and environment. Having a trait or disorder may require inheriting agene, and then being exposed to the epigenetic influence which turns the gene "on" or "off."
In humans, a molecular genetics study normally begins with the collection of a DNA sample fromthe participants, usually by taking some cells from the inner surface of the cheek. In the lab, theDNA is extracted from the sampled cells and is combined with a solution containing a marker forthe particular genes of interest, as well as, a fluorescent dye. If the gene is present in the DNA of
the individual, then the solution will bind to that gene and activate the dye. The more the gene isexpressed, the stronger the reaction.
Figure 8.7

Researchers use dyes, such asthese in a sample of stem cells, todetermine the action of genes
from DNA samples.

In one common approach, DNA is collected from people whohave a specific personality characteristic, and also from people
who do not. The DNA of the two groups is compared to see
which genes differ between them. These studies are now able tocompare thousands of genes at the same time. Research using
molecular genetics has found genes associated with a variety of
personality traits, including novelty-seeking (Ekelund,
Lichtermann, Järvelin, & Peltonen, 1999), inattention andhyperactivity (Waldman & Gizer, 2006), and nicotine
dependence (Thorgeirsson et al., 2008).

© Thinkstock

Is Our Genetics Our Destiny?
Over the past two decades, scientists have made substantial progress in understanding theimportant role of genetics in behavior. Molecular genetics studies have begun to pinpoint theparticular genes that are causing these differences. The results of these studies might lead you tobelieve that your destiny is determined by your genes, but this would be a mistaken assumption.
For one, the results of all research must be interpreted carefully. Over time we will learn evenmore about the role of genetics, and our conclusions about its influence will likely change.
Current research in the area of behavioral genetics is often criticized for making assumptions about
how researchers categorize identical and fraternal twins, about whether twins are in fact treated in
the same way by their parents, about whether twins are representative of children more generally,
and about many other issues. Although these critiques may not change the overall conclusions, it
must be kept in mind that these findings are relatively new and will certainly be updated with time
(Plomin, 2000).
Furthermore, it is important to reiterate that although genetics is important, and although we arelearning more every day about its role in many personality variables, genetics does not determine
everything. In fact, the major influence on personality is the nonshared environment, which
include all the things that occur to us that make us unique individuals. These differences include264

variability in brain structure, nutrition, education, upbringing, and even interactions among thegenes themselves (Plomin et al., 2013; Kim & Kim, 2011).
The genetic differences that exist at birth may be either amplified or diminished over time throughenvironmental factors and interactions between the genes and environment. The brains and bodies
of identical twins are not exactly the same, and they become even more different as they grow up.
As a result, even genetically identical twins have distinct personalities, resulting in a large part fromenvironmental effects. The effect of our genes on our behavior is entirely dependent upon thecontext of our life as it unfolds day to day. Based on your genes, no one can say what kind of
human being you will turn out to be or what you will do in life.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Genes are the basic biological units that transmit characteristics from one
generation to the next.
Personality is not determined by any single gene, but rather by the actions ofmany genes working together.
Behavioral genetics refers to a variety of research techniques that scientists use tolearn about the genetic and environmental influences on human behavior.
Behavioral genetics is based on the results of family studies, twin studies, and adoptive
studies.
Molecular genetics is the study of which genes are associated with which personality
traits.
Epigeneis refers to environmental factors that turn genes on and off.
The largely unknown environmental influences, known as the nonshared environment,
may have the largest impact on personality. These differences are nonsystematic andlargely random, and thus we do not inherit our personality in any fixed sense.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Think about the twins you know. Do they seem to be very similar to each other, ordoes it seem that their differences outweigh their similarities?
2. Describe the implications of the effects of genetics on personality, overall. What doesit mean to say that genetics “determines” or “does not determine” our personality?
3. Watch this video on epigenesis and evaluate the complexity of
researching these influences. http://video.pbs.org/video/1525107473

VideosTry finding your own DNA by using the procedure recommended by NOVA:
http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/nova/body/extract-your-dna.html

265Studying the Nurture of Personality
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Describe the views of humanism on personality.
Distinguish between self-concept and self-esteem.
Describe Abraham Maslow's hierarchy of needs and define self-actualization.
Explain Carl Roger’s unconditional positive regard as it relates to personality development.
Describe Bandura’s social cognitive theory and the concept of reciprocal determinism.
Explain self-efficacy.
Differentiate between internal and external locus of control.

Humanism and Self-Actualization
As you recall from chapter one, humanism embraces the notions of the self and free will. Arguingthat people are free to choose their own lives and make their own decisions, humanistic
psychologists focus on the underlying motivations that they believe drive personality, that is,
focusing on the nature of the self-concept, the set of beliefs about who we are, and self-esteem, ourpositive feelings about the self.
One of the most important humanists, Abraham Maslow (1908–1970), conceptualized personality
in terms of a pyramid-shaped Hierarchy of Needs (Vazire, 2014) (see Figure 8.8). At the base of
the pyramid are the lowest-level motivations, including hunger and thirst, safety, andbelongingness. Maslow argued that only when people meet the lower-level needs are they able tomove on to achieve the higher-level needs of self-esteem, and eventually self-actualization, whichis the motivation to develop our innate potential to the fullest possible extent.
Maslow studied how successful people, including Albert Einstein, Abraham Lincoln, Martin
Luther King Jr., Helen Keller, and Mahatma Gandhi had been able to lead such successful andproductive lives. Maslow (1970) believed that self-actualized people are creative, spontaneous, andloving of themselves and others. They tend to have a few deep friendships rather than manysuperficial ones, and are generally private. He felt that these individuals do not need to conform to
the opinions of others because they are very confident and thus free to express unpopular opinions.
Self-actualized people are also likely to experience transcendent moments of tranquility or peakexperiences accompanied by a strong sense of connection with others.
One criticism of Maslow's hierarchy of needs is that individuals are not static. They are motivatedby different needs at different times. For instance, sometimes competing motives may exist at thesame time. Additionally, growth in one area does not stop growth in another area (Haggerty, 1999).
The stepwise progression of a pyramid also suggests a one directional journey which may notreflect the full complexity of human motivation. Needs for recognition, for example, may takeprecedence over needs for personal safety. Maslow also focused on a small number of historically
productive individuals that he subjectively identified as self-actualized (Smith, 1978), and thus
drew overly optimistic conclusions about the capacity of people to achieve their full potential.
266

Finally, cross-cultural criticism suggests that the theory is biased by the Western emphasis onindividualism (Vazire, 2014). Other cultures may regard “self-actualization” as “self-indulgent”.
These cultures believe reaching one’s full potential means supporting group needs and sacrificing
one’s own potential for the benefit of others.
Figure 8.8 Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs

Abraham Maslow conceptualized personality in terms of a hierarchy of needs. The highest of thesemotivations is self-actualization.

Perhaps the best-known humanistic theorist is Carl Rogers (1902–1987). Rogers was positive
about human nature, viewing people as primarily moral and helpful to others, and he believed that
we can achieve our full potential for emotional fulfillment if the self-concept has experienced
unconditional positive regard, a set of behaviors including being treated in an empathic, genuine,
and open manner by others. In contrast, when people are subjected to conditional positive regard
in that others only showed them warmth or consideration when they behaved as expected, they failto reach their full potential.

267

Figure 8.9 Carl Rogers

According to Rogers (Engler, 2014), experiencing unconditional
positive regard allows us to view ourselves favorably and accept
ourselves for who we are. When we treat ourselves or others withunconditional positive regard, we express understanding andsupport, even while we may acknowledge failings. The principle ofunconditional positive regard has become a foundation of
psychological therapy; therapists who use it in their practice are
more effective than those who do not (Prochaska & Norcross, 2007;
Yalom, 1995).

Overall, the ideas of humanism are so powerful and optimistic thatthey have continued to influence the development of psychologicaltheories. Today positive psychology, which is the study of positive
Sourcehuman experiences, including compassion, self-actualization,
happiness, leadership, and gratitude (Vazire, 2014) argues formany of the ideas of humanism. Research has documented the extent to which thinking positively
and openly has important beneficial consequences for our relationships, our life satisfaction, andour psychological and physical health (Seligman & Csikszentmihalyi, 2000).

Interactions with the Environment
Albert Bandura’s (1986) Social cognitive theory
explains personality development as learning that
occurs through interactions with other people. The
term interaction is important. It means that each
person in the interaction influences each other. A
child with ADHD does not act the same as a child
who is shy. A parent does not speak in the same way
to an active child and a quiet child. The shy childand the active child do not respond in the same way
to what the parent says. If an easily frustrated parent
is paired with an active child, conflict can escalate
and both personalities can be affected. Eachinfluence the other. When relationships are more
complex, for example in a large family, eachindividual plays a role in shaping all the other family
members.

Figure 8.10

Bandura’s concept of reciprocal determinismemphasizes the interaction between the person,
the person’s behavior, and the environment.

Environments, as well as the individuals themselves, influence their personality. Bandura (1977)selected the term reciprocal determinism to explain the interactions between environmental
factors (parents, culture, school, work place), personal factors (genetics, feelings, cognition,
appearance) and the individual’s behavior. Bandura stated, “people are neither powerless objects
controlled by environmental forces nor free agents who can become whatever they choose. Bothpeople and their environments are reciprocal determinants of each other,” (p. vii).

268

The prior example can then be expanded to include environmental factors. A parent under stress atwork yells at the active child. The child throws a tantrum, causing the parent to be late to work.
The tardy parent snaps at a customer and loses a sale. The parent returns home and blames thechild. The child smashes the parent’s cell phone, and the parent misses a call from the office. Bothparent and child become more aggressive.
Figure 8.11
Albert Bandura

SourceBandura (1986) also studied the concept of self-efficacy. Selfefficacy refers to people’s belief that they can be successful inachieving their goals. Self-efficacy is not the same as self-esteem.
Self-esteem refers to our judgments of self-worth, whereas, selfefficacy refers to our judgments of personal ability. Both are affectedby our past experiences and successes. We usually do not try things
that we do not believe we can do. Both self-efficacy and self-esteem
are important features of the “person” factor.
Taken together, these findings make a very important point about
personality, which is that it not only comes from inside us, but is also
shaped by the situations to which we have been exposed. Personality
is partially derived from our interactions with and observations ofothers, from our interpretations of those interactions and observations,and from our choices of which social situations we prefer to enter or
avoid (Bandura, 1986).

Locus of Control
The social-cognitive theorist, Julian Rotter examined our belief in personal control (Schultz &Schultz, 1994). Locus of control refers to the belief that consequences are either the result of ourown actions, or due to outside forces beyond our control. Rotter noted that individuals who havean internal locus of control assume that their behavior is responsible for the consequences theyexperience. Whereas, individuals with an external locus of control believe that they are at thewhim of luck, chance, or the actions of other people.
Several studies have shown that there are benefits to being more internal than external. Internals
tend to achieve more and have better problem-solving abilities (Agarwal & Misra, 1986) are lesslikely to be persuaded by others or blindly follow authority (Lefcourt, 1976). In contrast, externals
tend to be more vulnerable to stress and may develop strategies that invite failure (Drwal &Wiechnik, 1984; Lester, 1992).

269

Figure 8.12

The humanistic and social-cognitive theories contribute to our understanding of the complexities ofhuman personality. Psychologists may choose explanations based on traits, early childhood
experiences, feelings about the self, and even complex interactions between the person and theenvironment.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•

Humanism emphasizes the concepts of self-esteem, self-actualization, and free will.
Self-actualization is the highest level of motivation in Maslow's hierarchy of needs.
Rogers focused on the need for unconditional positive regard to fulfill our potential.
The social cognitive theory explains personality development as learning that occurs
through complex interactions among the person, his or her actions, and the environment,
referred to as reciprocal determinism.
Two important features of the person are self-efficacy and locus of control.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Based on your understanding of humanistic theories, how would you try to change yourbehavior to better meet the underlying motivations of physiology, security, acceptance, selfesteem, and self-actualization?
2. Consider your own self-efficacy and locus of control. How do these influence yourpersonality?

270

Personality Assessment
Learning Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.

Diffferentiate between objective and projective measures of personality assessment.
Identify two types of objective measures of personality assessment.
What problems are associated with the Myers-Briggs as a personality test?
Describe the Rorschach and TAT as measures of personality assessment and identify
their drawbacks.
5. Distinguish between individualistic and collectivistic cultures.
6. Describe how mental health disorders are related to personality.
7. Describe the use of the MMPI.
Researchers have adopted a wide range of approaches to measure important personality
characteristics. The most widely used strategies will be summarized in the following sections, andboth their strengths and limitations will be described.

Objective Tests
Objective personality tests use questions with a limited number of answers, for example truefalse items. An Inventory is a questionnaire that may be used in objective psychological testing todetermine personality traits. Research has shown that specific patterns of answers are associatedwith certain traits. This enables a psychologist to determine a person’s traits or diagnosis based on
their answers.
Self-report Measures: Objective personality tests can be further subdivided into two basic types.
The first type, the self-report measure, is the most widely used in modern personality research
and asks people to describe themselves. This approach offers two key advantages. First, self-raters
have access to an unparalleled wealth of information: After all, who knows more about you thanyou yourself? Self-raters have direct access to their own thoughts, feelings, and motives, which
may not be readily available to others (Oh, Wang, & Mount, 2011; Watson, Hubbard, & Weise,
2000). Second, asking people to describe themselves is the simplest, easiest, and most costeffective approach to assessing personality. Countless studies, for instance, have involved
administering self-report measures to college students, who are provided some relatively simple
incentive (e.g., extra course credit) to participate.
The items included in self-report measures may consist of single words (e.g., assertive), shortphrases (e.g., am full of energy), or complete sentences (e.g., I like to spend time with others).
Figure 8.13 illustrates examples from a self-report measure assessing the general traits from thefive-factor model of personality: Extraversion, openness, agreeableness, neuroticism, andconscientiousness (John & Srivastava, 1999; McCrae, Costa, & Martin, 2005).

271

Figure 8.13 Sample self-report measure assessing the general traits comprising
the influential five-factor model (FFM) of personality:

Source: NOBA Personality Traits http://nobaproject.com/modules/personality-traits

Self-report personality tests show impressive validity in relation to a wide range of important
outcomes. For example, self-ratings of conscientiousness are significant predictors of both overall
academic performance (e.g., cumulative grade point average; Poropat, 2009) and job performance(Oh et al., 2011). Roberts, Kuncel, Shiner, Caspi, and Goldberg (2007) reported that self-rated
personality predicted occupational attainment, divorce, and mortality. Similarly, Friedman, Kern,and Reynolds (2010) showed that personality ratings collected early in life were related to272

happiness/well-being, physical health, and mortality risk assessed several decades later. Finally,
self-reported personality has important and pervasive links to psychopathology. Most notably, selfratings of neuroticism are associated with a wide array of clinical syndromes, including anxiety
disorders, depressive disorders, substance use disorders, somatoform disorders, eating disorders,personality, conduct disorders, and schizophrenia/schizotypy (Kotov, Gamez, Schmidt, & Watson,
2010; Mineka, Watson, & Clark, 1998).
At the same time, however, this method is limited in a number of ways. First, raters may bemotivated to present themselves in an overly favorable, socially desirable way (Paunonen & LeBel,2012). This is a particular concern in “high-stakes testing”, that is, situations in which test scores
are used to make important decisions about individuals (e.g., when applying for a job). Second,
personality ratings reflect a self-enhancement bias (Vazire & Carlson, 2011); in other words,
people are motivated to ignore (or at least downplay) some of their less desirable characteristics
and to focus instead on their more positive attributes. Third, self-ratings are subject to the referencegroup effect (Heine, Buchtel, & Norenzayan, 2008); that is, we base our self-perceptions, in part,on how we compare to others in our sociocultural reference group. For instance, if you tend towork harder than most of your friends, you will see yourself as someone who is relatively
conscientious, even if you are not particularly conscientious in any absolute sense.
The human tendency to perceive traits is so strong that it is very easy to convince people that trait
descriptions of themselves are accurate. Imagine that you had completed a personality test and thepsychologist administering the measure gave you this description of your personality:
You have a great need for other people to like and admire you. You have a tendency to be
critical of yourself. You have a great deal of unused capacity, which you have not turned toyour advantage. While you have some personality weaknesses, you are generally able tocompensate for them. Disciplined and self-controlled outside, you tend to be worrisome andinsecure inside. At times you have serious doubts as to whether you have made the rightdecision or done the right thing.
You might find that these statements described you. You probably do criticize yourself at least
sometimes, and you probably do sometimes worry about things. The problem is that you would
most likely have found some truth in a personality description that was the opposite.
Could this description fit you too?
You frequently stand up for your own opinions even if it means that others may judge you
negatively. You have a tendency to find the positives in your own behavior. You work to thefullest extent of your capabilities. You have few personality weaknesses, but some may show
up under stress. You sometimes confide in others that you are concerned or worried, but
inside you maintain discipline and self-control. You generally believe that you have madethe right decision and done the right thing.

273

The Barnum effect refers to the observation that people tend to believe in descriptions of theirpersonality that supposedly are descriptive of them, but could in fact describe almost anyone. The
Barnum effect helps us understand why many people believe in astrology, horoscopes, fortunetelling, palm reading, tarot card reading, and even some personality tests. People are likely to accept
descriptions of their personality if they think that they have been written for them, even though theycannot distinguish their own tarot card or horoscope readings from those of others at better thanchance levels (Hines, 2003). Again, people seem to believe in traits more than they should.
Informant-rating Measures: Another approach to personality assessment is to ask someone who
knows a person well to describe his or her personality characteristics, which is known as an
informant-rating measure. In the case of children or adolescents, the informant is most likely to
be a parent or teacher. In studies of older participants, informants may be friends, roommates,
dating partners, spouses, children, or bosses (Oh et al., 2011; Vazire & Carlson, 2011; Watson etal., 2000). Generally speaking, informant ratings are similar in format to self-ratings. As was thecase with self-report, items may consist of single words, short phrases, or complete sentences.
Indeed, many popular instruments include parallel self- and informant-rating versions, and it often
is relatively easy to convert a self-report measure so that it can be used to obtain informant ratings.
Informant ratings are particularly valuable when self-ratings are impossible to collect, such as
when studying young children or cognitively impaired adults, or when their validity is suspect,such as when people may not be entirely honest in high-stakes testing situations. They also may be
combined with self-ratings of the same characteristics to produce more reliable and valid measuresof these attributes (McCrae, 1994).
Informant ratings offer several advantages in comparison to other approaches to assessing
personality. A well-acquainted informant presumably has had the opportunity to observe large
samples of behavior in the person he or she is rating. Moreover, these judgments presumably are
not subject to the types of defensiveness that potentially can distort self-ratings (Vazire & Carlson,2011). Indeed, informants typically have strong incentives for being accurate in their judgments.
Nevertheless, informant ratings also are subject to certain problems and limitations. One generalissue is the level of relevant information that is available to the rater (Funder, 2012). For instance,even under the best of circumstances, informants lack full access to the thoughts, feelings, andmotives of the person they are rating. This problem is magnified when the informant does notknow the person particularly well and/or only sees him or her in a limited range of situations(Funder, 2012; Beer & Watson, 2010).
Informant ratings also are subject to some of the same response biases noted earlier for self-ratings.
For instance, they are not immune to the reference group effect. Indeed, it is well-established thatparent ratings often are subject to a sibling contrast effect, such that parents exaggerate the true
magnitude of differences between their children (Pinto, Rijsdijk, Frazier-Wood, Asherson, &Kuntsi, 2012). Furthermore, in many studies, individuals are allowed to nominate (or even recruit)
the informants who will rate them. Because of this, it most often is the case that informants (who,as noted earlier, may be friends, relatives, or romantic partners) like the people they are rating.
This, in turn, means that informants may produce overly favorable personality ratings. Indeed, their274

ratings can be more favorable than the corresponding self-ratings (Watson & Humrichouse, 2006).
This tendency for informants to produce unrealistically positive ratings has been termed the letterof recommendation effect (Leising, Erbs, & Fritz, 2010) and the honeymoon effect when applied
to newlyweds (Watson & Humrichouse, 2006).
As with intelligence tests, the utility of self-report measures of personality depends on theirreliability and validity. Some popular measures of personality are not useful because they are
unreliable or invalid. Perhaps you have heard of a personality test known as the Myers-Briggs Type
Indicator (MBTI). If so, you are not alone, because the MBTI is the most widely administeredpersonality test in the world, given millions of times a year to employees in thousands ofcompanies. The MBTI categorizes people into one of four categories on each of four dimensions:introversion versus extraversion, sensing versus intuiting, thinking versus feeling, and judging
versus perceiving.
Although completing the MBTI can be useful for helping people think about individual differencesin personality, and for “breaking the ice” at meetings, the measure itself is not psychologicallyuseful because it is not reliable or valid. People’s classifications change over time, and scores on
the MBTI do not relate to other measures of personality or to behavior (Hunsley, Lee, & Wood,2003). Measures such as the MBTI remind us that it is important to scientifically and empiricallytest the effectiveness of personality tests by assessing their stability over time and their ability to
predict behavior.

Projective Techniques
Whereas self-report measures ask people to consciously
report on their inner experiences, projective measures
are measures of personality in which unstructured
stimuli, such as inkblots, drawings of social situations,or incomplete sentences, are shown to participants, who
are asked to freely list what comes to mind as they think
about the stimuli. Experts then score the responses forclues to personality. The proposed advantage of thesetests is that they are more indirect as they allow the
respondent to freely express whatever comes to mind.

Figure 8.14 Rorschach Inkblot Test

One commonly used projective test is the Rorschach
Inkblot Test, developed by the Swiss psychiatrist
Hermann Rorschach (1884–1922). The Rorschach Inkblot Test is a projective measure of
personality in which the respondent indicates his or her thoughts about a series of 10 symmetricalinkblots (Figure 8.14). The Rorschach is administered millions of time every year. The participants
are asked to respond to the inkblots, and their responses are systematically scored in terms of what,
where, and why they saw what they saw. For example, people who focus on the details of the
inkblots may have obsessive-compulsive tendencies, whereas those who talk about sex or
aggression may have sexual or aggressive problems.

275

Figure 8.15 Sample Card from the TATThis is one of the cards from the TAT. Note that the sex of the figure in
the foreground is ambiguous as is the emotional expression of thewoman in the background

Another frequently administered projective
test is the Thematic Apperception Test
(TAT), developed by the psychologist Henry
Murray (1893–1988). The Thematic
Apperception Test (TAT) is a projective
measure of personality in which the
respondent is asked to create stories aboutsketches of ambiguous situations, most ofthem people, either alone or with others(Figure 8.15). The sketches are shown toindividuals, who are asked to tell a story
about what is happening in the picture. The
TAT assumes that people may be unwillingor unable to admit their true feelings when
asked directly, but these feelings will show
up in the stories about the pictures. Trainedcoders use the stories to develop a personality
profile of the respondent.

The idea is that when people view ambiguous stimuli, they will describe them according to the
aspects of personality that are most important to them, and therefore bypass some of the limitationsof more conscious responding. Despite their widespread use, however, the empirical evidence
supporting the use of projective tests is mixed (Karon, 2000; Wood, Nezworski, Lilienfeld, & Garb,
2003). The reliability of the measures is low because people often produce very different responses
on different occasions. The construct validity of the measures is also suspect because there are very
few consistent associations between Rorschach scores or TAT scores and most personality traits.
The projective tests often fail to distinguish between people with psychological disorders and those
without or to correlate with other measures of personality or with behavior.
In sum, projective tests are more useful as icebreakers to get to know a person better, to make theperson feel comfortable, and to get some ideas about topics that may be of importance to that
person than for accurately diagnosing personality.

Box 8.3 Psychology in Everyday Life: Leaders and Leadership
One trait that has been studied in thousands of studies is leadership, the ability to direct or
inspire others to achieve goals. Trait theories of leadership are theories based on the idea thatsome people are simply “natural leaders” because they possess personality characteristics thatmake them effective (Zaccaro, 2007). Consider Bill Gates, the founder of the Microsoft
Corporation, shown in Figure 8.16. What characteristics do you think he possessed thatallowed him to create such a strong company, even though many similar companies failed?

276

Figure 8.16 Varieties of LeadersWhich personality traits do you think characterize these leaders?
Former President Barack Obama photo courtesy Source
Microsoft Chairman Bill Gates photo courtesy Source
Illinois Senator Tammy Duckworth photo courtesy Source

Research has found that being intelligent is an important characteristic of leaders, as long as theleader communicates to others in a way that is easily understood by his or her followers(Simonton, 1994, 1995). Other research has found that people with good social skills, such as theability to accurately perceive the needs and goals of the group members and to communicate
with others, also tend to make good leaders (Kenny & Zaccaro, 1983).
Because so many characteristics seem to be related to leader skills, some researchers haveattempted to account for leadership not in terms of individual traits, but rather in terms of a
package of traits that successful leaders seem to have. Some have considered this in terms ofcharisma (Sternberg & Lubart, 1995; Sternberg, 2002). Charismatic leaders are leaders whoare enthusiastic, committed, and self-confident; who tend to talk about the importance of group
goals at a broad level; and who make personal sacrifices for the group. Charismatic leaders
express views that support and validate existing group norms, but that also contain a vision ofwhat the group could or should be. Charismatic leaders use their referent power to motivate,
uplift, and inspire others. Research has found a positive relationship between a leader’s charismaand effective leadership performance (Simonton, 1988).
Another trait-based approach to leadership is based on the idea that leaders take eithertransactional or transformational leadership styles with their subordinates (Bass, 1999; Pieterse,
Van Knippenberg, Schippers, & Stam, 2010). Transactional leaders are the more regularleaders, who work with their subordinates to help them understand what is required of them andto get the job done. Transformational leaders, on the other hand, are more like charismatic
leaders as they have a vision of where the group is going, and attempt to stimulate and inspire
their workers to move beyond their present status and to create a new and better future.

277

Despite the fact there appears to be at least some personality traits that relate to leadershipability, the most important approaches to understanding leadership take into consideration boththe personality characteristics of the leader, as well as the situation in which the leader isoperating. In some cases, the situation itself is important. President George W. Bush’s ratings as aleader increased dramatically after the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks on the World Trade
Center. This is a classic example of how a situation can influence the perceptions of a leader’sskill.
In still other cases, different types of leaders may perform differently in different situations.
Leaders whose personalities lead them to be more focused on fostering harmonious social
relationships among the members of the group, for instance, are particularly effective insituations in which the group is already functioning well, and yet it is important to keep the groupmembers engaged in the task and committed to the group outcomes. Leaders who are more taskoriented and directive, on the other hand, are more effective when the group is not functioning
well and needs a firm hand to guide it (Ayman, Chemers, & Fiedler, 1995).

Personality and Culture
Culture greatly affects how individuals perceive themselves, and one important distinction is wherea culture falls on the continuum between individualism and collectivism (Vazire, 2014).
Individualistic cultures, such as the mainstream culture in the United States, focus on the self
more than relationships. Independence and personal rights are valued over obligations to others.
In contrast, collectivistic cultures, such as those in eastern Asia, value obligation to one’s groupover personal rights and desires. Cultural traditions and hierarchies are stronger in collectivistic
cultures. Additionally, personality differences typically assessed, such as the Big Five, appear lessnoticeable in collectivistic cultures. However, within any culture there will be some members who
exhibit more individualism than collectivism and vice versa. Consequently, individualismcollectivism may be a personality trait itself.

Personality and Mental Health
Although they may appear unrelated, personality traits and mental health disorders are often on acontinuum (Twenge & Campbell, 2017). The line between what is considered normal andabnormal is due to the quantity of a trait. When in very high amounts, traits (such as narcissism)
can result in a mental health diagnosis.
An important objective measure used to diagnose mental health disorders, is the Minnesota
Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI), a test used around the world to identify personality
and psychological disorders (Tellegen et al., 2003). The MMPI (see Table 8.2) was developed bycreating a list of more than 1,000 true-false questions and choosing those that best differentiatedpatients with different psychological disorders from other people. The current version (the MMPI2) has more than 500 questions, and the items can be combined into a large number of different
subscales. The MMPI also has questions that are designed to detect the tendency of the respondents
to answer in ways that make them appear in a more positive light (social desirability), lie, fake, or
simply not answer the questions.
278

Table 8.2 Some of the Major Subscales of the MMPI
Abbreviation

Description

What is measured

No. of items

Hs

Hypochondriasis

Concern with bodily symptoms

32

D

Depression

Depressive symptoms

57

Hy

Hysteria

Awareness of problems and vulnerabilities

60

Pd

Psychopathic deviate

Conflict, struggle, anger, respect for society’s rules

50

MF

Masculinity/femininity Stereotypical masculine or feminine interests/behaviors

56

Pa

Paranoia

Level of trust, suspiciousness, sensitivity

40

Pt

Psychasthenia

Worry, anxiety, tension, doubts, obsessiveness48

Sc

Schizophrenia

Odd thinking and social alienation

78

Ma

Hypomania

Level of excitability

46

Si

Social introversion

People orientation69

To interpret the results, the clinician looks at the pattern of responses across the different subscales
and makes a diagnosis about the potential psychological problems facing the patient. Althoughclinicians prefer to interpret the patterns themselves, a variety of research has demonstrated thatcomputers can often interpret the results as well as clinicians (Garb, 1998; Karon, 2000). Extensive
research has found that the MMPI-2 can accurately predict which of the many different
psychological disorders a person suffers from (Graham, 2006). This measure contrasts with the
projective measures, Rorschach and TAT, previously discussed. With those projective
measures, there is questionable reliability and validity.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•

•
•

Personality can be assessed using objective measures, including self-report andinformant-rating measures.
There is often only a low correlation between the specific traits that a person expresses in
one situation and those that is expressed in other situations. Personality predicts behavior
better when the behaviors are aggregated or averaged across different situations.
Projective measures of personality show participants unstructured stimuli, such as
inkblots, drawings of social situations, or incomplete sentences, and ask them to freely list
what comes to mind as they think about the stimuli. Despite their widespread use,
however, the empirical evidence supporting the use of projective tests is mixed.
Both cultural and mental health issues have been researched with personality.
The Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI) is a measure of personality andpsychological disorders.
279

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Consider your own personality and those of people you know. What traits do you enjoy inother people, and what traits do you dislike?
2. Consider some of the people who have had an important influence on you. What were thepersonality characteristics of these people that made them so influential?

Activities
You can complete a self-report measure of personality using a short form of the Five-Factor
Personality Test here. There are 50 questions and it should take you about 3-8 minutes tocomplete. You will receive feedback about your personality after you have finished the test.
http://personality-testing.info/tests/IPIP-BFFM/

Chapter Summary
Personality is defined as an individual’s consistent patterns of feeling, thinking, and behaving.
Personalities are characterized in terms of traits, which are relatively enduring characteristics that
influence our behavior across many situations. Psychologists have investigated hundreds of traits
using the self-report approach.
The trait approach to personality was pioneered by early psychologists, including Allport, Cattell,and Eysenck, and their research helped produce the Five-Factor (Big Five) Model of Personality.
The Big Five dimensions are openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, andneuroticism.
The Big Five are cross-culturally valid and accurately predict some behavior, including work place
and academic success, relationships, and psychological disorders.
A difficulty of the trait approach to personality is that there is often only a low correlation between
the traits that a person expresses in one situation and those that he or she expresses in othersituations. However, psychologists have also found that personality predicts behavior better when
the behaviors are averaged across different situations.
Personality traits of humans and animals are determined in large part by their genetic makeup.
Personality is not determined by any single gene, but rather by the actions of many genes working
together.
280

The role of nature and nurture in personality is studied by means of behavioral genetics, including
family studies, twin studies, and adoption studies. These studies partition personality variability into
the interactions among genetics (known as heritability), shared environment, and nonsharedenvironment. Although these studies find that many personality traits are highly heritable, genetics
does not determine everything. The major influence on personality is nonshared environmental
influences.
In addition to the use of behavioral genetics, our understanding of the role of biology in personality
recently has been increased through the use of molecular genetics, the study of which genes areassociated with which personality traits in animals and humans. Epigenetic influences are also
important in that genes can be expressed through environmental factors.
Humanistic theories of personality focus on the underlying motivations that they believed drive
personality. Humanists focus on the nature of the self-concept and the development of self-esteem.
Abraham Maslow focused on self-actualization as the most advanced motive in his hierarchy ofneeds, while Carl Rogers focused on how unconditional positive regard helps us reach our fullpotential.
Albert Bandura uses the term reciprocal determinism to explain the complex interactions between
individuals, their behavior, and the environment. Bandura also studied self-efficacy, or the belief
that you can be successful.
Objective measures of personality include self-report and informant-rating measures. The utility ofthese measures depends on their reliability and validity. Additionally, concerns regarding thebarnum effect, honeymoon effect, and letter of recommendation effect, are noted.
While measures of the Big Five have shown reliability and validity, the Myers-Briggs does not,and therefore, is not a useful measure of personality.
Another approach to measuring personality is the use of projective measures, such as the Rorschach
Inkblot Test and the Thematic Apperception Test (TAT). However, both lack reliability andvalidity.
Personality is reflected through culture, especially the distinction between individualism andcollectivism.
Personality and mental health disorders are on a continuum, and an important test used to assess
psychological disorders is the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI).

281

References
Agarwal, R., & Misra, G. (1986). Locus of control and attributions for achievement outcomes, Psychological Studies,31(1), 15-20.
Allemand, M, Zimprich, D., & Martin, M., (2008). Long-term correlated change in personality traits in old age.
Psychology & Aging, 23, 545-557.
Allport, G. W., & Odbert, H. (1936). Trait-names: A psycho-lexical study. No. 211. Princeton, NJ: Psychological
Review Monographs.
Ashton, M. C., & Lee, K. (2008). The HEXACO model of personality structure and the importance of the H factor.
Social and Personality Psychology Compass, 2, 1952-1962.
Ayman, R., Chemers, M. M., & Fiedler, F. (1995). The contingency model of leadership effectiveness: Its level ofanalysis. The Leadership Quarterly, 6(2), 147–167.
Baker, C. (2004). Behavioral genetics: An introduction to how genes and environments interact through development toshape differences in mood, personality, and intelligence. Retrieved from http://www.aaas.org/spp/bgenes/Intro.pdf
Bandura, A. (1977). Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice Hall.
Bass, B. M. (1999). Current developments in transformational leadership: Research and applications. PsychologistManager Journal, 3(1), 5–21.
Beer, A., & Watson, D. (2010). The effects of information and exposure on self-other agreement. Journal of Research
in Personality, 44, 38–45.
Bouchard, T. J., Jr. & McGue, M. (2002). Genetic and environmental influences on human psychological differences.
Journal of Neurobiology, 54 (1), 4-45.
Bortolus, R., Parazzini, F., Chatenoud, L., Benzi, G., Bianchi, M. M., & Marini, A. (1999). The epidemiology ofmultiple births. Human Reproduction Update, 5, 179-187.
Cheung, F. M., & Leung, K. (1998). Indigenous personality measures: Chinese examples. Journal of Cross-Cultural
Psychology, 29(1), 233–248.
Costa, P. T., Jr., & McCrae, R. R. (1992). Revised NEO Personality Inventory (NEO-PI-R) and NEO Five-Factor
Inventory (NEO-FFI) manual. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
Costa, P. T. Jr., Terracciano, A., & McCrae, R. R. (2001). Gender differences in personality traits across cultures:
Robust and surprising findings. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 81, 322–331.
Crews, F. C. (1998). Unauthorized Freud: Doubters confront a legend. New York, NY: Viking Press.
Crusio, W. E., Goldowitz, D., Holmes, A., & Wolfer, D. (2009). Standards for the publication of mouse mutant studies.
Genes, Brain & Behavior, 8(1), 1–4.
Dumfart, B., & Neubauer, A. C. (2016). Conscientiousness is the most powerful neurocognitive predictor of school
achievement in adolescents. Journal of Individual Differences, 37(1), 8-15.
Drwal, R. L., & Wiechnik, R. (1984). The effect of locus of control and self-esteem on attributions and expectancies
after success and failure. Polish Psychological Bulletin, 15 (4), 257-266.

282

Ekelund, J., Lichtermann, D., Järvelin, M. R., & Peltonen, L. (1999). Association between novelty seeking and the type4 dopamine receptor gene in a large Finnish cohort sample. American Journal of Psychiatry, 156, 1453–1455.
Engler, B. (2014). Personality theories (9th ed.). Mason, Ohio: Cengage.
Fisher, S., & Greenberg, R. P. (1996). Freud scientifically reappraised: Testing the theories and therapy. Oxford,
England: John Wiley & Sons.
Friedman, H. S., Kern, K. L., & Reynolds, C. A. (2010). Personality and health, subjective well-being, andlongevity. Journal of Personality, 78, 179–215.
Funder, D. C. (2012). Accurate personality judgment. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 21, 177–182.
Garb, H. N. (1998). Computers and judgment. In H. N. Garb (Ed.), Studying the clinician: Judgment research andpsychological assessment (pp. 207–229). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Goldberg, L. R. (1982). From ace to zombie: Some explorations in the language of personality. In C. D. Spielberger &J. N. Butcher (Eds.), Advances in personality assessment (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Goldsmith, H., Gernsbacher, M. A., Crabbe, J., Dawson, G., Gottesman, I. I., Hewitt, J. Swanson, J. (2003). Research
psychologists’ roles in the genetic revolution. American Psychologist, 58(4), 318–319.
Graham, J. R. (2006). MMPI-2: Assessing personality and psychopathology (4th ed.). New York, NY: Oxford
University Press.
Gray, J. (1992). Men are from Mars and women are from Venus. NY: Harper Collins.
Haggerty, M. R. (1999). Testing Maslow’s hierarchy of needs: National quality-of-life across time. Social Indicators
Research, 46, 249-271.
Heine, S. J., Buchtel, E. E., & Norenzayan, A. (2008). What do cross-national comparisons of personality traits tell us?
The case of conscientiousness. Psychological Science, 19, 309–313.
Hines, T. (2003). Pseudoscience and the paranormal (2nd ed.). Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books.
Human Genome Project. (2010). Information. Retrieved fromhttp://www.ornl.gov/sci/techresources/Human_Genome/home.shtml
Hunsley, J., Lee, C. M., & Wood, J. M. (2003). Controversial and questionable assessment techniques. In S. O.
Lilienfeld, S. J. Lynn, & J. M. Lohr (Eds.), Science and pseudoscience in clinical psychology (pp. 39–76). New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
John, O. P., Angleitner, A., & Ostendorf, F. (1988). The lexical approach to personality: A historical review of trait
taxonomic research. European Journal of Personality, 2(3), 171–203.
John, O. P., Robins, R. W., & Pervin, L. A. (2008). Handbook of personality psychology: Theory and research (3rd ed.).
New York, NY: Guilford Press.
John, O. P., & Srivastava, S. (1999). The big five trait taxonomy: History, measurement, and theoretical perspectives.
In L. A. Pervin & O. P. John (Eds.), Handbook of personality: Theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 102–138). New York,
NY: The Guilford Press.
Karon, B. P. (2000). The clinical interpretation of the Thematic Apperception Test, Rorschach, and other clinical data: A
reexamination of statistical versus clinical prediction. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 31(2), 230–233.

283

Kenny, D. A., & Zaccaro, S. J. (1983). An estimate of variance due to traits in leadership. Journal of Applied
Psychology, 68(4), 678–685.
Kihlstrom, J. F. (1997). Memory, abuse, and science. American Psychologist, 52(9), 994–995.
Kim, H-N, & Kim, H-L. (2011). Trends and directions in personality genetic studies. Genomics & Informatics, 9(2),45-51.
Kotov, R., Gamez, W., Schmidt, F., & Watson, D. (2010). Linking “big” personality traits to anxiety, depressive, andsubstance use disorders: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 136, 768–821.
Kuntzman, G. (2007, October 6). Separated twins Paula Bernstein and Elyse Schein. The Brooklyn Paper. Retrieved
from http://www.brooklynpaper.com/stories/30/39/30_39twins.html
Lachman, M. E., & Bertrand, R. M. (2001) Personality and the self in midlife. In M. E., Lachman (Ed.), Handbook of
midlife development (pp. 279-309). New York; Wiley.
Lefcourt, H. (1976). Locus of control: Current trends in theory and research. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Leising, D., Erbs, J., & Fritz, U. (2010). The letter of recommendation effect in informant ratings ofpersonality. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 98, 668–682.
Lester, D. (1992). Cooperative/competitive strategies and locus of control. Psychological Reports, 71(2), 594.
Lucas, R. E., & Donnallen, M. B. (2011). Personality development across the life span: Longitudinal analyses with anational sample from Germany. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 10(4), 847-861.
Maslow, A. (1970). Motivation and personality (2nd ed.). New York, NY: Harper.
McCrae, R. R. (1994). The counterpoint of personality assessment: Self-reports and observer ratings. Assessment, 1,
159–172.
McCrae, R. R. (2011). Personality theories for the 21st century. Teaching of Psychology, 38(3), 209-214.
McCrae, R. R., Costa, P. T., Jr., & Martin, T. A. (2005). The NEO-PI-3: A more readable Revised NEO Personality
Inventory. Journal of Personality Assessment, 84, 261–270.
Mehl, M. R., Gosling, S. D., & Pennebaker, J. W. (2006). Personality in its natural habitat: Manifestations ad implicit
folk theories of personality in daily life. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 90(5), 862-877.
Mineka, S., Watson, D., & Clark, L. A. (1998). Comorbidity of anxiety and unipolar mood disorders. Annual Review of
Psychology, 49, 377–412.
Newman, L. S., Duff, K. J., & Baumeister, R. F. (1997). A new look at defensive projection: Thought suppression,accessibility, and biased person perception. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72(5), 980–1001.
Oh, I. S., Wang, G., & Mount, M. K. (2011). Validity of observer ratings of the five-factor model of personality traits:
A meta-analysis. Journal of Applied Psychology, 96, 762–773.
Oldham, J. (2010). Borderline personality disorder and DSM-5. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 16(3), 143–154
Ozer, D. J., & Benet-Martinez, V. (2006). Personality and the prediction of consequential outcomes. Annual Review of
Psychology, 57, 401-421.
Paunonen, S. V., & LeBel, E. P. (2012). Socially desirable responding and its elusive effects on the validity of
personality assessments. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 103, 158–175.

284

Pieterse, A. N., Van Knippenberg, D., Schippers, M., & Stam, D. (2010). Transformational and transactional leadershipand innovative behavior: The moderating role of psychological empowerment. Journal of Organizational Behavior,
31(4), 609–623.
Pinto, R., Rijsdijk, F., Frazier-Wood, A. C., Asherson, P., & Kuntsi, J. (2012). Bigger families fare better: A novel
method to estimate rater contrast effects in parental ratings on ADHD symptoms. Behavior Genetics, 42, 875–885.
Plomin, R. (2000). Behavioural genetics in the 21st century. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 24(1),30–34.
Plomin, R., Defries, J. C., Knopik, V. S., & Neiderhiser, J. M. (2013). Behavioral genetics (6th ed.). NY: Worth.
Poropat, A. E. (2009). A meta-analysis of the five-factor model of personality and academic performance.
Psychological Bulletin, 135(2), 322-338.
Prochaska, J. O., & Norcross, J. C. (2007). Systems of psychotherapy: A trans-theoretical analysis (6th ed.). PacificGrove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Roberts, B. W., & DelVecchio, W. F. (2000). The rank-order consistency of personality traits from childhood to old age:
A quantitative review of longitudinal studies. Psychological Bulletin, 126(1), 3–25.
Roberts, B. W., Kuncel, N. R., Shiner, R., Caspi, A., & Goldberg, L. R. (2007). The power of personality: The
comparative validity of personality traits, socioeconomic status, and cognitive ability for predicting important life
outcomes. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 2, 313-345.
Rubenzer, S. J., Faschingbauer, T. R., & Ones, D. S. (2000). Assessing the U.S. presidents using the revised NEO
Personality Inventory. Assessment, 7(4), 403–420.
Saulsman, L. M., & Page, A. C. (2004). The five-factor model and personality disorder empirical literature: A metaanalytic review. Clinical Psychology Review, 23, 1055–1085.
Schultz, D., & Schultz, S. E. (1994). Theories of personality. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Seligman, M. E. P., & Csikszentmihalyi, M. (2000). Positive psychology: An introduction. American Psychologist,
55(1), 5–14.
Simonton, D. K. (1988). Presidential style: Personality, biography and performance. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 55, 928–936.
Simonton, D. K. (1994). Greatness: Who makes history and why. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Simonton, D. K. (1995). Personality and intellectual predictors of leadership. In D. H. Saklofske & M. Zeidner (Eds.),
International handbook of personality and intelligence. Perspectives on individual differences (pp. 739–757). New
York, NY: Plenum.
Smith, M. B. (1978). Psychology and values. Journal of Social Issues, 34, 181-199.
Spilius, A. (2007, October 27). Identical twins reunited after 35 years. Telegraph. Retrieved fromhttp://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1567542/Identical-twins-reunited-after-35-years.html.
Srivastava, S., John, O. P., Gosling, S. D., & Potter, J. (2003). Development of personality in early and middle
adulthood: Set like plaster or persistent change? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 84(5), 1041–1053.
Sternberg, R. J. (2002). Successful intelligence: A new approach to leadership. In R. E. Riggio, S. E. Murphy, & F. J.
Pirozzolo (Eds.), Multiple intelligences and leadership (pp. 9–28). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

285

Sternberg, R., & Lubart, T. (1995). Defying the crowd: Cultivating creativity in a culture of conformity. NY: Free Press.
Strachan, T., & Read, A. P. (1999). Human molecular genetics (2nd ed.). Retrieved fromhttp://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/bookshelf/br.fcgi?book=hmg&part=A2858
Tellegen, A., Ben-Porath, Y. S., McNulty, J. L., Arbisi, P. A., Graham, J. R., & Kaemmer, B. (2003). The MMPI-2
Restructured Clinical Scales: Development, validation, and interpretation. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Tett, R. P., Jackson, D. N., & Rothstein, M. (1991). Personality measures as predictors of job performance: A metaanalytic review. Personnel Psychology, 44(4), 703–742.
Thorgeirsson, T. E., Geller, F., Sulem, P., Rafnar, T., Wiste, A., Magnusson, K. P., Stefansson, K. (2008). A variant
associated with nicotine dependence, lung cancer and peripheral arterial disease. Nature, 452(7187), 638–641.
Tinbergen, N. (1951). The study of instinct (1st ed.). Oxford, England: Clarendon Press.
Triandis, H. C., & Suh, E. M. (2002). Cultural influences on personality. Annual Review of Psychology, 53(1), 133–160.
Twenge, J. M., & Campbell, W. K. (2017). Personality psychology. NY: Pearson.
Vazire, S. (2014). Personality. American Psychological Association. Retrieved fromhttp://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/topss/lessons/secure/personality.pdf
Vazire, S., & Carlson, E. N. (2011). Others sometimes know us better than we know ourselves. Current Directions in
Psychological Science, 20, 104–108.
Waldman, I. D., & Gizer, I. R. (2006). The genetics of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Clinical Psychology
Review, 26(4), 396–432.
Watson, D., Hubbard, B., & Wiese, D. (2000). Self-other agreement in personality and affectivity: The role ofacquaintanceship, trait visibility, and assumed similarity. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 78, 546–558.
Watson, D., & Humrichouse, J. (2006). Personality development in emerging adulthood: Integrating evidence fromself- and spouse-ratings. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 91, 959–974.
Weisberg, Y. J., DeYoung, C. G., & Hirsh, J. B. (2011). Gender differences in personality across the ten aspects of the
big five. Frontiers in Psychology, 2(178), 1-11. doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2011.00178
Wood, J. M., Nezworski, M. T., Lilienfeld, S. O., & Garb, H. N. (2003). What’s wrong with the Rorschach? Science
confronts the controversial inkblot test. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Yalom, I. (1995). Introduction. In C. Rogers, A way of being. NY: Houghton Mifflin.
Zaccaro, S. J. (2007). Trait-based perspectives of leadership. American Psychologist, 62(1), 6–16.

286

Chapter 9 Social Psychology
Learning Objective
1. Define social psychology.

This chapter focuses on social psychology, which is defined as the scientific study of how we feel,
think, and behave toward the other people around us, and how those people influence our feelings,
thoughts, and behavior. The subject matter of social psychology is our everyday interactions withpeople, including the social groups to which we belong. Questions these psychologists ask include
why we are often helpful to other people, but at other times are unfriendly or aggressive; why wesometimes conform to the behaviors of others, but at other times are able to assert our
independence; and what factors help groups work together in effective and productive, rather than inineffective and unproductive, ways. A fundamental principle of social psychology is that, although
we may not always be aware of it, our cognitions, emotions, and behaviors are substantiallyinfluenced by the social situation.
In this chapter we will introduce the principles of social cognition, and consider the ways that ourjudgments about other people guide our behaviors toward them. We will explore how we form
impressions of other people, including stereotypes, prejudice and discrimination. We will also
discuss attribution theory and attitudes. Next, we will discuss social influence, including social
norms and roles, persuasion, conformity, obedience, and group behavior. Lastly, we will consider
social relationships, including attraction, altruism, and aggression.

Social Cognition
Learning Objectives
1. Define social cognition.
2. Describe the importance of appearance in our perceptions of others.
3. Describe the fundamentals of how we form judgments about other people, including
stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination.
4. Define attribution and distinguish between internal and external attributions.
5. Describe the two common attributional biases of self-serving and fundamental attribution.
6. Define the concept of attitude and describe when attitudes predict behavior and when
behavior influences attitudes.
7. Desribe the study on cognitive dissonance.

Hopefully you remember from our discussion in chapter five, that psychologists refer to cognition
as the mental activity of processing information and using that information in judgments. Social
cognition is cognition that relates to social activities and that helps us understand and predict the
behavior of ourselves and others (Jhangiani & Tarry, 2014). Making these judgments quickly andaccurately helps us guide our behavior to interact appropriately with both the people we know, and287

do not know. If we can figure out why our roommate is angry at us, we can react to resolve theproblem; if we can determine how to motivate the people in our group to work harder on a project,then the project might be better.

The Importance of Appearance
Our initial judgments of others are based, in large part, on
what we see. The physical features of other people,
particularly their sex, race, age, and physical attractiveness,
are very salient, and we often focus our attention on these
dimensions (Schneider, 2004; Zebrowitz & Montepare,2006).
Although it may seem inappropriate or shallow to admit it,
we are strongly influenced by the physical attractiveness ofothers, and in many cases physical attractiveness is the mostimportant determinant of our initial liking for other people(Walster, Aronson, Abrahams, & Rottmann, 1966). Infants
who are only a year old prefer to look at faces that adults
consider to be attractive than at unattractive faces (Langlois,
Ritter, Roggman, & Vaughn, 1991; Hoss & Langlois, 2003).
Evolutionary psychologists have argued that our belief that“what is beautiful is also good” may be because we use
attractiveness as a cue for health; people whom we findmore attractive may also, evolutionarily, have been healthier(Zebrowitz, Fellous, Mignault, & Andreoletti, 2003).
One indicator of health is youth. Zebrowitz and colleagues(Zebrowitz, 1996; Zebrowitz, Luevano, Bronstad, &Aharon, 2009) have extensively studied the tendency forboth men and women to prefer people whose faces havecharacteristics similar to those of babies. These features
include large, round, and widely spaced eyes, a small noseand chin, prominent cheekbones, and a large forehead.
People who have baby faces (both men and women) areseen as more attractive than people who are not baby-faced.

Figure 9.1

Can you read a book by its cover? Whichof these people do you think is more fun
and friendly? Who is smarter or morecompetent? Do you think your judgments
are accurate? © Thinkstock

Figure 9.2

Another indicator of health is symmetry. People are more
attracted to faces that are more symmetrical than they are to
People with baby faces are perceived as
those less symmetrical, and this may be due in part to theattractive.
perception that symmetrical faces are perceived as healthierSource and Source(Rhodes et al., 2001). Although you might think that wewould prefer faces that are unusual or unique, in fact the opposite is true. Langlois and Roggman(1990) showed college students the faces of men and women. The faces were composites made upof the average of 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 faces. The researchers found that the more faces that wereaveraged into the stimulus, the more attractive it was judged. Again, our liking for average faces
may be because they appear healthier.
288

Although preferences for youthful, symmetrical, and average faces have been observed crossculturally, and thus appear to be common human preferences, different cultures may also haveunique beliefs about what is attractive. In modern Western cultures, “thin is in,” and people prefer
those who have little excess fat (Crandall, Merman, & Hebl, 2009). The need to be thin to be
attractive is particularly strong for women in contemporary society, and the desire to maintain a
low body weight can lead to low self-esteem, eating disorders, and other unhealthy behaviors.
However, the norm of thinness has not always been in place; the preference for women withslender, masculine, and athletic looks has become stronger over the past 50 years. In contrast to therelatively universal preferences for youth, symmetry, and averageness, other cultures do not showsuch a strong propensity for thinness (Sugiyama, 2005).

Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination
Social psychologists refer to us as cognitive misers, meaning we often do not think carefully before
making decisions. We are stingy with our cognitive energy. Humans quickly evaluate others on
characteristics of attractiveness, aggression, trustworthiness, competence, and likeability even after
viewing a photo of a person for a mere tenth of second. Willis and Todorov (2006) found thatthose shown a photo briefly and those who were given more time to evaluate the photograph hadvery similar impressions. So not only do we arrive at our conclusions quickly, but it is also likelythat once we do, we may be unlikely to change our impressions.
We frequently use people’s appearances to form our judgments about them and to determine our
responses to them. The tendency to attribute personality characteristics to people on the basis of
their external appearance or their social group memberships is known as stereotyping. Ourstereotypes about physically attractive people lead us to see them as more dominant, warm,
mentally healthy, intelligent, and socially skilled than we perceive physically unattractive people(Langlois et al., 2000). Moreover, our stereotypes lead us to treat people differently, the physicallyattractive are given better grades on essay exams, are more successful on job interviews, andreceive lighter sentences in court judgments than their less attractive counterparts (Hosoda, StoneRomero, & Coats, 2003; Zebrowitz & McDonald, 1991).
In addition to stereotypes about physical attractiveness, we also regularly stereotype people on thebasis of their sex, race, age, religion, and many other characteristics, and these stereotypes are
frequently negative (Schneider, 2004). Stereotyping is unfair to the people we judge because
stereotypes are based on our preconceptions and emotions about the members of the group.
Stereotyping is closely related to prejudice, negative feelings we have about people because of
their appearance or group memberships, and discrimination, behaviors toward others based on
prejudice. Generally, these behaviors are negative. Stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination work
together. We may not vote for candidates for public office because of our negative stereotypes
about their ethnicity, and we may avoid people from other religions or those with mental illness
because of our prejudices.
Some stereotypes may be accurate in part. Research has found, for instance, that attractive people
are actually more sociable, more popular, and less lonely than less attractive individuals (Langlois
et al., 2000). Consistent with the stereotype that women are “emotional,” women are, on average,
more empathic and attuned to the emotions of others than are men (Hall & Schmid Mast, 2008).
Group differences in personality traits may occur, in part, because people act toward others on the289

basis of their stereotypes, creating a self-fulfilling prophecy. A self-fulfilling prophecy occurs when
our expectations about the personality characteristics of others lead us to behave toward them inways that make those beliefs come true. If we have a stereotype that attractive people are friendly,
then we may act in a friendly way toward those who are attractive. This friendly behavior may bereciprocated by the attractive person, and if many people also engage in the same positive
behaviors, he or she may actually become friendlier.
Even if attractive people are, on average friendlier than unattractive people, not all attractive people
are friendlier than all unattractive people. Also, even if women are, on average, more emotional
than men, not all men are less emotional than all women. Social psychologists believe that it isbetter to treat people as individuals rather than rely on our stereotypes and prejudices, because
stereotyping and prejudice are always unfair and often inaccurate (Fiske, 1989; Stangor, 1995).
Furthermore, many of our stereotypes and prejudices occur outside of our awareness, such that we
do not even know that we are using them.
We use our stereotypes and prejudices in part
Figure 9.3
because they are easy; if we can quickly size up
people based on their physical appearance, thatcan save us a lot of time and effort. We may be
evolutionarily disposed to stereotyping. Ourprimitive ancestors needed to accurately separate
members of their own group from others, thus
categorizing people into the ingroup, those thatare similar to us on physical and social
categories, and outgroup, those that are
different from us (Neuberg, Kenrick, & Schaller,2010). Separating those we meet into ingroups
and outgroups is something we continue to do.
Social identity is the positive emotions that we
experience as a member of an important social group.
The creation of our ingroup strengthens our
Source:social identity, which is our sense of self basedon the emotions that we experience as a result of our group membership (Hogg, 2003). We may
gain social identity as members of our college, our sports teams, our religious and racial groups, andmany other groups.
The fact that we may use stereotypes does not mean we should use them. Stereotypes, prejudice,and discrimination, whether consciously or unconsciously applied, make it difficult for some people
to effectively contribute to society and may create both mental and physical health problems forthem (Swim & Stangor, 1998). Getting beyond our prejudices is required by law, as detailed in the
U.S. Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Equal Opportunity Employment Act of 1972, and the Americans
with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Bartol & Bartol, 2015) and the Fair Housing Act of 1968 (U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, 1968). Important research done by psychologists
has contributed to the creation of these laws. As mentioned in chapter one, Mamie Phipps Clark
and her husband, Kenneth Clark, demonstrated that when shown white and black dolls, Blackchildren preferred the white dolls believing they were better (American Psychological Association,2018). The Clarks convinced the Supreme Court that the Black children saw themselves as inferior,which adversely affected their academic and personal achievement.
290

Social psychologists believe that we should work to get past our prejudices. The tendency to holdstereotypes and prejudices and to act on them can be reduced, for instance, through positive
interactions and friendships with members of other groups, through practice in avoiding using
them, and through education (Hewstone, 1996).

Attribution: Forming Judgments by Observing Behavior
When we observe people’s behavior we may attempt to determine if the behavior really reflects
their underlying personality. If Frank hits Joe, we might wonder if Frank is naturally aggressive orif perhaps Joe had provoked him. If Leslie leaves a big tip for the waitress, we might wonder if she
is a generous person or if the service was particularly excellent. The process of trying to determine
the causes of people’s behavior, with the goal of learning about their personalities, is known as
attribution (Jones et al., 1987).
Figure 9.4

Making causal attributions is a bit like conducting anexperiment. We observe the people we are interested inand note how they behave in different social situations.
After we have made our observations, we draw ourconclusions. Sometimes we may decide that the behavior
was caused primarily by something about the person, theirpersonality, abilities, motives; this is called making adispositional (or internal) attribution. At other times,
we may determine that the behavior was caused primarily
by the situation, or chance; this is called making asituational (or external) attribution. At other times wemay decide that the behavior was caused by both theperson and the situation.

It is easier to make dispositional attributions when
behavior is more unusual or unexpected. Imagine thatyou go to a party and you are introduced to Tess. Tess
Sourceshakes your hand and says, “Nice to meet you!” Can you
readily conclude, on the basis of this behavior, that Tessis a friendly person? Probably not. The social situation demands that people act in a friendly way.
In this circumstance it is difficult to know whether Tess acted friendly because of the situation or
because she is really friendly. Imagine, however, that instead of shaking your hand, Tess sticks out
her tongue at you and walks away. I think you would agree that it is easier in this case to infer that
Tess is unfriendly because her behavior is so contrary to what one would expect (Jones, Davis, &Gergen, 1961).
Was the accident caused by John’s bad
driving (internal) or the road conditions(external)?

Attribution Biases
Self-serving Bias: Although people are reasonably accurate in their attributions (Fiske, 2003), they
are far from perfect. One error that we frequently make when making judgments about ourselves is
to make self-serving attributions by judging the causes of our own behaviors in overly positive
ways. If you did well on a test, you will probably attribute that success to person causes (“I’msmart,” “I studied really hard”), but if you do poorly on the test you are more likely to make291

situation attributions (“The test was hard,” “I had bad luck”). Although making causal attributions
is expected to be logical and scientific, our emotions are not irrelevant.
Fundamental Attribution Error: Another way that our attributions are often inaccurate is that weare, by and large, too quick to attribute the behavior of others to something personal about themrather than to something about their situation. We are more likely to say, “Leslie left a big tip, so
she must be generous” than “Leslie left a big tip, but perhaps that was because the service wasreally excellent.” The common tendency to overestimate the role of person factors and overlook the
impact of situations in judging others is known as the fundamental attribution error.
The fundamental attribution error
Figure 9.5
occurs in part because other people
are so noticeable in our social
environments. When you look atothers, the person is your focus, andyou are likely to make personal
attributions about them. If thesituation is reversed, such that you
see situations from the perspectivesof others, the fundamental attribution
error is reduced (Storms, 1973).
The tendency to make dispositional attributions (such as poor
people are lazy) for the behaviors of others, even where situational
When we judge people, we often see
factors such as poor education and growing up in poverty might bethem in only one situation. It’s easy
better explanations, is caused by the fundamental attribution error.
for you to think that your math© Thinkstock
professor is “picky and detailoriented” because that describes her behavior in class, but you do not know how she acts with her
friends and family, which might be completely different. We also tend to make person attributions
because they are easy. We are more likely to commit the fundamental attribution error when we are
tired, distracted, or busy doing other things (Trope & Alfieri, 1997).
An important moral about perceiving others applies here: We should not be too quick to judge otherpeople. It is easy to think that poor people are lazy, that people who say something harsh are rudeor unfriendly, and that all terrorists are insane madmen. These attributions may frequently
overemphasize the role of the person, however, resulting in an inappropriate and inaccurate
tendency to blame the victim (Lerner, 1980; Tennen & Affleck, 1990). Sometimes people are lazyand rude, and some terrorists are probably insane, but these people may also be influenced by thesituation in which they find themselves. Poor people may find it more difficult to get work andeducation because of the environment they grow up in, people may say rude things because they are
feeling threatened or are in pain, and terrorists may have learned in their family and school thatcommitting violence in the service of their beliefs is justified. When you find yourself making
strong dispositional attributions for the behaviors of others, stop and think more carefully andrefrain from making the fundamental attribution error.

292

How Attitudes Influence Behavior
Attitude refers to our relatively enduring evaluations of people and things (Albarracín, Johnson,& Zanna, 2005). We hold many thousands of attitudes, including those about family andfriends, political parties and political figures, abortion rights, preferences for music, and muchmore. Attitudes are important because they frequently, but not always, predict behavior. Attitudes
predict behavior better for some people than for others. People who are high in self-monitoring,
act like social chameleons in that they change their behavior in response to social situations, andthus do not always act on their attitudes (Gangestad & Snyder, 2000). High self-monitors agreewith statements such as, “In different situations and with different people, I often act like very
different people.” Attitudes are more likely to predict behavior for low self-monitors, who are more
likely to act on their own attitudes, even when the social situation suggests that they should behave
otherwise. Low self-monitors are more likely to agree with statements such as, “I can only argue
for ideas that I already believe.”

How Behaviors Influence Attitude
Although it might not have surprised you to hear that our attitudes predict our behaviors, you
might be more surprised to learn that our behaviors also have an influence on our attitudes. It
makes sense that if you like the newest cell phone advertised, you will buy it, because your positive
attitude toward the product influences your behavior. However, your attitudes toward that cell
phone may become even more positive if you decide to buy it. Behaviors influence attitudes
through the process of self-perception. Self-perception occurs when we use our own behavior as a
guide to help us determine our own thoughts and feelings (Bem, 1972; Olson & Stone, 2005).
Behavior also influences our attitudes through a more emotional process known as cognitive
dissonance. Cognitive dissonance refers to the discomfort we experience when we choose to
behave in ways that we see as inconsistent to our attitudes (Festinger, 1957; Harmon-Jones &Mills, 1999). If we feel that we have wasted our time or acted against our own moral principles, we
experience negative emotions (dissonance) and may change our attitudes about the behavior to
reduce the negative feelings.
Imagine that you are a participant in a psychology study. You have just spent the last 60 minutes
turning pegs on a large peg board a quarter of a turn. The experimenter tells you that the study
concerned the effects of expectation on task performance and as you were in the control group you
had not been told anything prior to completing the task. The experimenter is concerned because
their research assistant is running late and the next subject has already arrived. This person is in
the experimental group and the experimenter wonders if you could tell the next participant that theexperiment was really interesting and enjoyable. The researcher explains that their budget is rather
small, but for your effort they can give you a dollar. You agree to this and inform the next person
about how interesting and enjoyable the study was. Before you finally leave you are asked tocomplete a questionnaire about the study and how much you enjoyed the study. Festinger andCarlsmith (1959) compared the ratings given by people who had been given only $1 to lie to those
who were offered $20, or who were not asked to lie to the next person.

293

As you can see from Figure 9.6,
those who were not asked to lie
2(control group) had no reason toalter their perceptions of the
1.35
1.5
study. Those who were given $20
to lie also had sufficient1
justification. A small lie for $20
Controlseemed a reasonable explanation
0.5$1
to lie. Thus, there was no
cognitive dissonance between$200what they really felt about the-0.05
study and their willingness to lie-0.5
to the next person. But those who-0.45
lied for only $1 had insufficient-1
justification. To save face theyaltered their assessment of the
Subjects’ ratings of the favorability of study varied based on whether
study and gave the highest rating.
they could justify their behavior. Festinger & Carlsmith (1959).
When we put in effort forsomething, an initiation, a big purchase price, or even some of our precious time, we will likely
end up liking the activity more than we would have if the effort had been less; not doing so would
lead us to experience the unpleasant feelings of dissonance. After we buy a product, we convince
ourselves that we made the right choice because the product is excellent. If we fail to lose theweight we wanted to, we decide that we look good anyway. If we hurt someone else’s feelings, we
may even decide that he or she is a bad person who deserves our negative behavior. To escapefrom feeling poorly about themselves, people will engage in quite extraordinary rationalizing. No
wonder that most of us believe that “If I had it all to do over again, I would not change anythingimportant.”
Figure 9.6

Key Takeaways
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Social psychology studies how we influence, and are influenced, by others.
Social cognition involves forming impressions of ourselves and other people.
Our initial judgments of others are based primarily on what we see. The physical featuresof other people, particularly their sex, race, age, and physical attractiveness, are very
noticeable, and we often focus our attention on these dimensions.
We are attracted to people who appear to be healthy. Indicators of health include youth,
symmetry, and averageness.
We frequently use people’s appearances to form our judgments about them, and to
determine our responses to them. These responses include stereotyping, prejudice, anddiscrimination.
Causal attribution is the process of trying to determine the causes of people’s behavior
with the goal of learning about their personalities. People often succumb to biases when
making attributions, such as the self-serving bias and the fundamental attribution error.
Attitudes refer to our relatively enduring evaluations of people and things. Although
attitudes predict behaviors, behaviors also predict attitudes. This occurs through theprocesses of self-perception and cognitive dissonance.
294

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. What stereotypes and prejudices do you hold? Are you able to get past them and judge
people as individuals? Do you think that your stereotypes influence your behavior
without your being aware of them?
2. Watch this video and evaluate the use of this technique to increase the awareness of
prejudice and discrimination.
http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/shows/divided/etc/view.html
3. Consider a time when your behavior influenced your attitudes. Did this occur as a result of
self-perception or cognitive dissonance?

Videos
1. Cognitive neuroscientist Rebecca discusses how we form judgments about other people.
http://www.ted.com/talks/lang/eng/rebecca_saxe_how_brains_make_moral_judgmen
ts.html
2. You might want to test your own stereotypes and prejudices by completing the Implicit
Association Test, a measure of unconscious stereotyping.
https://implicit.harvard.edu/implicit/demoSocial Influences
Learning Objectives
1. Define social roles and social norms and explain how they influence behavior.
2. Describe the findings and controversies of Zimbardo’s Prison Experiment.
3. Define persuasion and describe the two routes to persuasion.
4. Describe the persuasion techniques of foot-in-the-door, door-in-the-face, low-ball,and that’s-not-all.
5. Define conformity and distinguish between normative and informational conformity.
6. Explain the situations under which people conform to others and their motivations
for doing so.
7. Describe Milgram’s experiment on obedience and explain when obedience was
reduced.
8. Describe how the presence of others affects one’s performance.
9. Describe the problems that can occur when working in groups.
10. Review the factors that can improve the effectiveness of groups.

295

Social Roles: One major social determinant of human
Figure 9.7
behavior is our social roles. A social role is a pattern of
behavior that is expected of a person in a given setting orgroup (Hare, 2003). Each one of us has several social
roles. You may be, at the same time, a student, a parent,
an aspiring teacher, a son or daughter, or a friend. How
do these social roles influence your behavior? Social
roles are defined by culturally shared knowledge. That is,nearly everyone in a given culture knows what behavior
is expected of a person in a given role. For example, whatis the social role for a student? If you look around a
Being a student is just one of the manycollege classroom you will likely see students engaging
social roles you have. (credit: “University
in studious behavior, taking notes, listening to theof Michigan MSIS”/Flickr)
professor, reading the textbook, and sitting quietly attheir desks (Figure 9.7). Of course, you may see students
deviating from the expected studious behavior such as texting on their phones or using Facebook
on their laptops, but in all cases, the students that you observe are attending class, a part of thesocial role of students.
Social roles, and our related behavior, can vary across different settings. How do you behave when
you are engaging in the role of son or daughter and attending a family function? Now imagine how
you behave when you are engaged in the role of employee at your workplace. It is very likely thatyour behavior will be different. Perhaps you are more relaxed and outgoing with your family,
making jokes and doing silly things. At your workplace you might speak more professionally, andalthough you may be friendly, you are also serious and focused on getting the work completed.
These are examples of how our social roles influence and often dictate our behavior to the extent
that identity and personality can vary with context, that is, in different social groups, (Malloy,
Albright, Kenny, Agatstein & Winquist, 1997).
Social Norms: As discussed previously, social roles are defined by a culture’s shared knowledgeof what is expected behavior of an individual in a specific role. This shared knowledge comes fromsocial norms. A social norm is a group’s expectation of what is appropriate and acceptablebehavior for its members; that is, how they are supposed to behave and think (Deutsch & Gerard,
1955; Berkowitz, 2004). How are we expected to act? What are we expected to talk about? What
are we expected to wear? In our discussion of social roles, we noted that colleges have social
norms for students’ behavior in the role of student and workplaces have social norms for
employees’ behaviors in the role of employee. Social norms are everywhere including in families,
gangs, and on social media outlets.
Zimbardo’s Stanford Prison Experiment: The famous Stanford University prison experiment,
conducted by Zimbardo and colleagues, investigated the power of social roles and social norms. In
the summer of 1971, an advertisement was placed in a California newspaper asking for malevolunteers to participate in a study about the psychological effects of prison life. More than 70 men
volunteered, and these volunteers then underwent psychological testing to eliminate candidates
who had underlying psychiatric issues, medical issues, or a history of crime or drug abuse. The
pool of volunteers was whittled down to 24 healthy male college students. Each student was paid
$15 per day and was randomly assigned to play the role of either a prisoner or a guard in the study.
296

A mock prison was constructed in the basement of the psychology building at Stanford.
Participants assigned to play the role of prisoners were “arrested” at their homes by Palo Altopolice officers, booked at a police station, and subsequently taken to the mock prison. The
experiment was scheduled to run for several weeks. To the surprise of the researchers, both the“prisoners” and “guards” assumed their roles with zeal. In fact, on day 2, some of the prisoners
revolted, and the guards quelled the rebellion by threatening the prisoners with night sticks. In a
relatively short time, the guards came to harass the prisoners in an increasingly sadistic manner,
through a complete lack of privacy, lack of basic comforts, such as mattresses to sleep on, andthrough degrading chores and late-night counts.
The prisoners, in turn, began to show signs of severe anxiety and hopelessness, and they began
tolerating the guards’ abuse. Even the Stanford professor who designed the study and was the headresearcher, Philip Zimbardo, found himself acting as if the prison was real and his role, as prison
supervisor, was real as well. After only six days, the experiment had to be ended due to theparticipants’ deteriorating behavior.
The Stanford prison experiment sought to demonstrate the power of social roles and norms inaffecting human behavior. The guards and prisoners enacted their social roles by engaging inbehaviors appropriate to the roles: The guards gave orders and the prisoners followed orders.
Social norms require guards to be authoritarian and prisoners to be submissive. When prisoners
rebelled, they violated these social norms, which led to upheaval. Some prisoners became so
immersed in their roles that they exhibited symptoms of mental breakdown; however, according toZimbardo, none of the participants suffered long term harm (Alexander, 2001).
Recently, both the methodology and results of the Stanford Prison Experiment have been criticized(Toppo, 2018). New interviews with the participants indicated that they deliberately acted in waysthat supported the hypothesis, rather than actually taking on a social role. For example, one“prisoner” indicated he faked having a mental breakdown so that he could go home and study for
the Graduate Record Examination. Similarly, a “guard” stated he deliberately behaved in an
outrageous way to see how far he could go before someone intervened. Consequently, like all
research, both the methodology and findings need to be
Figure 9.8
critically analyzed and the results replicated before theresults can be taken as proof.

Iraqi prisoners of war were abused by their
American captors in Abu Ghraib prison, during
the second Iraq war. (credit: United States
Department of Defense)

The Stanford Prison Experiment has some parallels withthe abuse of prisoners of war by U.S. Army troops andCIA personnel at the Abu Ghraib prison in 2003 and2004. The offenses at Abu Ghraib were documented byphotographs of the abuse, some taken by the abusers
themselves (Figure 9.8). Zimbardo testified on behalf of
one of the U. S. guards and stated, “It’s imperative forour society to acknowledge how situational forces cancorrupt even good people into becoming perpetrators ofevil. It is essential that all of us learn to recognize thesituational and systemic determinants of antisocial
behaviors” (Zimbardo, 2015, p. 25). However, not all
military personnel were abusive, and in fact, it was an
297

army reservist who blew the whistle on what occurred in the Abu Ghraib prison. It may be thatboth personality characteristics and the situation result in abusive behavior (Toppo, 2018).

Persuasion
In the previous section we discussed that the motivation to reduce cognitive dissonance leads us tochange our attitudes, behaviors, and/or cognitions to make them consistent. Persuasion is theprocess by which a message results in a change in our attitudes or behavior. How do people
convince others to change their attitudes, beliefs, and behaviors? What communications do you
receive that attempt to persuade you to change your attitudes, beliefs, and behaviors?
Elaboration Likelihood Model: A model that describes the dynamics of persuasion is theelaboration likelihood model that considers the variables of the attitude change including
features of the source, the message, and characteristics of the audience, to determine when attitudechange will occur (Petty & Cacioppo, 1986). According to this model, there are two main routes
that play a role in delivering a persuasive message: Central and peripheral (Figure 9.9).
Figure 9.9

Persuasion can take one of two paths, and the durability of the end result depends on the path.

The central route is logic driven and uses data and facts to convince people of an argument’s
worthiness. For example, a car company seeking to persuade you to purchase their model willemphasize the car’s safety features and fuel economy. This is a direct route to persuasion that
focuses on the quality of the information. In order for the central route of persuasion to be effective
in changing attitudes, thoughts, and behaviors, the argument must be strong and, if successful, will
result in lasting attitude change.
The central route to persuasion works best when the target of persuasion, or the audience, isanalytical and willing to engage in processing of the information. From an advertiser’s perspective,
what products would be best sold using the central route to persuasion? What audience would most
likely be influenced to buy the product? One example is buying a computer. It is likely, forexample, that small business owners might be especially influenced by the focus on the computer’squality and features such as processing speed and memory capacity.

298

The peripheral route is an indirect route that uses peripheral cues to associate positivity with themessage (Petty & Cacioppo, 1986). Instead of focusing on the facts and a product’s quality, theperipheral route relies on association with positive characteristics, such as, positive emotions andcelebrity endorsement. This route to attitude change does not require much effort or information
processing. This method of persuasion may promote positivity toward the message or product, but
it typically results in less permanent attitude or behavior change. The audience does not need to beanalytical or motivated to process the message. In fact, a peripheral route to persuasion may noteven be noticed by people, for example, in the strategy of product placement in films and stores.

Common Persuasion Techniques
Foot-in-the-door Technique:Figure 9.10
One effective strategy is the
foot-in-the-door technique,the persuader gets a person toagree to bestow a small favor
or to buy a small item, only tolater request a larger favor orpurchase of a bigger item
(Cialdini, 2001; Pliner, Hart,
Kohl, & Saari, 1974). The
foot-in-the-door techniqueWith the foot-in-the-door technique, a small request such as (a)was demonstrated in a study
wearing a campaign button can turn into a large request, such as
by Freedman and Fraser(b) putting campaigns signs in your yard. (credit a: modification(1966) in which participantsof work by Joe Crawford; credit b: modification of work by
who initially agreed to post
"shutterblog"/Flickr)
small signs in their windows
stating, “Be a safe driver”
were more likely to agree to put a large, ugly sign in their yard stating, “Drive carefully” thanpeople who had not been approached initially to put up the small sign. More than 100 studies haveshown that when people initially commit themselves to a behavior they feel of their own doing,
they are more likely to commit to a larger request later ( Myers & Twenge, 2017).
Research on this technique also illustrates the principle of consistency (Cialdini, 2001): Our past
behavior often directs our future behavior, and we have a desire to maintain consistency once wehave a committed to a behavior. Guéguen and Jacob (2002) found that students in a computer
discussion group were more likely to volunteer to complete a 40-question survey on their food
habits (which required 15 to 20 minutes) if they had already, a few minutes earlier, agreed to help
the same requestor with a simple computer-related question (how to convert a file type) than ifthey had not first been given the smaller opportunity to help. The idea is that when asked thesecond time, the people looked at their past behavior, having agreed to the small request, andinferred that they are helpful people and they desire to remain consistent.
Door-in-the-face Technique: In the door-in-the-face technique a large, unreasonable request is
made, which is it turned down; this is followed by a smaller more reasonable request. People are
more likely to agree to the second request when it is placed in the context of the more unreasonable
request, than if they had been asked to the smaller request at the outset. The success of this299

technique may be related to the reciprocity social norm, the rule that we should payback in kind
what we receive from others (Cialdini, 2008). The person asking for our support or assistance,
appears to have made a concession by forgoing their initial request, for a much smaller one. As aresult, we feel compelled to reciprocate and agree to the smaller request (Cialdini, 1993). A
common application of foot-in-the-door is when teens ask their parents for a large request(attending an out-of-town concert) and then when the permission is denied, asking them forsomething smaller (attending a local concert). Having denied the larger request, increases thelikelihood that parents will acquiesce with the later, smaller request.
Low-ball Technique: In the low-ball technique,compliance is gained by getting people to agree to an
attractive, less costly request, and then reneging on it.
Cialdini (1993) noted that this is a techniquesometimes used by sales people. An attractive price isquoted for a car or appliance that the buyer has
verbally agreed upon, only for the salesperson tocome back and say they misquoted the price, or it wasfor a different model with fewer of the features thatthe buyer desired. A higher price is now quoted for
Sourcethe desired product. Research shows that people are
more likely to comply and buy the product at the higher price than if they had been quoted thisprice at the outset. Cialdini argues that many of us feel obligated to act consistent with our initialdecision.
Figure 9.11

That’s-not-all Technique: The that’s-not-all technique gains
Figure 9.12
compliance by sweetening the deal before the person can respondto the initial request. Berger (1986) demonstrated the power of thistechnique in two experiments. In the first experiment cupcakes
were sold with two cookies for 75 cents (the control condition) or
the cupcakes were sold for 75 cents with two cookies thrown in for
free (experimental condition). More people purchased thecupcakes in the experimental condition (73%) than in the control
condition (40%). In the second experiment, cupcakes were soldfor 75 cents (control condition) or were initially quoted as a dollar,
but were then discounted to 75 cents before the buyer could
Sourcerespond to the initial price (experimental condition). Compliance
was higher in the experimental condition (73%) versus (44%) in the control condition. Burger
suggested that the success of the technique is reciprocity. The seller looks like they are making a
concession by adding more products or by reducing the price, so the buyer feels more pressure toreciprocate. Table 9.1 presents additional techniques that can be used to persuade others (Cialdini,2001).

300

Table 9.1 Techniques That Can Be Effective in Persuading Others
Technique

ExamplesChoose effective
communicators

Communicators who are attractive, expert, trustworthy, and similar to thelistener are most persuasive.

Consider the goals of thelistenerIf the listener wants to be entertained, then it is better to use a humorous
ad; if the listener is processing the ad more carefully, use a morethoughtful one.

Use humor

People are more easily persuaded when they are in a good mood.

Use classical conditioning

Try to associate your product with positive stimuli, such as funny jokes orattractive models.

Make use of the listener’s
emotions

Humorous and fear-arousing ads can be effective because they arouse thelistener’s emotions.

Conformity
When we decide on what courses to enroll in by asking for advice from our friends, change ourbeliefs or behaviors as a result of the ideas that we hear from others, or binge drink because ourfriends are doing it, we are engaging in conformity, a change in beliefs or behavior that occurs as
the result of the presence of the other people around us. We conform because of:• Informational Conformity: We believe that other people have accurate information andwe want to have knowledge.
• Normative Conformity: We want to be liked by others.
At times conformity occurs in a relatively spontaneous and unconscious way, without any obvious
intent of one person to change the other, or an awareness that the conformity is occurring. Cialdini,Reno, and Kallgren (1990) found that college students were more likely to throw litter on the
ground themselves when they had just seen another person throw some paper on the ground, andCheng and Chartrand (2003) found that people unconsciously mimicked the behaviors of others,
such as by rubbing their face or shaking their foot, and that that mimicry was greater when theother person was of high versus low social status.
Figure 9.13

Example of the stimuli used in
Asch’s study.

Asch’s Line Experiment: Not all conformity is passive
observation. In Asch’s (1955) study, male college students
were told that they were to participate in a test of visualabilities. The men were seated in front of a board that
displayed the visual stimuli that they were going to judge.
The men were told that there would be 18 trials during theexperiment, and on each trial, they would see two cards. The
standard card had a single line that was to be judged, and thetest card had three lines that varied in length between about
2 and 10 inches (see Figure 9.13 for an example).

301

On each trial, each person in the group answered out loud, beginning with one end of the group andmoving toward the other end. Although the real research participant did not know it, the othergroup members were experimental confederates who gave predetermined answers on each trial.
Because the real participant was seated next to last in the row, he always made his judgment
following most of the other group members. Although on the first two trials the confederates eachgave the correct answer, on the third trial, and on 11 of the subsequent trials, they all had been
instructed to give the same wrong choice. For instance, even though the correct answer was Line 1,
they would all say it was Line 2. Thus, when it became the participant’s turn to answer, he could
either give the clearly correct answer or conform to the incorrect responses of the confederates.
Remarkably, in this study about 76% of the 123 men who were tested gave at least one incorrect
response when it was their turn, and 37% of the responses, overall, were conforming. This isevidence for the power of conformity because the participants were making clearly incorrect
responses in public, and the influences of others on these responses was apparent. However,conformity was not absolute; in addition to the 24% of the men who never conformed, only 5% of
the men conformed on all 12 of the critical trials.

Obedience
The tendency to conform to those in authority, known as obedience, was demonstrated in aremarkable set of studies performed by Stanley Milgram (1974). Milgram designed a study inwhich he could observe the extent to which people would obey someone in authority, even to theextent of causing harm to others. Milgram’s interest stemmed in part from his desire to understandthe Holocaust during World War II. Specifically, how did everyday German citizens commit suchatrocities against other citizens in their own country. Did obedience to authority play a role in theactions of the German people?
Milgram’s Study: Milgram used newspaper ads to recruit men, and in one study, women, from awide variety of backgrounds to participate in his research. When the research participant arrived at
the lab, he or she was introduced to another research participant, but he was a confederate working
for the experimenter as part of the experimental team. The experimenter explained that the goal of
the research was to study the effects of punishment on learning. The researcher explained that oneof them would be the “teacher”, and the other the “learner”. The real research subject was always
assigned to the role of “teacher”.
The experimenter explained that the participants job would be to sit in the control room and read alist of word pairs to the “learner”. After the particiapant read the list once, it would be the“learner’s” job to remember which words went together. The experimenter sat behind theparticiapant and explained that each time the “learner” made a mistake, the participant was to press
one of the switches to administer the shock. Moreover, the switch that was to be pressed increased
by one level with each mistake, so that each mistake required a stronger shock (see Figure 9.14).

302

Once the “learner” was alone in the shock
room, he brought out a tape recorder that
played a prerecorded series of responses
that the particpant could hear through thewall of the room. The particiapant heard
the “learner” say “ugh!” after the first few
shocks. After the next few mistakes, when
the shock level reached 150 volts, the“learner” was heard to exclaim, “Let meout of here. I have heart trouble!” As theshock reached about 270 volts, the protestsof the “learner” became more vehement,
and after 300 volts the “learner”
proclaimed that he was not going toanswer any more questions. From 330
volts and up, the “learner” was silent. At
this point the experimenter responded toparticipants’ questions, if any, with ascripted response indicating that they
Source: Adapted from Milgram (1974).
should continue reading the questions andapplying increasing shock when the “learner” did not respond.
Figure 9.14 Materials Used in Milgram’s
Experiments on Obedience

The results of Milgram’s research were themselves quite shocking. Although all the participants
gave the initial mild levels of shock, responses varied after that. Some refused to continue after
about 150 volts, despite the insistence of the experimenter to continue to increase the shock level.
Still others, however, continued to present the questions and to administer the shocks, under thepressure of the experimenter, who demanded that they continue. In the end, 65% of the participants
continued giving the shock to the “learner” all the way up to the 450 volts maximum, even thoughthat shock was marked as “danger: severe shock” and no response had been heard from theparticipant for several trials.
In case you are thinking that such high levels of obedience would not be observed in today’s
modern culture, there is in fact evidence that they would. Milgram’s findings were almost exactly
replicated, using men and women from a wide variety of ethnic groups, in a study conducted at
Santa Clara University (Burger, 2009). In this replication of the Milgram experiment, 67% of themen and 73% of the women agreed to administer increasingly painful electric shocks when an
authority figure ordered them to. The participants in this study were not, however, allowed to go
beyond the 150 volts shock switch.
Although it might be tempting to conclude that Burger’s and Milgram’s experiments demonstratethat people are innately bad creatures who are ready to shock others to death, this is not in fact thecase. Rather, it is the social situation, and not the people themselves, that is responsible for the
behavior. When Milgram created variations on his original procedure, he found that changes in thesituation dramatically influenced the amount of obedience.

303

Obedience was significantly reduced when:
•
•
•
•
•

People were allowed to choose their own shock level rather than being ordered to use thelevel required by the experimenter.
The experimenter communicated by phone rather than from within the experimental room.
Research participants were partnered with someone who refused to give the shock.
When there were two experimenters who disagreed with each other about whether the
study should continue.
When the “learner” was sitting right next to the participant.

These findings are consistent with a basic principle of social psychology: The situation in whichpeople find themselves has a major influence on their behavior.

Do We Always Conform and Obey?
The research that we have discussed to this pointsuggests that most people conform to the opinions anddesires of others, but it is not always the case that weblindly conform. For one, there are individual
differences in conformity. People with lower self-esteem
are more likely to conform than are those with higher
self-esteem, and people who are dependent on and who
have a strong need for approval from others are also
more conforming (Bornstein, 1993). People who highly
identify with or who have a high degree of commitment
to a group are also more likely to conform to groupnorms than those who care less about the group (Jetten,
Spears, & Manstead, 1997). Despite these individual
differences among people in terms of their tendency toconform, however, research has generally found that the
impact of individual difference variables on conformity
is smaller than the influence of situational variables,such as the number and unanimity of the majority.

Figure 9.15

SourceMinority Influence: We have seen that conformity usually occurs such that the opinions andbehaviors of individuals become more similar to the opinions and behaviors of the majority of thepeople in the group. However, and although it is much more unusual, there are cases in which asmaller number of individuals is able to influence the opinions or behaviors of the larger group, aphenomenon known as minority influence. Minorities who are consistent and confident in theiropinions may in some cases be persuasive (Moscovici, Mugny, & Van Avermaet, 1985).
Persuasion that comes from minorities has another, and potentially even more important, effect on
the opinions of majority group members: It can lead majorities to engage in fuller, as well as moredivergent, innovative, and creative thinking about the topics being discussed (Martin, Hewstone,
Martin, & Gardikiotis, 2008). Nemeth and Kwan (1987) found that participants working together ingroups solved problems more creatively when only one person gave a different and unusual304

response than the other members did (minority influence) in comparison to when three people gavethe same unusual response. It is a good thing that alternative views can be influential. When we
look back on history, we find that it is the unusual, divergent, innovative individuals, who althoughfrequently ridiculed at the time for their unusual ideas, end up being respected for producing
positive changes.
Psychological Reactance: When people feel that their freedom is being threatened by influenceattempts, they have the ability to resist that persuasion. They may develop a strong emotional
reaction that leads people to resist pressures to conform known as psychological reactance(Miron & Brehm, 2006). Reactance is aroused when our ability to choose which behaviors toengage in is removed or threatened with possible elimination. The outcome of the experience ofreactance is that people may not conform at all, in fact moving their opinions or behaviors awayfrom the desires of the influencer. Consider an experiment conducted by Pennebaker and Sanders(1976), who attempted to get people to stop writing graffiti on the walls of campus restrooms. In
the first group of restrooms they put a sign that read “Do not write on these walls under any
circumstances!” whereas in the second group they placed a sign that simply said, “Please don’t
write on these walls.” Two weeks later, the researchers returned to the restrooms to see if the signs
had made a difference. They found that there was significantly less graffiti in the second group of
restrooms than in the first one. It seems as if people who were given strong pressures to not engage
in the behavior were more likely to react against those directives than were people given a weakermessage.

Social Facilitation and Social Inhibition
Figure 9.16 Drive-Arousal Model

In an early study, Triplett (1898) found that bicycle
racers who were competing with other cyclists on thesame track rode significantly faster than cyclists who
were racing alone. This led Triplett to hypothesize thatpeople perform tasks better when other people arepresent than when one is alone. Subsequent findings
validated Triplett’s results, and experiments have shownthat the presence of others can increase performance on
many types of tasks, including jogging, shooting pool,
lifting weights, and solving problems (Bond & Titus,
1983). The tendency to perform tasks better or faster inthe presence of others is known as social facilitation.
However, although people sometimes perform better
when they are in groups than they do alone, the situation
is not that simple. Perhaps you remember an experience
when you performed a task (playing the piano, shooting
basketball free throws, giving a public presentation) very
well alone, but poorly with, or in front of, others. Thus,
it seems that the conclusion that being with others
increases performance cannot be entirely true. The
tendency to perform tasks more poorly or more slowly inthe presence of others is known as social inhibition.
305

Zajonc (1965) explained the observed influence of others on task performance using the concept ofphysiological arousal. According to Zajonc, when we are with others we experience more arousal
than we do when we are alone, and this arousal increases the likelihood that we will perform theaction that we are most likely to emit in any given situation (Figure 9.16). For relatively easy tasks,
the arousal caused by others results in increased performance (social facilitation). In contrast, fordifficult tasks, the arousal created by others hinders performance (social inhibition).
A great deal of experimental research has now confirmed these predictions. A meta-analysis by
Bond and Titus (1983), which looked at the results of over 200 studies using over 20,000 research
participants, found that the presence of others significantly increased the rate of performing on
simple tasks, and also decreased both rate and quality of performance on complex tasks.

Working Together in Groups
The ability of a group to perform well is determined by the characteristics of the group members(e.g., are they knowledgeable and skilled?) as well as by the group process; that is, the events that
occur while the group is working on the task. When the outcome of group performance is better
than we would expect given the individuals who form the group, we call the outcome a groupprocess gain, and when the group outcome is worse than we would have expected given theindividuals who form the group, we call the outcome a group process loss. Examples of groupprocess loss include group polarization, social loafing, groupthink, and deindividuation.
Group Polarization: Groups can reach more extreme decisions, either extremely cautious or
extremely risky, even when compared to an individual’s decision. This is called Group
polarization, which refers to the strengthening of a group’s prevailing position on a topic
following discussion on the topic. When like-minded people discuss a topic, group members’
opinions are strengthened because they are not hearing opposing views. This may lead somegroups to endorse a more extreme argument. Group polarization has been observered in real-worldcontexts, including financial decision making in corporate boardrooms (Cheng & Chiou, 2008;
Zhu, 2010), extreme positions of terrorist groups (Drummond, 2002; McCauley, 1989), and therecent polarization in political attitudes between “red” states and “blue” states in the United States(Jhangiani & Tarry, 2014).
Social Loafing: One group process loss that
may occur in groups is that the groupmembers may engage in social loafing, agroup process loss that occurs when people
do not work as hard in a group as they dowhen they are working alone. In one of theearliest social psychology experiments,
Ringelmann (1913; reported in Kravitz &Martin, 1986) had individual men, as well asgroups of various numbers of men pull as
hard as they could on ropes while he
Are they working as hard as if they were alone?
Sourcemeasured the maximum amount that they
were able to pull. Although larger groups
pulled harder than any one individual, Ringelmann also found a substantial process loss. In fact,
Figure 9.17306

the loss was so large that groups of three men pulled at only 85% of their expected capability,
whereas groups of eight pulled at only 37% of their expected capability. This type of process loss,
in which group productivity decreases as the size of the group increases, has been found to occur
on a wide variety of tasks.
Groupthink: Group process losses
can also occur when group members
conform to each other rather thanexpressing their own divergent ideas.
Groupthink is a phenomenon that
occurs when a group, made up ofcompetent members capable ofmaking excellent decisions, actually
make poor decisions because offlawed group processes and strong
conformity pressures (Baron, 2005;
Janis, 2007).

Figure 9.18 Causes of Groupthink

Groupthink is more likely to occur ingroups whose members feel a stronggroup identity, when there is a strong
and directive leader, and when thegroup needs to make an important
decision quickly. The problem is thatgroups suffering from groupthink
become unwilling to seek out or
discuss discrepant or unsettling
information, and the group members
do not express contradictory
opinions. Because group members areafraid to express opinions that
contradict the leader, or bring in
outside information, the group isprevented from making fully
informed decisions. Figure 9.18
summarizes the basic causes ofgroupthink.
It has been suggested that groupthink was involved in many well-known and important, but very
poor decisions, made by government and business groups, including invasion of Iraq made by
President Bush and his advisors in 2002, two Space Shuttle mission crashes in 1986 and 2003, andthe decision of President Kennedy and his advisors to invade Cuba and overthrow Fidel Castro in
1962. Analyses of the decision-making processes in these cases have documented the role ofgroupthink. Due to the high levels of conformity, the group begins to see itself as extremely
important, highly capable of making quality decisions, and invulnerable to making mistakes. The
group members begin to feel that they were superior and did not seek outside information. Such asituation is conducive to terrible decision-making and resulting fiascoes.
307

Deindividuation: Whether we are waiting for a bus with a group of strangers, sports fans leaving
an arena, or are with colleagues, family, or friends, we can lose our own personal sense of identity
and responsibility when we are part of a group. When the “group mind” becomes one of “mobbehavior” deindividuation may be to blame. Deindividuation refers to the loss of a person’s senseof individuality and a reduction in the usual social constraints on our behavior. When a part of alarger group we are more anonymous and the actions of the group are diffused across all membersof the group.

Using Groups Effectively
Taken together, working in groups has both positive and negative outcomes. On the positive side, it
makes sense to use groups to make decisions because people can create outcomes working together
that any one individual could not hope to accomplish alone. In addition, once a group makes adecision, the group will normally find it easier to get other people to implement it, because many
people feel that decisions made by groups are fairer than are those made by individuals.
Yet, groups frequently succumb
to process losses, leading them
to be less effective than theyshould be. Furthermore, groupmembers often do not realizethat the process losses are
occurring around them. For
instance, people who participate
in brainstorming groups reportthat they have been more
Working groups are used to perform tasks and make decisions, but are
productive than those who work
they effective? © Thinkstock
alone, even if the group has
actually not done that well (Nijstad, Stroebe, Lodewijkx, 2006; Stroebe, Diehl, & Abakoumkin,1992). The tendency for group members to overvalue the productivity of the groups they work in is
known as the illusion of group productivity, and it seems to occur for several reasons. For one,the productivity of the group as a whole is highly accessible, and this productivity generally seems
quite good, at least in comparison to the contributions of single individuals. The group members
hear many ideas expressed by themselves and the other group members, and this gives theimpression that the group is doing very well, even if objectively it is not. On the affective side,group members receive a lot of positive social identity from their group memberships. These
positive feelings naturally lead them to believe that the group is strong and performing well.
Figure 9.19

What we need to do, then, is to recognize both the strengths and limitations of group performanceand use whatever techniques we can to increase process gains and reduce process losses. Table 9.2
presents some techniques that are known to help groups achieve their goals.

308

Table 9.2 Techniques That Can Be Used to Improve Group Performance
Techniques

ExamplesProvide rewards for
performance

Rewarding employees and team members with bonuses will increase their effort toward
the group goal. People will also work harder in groups when they feel that they arecontributing to the group goal than when they feel that their contributions are notimportant (Fareed, Abidan, Shahzad, Umm-e-Amen, & Lodhi, 2013).

Keep group member
contributions identifiable

Group members will work harder if they feel that their contributions to the groupare known and potentially seen positively by the other group members than they
will if their contributions are summed into the group total and thus unknown(Szymanski & Harkins, 1987).

Maintain distributive
justice (equity)

Workers who feel that their rewards are proportional to their efforts in the groupwill be happier and work harder than will workers who feel that they are underpaid
or not recognized (Geurts, Buunk, & Schaufeli, 1994).

Keep groups small

Larger groups are more likely to suffer from coordination problems and social
loafing. The most effective working groups are of relatively small size—about fouror five members (Wheelan, 2009).

Create positive groupnorms

Group performance is increased when the group members care about the ability of
the group to do a good job (e.g., a cohesive sports or military team). On the other
hand, some groups develop norms that prohibit members from working to their fullpotential and thus encourage loafing (Høigaard, Säfvenbom, & Tønnessen, 2006).

Improve information
sharing

Leaders must work to be sure that each member of the group is encouraged topresent the information that he or she has in group discussions. One approach toincreasing full discussion of the issues is to have the group break up into smaller
subgroups for discussion. (Mesmer-Magnus & DeChurch, 2009).

Allow plenty of timeGroups take longer to reach consensus, and allowing plenty of time will help keep
the group from coming to premature consensus and making an unwise choice.
Time to consider the issues fully also allows the group to gain new knowledge by
seeking information and analysis from outside experts (Kelly & Loving, 2004).

Set specific and attainable Groups that set specific, difficult, yet attainable goals (e.g., “improve sales by 10%
over the next 6 months”) are more effective than groups that are given goals thatgoals
are not very clear (e.g., “let’s sell as much as we can!”) (Locke & Latham, 2006).

309

Key Takeaways
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Social roles and social norms influence us because they set expectations regarding how
we are to behave in given situtations. Zimbardo’s prison study attempted to demonstrate
the power of social roles.
Persuasion is the process by which a message results in a change in our attitudes or
behavior. According to the elaboration likelihood model, persuasion can be obtained
through either a central or peripheral route. Several persuasive techniques use either adesire for consistency or the reprocity norm.
Conformity, the change in beliefs or behavior that occurs as the result of the presence ofthe other people around us, can occur in both active and passive ways. The typicaloutcome of conformity is that our beliefs and behaviors become more similar to those ofothers around us.
The important research on conformity and obedience was demonstrated by Asch and
Milgram.
Conformity can be affected by minority influence and psychological reactance.
The tendency to perform tasks better or faster in the presence of others is known as social
facilitation. The tendency to perform tasks more poorly or more slowly in the presence ofothers is known as social inhibition.
The performance of working groups is almost never as good as we would expect, given
the number of individuals in the group, and in some cases may even be inferior to theperformance of one or more members of the group working alone.
Group process losses may occur in groups when the group members engage in grouppolarization, social loafing, groupthink, and deindividuation.
It is important to recognize both the strengths and limitations of group performance anduse whatever techniques we can to increase process gains and reduce process losses.

Exercise and Critical Thinking
1. Consider a time when you worked together with others in a group. Do you think the groupexperienced group process gains or group process losses? If the latter, what might you do
now in a group to encourage effective group performance?

Videos
1. Watch this video to see a demonstration of Asch’s line studies. Video Clip Of Asch’sLine Matching Studies http://www.youtube.com/v/iRh5qy09nNw

310

Social Relationships
Learning Objectives
1. Describe how similarity, self-disclosure, and proximity influence the development ofclose relationships.
2. Define altruism and summarize the genetic and environmental factors that contribute toaltruism.
3. Explain the bystander effect.
4. Provide an overview of the causes of human aggression.

In this section, we examine how we relate to each other, what attracts us to each other, thebehaviors of aggression and altruism, and the factors that lead to these social behaviors.

Close Relationships
One of the most important tasks faced by humans is to develop successful relationships with others.
These relationships include acquaintanceships and friendships, but also close relationships, which
are the long-term intimate relationships that we develop with another person (Hendrick & Hendrick,2000). It is useful to know what psychologists have learned about the principles of liking andloving.
Similarity: A major interest of social psychologists is the study ofinterpersonal attraction, or what makes people like, and even love, eachother. One important factor isperceived similarity or resemblance invalues and beliefs between the partners (Davis & Rusbult, 2001).
Similarity is important for relationships because it is more convenient.
It is easier if both partners like to ski or go to the movies than if only
one does. In addition, because similarity supports our values, we canfeel better about ourselves and choice of activities if we see that others
also enjoy doing the same things. Having others like and believe in thesame things we do makes us feel validated in our beliefs. This isreferred to as consensual validation, and it is an important aspect of
why we are attracted to others.

Figure 9.20

Birds of a feather flock
together.

Source:Self-Disclosure: Liking is also enhanced by self-disclosure, thetendency to communicate frequently, without fear of reprisal, and in an accepting and empathetic
manner. Friends are our friends because we can talk to them openly about our needs and goals andbecause they listen to and respond to our needs (Reis & Aron, 2008). However, self-disclosuremust be balanced. If we open up to our friends about the concerns that are important to us, we
expect them to do the same in return. If the self-disclosure is not reciprocal, the relationship may not
last.

311

Proximity: Another important determinant of liking is proximity, or the extent to which people arephysically near us. Research has found that we are more likely to develop friendships with people
who are nearby, for instance, those who live in the same dorm that we do, and even with people
who just happen to sit nearer to us in our classes (Back, Schmukle, & Egloff, 2008).
Proximity has its effect on liking through the principle of mere exposure, which is the tendency toprefer stimuli (including but not limited to people) that we have seen more frequently. The effect ofmere exposure is powerful and occurs in a wide variety of situations. Infants tend to smile at a
photograph of someone they have seen before more than they smile at a photograph of someone
they are seeing for the first time (Brooks-Gunn & Lewis, 1981), and people prefer side-to-side
reversed images of their own faces over their normal (nonreversed) face, whereas their friends
prefer their normal face over the reversed one (Mita, Dermer, & Knight, 1977). This is expected on
the basis of mere exposure, since people see their own faces primarily in mirrors, and thus are
exposed to the reversed face more often.
Mere exposure may well have an evolutionary basis. We have an initial fear of the unknown, but
as things become more familiar they seem more similar and safe, and thus produce more positive
affect and seem less threatening and dangerous (Harmon-Jones & Allen, 2001; Freitas, Azizian,Travers, & Berry, 2005). When the stimuli are people, there may well be an added effect. Familiar
people become more likely to be seen as part of the ingroup rather than the outgroup, and this maylead us to like them more. Zebrowitz and colleagues found that we like people of our own race inpart because they are perceived as similar to us (Zebrowitz, Bornstad, & Lee, 2007)

Helping Others: Altruism
Altruism refers to any behavior that is designed toincrease another person’s welfare, andparticularly those actions that do not seem toprovide a direct reward to the person who
performs them (Dovidio, Piliavin, Schroeder, &Penner, 2006). Altruism occurs when we stop to
help a stranger who has been stranded on the
highway, when we volunteer at a homeless shelter,or when we donate to a charity. Twenty-five
percent of Americans (63 million) contributed
almost $193 billion in value by volunteering in
2016. In addition, in that same year Americans
donated $360 billion to charities, an increase of 2.7
percent over 2015 (Independentsector.org, 2018).

Why Are We Altruistic?

Figure 9.21

We help in part to make ourselves feel good, butalso because we care about the welfare of others.
© Thinkstock

Because altruism is costly, you might wonder why we engage in it at all. There are a variety of
explanations for the occurrence of altruism, and Table 9.3 summarizes some of the variables thatare known to increase helping.

312

Table 9.3 Variables Known to Increase Helping
Variables

Research Results

Positive Moods

We help more when we are in a good mood (Guéguen & De Gail, 2003).

Time

We are more likely to help when we have plenty of time than when we are in ahurry (Darley & Batson 1973).

Similarity

We help people whom we see as similar to us, for instance, those who mimic our
behaviors (van Baaren, Holland, Kawakami, & van Knippenberg, 2004).

Guilt

If we are experiencing guilt, we may help in order to relieve those negative feelings(Malti et al., 2016).

Empathy

We help more when we feel empathy for the other person (Batson, O’Quin, Fultz,
Varnderplas, & Isen, 1983).

Benefits

We are more likely to help if we can feel good about ourselves by doing so (Snyder,
Omoto, & Lindsay, 2004). When we act altruistically, we gain a reputation as aperson with high status who is able and willing to help others, and this status makes
us more desirable in the eyes of others (Hardy & Van Vugt, 2006).

Personal
Responsibility

We are more likely to help if it is clear that others are not helping (Rogers, Miller,
Mayer, & Duval,1982).

Self-presentation We may help in order to show others that we are good people (Hardy & Van Vugt,
2006).

The tendency to help others in need is, in part, a functional evolutionary adaptation. Althoughhelping others can be costly to us as individuals, helping people who are related to us canperpetuate our own genes (Madsen et al., 2007; McAndrew, 2002). Burnstein, Crandall, andKitayama (1994) found that students indicated they would be more likely to help a person who
was closely related to them (e.g., a sibling, parent, or child) than they would be to help a person
who was more distantly related (e.g., a niece, nephew, uncle, or grandmother). People are more
likely to donate kidneys to relatives than to strangers (Borgida, Conner, & Manteufel, 1992), andeven children indicate that they are more likely to help their siblings than they are to help a friend(Tisak & Tisak, 1996).
Although it makes evolutionary sense that we would help people who we are related to, why
would we help people to whom we not related? One explanation for such behavior is based on
the principle of reciprocal altruism (Krebs & Davies, 1987; Trivers, 1971). Reciprocal altruism
is the principle that, if we help other people now, those others will return the favor should weneed their help in the future. By helping others, we both increase our chances of survival andreproductive success and help others increase their survival too. Over the course of evolution,
those who engage in reciprocal altruism should be able to reproduce more often than those who
do not, thus enabling this kind of altruism to continue.
We also learn to help by modeling the helpful behavior of others. Although people frequently
worry about the negative impact of the violence that is seen on TV, there is also a great deal of313

helping behavior shown on television. Smith et al. (2006) found that 73% of TV shows had some
altruism, and that about three altruistic behaviors were shown every hour. Furthermore, theprevalence of altruism was particularly high in children’s shows. However, just as viewing
altruism can increase helping, modeling of behavior that is not altruistic can decrease altruism.
For instance, Anderson and Bushman (2001) found that playing violent video games led to adecrease in helping. We are also more likely to help when we receive rewards for doing so andless likely to help when helping is costly. Another potential reward is the status we gain as a resultof helping.
We might hope that our children internalize another relevant social norm that seems morealtruistic: the social responsibility norm which tells us that we should try to help others whoneed assistance, even without any expectation of future paybacks. The teachings of many cultures
are based on the social responsibility norm; that we should, as good human beings, reach out andhelp other people whenever we can.

How the Presence of Others Can Reduce Helping
One reason that might limit our decision to help is the presence of others. The bystander effectrefers to the reduced likelihood of people offering assistance as the number of bystanders
increases. In other words, there is not always safety in numbers. One of the most widely touted
examples of the bystander effect is the case of Kitty Genovese. Late at night on March 13, 1964,
28-year-old Kitty Genovese was murdered within a few yards of her apartment building in New
York City after a violent fight with her killer in which she struggled and screamed. When police
interviewed her neighbors about the crime, they reported that while 38 of her neighbors heard thesounds of a fight, none had intervened, and only one had called the police. See Box 9.1 for more
recent details on the accuracy of the reporting of this case. Two social psychologists, Latané andDarley (1968), set out to understand the factors that influence people’s willingness, or
unwillingness, to help. They developed a model (see Figure 9.22) that took into consideration theimportant role of the social situation in determining helping. The model has been extensively
tested in many studies, and there is substantial support for it.
The first step in the model is noticing the event. You may not notice a swimmer struggling in thewater at a crowded beach. It would be hard not to notice this person if you were alone on thebeach. Even if we notice the situation, we might not interpret it as an emergency. There may beother explanations. Are they just goofing around in the water or are they really in need ofassistance? When we are unsure we frequently look to others to see how they are responding. At
the same time, they may be looking to us to help them understand the situation. As no one isreacting as if this is an emergency, the bystanders take each other’s inaction to mean that thissituation is not serious. This tendency of the individuals to incorrectly assume that others in thegroup believe something, when this is not the case is called pluralistic ignorance, and isconsidered one of the explanations for the bystander effect (Kitts, 2003).

314

Figure 9.22

The decision to help can be hindered by the presence of others. The more people present the less likely you are to
notice the victim. The inaction of others at the scene may lead you to redefine the situation as not being an
emergency. The presence of others diffuses any personal responsibility you may feel to step in and take action.

Even if we have noticed the emergency and have interpreted it as such, we still need to decide if it
is our responsibility to do something. When others are present, it is easier for us to assume that
others will help, and we do not need to do anything. Diffusion of responsibility occurs when we
assume that others will take on the responsibility and that we do not need to take action ourselves.
The final step in helping is knowing how to help. Of course, for many of us, the best way to help
someone in an emergency is not always clear; we are not professionals and we have little training
in how to help in an emergency. People who do have such training are more likely to help, whereas
the rest of us just do not know what to do, and may simply walk on by. On the other hand, today
many people have cell phones, and can do a lot with a quick call.

Kitty Genovese

Box 9.1 Did the Bystander Effect Really Occur in
the Case of Kitty Genovese?
The case of Kitty Genovese has come under scrutiny. In a
recent documentary, The Witness, Bill Genovese disputes theaccount of his sister’s murder published in the New YorkTimes in 1964 by Martin Gansberg. In the opening lines
Gansberg states,

Source“For more than half-an-hour 38 respectable, law‐abiding
citizens in Queens watched a killer stalk and stab a woman inthree separate attacks in Kew Gardens. Twice their chatter andthe sudden glow of their bedroom lights interrupted him andfrightened him off. Each time he returned, sought her out, andstabbed her again. Not one person telephoned the police during
the assault; one witness called after the woman was dead.”(Gansberg, New York Times, March 1964)315

Gansberg also goes on to suggest that when the police were finally called they arrived within two
minutes.
Kitty Genovese’s murder became the face of social apathy for decades. Bill Genovese was 16 at
the time of his sister’s murder. Growing up hearing the stories, he felt there was more to it than
had been reported. His investigation uncovered several mistakes in the original article about theevents of that night. The documentary also suggests that the then editor of the newspaper, A.M.
Rosenthal, guided the story to create the “myth of bystander apathy”. Rosenthal later went on towrite a best-selling book, “Thirty-Eight Witnesses: The Kitty Genovese Case”, which Genovese
claims further reinforced the idea that no one helped.
According to Brody (2015), Bill Genovese’s investigation found that:• Given the location of the apartments, it was late at night, and the advanced age of most of
the witnesses, no one actually “watched,” as the New York Times article stated. Many
heard a commotion and were roused from their sleep. Across from the apartmentcomplex was a tavern. Hearing shouting late at night was not uncommon, and many
reported this is what they thought they heard. Few saw little of the attack.
• The police were called twice, but failed to respond because they thought it was just adomestic dispute. The issue of domestic violence was handled quite differently in 1964
than it is today. By the time they did respond it was too late.
• In the account by the New York Times it suggested that she died alone. However, thiswas not true as a friend came to her aid and helped her until police arrived.
Just after the recent death of her murderer, Winston Moseley, the New York Times wrote
regarding the original 1964 article:
While there was no question that the attack occurred, and that some neighbors ignoredcries for help, the portrayal of 38 witnesses as fully aware and unresponsive waserroneous. The article grossly exaggerated the number of witnesses and what they had
perceived. None saw the attack in its entirety. Only a few had glimpsed parts of it, or
recognized the cries for help. Many thought they had heard lovers or drunks quarreling.
There were two attacks, not three. And afterward, two people did call the police. A 70year-old woman ventured out and cradled the dying victim in her arms until they arrived.
(MacFadden, New York Times, April 2016)
The one good thing that came out of the death of Kitty Genovese was 911. Calling the police
back in 1964 was not as simple as dialing 911. Dialing zero meant the call went to a generalswitchboard operator who had to locate the nearest police station to the caller. Tracking thecaller’s location was not as easy as it is today, and even knowing the location did not mean thecall would get to the correct precinct. New York City officials realized that a morestraightforward system would be needed. In 1964, after the death of Kitty Genovese, the city
provided a centralized police number. In 1968, the 911 system was introduced (MacFadden,2016).

316

Human Aggression
Aggression is behavior that is intended to harm another individual. Aggression may occur in theheat of the moment, for instance, when a jealous lover strikes out in rage or the sports fans at auniversity light fires and destroy cars after an important basketball game. Or it may occur in amore cognitive, deliberate, and planned way, such as the aggression of a bully who steals anotherchild’s toys, a terrorist who kills civilians to gain political exposure, or a hired assassin who kills
for money.
Not all aggression is physical. Aggression also occurs in nonphysical ways, as when children
exclude others from activities, call them names, or spread rumors about them. Paquette andUnderwood (1999) found that both boys and girls rated nonphysical aggression, such as namecalling as making them feel more “sad and bad” than did physical aggression. Bullying can
include physical, verbal, or even cyber-behaviors.

Aggression is Part of Human Nature
We may aggress against others in part because it allows us to gain access to valuable resources
such as food, territory, and desirable mates, or to protect ourselves from direct attack by others.
If aggression helps in the survival of our genes, then the process of natural selection may wellhave caused humans, as it would any other animal, to be aggressive (Buss & Duntley, 2006).
There is evidence for the genetics of aggression. Aggression is controlled in large part by the
amygdala. One of the primary functions of the amygdala is to help us learn to associate stimuli
with the rewards and the punishment that they may provide. The amygdala is particularly activatedin our responses to stimuli that we see as threatening and fear-arousing. When the amygdala isstimulated, in either humans or in animals, the organism becomes more aggressive.
However, just because we can aggress does not mean that we will aggress. It is not necessarily
evolutionarily adaptive to aggress in all situations. Neither people nor animals are always
aggressive; they rely on aggression only when they feel that they absolutely need to (Berkowitz,
1993a). The prefrontal cortex serves as a control center on aggression; when it is more highly
activated, we are more able to control our aggressive impulses. Research has found that the
cerebral cortex is less active in murderers and death row inmates, suggesting that violent crime
may be caused by a failure or reduced ability to regulate aggression (Davidson, Putnam, & Larson,2000).
Hormones are also important in regulating aggression. Most important in this regard is the male
sex hormone testosterone, which is associated with increased aggression in both males andfemales. Research conducted on a variety of animals has found a positive correlation between
levels of testosterone and aggression. This relationship seems to be weaker among humans thanamong animals, yet it is still significant (Dabbs, Hargrove, & Heusel, 1996).
Consuming alcohol increases the likelihood that people will respond aggressively to provocations,and even people who are not normally aggressive may react with aggression when they are
intoxicated (Graham, Osgood, Wells, & Stockwell, 2006). Alcohol reduces the ability of people
who have consumed it to inhibit their aggression because when people are intoxicated, they become317

more self-focused and less aware of the social constraints that normally prevent them fromengaging aggressively (Bushman & Cooper, 1990; Steele & Southwick, 1985).

Negative Experiences Increase Aggression
When asked about the times that you have been aggressive, you would probably state that many ofthem occurred when you were angry, in a bad mood, tired, in pain, sick, or frustrated. You would
be right because we are much more likely to aggress when we are experiencing negative emotions.
The following are some causes of aggression:•••

One important determinant of aggression is frustration. When we are frustrated we may lashout at others, even at people who did not cause the frustration. In some cases, the aggression
is displaced aggression, which is aggression that is directed at an object or person other thanthe person who caused the frustration (Marcus-Maxwell, Pedersen, Carlson, & Miller,
2000).
Aggression is greater on hot days than it is on cooler days and during hot years than duringcooler years, and most violent riots occur during the hottest days of the year (Bushman,
Wang, & Anderson, 2005).
Pain also increases aggression (Berkowitz, 1993b).

If we are aware that we are feeling negative emotions, we might think that we could release thoseemotions in a relatively harmless way, such as by punching a pillow or kicking something, withthe hopes that doing so will release our aggressive tendencies. This is incorrect! Catharsis or theidea that observing or engaging in less harmful aggressive actions will reduce the tendency toaggress later in a more harmful way, was considered by many as a way of decreasing violence.
However, as far as social psychologists have been able to determine, catharsis simply does notwork. Rather than decreasing aggression, engaging in aggressive behaviors of any type increases
the likelihood of later aggression.
Bushman, Baumeister, and Stack (1999) first angered their
Figure 9.23
research participants by having another student insult them.
Then half of the participants engaged in a cathartic behavior.
They were given boxing gloves and were given a chance tohit a punching bag for 2 minutes. Then all the participants
played a game with the person who had insulted them earlier
and had a chance to get back at the other person with apainful blast of white noise. Contrary to the catharsis
hypothesis, the students who had punched the punching bag
set a higher noise level and delivered longer bursts of noise
than the participants who did not get a chance to hit thepunching bag. It seems that if we hit a punching bag, punch a Source
pillow, or scream as loud as we can to release our frustration,
the opposite may occur. Rather than decreasing aggression, these behaviors in fact increase it.

318

Viewing Violent Media Increases Aggression
The average American watches over 4 hours of television every day, and these programs contain asubstantial amount of aggression. At the same time, children are also exposed to violence inmovies and video games, as well as in popular music and music videos that include violent lyrics
and imagery. Research evidence makes it very clear that, on average, people who watch violent
behavior become more aggressive. The evidence supporting this relationship comes from manystudies conducted over many years using both correlational designs, as well as experimental studies
in which people have been randomly assigned to view either violent or nonviolent material(Anderson et al., 2003). Viewing violent behavior also increases aggression in part throughobservational learning. Children who witness violence are more likely to be aggressive.
Another outcome of viewing large amounts of violent material is desensitization, which is thetendency over time to show weaker emotional responses to emotional stimuli. When we first see
violence, we are likely to be shocked, aroused, and even repulsed by it. However, over time, as wesee more and more violence, we become habituated to it, such that the subsequent exposures
produce fewer and fewer negative emotional responses. Continually viewing violence also makes
us more distrustful and more likely to behave aggressively (Bartholow, Bushman, & Sestir, 2006;
Nabi & Sullivan, 2001).
Of course, not everyone who views violent material becomes aggressive; individual differences
also matter. People who experience a lot of negative affect and who feel that they are frequently
rejected by others whom they care about are more aggressive (Downey, Irwin, Ramsay, & Ayduk,
2004). People with inflated or unstable self-esteem are more prone to anger and are highly
aggressive when their high self-image is threatened (Baumeister, Smart, & Boden, 1996). For
instance, classroom bullies are those children who always want to be the center of attention, who
think a lot of themselves, and who cannot take criticism (Salmivalli & Nieminen, 2002). Bullies arehighly motivated to protect their inflated self-concepts, and they react with anger and aggression
when it is threatened.
There is a culturally universal tendency for men to be more physically violent than women (Archer& Coyne, 2005; Crick & Nelson, 2002). Worldwide, about 99% of rapes and about 90% ofrobberies, assaults, and murders are committed by men (Graham & Wells, 2001). These sex
differences do not imply that women are never aggressive. Both men and women respond to insults
and provocation with aggression; the differences between men and women are smaller after they
have been frustrated, insulted, or threatened (Bettencourt & Miller, 1996).

Key Takeaways••

Close relationships are based on intimacy, which is determined by similarity, selfdisclosure, and proximity.
Altruism is behavior that is designed to increase another person’s welfare, and particularly
those actions that do not seem to provide a direct reward to the person who performs
them. The tendency to help others in need is a functional evolutionary adaptation, and also
determined by environmental factors.
319

•

•
•
•
•

Although helping others can be costly to us as individuals, helping people who are related
to us can perpetuate our own genes. Some helping is based on reciprocal altruism, theprinciple that if we help other people now, those others will return the favor should weneed their help in the future.
We also learn to help through modeling and reinforcement. The result of this learning is
norms about helping, including the social responsibility norm.
Research testing the Latané and Darley model of helping has shown the importance of the
bystander effect when noticing, interpreting, and acting in emergency situations.
Aggression is physical or nonphysical behavior intended to harm another individual.
Aggression has both biological and environmental causes. The experience of negative
emotions tends to increase aggression.
Viewing violence tends to increase aggression.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Consider a time when you were helpful. Was the behavior truly altruistic, or did you help
for selfish reasons?
2. Consider a time when you or someone you know was aggressive. What do you thinkcaused the aggression?
3. Should parents limit the amount of violent TV shows and video games that their children
are exposed to? Why or why not?

Videos
1. Watch this video on the bystander effect. Video Clip: The Case of Kitty Genovese
http://www.youtube.com/v/JozmWS6xYEw
2. This video shows Professor Albert Bandura describing his studies on the observational
learning of aggression in children. Video Clip http://www.youtube.com/v/Pr0OTCVtHbU

Chapter Summary
Social psychology is the scientific study of how we feel about, think about, and behave toward theother people around us, and how those people influence our thoughts, feelings, and behavior. A
fundamental principle of social psychology is that although we may not always be aware of it, our
cognitions, emotions, and behaviors are substantially influenced by the people with whom we areinteracting.
Our initial judgments of others are based in large part on what we see. The physical features ofother people, particularly their sex, race, age, and physical attractiveness, are noticeable, and we
often focus our attention on these dimensions.
320Youth, symmetry, and averageness have been found to be cross-culturally consistent determinantsof perceived attractiveness, although different cultures may also have unique beliefs about what is
attractive.
We frequently use people’s appearances to form our judgments about them, and these judgments
may lead to stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination. We use our stereotypes and prejudices inpart because they are easy and we may be evolutionarily disposed to stereotyping. We can change
and learn to avoid using them through positive interaction with members of other groups, practice,and education.
Causal attribution is the process of trying to determine the causes of people’s behavior.
Attributions may be made to the person, to the situation, or to a combination of both. Althoughpeople are reasonably accurate in their attributions, they may make self-serving attributions andfall victim to the fundamental attribution error.
Attitudes refer to our relatively enduring evaluations of people and things. Attitudes are importantbecause they frequently (but not always) predict behavior. Attitudes can be changed throughpersuasive communications. Attitudes predict behavior better for some people than for others and insome situations more than others. Our behaviors also influence our attitudes through the cognitive
processes of self-perception and the more emotional process of cognitive dissonance.
Social norms influence social roles which cultures use to socialize members. Zimbardo’s prison
experiment attempted to prove that social roles can have potentially negative consequences.
Persuasion can be obtained via a central route, that requires more carefully analysis of theinformation, or the peripheral route, that focuses more on our emotional reactions.
The foot-in-the-door technique gains compliance by getting people to agree to a small request
followed by a later larger request. The door-in-the-face technique gains compliance by asking for
an unreasonable request first, and then scaling it back to the smaller desired request. In low-ballcompliance is gained by first getting people to agree to an attractive request, and then reneging on it.
The that’s-not-all technique gains compliance by adding more features, or dropping the price before
people are asked to agree.
Both the foot-in-the-door and the low-ball techniques rely on people’s desire to be consistent intheir behavior or decision making. Both the door-in-the-face and the that’s-not-all techniques relyon the reciprocity social norm.
We conform not only because we believe that other people have accurate information and we wantto have knowledge (informational conformity) but also because we want to be liked by others(normative conformity). The typical outcome of conformity is that our beliefs and behaviors
become more similar to those of others around us. Studies demonstrating the power of conformity
include those by Asch, while Milgram researched obedience.
Although majorities are most persuasive, a minority influence may be more persuasive.

321

The tendency to perform tasks better or faster in the presence of others is known as social
facilitation, whereas the tendency to perform tasks more poorly or more slowly in the presence ofothers is known as social inhibition. Zajonc explained the influence of others on task performanceusing the concept of physiological arousal.
Working in groups involves both costs and benefits. The costs of working in groups are observed inphenomena such as social loafing, group polarization, groupthink and deindividuation. These
process losses can be reduced by better motivation and coordination among the group members, by
keeping contributions identifiable, and by providing difficult but attainable goals.
Liking and loving in friendships and close relationships are determined by variables including
similarity, disclosure, and proximity.
The tendency to help others in need is in part a functional evolutionary adaptation. We help others
to benefit ourselves and to benefit the others. Reciprocal altruism leads us to help others now withthe expectation those others will return the favor should we need their help in the future. The
outcome of the reinforcement and modeling of altruism is the development of social norms about
helping, including the reciprocity norm and the social responsibility norm. Latané and Darley’s
model of helping proposes that the presence of others can reduce noticing, interpreting, andresponding to emergencies.
Aggression may be physical or nonphysical. Aggression is activated in large part by the amygdala
and regulated by the prefrontal cortex. Testosterone is associated with increased aggression in bothmales and females. Aggression is also caused by negative experiences and emotions, including
frustration, pain, and heat. As predicted by principles of observational learning, research evidence
makes it very clear that, on average, people who watch violent behavior become more aggressive.

References
Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior. Organizational Behavior & Human Decision Processes, 50(2), 179–
211.
Albarracín, D., Johnson, B. T., & Zanna, M. P. (Eds.). (2005). The handbook of attitudes. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
Alexander, M. (2001) Thirty years later Stanford prison experiment lives on. Stanford Report, (August 22, 2001)
http://news.stanford.edu/news/2001/august22/prison2-822.html
American Psychological Association. (2018). Fetatured psychologists: Mamie Phipps Clark, Phd, and Kenneth Clark,
PhD. Retrieved from http://www.apa.org/pi/oema/resources/ethnicity-health/psychologists/clark.aspx
Anderson, C. A., Berkowitz, L., Donnerstein, E., Huesmann, L. R., Johnson, J. D., Linz, D., Wartella, E. (2003). The
influence of media violence on youth. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 4(3), 81–110.

322

Anderson, C. A., & Bushman, B. J. (2001). Effects of violent video games on aggressive behavior, aggressive
cognition, aggressive affect, physiological arousal, and prosocial behavior: A meta-analytic review of the scientific
literature. Psychological Science, 12(5), 353–359.
Archer, J., & Coyne, S. M. (2005). An integrated review of indirect, relational, and social aggression. Personality andSocial Psychology Review, 9(3), 212–230
Asch, S. (1955). Opinions and social pressure. Scientific American, 11, 32.
Back, M. D., Schmukle, S. C., & Egloff, B. (2008). Becoming friends by chance. Psychological Science, 19(5), 439–
440.
Baron, R. S. (2005). So right it’s wrong: Groupthink and the ubiquitous nature of polarized group decision making. In
M. P. Zanna (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology (Vol. 37, pp. 219–253). San Diego, CA: Elsevier
Academic Press
Bartholow, B. D., Bushman, B. J., & Sestir, M. A. (2006). Chronic violent video game exposure and desensitization toviolence: Behavioral and event-related brain potential data. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 42(4), 532–539
Bartol, C. R. & Bartol, A. M. (2015). Psychology and law. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
Batson, C. D., O’Quin, K., Fultz, J., Varnderplas, M., & Isen, A. M. (1983). Influence of self-reported distress andempathy on egoistic versus altruistic motivation to help. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 45(3), 706–718.
Baumeister, R. F., Smart, L., & Boden, J. M. (1996). Relation of threatened egotism to violence and aggression: The
dark side of high self-esteem. Psychological Review, 103(1), 5–33.
Bem, D. J. (1972). Self perception theory. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology (Vol. 6).
New York, NY: Academic Press.
Berger, J. M. (1986). Increasing compliance by improving the deal: The that's not all technique. Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology, 51, 277-283
Berkowitz, A. (2004). An overiew of social norms. In L. C. Lederman & L. P. Stewart (Eds.) Changing the culture ofcollege drinking: A socially situated health communication campaign. New York, NY: Hampton Press.
Berkowitz, L. (1993a). Aggression: Its causes, consequences and control. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Berkowitz, L. (1993b). Pain and aggression: Some findings and implications. Motivation and Emotion, 17(3), 277–293.
Bettencourt, B., & Miller, N. (1996). Gender differences in aggression as a function of provocation: A meta-analysis.
Psychological Bulletin, 119, 422–447.
Bond, C. F., & Titus, L. J. (1983). Social facilitation: A meta-analysis of 241 studies. Psychological Bulletin, 94(2),265–292.
Borgida, E., Conner, C., & Manteufel, L. (Eds.). (1992). Understanding living kidney donation: A behavioral decisionmaking perspective. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Bornstein, R. F. (1993). The dependent personality. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Brody, R. (2015, October). Kitty Genovese’s brother reexamines her famous murder. The New Yorker. Retrieved from:https://www.newyorker.com/culture/richard-brody/kitty-genoveses-brother-reexamines-her-famous-murder
Brooks-Gunn, J., & Lewis, M. (1981). Infant social perception: Responses to pictures of parents and strangers.
Developmental Psychology, 17(5), 647–649.

323

Burger, J. M. (2009). Replicating Milgram: Would people still obey today? American Psychologist, 64(1), 1–11.
Burnstein, E., Crandall, C., & Kitayama, S. (1994). Some neo-Darwinian decision rules for altruism: Weighing cues forinclusive fitness as a function of the biological importance of the decision. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 67(5), 773–789.
Bushman, B. J., Baumeister, R. F., & Stack, A. D. (1999). Catharsis, aggression, and persuasive influence: Selffulfilling or self-defeating prophecies? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 76(3), 367–376.
Bushman, B. J., & Cooper, H. M. (1990). Effects of alcohol on human aggression: An integrative research review.
Psychological Bulletin, 107(3), 341–354
Bushman, B. J., Wang, M. C., & Anderson, C. A. (2005). Is the curve relating temperature to aggression linear or
curvilinear? Assaults and temperature in Minneapolis reexamined. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
89(1), 62–66.
Buss, D. M., & Duntley, J. D. (Eds.). (2006). The Evolution of Aggression. Madison, CT: Psychosocial Press.
Cheng, C. M., & Chartrand, T. L. (2003). Self-monitoring without awareness: Using mimicry as a nonconscious
affiliation strategy. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 85(6), 1170–1179.
Cheng, P.-Y., & Chiou, W.-B. (2008). Framing effects in group investment decision making: Role of grouppolarization. Psychological Reports, 102(1), 283–292.
Cialdini, R. B. (2008). Turning persuasion from and art into a science. In P. Meusburger, Welker, M., & Wunder, E.
(Eds.). Clashes of knowledge: Orthodoxies and heterodoxies in science and religion (pp. 199-209). New York: Springer.
Cialdini, R. B. (1993). Influence: Science and practice (3rd ed.). New York: Harper Collins.
Cialdini, R. B. (2001). Influence: Science and practice (4th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Cialdini, R. B., Reno, R. R., & Kallgren, C. A. (1990). A focus theory of normative conduct: Recycling the concept ofnorms to reduce littering in public places. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 58, 1015–1026.
Crandall, C. S., Merman, A., & Hebl, M. (2009). Anti-fat prejudice. In T. D. Nelson (Ed.), Handbook of prejudice,stereotyping, and discrimination (pp. 469–487). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Crick, N. R., & Nelson, D. A. (2002). Relational and physical victimization within friendships: Nobody told me there’dbe friends like these. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 30(6), 599–607.
Dabbs, J. M. Jr., Hargrove, M. F., & Heusel, C. (1996). Testosterone differences among college fraternities: Wellbehaved vs. rambunctious. Personality and Individual Differences, 20(2), 157–161.
Darley, J. M., & Batson, C. D. (1973). “From Jerusalem to Jericho”: A study of situational and dispositional variables
in helping behavior. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 27(1), 100–108.
Davidson, R. J., Putnam, K. M., & Larson, C. L. (2000). Dysfunction in the neural circuitry of emotion regulation—A
possible prelude to violence. Science, 289(5479), 591–594.
Davis, J. L., & Rusbult, C. E. (2001). Attitude alignment in close relationships. Journal of Personality & Social
Psychology, 81(1), 65–84.
Deutsch, M., & Gerard, H. B. (1955). A study of normative and informational social influences upon individual
judgment. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 51(3), 629-636.
Dovidio, J. F., Piliavin, J. A., Schroeder, D. A., & Penner, L. (2006). The social psychology of prosocial behavior.
Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

324

Downey, G., Irwin, L., Ramsay, M., & Ayduk, O. (Eds.). (2004). Rejection sensitivity and girls’ aggression. New York,
NY: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
Drummond, J. T. (2002). From the Northwest Imperative to global jihad: Social psychological aspects of theconstruction of the enemy, political violence, and terror. In C. E. Stout (Ed.), The psychology of terrorism: A public
understanding (Vol. 1, pp. 49–95). Westport, CT: Praeger Publishers/Greenwood Publishing Group.
Fareed, Z, Abidan, Z. U., Shahzad, F., Umm-e-Amen, & Lodhi, R. N. (2013). The impact of rewards on employee’s
job performance and job satisfaction. Management and Administrative Science Review, 2(5), 431-442.
Festinger, L. (1957). A theory of cognitive dissonance. Evanston, IL: Row, Peterson.
Festinger, L., & Carlsmith, J. M. (1959). Cognitive consequences of forced compliance. Journal of Abnormal andSocial Psychology, 38, 203-210.
Fiske, S. T. (1989). Examining the role of intent: Toward understanding its role in stereotyping and prejudice. In J. S.
Uleman & J. A. Bargh (Eds.), Unintended thought (pp. 253–286). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Fiske, S. T. (2003). Social beings. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Freitas, A. L., Azizian, A., Travers, S., & Berry, S. A. (2005). The evaluative connotation of processing fluency:
Inherently positive or moderated by motivational context? Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 41(6), 636–644.
Friedman, J. L., & Fraser, S. C. (1966). Compliance without pressure: The foot-in-the-door technique. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 4, 195-202.
Gangestad, S. W., & Snyder, M. (2000). Self-monitoring: Appraisal and reappraisal. Psychological Bulletin, 126(4),530–555.
Gansberg, M. (1964). 37 who saw murder didn’t call the police. The New York Times (March 27, 1964)
http://www.nytimes.com/1964/03/27/37-who-saw-murder-didnt-call-the-police.html?_r=0
Geurts, S. A., Buunk, B. P., & Schaufeli, W. B. (1994). Social comparisons and absenteeism: A structural modelingapproach. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 24(21), 1871–1890.
Graham, K., Osgood, D. W., Wells, S., & Stockwell, T. (2006). To what extent is intoxication associated withaggression in bars? A multilevel analysis. Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 67(3), 382–390.
Graham, K., & Wells, S. (2001). The two worlds of aggression for men and women. Sex Roles, 45(9–10), 595–622.
Guéguen, N., & De Gail, M.-A. (2003). The effect of smiling on helping behavior: Smiling and good samaritan
behavior. Communication Reports, 16(2), 133–140
Guéguen, N., & Jacob, C. (2002). Solicitation by e-mail and solicitor’s status: A field study of social influence on theweb. CyberPsychology & Behavior, 5(4), 377–383.
Hall, J. A., & Schmid Mast, M. (2008). Are women always more interpersonally sensitive than men? Impact of goals
and content domain. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 34(1), 144–155.
Hardy, C. L., & Van Vugt, M. (2006). Nice guys finish first: The competitive altruism hypothesis. Personality andSocial Psychology Bulletin, 32(10), 1402–1413.

Hare, A. P. (2003). Roles, relationships, and groups in organizations: Some conclusions andrecommendations. Small Group Research, 34, 123–154.

325

Harmon-Jones, E., & Allen, J. J. B. (2001). The role of affect in the mere exposure effect: Evidence frompsychophysiological and individual differences approaches. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 27(7), 889–
898.
Harmon-Jones, E., & Mills, J. (1999). Cognitive dissonance: Progress on a pivotal theory in social psychology.
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Hendrick, C., & Hendrick, S. S. (Eds.). (2000). Close relationships: A sourcebook. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Hewstone, M. (1996). Contact and categorization: Social psychological interventions to change intergroup relations. In
C. N. Macrae, C. Stangor, & M. Hewstone (Eds.), Stereotypes and stereotyping (pp. 323–368). New York, NY: Guilford
Press.
Hogg, M. A. (2003). Social identity. In M. R. Leary & J. P. Tangney (Eds.), Handbook of self and identity (pp. 462–
479). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Høigaard, R., Säfvenbom, R., & Tønnessen, F. E. (2006). Relationship between group cohesion, group norms, andperceived social loafing in soccer teams. Small Group Research, 37(3), 217-232.
Hoss, R. A., & Langlois, J. H. (2003). Infants prefer attractive faces. In O. Pascalis & A. Slater (Eds.), The developmentof face processing in infancy and early childhood: Current perspectoves (pp. 27-38). Hauppauge, NY: Nova Science
Publishers.
Hosoda, M., Stone-Romero, E. F., & Coats, G. (2003). The effects of physical attractiveness on job-related outcomes: A
meta-analysis of experimental studies. Personnel Psychology, 56(2), 431–462.
Independentsector.org (2018). The charitable sector. https://independentsector.org/about/the-charitable-sector/
Janis, I. L. (2007). Groupthink. In R. P. Vecchio (Ed.), Leadership: Understanding the dynamics of power andinfluence in organizations (2nd ed., pp. 157–169). Notre Dame, IN: University of Notre Dame Press.
Jetten, J., Spears, R., & Manstead, A. S. R. (1997). Strength of identification and intergroup differentiation: The
influence of group norms. European Journal of Social Psychology, 27(5), 603–609.
Jhangiani, R. & Tarry, H. (2014). The principles of social psychology-1st international edition. Retrieved fromhttps://open.bccampus.ca/find-open-textbooks/?uuid=66c0cf64-c485-442c 8183de75151f13f5&contributo
r=&keyword=&subject=.
Jones, E. E., Davis, K. E., & Gergen, K. J. (1961). Role playing variations and their informational value for person
perception. Journal of Abnormal & Social Psychology, 63(2), 302–310.
Jones, E. E., Kanouse, D. E., Kelley, H. H., Nisbett, R. E., Valins, S., & Weiner, B. (Eds.). (1987). Attribution:
Perceiving the causes of behavior. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Karau, S. J., & Williams, K. D. (1993). Social loafing: A meta-analytic review and theoretical integration. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 65, 681-706.
Kelly, J, R., & Loving, T. J., (2004). Time pressure and group performance: Exploring underlying processes in theattentional focus model. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 40(2), 185-198.
Kitts, J. A. (2003). Egocentric Bias or Information Management? Selective Disclosure and the Social Roots of Norm
Misperception. Social Psychology Quarterly, 66 (3), 222-237
Kravitz, D. A., & Martin, B. (1986). Ringelmann rediscovered: The original article. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 50, 936–941.

326

Krebs, J. R., & Davies, N. B. (1987). An introduction to behavioural ecology (2nd ed.). Sunderland, MA: Sinauer
Associates.
Langlois, J. H., Kalakanis, L., Rubenstein, A. J., Larson, A., Hallam, M., & Smoot, M. (2000). Maxims or myths ofbeauty? A meta-analytic and theoretical review. Psychological Bulletin, 126(3), 390–423.
Langlois, J. H., Ritter, J. M., Roggman, L. A., & Vaughn, L. S. (1991). Facial diversity and infant preferences for
attractive faces. Developmental Psychology, 27(1), 79–84.
Langlois, J. H., & Roggman, L. A. (1990). Attractive faces are only average. Psychological Science, 1(2), 115–121.
Latané, B., & Darley, J. M. (1968). Group inhibition of bystander intervention in emergencies. Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology, 10(3), 215–221.
Lerner, M. (1980). The belief in a just world: A fundamental delusion. New York, NY: Plenum
Locke, E. A., & Latham, G. P. (2006). New directions in goal-setting theory. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 15(5), 265–268.
Madsen, E. A., Tunney, R. J., Fieldman, G., Plotkin, H. C., Dunbar, R. I. M., Richardson, J.M., McFarland, D. (2007).
Kinship and altruism: A cross-cultural experimental study. British Journal of Psychology, 98(2), 339–359.
MacFadden, R.D. (2016). Winston Moseley 81, killer of Kitty Genovese dies in prison. The New York Times (April 4,2016). http://www.nytimes.com/2016/04/05/nyregion/winston-moseley-81-killer-of-kitty-genovese-dies-inprison.html?_r=0
Malloy, T. E., Albright, L., Kenny, D. A., Agatstein, F., & Winquist, L. (1997). Interpersonal Perception andMetaperception in Nonoverlapping Social Groups. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 72(2), 390-398.
Malti, T., Ongley, S. F., Peplak, J., Chaparro, M. P., Buchmann, M., Zuffianò, A., & ... Zuffianò, A. (2016). Children's
Sympathy, Guilt, and Moral Reasoning in Helping, Cooperation, and Sharing: A 6-Year Longitudinal Study. Child
Development, 87(6), 1783-1795.
Marcus-Maxwell, A., Pedersen, W. Carlson, M., & Miller, N. (2000). Displaced aggression is alive and well: A metaanalytic review. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 78, 678-689.
Martin, R., Hewstone, M., Martin, P. Y., & Gardikiotis, A. (2008). Persuasion from majority and minority groups. In W.
D. Crano & R. Prislin (Eds.), Attitudes and attitude change (pp. 361–384). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
McAndrew, F. T. (2002). New evolutionary perspectives on altruism: Multilevel-selection and costly-signaling
theories. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 11(2), 79–82
McCauley, C. R. (1989). Terrorist individuals and terrorist groups: The normal psychology of extreme behavior. In J.
Groebel & J. H. Goldstein (Eds.), Terrorism: Psychological perspectives (p. 45). Sevilla, Spain: Universidad de
Sevilla.
Mesmer-Magnus, J. R. & DeChurch, L. A. (2009). Information sharing and team performance: A meta-analysis. Journalof Applied Psychology, 94(2), 535-546.
Milgram, S. (1974). Obedience to authority: An experimental view. New York, NY: Harper and Row.
Miron, A. M., & Brehm, J. W. (2006). Reaktanz theorie—40 Jahre sparer. Zeitschrift fur Sozialpsychologie, 37(1), 9–
18.
Mita, T. H., Dermer, M., & Knight, J. (1977). Reversed facial images and the mere-exposure hypothesis. Journal of
Personality & Social Psychology, 35(8), 597–601.

327

Moscovici, S., Mugny, G., & Van Avermaet, E. (1985). Perspectives on minority influence. New York, NY:
Cambridge University Press.
Myers, D., & Twenge, J. M. (2017). Social psychology (12 ed.). NY: McGraw Hill.
Nabi, R. L., & Sullivan, J. L. (2001). Does television viewing relate to engagement in protective action against crime?
A cultivation analysis from a theory of reasoned action perspective. Communication Research, 28(6), 802–825.
Nemeth, C., & Kwan, J. L. (1987). Minority influence, divergent thinking and the detection of correct solutions. Journalof Applied Social Psychology, 17, 788–799.
Nijstad, B. A., Stroebe, W., & Lodewijkx, H. F. M. (2006). The illusion of group productivity: A reduction of failures
explanation. European Journal of Social Psychology, 36(1), 31–48.
Neuberg, S. L., Kenrick, D. T., & Schaller, M. (2010). Evolutionary social psychology. In S. T. Fiske, D. T. Gilbert, &G. Lindzey (Eds.), Handbook of social psychology (5th ed., Vol. 2, pp. 761–796). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Olson, J. M., & Stone, J. (2005). The influence of behavior on attitudes. In D. Albarracín, B. T. Johnson, & M. P. Zanna(Eds.), The handbook of attitudes (pp. 223–271). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Paquette, J. A., & Underwood, M. K. (1999). Gender differences in young adolescents’ experiences of peer
victimization: Social and physical aggression. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 45(2), 242–266.
Pennebaker, J. W., & Sanders, D. Y. (1976). American graffiti: Effects of authority and reactance arousal. Personality &Social Psychology Bulletin, 2(3), 264–267.
Petty, R. E., & Cacioppo, J. T. (1986). The elaboration likelihood model of persuasion. Advances in Experimental Social
Psychology, 19, 123-205.
Pliner, P., Hart, H., Kohl, J., Saari, D. (1974). Compliance without pressure: Some further data on the foot-in-the-door
technique. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 10, 17-22.
Reis, H. T., & Aron, A. (2008). Love: What is it, why does it matter, and how does it operate? Perspectives on
Psychological Science, 3(1), 80–86.
Rhodes, G., Zebrowitz, L. A., Clark, A., Kalick, S. M., Hightower, A., & McKay, R. (2001). Do facial averageness andsymmetry signal health? Evolution and Human Behavior, 22(1), 31–46.
Rogers, M., Miller, N., Mayer, S., & Duval, S. (1982). Personal responsibility and salience of the request for help:
Determinants of the relation between negative affect and helping behavior. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 43(5), 956-970.
Salmivalli, C., & Nieminen, E. (2002). Proactive and reactive aggression among school bullies, victims, and bullyvictims. Aggressive Behavior, 28(1), 30–44.
Schneider, D. J. (2004). The psychology of stereotyping. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Smith, S. W., Smith, S. L., Pieper, K. M., Yoo, J. H., Ferris, A. L., Downs, E., Bowden, B. (2006). Altruism on
American television: Examining the amount of, and context surrounding, acts of helping and sharing. Journal ofCommunication, 56(4), 707–727.
Snyder, M., Omoto, A. M., & Lindsay, J. J. (Eds.). (2004). Sacrificing time and effort for the good of others: The
benefits and costs of volunteerism. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Stangor, C. (1995). Content and application inaccuracy in social stereotyping. In Y. T. Lee, L. J. Jussim, & C. R.
McCauley (Eds.), Stereotype accuracy: Toward appreciating group differences (pp. 275–292). Washington, DC:
American Psychological Association.

328

Steele, C. M., & Southwick, L. (1985). Alcohol and social behavior: I. The psychology of drunken excess. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 48(1), 18–34.
Stewart-Williams, S. (2007). Altruism among kin vs. nonkin: Effects of cost of help and reciprocal exchange. Evolution
and Human Behavior, 28(3), 193–198.
Storms, M. D. (1973). Videotape and the attribution process: Reversing actors’ and observers’ points of view. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 27(2), 165–175.
Stroebe, W., Diehl, M., & Abakoumkin, G. (1992). The illusion of group effectivity. Personality & Social Psychology
Bulletin, 18(5), 643–650.
Sugiyama, L. S. (2005). Physical attractiveness in adaptationist perspective. In D. M. Buss (Ed.), The handbook of
evolutionary psychology (pp. 292–343). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Swim, J. T., & Stangor, C. (1998). Prejudice: The target’s perspective. Santa Barbara, CA: Academic Press.
Szymanski, K., & Harkins, S. G. (1987). Social loafing and self-evaluation with a social standard. Journal of
Personality & Social Psychology, 53(5), 891–897
Tennen, H., & Affleck, G. (1990). Blaming others for threatening events. Psychological Bulletin, 108(2), 209–232.
Tisak, M. S., & Tisak, J. (1996). My sibling’s but not my friend’s keeper: Reasoning about responses to aggressive acts.
Journal of Early Adolescence, 16(3), 324–339.
Toppo, G. (2018). Time to dismiss the Stanford Prison Experiment? Retrieved fromhttps://www.insidehighered.com/news/2018/06/20/new-stanford-prison-experiment-revelations-question-findings
Triplett, N. (1898). The dynamogenic factors in pacemaking and competition. American Journal of Psychology, 9(4),507–533.
Trivers, R. L. (1971). The evolution of reciprocal altruism. Quarterly Review of Biology, 46, 35–57.
Trope, Y., & Alfieri, T. (1997). Effortfulness and flexibility of dispositional judgment processes. Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology, 73(4), 662–674.
United States Department of Housing and Urban Development. (1968). History of fair housing. Retrieved fromhttps://www.hud.gov/program_offices/fair_housing_equal_opp/aboutfheo/history
van Baaren, R. B., Holland, R. W., Kawakami, K., & van Knippenberg, A. (2004). Mimicry and prosocial behavior.
Psychological Science, 15(1), 71–74.
Walster, E., Aronson, V., Abrahams, D., & Rottmann, L. (1966). Importance of physical attractiveness in dating
behavior. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 4(5), 508–516.
Wheelan, S. A. (2009). Group size, group development, and group productivity. Small Group Research, 40(2), 247262.
Willis, J., & Todorov, A. (2006). First impressions: Making up your mind after a 100-ms exposure to a face.
Psychological Science, 17(7), 592–598.
Zajonc, R. B. (1965). Social facilitation. Science, 149, 269–274.
Zebrowitz, L. A. (1996). Physical appearance as a basis of stereotyping. In C. N. Macrae, C. Stangor, & M. Hewstone(Eds.), Stereotypes and stereotyping (pp. 79–120). New York, NY: Guilford Press.

329

Zebrowitz, L. A., Bronstad, P. M., & Lee, H. K. (2007). The contribution of face familiarity to ingroup favoritism andstereotyping. Social Cognition, 25(2), 306–338.
Zebrowitz, L. A., Fellous, J.-M., Mignault, A., & Andreoletti, C. (2003). Trait impressions as overgeneralized
responses to adaptively significant facial qualities: Evidence from connectionist modeling. Personality and Social
Psychology Review, 7(3), 194–215.
Zebrowitz, L. A., Luevano, V. X., Bronstad, P. M., & Aharon, I. (2009). Neural activation to babyfaced men matches
activation to babies. Social Neuroscience, 4(1), 1–10.
Zebrowitz, L. A., & McDonald, S. M. (1991). The impact of litigants’ baby-facedness and attractiveness on
adjudications in small claims courts. Law & Human Behavior, 15(6), 603–623.
Zebrowitz, L. A., & Montepare, J. (2006). The ecological approach to person perception: Evolutionary roots andcontemporary offshoots. In. M. Schaller, J.A. Simpson, & D. T. Kendrick (Eds.), Evolution and social psychology (pp.
81-113). Madison, CT: Psychosocial Press.
Zhu, H. (2010). Group polarization on corporate boards: Theory and evidence on board decisions about acquisition
premiums, executive compensation, and diversification. (Doctoral dissertation). University of Michigan, Ann Arbor,
Michigan.

Zimbardo, P. (2015). Transforming society by teaching everyday people the characteristics of a modern
hero. Futurist, 49(1), 24-25

330Chapter 10 Defining Psychological Disorders
Learning Objectives
1. Define abnormal psychology.
2. List the criteria for a psychological disorder.
3. Describe the stigma of psychological disorders and their impact on those who are

diagnosed with them.
4. Describe the structure and function of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental
Disorders and its criticisms.
The focus of the next two chapters is, to many people, the heart of psychology. This emphasis on
abnormal psychology, which is the application of psychological science to understanding andtreating mental disorders, is appropriate, as more psychologists are involved in the diagnosis andtreatment of psychological disorder than in any other field (Lin, Stamm, & Christidis, 2018).
Assessment and treatment of disorders are probably the most important tasks psychologists face.
About 1 in every 5 American adults (or approximately 44.7 million) are affected by a psychologicaldisorder during any one year (National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH), 2017), and at least a halfbillion people are affected worldwide. The impact of mental illness is particularly strong on people
who are poorer, of lower socioeconomic class, and from disadvantaged ethnic groups.
People with psychological disorders are also stigmatized by the people around them, resulting in
shame and embarrassment, as well as prejudice and discrimination against them. Thus, theunderstanding and treatment of psychological disorder has broad implications for the everyday lifeof many people. Figure 10.1 shows the 2012 prevalence, or the frequency of occurrence of a given
condition in a population at a given time, of any mental illness in the United States based on
gender, age, and ethnicity for adults.
Figure 10.1 Prevalence Rates for Adults

331Children and adolescents also exhibit high levels of mental health disorders. Children 3-17 years ofage were identified as having the following disorders based on information collected between theyears 2005-2011 (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), 2018).
•

Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) (6.8%)•

Behavioral or conduct problems (3.5%)•

Anxiety (3.0%)•

Depression (2.1%)•

Autism spectrum disorder (1.1%)•

Tourette syndrome (0.2%) (among children aged 6–17 years)

Adolescents aged 12–17 years were identified as having a current diagnosis of•

Illicit drug use disorder in the past year (4.7%)•

Alcohol use disorder in the past year (4.2%)•

Cigarette dependence in the past month (2.8%)

It must be noted that psychological disorders frequently occur together. For instance, children andadults diagnosed with anxiety disorders also often have depressive disorders (Hunt, Slade, &Andrews, 2004). Comorbidity occurs when people who suffer from one disorder also suffer at thesame time from other disorders. Because many psychological disorders are comorbid, most severe
mental disorders are concentrated in a small group of people (about 6% of the population) who
have more than three serious diagnoses (Kessler, Chiu, Demler, & Walters, 2005).

Defining a DisorderAccording to the World Health Organization (2011), a psychological disorder is a clinicallyrecognizable set of symptoms or behaviours associated in most cases with distress and withinterference with personal functions. Disabilities include loss of the ability to function in an
important area of functioning, such as home, social settings, work, or school.
Psychological disorders have much in common with other medical disorders. They are often out ofthe patient’s control, they may in some cases be treated by drugs, and their treatment is often
covered by medical insurance. Like medical problems, psychological disorders have bothbiological (nature) as well as environmental (nurture) influences. These causal influences arereflected in the biopsychosocial model of mental disorders (Engel, 1977).
The biopsychosocial model of mental disorders is a way of understanding disorders that assumes
the disorder is caused by biological, psychological, and social factors (see Figure 10.2). The
biological component refers to the influences that come from the functioning of the individual’s
body. Particularly important are genetic characteristics, that make some people more vulnerable toa disorder than others, and the influence of neurotransmitters. The psychological component refers
to the influences that come from the individual, such as patterns of negative thinking and stressresponses. The social component refers to social and cultural factors, such as socioeconomic status,
homelessness, abuse, and discrimination.
332

Figure 10.2 The Biopsychosocial Model of Mental Disorders

The biopsychosocial model of disorders proposes that disorders are caused by biological, psychological, and socialcultural factors.

To consider one example, the psychological disorder of schizophrenia has a biological cause
because it is known that there are patterns of genes that make a person vulnerable to the disorder(Gejman, Sanders, & Duan, 2010). Whether the person with a biological vulnerability develops thedisorder depends, in large part, on psychological factors. These include how individuals respond to
the stress experienced, whether the stressful environment occurs in adolescence, and whether they
have support from people who care about them (Sawa & Snyder, 2002; Walker, Kestler, Bollini, &Hochman, 2004). Similarly, mood disorders are caused, in part, by genetic factors, such as
hormones and neurotransmitters, the individual’s thought patterns, and the ways that other people inthe social environment treat the person with the disorder. The biopsychosocial model will be used
as a framework for considering the causes and treatments of disorders.
Although they share many characteristics with medical conditions, psychological disorders arenevertheless different from them in important ways. For one, diagnosis of psychological disorders
can be more difficult. Although a medical doctor can see cancer in the lungs using an MRI scan orsee blocked arteries in the heart using cardiac catheterization, there is no corresponding test for a
psychological disorder. Current research is beginning to provide more evidence about the role ofbrain structures in psychological disorder, but for now the brains of people with severe mental
disturbances often look identical to those of people without such disturbances.

333

What Makes a Behavior “Abnormal”?
Deviance: Because there are no clear biological diagnoses for most mental disorders, psychologicaldisorders are instead diagnosed on the basis of clinical observations of the individual's behaviors.
These observations find that emotional states and behaviors operate on a continuum, ranging from
more “normal” and “accepted” to more “abnormal,” and “unaccepted.” Deviance refers to
behaviors that are outside the realm of societal expectations. The behaviors that are associated witha disorder are in many cases the same behaviors that we engage in our “normal” everyday life, butthey are at an extreme level that is not consistent with normal functioning. For example, washing
one’s hands is a normal healthy activity, but it can be overdone by those with an obsessivecompulsive disorder (OCD).
Dysfunction: Whether a given behavior is considered a
psychological disorder is determined not only by whether abehavior is deviant, but also by whether a behavior is
dysfunctional or maladaptive. Dysfunction refers to the extent
to which the behavior causes impairment in one or more
important areas of functioning. An intense fear of spiders, forexample, would not be considered a psychological disorderunless it has a significant negative impact on the individual’slife, for instance by causing him or her to be unable to stepoutside the house.
Distress: Lastly, distress refers to the behavior causing theindividual physical or emotional harm. Abusing substances,suicide attempts, and repeated bingeing and purging can cause
distress. The additional focus on distress and dysfunction meansthat behaviors that are simply unusual are not classified as
disorders. For example, less common cultural, religious or
sexual practices are not considered disorders if they do not causesignificant distress or dysfunction.

Figure 10.3 How Thin Is Too
Thin?

When does dieting turn into adisorder? Psychologists believe thishappens when the behavior becomes
distressing or dysfunctional to theperson. © Thinkstock

Combating the Stigma of Abnormal Behavior
Every culture and society has its own views on what constitutes abnormal behavior and whatcauses it (Brothwell, 1981). Ancient tradition attributed psychological disorders to sorcery andwitchcraft (Comer, 2015). During the Middle Ages, it was believed that mental illness occurred
when the body was infected by evil spirits, particularly the devil. Remedies included whipping,bloodletting, purges, and trepanation, which involved cutting a hole in the skull to release thedemons (see Figure 10.4).

334

Until the 18th century, the most common
Figure 10.4 Trepanation
treatment for the mentally ill was toincarcerate them in asylums or“madhouses.” During the 18th century,
however, some reformers began to oppose
this brutal treatment of the mentally ill,arguing that mental illness was a medical
problem that had nothing to do with evil
spirits or demons. In France, one of the key
reformers was Philippe Pinel (1745–1826),
who believed that mental illness wascaused by a combination of physical andpsychological stressors, exacerbated byinhumane conditions (Kring, Johnson,
Davison, & Neale, 2016). Pinel advocatedthe introduction of exercise, fresh air, anddaylight for the inmates, as well as treatingthem gently and talking with them. In
Trepanation (drilling holes in the skull) has been used since
America, the reformers Benjamin Rushprehistoric times in attempts to cure epilepsy and mental(1745–1813) and Dorothea Dix (1802–
disorders such as schizophrenia. Source: Courtesy of Peter1887) were instrumental in creating mental
Treveris
hospitals that treated patients humanely
and attempted to cure them if possible (Comer, 2015; Kring et al., 2016). These reformers saw
mental illness as an underlying psychological disorder, which was diagnosed according to its
symptoms and which could be cured through treatment.
Despite the progress made since the 1800s in public attitudes about those who suffer frompsychological disorders, people, including police, coworkers, and even friends and family
members, still stigmatize people with psychological disorders. A stigma refers to a disgrace ordefect that indicates that person belongs to a culturally devalued social group. In some cases, thestigma of mental illness is accompanied by disrespectful and dehumanizing labels, includingnames such as “crazy,” “nuts,” or “mental.” The mass media, including movies, television shows,and advertisements, have a significant influence on society’s negative attitudes toward mental
illness (Francis, Pirkis, Dunt, & Blood, 2001; Kring et al., 2016; Tartakovsky, 2009).
The stigma of mental disorder affects people while they are ill, while they are healing, and evenafter they have healed (Schefer, 2003). On a community level, stigma can affect the kinds ofservices social service agencies give to people with mental disorders, and the treatment provided tothem and their families by schools, workplaces, places of worship, and health-care providers.
Stigma about mental illness also leads to employment discrimination, despite the fact that withappropriate support, even people with severe psychological disorders are able to hold a job(Boardman, Grove, Perkins, & Shepherd, 2003; Leff & Warner, 2006; Ozawa & Yaeda, 2007;
Pulido, Diaz, & Ramirez, 2004).
The most significant problem of the stigmatization of those with psychological disorder is that it
slows their recovery. People with mental disorders internalize societal attitudes about mental
illness, often becoming so embarrassed or ashamed that they conceal their difficulties and fail to335

seek treatment. Stigma leads to lowered self-esteem, increased isolation, and hopelessness, and it
may negatively influence the individual’s family and professional life (Hayward & Bright, 1997).
Despite all of these challenges, however, many people overcome psychological disorders and go on
to lead productive lives. It is up to all of us who are informed about the causes of psychologicaldisorder and the impact of these conditions on people to understand, first, that mental illness is nota “fault” any more than is cancer. People do not choose to have a mental illness. Second, we must
all work to help overcome the stigma associated with disorder. Organizations such as the National
Alliance on Mental Illness (Greenstein, 2017), for example, work to reduce the negative impact ofstigma through education, community action, individual support, and other techniques.

Diagnosing Disorders: The DSM
Figure 10.5 DSM-5
The American Psychiatric Association publishes the Diagnostic
and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM) to help
therapists, researchers, drug companies, health insurancecompanies and policy makers in the United States determine
whether behavior should be considered a psychological disorder.
The DSM is a book that provides a common language andstandard criteria for the classification of mental disorders(American Psychiatric Association (APA), 2013).
The first edition of the DSM was published in 1952 on the basisof census data and psychiatric hospital statistics. Since then, theDSM has been revised six times. The fifth edition (DSM-5) was
published in May 2013. The DSM-5 was designed in conjunction
with the World Health Organization’s 11th version of theInternational Classification of Diseases (ICD-11) (APA, 2013).
The ICD-11 is used as a guide for mental disorders in Europe
and other parts of the world. The DSM-5 made a number ofsignificant changes from previous editions.

The Diagnostic and Statistical
Manual of Mental Disorders(DSM) is used to classify
psychological disorders in the
United States.

Each revision of the DSM takes into consideration new knowledge, as well as changes in cultural
norms about disorders. For example, homosexuality was listed as a mental disorder in the DSM
until 1973. It was removed in response to research that there was no more mental pathology amonghomosexuals than among heterosexuals (Hooker, 1957). The current DSM-5 lists more than 300
disorders.
The DSM-5 lists the symptoms that typically must be present to make a diagnosis, as well as,
clinical features, demographic data, and statistical information. The DSM–5 identifies specificcriteria that need to be met for diagnosis, and patients whose symptoms are similar to thedescription of the disorder are said to have that disorder. Within a diagnostic category, clinicians
may also rate severity. Relevant psychosocial or environmental factors may also be noted.

336

DSM Criticisms: The DSM has been criticized regarding the nature of its categorization system,
being based on weak research, lacking reliability and validity, and primarily focused on Western
illnesses (Comer, 2015). Consequently, it is frequently revised to attempt to address these
criticisms. Nevertheless, the DSM is a comprehensive, practical, and necessary tool that provides acommon language to describe disorders. Most U.S. insurance companies will not pay for therapy
unless the patient has a DSM diagnosis. The DSM approach allows a systematic assessment of thepatient’s medical condition, psychological and cultural factors, and the way the patient functions ineveryday life. The manual is also a useful tool for researchers who need to know they are labelingdisorders in the same way as other scientists.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•

•
•

More psychologists are involved in the diagnosis and treatment of psychological disorder thanin any other area, and those tasks are probably the most important psychologists face.
The impact on people with a psychological disorder comes both from the disease itself andfrom the stigma associated with disorder.
A psychological disorder is an ongoing pattern of thought, emotion, and behavior thatcauses significant distress or dysfunction and that is considered deviant in that person’s
culture or society.
According to the biopsychosocial model, psychological disorders have biological,
psychological, and social causes.
It is difficult to diagnose psychological disorders, although the DSM provides guidelines thatare based on a category system. The DSM is periodically revised, taking into consideration
new knowledge, as well as changes in cultural norms about disorders.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Do you or your friends hold stereotypes about the mentally ill? Can you think of orfind clips from any films or other popular media that portray mental illness
positively or negatively? Is it more or less acceptable to stereotype the mentally ill
than to stereotype other social groups?

Anxiety, OCD, and PTSD
Learning Objectives
1. Outline and describe the different types of anxiety disorders, including generalized

anxiety disorder, panic disorder, specific phobias, social phobia, and agoraphobia.
2. Discuss OCD and PTSD.
3. Explain the biological and environmental causes of anxiety disorders, OCD, and PTSD.

337

Anxiety, the nervousness or agitation that we sometimes experience, often about something that isgoing to happen, is a natural part of life. We all feel anxious at times, maybe when we think about
our upcoming visit to the dentist or the presentation we must give to our class next week. Anxiety
is an important and useful human emotion; it is associated with the activation of the sympathetic
nervous system and the physiological and behavioral responses that help protect us from danger.
However, too much anxiety can be distressing and disabling, and every year millions of people
suffer from anxiety disorders, which are psychological disturbances marked by irrational fears,
often of everyday objects and situations (Kessler et al., 2005).

Generalized Anxiety Disorder
For a few months now, I’ve had a really bad feeling inside of me. The best way to describe it is likea really bad feeling of negative inevitability, like something really bad is impending, but I don’tknow what. It’s like I’m on trial for murder or I’m just waiting to be sent down for something. I
have it all of the time but it gets worse in waves that come from nowhere with no apparent triggers.
I used to get it before going out for nights out with friends, and it kinda stopped me from doing it as
I’d rather not go out and stress about the feeling, but now I have it all the time so it doesn’t reallymake a difference anymore (Chase, 2010).
Chase is probably suffering from a generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), a psychologicaldisorder diagnosed in situations in which a person has been excessively worrying about money,
health, work, family life, or relationships for at least 6 months, even though he or she knows thatthe concerns are exaggerated, and when the anxiety causes significant distress and dysfunction(APA, 2013).
In addition to their feelings of anxiety, people who have GAD may also experience a variety ofphysical symptoms, including irritability, sleep troubles, difficulty concentrating, muscle aches,
trembling, perspiration, and hot flashes. The person cannot deal with what is causing the anxiety,nor avoid it, because there is no clear cause for anxiety. In fact, the preson frequently knows, atleast cognitively, that there is really nothing to worry about.
About 10 million Americans suffer from GAD, and about two thirds are women (Kessler et al.,2005; Robins & Regier, 1991). Generalized anxiety disorder is most likely to develop between theages of 7 and 40 years, but its influence may in some cases lessen with age (Rubio & Lopez-Ibor,
2007).

Panic Disorder
When I was about 30 I had my first panic attack. I was driving home, my three little girls were in
their car seats in the back, and all of a sudden, I couldn’t breathe, I broke out into a sweat, and myheart began racing and literally beating against my ribs! I thought I was going to die. I pulled off
the road and put my head on the wheel. I remember songs playing on the CD for about 15 minutes
and my kids’ voices singing along. I was sure I’d never see them again. And then, it passed. I
slowly got back on the road and drove home. I had no idea what it was (Ceejay, 2006).

338

Ceejay may be diagnosed with a panic disorder, a psychological disorder characterized by sudden
attacks of anxiety and terror, known as panic attacks, that have led to significant behavioral
changes in the person’s life. Symptoms of a panic attack include shortness of breath, heart
palpitations, trembling, dizziness, choking sensations, nausea, and an intense feeling of dread or
impending doom. Panic attacks can often be mistaken for heart attacks or other serious physicalillnesses, and they may lead the person experiencing them to go to a hospital emergency room.
Panic attacks may last as little as one or as much as 20 minutes, but they often peak and subside
within about 10 minutes.
Sufferers are often anxious because they fear that they will have another attack. They focus theirattention on the thoughts and images of their fears, becoming excessively sensitive to cues thatsignal the possibility of threat (MacLeod, Rutherford, Campbell, Ebsworthy, & Holker, 2002).
They may also become unsure of the source of their arousal, misattributing it to situations that are
not actually the cause. As a result, they may begin to avoid places where attacks have occurred in
the past, such as driving, using an elevator, or being in public places. Panic disorder affects about
2%-3% of the American population in a given year (APA, 2013).

PhobiasA phobia is a specific fear of a certain object, situation, orFigure 10.6
activity that adversely affects an individual’s functioning. The
condition generally lasts more than 6 months (APA, 2013).
The fear experience can range from a sense of unease to afull-blown panic attack. Most people learn to live with theirphobias, but for others the fear can be so debilitating that they
go to extremes to avoid the fearful situation. For example, aperson with arachnophobia (fear of spiders), may refuse toenter a room until it has been checked thoroughly for spiders,or may refuse to vacation in the countryside because spiders
may be there. Phobias are out of proportion to the real danger
Sourcein a situation, taking cultural factors into consideration. A
person with acrophobia (a fear of height) could fearlessly sail around the world on a sailboat withno concerns, yet refuse to go out onto the balcony on the fifth floor of a building.
Specific phobias are unreasonable fears of a clearly identified object or situation. Examples of
specific phobias include animals, blood, flying in a plane, or thunder and lightning. Treatments for
specific phobias are generally successful and will be discussed in the following chapter.
A common phobia is social phobia, also known as social anxiety disorder, which is an extreme
discomfort in social situations due to a fear of being negatively evaluated by others or humiliating
oneself. Social phobia may be specific to a certain event, such as speaking in public or using apublic restroom. People with social phobia will often experience physical symptoms in public, suchas sweating profusely, blushing, stuttering, nausea, and dizziness. They are convinced thateverybody around them notices these symptoms as they are occurring.
Agoraphobia is defined as anxiety about being in places or situations from which escape might bedifficult or in which help may not be available. Typical places that provoke this anxiety are parking339

lots, crowded streets or shops, bridges, tunnels, or expressways. The individual must experience
this anxiety in at least two situations and the condition must last more than 6 months. People(mostly women) who suffer from agoraphobia may have great difficulty leaving their homes andinteracting with other people.
All phobias affect about 9% of American adults, and they are about twice as prevalent in women as
in men (Fredrikson, Annas, Fischer, & Wik, 1996; Kessler, Meron-Ruscio, Shear, & Wittchen,2009). In most cases phobias first appear in childhood and adolescence, and usually persist into
adulthood. Table 10.1 presents a list of the most common phobias diagnosed by psychologists.
Table 10.1 The Most Common Phobias
Name

Description

Acrophobia

Fear of heights

Agoraphobia

Fear of situations in which escapeis difficult

Arachnophobia

Fear of spiders

Astraphobia

Fear of thunder and lightning

Claustrophobia

Fear of closed-in spaces

Cynophobia

Fear of dogs

Mysophobia

Fear of germs or dirt

Ophidiophobia

Fear of snakes

Pteromerhanophobia

Fear of flying

Social phobia

Fear of social situations

Trypanophobia

Fear of injections

Zoophobia

Fear of small animals

Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD)
I have got this obsessive-compulsive disorder where I have to have everything in a straight line or
everything has to be in pairs. I’ll put my Pepsi cans in the fridge and if there’s one too many thenI’ll put it in another cupboard somewhere. I’ve got that problem. I’ll go into a hotel room. Before I
can relax, I have to move all the leaflets and all the books and put them in a drawer. Everything
has to be perfect (Dave Beckham as reported in Dolan, 2006).
David Beckham’s experience with obsessive behavior is not unusual. We all get a little obsessive
at times. We may continuously replay a favorite song in our heads, worry about getting the rightoutfit for an upcoming party, or find ourselves analyzing a series of numbers that seem to have a340

certain pattern. Our everyday compulsions can be useful. Going back inside the house once more to
be sure that we really did turn off the sink faucet or checking the mirror a couple of times to be
sure that our hair is combed, are not necessarily bad ideas. However, when the checking behavior
becomes so persistent and time-consuming, it can then become a disorder.
Figure 10.7 David
Beckam and OCD

Obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) is a psychologicaldisorder that is diagnosed when an individual continuously
experiences distressing or frightening thoughts, and then engages
in repetitive behaviors. Obsessions are unwanted and distressing
repetitive thoughts and compulsions are the repetitive behaviorsdone as a way to reduce the anxiety caused by the obsession. OCD
is diagnosed when the obsessive thoughts are so disturbing and thecompulsive behaviors are so time consuming that they cause
distress or interfere with functioning in a person’s everyday life.
Washing your hands once or even twice to make sure that they areclean is normal; washing them 20 times is not. Keeping yourrefrigerator neat is a good idea; spending hours a day organizing it
is not. Those with OCD may know that these rituals are senseless,but they cannot bring themselves to stop them. One reason for therepetition is that the rituals reduce anxiety. This relief acts as areinforcer, making the behavior more likely to occur again.

The soccer star David Beckham
suffers from obsessivecompulsive disorder (OCD).
Source: Photo courtesy of Raj
Patel

Individuals with OCD may avoid certain places that trigger theobsessive thoughts, or use alcohol or drugs to try to calm
themselves down. In compariosn to anxiety disorders, OCD has alower prevalence rate (about 1% of the population in a given year)
and usually develops in adolescence or early adulthood (Horwath & Weissman, 2000; Samuels &Nestadt, 1997). The course of OCD varies from person to person. Also, symptoms can come andgo, decrease, or get worse with time. OCD is listed in the DSM-5 in the category of ObsessiveCompulsive and Related Disorders, and this category also includes hoarding disorder and body
dysmorphic disorder (APA, 2013).

Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
Jill, an Afghanistan war veteran, witnessed her fellow service members being hit by an improvised
explosive device (IED) while driving a combat supply truck. The members of her truck survived,
while those in the truck that hit the IED all died. Since returning home from Afghanistan, she has
become increasingly depressed and began using alcohol on a daily basis. She has had difficulties
in her employment, missing many days of work, and she reported feeling disconnected and numbaround her husband and children. Additionally, she has experienced nightly sleep problems andhas a recurring nightmare of all the images she experienced of the event. With no decrease in her
symptoms, she sought help from a clinician (American Psychological Association, 2017).
People with Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) feel stress and fear that cause distress andinterfere with their lives after having been exposed to a traumatic event. People who have survived
a terrible ordeal, such as combat, torture, sexual assault, imprisonment, abuse, natural disasters, or
witnessing the death of someone, may develop PTSD. PTSD comes under the category of Trauma341

and Stressor-Related Disorders in the DSM-5 (APA, 2013). PTSD may begin months or even years
after the event. People with PTSD experience flashbacks or high levels of anxiety or arousal alongwith re-experiencing the trauma, persistent negative alterations in mood or cognitions, and a strong
desire to avoid any reminders of the event. They may lose interest in things they used to enjoy,
startle easily, have difficulty feeling affection, and may experience terror, rage, depression, or
insomnia. Behavioral changes may include irritability, aggression, recklessness, and self-destructive
acts. The symptoms may be felt especially when approaching the area where the event took placeor when the anniversary of that event is near. Diagnostic thresholds are lower for children andadolescents.
PTSD affects about 5 million Americans, including victims of the 9/11 terrorist attacks, the wars in
Afghanistan and Iraq, hurricanes, fires and floods. Sixteen percent of Iraq war veterans, forexample, reported experiencing symptoms of PTSD (Hoge & Castro, 2006). PTSD is a frequent
outcome of childhood or adult sexual abuse. Women are more likely to develop PTSD than men(Davidson, 2000).
Risk factors for PTSD include the degree of the trauma’s severity, the lack of family andcommunity support, and additional life stressors (Brewin, Andrews, & Valentine, 2000). Many
people with PTSD also suffer from another mental disorder, particularly depression, anxiety
disorders, and substance abuse (Brady, Back, & Coffey, 2004).

Explaining Anxiety, OCD, and PTSD
Both nature and nurture contribute to the development of anxiety disorders. In terms of ourevolutionary experiences, humans have evolved to fear dangerous situations. Those of us who had ahealthy fear of the dark, of storms, of high places, of closed spaces, and of spiders and snakes weremore likely to survive and have descendants. Our evolutionary experience can account for somemodern fears as well. A fear of elevators may be a modern version of our fear of closed spaces,
while a fear of flying may be related to a fear of heights.
Also supporting the role of biology, anxiety disorders, OCD, and PTSD are heritable (Hettema,
Neale, & Kendler, 2001), and molecular genetics studies have found a variety of genes that areimportant in the expression of such disorders (Smoller et al., 2008; Thoeringer et al., 2009).
Neuroimaging studies have found that anxiety disorders are linked to areas of the brain that areassociated with emotion, blood pressure and heart rate, decision making, and action monitoring(Brown & McNiff, 2009; Damsa, Kosel, & Moussally, 2009). People who experience PTSD also
have a somewhat smaller hippocampus in comparison with those who do not, and this difference
may lead them to have a very strong sensitivity to traumatic events (Gilbertson et al., 2002).
Whether the genetic predisposition to anxiety becomes expressed as a disorder depends onenvironmental factors. People who were abused in childhood are more likely to be anxious thanthose who had normal childhoods, even with the same genetic disposition to anxiety sensitivity(Stein, Schork, & Gelernter, 2008), and PTSD is triggered by the experience of a major stressful
event. One problem is that modern life creates a lot of anxiety. Although our life expectancy andquality of life have improved over the past 50 years, the same period has also created a sharp
increase in anxiety levels (Twenge, 2006). These changes suggest that most anxiety disorders stemfrom perceived, rather than actual, threats to our well-being.
342

Anxiety, OCD, and PTSD are also learned through classical and operant conditioning. Just as ratsthat are shocked in their cages develop a chronic anxiety toward their laboratory environment,
which has become a conditioned stimulus for fear, rape victims may feel anxiety when passing by
the scene of the crime, and victims of PTSD may react to memories or reminders of the stressful
event. Classical conditioning may also be accompanied by stimulus generalization. A single dog
bite can lead to generalized fear of all dogs; a panic attack that follows an embarrassing moment in
one place may be generalized to a fear of all public places. People’s responses to their anxieties areoften reinforced. Behaviors become compulsive because they provide relief from the torment ofanxious thoughts. Similarly, leaving or avoiding fear-inducing stimuli leads to feelings of calmness
or relief, which reinforces phobic behavior.

Key Takeaways
•
•

•
•
•

•
•

Anxiety is a natural part of life, but too much anxiety can be debilitating. Every year
millions of people suffer from anxiety disorders.
People who suffer from generalized anxiety disorder experience chronic anxiety,while those who are identified with a panic disorder suffer from sudden attacks ofextreme anxiety that mimic a heart attack.
Phobias are specific fears of a certain object, situation, or activity.
Social phobia is discomfort in social situations in which the individual feels that they
will be negatively evaluated.
Obsessive-compulsive disorder is diagnosed when a person’s repetitive thoughts
are so disturbing and their compulsive behaviors so time consuming that theycause distress and significant disruption in a person’s everyday life.
People who have survived a terrible ordeal may develop PTSD.
Both nature and nurture contribute to the development of anxiety disorders, OCD, andPTSD.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Under what situations do you experience anxiety? Are these experiences rational or

irrational? Does the anxiety keep you from doing some things that you would like tobe able to do?
2. Do you or people you know suffer from phobias? If so, what are the phobias andhow do you think the phobias began? Do they seem more genetic or moreenvironmental in origin?

343

Depressive and Bipolar Disorders
Learning Objectives
1. Describe and differentiate the various disorders related to mood, in particular, major

depressive disorder, and bipolar disorder.
2. Explain the genetic and environmental factors that increase the likelihood that aperson will develop a disorder related to mood.
3. Discuss the risk factors for suicide.

The everyday variations in our feelings of happiness and sadness reflect our mood, which can be
defined as the positive or negative feelings that are in the background of our everyday experiences.
In most cases, we are in a relatively good mood, and this positive mood has some positive
consequences. It encourages us to do what needs to be done and to make the most of the situations
we are in (Isen, 2003). When we are in a good mood our thought processes open-up, and we are
more likely to approach others. We are more friendly and helpful to others when we are in a goodmood than we are when we are in a bad mood, and we may think more creatively (De Dreu, Baas,& Nijstad, 2008). On the other hand, when we are in a bad mood we are more likely to prefer to bealone rather than interact with others, we focus on the negative things around us, and our creativity
suffers.

Major Depressive Disorder
I didn’t want to face anyone; I didn’t want to talk to anyone. I didn’t really want to do anything formyself…I couldn’t sit down for a minute really to do anything that took deep concentration…It was
like I had big huge weights on my legs and I was trying to swim and just kept sinking. And I’d get alittle bit of air, just enough to survive and then I’d go back down again. It was just constantly,
constantly just fighting, fighting, fighting, fighting, fighting (NIMH, 2010b).
It is not unusual to feel “down” or “low” at times, particularly after a painful event such as thedeath of someone close to us, a disappointment at work, or an argument with a partner. We often
get depressed when we are tired, and many people report being particularly sad during the winterwhen the days are shorter. Depressive disorders are diagnosed when depressive symptoms cause
serious distress and negatively influence physical, perceptual, social, and cognitive processes.
The level of depression observed in people with depressive disorders varies widely. If thedepression is deep and lasts two or more weeks, the diagnosis may become that of major
depressive disorder. Major depressive disorder, also known as clinical depression, is a mental
disorder characterized by significant distress or impairment in important areas of function (APA,
2013). Those who suffer from major depressive disorder feel an intense sadness, despair, and lossof interest in pursuits that once gave them pleasure. These negative feelings profoundly limit theindividual’s day-to-day functioning and ability to maintain and develop interests in life (Fairchild& Scogin, 2008).

344

Depressive disorders can occur at any age, and the median age of
onset is 32 years (Kessler, Berglund, Demler, Jin, & Walters,2005). Recurrence of depressive episodes is fairly common andis greatest for those who first experience depression before theage of 15 years. About twice as many women suffer fromdepression than do men (Culbertson, 1997; Kessler et al., 2003;
Kessler et al., 2005). This gender difference is consistent across
many countries and cannot be explained entirely by the fact thatwomen are more likely to seek treatment for their depression.

Figure 10.8

It is not unusual to feel “down” or“low” at times, but about 10% of
the population suffers from
dysfunctional and distressing
disorders related to mood. ©
Thinkstock

About 21 million American adults suffer from a major
depressive disorder in any given year; this is approximately 7%of the American population and 1.5% suffer from chronic major
depressive disorder (APA, 2013). Rates of depression have been
increasing over the past years, although the reasons for this increase are not known (Kessler et al.,2003). In some, clinically depressed people lose contact with reality and experience delusions andhallucinations.

Behaviors Associated with Depression
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Changes in appetite; weight loss or gain
Difficulty concentrating, remembering details, and making decisions
Fatigue and decreased energy
Feelings of hopelessness, helplessness, and pessimism
Increased use of alcohol or drugs
Irritability, restlessness
Loss of interest in activities or hobbies once pleasurable, including sex
Loss of interest in personal appearance
Persistent aches or pains, headaches, cramps, or digestive problems that do not improvewith treatment
Sleep disorders, either trouble sleeping or excessive sleeping
Thoughts of suicide or attempts at suicide

Persistent Depressive Disorder
A significant change in the DSM-5 was the consolidation of chronic major depression anddysthymic disorder resulting in the classification of Persistent Depressive Disorder (APA,
2013). The essential feature of this disorder is a depressed mood that occurs for most days for atleast two years (one year for children or adolescents). If the full criteria for a major depressive
disorder occurs during the time of the disorder, the individual should be diagnosed with major
depressive disorder. Those identified with persistent depressive disorder describe their moods as“sad or down in the dumps” (APA, 2013, p. 169). These individuals are more likely todemonstrate comorbidity with other mental disorders, especially anxiety and substance use
disorders, than those identified with major depressive disorder (APA, 2013).

345

Suicide
The experience of depression can also have a variety of negative effects on our behaviors.
Individuals may become less productive and socially withdrawn. The person’s sense ofhopelessness and sadness may become so severe that he or she considers, attempts, or evensucceeds in committing suicide. Suicide is the 10th leading cause of death in the United States(American Foundation for Suicide Prevention (AFSP), 2018).
According to AFSP (2018), women are more likely to attempt suicide, but men are more likely to
succeed. One reason men are more likely to succeed is the method that they choose. Women
will more often take an overdose of medication, while men will choose a gun. European
Americans and Native Americans are more likely to kill themselves than members of othergroups in the U.S. White, middle-aged and older males are most likely to commit suicide.
Sometimes suicide in this group is related to a serious physical illness rather than depression. The
older male may not want to burden his family financially or emotionally during a prolonged
illness.
While the rate of suicide is low among young children, during adolescence the number ofattempts, including successful attempts, is higher. Suicide can result from the interaction ofmental disorders and other factors, and thus was the second leading cause of death among
adolescents aged 12–17 years in 2010 (CDC, 2018). About 2.8 percent of teenagers make an
attempt at suicide that is serious enough for medical attention to be sought (AFSP, 2018). Other
factors that also increase the likelihood of suicide include prior suicide attempt, family history ofmental disorder or substance abuse, family history of suicide, history of physical or sexual abuse,incarceration, or exposure to the suicidal behavior of others in general (NIMH, 2011).

Bipolar Disorders
Juliana is a 21-year-old single woman. Over the past several years she had been treated by apsychologist for depression, but for the past few months she had been feeling a lot better. Juliana
had landed a good job in a law office and found a steady boyfriend. She told her friends andparents that she had been feeling particularly good as her energy level was high and she wasconfident in herself and her life.
One day, Juliana was feeling so good that she impulsively quit her new job and left town with her
boyfriend on a road trip. But the trip did not turn out well because Juliana became impulsive,
impatient, and easily angered. Her euphoria continued, and in one of the towns that they visited
she left her boyfriend and went to a party with some strangers that she had met. She danced into
the early morning and ended up having sex with several of the men.
Eventually Juliana returned home to ask for money, but when her parents found out about her
recent behavior, and when she acted aggressively and abusively to them when they confronted
her about it, they referred her to a social worker. Juliana was hospitalized, where she wasdiagnosed with bipolar disorder.

346

While major depressive disorder is characterized by overwhelming negative moods, a bipolar
disorder is characterized by swings in mood and activity from overly high and energetic to sad
and fatigued, and back again, with periods of near-normal mood and energy in between. Bipolar
disorder is diagnosed in cases such as
Figure 10.9 Starry Night by Vincent van Gogh
Juliana’s, where experiences withdepression are followed by a more normal
period and then a period of mania or
euphoria in which the person feels
particularly awake, alive, talkative, excited,energetic, and involved in everyday
activities. However, the individual is also
impulsive, agitated, distracted, and involved
excessively in activities that have a highpotential for negative consequences, such as
buying sprees, gambling, sexual
indiscretions, and foolish business
investments (APA, 2013). Without
treatment, it is likely that Juliana would
Based on his intense bursts of artistic productivity (in one
cycle back into depression and then
2-month period in 1889 he produced 60 paintings),
personal writings, and behavior (including cutting off his
eventually into mania again, with theown ear), it is commonly thought that van Gogh suffered
likelihood that she would harm herself orfrom bipolar disorder. He committed suicide at age 37
others in the process.
(Thomas & Bracken, 2001).

Cyclothymic Disorder
Cyclothymic disorder is diagnosed for those individuals demonstrating numerous fluctuating
periods of hypomanic or persistently elevated, expansive or irritable mood, and depressive
symptoms, but these behaviors do not meet the criteria for a bipolar disorder (APA, 2013). Thesebehaviors should have been present for at least half the time during a two-year period (at least one
year for children and adolescents), and the individual has not been without the symptoms for morethan two months.
Bipolar disorders are often chronic and lifelong conditions. Although the normal pattern involves
swings from high to low, in some cases the person may experience both highs and lows at thesame time. In this case, it may be difficult to determine if the individual has bipolar disorder or
two separate diagnoses, anxiety and depression. Bipolar disorder is more likely to be diagnosed
when it is initially observed at an early age, when the frequency of depressive episodes is high,and when there is a sudden onset of the symptoms (Bowden, 2001).

Explaining Mood Disorders
Disorders related to mood are known to be at least, in part, genetic (Berrettini, 2006; Merikangas
et al., 2002). Neurotransmitters also play an important role in these disorders. Serotonin,
dopamine, and norepinephrine are all known to influence mood (Sher & Mann, 2003), and drugs
that influence the actions of these chemicals are often used to treat disorders of mood.
347

The brains of those with depressive disorders may, in some cases, show structural differencesfrom those without them. Videbech and Ravnkilde (2004) found that the hippocampus was
smaller in depressed subjects than in normal subjects, and this may be the result of reduced
neurogenesis or the process of generating new neurons in depressed people (Warner-Schmidt &Duman, 2006). Antidepressant drugs may alleviate depression in part by increasing
neurogenesis (Duman & Monteggia, 2006).

Box 10.1
Research Focus: Using Molecular Genetics to Unravel the Causes of Depression
Caspi and colleagues (Caspi et al., 2003) used a longitudinal study to test whether genetic
predispositions might lead some people, but not others, to suffer from depression as a result ofenvironmental stress. Their research focused on a particular gene, the 5-HTT gene, which is
known to be important in the production and use of the neurotransmitter serotonin. The
researchers focused on this gene because serotonin is known to be important in depression, andbecause selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) have been shown to be effective intreating depression.
People who experience stressful life events, for instance, those involving threat, loss, humiliation,
or defeat, are likely to experience depression. However, biological-situational models suggestthat a person’s sensitivity to stressful events depends on his or her genetic makeup. The
researchers, therefore, expected that people with one type of genetic pattern would show
depression following stress to a greater extent than people with a different type of genetic pattern.
The research included a sample of 1,037 adults from Dunedin, New Zealand. Genetic analysis on
the basis of DNA samples allowed the researchers to divide the sample into two groups on thebasis of the characteristics of their 5-HTT gene. One group had a short version (or allele) of thegene, whereas the other group did not have the short allele of the gene.
The participants also completed a measure where they indicated the number and severity ofstressful life events that they had experienced over the past 5 years. The events included
employment, financial, housing, health, and relationship stressors. The dependent measure in the
study was the level of depression reported by the participant, as assessed using a structured
interview test (Robins, Cottler, Bucholtz, & Compton, 1995).
As you can see in Figure 10.10, when the number of stressful experiences the participants
reported increased from 0 to 4, depression also significantly increased for the participants withthe short version of the gene (top panel). For the participants who did not have a short allele,increasing stress did not increase depression (bottom panel). Furthermore, for the participants
who experienced 4 stressors over the past 5 years, 33% of the participants who carried the shortversion of the gene became depressed, whereas only 17% of participants who did not have theshort version did.
This important study provides an excellent example of how genes and environment work
together: An individual’s response to environmental stress was influenced by his or her genetic
makeup.
348

Figure 10.10

Psychological and social determinants are also important in creating disorders of mood,including depression. Some situation, like loss of a loved one, may lead a person to become
overwhelmed by negative emotions. In terms of psychological characteristics, mood states are
influenced in large part by our cognitions. Negative thoughts about ourselves and ourrelationships to others create negative moods, and a goal of cognitive therapy for depressive
disorders is to attempt to change people’s cognitions to be more positive. Negative moods also
create negative behaviors toward others, such as acting sad, slouching, and avoiding others,
which may lead those others to respond negatively to the person, for instance by isolating that
person, which then creates even more depression. In Figure 10.11 you can see how it might
become difficult for people to break out of this “cycle of depression”.
According to the WHO (2017), in 2015 the depression rate for the global population wasapproximately 4.4%, with females (5.1%) exhibiting rates higher than males (3.6%). Results byregion indicated that Africa had the highest rates of depression (5.4%), while the Western Pacificregion had the lowest (3.6%). The United States’s rate of 5.9% was the second highest rate
behind Ukraine (6.3%) and the same as Australia and Estonia. Differences among countries may
be due to discrepancies between individual feelings and cultural expectations about what one
should feel. People from America report that it is important to experience emotions such as
happiness and excitement, whereas the Chinese report that it is more important to be stable and349

calm. Because Americans may feel that they are not happy or excited, but think they are supposed
to be, this may increase their depression (Tsai, Knutson, & Fung, 2006).
Figure 10.11 Cycle of Depression

Negative emotions create negative behavior which lead people to respondnegatively to the depressed individual, creating even more depression.

Key Takeaways
•
•

•
•
•

Mood is the positive or negative feelings that are in the background of oureveryday experiences.
We all may get depressed in our daily lives, but people who suffer from depressive
disorders tend to experience more intense, and particularly more intense negative,
moods.
If a depression lasts longer than 2 weeks and is severe, the diagnosis may be a major
depressive disorder.
Bipolar disorders are characterized by swings in mood and energy from overly high to sad
and fatigued, and back again, with periods of near-normal mood and energy in between.
Depressive disorders are caused by the interplay among biological, psychological, andsocial variables.

350

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Give a specific example of the negative cognitions, behaviors, and responses ofothers that might contribute to a cycle of depression like that shown in Figure
10.11 "Cycle of Depression.”
2. Given the discussion about the causes of negative moods and depression, what might
people do to feel better on days that they are experiencing negative moods?

Schizophrenia
Learning Objectives
1. Define schizophrenia
2. Categorize and describe the major symptoms of schizophrenia.
3. Identify the biological and social factors that increase the likelihood that a person willdevelop schizophrenia.
I first started to experience symptoms of schizophrenia in college. I started having a common
symptom of mental illness-grandiose thinking. I believed that I was going to discover somefabulous new mathematical principle that would transform the way we view the universe. I told
no one about these thoughts. I started looking for clues to this mathematical theory in mathbooks I found at the library. I actually learned very little about math though, because I couldn’t
focus on any of the material for any significant length of time. During my third year of college, I
developed other symptoms more loosely related to paranoid schizophrenia. Once, I saw a police
car behind me and I thought the police were following me. Later on, I cut my leg and decided to
go to the university medical clinic. While I was there, I started to feel very vulnerable. I
wondered if the nurses would try to hurt me in some way. I thought they might try to infect mewith the AIDS virus by using a tainted needle. I started to think I was under surveillance 24
hours a day by some unseen group of people. At one point I wondered whether my whole life was
manufactured by some type of virtual reality machine, operated by aliens (Snyder, 2007).
According to Ray (2018), the term schizophrenia, which in Greek means “to split the mind,” (p.
455) was first used to describe a psychological disorder by Eugen Bleuler (1857–1939), a Swiss
psychiatrist who was studying patients who had very severe thought disorders. Schizophrenia isa serious psychological disorder marked by delusions, hallucinations, loss of contact with reality,
inappropriate affect, disorganized speech, social withdrawal, and deterioration of adaptive
behavior (APA, 2013). When the patient has lost contact with reality, they are experiencing
psychosis.
Acording to the NIMH (2010c) schizophrenia is the most chronic and debilitating of all
psychological disorders. It affects males and females equally, although males typically have an
earlier onset. Schizophrenia occurs in similar rates across ethnicities and across cultures, andaffects at any one time approximately 3 million people in the United States. Onset of351

schizophrenia is usually between the ages of 16 and 30 and rarely after the age of 45 or inchildren (Mueser & McGurk, 2004; Nicholson et al., 2000). Late onset cases (over age 40) areoverrepresented by females, and characterized predominantly by psychotic symptoms andgreater preservation of affect and social functioning. Diagnosing children is more difficult
because delusions and hallucinations must be distinguished from normal fantasy play.
Further, disorganized speech and behavior can occur in many childhood disorders (APA,
2013).

Symptoms of Schizophrenia
Schizophrenia is accompanied by a variety of symptoms, but not all patients have all of them
(Lindenmayer & Khan, 2006). The symptoms are divided into positive symptoms, negative
symptoms, and cognitive symptoms (APA, 2003; National Institute of Mental Health, 2010c).
Positive symptoms: Positive symptoms referto the presence of abnormal behaviors orexperiences that are not observed in otherpeople. People with schizophrenia almost
always suffer from hallucinations, which are
imaginary sensations that occur in theabsence of a real stimulus or which are grossdistortions of a real stimulus.

Figure 10.12

Auditory hallucinations are the most common
and are reported by approximately 75% of
patients (Nicolson, Mayberg, Pennell, &Nemeroff, 2006). People with schizophrenia
People with schizophrenia may exhibit disorganizedfrequently report hearing imaginary voices
behavior, as this person does. Source: Photo courtesy of
Max Avdeev
that curse them, comment on their behavior,order them to do things, or warn them of
danger (NIMH, 2009). Visual hallucinations are less common and frequently involve seeing God
or the devil (De Sousa, 2007).
Those with schizophrenia also commonly experience delusions, which are false beliefs notcommonly shared by others within one’s culture, and maintained even though they are obviously
out of touch with reality. People with delusions of grandeur believe that they are important,famous, or powerful. They often become convinced that they are someone else, such as thepresident, or that they have some special talent or ability. Some claim to have been assigned to a
special covert mission (Buchanan & Carpenter, 2005). People with delusions of persecution
believe that a person or group seeks to harm them. They may think that people are able to readtheir minds and control their thoughts (Maher, 2001). If a person suffers from delusions ofpersecution, there is an increased risk of violence (Buchanan & Carpenter, 2005).
People suffering from schizophrenia also experience the positive symptom of derailment, or theshifting from one subject to another, without following any one line of thought to conclusion. In
addition, they may exhibit grossly disorganized behavior, including inappropriate sexual352

behavior, peculiar appearance and dress, unusual agitation (e.g., shouting and swearing), strange
body movements, and awkward facial expressions. It is also common for those withschizophrenia to experience inappropriate affect. For example, a patient may uncontrollably laughwhen hearing sad news. Movement disorders are also noted and can appear as repeating a certain
motion again and again, or random and frenzied motor activity during which they become
hyperactive and incoherent (Kirkpatrick & Tek, 2005). In other cases, a movement disorder can
include catatonia, a state in which a person does not move and appears oblivious to theenvironment (Janno, Holi, Tuisku, & Wahlbeck, 2004; Rosebush & Mazurek, 2010). At least oneof the core positive symptoms (hallucinations, delusions, derailment) must be present for
schizophrenia to be diagnosed.
Negative symptoms: Negative symptoms refer to the loss or deterioration of thoughts andbehavior of typical functioning. Negative symptoms include social withdrawal, poor hygiene andgrooming, poor problem-solving abilities, and a distorted sense of time (Skrabalo, 2000).
Patients often suffer from flat affect, which means that they have a blank facial expression andspeak in a monotone, even though they may report feeling emotions (Kring, 1999). Many
individuals with a long-standing history of schizophrenia exhibit a lack of speech output. Not all
those with schizophrenia exhibit negative symptoms, but those who do also tend to have thepoorest outcomes (Fenton & McGlashan, 1994). Negative symptoms are predictors ofdeteriorated functioning in everyday life, and often make it impossible for sufferers to work or tocare for themselves.
Cognitive Symptoms: Finally, cognitive symptoms are the changes in cognitive processes,
including comprehending information and then using it to make decisions (Skrabalo, 2000).
Additional symptoms include difficulty maintaining focus and attention, problems with working
memory, and trouble using information immediately after it is learned. The cognitive symptomsof schizophrenia are typically difficult for outsiders to recognize, but make it extremely difficult
for the person with schizophrenia to lead a normal life. Table 10.2 reviews the main symptoms ofschizophrenia.
Table 10.2 Positive, Negative, and Cognitive Symptoms of Schizophrenia
Positive Symptoms

Negative Symptoms

Cognitive Symptoms

Hallucinations

Social withdrawal

Poor executive control

DelusionsFlat affect and lack of pleasure in
everyday life

Trouble focusing

Derailment

Apathy and loss of motivation

Working memory problems

Grossly disorganized behavior

Distorted sense of time

Poor problem-solving abilities

Inappropriate affectLack of goal-oriented activity andlimited speech

Movement disorders

Poor hygiene and grooming

353

Explaining Schizophrenia
There is no single cause of schizophrenia. Rather, a variety of biological and environmental risk
factors interact in a complex way to increase the likelihood that someone might develop
schizophrenia (Walker, Kestler, Bollini, & Hochman, 2004).
Studies in molecular genetics have not yet identified the particular genes responsible forschizophrenia, but it is evident from research using family, twin, and adoption studies thatgenetics are important (Walker & Tessner, 2008). As you can see in Figure 10.13, the likelihoodof developing schizophrenia increases dramatically if a close relative also has the disease.
Figure 10.13 Genetic Disposition to Develop Schizophrenia

The risk of developing schizophrenia increases substantially if a person has a relative with the disease.
Adapted from Gottesman (1991).

Neuroimaging studies have found some differences in brain structure between schizophrenic andnormal patients. In some people with schizophrenia, the cerebral ventricles (fluid-filled spaces inthe brain) are enlarged (Suddath, Christison, Torrey, Casanova, & Weinberger, 1990). People
with schizophrenia also frequently show an overall loss of neurons in the cerebral cortex, andsome show less activity in the frontal and temporal lobes, which are the areas of the brain
involved in language, attention, and memory. This would explain the deterioration of functioningin language and thought processing that is commonly experienced by schizophrenic patients(Galderisi et al., 2008). Woods (1998) indicated that this loss of brain volume occurs suddenly
and rapidly. According to Carlson (2011) this loss coincides with a smaller decrease noted with
nonschizophrenic young adults and may be due to an increase in synaptic pruning that occurs
during this time.
Many researchers believe that schizophrenia is caused in part by excess dopamine, and thistheory is supported by the fact that most of the drugs useful in treating schizophrenia inhibit
dopamine activity in the brain (Javitt & Laruelle, 2006). Levels of serotonin may also play apart (Inayama et al., 1996). However, recent evidence suggests that the role of neurotransmittersin schizophrenia is more complicated than was once believed. It also remains unclear whether354

observed differences in the neurotransmitter systems of people with schizophrenia cause thedisease, or if they are the result of the disease itself or its treatment (Csernansky & Grace, 1998).
A genetic predisposition to developing schizophrenia does not always develop into the actual
disorder. Even if a person has an identical twin with schizophrenia, he still has less than a 50%
chance of getting it himself, and over 60% of all schizophrenic people have no first- or seconddegree relatives with schizophrenia (Gottesman & Erlenmeyer-Kimling, 2001; Riley & Kendler,
2005). This suggests that there are important environmental causes as well.
One hypothesis is that schizophrenia is caused in part by disruptions to normal brain
development in infancy that may be caused by poverty, malnutrition, and disease (Brown et al.,
2004; Murray & Bramon, 2005; Susser et al., 1996; Waddington, Lane, Larkin, O’Callaghan,1999). Stress also increases the likelihood that a person will develop schizophrenic symptoms;
onset and relapse of schizophrenia typically occur during periods of increased stress (Walker,
Mittal, & Tessner, 2008). However, it may be that people who develop schizophrenia are more
vulnerable to stress than others and not necessarily that they experience more stress than others(Walker, Mittal, & Tessner, 2008). For example, many homeless people are likely to besuffering from undiagnosed schizophrenia.
Another social factor that has been found to be important in schizophrenia is the degree to which
one or more of the patient’s relatives is highly critical or highly emotional in their attitude toward
the patient. Hooley and Hiller (1998) found that schizophrenic patients who ended a stay in a
hospital and returned to a family with high expressed emotion were three times more likely torelapse than patients who returned to a family with low expressed emotion. It may be that thefamilies with high expressed emotion are a source of stress to the patient.

Key Takeaways
•

•
•
•
•
•

Schizophrenia is a serious psychological disorder marked by delusions,hallucinations, and loss of contact with reality. Schizophrenia is accompanied by avariety of symptoms, but not all patients have all of them.
Because the schizophrenic patient has lost contact with reality, he or she isexperiencing psychosis.
Positive symptoms of schizophrenia include hallucinations, delusions, derailment,
disorganized behavior, inappropriate affect, and catatonia.
Negative symptoms of schizophrenia include social withdrawal, poor hygiene
and grooming, poor problem-solving abilities, and a distorted sense of time.
Cognitive symptoms of schizophrenia include difficulty comprehending and using
information, problems maintaining focus, and problems with working memory.
There is no single cause of schizophrenia. Rather, there are a variety of
biological and environmental risk factors that interact in a complex way toincrease the likelihood that someone might develop schizophrenia.

355

Exercise and Critical Thinking
1. How should society deal with people with schizophrenia? Is it better to keep patientsin psychiatric facilities against their will, but where they can be observed andsupported, or to allow them to live in the community, where they may get worse andhave problems functioning. What factors influence your opinion?

Personality Disorders
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the different types of personality disorders and differentiate antisocial

personality disorder from borderline personality disorder.
2. Outline the biological and environmental factors that may contribute to a person
developing a personality disorder.
A personality disorder is a disorder characterized by inflexible patterns of thinking, feeling, or
relating to others that cause problems in personal, social, and work situations. Personality
disorders tend to emerge during late childhood or adolescence and usually continue throughout
adulthood (Widiger, 2006). The disorders can be problematic for the people who have them, butthey are less likely to bring people to a therapist for treatment.
The personality disorders are summarized in Table 10.3. They are categorized into three types:• Characterized by odd or eccentric behavior• Characterized by dramatic or erratic behavior• Characterized by anxious or inhibited behavior.
As you consider the personality types described in Table 10.3, you will probably think of people
that you know who have each of these traits, at least to some degree. Probably you know
someone who seems a bit suspicious and paranoid, who feels that other people are always“ganging up on him,” and who really does not trust other people very much. Perhaps you know
someone who fits the bill of being overly dramatic, such as the “drama queen”, who is always
raising a stir and whose emotions seem to turn everything into a big deal. Also, you might have afriend who is overly dependent on others and cannot seem to get a life of her own.
The personality traits that make up the personality disorders are common. We see them in thepeople whom we interact with every day, yet they may become problematic when they are rigid,
overused, or interfere with everyday behavior (Lynam & Widiger, 2001). What is perhaps
common to all the disorders, is the person’s inability to accurately understand and be sensitive tothe motives and needs of the people around them.

356

Table 10.3 Descriptions of the Personality Disorders
Cluster

Personality Characteristics
DisorderOdd/Eccentric

Schizotypal

Peculiar or eccentric manners of speaking or dressing; strange beliefs ormagical thinking, such as belief in ESP or telepathy; difficulty forming
relationships and conversing.

Paranoid

Distrust in others, suspicious, and apt to challenge the loyalties of friends;
prone to anger and aggressive outbursts, but otherwise emotionally cold;
often jealous, guarded, secretive, and overly serious.

Schizoid

Extreme introversion and withdrawal from relationships; prefers to be alone,
little interest in others, humorless, distant, and often absorbed with own
thoughts and feelings.

Dramatic/Erratic Antisocial

Impoverished moral sense or “conscience”; history of deception, crimes, andlegal problems; impulsive, aggressive or violent behavior; little emotional
empathy or remorse; manipulative.

Borderline

Unstable moods and intense, stormy personal relationships, frequent moodchanges and anger; unpredictable impulses; self-mutilation or suicidal threats
or gestures; self-image fluctuation.

HistrionicConstant attention seeking, grandiose language, provocative dress,
exaggerated illnesses, overly dramatic, and excessively flirtatious.

Narcissistic

Inflated sense of self-importance, absorbed by fantasies of self andsuccess,exaggerates own achievement, and exploitative of others.

Avoidant

Socially anxious and uncomfortable; yearns for social contact, but fears
criticism and worries about being embarrassed in front of others; avoids
social situations due to fear of rejection.

Dependent

Submissive, dependent, requires excessive approval, reassurance, andadvice; clings to people and fears losing them; lacks self-confidence anduncomfortable when alone.

Obsessivecompulsive

Conscientious, orderly, perfectionist, and an excessive need to do
everything “right”; inflexibly high standards and fear of errors can makethis person strict and controlling; poor expression of emotions.

Anxious/Fearful**Obsessive compulsive personality disorder is not the same as obsessivecompulsive disorder.
Source: American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (5th ed.).
Washington, DC: Author.

357

The personality disorders create a bit of a problem for diagnosis. For one, it is frequently difficult
for the clinician to accurately diagnose which of the many personality disorders a person has,although the friends and colleagues of the person can generally do a good job of it (Oltmanns &Turkheimer, 2006). Further, the personality disorders are highly comorbid; if a person has one, it islikely that he or she has others as well. Also, the number of people with personality disorders is
estimated to be as high as 15% of the population (Grant et al., 2004), which might make us wonder
if these are really “disorders” in any real sense of the word.
Although they are considered as separate disorders, some clinicians believe the personality
disorders are essentially milder versions of more severe disorders (Huang et al., 2009). For
example, obsessive-compulsive personality disorder is a milder version of obsessive-compulsive
disorder (OCD), and schizoid and schizotypal personality disorders are characterized by symptoms
similar to those of schizophrenia. This overlap in classification causes some confusion, and sometheorists have argued that the personality disorders should be eliminated from the DSM. However,clinicians normally differentiate milder from more severe disorders, and thus the distinction isuseful for them (Krueger, 2005; Phillips, Yen, & Gunderson, 2003; Verheul, 2005).
Two personality disorders that have important implications for behavior, will be further discussed.
The first, borderline personality disorder (BPD), is important because it is so often associated withsuicide, and the second, antisocial personality disorder (APD), because it is the foundation of
criminal behavior. Borderline and antisocial personality disorders are also good examples toconsider because they are so clearly differentiated in terms of their focus. BPD is known as aninternalizing disorder because the behaviors that it entails are mostly directed toward the self
(e.g., suicide and self-mutilation). APD, on the other hand, is a type of externalizing disorder inwhich the problem behaviors focus primarily on harm to others (e.g., lying, fighting, vandalism,
and other criminal activity).

Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD)
Borderline personality disorder (BPD) is a psychological disorder characterized by a prolonged
disturbance of personality accompanied by mood swings, unstable personal relationships, identity
problems, threats of self-destructive behavior, fears of abandonment, and impulsivity. BPD is
widely diagnosed as up to 20% of psychiatric patients are given the diagnosis, and it may occur in
up to 2% of the general population (Hyman, 2002). About three-quarters of diagnosed cases of
BDP are women.
People with BPD fear being abandoned by others, show a clinging dependency on others, andengage in manipulation to try to maintain relationships. They become angry if a partner limits therelationship, but deny that they care about the person. As a defense against fear of abandonment,
those with BPD are compulsively social, but their behaviors, including intense anger, demands, andsuspiciousness, repel people. People with BPD often deal with stress by engaging in self-destructive
behaviors, such as, being sexually promiscuous, getting into fights, binge eating and purging,engaging in self-mutilation or drug abuse, and threatening suicide. These behaviors are designed tocall forth a “saving” response from the other person. People with BPD are a continuing burden forpolice, hospitals, and therapists. Individuals with BPD also show disturbance in their concepts ofidentity: They are often uncertain about self-image, gender identity, values, loyalties, and goals.
They may have chronic feelings of emptiness or boredom and be unable to tolerate being alone.
358

BPD has both genetic and environmental roots. In terms of genetics, research has found that thosewith BPD frequently have neurotransmitter imbalances (Zweig-Frank et al., 2006), and the disorderis heritable (Minzenberg, Poole, & Vinogradov, 2008). In terms of environment, many theories
about the causes of BPD focus on a disturbed early relationship between the child and his or her
parents. Some theories focus on the development of attachment in early childhood, while others
point to parents who fail to provide adequate attention to the child’s feelings. Others focus onparental abuse (both sexual and physical) in adolescence, as well as on divorce, alcoholism, andother stressors (Lobbestael & Arntz, 2009). The dangers of BPD are greater when they areassociated with childhood sexual abuse, early age of onset, substance abuse, and aggressive
behaviors. The problems are amplified when the diagnosis is comorbid, as it often is, with otherdisorders, such as substance related disorders, major depressive disorder, and PTSD (Skodol et al.,2002).

Box 10.2 Research Focus: Affective and Cognitive Deficits in BPD
Posner et al. (2003) hypothesized that the difficulty that individuals with BPD have in regulating
their lives, such as in developing meaningful relationships with other people, may be due toimbalances in the fast and slow emotional pathways in the brain. Specifically, they hypothesizedthat the fast emotional pathway through the amygdala is too active, and the slow cognitiveemotional pathway through the prefrontal cortex is not active enough in those with BPD.
The participants in their research were 16 patients with BPD and 14 healthy comparison
participants. All participants were tested in a functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI)
machine while they performed a task that required them to read emotional and nonemotional
words, and then press a button as quickly as possible whenever a word appeared in a normal fontand not press the button whenever the word appeared in an italicized font.
The researchers found that while all participants performed the task well, the patients with BPD
had more errors than the controls, both in terms of pressing the button when they should not haveand not pressing it when they should have. These errors primarily occurred on the negative
emotional words.
Figure 10.14 shows the comparison of the level of brain activity in the emotional centers in the
amygdala (left panel) and the prefrontal cortex (right panel). In comparison to the controls, theborderline patients showed relatively larger affective responses when they were attempting toquickly respond to the negative emotions, and showed less cognitive activity in the prefrontal
cortex in the same conditions. This research suggests that excessive affective reactions and lessened
cognitive reactions to emotional stimuli may contribute to the emotional and behavioral volatility ofborderline patients.

359

Figure 10.14

Individuals with BPD showed less cognitive and greater emotional brain activity in response to negative emotional
words. Source: Adapted from Posner et al. (2003).
.

Antisocial Personality Disorder (APD)
In contrast to borderline personality disorder, which involves primarily feelings of inadequacy anda fear of abandonment, antisocial personality disorder (APD) is a pervasive pattern of violationof the rights of others and a tendency to violate those rights without being concerned about doing
so. APD is about three times more likely to be diagnosed in men than in women. To be diagnosed
with APD, the person must be 18 years of age or older. People having antisocial personality
disorder are sometimes referred to as “sociopaths” or “psychopaths.”
People with APD feel little distress for the pain they cause others. They lie, engage in violenceagainst animals and people, and frequently have drug and alcohol abuse problems. They areegocentric and frequently impulsive, for instance suddenly changing jobs or relationships. People
with APD soon end up with a criminal record and often spend time incarcerated. The intensity ofantisocial symptoms tends to peak during the 20s and then may decrease over time.
Biological and environmental factors are both implicated in the development of antisocial
personality disorder (Rhee & Waldman, 2002). Twin and adoption studies suggest a genetic
predisposition (Rhee & Waldman, 2002), and biological abnormalities include low autonomic
activity during stress, biochemical imbalances, right hemisphere abnormalities, and reduced graymatter in the frontal lobes (Lyons-Ruth et al., 2007; Raine, Lencz, Bihrle, LaCasse, & Colletti,
2000). Environmental factors include neglectful and abusive parenting styles, such as the use ofharsh and inconsistent discipline and inappropriate modeling (Huesmann & Kirwil, 2007).

360

Key Takeaways
•

•
•
•

•

A personality disorder is a disorder characterized by inflexible patterns of thinking,feeling, or relating to others that causes problems in personal, social, and work
situations.
Personality disorders are categorized into three clusters: Those characterized by odd or
eccentric behavior, dramatic or erratic behavior, and anxious or inhibited behavior.
Although they are considered as separate disorders, the personality disorders are
essentially milder versions of more severe disorders.
Borderline personality disorder is a prolonged disturbance of personality accompanied
by mood swings, unstable personal relationships, and identity problems, and it is often
associated with suicide.
Antisocial personality disorder is characterized by a disregard of others’ rights and atendency to violate those rights without being concerned about doing so.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. What characteristics of men and women do you think make them more likely to have

APD and BDP, respectively? Do these differences seem to you to be more genetic ormore environmental?
2. Do you know people who suffer from antisocial personality disorder? What
behaviors do they engage in, and why are these behaviors so harmful to them andothers?

Disorders Originating in Childhood
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the characterisitcs of ADHD and autism.
2. Outline the biological and environmental factors that may contribute to a person
developing ADHD and autism.
Lastly, we will review two common disorders that originate in childhood: Attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and autism spectrum disorder (ASD). These two disorders
have recently raised concerns because they are being diagnosed significantly more frequently thanthey were in the past. Assessing children is more difficult than adults, and this difficulty contributes
to the controvery regarding the increased prevalence.

361

Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
Zack, aged 7 years, has always had trouble settling down. He is easily bored and distracted. In
school, he cannot stay in his seat for very long and he frequently does not follow instructions. He isconstantly fidgeting or staring into space. Zack has poor social skills and may overreact whensomeone accidentally bumps into him or uses one of his toys. At home, he chatters constantly andrarely settles down to do a quiet activity, such as reading a book.
Symptoms such as Zack’s are common among 7-year-olds, and particularly among boys, but what
do the symptoms mean? Does Zack simply have a lot of energy and a short attention span? Boys
mature more slowly than girls at this age, and perhaps Zack will catch up in the next few years.
One possibility is for the parents and teachers to work with Zack to help him be more attentive, to
put up with the behavior, and to wait it out. Another option Zack’s parents might choose, often on
the advice of the child’s school, is to take him to a psychologist for an assessment and diagnosis
when these behaviors occur.
If Zack were taken for testing today, it is very possible that he would be diagnosed with a
psychological disorder known as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). ADHD is abehavior disorder characterized by inattention and/or hyperactivity/impulsivity, in which symptoms
are present before 12 years of age (American Psychiatric Association, 2013). Although it isusually first diagnosed in childhood, ADHD can remain problematic in adults, and up to 7% ofcollege students are diagnosed with it (Weyandt & DuPaul, 2006). In adults, the symptoms of
ADHD include forgetfulness, difficulty paying attention to details, procrastination, disorganized
work habits, and not listening to others. ADHD is about 70% more likely to occur in males than infemales (Kessler et al., 2005), and is often comorbid with other disorders.
The diagnosis of ADHD has quadrupled over the past 20 years such that it is now diagnosed inabout 1 out of every 20 American children and it is the most common psychological disorderamong children in the world (Olfson, Gameroff, Marcus, & Jensen, 2003). ADHD is also being
diagnosed much more frequently in adolescents and adults (Barkley, 1998). You might wonder
what this all means. Are the increases in the diagnosis of ADHD due to the fact that today’schildren and adolescents are actually more distracted and hyperactive than their parents were, due
to a greater awareness of ADHD among teachers and parents, or due to psychologists andpsychiatrists’ tendency to overdiagnose the problem? Perhaps drug companies are also involved,
because ADHD is often treated with prescription medications, including stimulants, such as Ritalin.
Although skeptics argue that ADHD is overdiagnosed and is a handy excuse for behavioral
problems, most psychologists believe that ADHD is a real disorder that is caused by a combinationof genetic and environmental factors. Twin studies have found that ADHD is heritable (National
Institute of Mental Health, 2010a), and neuroimaging studies have found that people with ADHD
may have structural differences in areas of the brain that influence self-control and attention(Seidman, Valera, & Makris, 2005). Other studies have also pointed to environmental factors, suchas mothers’ smoking and drinking alcohol during pregnancy, and the consumption of lead and foodadditives by those who are affected (Braun, Kahn, Froehlich, Auinger, & Lanphear, 2006; Linnet etal., 2003; McCann et al., 2007). Social factors, such as family stress and poverty, also contribute to
ADHD (Burt, Krueger, McGue, & Iacono, 2001).

362

Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD)
Jared’s kindergarten teacher has voiced her concern to Jared’s parents about his difficulties withinteracting with other children and his delay in developing normal language. Jared is unable tomaintain eye contact and avoids mixing with other children. He also cannot communicate withpeople very well. He often responds to questions or comments with long-winded, immature speeches
about trucks or some other topic that interests him, and he seems to lack awareness of otherchildren’s wishes and needs.
Jared’s concerned parents took him to a multidisciplinary child development center for
consultation. Here he was tested by a pediatric neurologist and a child psychologist. The pediatricneurologist found that Jared’s hearing was normal, and there were no signs of any neurologicaldisorder. He diagnosed Jared with an intellectual disability because his language skills and adaptivefunctioning were not age appropriate.
Based on her observation of Jared’s difficulty interacting with his peers, and the fact that he did not
respond warmly to his parents, the psychologist diagnosed Jared with autism spectrum disorder(ASD) or autism, a disorder of neural development characterized by impaired social interaction
and communication and by restricted repetitive behaviors, interests, and activities (RRBs). If RRB’s
are not present, a social communication disorder is diagnosed. The psychologist believed that theautism diagnosis was correct because, like other children with autism, Jared has a poorly developedability to see the world from the perspective of others; engages in unusual behaviors, such as
talking about trucks for hours; and responds to stimuli, such as the sound of a car or an airplane, in
unusual ways. According to the DSM-5 (APA, 2013), Jared would most probably receive adiagnosis of autism spectrum disorder, with accompanying intellectual impairment as a specifier.
The number of children diagnosed with an atism spectrum disorder is increasing dramatically. The
most recent comprehensive report on the prevalence of autism in the United States indicated that in2014, 1 in 59 children (1.7%) aged 8 years was identified with autism (Baio et al., 2018). Males
were four times more likely than females to be identified with ASD, and prevalence estimates werehigher for non-Hispanic white children compared with non-Hispanic black children, and bothgroups were more likely to be identified with ASD than Hispanic children. This information was
obtained from The Autism and Developmental Disabilities Monitoring (ADDM) Network, whichassesses 11 ADDM sites in the United States.
For many years autism was thought to be primarily a socially determined disorder, in which
parents who were cold, distant, and rejecting created the problem, but current research suggeststhat biological factors are most important. The heritability of autism has been established (Freitag,2007), and scientists speculate that autism is caused by an unknown genetically determined brain
abnormality that occurs early in development. Epigenetic factors, such as prenatal exposure toviruses, may be responsible for turning on or off the genes that cause this disorder, resulting in thedramatic increase in the number of children currently affected. It is likely that several different
brain sites are affected (Moldin, 2003), and the search for these areas is being conducted in many
scientific laboratories. For example, a lack of synaptic pruning has been theorized as one cause.
Neuroscientists at Columbia University Medical Center reported that children with autism have an
excess amount of brain synapses due to a slowing down in the normal “pruning” process during
development (Tang et al., 2014). Because synapses are the points where neurons connect and363

communicate with each other, the excessive synapses affect how the brain functions. Paternal age
at conception has also been identified in an autism diagnosis due to the accumulation of mutations
that occur overtime in sperm (Janecka et al., 2017).

Key Takeaways••••

ADHD is a behavior disorder characterized by inattention, hyperactivity,and impulsivity that occurs prior to 12 years of age.
Autism is a disorder characterized by impaired social interaction and communication
and by restricted repetitive behaviors, interests, and activities.
Both genetic and prenatal factors are hypothesized to cause ADHD and autism.
There is controversy regarding the overdiagnosis of both ADHD and autism.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Consider the diagnoses of ADHD and autism from the biological, personal and socialcultural perspectives. Do you think that these disorders are overdiagnosed? How
might clinicians determine if ADHD and autism are distressing to the individual?

Videos
1. This video course, titled The World of Abnormal Psychology, provides additional
information about many specific disorders, including some not covered in this chapter.
In addition, you will see interviews with patients, scenes from treatment facilities,
demonstrations from research studies, and discussions by mental health professionals.
Thirteen one-hour programs can be viewed for free.
http://www.learner.org/resources/series60.html These videos are based on an earlier
version of the DSM.

364

Chapter Summary
Abnormal psychology is defined as the application of psychological science to understanding andtreating mental disorders.
More psychologists are involved in the diagnosis and treatment of psychological disorder than in
any other aspect of psychology.
About 1 in every 5 Americans (approximately 44.7 million people) are estimated to be affected by apsychological disorder during any one year. The impact of mental illness is particularly strong on
people who are poorer, of lower socioeconomic class, and from disadvantaged ethnic groups.
The biopsychosocial model of mental disorders is used to explain the causes of mental illness.
A psychological disorder is a deviant, distressing, and dysfunctional pattern of thought, emotion, or
behavior. Psychological disorders are often comorbid, meaning that a given person suffers from
more than one disorder.
The stigma of mental disorders affects people while they are ill, while they are healing, and evenafter they have healed. Mental illness is not a “fault,” and it is important to work to help overcome
the stigma associated with disorder.
Psychologists diagnose disorders using the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders(DSM). The DSM uses categories, and patients with close approximations to the characteristics inthe category are said to have that disorder. The current version is the DSM-5
Anxiety disorders are psychological disturbances marked by irrational fears, often of everyday
objects and situations. They include generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), panic disorder, andphobias. Anxiety disorders affect about 9% of American adults every year.
Obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) and posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) are otherdisorders in which anxiety is a major symptom.
Major depressive disorder, persistent depressive disorder, bipolar disorder, and cyclothymia also
involve inappropriate moods that interfere with daily life. The cycle of depression involves negative
cognitions, leading to negative emotions, leading to negative behaviors towards others that
ultimately lead to negative responses from others that keep the negative cognitions active.
Schizophrenia is a serious psychological disorder marked by delusions, hallucinations, loss ofcontact with reality, inappropriate affect, disorganized speech, social withdrawal, and deteriorationof adaptive behavior. About 3 million Americans have schizophrenia.
A personality disorder is a long-lasting, but frequently less severe disorder, characterized byinflexible patterns of thinking, feeling, or relating to others that causes problems in personal,social, and work situations. They are characterized by odd or eccentric behavior, by dramatic or
erratic behavior, or by anxious or inhibited behavior. Two of the most important personality
disorders are borderline personality disorder (BPD) and antisocial personality disorder (APD).
365

Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and autistic spectrum disorder are two disorders
identified in childhood. They are both being diagnosed significantly more frequently than they
were in the past.

References
American Foundation for Suicide Prevention. (2018). About suicide: Facts and figures. National statistics. Retrieved
from https://afsp.org/our-work/education/talk-saves-lives-introduction-suicide-prevention/
American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (5th ed.). Washington,
DC: Author.
American Psychological Association. (2017). PTSD treatments. Retrieved from http://www.apa.org/ptsdguideline/treatments/index.aspx
Baio, J., Wiggins, L., Christensen, D. L., Maenner, M. J., Daniels, J., Warren, Z……Dowling, N. (2018). Prevalenceof autism spectrum disorder among children aged 8 Years—Autism and Developmental Disabilities Monitoring
Network, 11 Sites, United States, 2014. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 67(SS-6), 1-23.
doi:10.15585/mmwr.ss6706a1
Barkley, R. A. (1998). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder: A handbook for diagnosis and treatment (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Guilford Press.
Berrettini, W. (2006). Genetics of bipolar and unipolar disorders. In D. J. Stein, D. J. Kupfer, & A. F. Schatzberg (Eds.),
Textbook of mood disorders. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
Boardman, J., Grove, B., Perkins, R., & Shepherd, G. (2003). Work and employment for people with psychiatricdisabilities. British Journal of Psychiatry, 182(6), 467–468. doi:10.1192/bjp.182.6.467.
Bowden, C. L. (2001). Strategies to reduce misdiagnosis of bipolar depression. Psychiatric Services, 52(1), 51–55.
Brady, K. T., Back, S. E., & Coffey, S. F. (2004). Substance abuse and posttraumatic stress disorder. Current
Directions in Psychological Science, 13(5), 206–209.
Braun, J., Kahn, R., Froehlich, T., Auinger, P., & Lanphear, B. (2006). Exposures to environmental toxicants andattention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in U.S. children. Environmental Health Perspectives, 114(12), 1904–1909.
Brewin, C., Andrews, B., & Valentine, J. (2000). Meta-analysis of risk factors for posttraumatic stress disorder intrauma-exposed adults. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 68(5), 748–766. doi:10.1037//0022006X.68.5.748
Brothwell, D. (1981). Digging up bones: The excavation, treatment, and study of human skeletal remains. Ithaca, NY:
Cornell University Press.
Brown, A. S., Begg, M. D., Gravenstein, S., Schaefer, C. S., Wyatt, R. J., Bresnahan, M.,…Susser, E. S. (2004).
Serologic evidence of prenatal influenza in the etiology of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry, 61, 774–780.
Brown, T., & McNiff, J. (2009). Specificity of autonomic arousal to DSM-IV panic disorder and Posttraumatic stressdisorder. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 47(6), 487–493. doi:10.1016/j.brat.2009.02.016;

366

Buchanan, R. W., & Carpenter, W. T. (2005). Concept of schizophrenia. In B. J. Sadock & V. A. Sadock (Eds.),
Kaplan & Sadock’s comprehensive textbook of psychiatry. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Burt, S. A., Krueger, R. F., McGue, M., & Iacono, W. G. (2001). Sources of covariation among attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder, oppositional defiant disorder, and conduct disorder: The importance of sharedenvironment. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 110(4), 516–525.
Carlson, N. R. (2011). Foundations of behavioral neuroscience (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson Education.
Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., Harrington, H.,…Poulton, R. (2003). Influence of life
stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene. Science, 301(5631), 386–389.
Ceejay. (2006, September). My dance with panic [Web log post]. Panic Survivor. Retrieved fromhttp://www.panicsurvivor.com/index.php/2007102366/Survivor-Stories/My-Dance-With-Panic.html
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (2018). Mental health of children aged 3 – 17 years. Retrieved fromhttps://www.cdc.gov/childrensmentalhealth/data.html
Chase. (2010, February 28). Re: “anxiety?” [Online forum comment]. Mental Health Forum. Retrieved fromhttp://www.mentalhealthforum.net/forum/showthread.php?t=9359
Comer, R. J. (2015). Abnormal psychology (9th ed.). NY: Worth Publishers.
Csernansky, J. G., & Grace, A. A. (1998). New models of the pathophysiology of schizophrenia: Editors’ introduction.
Schizophrenia Bulletin, 24(2), 185–187.
Culbertson, F. M. (1997). Depression and gender: An international review. American Psychologist, 52, 25–31.
Damsa, C., Kosel, M., & Moussally, J. (2009). Current status of brain imaging in anxiety disorders. Current Opinion in
Psychiatry, 22(1), 96–110. doi:10.1097/YCO.0b013e328319bd10
Davidson, J. (2000). Trauma: The impact of post-traumatic stress disorder. Journal of Psychopharmacology,14(2 Suppl1), S5–S12.
De Dreu, C. K. W., Baas, M., & Nijstad, B. A. (2008). Hedonic tone and activation level in the mood-creativity link:
Toward a dual pathway to creativity model. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 94(5), 739–756.
De Sousa, A. (2007). Types and contents of hallucinations in schizophrenia. Journal of Pakistan PsychiatricSociety,4(1), 29.
Dolan, A. (2006, April 3). The obsessive disorder that haunts my life. Daily Mail. Retrieved fromhttp://www.dailymail.co.uk/tvshowbiz/article-381802/The-obsessive-disorder-haunts-life.html
Duman, R. S., & Monteggia, L. M. (2006). A neurotrophic model for stress-related mood disorders. BiologicalPsychiatry, 59, 1116–1127.
Engel, G. (1977). The need for a new medical model: A challenge for biomedicine. Science, 196(4286), 129.
doi:10.1126/science.847460
Fairchild, K., & Scogin, F. (2008). Assessment and treatment of depression. In K. Laidlow & B. Knight (Eds.),
Handbook of emotional disorders in later life: Assessment and treatment. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Fenton, W. S., & McGlashan, T. H. (1994). Antecedents, symptom progression, and long-term outcome of the deficit
syndrome in schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 351–356.
Francis, C., Pirkis, J., Dunt, D., & Blood, R. (2001). Mental health and illness in the media: A review of the literature.
Canberra, Australia: Commonwealth Department of Health & Aged Care.

367

Fredrikson, M., Annas, P., Fischer, H., & Wik, G. (1996). Gender and age differences in the prevalence of specific fears
and phobias. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 34(1), 33–39. doi:10.1016/0005-7967(95)00048-3
Freitag C. M. (2007). The genetics of autistic disorders and its clinical relevance: A review of the literature. MolecularPsychiatry, 12(1), 2–22.
Galderisi, S., Quarantelli, M., Volper, U., Mucci, A., Cassano, G. B., Invernizzi, G.,…Maj, M. (2008). Patterns ofstructural MRI abnormalities in deficit and nondeficit schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 34, 393–401.
Gejman, P., Sanders, A., & Duan, J. (2010). The role of genetics in the etiology of schizophrenia. Psychiatric Clinics ofNorth America, 33(1), 35–66. doi:10.1016/j.psc.2009.12.003
Gilbertson, M. W., Shenton, M. E., Ciszewski, A., Kasai, K., Lasko, N. B., Orr, S. P.,…Pitman, R. K. (2002). Smaller
hippocampal volume predicts pathologic vulnerability to psychological trauma. Nature Neuroscience, 5(11), 1242.
Gonsiorek, J. (1982). Homosexuality & psychotherapy: a practitioner's handbook of affirmative models. New York, NY:
Haworth Press.
Gottesman, I. I. (1991). Schizophrenia genesis: The origins of madness. New York, NY: W. H. Freeman.
Gottesman, I. I., & Erlenmeyer-Kimling, L. (2001). Family and twin studies as a head start in defining prodomes andendophenotypes for hypothetical early interventions in schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Research, 5(1), 93–102.
Gould, M. (2007, October 10). You can teach a man to kill but not to see dying. The Guardian. Retrieved fromhttp://www.guardian.co.uk/society/2007/oct/10/guardiansocietysupplement.socialcare2
Grant, B., Hasin, D., Stinson, F., Dawson, D., Chou, S., Ruan, W., & Pickering, R. P. (2004). Prevalence, correlates, anddisability of personality disorders in the United States: Results from the national epidemiologic survey on alcohol andrelated conditions. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 65(7), 948–958.
Greenstein, L. (2017). 9 ways to fight mental health stigma. Retrieved from https://www.nami.org/Blogs/NAMIBlog/October-2015/9-Ways-to-Fight-Mental-Health-Stigma
Hayward, P., & Bright, J. (1997). Stigma and mental illness: A review and critique. Journal of Mental Health, 6(4), 345–
354.
Hettema, J. M., Neale, M. C., & Kendler, K. S. (2001). A review and meta-analysis of the genetic epidemiology ofanxiety disorders. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 158(10), 1568–1578.
Hoge, C., & Castro, C. (2006). Posttraumatic stress disorder in UK and U.S. forces deployed to Iraq. Lancet, 368, 867.
Hooker, E. (1957). The adjustment of the male overt homosexual. Journal of Projective Techniques, 21, 18-31.
Hooley, J. M., & Hiller, J. B. (1998). Expressed emotion and the pathogenesis of relapse in schizophrenia. In M. F.
Lenzenweger & R. H. Dworkin (Eds.), Origins and development of schizophrenia: Advances in experimental
psychopathology (pp. 447–468). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Horwath, E., & Weissman, M. (2000). The epidemiology and cross-national presentation of obsessive-compulsive
disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 23(3), 493–507. doi:10.1016/S0193-953X(05)70176-3.
Huang, Y., Kotov, R., de Girolamo, G., Preti, A., Angermeyer, M., Benjet, C.…Kessler, R. C. (2009). DSM-IV
personality disorders in the WHO World Mental Health Surveys. British Journal of Psychiatry, 195(1), 46–53.
doi:10.1192/bjp.bp.108.058552

368

Huesmann, L. R., & Kirwil, L. (2007). Why observing violence increases the risk of violent behavior by the observer. In
D. J. Flannery, A. T. Vazsonyi, & I. D. Waldman (Eds.), The Cambridge handbook of violent behavior and aggression(pp. 545–570). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Hunt, C., Slade, T., & Andrews, G. (2004). Generalized anxiety disorder and major depressive disorder comorbidity in
the National Survey of Mental Health and Well Being. Depression and Anxiety, 20, 23–31.
Hyman, S. E. (2002). A new beginning for research on borderline personality disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 51(12),933–935.
Inayama, Y., Yoneda, H., Sakai, T., Ishida, T., Nonomura, Y., Kono, Y.,…Asaba, H. (1996). Positive association
between a DNA sequence variant in the serotonin 2A receptor gene and schizophrenia. American Journal of Medical
Genetics, 67(1), 103–105.
Isen, A. M. (2003). Positive affect as a source of human strength. In J. Aspinall, A psychology of human strengths:
Fundamental questions and future directions for a positive psychology (pp. 179–195). Washington, DC: American
Psychological Association.
Janecka, M., Mill, J., Basson, M. A., Goriely, A., Spiers, H., Reichenberg, A., … Fernandes, C. (2017). Advanced
paternal age effects in neurodevelopmental disorders—review of potential underlying mechanisms. Translational
Psychiatry, 7(1), e1019–. http://doi.org/10.1038/tp.2016.294
Janno, S., Holi, M., Tuisku, K., & Wahlbeck, K. (2004). Prevalence of neuroleptic-induced movement disorders inchronic schizophrenia patients. American Journal of Psychiatry, 161, 160–163.
Javitt, D. C., & Laruelle, M. (2006). Neurochemical theories. In J. A. Lieberman, T. S. Stroup, & D. O. Perkins (Eds.),
Textbook of schizophrenia (pp. 85–116). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
Kessler, R. C., Berglund, P., Demler, O, Jin, R., Koretz, D., Merikangas, K. R.,…Wang, P. S. (2003). The
epidemiology of major depressive disorder: Results from the National Comorbidity Survey Replication (NCS-R).
Journal of the American Medical Association, 289(23), 3095–3105.
Kessler, R. C., Berglund, P. A., Demler, O., Jin, R., & Walters, E. E. (2005). Lifetime prevalence and age-of-onset
distributions of DSM-IV disorders in the National Comorbidity Survey Replication (NCS-R). Archives of General
Psychiatry, 62(6), 593–602.
Kessler, R. C., Chiu, W. T., Demler, O., & Walters, E. E. (2005). Prevalence, severity, and comorbidity of 12-month
DSM-IV disorders in the National Comorbidity Survey Replication. Archives of General Psychiatry, 62(6), 617–27.
Kessler, R., Meron-Ruscio, A., Shear, K., & Wittchen, H. (2009). Epidemiology of anxiety disorders. In M. Anthony, &M. Stein (Eds). Oxford handbook of anxiety and related disorders. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Kirkpatrick, B., & Tek, C. (2005). Schizophrenia: Clinical features and psychological disorder concepts. In B.
J. Sadock & S. V. Sadock (Eds.), Kaplan & Sadock’s comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (pp. 1416–1435).
Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Kring, A. M. (1999). Emotion in schizophrenia: Old mystery, new understanding. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 8, 160–163.
Kring, A. M., Johnson, S. L., Davidson. G., & Neale, J. (2016). Abnormal psychology: The science and treatment of
psychological disorders (13th ed.). Hoboken, NJ; Wiley.
Krueger, R. F. (2005). Continuity of Axes I and II: Towards a unified model of personality, personality disorders, andclinical disorders. Journal of Personality Disorders, 19, 233–261.
Leff, J., & Warner, R. (2006). Social inclusion of people with mental illness. NY: Cambridge University Press.

369

Lin, L., Stamm, K., & Christidis, P. (2018). What jobs do psychology degree holders have? Monitor on Psychology,
49(5), 19.
Lindenmayer, J. P., & Khan, A. (2006). Psychological disorder. In J. A. Lieberman, T. S. Stroup, & D. O. Perkins (Eds.),
Textbook of schizophrenia (pp. 187–222). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
Linnet K., Dalsgaard, S., Obel, C., Wisborg, K., Henriksen T., Rodriguez, A.,…Jarvelin, M. (2003). Maternal lifestylefactors in pregnancy risk of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder and associated behaviors: Review of the current
evidence. American Journal of Psychiatry, 160(6), 1028–1040;
Lobbestael, J., & Arntz, A. (2009). Emotional, cognitive and physiological correlates of abuse-related stress inborderline and antisocial personality disorder. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 48(2), 116–124.
doi:10.1016/j.brat.2009.09.015
Lynam, D., & Widiger, T. (2001). Using the five-factor model to represent the DSM-IV personality disorders: An expert
consensus approach. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 110(3), 401–412.
Lyons-Ruth, K., Holmes, B. M., Sasvari-Szekely, M., Ronai, Z., Nemoda, Z., & Pauls, D. (2007). Serotonin transporter
polymorphism and borderline or antisocial traits among low-income young adults. Psychiatric Genetics, 17, 339–343.
MacLeod, C., Rutherford, E., Campbell, L., Ebsworthy, G., & Holker, L. (2002). Selective attention and emotional
vulnerability: Assessing the causal basis of their association through the experimental manipulation of attentional bias.
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 111(1), 107–123.
McCann, D., Barrett, A., Cooper, A., Crumpler, D., Dalen, L., Grimshaw, K.,…Stevenson, J. (2007). Food additives andhyperactive behaviour in 3-year-old and 8/9-year-old children in the community: A randomized, double-blinded,
placebo-controlled trial. Lancet, 370(9598), 1560–1567.
Maher, B. A. (2001). Delusions. In P. B. Sutker & H. E. Adams (Eds.), Comprehensive handbook of psychologicaldisorder (3rd ed., pp. 309–370). New York, NY: Kluwer Academic/Plenum.
Merikangas, K., Chakravarti, A., Moldin, S., Araj, H., Blangero, J., Burmeister, M,…Takahashi, A. S. (2002). Future ofgenetics of mood disorders research. Biological Psychiatry, 52(6), 457–477.
Minzenberg, M. J., Poole, J. H., & Vinogradov, S. (2008). A neurocognitive model of borderline personality disorder:
Effects of childhood sexual abuse and relationship to adult social attachment disturbance. Development andPsychological Disorder, 20(1), 341–368. doi:10.1017/S0954579408000163
Moldin, S. O. (2003). Editorial: Neurobiology of autism: The new frontier. Genes, Brain & Behavior, 2(5), 253–254.
Mueser, K. T., & McGurk, S. R. (2004). Schizophrenia. Lancet, 363(9426), 2063–2072.
Murray, R. M., & Bramon, E. (2005). Developmental model of schizophrenia. In B. J. Sadock & V. A. Sadock (Eds.),
Kaplan & Sadock’s comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (pp. 1381–1395). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins.
National Institute of Mental Health. (2009). What are the symptoms of schizophrenia? Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/schizophrenia/what-are-the-symptoms-of-schizophrenia.shtml
National Institute of Mental Health. (2010a). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/topics/attention-deficit-hyperactivity-disorder-adhd/index.shtml
National Institute of Mental Health. (2010b). People with depression discuss their illness. Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/media/video/health/depression.shtml

370

National Institute of Mental Health. (2010c). What is schizophrenia? Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/topics/schizophrenia/index.shtml
National Institute of Mental Health. (2011). Suicide statistics. Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/suicide-in-the-us-statistics-and-prevention/index.shtml#adult
National Institute of Mental Health. (2017). Mental illness. Retrieved fromhttps://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/statistics/mental-illness.shtml
Nicolson, R., Lenane, M., Hamburger, S. D., Fernandez, T., Bedwell, J., & Rapoport, J. L. (2000). Lessons fromchildhood-onset schizophrenia. Brain Research Review, 31(2–3), 147–156.
Nicolson, S. E., Mayberg, H. S., Pennell, P. B., & Nemeroff, C. B. (2006). Persistent auditory hallucinations that are
unresponsive to antipsychotic drugs. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 163, 1153–1159.
doi:10.1176/appi.ajp.163.7.1153
Olfson, M., Gameroff, M., Marcus, S., & Jensen, P. (2003). National trends in the treatment of attention deficit
hyperactivity disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 160, 1071–1077.
Oltmanns, T. F., & Turkheimer, E. (2006). Perceptions of self and others regarding pathological personality traits. In R.
F. Krueger & J. L. Tackett (Eds.), Personality and psychopathology (pp. 71–111). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Ozawa, A., & Yaeda, J. (2007). Employer attitudes toward employing persons with psychiatric disability in Japan.
Journal of Vocational Rehabilitation, 26(2), 105–113.
Phillips, K. A., Yen, S., & Gunderson, J. G. (2003). Personality disorders. In R. E. Hales & S. C. Yudofsky (Eds.),
Textbook of clinical psychiatry. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
Posner, M., Rothbart, M., Vizueta, N., Thomas, K., Levy, K., Fossella, J., Kernberg, O. (2003). An approach to thepsychobiology of personality disorders. Development and Psychopathology, 15(4), 1093–1106.
doi:10.1017/S0954579403000506
Pulido, F., Diaz, M., & Ramírez, M. (2004). Work integration of people with severe mental disorder: A pending
question. Revista Psiquis, 25(6), 26–43.
Raine, A., Lencz, T., Bihrle, S., LaCasse, L., & Colletti, P. (2000). Reduced prefrontal gray matter volume and reduced
autonomic activity in antisocial personality disorder. Archive of General Psychiatry, 57, 119–127.
Ray, W. J. (2018). Abnormal psychology (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Rhee, S. H., & Waldman, I. D. (2002). Genetic and environmental influences on anti-social behavior: A meta-analysis oftwin and adoptions studies. Psychological Bulletin, 128(3), 490–529.
Riley, B. P., & Kendler, K. S. (2005). Schizophrenia: Genetics. In B. J. Sadock & V. A. Sadock (Eds.), Kaplan &Sadock’s comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (pp.1354–1370). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Robins, L. N., Cottler, L., Bucholtz, K., & Compton, W. (1995). Diagnostic interview schedule for DSM-1V. St. Louis,
MO: Washington University.
Robins, L., & Regier, D. A. (1991). Psychiatric disorders in America: The Epidemiologic Catchment Area Study. New
York, NY: Free Press.
Rosebush, P. I., & Mazurek, M. F. (2010). Catatonia and its treatment. Schizophrenia Bulleting, 36(2), 239–242.
doi:10.1093/schbul/sbp141

371

Rubio, G., & Lopez-Ibor, J. (2007). Generalized anxiety disorder: A 40-year follow up study. Acta PsychiatricScandinavica, 115, 372–379.
Samuels, J., & Nestadt, G. (1997). Epidemiology and genetics of obsessive-compulsive disorder. International Review
of Psychiatry, 9, 61–71.
Sawa, A., & Snyder, S. (2002). Schizophrenia: Diverse approaches to a complex disease. Science, 296(5568), 692–695.
doi:10.1126/science.1070532;
Schefer, R. (2003, May 28). Addressing stigma: Increasing public understanding of mental illness. Presented to theStanding Senate Committee on Social Affairs, Science and Technology. Retrieved fromhttp://www.camh.net/education/Resources_communities_organizations/addressing_stigma_senatepres03.pdf
Seidman, L., Valera, E., & Makris, N. (2005). Structural brain imaging of attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder.
Biological Psychiatry, 57, 1263–1272.
Sher, L., & Mann, J. J. (2003). Psychiatric pathophysiology: Mood disorders. In A. Tasman, J. Kay, & J. A. Lieberman(Eds.), Psychiatry. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Skodol, A. E., Gunderson, J. G., Pfohl, B., Widiger, T. A., Livesley, W. J., & Siever, L. J. (2002). The borderline
diagnosis I: Psychopathology, comorbidity, and personality structure. Biological Psychiatry, 51(12), 936–950.
Skrabalo, A. (2000). Negative symptoms in schizophrenia(s): The conceptual basis. Harvard Brain, 7, 7–10.
Smoller, J., Paulus, M., Fagerness, J., Purcell, S., Yamaki, L., Hirshfeld-Becker, D.,…Stein, M. (2008). Influence of
RGS2 on anxiety-related temperament, personality, and brain function. Archives of General Psychiatry, 65(3), 298–308.
doi:10.1001/archgenpsychiatry.2007.48.
Snyder, K. (2007). Me, myself, and them. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Stein, M., Schork, N., & Gelernter, J. (2008). Gene-by-environment (serotonin transporter and childhood maltreatment)interaction for anxiety sensitivity, an intermediate phenotype for anxiety disorders. Neuropsychopharmacology, 33(2),312–319. doi:10.1038/sj.npp.1301422.
Suddath, R. L., Christison, G. W., Torrey, E. F., Casanova, M. F., & Weinberger, D. R. (1990). Anatomical
abnormalities in the brains of monozygotic twins discordant for schizophrenia. New England Journal of Medicine,322(12), 789–794.
Susser, E. B., Neugebauer, R., Hock, H.W., Brown, A. S., Lin, S., Labowitz, D., & Gorman, J. M. (1996).
Schizophrenia after prenatal famine: Further evidence. Archives of general psychiatry, 53, 25–31.
Tang, G., Gudsnuk, K., Kuo, S-H., Cotrina, M. L., Rosoklija, G., Sosunoy, A., … Sulzer, D. (2014). Loss of mTORDependent macroautophagy causes autistic-like synaptic pruning deficits. Neuron, 83(6), 1131-1143.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neuron.2014.07.040
Tartakovsky, M. S. (2009). Medias damaging depictions of mental illness. Psych Central. Retrieved fromhttp://psychcentral.com/lib/mediasdamaging-depictions-of-mental-illness/0002220
Thoeringer, C., Ripke, S., Unschuld, P., Lucae, S., Ising, M., Bettecken, T.,…Erhardt, A. (2009). The GABA transporter
1 (SLC6A1): A novel candidate gene for anxiety disorders. Journal of Neural Transmission, 116(6), 649–657.
doi:10.1007/s00702-008-0075-y
Thomas, P., & Bracken, P. (2001). Vincent’s bandage: The art of selling a drug for bipolar disorder. British Medical
Journal, 323, 1434.

372

Tsai, J. L., Knutson, B., & Fung, H. H. (2006). Cultural variation in affect valuation. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 90, 288–307.
Twenge, J. (2006). Generation me. New York, NY: Free Press.
Verheul, R. (2005). Clinical utility for dimensional models of personality pathology. Journal of Personality Disorders,19, 283–302.
Videbech, P., & Ravnkilde, B. (2004). Hippocampal volume and depression: A meta-analysis of MRI studies. American
Journal of Psychiatry, 161, 1957–1966.
Waddington J. L., Lane, A., Larkin, C., & O’Callaghan, E. (1999). The neurodevelopmental basis of schizophrenia:
Clinical clues from cerebro-craniofacial dysmorphogenesis, and the roots of a lifetime trajectory of disease. BiologicalPsychiatry, 46(1), 31–9.
Walker, E., Kestler, L., Bollini, A., & Hochman, K. (2004). Schizophrenia: Etiology and course. Annual Review of
Psychology, 55, 401–430. doi:10.1146/annurev.psych.55.090902.141950
Walker, E., Mittal, V., & Tessner, K. (2008). Stress and the hypothalamic pituitary adrenal axis in the developmental
course of schizophrenia. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 4, 189–216.
Walker, E., & Tessner, K. (2008). Schizophrenia. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 3(1), 30–37.
Warner-Schmidt, J. L., & Duman, R. S. (2006). Hippocampal neurogenesis: Opposing effects of stress andantidepressant treatment. Hippocampus, 16, 239–249.
Weyandt, L. L., & DuPaul, G. (2006). ADHD in college students. Journal of Attention Disorders, 10(1), 9–19.
Widiger, T.A. (2006). Understanding personality disorders. In S. K. Huprich (Ed.), Rorschach assessment to thepersonality disorders. The LEA series in personality and clinical psychology (pp. 3–25). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
Woods, B. T. (1998). Is schizophrenia a progressive neurodevelopmental disorder? Toward a unitary pathogenic
mechanism. American Journal of Psychiatry, 155, 1661-1670.
World Health Organization. (2011). A conceptual framework for the revision of the ICD-10 classification of mental andbehavioural disorders. World Psychiatry, 10(2), 86-92.
World Health Organization. (2017). Depression and other common mental disorders. Retrieved fromhttp://apps.who.int/iris/bitstream/handle/10665/254610/WHO-MSD-MER-2017.2eng.pdf;jsessionid=89FEE4C62BA535A65F9E50486CB02B9B?sequence=1
Zweig-Frank, H., Paris, J., Kin, N. M. N. Y., Schwartz, G., Steiger, H., & Nair, N. P. V. (2006). Childhood sexual abusein relation to neurobiological challenge tests in patients with borderline personality disorder and normal controls.
Psychiatry Research, 141(3), 337–341.

373

Chapter 11 Treating Psychological Disorders
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the psychological, biomedical, and social approaches to treatment.
2. Define therapy.
3. Explain psychological assessment.
Psychological disorders create a tremendous individual, social, and economic drain on society.
Disorders make it difficult for people to engage in productive lives and effectively contribute totheir family and to society. Disorders lead to disability and absenteeism in the workplace, as well
as physical problems, premature death, and suicide. At a societal level the costs are staggering. It
has been estimated that the annual financial burden of each case of anxiety disorder is over
$3,000 per year, meaning that the annual cost of anxiety disorders alone in the United States runs
into the trillions of dollars (Konnopka, Leichsenring, Leibing, & König, 2009; Smit et al., 2006).
The goal of this chapter is to review the various techniques that are used to treat psychologicaldisorders. Just as psychologists consider the causes of a disorder in terms of the biopsychosocial
model of mental disorders, treatment is also based on psychological, biological, and social
approaches. A clinician may focus on any or all of the three approaches to treatment, but when
deciding which to use, research on the effectiveness of different treatments should prevail.
•••The psychological approach to reducing a disorder involves providing help to individuals
or families through psychological therapy, known as psychotherapy. These include
psychodynamic, humanistic, and cognitive-behavioral therapeutic approaches.
The biomedical approach to reducing a disorder is based on the use of medications to treat
mental disorders, as well as the employment of brain intervention techniques, including
electroconvulsive therapy (ECT), transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), andpsychosurgery.
The social approach to reducing a disorder focuses on changing the social environment inwhich individuals live to reduce the underlying causes of disorders. These approaches
include group, couples, and family therapy, as well as community outreach programs. The
community approach is likely to be the most effective of the three approaches because it
focuses not only on treatment, but also on prevention of disorders (World HealthOrganization (WHO), 2004).

Individuals may seek therapy, which is treatment for psychological problems, when their distressbecomes severe or when they find themselves unable to function normally. Other individuals may
be referred to therapy by a physician, court, parent, or school. Couples or family groups might also
attend therapy to address problems with relationships. Possible settings for this therapy include
clinics, hospitals, counseling centers, or private practice. The individual who attends therapy may
be referred to as a client or a patient, depending on the theoretical views of the therapist and thenature of the problem.

374

Psychological Assessment
A psychologist may begin therapy by systematically learning about the patient’s needs through aformal psychological assessment, which is an evaluation of the patient’s psychological andmental health. During the assessment the psychologist will conduct a thorough interview with theindividual seeking help. Objective or projective tests might be administered. The therapist may
also get more information from family members, school personnel, medical records, or othersources. In addition to the psychological assessment, the patient may be seen by a physician to gain
information about potential physical problems.
After the medical and psychological assessments are completed, the therapist might make a formal
diagnosis using the detailed descriptions of the disorder provided in the Diagnostic and Statistical
Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM) (APA, 2013). Insurance companies require a DSM diagnosis
in order to justify payment for the treatment.
Some psychotherapists will not use a formal diagnosis. This is particularly true for those therapists
who are helping with relationship issues or other problems that are not being paid for withinsurance. However, all therapists will keep records of the initial assessment and identified
problem areas. The therapist will discuss with the client how the problems might be addressed andgoals for the therapy. Written informed consent documents will be signed which outline financial
and procedural issues of the therapeutic contract. Referrals to other professionals might be made if
the client will need therapy in addition to or instead of the type of services the original therapist can
provide.

Psychotherapy
Learning Objectives
1. Define psychotherapy.
2. Differentiate among psychodynamic, humanistic, behavioral, and cognitive therapies.
3. Explain the behavioral and cognitive aspects of cognitive-behavioral therapy and how

CBT is used to reduce psychological disorders.
4. Describe the effectiveness of psychotherapy.

One approach to treatment is psychotherapy, the professional treatment of psychologicaldisordersd through techniques designed to encourage communication of conflicts and insight. The
fundamental aspect of psychotherapy is that the patient directly confronts the disorder and works
with the therapist to help reduce it. Therapy includes assessing the client’s issues and problems,planning a course of treatment, setting goals for change, the treatment itself, and an evaluation of
the patient’s progress. Therapy is practiced by thousands of psychologists and other trained
practitioners in the United States and around the world.
To many people, therapy involves a patient lying on a couch with a therapist sitting behind andnodding sagely as the patient speaks. However, this approach to therapy is outdated (Hansell,
Ehrlich, Katz, Lerner, & Minter, 2008). It is estimated that there are over 400 different kinds of375

therapy practiced by people in many fields (Norcross, Hodges, & Castle, 2002), and the mostimportant of these are shown in Figure 11.1. The therapists who provide these treatments include
psychiatrists, who have a medical degree and can prescribe drugs, clinical or counselingpsychologists, social workers, psychiatric nurses, and couples, marriage, and family therapists.
Figure 11.1 Types of Therapy Practiced in the U.S.

Psychodynamic
Therapy
Psychodynamic therapy isa psychological treatment
based on Freudian andneo-Freudian theories inwhich the therapist helps thepatient explore earlychildhood relationships andthe unconscious dynamics of
the individual. The
patient’s personal concerns
and anxieties are discussed,
and through interpretation,
the therapist tries tounderstand the underlying
unconscious problems thatare causing the symptoms.
The analyst may try out
some interpretations on thepatient and observe how heor she responds to them.

Source: Adapted from Norcross, Hedges, & Castle (2002).

According to Shedler (2010), the current psychodynamic approach to treatment has seven distinct
features:• Encourages exploration and discussion of the full range of a patient’s emotions• Explores resistance, or the attempts of the patient to avoid distressing thoughts and feelings• Identifies recurring themes and patterns in the patient’s thoughts, feelings, self-concept,
relationships, and life experiences• Discusses past experiences, especially early experiences with attachment figures• Focuses on patients’ relationships and interpersonal experiences• Focuses on the therapeutic relationship, including transference• Explores the patient’s desires, fears, fantasies, dreams, and daydreams to gain insight into
how the patient views self, others, and experiences
The patient may be asked to verbalize his or her thoughts through free association, in which thetherapist listens while the client talks about whatever comes to mind, without any censorship or
filtering. The goal of psychoanalysis is to help the patient develop insight; that is, anunderstanding of the unconscious causes of the disorder (Epstein, Stern, & Silbersweig, 2001;
Lubarsky & Barrett, 2006). Unfortunately, the patient may show resistance, or an unconscious
refusal to accept these new understandings, to avoid the painful feelings in his or her unconscious.
376

For example, the patient might forget or miss appointments, or act out with hostile feelings toward
the therapist. The therapist attempts to help the patient develop insight into the causes of theresistance. The sessions may also lead to transference, in which the patient unconsciously redirects
feelings experienced in an important personal relationship toward the therapist. For instance, thepatient may transfer feelings of guilt or anger that come from the father or mother to the therapist.
The psychodynamic approach to therapy has been criticized for several reasons including:
Incorporating aspects of Freud’s unproven ideas, being too “abstract” by focusing on unconscious
experiences, lacking research on the therapy’s effectiveness, and utilizing a long-term therapeuticmodel that is not efficient in today’s insurance-limited world (Novotney, 2017). Current
psychodynamic approaches frequently use shorter-term, focused, and goal-oriented approaches. In
these “brief psychodynamic therapies,” the therapist helps the client determine the important issues
to be discussed at the beginning of treatment and usually takes a more active role (Levenson, 2010).
Additionally, psychodynamic researchers and therapists have focused their efforts on using
research to demonstrate the effectiveness of their approach to treatment. According to Shedler(2010) and Novotney (2017), early research results assessing the effectiveness of psychodynamic
therapy have been promising.

Humanistic Therapy
Just as psychodynamic therapy is based on the theories of Freudand the neo-Freudians, humanistic therapy is a psychologicaltreatment based on the theories of Carl Rogers and otherhumanistic psychologists. Humanistic therapy is based on theidea that people develop psychological problems when they areburdened by limits and expectations placed on them by themselves
and others. The treatment emphasizes the person’s capacity for
self-realization and fulfillment. Humanistic therapies attempt topromote growth and responsibility by helping clients consider theirown situations and the world around them and how they can workto achieve their life goals.

Figure 11.2

Carl Rogers was among theCarl Rogers developed person-centered therapy also known as
founders of the humanisticclient-centered therapy, which is an approach to treatment inapproach to therapy andwhich the client is helped to grow and develop. The therapist
developed the fundamentals
provides a comfortable, nonjudgmental environment. Rogers
of person-centered therapy.
Source(1980) argued that therapy was most productive when the therapist
created a positive relationship with the client through a therapeutic
alliance. The therapeutic alliance is a relationship between the client and the therapist that is
facilitated by several techniques. These include:•••

Genuineness or no barriers to free-flowing thoughts and feelings.
Unconditional positive regard in which the therapist values the client without any
qualifications and displays an accepting attitude toward whatever the client is feeling at
the moment.
Empathy by actively listening to and accurately perceiving the personal feelings thatthe client expresses.
377

The development of a positive therapeutic alliance has been found to be exceedingly important tosuccessful therapy. The ideas of genuineness, unconditional positive regard, and empathy in anurturing relationship in which the therapist actively listens to and reflects the feelings of the client
is probably the most fundamental part of contemporary psychotherapy (Prochaska & Norcross,2007).

Behavioral Therapy
The goals of some people with psychological disorders are very specific. A person with a social
phobia may want to be able to leave his or her house. A person with OCD may want to stop his
obsessions or compulsions from interfering with everyday activities. In these cases, it is notnecessary to revisit childhood experiences or consider our capacities for self-realization, we simply
want to deal with what is happening in the present, and behavioral therapy does that.
Behavioral therapy is psychological treatment that is based on principles of learning. The mostdirect approach is through operant conditioning, which uses rewards or punishments.
Reinforcement may be used to teach new skills to people, for instance, those with autism or
schizophrenia (Granholm et al., 2008; Herbert et al., 2005; Scattone, 2007). If the patient hastrouble dressing or grooming, then reinforcement techniques, such as providing tokens that can beexchanged for snacks, are used to reinforce appropriate behaviors such as putting on one’s clothes
in the morning or taking a shower at night. If the patient has trouble interacting with others,
reinforcement will be used to teach the client how to more appropriately respond in public, forinstance, by maintaining eye contact, smiling when appropriate, and modulating tone of voice.
As the patient practices the different techniques, the appropriate behaviors are shaped throughreinforcement to allow the client to manage more complex social situations. In some cases,
observational learning may also be used. The client may be asked to observe the behavior of others
who are more socially skilled to acquire appropriate behaviors. People who learn to improve theirinterpersonal skills through skills training may be more accepted by others, and this social support
may have substantial positive effects on their emotions.
When the disorder is anxiety or a phobia, then the goal of the therapy is to reduce the negative
affective responses to the feared stimulus. Exposure therapy is a behavioral therapy based on theclassical conditioning principle of extinction, in which people are confronted with a feared
stimulus with the goal of decreasing their negative emotional responses to it (Wolpe, 1973).
Exposure treatment can be carried out in real situations or through imagination, and it is used in thetreatment of panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, OCD, and posttraumatic stressdisorder (PTSD).
In flooding, a client is exposed to the source of his fear all at once. A person with agoraphobia
might be taken to a crowded shopping mall or someone with an extreme fear of heights to the topof a tall building. The assumption is that the fear will subside as the client habituates to thesituation while receiving emotional support from the therapist during the stressful experience. An
advantage of the flooding technique is that it is quick and often effective, but a disadvantage is thatthe patient may relapse after a short period of time.

378

Table 11.1 Hierarcy of Fears in Systematic
Desensitization
Behavior
Fear ratingThink about a spider

10

Look at a photo of a spider

25

Look at a real spider in a closed box

50

Hold the box with the spider

60

Let a spider crawl on your desk70

Let a spider crawl on your shoe80

Let a spider crawl on your pants leg

90

Let a spider crawl on your sleeve

95

More frequently, the exposure isdone more gradually. Systematicdesensitization is a behavioral
treatment that combines imagining
or experiencing the feared object orsituation with relaxation exercises(Wolpe, 1973). The client and thetherapist work together to prepare ahierarchy of fears, starting with theleast frightening, and moving to themost frightening scenario
surrounding the object (see Table
11.1). The patient then confronts hisor her fears in a systematic manner,sometimes using imagination, but
usually, when possible, in real life
situations.

Desensitization techniques use theprinciple of counterconditioning, inwhich a second incompatible
response, such as relaxation, is conditioned to an already conditioned response, the fear response.
The continued pairing of the relaxation responses with the feared stimulus as the patient works up
the hierarchy gradually leads the fear response to be extinguished, and the relaxation response to
take its place.
Let a spider crawl on your bare arm

100

Behavioral therapy works best when people directly experience the feared object. Fears of spiders
are more directly habituated when the patient interacts with a real spider, and fears of flying are best
extinguished when the patient gets on a real plane, but it is often difficult and expensive to create
these experiences.

Figure 11.3 Virtual Reality
Equipment

SourceRecent advances in virtual reality have allowed clinicians toprovide therapy in what seem like real situations to thepatient. In virtual reality therapy, the therapist uses
computer-generated, three-dimensional, lifelike images ofthe feared stimulus in a systematic desensitization program.
Specially designed computer equipment, often with a headmount display, is used to create a simulated environment. A
common use is in helping soldiers who are experiencing
PTSD return to the scene of the trauma and learn how tocope with the stress it invokes.
Some of the advantages of the virtual reality treatment
approach are that it is economical, the treatment session canbe held in the therapist’s office with no loss of time orconfidentiality, the session can easily be terminated as soon
as a patient feels uncomfortable, and many patients who379

have resisted live exposure to the object of their fears are willing to try the new virtual reality
option first (Hofmann, 2018).
Aversion therapy is a type of behavior therapy in which classical conditioning is used to reduce
the frequency of an undesirable behavior. An unpleasant stimulus is intentionally paired with aharmful or socially unacceptable behavior until the behavior becomes associated with unpleasantsensations and is hopefully reduced. A child who wets the bed may be required to sleep on a padthat sounds an alarm when it senses moisture. Over time, the conditioned response produced by thealarm reduces the bedwetting behavior (Houts, Berman, & Abramson, 1994). Aversion therapy isalso used to stop other specific behaviors, such as nail biting (Allen, 1996).
Alcoholism has long been treated with aversion therapy (Baker & Cannon, 1988). In a standard
approach, patients are treated at a hospital where they are administered a drug, antabuse, that makes
them nauseous if they consume any alcohol. The technique works very well if the user keeps taking
the drug (Krampe et al., 2006), but unless it is combined with other approaches the patients arelikely to relapse after they stop taking the drug.

Cognitive Therapy
While behavioral approaches focus on the actions of the patient, cognitive therapy is a
psychological treatment that helps clients identify incorrect or distorted beliefs that arecontributing to disorders. In cognitive therapy, the therapist helps the patient develop new, healthierways of thinking about themselves and about the others around them. The idea of cognitive therapy
is that changing thoughts will change emotions, and that the new emotions will then influence
behavior.
The goal of cognitive therapy is notnecessarily to get people to think morepositively, but rather to think moreaccurately. For instance, a person who
thinks “no one cares about me” is likely
to feel rejected, isolated, and lonely. If thetherapist can remind the client that theclient has a mother or daughter who does
care, more positive feelings will likely
follow. Similarly, it may be helpful tochange beliefs from: “I have to be
perfect” to “No one is always perfect”;
from “I am a terrible student” to “I amdoing well in some of my courses,”; andfrom “She did that on purpose to hurt me”
to “Maybe she didn’t realize how
important it was to me.”Figure 11.4 Aaron Beck and Albert Ellis

Sources: Beck photo courtesy of Michael Britt
Ellis photo courtesy of the Albert Ellis Institute

The psychiatrist Aaron Beck and the psychologist Albert Ellis together provided the basic
principles of cognitive therapy. Ellis (2004) called his approach rational emotive behavior therapy(REBT) or rational emotive therapy (RET), and he focused on pointing out the flaws in the380patient’s thinking. Ellis noticed that people experiencing strong negative emotions tend to
personalize and overgeneralize their beliefs, leading to an inability to see situations accurately(Leahy, 2003). In REBT, the therapist’s goal is to challenge these irrational thought patterns,
helping the patient replace the irrational thoughts with more rational ones, leading to thedevelopment of more appropriate emotional reactions and behaviors.
Beck’s cognitive therapy was based on his observation that people who were depressed generally
had a large number of highly accessible negative thoughts that influenced their thinking (Beck,
1995; Beck, Freeman, & Davis, 2004). His goal was to develop a short-term therapy for depressionthat would modify these unproductive thoughts. Beck’s approach challenges the client to test
beliefs against concrete evidence. If a client claims that “everybody at work is out to get me,” thetherapist might ask to provide instances to corroborate the claim. At the same time, the therapist
might point out contrary evidence, such as the fact that a certain coworker is actually a loyal friendor that the patient’s boss had recently offered praise.

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy
Since the 1980s, therapists have combined the
Figure 11.5 Cognitive-Behavior Therapy
principles of the behavioral perspective withthe foundations of the cognitive perspective tocreate cognitive-behavioral therapy (Hofmann,2018). Cognitive-behavior therapy (CBT)
is a structured approach to treatment that
attempts to reduce psychological disorders
through systematic procedures based on
cognitive and behavioral principles. As you
can see in Figure 11.5, CBT is based on theidea that there is a link among our thoughts,
our feelings, and our behavior. For instance,
if we are feeling depressed, our negative
thoughts (“I am doing poorly in mychemistry class”) lead to negative feelings(“I feel hopeless and sad”), which thencontribute to negative behaviors (lethargy,
Cognitive-behavior therapy (CBT) is based on the idea thatdisinterest, lack of studying). When we or
our thoughts, feelings, and behavior reinforce each other andthat changing our thoughts or behavior can make us feelother people look at the negative behavior,better.
the negative thoughts are reinforced and thecycle repeats itself (Beck, 1976). Similarly,
in panic disorder a patient may misinterpret his or her feelings of anxiety as a sign of an impending
physical or mental catastrophe (such as a heart attack), leading to an avoidance of a particular placeor social situation. The fact that the patient is avoiding the situation reinforces the negative
thoughts. Again, the thoughts, feelings, and behavior amplify and distort each other.

CBT is a very broad approach that is used for the treatment of a variety of problems including:Depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety, OCD, PTSD, eating, substance use disorders, ADHD, andpsychotic disorders (Hofmann, 2018). CBT directly treats the inappropriate behaviors or distorted
cognitions, and does not attempt to address the underlying issues that cause the problem. The goal381

is simply to stop the negative cycle by intervening to change cognition or behavior. With CBT, theclient and the therapist work together to develop the goals of the therapy, the particular ways thatthe goals will be reached, and the timeline for reaching them. The procedures are problem-solving
and action-oriented, and the client is forced to take responsibility for his or her own treatment. The
client is assigned tasks tocomplete that will help improve the disorder and takes an active part in thetherapy. The treatment usually lasts between 10 and 20 sessions.
Depending on the particular disorder, some CBT treatments may be primarily behavioral inorientation. These treatments focus on the principles of classical, operant, and observational
learning. Other treatments are more cognitive, focused on changing negative thoughts related to thedisorder, but almost all CBT treatments use a combination of behavioral and cognitive approaches.

Effectiveness of Psychotherapy
To determine if therapy is helpful, psychologists use outcome research, that is, studies that assess
the effectiveness of different therapies. As you can see in Figure 11.6, in these studies theindependent variable is the type of the treatment. For instance, what type of psychotherapy was
Figure 11.6 Outcome Researchused or how long it lasted, is manipulated. In most cases, characteristics of the client, such as
gender, age, disease severity, and prior psychological histories, are also collected as control
variables. The dependent measure is an assessment of the benefit received by the client. In somecases, we might simply ask the client if he or she feels better, and in other cases we may directly
measure behavior. This can include such specific situations as whether the client can now get in an
airplane and take a flight. Accurate empirical answers to these questions are important as they help
practitioners focus their efforts on the techniques that have been proven to be most promising. They
also may guide societies as they decide how to spend public money to improve their citizens
quality (Hunsley & Di Giulio, 2002).

382

In every case the scientists evaluating the therapy must keep in mind that other effects, rather than
the treatment itself, might be important, that some treatments that seem effective might not be, andthat some treatments might actually be harmful. One threat to the validity of outcome researchstudies is natural improvement or the possibility that people might get better over time, even
without treatment. People who begin therapy or join a self-help group do so because they are
feeling bad or engaging in unhealthy behaviors. After being in a program over a period of time,
people frequently feel that they are getting better, but it is possible that they would have improved
even if they had not attended the program, and that the program is not actually making a difference.
To demonstrate that the treatment is effective, the people who participate in it must be comparedwith another group of people who do not get treatment.
Another possibility is that therapy works, but that it does not really matter which type of therapy isused. Nonspecific treatment effects occur when the patient gets better over time simply by coming
to therapy, even though it does not matter what actually happens at the therapy sessions. The idea
is that therapy works, in the sense that it is better than doing nothing, but that all therapies are
pretty much equal in what they are able to accomplish. Finally, placebo effects are improvementsthat occur due to the expectation one will get better rather than the actual effects of a treatment.
Thousands of studies have been conducted to test the effectiveness of psychotherapy, and by andlarge they find evidence that it works. Some outcome studies compare a group that gets treatment
with another (control) group that gets no treatment. For instance, Ruwaard, Broeksteeg, Schrieken,
Emmelkamp, and Lange (2010) found that patients who interacted with a therapist over a website
showed more reduction in symptoms of panic disorder than did a similar group of patients who
were on a waiting list but did not get therapy. Although studies such as this one control for the
possibility of natural improvement, they do not control for either nonspecific treatment effects orfor placebo effects. The people in the treatment group might have improved simply by being in thetherapy (nonspecific effects), or they may have improved because they expected the treatment tohelp them (placebo effects).
Studies that use a control group that gets no treatment, or a group that gets only a placebo, areinformative, but they raise ethical questions. If the researchers believe that their treatment is going
to work, why would they deprive participants in need of help the possibility for improvement by
putting them in a control group? Researchers do this because when there is no control group inwhich to compare the improvement, they cannot state that the changes are due to the treatment. The
improvement could have been due to other factors, so without a control group, any improvements
caused by the treatment are difficult to interpret (Kring, Johnson, Davison, & Neale, 2016).
Some studies have not used a control group (Crits-Christoph, 1992; Crits-Christoph et al., 2004).
These studies compared brief sessions of psychoanalysis with longer-term psychodynamic in thetreatment of anxiety disorder, humanistic therapy with psychodynamic therapy in treating
depression, and cognitive therapy with drug therapy in treating anxiety (Dalgleish, 2004; Hollon,
Thase, & Markowitz, 2002). These studies are advantageous because they compare the specificeffects of one type of treatment with another, while allowing all patients to get treatment
Herbert et al. (2005) tested whether social skills training could boost the results received for thetreatment of social anxiety disorder with cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) alone. As you can see
in Figure 11.7, they found that people in both groups improved, but CBT coupled with social skills
training showed significantly greater gains than CBT alone.
383

Figure 11.7 CBT with Social Skills Training

Herbert et al. (2005) compared the effectiveness of CBT alone with CBT along with social skills training. Bothgroups improved, but the group that received both therapies had significantly greater gains than the group thatreceived CBT alone.

Some meta-analyses have found substantial support for the effectiveness of specific therapies,
including cognitive therapy, CBT (Butler, Chapman, Forman, & Beck, 2006; Deacon &Abramowitz, 2004), couples and family therapy (Shadish & Baldwin, 2002), and psychodynamic(Shedler, 2010). On the basis of these and other meta-analyses, a list of empirically supported
therapies known to be effective, has been developed (Chambless & Hollon, 1998; Hollon, Stewart,& Strunk, 2006). These therapies include cognitive therapy and behavioral therapy for depression;
cognitive therapy, exposure therapy, and stress inoculation training for anxiety; CBT for bulimia;
and behavior modification for bed-wetting.
Smith, Glass, and Miller (1980) did not find much evidence that any one type of therapy was more
effective than any other type, and more recent meta-analyses have not tended to find manydifferences either (Cuijpers, van Straten, Andersson, & van Oppen, 2008). What this means is thata good part of the effect of therapy is nonspecific, in the sense that simply coming to any type oftherapy is helpful in comparison to not coming. This is true partly because there are fewer
distinctions among the ways that different therapies are practiced than the theoretical differencesamong them would suggest. What a good therapist practicing psychodynamic approaches does intherapy is often not much different from what a humanist or a cognitive-behavioral therapist does,
and so no one approach is really likely to be better than the other. What all good therapies have incommon is that they give people hope; help them think more carefully about themselves and about
their relationships with others; and provide a positive, empathic, and trusting relationship with thetherapist (Ahn &Wampold, 2001).

Key Takeaways••

Psychotherapy is treatment for psychological disorders.
Psychodynamic therapy, based on the principles of Freud and neo-Freudians, attempt toassist the patient in developing insight into their current disorders.

384

•

•
•
•
•

•
•

Humanist therapy, derived from the theory of Carl Rogers, is based on the idea thatpeople experience psychological problems when they are burdened by limits andexpectations placed on them by themselves and others. It also focuses on helping people
reach their life goals.
Behavioral therapy applies the principles of learning therapy to the elimination ofmaladaptive behaviors and to replace them with more adaptive responses.
Albert Ellis and Aaron Beck developed cognitive-based therapies to help clients stop
negative thoughts and replace them with more objective thoughts.
Cognitive-behavioral therapy combines the behavioral and cognitive perspectives in thetreatment of many types of disorders.
Outcome research studies the effectiveness of different therapies and demonstrates that
all therapies offer some benefit and no one type of therapy is overall more effective.
Some therapies are more effective than others for specific disorders.
Threats to the validity of outcome research include natural improvement, nonspecifictreatment effects, and placebo effects.
Research shows that getting psychological therapy is better at reducing disorder than
not getting it. All good therapies give people hope and help them think more carefully
about themselves and about their relationships with others.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Imagine that your friend has been feeling depressed for several months, but refuses toconsider therapy as an option. What might you tell your friend that might help her or
him feel more comfortable about seeking treatment?
2. Imagine that you have developed a debilitating fear of bees after recently being
attacked by a swarm of them. What type of therapy do you think would be best foryour disorder?
3. Imagine that your friend has a serious drug abuse problem. Based on what you havelearned in this section, what treatment options would you explore in your attempt toprovide your firend with the best help available? Which combination of therapies
might work best?

Biomedical Therapy
Learning Objectives
1. Define biomedical therapy.
2. Classify the different types of drugs used in the treatment of mental disorders andexplain how they each work to reduce disorders.
3. Critically evaluate direct brain intervention methods that may be used by doctors totreat patients who do not respond to drug or other therapy.
4. Describe the effectiveness of biomedical therapy.
385

In addition to psychotherapy, psychological disorders may in some cases be treated biologically.
Biomedical therapies are treatments designed to reduce psychological disorder by influencing theaction of the central nervous system. These therapies primarily involve the use of medications, butalso include direct methods of brain intervention, including electroconvulsive therapy (ECT),transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), and psychosurgery.

Drug Therapies
Psychologists understand that an appropriate balance of neurotransmitters in the brain is importantfor mental health. A psychological disorder might result if there is a chemical imbalance. The mostfrequently used biological treatments provide the patient with medication that influences the
production and reuptake of neurotransmitters in the central nervous system (CNS).
Unlike some medical therapies that can be targeted toward specific symptoms, current
psychological drug therapies are not so specific; they do not change particular behaviors or thoughtprocesses, and they do not really solve psychological disorders. However, although they cannot“cure” disorder, drug therapies are nevertheless useful therapeutic approaches, particularly whencombined with psychological therapy, in treating a variety of psychological disorders. The best
drug combination for the individual patient is usually found through trial and error (Biedermann &Fleischhacker, 2009).
Antidepressant medications: Drugs designed to improve moods are referred to as
antidepressants. Although they are used primarily in the treatment of depression, they are also
effective for patients who suffer from anxiety, phobias, and obsessive-compulsive disorders.
Antidepressants work by influencing the production and reuptake of neurotransmitters that relate toemotion, including serotonin, norepinephrine, and dopamine. Although exactly why they work is
not yet known, as the amount of the neurotransmitters in the CNS is increased through the action of
the drugs, the person often experiences less depression.
The antidepressants most prescribed today are the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs),
including Prozac, Paxil, and Zoloft, which are designed to selectively block the reuptake ofserotonin at the synapse, thereby leaving more serotonin available in the CNS. SSRIs are safer andhave fewer side effects than the tricyclics or the MAOIs (Fraser, 2000; Hollon, Thase, &Markowitz, 2002). SSRIs are effective, but patients taking them often suffer a variety ofsometimes unpleasant side effects, including dry mouth, constipation, blurred vision, headache,agitation, drowsiness, as well as a reduction in sexual enjoyment.
Recently, there has been concern that SSRIs may increase the risk of suicide among teens andyoung adults, probably because when the medications begin working they give patients moreenergy, which may lead them to commit the suicide that they had been planning, but lacked theenergy to go through with. This concern has led the FDA to put a warning label on SSRI
medications and has led doctors to be more selective about prescribing antidepressants to this age
group (Healy & Whitaker, 2003; Simon, 2006; Simon, Savarino, Operskalski, & Wang, 2006).
Because the effects of antidepressants may take weeks or even months to develop, doctors usuallywork with each patient to determine which medications are most effective, and may frequently
change medications over the course of therapy. In some cases, other types of antidepressants may
386be used instead of or in addition to the SSRIs. These medications also work by blocking thereuptake of neurotransmitters, including serotonin, norepinephrine, and dopamine.
Patients who are suffering from bipolar disorders are not helped by the SSRIs or otherantidepressants because their disorder also involves the experience of overly elevated moods.
Treatment is more complicated for these patients, often involving a combination of antipsychotics
and antidepressants along with mood stabilizing medications (McElroy & Keck, 2000). The mostwell-known mood stabilizer, lithium carbonate or lithium, was approved by the FDA in the 1970s
for treating both manic and depressive episodes, and it has proven very effective. Anticonvulsant
medications can also be used as mood stabilizers. Another drug, Depakote, has also proven very
effective, and some bipolar patients may do better with it than with lithium (Kowatch et al., 2000).
People who take lithium must have regular blood tests to be sure that the levels of the drug are in
the appropriate range (Kring et al., 2016). Potential negative side effects of lithium are loss ofcoordination, slurred speech, frequent urination, and excessive thirst. Though side effects oftencause patients to stop taking their medication, it is important that treatment be continuous, rather
than intermittent. There is no cure for bipolar disorder, but drug therapy does help many people.
Antianxiety medications: Drugs that help relieve fear or anxiety are called antianxiety
medication. They work by increasing the action of the neurotransmitter GABA (Prus, 2018). The
increased level of GABA helps inhibit the action of the sympathetic division of the autonomic
nervous system, creating a calming experience.
The most common class of antianxiety medications is the tranquilizers, known as benzodiazepines.
These drugs are relatively common, and in 2008, 5.2% of adults used a benzodiazepine for either
short or long-term use (Prus, 2018). The benzodiazepines act within a few minutes to treat mild
anxiety disorders, but also have major side effects. They are addictive, frequently leading totolerance, and they can cause drowsiness, dizziness, and unpleasant withdrawal symptoms
including relapses into increased anxiety (Otto et al., 1993). Furthermore, because the effects of the
benzodiazepines are very similar to those of alcohol, they are very dangerous when combinedwith it.
Antipsychotic medications: In the 1950s, a drug called chlorpromazine (Thorazine) was
discovered that could reduce many of the positive symptoms of schizophrenia. Chlorpromazine was
the first of many antipsychotic drugs. Antipsychotic drugs, also called neuroleptics, are drugs
that treat the symptoms of schizophrenia and related psychotic disorders. Today there are many
antipsychotics, and these drugs treat the positive symptoms of chizophrenia, and some treat thepositive, negative, and cognitive symptoms.
Antipsychotics reduce the positive symptoms of schizophrenia by reducing the transmission of
dopamine at the synapses in the limbic system, and they improve negative symptoms byinfluencing levels of serotonin (Marangell, Silver, Goff, & Yudofsky, 2003). Despite theireffectiveness, antipsychotics have some negative side effects, including restlessness, muscle
spasms, dizziness, and blurred vision. In addition, their long-term use can cause permanentneurological damage, a condition called tardive dyskinesia that causes uncontrollable muscle
movements, usually in the mouth area (NIMH, 2008). Newer antipsychotics treat more symptoms
with fewer side effects than older medications (Casey, 1996).
387

The major classes and brand names of drugs used to treat psychological disorders are shown in
Table 11.2.
Table 11.2 Common Medications Used to Treat Psychological Disorders
Class

Type

Brand names Disorder

Notes

Ritalin,
Adderall,
Dexedrine

Attentiondeficit/hyperactivity
disorder (ADHD)

Very effective in most cases, atleast in the short term, at reducing
hyperactivity and inattention

Tricyclics

Elavil,Tofranil

Depression andanxiety disorders

Less frequently prescribed today
than are the serotonin reuptake
inhibitors (SSRIs)

SSRIs

Prozac, Paxil, Depression and
Zoloftanxiety disorders

Most frequently prescribed
antidepressant medications; workby blocking the reuptake ofserotonin

Other reuptake
inhibitors

Effexor,Celexa,Wellbutrin

Depression andanxiety disorders

Work by blocking the reuptake ofserotonin, norepinephrine, anddopamine

Brand
names
Eskalith,
Lithobid,
Depakene

DisorderBipolar disorder

T
Effective in reducing
the mood
swings associated with bipolar
disorderValium,Xanax

Anxiety, panic, anddepressive disorders

Work by increasing the action of
the neurotransmitter GABA

Thorazine,
Haldol,Clozaril,
Risperdal,
Zyprexa

Schizophrenia

Treat the positive and, to someextent, the negative symptoms ofschizophrenia by reducing thetransmission of dopamine andincreasing the transmission ofserotonin

Psychostimulants

AntidepressantsMood stabilizers

Antianxiety drugs

Antipsychotics(Neuroleptics)

Type

Tranquilizers(benzodiazepines)

Direct Brain Intervention Therapies
Electroconvulsive therapy (ECT): In cases of severe disorder, it may be desirable to directly
influence brain activity through electrical activation of the brain or through brain surgery.
Electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) is a medical procedure designed to alleviate psychologicaldisorder in which electric currents are passed through the brain, deliberately triggering a brief
seizure (see Figure 11.8). ECT has been used since the 1930s to treat severe depression.
When it was first developed, the procedure involved strapping the patient to a table before theelectricity was administered. The patient was knocked out by the shock, went into severe
convulsions, and awoke later, usually without any memory of what had happened. Today ECT isused only in the most severe cases when all other treatments have failed, and the practice is morehumane. The patient is first given muscle relaxants and a general anesthesia, and precisely
calculated electrical currents are used to achieve the most benefit with the fewest possible risks.
388

Figure 11.8 Electroconvulsive Therapy (ECT)ECT is very effective;
approximately 60%-80% of people
who undergo ECT report
improvements in their depression(Comer, 2015). ECT reduces
suicidal thoughts and is assumed tohave prevented many suicides(Kellner et al., 2005). On the other
hand, the positive effects of ECT
do not always last; over one-half ofpatients who undergo ECTexperience relapse within one year,
although antidepressant medication
can help reduce this outcome(Sackheim et al., 2001). ECT may
also cause temporary failure to
encode and store new memories or
cognitive impairment (Abrams,
1997; Sackheim et al., 2007).

Transcranial magnetic
stimulation: Although ECT
continues to be used, newer
approaches to treating chronic
Today’s ECT uses precisely calculated electrical currents to achieve
depression are also being
the most benefit with the fewest possible risks.
developed. A newer and gentler
method of brain stimulation is transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), a medical procedure
designed to reduce psychological disorder that uses a pulsing magnetic coil to electrically stimulate
the brain (see Figure 11.9). TMS seems to work by activating neural circuits in the prefrontal
cortex, which is less active in people with depression, causing an elevation of mood. TMS can be
performed without sedation, does not cause seizures or memory loss, and may be as effective as
ECT (Loo, Schweitzer, & Pratt, 2006; Rado, Dowd, & Janicak, 2008). However, Xia et al. (2008)
found a slight risk of treatment-emergent mania with repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation ofdepression after reviewing 53 controlled trials. The severity of the manic symptoms varied, but
after a decrease or discontinuation of antidepressants and/or TMS, all cases responded to treatment.
In addition to the treatment of depression, TMS has been effective in the treatment of mania,
schizophrenia, seizure disorder, and substance abuse, although it has proved ineffective forobsessive-compulsive disorder (Mishra et al., 2011).
Vagus nerve stimulution: Still other biomedical therapies are being developed for people withsevere depression that persists over years. One approach involves implanting a device in the chestthat stimulates the vagus nerve, a major nerve that descends from the brain stem toward the heart(Corcoran, Thomas, Phillips, & O’Keane, 2006; Nemeroff et al., 2006). When the vagus nerve isstimulated by the device, it activates brain structures that are less active in severely depressedpeople.

389

Figure 11.9 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation(TMS)

TMS is a noninvasive procedure that uses a pulsing magnetic coilto electrically stimulate the brain. Recently, TMS has been usedin the treatment of Parkinson’s disease.

Psychosurgery: Brain surgery used to
improve a psychological disorder, isknown as psychosurgery and isreserved for the most severe cases. The
most well-known psychosurgery was
the prefrontal lobotomy. Developed in1935 by Nobel Prize winner Egas
Moniz to treat severe phobias andanxiety, the procedure destroys theconnections between the prefrontal
cortex and the rest of the brain.
Lobotomies were performed on
thousands of patients. The procedure
was never validated scientifically andleft many patients in worse condition
than before, subjecting the alreadysuffering patients and their families tofurther heartbreak (Valenstein, 1986).
Perhaps the most notable failure was
the lobotomy performed on Rosemary
Kennedy, the sister of President John
F. Kennedy, which left her severely
incapacitated.

There are very few centers that still conduct psychosurgery today, and when such surgeries are
performed they are much more limited in nature (Dougherty et al., 2002). The ability to moreaccurately image and localize brain structures using modern neuroimaging techniques suggests that
new, more accurate, and more beneficial developments in psychosurgery may soon be available(Sachdev & Chen, 2009).
Deep Brain Stimulation: One such development that holds promise for many neuropsychiatricdisorders is deep brain stimulation, in which electrodes are inserted into specific brain areasand constant electrical pulses are delivered via a battery pack inserted under the collar bone.
The goal of the pulses is to alter the brain circuits that are causing the disorders. Deep brain
stimulation has been used to treat Parkinson’s disease, depression, dementia, obsessivecompulsive disorder, substance use, and obesity (Fisher, 2014). Despite successful cases, deepbrain stimulation is considered controversial given the ethical concerns raised when performing
brain surgery for neuropsychiatric disorders.

Effectiveness of Biomedical Therapies
Overall, meta-analyses support the effectiveness of drug therapies for psychological disorders. For
instance, the use of psychostimulants to reduce the symptoms of attention-deficit/hyperactivity
disorder (ADHD) is well known to be successful (Kring et al. 2016), and many studies find that thepositive and negative symptoms of schizophrenia are substantially reduced by the use of
antipsychotic medications (Lieberman et al., 2005).
390

People who take antidepressants for depressive disorders or antianxiety medications for anxiety
disorders almost always report feeling better, although drugs are less helpful for phobic disorderand obsessive-compulsive disorder. Some of these improvements are almost certainly the result ofplacebo effects (Cardeña & Kirsch, 2000), but the medications do work, at least in the short term.
Keller et al. (2001) had adolescents who were experiencing anxiety disorders take pills that they
thought would reduce anxiety for 8 weeks. However, one-half of the patients were randomly
assigned to actually receive the antianxiety drug Paxil, while the other half received a placebo drugthat did not have any medical properties. The researchers ruled out the possibility that only placebo
effects were occurring because they found that both groups improved over the 8 weeks, but thegroup that received Paxil improved significantly more than the placebo group did.
One problem with drug therapies is that although they provide temporary relief, they do not treat
the underlying cause of the disorder. Once the patient stops taking the drug, the symptoms often
return in full force. In addition, many drugs have negative side effects, and some also have thepotential for addiction and abuse. Different people have different reactions, and all drugs carrywarning labels. As a result, although these drugs are frequently prescribed, doctors attempt toprescribe the lowest doses possible for the shortest possible periods of time.
Older patients face special difficulties when they take medications for mental illness. Older people
are more sensitive to drugs, and drug interactions are more likely because older patients tend to takea variety of different drugs every day. They are more likely to forget to take their pills, to take too
many or too few, or to mix them up due to poor eyesight or faulty memory (Youdin, 2016).
Like all types of drugs, medications used in the treatment of mental illnesses can carry risks to anunborn infant. Tranquilizers should not be taken by women who are pregnant or expecting tobecome pregnant, because they may cause birth defects or other infant problems, especially iftaken during the first trimester. Some selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) may also
increase risks to the fetus (Louik, Lin, Werler, Hernandez, & Mitchell, 2007; U.S. Food andDrug Administration, 2004), as do antipsychotics (Diav-Citrin et al., 2005). Decisions on
medication should be carefully weighed and based on each person’s needs and circumstances.
Medications should be selected based on available scientific research, and they should beprescribed at the lowest possible dose. All people must be monitored closely while they are on
medications.

Key Takeaways
•
•
•

•

Biomedical therapies treat psychological disorders by influencing the actions of thecentral nervous system (CNS).
Psychostimulants are commonly prescribed to reduce the symptoms of ADHD.
Antidepressant drugs are used in the treatment of depression, anxiety, phobias, andobsessive-compulsive disorder. They gradually elevate mood by working to balance
neurotransmitters in the CNS. The most commonly prescribed antidepressants are the
SSRIs.
Mood stabilizers are prescribed to treat bipolar disorder.

391

•

Antianxiety drugs relieve apprehension, tension, and nervousness and are prescribedfor people with diagnoses of GAD, OCD, PTSD, and panic disorder. The drugs are
effective, but have severe side effects including dependence and withdrawal
symptoms.
• Antipsychotic drugs play a crucial role in the treatment of schizophrenia. They do
not cure schizophrenia, but they help reduce the positive, negative, and cognitive
symptoms, making it easier to live with the disease.
• Electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) is a controversial procedure used to treat severe
depression, in which electric currents are passed through the brain, deliberately
triggering a brief seizure.
• A newer method of brain stimulation is transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), a
noninvasive procedure that employs a pulsing magnetic coil to electrically stimulate
the brain.
• Deep brain stimulation uses constant electrical impulses delivered to the brain to
reduce psychiatric symptoms.
• Biomedical treatments are effective, at least in the short term, but overall, they areless effective than psychotherapy.
• Meta-analyses support the effectiveness of drug therapies for disorders, however,regularly monitoring is necessary, especially among the elderly and pregnant.
• A significant problem with drug therapies is that although they provide temporary
relief, they do not treat the underlying cause of the disorder

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. What are your opinions about taking drugs to improve psychological disorders?

Would you take an antidepressant or antianxiety medication if you were feelingdepressed or anxious? Do you think children with ADHD should be given stimulants?
Why or why not?
2. Based on what you have just read, would you be willing to undergo ECT or TMS
if you were chronically depressed and drug therapy had failed? Why or why not?

Social and Community Therapy
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the advantages of group therapy and self-help groups for treating disorders.
2. Evaluate the procedures and goals of community mental health services.
3. Describe the effectiveness of social and community approaches.

392

Although the individual therapies that we have discussed so far in this chapter focus primarily on
the psychological and biological aspects of the biopsychosocial model of mental disorders, thesocial dimension is never out of the picture. Therapists understand that disorders are caused, andpotentially prevented, in large part by the people with whom we interact. People withschizophrenia do not live in a vacuum. They interact with family members and with the othermembers of the community, and the behavior of those people may influence their disease. Further,
depression and anxiety are created primarily by the affected individual’s perceptions, as well as
misperceptions, of the important people around them. Thus, prevention and treatment are
influenced in large part by the social context in which the person is living.

Group, Couples, and Family TherapyGroup therapy: Practitioners sometimes incorporate the social setting in which disorders occur byconducting therapy in groups. Group therapy is psychotherapy in which clients receive
psychological treatment together with others. A professionally trained therapist guides the group,
usually between 6 and 10 participants, to create an atmosphere of support and emotional safety forthe participants (Yalom & Leszcz, 2005).
Group therapy provides a safe place
where people come together to shareproblems or concerns, to better
understand their own situations, and tolearn from and with each other. Grouptherapy is often cheaper than
individual therapy, as the therapist cantreat more people at the same time, but
economy is only one part of its
attraction. Group therapy allows
people to help each other, by sharing
ideas, problems, and solutions. It
provides social support, offers theknowledge that other people are facing
and successfully coping with similarGroup therapy provides a therapeutic setting where people meetwith others to share problems or concerns, to better understandsituations, and allows group members
their own situation, and to learn from and with each other. ©
to model the successful behaviors ofThinkstock
other group members. Group therapy
makes explicit the idea that our interactions with others may create, intensify, and potentiallyalleviate disorders.
Figure 11.10 Group TherapyGroup therapy has met with much success in the more than 50 years it has been in use, and it has
generally been found to be as, or more effective than, individual therapy (McDermut, Miller, &Brown, 2001). Group therapy is particularly effective for people who have a life-altering illness,
as it helps them cope better with their disease, enhances the quality of their lives, and in somecases, has even been shown to help them live longer (American Group Psychotherapy Association,2000).
393

Couples therapy: Sometimes group therapy is conducted with people who are in close
relationships. Couples therapy is treatment in which two people who are cohabitating, married, or
dating meet with the therapist to discuss their concerns and issues about their relationship. These
therapies are, in some cases, educational, providing the couple with information about what is to be
expected in a relationship. The therapy may focus on such topics as sexual enjoyment,
communication, or the symptoms of one of the partners (e.g., depression).
Family therapy: Families meeting together with a therapist is family therapy. In some cases, themeeting is precipitated by a particular problem with one family member, such as a diagnosis ofbipolar disorder in a child. Family therapy is based on the assumption that the problem, even if it isprimarily affecting one person, is the result of an interaction among the people in the family.

Self-Help Groups
Group therapy is based on the idea that people can be helped by the positive social relationshipsthat others provide. One way for people to gain this social support is by joining a self-help group,
which is a voluntary association of people who share a common desire to overcome psychologicaldisorders or improve their well-being (Humphreys & Rappaport, 1994). Self-help groups have beenused to help individuals cope with many types of addictive behaviors. Three of the best-known selfhelp groups are Alcoholics Anonymous, Gamblers Anonymous, and Overeaters Anonymous. The
idea behind self-groups is very similar to that of group therapy, but the groups are open to a broader
spectrum of people. As in group therapy, the benefits include social support, education, andobservational learning. Religion and spirituality are often emphasized, and self-blame is
discouraged. Regular group meetings are held with the supervision of a trained leader.

Community Mental Health Services
The social aspect of disorders is also understood and treated at the community level. Community
mental health services are psychological treatments and interventions that are distributed at thecommunity level. Community mental health services are provided by nurses, psychologists, social
workers, and other professionals in sites, such as schools, hospitals, police stations, drug treatment
clinics, and residential homes. The goal is to establish programs that will help people get the mental
health services that they need (Gonzales, Kelly, Mowbray, Hays, & Snowden, 1991).
Unlike traditional therapy, the primary goal of community mental health services is prevention.
Just as widespread vaccination of children has eliminated diseases, such as polio and smallpox,
mental health services are designed to prevent psychological disorders (Institute of Medicine,1994). Community prevention can be focused on one or more of three levels: Primary prevention,
secondary prevention, and tertiary prevention:•

Primary prevention is prevention in which all members of the community receive thetreatment. Examples of primary prevention are programs designed to encourage all
pregnant women to avoid cigarettes and alcohol because of the risk of health problems forthe fetus, and programs designed to remove dangerous lead paint from homes.

394

•

Secondary prevention is more limited and focuses on people who are most likely to need it.
This includes those who display risk factors for a given disorder. Risk factors are thesocial, environmental, and economic vulnerabilities that make it more likely than averagethat a given individual will develop a disorder (Werner & Smith, 1992).

•

Tertiary prevention is treatment, such as psychotherapy or biomedical therapy, that
focuses on people who are already diagnosed with a disorder.

Some Risk Factors for Psychological Disorders
Community mental health workers practicing secondary prevention will focus on youths with thesemarkers of future problems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Academic difficulties
Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD)
Child abuse and neglect
Developmental disorders
Drug and alcohol abuse
Dysfunctional family
Early pregnancy
Emotional immaturity
Homelessness
Learning disorder
Low birth weight
Parental mental illness
Poor nutrition
Poverty

Finally, community prevention programs are designed to provide support during childhood or earlyadolescence with the hope that the interventions will prevent disorders from appearing or will keep
existing disorders from expanding. Interventions include such things as help with housing,counseling, group therapy, emotional regulation, job and skills training, literacy training, social
responsibility training, exercise, stress management, rehabilitation, family therapy, or removing achild from a stressful or dangerous home situation.
The goal of community interventions is to make it easier for individuals to continue to live anormal life in the face of their problems. Community mental health services are designed to make itless likely that vulnerable populations will end up in institutions or on the streets. In summary, theirgoal is to allow at-risk individuals to continue to participate in community life by assisting themwithin their own communities.

Effectiveness of Social-Community Approaches
Measuring the effectiveness of community action approaches to mental health is difficult because
they occur in community settings and impact a wide variety of people, and it is difficult to find andassess valid outcome measures. Nevertheless, research has found that a variety of community
interventions can be effective in preventing a variety of psychological disorders (Price, Cowen,
395

Lorion, & Ramos-McKay, 1988). Data suggest that federally funded prevention programs, such as
the Special Supplemental Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC), which provides
federal grants to states for supplemental foods, health-care referral, and nutrition education for lowincome women and their children, are successful. WIC mothers have higher birth weight babies andlower infant mortality than other low-income mothers (Ripple & Zigler, 2003). The average
blood-lead levels among children have fallen approximately 80% since the late 1970s as a result offederal legislation designed to remove lead paint from housing (Centers for Disease Control andPrevention, 2000).
Although some of the many community-based programs designed to reduce alcohol, tobacco, anddrug abuse; violence and delinquency; and mental illness have been successful, the changes
brought about by even the best of these programs are, on average, modest (Wandersman & Florin,
2003; Wilson, Gottfredson, & Najaka, 2001). This does not necessarily mean that the programs are
not useful. What is important is that community members continue to work with researchers to help
determine which aspects of which programs are most effective, and to concentrate efforts on themost productive approaches (Weissberg, Kumpfer, & Seligman, 2003). The most beneficial
preventive interventions for young people involve coordinated, systemic efforts to enhance theirsocial and emotional competence and health. Many psychologists continue to work to promote
policies that support community prevention as a model of preventing disorders.

Key Takeaways•

Group therapy is psychotherapy in which clients receive psychological treatment
together with others. A professionally trained therapist guides the group. Types ofgroup therapy include couples therapy and family therapy.
• Self-help groups have been used to help individuals cope with many types of disorder.
• The goal of community health service programs is to act during childhood or earlyadolescence with the hope that interventions might prevent disorders fromappearing or keep existing disorders from expanding. The prevention provided canbe primary, secondary, or tertiary.
• Federally funded community mental health service programs are effective, but theirpreventive effects may in many cases be minor.

Exercise and Critical Thinking
1.

Imagine the impact of a natural disaster like Hurricane Katrina on the population of
the city of New Orleans. How would you expect such an event to affect theprevalence of psychological disorders in the community? What recommendations
would you make in terms of setting up community support centers to help the people
in the city?

396

Eclectic Approach to Therapy and Seeking Treatment
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the eclectic approach to providing therapy.
2. Describe how to seek treatment for a psychological disorder.
To this point, we have considered the different approaches to therapy under the assumption that atherapist will use only one approach with a given patient, but this is not the case as you saw inFigure 11.1. The most commonly practiced approach to therapy is eclectic therapy, an approach
to treatment in which the therapist uses whichever techniques seem most useful and relevant for agiven patient. For bipolar disorder, for instance, the therapist may use both psychotherapy to help
the patient cope with the severe highs and lows, but may also suggest that the patient consider
biomedical drug therapies (Newman, Leahy, Beck, Reilly-Harrington, & Gyulai, 2002). Treatment
for major depressive disorder usually involves antidepressant drugs, as well as CBT, to help thepatient deal with their specific problems (McBride, Farvolden, & Swallow, 2007).
As we have seen in Chapter 10, one of the most commonly diagnosed disorders is borderline
personality disorder (BPD). Consider this description, typical of the type of borderline patient who
arrives at a therapist’s office:Even as an infant, it seemed that there was something different about Bethany. She was an intensebaby, easily upset and difficult to comfort. She had very severe separation anxiety. If her motherleft the room, Bethany would scream until she returned. In her early teens, Bethany became
increasingly sullen and angry. She started acting out more and more by yelling at her parents andteachers and engaging in impulsive behavior such as promiscuity and running away from home. At
times Bethany would have a close friend at school, but some conflict always developed and thefriendship would end.
By the time Bethany turned 17, her mood changes were totally unpredictable. She was fightingwith her parents almost daily, and the fights often included violent behavior on Bethany’s part. At
times she seemed terrified to be without her mother, but at other times she would leave the house ina fit of rage and not return for a few days. One day, Bethany’s mother noticed scars on Bethany’sarms. When confronted about them, Bethany said that one night she just got more and more lonely
and nervous about a recent breakup until she finally stuck a lit cigarette into her arm. She said, “I
didn’t really care for him that much, but I had to do something dramatic.”
When she was 18 Bethany rented a motel room where she took an overdose of sleeping pills. Hersuicide attempt was not successful, but the authorities required that she seek psychological help.
Most therapists will deal with a case such as Bethany’s using an eclectic approach. First, because
her negative mood states are so severe, the therapist will likely recommend that she see her
physician or a psychiatrist to get a prescription for antidepressant medications. These drugs arelikely to help her feel better and will reduce the possibility of another suicide attempt. However,some drugs have unwanted side effects and may increase the risk of suicide in younger people. In
addition, drugs will not change the underlying psychological problems. Therefore, the therapist will
also provide psychotherapy.
397

The therapy may be done at a psychiatric hospital if Bethany is still at high risk for self-destructive
behavior. In addition to 24-hour supervision, hospitalization may also provide Bethany withongoing support provided by a team of professionals. Before starting treatment, the therapist willconduct a thorough evaluation. The first sessions of the therapy will likely be based primarily on
creating trust. Person-centered approaches will be used in which the therapist attempts to create atherapeutic alliance conducive to a frank and open exchange of information.
If the therapist is trained in a psychodynamic approach, he or she will probably begin intensive
face-to-face psychotherapy sessions at least three times a week. The therapist may focus onchildhood experiences related to Bethany’s attachment difficulties, but will also focus in large parton the causes of the present behavior. The therapist will understand that because Bethany does nothave good relationships with other people, she will likely seek a close bond with the therapist, but
the therapist will probably not allow the transference relationship to develop fully. The therapist
will also realize that Bethany will probably try to resist the work of the therapist.
Most likely the therapist will also use principles of CBT. For one, cognitive therapy will likely be
used in an attempt to change Bethany’s distortions of reality. She feels that people are rejecting her,but she is probably bringing these rejections on herself. If she can learn to better understand themeaning of other people’s actions, she may feel better. Also, the therapist will likely begin using
some techniques of behavior therapy, for instance, by rewarding Bethany for successful social
interactions and progress toward meeting her important goals.
The eclectic therapist will continue to monitor Bethany’s behavior as the therapy continues,
bringing into play whatever therapeutic tools seem most beneficial. Hopefully, Bethany will stay intreatment long enough to make some real progress in repairing her broken life.
Another example of an eclectic treatment approach that has been shown to be successful in treating
BPD is dialectical behavioral therapy (DBT) (Linehan & Dimeff, 2001). DBT is essentially a
cognitive therapy, but it includes an emphasis on attempting to enlist the help of the patient in his or
her own treatment. A dialectical behavioral therapist begins by attempting to develop a positive
therapeutic alliance with the client, and then tries to encourage the patient to become part of thetreatment process. In DBT the therapist aims to accept and validate the client’s feelings at any given
time, while nonetheless informing the client that some feelings and behaviors are maladaptive, andshowing the client better alternatives. The therapist will use both individual and group therapy,
helping the patient work toward improving interpersonal effectiveness, emotion regulation, anddistress tolerance skills.

Seeking Treatment for Psychological Disorders
Many people who would benefit from psychotherapy do not get it, either because they do not know
how to find it or because they feel that they will be stigmatized and embarrassed if they seek help.
The decision to not seek help is a very poor choice because the effectiveness of mental healthtreatments is well documented, and no matter where a person lives, there are treatments available(U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 1999).

398

The first step in seeking help for psychological problems is to accept the stigma. It is possible thatsome of your colleagues, friends, and family members will know that you are seeking help andsome may at first think more negatively of you for it, but you must get past these unfair and closeminded responses. Feeling good about yourself is the most important thing you can do, andseeking help may be the first step in doing so.
The question of when someone needs help is not always easy to answer because there is no clear
demarcation between “normal” and “abnormal” behavior. Generally, you will know that you orothers need help when one’s psychological state is negatively influencing everyday behavior, when
the behavior is adversely affecting those around the person, and when the problems continue over a
period of time. Often people seek therapy as a result of general depression and anxiety, but therapy
is also effective for life-changing events, such as the diagnosis of a fatal illness, an upcoming
marriage or divorce, or the death of a loved one, as well as specific everyday problems.
There are a wide variety of therapy choices, many of which are free. Begin in your school,community, or church, asking about community health or counseling centers and pastoral
counseling. You may want to ask friends and family members for recommendations. You willprobably be surprised at how many people have been to counseling, and how many recommend it.
There are many therapists who offer a variety of treatment options. Be sure to ask about thedegrees that the therapist has earned, and about the reputation of the center in which the therapy
occurs. If you have choices, try to find a person or location that you like, respect, and trust. This
will allow you to be more open, and you will get more out of the experience. Your sessions withthe help provider will require discussing your family history, personality, and relationships, andyou should feel comfortable sharing this information.
Remember also that confronting issues requires time to reflect, energy to get to the appointments
and deal with consequential feelings, and discipline to explore your issues on your own. Success attherapy is difficult, and it takes effort.
The bottom line is that going for therapy should not be a difficult decision for you. All people havethe right to appropriate mental health care just as they have a right to general health care. Just as
you go to a dentist for a toothache, you may go to therapy for psychological difficulties.
Furthermore, you can be confident that you will be treated with respect and that your privacy will
be protected, because therapists follow ethical principles in their practices.
The following is a summary of these principles as developed by the American Psychological
Association (2010):• Psychologists inform their clients/patients as early as possible in the therapeutic
relationship about the nature and anticipated course of therapy, fees, involvement of third
parties, and limits of confidentiality, and provide sufficient opportunity for theclient/patient to ask questions and receive answers.
• Psychologists inform their clients/patients of the developing nature of the treatment, thepotential risks involved, alternative treatments that may be available, and about thevoluntary nature of their participation.
399

•

When the therapist is a trainee, the client/patient is informed that the therapist is in training
and is being supervised, and is given the name of the supervisor.
When psychologists agree to provide services to several persons who have a relationship,such as spouses, significant others, or parents and children, they take reasonable steps toclarify at the outset which of the individuals are clients/patients and the relationship thepsychologist will have with each person.
If it becomes apparent that a psychologist may be called on to perform potentiallyconflicting roles, such as family therapist and then witness for one party in divorce
proceedings, the psychologist takes reasonable steps to clarify and modify, or withdraw
from, roles appropriately.
When psychologists provide services to several persons in a group setting, they describe at
the outset the roles and responsibilities of all parties and the limits of confidentiality.
Psychologists do not engage in sexual intimacies with current therapy clients/patients, orwith individuals they know to be close relatives, guardians, or significant others of current
clients/patients. Psychologists do not terminate therapy to circumvent this standard.
Psychologists do not accept as therapy clients, patients, or persons with whom they haveengaged in sexual intimacies, nor do they have sexual intimacies with former
clients/patients for at least 2 years after cessation or termination of therapy.
Psychologists terminate therapy when it becomes reasonably clear that the client/patient nolonger needs the service, is not likely to benefit, or is being harmed by continued service.

•

•

•
•

•

Key Takeaways•••

Eclectic therapy is the most common approach to treatment. In eclectic therapy, thetherapist uses whatever treatment approaches seem most likely to be effective for theclient.
Everyone has the right to appropriate mental health care.
Licensed therapists follow ethical principles in their practices to protect the rights ofclients.

Exercises and Critical Thinking
1. Given your knowledge about the effectiveness of therapies, what approaches would

you take if you were making recommendations for a person who is seeking treatment
for severe depression?

Chapter Summary
Psychological disorders create a tremendous individual, social, and economic drain on society.
Psychologists work to reduce this burden by preventing and treating disorder. Psychologists basethis treatment and prevention of disorders on the biopsychosocial model, which proposes thatdisorder has biological, psychological, and social causes, and that each of these aspects can be thefocus of reducing disorder.
400

Therapy, or treatment for psychological disorders, begins with a formal psychological assessment.
In addition to the psychological assessment, the patient is usually seen by a physician to gain
information about physical problems.
One approach to treatment is psychotherapy. The fundamental aspect of psychotherapy is that thepatient directly confronts the disorder and works with the therapist to help reduce it.
Psychodynamic therapy is a psychological treatment based on Freudian and neo-Freudian theories.
The analyst engages with the patient in one-on-one sessions during which the patient verbalizes hisor her thoughts through free associations. The goal of the therapy is to help the patient develop
insight; that is, an understanding of early childhood relationships and the unconscious causes of thedisorder.
Humanistic therapy is a psychological treatment based on the theories of Carl Rogers and otherhumanistic psychologists. Humanistic therapies attempt to promote growth and responsibility byhelping clients consider their own situations and the world around them, and how they can work toachieve their life goals.
Humanistic therapy promotes the ideas of genuineness, empathy, and unconditional positive regard
in a nurturing relationship in which the therapist actively listens to and reflects the feelings of theclient. This relationship is probably the most fundamental part of contemporary psychotherapy.
Behavioral therapy may include operant conditioning using reward or punishment. When thedisorder is anxiety or phobia, then the goal is to reduce the negative affective responses to thefeared stimulus through exposure therapy, flooding, or systematic desensitization. Aversion therapy
is a type of behavior therapy in which classical conditioning is used to reduce the frequency of anundesirable behavior.
Cognitive therapy includes treatment that helps clients identify incorrect or distorted beliefs that arecontributing to disorder. Cognitive-behavior therapy (CBT) is a structured approach to treatmentthat attempts to reduce psychological disorders through systematic procedures based on cognitiveand behavioral principles. CBT is a very broad approach used for the treatment of a variety ofproblems.
Psychologists use outcome research to determine the effectiveness of different therapies. Thesestudies help determine if improvement is due to natural improvement, nonspecific treatment
effects, or placebo effects. Research finds that psychotherapy is effective in treating disorders, butthere is not much evidence that any one type of therapy is more effective than any other type.
What all good therapies have in common is that they give people hope; help them think more
carefully about themselves and about their relationships with others; and provide a positive,
empathic, and trusting relationship with the therapist, known as the therapeutic alliance.
Biomedical therapies are treatments designed to reduce psychological disorder by influencing theaction of the central nervous system. These therapies primarily involve the use of medications, butalso include direct methods of brain intervention, including electroconvulsive therapy (ECT),transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), and psychosurgery.
401

Depressive disorders are most commonly treated with the antidepressant medications known as
selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), including Prozac, Paxil, and Zoloft. The SSRIs
selectively block the reuptake of serotonin at the synapse. Bipolar disorder is treated with moodstabilizing medications. Antianxiety medications, including the tranquilizers Ativan, Valium, andXanax, are used to treat anxiety disorders.
Schizophrenia is treated with antipsychotic drugs, including Thorazine, Haldol, Clozaril,
Risperdal, and Zyprexa. Some drugs treat the positive symptoms of schizophrenia, and others treat
both the positive, negative, and cognitive symptoms. Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder(ADHD) is treated using psychostimulants, including Ritalin, Adderall, and Dexedrine.
One problem with drug therapies is that, although they provide temporary relief, they do not treat
the underlying cause of the disorder. Once the patient stops taking the drug, the symptoms often
return in full force.
Practitioners frequently incorporate the social setting in which disorder occurs by conducting
therapy in groups, with couples, or with families. One way for people to gain this social support isby joining a self-help group.
Community mental health services refer to psychological treatments and interventions that are
distributed at the community level. These centers provide primary, secondary, and tertiary
prevention.
Data suggest that although some community prevention programs are successful, the changes
brought about by even the best of these programs are, on average, modest.
The most commonly used approaches to therapy are eclectic, such that the therapist uses whichevertechniques seem most useful and relevant for a given patient.
Licensed therapists follow ethical principles in their practices to protect the rights of clients.

References
Abrams, R. (1997). Electroconvulsive therapy (3rd ed.). Oxford, England: Oxford University Press.
Ahn, H.-N., & Wampold, B. E. (2001). Where oh where are the specific ingredients? A meta-analysis of component
studies in counseling and psychotherapy. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 48(3), 251–257.
Allen K. W. (1996). Chronic nailbiting: A controlled comparison of competing response and mild aversion treatments.
Behaviour Research and Therapy, 34, 269–272. doi:10.1016/0005-7967(95)00078-X
American Group Psychotherapy Association. (2000). About group psychotherapy. Retrieved fromhttp://www.groupsinc.org/group/consumersguide2000.html
American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (5th ed.).
Washington, DC: Author.

402

American Psychological Association. (2010). Ethical principles of psychologists and code of conduct. Retrieved fromhttp://www.apa.org/ethics/code/index.aspx?item=7#402
Baker, T. B., & Cannon, D. S. (1988). Assessment and treatment of addictive disorders. New York, NY: Praeger.
Beck, A. T. (1976). Cognitive therapy and the emotional disorders. New York, NY: New American Library.
Beck, A. T., Freeman, A., & Davis, D. D. (2004). Cognitive therapy of personality disorders (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Guilford Press.
Beck, J. S. (1995). Cognitive therapy: Basics and beyond. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Beck, N. A. Reilly-Harrington, & L. Gyulai (Eds.), Bipolar disorder: A cognitive therapy approach (pp. 79–100).
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association. doi:10.1037/10442-004
Biedermann, F., & Fleischhacker, W. W. (2009). Antipsychotics in the early stage of development. Current Opinion
Psychiatry, 22, 326–330.
Butler A. C., Chapman, J. E., Forman, E. M., Beck, A. T. (2006). The empirical status of cognitive-behavioral therapy:
A review of meta-analyses. Clinical Psychology Review, 26(1), 17–31. doi:10.1016/j.cpr.2005.07.003.
Cardeña, E., & Kirsch, I. (2000). True or false: The placebo effect as seen in drug studies is definitive proof that themind can bring about clinically relevant changes in the body: What is so special about the placebo effect? Advances in
Mind-Body Medicine, 16(1), 16–18.
Casey, D. E. (1996). Side effect profiles of new antipsychotic agents. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 57(Suppl. 11), 40–
45.
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (2000). Blood lead levels in young children: United States and selectedstates, 1996–1999. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 49, 1133–1137.
Chambless, D. L., & Hollon, S. D. (1998). Defining empirically supported therapies. Journal of Consulting andClinical Psychology, 66(1), 7–18.
Comer, R. J. (2015). Abnormal psychology (9th ed.). NY: Worth.
Corcoran, C. D., Thomas, P., Phillips, J., & O’Keane, V. (2006). Vagus nerve stimulation in chronic treatmentresistant depression: Preliminary findings of an open-label study. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 189, 282–283.
Crits-Christoph, P. (1992). The efficacy of brief dynamic psychotherapy: A meta-analysis. American Journal of
Psychiatry, 149, 151–158.
Crits-Christoph, P., Gibbons, M. B., Losardo, D., Narducci, J., Schamberger, M., & Gallop, R. (2004). Who benefits
from brief psychodynamic therapy for generalized anxiety disorder? Canadian Journal of Psychoanalysis, 12, 301–
324.
Cuijpers, P., van Straten, A., Andersson, G., & van Oppen, P. (2008). Psychotherapy for depression in adults: A metaanalysis of comparative outcome studies. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 76(6), 909–922.
Dalgleish, T. (2004). Cognitive approaches to posttraumatic stress disorder: The evolution of multirepresentational
theorizing. Psychological Bulletin, 130, 228–260.
Deacon, B. J., & Abramowitz, J. S. (2004). Cognitive and behavioral treatments for anxiety disorders: A review ofmeta-analytic findings. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 60(4), 429–441.

403

Deshauer, D., Moher, D., Fergusson, D., Moher, E., Sampson, M., & Grimshaw, J. (2008). Selective serotonin reuptake
inhibitors for unipolar depression: A systematic review of classic long-term randomized controlled trials. Canadian
Medical Association Journal, 178(10), 1293–301. doi:10.1503/cmaj.071068.
Diav-Citrin, O., Shechtman, S., Ornoy, S., Arnon, J., Schaefer, C., Garbis, H.,…Ornoy, A. (2005). Safety of
haloperidol and penfluridol in pregnancy: A multicenter, prospective, controlled study. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry,66, 317–322.
Dougherty, D., Baer, L., Cosgrove, G., Cassem, E., Price, B., Nierenberg, A.,…Rauch, S. L. (2002). Prospective longterm follow-up of 44 patients who received cingulotomy for treatment-refractory obsessive- compulsive disorder.
American Journal of Psychiatry, 159(2), 269.
Ellis, A. (2004). Why rational emotive behavior therapy is the most comprehensive and effective form of behavior
therapy. Journal of Rational-Emotive & Cognitive-Behavior Therapy, 22, 85–92.
Epstein J., Stern E., & Silbersweig, D. (2001). Neuropsychiatry at the millennium: The potential for mind/brain
integration through emerging interdisciplinary research strategies. Clinical Neuroscience Research, 1, 10–18.
Fisher, C.E. (2014). Psychiatry’s new surgeons. Scientific American Mind, 25(1), 24-25.
Fraser, A. R. (2000). Antidepressant choice to minimize treatment resistance. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 176,
493.
Gonzales, L. R., Kelly, J. G., Mowbray, C. T., Hays, R. B., & Snowden, L. R. (1991). Community mental health. In M.
Hersen, A. E. Kazdin, & A. S. Bellack (Eds.), The clinical psychology handbook (2nd ed., pp. 762–779). Elmsford, NY:
Pergamon Press.
Granholm, E., McQuaid, J. R., Link, P. C., Fish, S., Patterson, T., & Jeste, D. V. (2008). Neuropsychological predictorsof functional outcome in cognitive behavioral social skills training for older people with schizophrenia. Schizophrenia
Research, 100, 133–143. doi:10.1016/j.schres.2007.11.032.
Hansell, J., Ehrlich, J., Katz, W., Lerner, H., & Minter, K. (2008). Psychoanalysis & psychodynamic psychology.
American Psychological Association. Retrieved fromhttp://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/topss/lesson/secure/psychoanalysis.pdf
Healy, D., & Whitaker, C. J. (2003). Antidepressants and suicide: Risk-benefit conundrums. Journal of Psychiatry &Neuroscience, 28, 331–339.
Herbert, J. D., Gaudini, B. A., Rheingold, A. A., Myers, V. H., Dalrymple, K., & Nolan, E. M. (2005). Social skills
training augments the effectiveness of cognitive behavioral group therapy for social anxiety disorder. Behavior
Therapy, 36, 125–138.
Hofmann, S. G. (2018). Clinical psychology. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Hollon, S., Stewart, M., & Strunk, D. (2006). Enduring effects for cognitive therapy in the treatment of depression andanxiety. Annual Review of Psychology, 57, 285–316.
Hollon, S. D., Thase, M. E., & Markowitz, J. C. (2002). Treatment and prevention of depression.
Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 3, 39–77.
Houts, A. C., Berman, J. S., & Abramson, H. (1994). Effectiveness of psychological and pharmacological treatments
for nocturnal enuresis. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 62(4), 737–745.
Humphreys, K., & Rappaport, J. (1994). Researching self-help/mutual aid groups and organizations: Many roads, one
journey. Applied and Preventative Psychology, 3(4), 217–231.

404

Hunsley, J., & Di Giulio, G. (2002). Dodo bird, phoenix, or urban legend? The question of psychotherapy equivalence.
The Scientific Review of Mental Health Practice: Objective Investigations of Controversial and Unorthodox Claims in
Clinical Psychology, Psychiatry, and Social Work, 1(1), 11–22.
Institute of Medicine. (1994). Reducing risks for mental disorders: Frontiers for preventive
Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

intervention

research.

Keller, M. B., Ryan, N. D., Strober, M., Klein, R. G., Kutcher, S. P., Birmaher, B.,…McCafferty, J. P. (2001). Efficacy
of paroxetine in the treatment of adolescent major depression: A randomized, controlled trial. Journal of the American
Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 40(7), 762–772.
Kellner, C. H., Fink, M., Knapp, R., Petrides, G., Husain, M., Rummans, T.,…Malur, C. (2005). Relief of expressedsuicidal intent by ECT: A consortium for research in ECT study. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 162(5), 977–982.
Konnopka, A., Leichsenring, F., Leibing, E., & König, H.-H. (2009). Cost-of-illness studies and cost- effectivenessanalyses in anxiety disorders: A systematic review. Journal of Affective Disorders, 114(1–3), 14–31.
Kowatch, R. A., Suppes, T., Carmody, T. J., Bucci, J. P., Hume, J. H., Kromelis, M., …Rush, A. J. (2000). Effect sizeof lithium, divalproex sodium, and carbamazepine in children and adolescents with bipolar disorder. Journal of theAmerican Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 39, 713–20.
Kring, A. M., Johnson, S. L., Davison, G., & Neale, J. (2016). Abnormal psychology (13th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Krampe, H., Stawicki, S., Wagner, T., Bartels, C., Aust, C., Rüther, E. ,…Ehrenreich, H. (2006). Follow-up of 180
alcoholic patients for up to 7 years after outpatient treatment: Impact of alcohol deterrents on outcome. Alcoholism:
Clinical and Experimental Research, 30(1), 86–95.
Leahy, R. L. (2003). Cognitive therapy techniques: A practitioner’s guide. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Levenson, H. (2010). Brief dynamic therapy. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Lieberman, J., Stroup, T., McEvoy, J., Swartz, M., Rosenheck, R., Perkins, D., …Lebowitz, B. D. (2005). Effectivenessof antipsychotic drugs in patients with chronic schizophrenia. New England Journal of Medicine, 353(12), 1209.
Linehan, M. M., & Dimeff, L. (2001). Dialectical behavior therapy in a nutshell. The California Psychologist, 34, 10–13.
Loo, C. K., Schweitzer, I., & Pratt, C. (2006). Recent advances in optimizing electroconvulsive therapy. Australian and
New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 40, 632–638.
Louik, C., Lin, A. E., Werler M. M., Hernandez, S., & Mitchell, A. A. (2007). First-trimester use of selective serotoninreuptake inhibitors and the risk of birth defects. New England Journal of Medicine, 356, 2675–2683.
Lubarsky, L., & Barrett, M. S. (2006). The history and empirical status of key psychoanalytic concepts. Annual Reviewof Clinical Psychology, 2, 1–19.
Marangell, L. B., Silver, J. M., Goff, D. C., & Yudofsky, S. C. (2003). Psychopharmacology and electroconvulsive
therapy. In R. E. Hales & S. C. Yudofsky (Eds.), The American Psychiatric Publishing textbook of clinical psychiatry(4th ed., pp. 1047–1149). Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing.
McBride, C., Farvolden, P., & Swallow, S. R. (2007). Major depressive disorder and cognitive schemas. In L.P. Riso, P.
L. du Toit, D. J. Stein, & J. E. Young (Eds.), Cognitive schemas and core beliefs in psychological problems: A
scientist-practitioner guide (pp. 11–39). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
McDermut, W., Miller, I. W., & Brown, R. A. (2001). The efficacy of group psychotherapy for depression: A metaanalysis and review of the empirical research. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 8(1), 98–116.

405

McElroy, S. L., & Keck, P. E. (2000). Pharmacologic agents for the treatment of acute bipolar mania. BiologicalPsychiatry, 48, 539–557.
Mishra, B.R., Sarkar, S., Praharaj, S.K., Mehta, V.S., Diwedi, S. & Nizamie, S.H. (2011). Repetitive transcranial
magnetic stimulation in psychiatry. Annals of Indian Academy of Neurology, 14(4), 245-251.
National Institute of Mental Health. (2008). Mental health medications (NIH Publication No. 08-3929). Retrieved fromhttp://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/mental-health-medications/complete-index.shtml#pub4
National Sleep Foundation. (2008). Sleep in America poll. Retrieved fromhttp://www.sleepfoundation.org/sites/default/files/2008%20POLL%20SOF.PDF.
Nemeroff, C., Mayberg, H., Krahl, S., McNamara, J., Frazer, A., Henry, T.,…Brannan, S. (2006). VNS therapy intreatment-resistant depression: Clinical evidence and putative neurobiological mechanisms.
Neuropsychopharmacology, 31(7), 1345–1355.
Newman, C. F., Leahy, R. L., Beck, A. T., Reilly-Harrington, N. A., & Gyulai, L. (2002). Clinical management ofdepression, hopelessness, and suicidality in patients with bipolar disorder. In C. F. Newman, R. L. Leahy, A. T.
Norcross, J. C., Hedges, M., & Castle, P. H. (2002). Psychologists conducting psychotherapy in 2001: A study of theDivision 29 membership. Psychotherapy: Theory, Research, Practice, Training, 39(1), 97-102.
Novotney, A. (2017). Not your great-grandfathers’ psychoanalysis. Monitor on Psychology, 48(11), 40-48.
Otto, M. W., Pollack, M. H., Sachs, G. S., Reiter, S. R., Meltzer-Brody, S., & Rosenbaum, J. F. (1993). Discontinuationof benzodiazepine treatment: Efficacy of cognitive-behavioral therapy for patients with panic disorder. American
Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 1485–1490.
Price, R. H., Cowen, E. L., Lorion, R. P., & Ramos-McKay, J. (Eds.). (1988). Fourteen ounces of prevention: A
casebook for practitioners. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Prochaska, J. O., & Norcross, J. C. (2007). Systems of psychotherapy: A transtheoretical analysis (6th ed.). PacificGrove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Prus, A. (2018). Drugs and the neuroscience of behavior (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Rado, J., Dowd, S. M., & Janicak, P. G. (2008). The emerging role of transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) for
treatment of psychiatric disorders. Directions in Psychiatry, 28(4), 315–332.
Ripple, C. H., & Zigler, E. (2003). Research, policy, and the federal role in prevention initiatives for children. American
Psychologist, 58(6–7), 482–490.
Rogers, C. (1980). A way of being. New York, NY: Houghton Mifflin.
Ruwaard, J., Broeksteeg, J., Schrieken, B., Emmelkamp, P., & Lange, A. (2010). Web-based therapist-assisted
cognitive behavioral treatment of panic symptoms: A randomized controlled trial with a three-year follow-up. Journalof Anxiety Disorders, 24(4), 387–396.
Sachdev, P. S., & Chen, X. (2009). Neurosurgical treatment of mood disorders: Traditional psychosurgery and theadvent of deep brain stimulation. Current Opinion in Psychiatry, 22(1), 25–31.
Sackheim, H. A., Haskett, R. F., Mulsant, B. H., Thase, M. E., Mann, J. J., Pettinati, H.,…Prudic, J. (2001).
Continuation pharmacotherapy in the prevention of relapse following electroconvulsive therapy: A randomized
controlled trial. Journal of the American Medical Association, 285, 1299–1307.

406

Sackeim, H. A., Prudic, J., Fuller, R., Keilp, J., Philip, W., Lavori, P. W., & Olfson, M. (2007). The cognitive effects ofelectroconvulsive therapy in community settings. Neuropsychopharmacology, 32, 244–254.
doi:10.1038/sj.npp.1301180
Scattone, D. (2007). Social skills interventions for children with autism. Psychology in the schools, 44, 717–726.
Shadish, W. R., & Baldwin, S. A. (2002). Meta-analysis of MFT interventions. In D. H. Sprenkle (Ed.), Effectivenessresearch in marriage and family therapy (pp. 339–370). Alexandria, VA: American Association for Marriage andFamily Therapy.
Shedler, J. (2010). The efficacy of psychodynamic psychotherapy. American Psychologist, 65(2), 98–109.
Simon, G. E. (2006). The antidepressant quandary—Considering suicide risk when treating adolescent depression. The
New England Journal of Medicine, 355, 2722–2723.
Simon, G. E., Savarino, J., Operskalski, B., & Wang, P. S. (2006). Suicide risk during antidepressant treatment.
American Journal of Psychiatry, 163, 41–47. doi:10.1176/appi.ajp.163.1.41
Smit, F., Cuijpers, P., Oostenbrink, J., Batelaan, N., de Graaf, R., & Beekman, A. (2006). Costs of nine common mental
disorders: Implications for curative and preventive psychiatry. Journal of Mental Health Policy and Economics, 9(4),
193–200.
Smith, M. L., Glass, G. V., & Miller, R. L. (1980). The benefits of psychotherapy. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins
University Press.
Turner, E. H., Matthews, A. M., Linardatos, E., Tell, R. A., & Rosenthal, R. (2008). Selective publication ofantidepressant trials and its influence on apparent efficacy. New England Journal of Medicine, 358(3), 252–60.
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (1999). Mental health: A report of the surgeon general. Washington,
DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.
U.S. Food and Drug Administration. (2004). FDA Medwatch drug alert on Effexor and SSRIs. Retrieved fromhttp://www.fda.gov/medwatch/safety/2004/safety04.htm#effexor
Valenstein, E. (1986). Great and desperate cures: The rise and decline of psychosurgery and other radical treatments
for mental illness. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Wandersman, A., & Florin, P. (2003). Community interventions and effective prevention. American Psychologist, 58(6–7), 441–448.
Weissberg, R. P., Kumpfer, K. L., & Seligman, M. E. P. (2003). Prevention that works for children and youth: An
introduction. American Psychologist, 58(6–7), 425–432.
Werner, E. E., & Smith, R. S. (1992). Overcoming the odds: High risk children from birth to adulthood. New York,
NY: Cornell University Press.
Wilson, D. B., Gottfredson, D. C., & Najaka, S. S. (2001). School-based prevention of problem behaviors: A metaanalysis. Journal of Quantitative Criminology, 17(3), 247–272.
Wolpe J. (1973). The practice of behavior therapy. New York, NY: Pergamon.
World Health Organization. (2004). Prevention of mental disorders: Effective interventions and policy options:
Summary report. Retrieved fromhttp://www.who.int/mental_health/evidence/en/Prevention_of_Mental_Disorders.pdf

407

Xia, G., Gajwani, P., Muzina, D.J., Kemp, D.E., Gao, K., Ganocy, S.J., & Calabrese, J.R. (2008). Treatment-emergent
mania in unipolar and bipolar depression: focus on repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation. International Journal of
Neuropsychopharmacology, 11(1), 119-130.
Yalom, I., & Leszcz, M. (2005). The theory and practice of group psychotherapy (5th ed.). New York, NY: Basic
Books.
Youdin, R. (2016). Psychology of aging 101. New York: Springer Publishing.

408

409